initial commit of ebook 22903HEADmain

1 files changed, 17734 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/22903.txt b/22903.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e519408
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22903.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17734 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Expedition to Borneo of H.M.S. Dido, by
+Henry Keppel and James Brooke
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Expedition to Borneo of H.M.S. Dido
+       For the Suppression of Piracy
+
+Author: Henry Keppel
+        James Brooke
+
+Release Date: October 6, 2007 [EBook #22903]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK EXPEDITION TO BORNEO ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This book was
+produced from scanned images of public domain material
+from the Google Print project.)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                    THE EXPEDITION TO BORNEO
+
+                               OF
+
+                         H. M. S. DIDO
+
+                              FOR
+
+                   THE SUPPRESSION OF PIRACY:
+
+                       WITH EXTRACTS FROM
+
+         THE JOURNAL OF JAMES BROOKE, ESQ., OF SARAWAK,
+
+       (Now Agent for the British Government in Borneo).
+
+
+
+                               BY
+
+              CAPTAIN THE HON. HENRY KEPPEL, R. N.
+
+
+
+
+
+                           NEW YORK:
+
+                 HARPER & BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS,
+
+                        82 CLIFF STREET.
+
+                             1846.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TO
+
+THE EARL OF ALBEMARLE.
+
+
+My dear Father,
+
+You could scarcely have anticipated, from my profession, the dedication
+of a book in testimony of my gratitude and affection; but, having had
+the good fortune to acquire the friendship of Mr. James Brooke, and
+to be intrusted by him with a narrative of his extraordinary career
+in that part of the world where the services of the ship I commanded
+were required, I am not without a hope that the accompanying pages
+may be found worthy of your approval, and not altogether uninteresting
+to my country.
+
+
+I am, my dear father,
+
+Your affectionate son,
+
+Henry Keppel.
+
+Droxford, January, 1846.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION.
+
+
+The visit of her majesty's ship Dido to Borneo, and her services
+against the pirates, occupy comparatively so small a portion of this
+volume, that some excuse may be necessary for its leading title.
+
+It was only by undertaking to make the account of them part of the
+narrative, that I could prevail upon my friend Mr. Brooke to intrust
+me with his Journal for any public object; and when I looked at his
+novel and important position as a ruler in Borneo, and was aware how
+much of European curiosity was attached to it, I felt it impossible
+not to consent to an arrangement which should enable me to trace the
+remarkable career through which he had reached that elevation. I hope,
+therefore, to be considered as having conquered my own disinclination
+to be the relater of events in which I was concerned, in order to
+overcome the scruples which he entertained against being the author
+of the autobiographical sketch, embracing so singular a portion of
+his life, which I have extracted from the rough notes confided to me.
+
+That his diffidence in this respect was groundless will, I trust,
+be apparent from these  pages, however indifferently I may have
+executed my unusual task, during a long homeward sea-voyage; and,
+from the growing interest which has arisen throughout the country for
+intelligence on the subject of Borneo and the adjacent archipelago,
+I venture also to indulge the belief that the general information
+will be deemed no unfit adjunct to the story of personal adventure.
+
+
+
+
+
+ADVERTISEMENT TO THE SECOND EDITION.
+
+
+The text of this edition has been carefully revised, and has undergone
+numerous verbal alterations; some portions of it have been transposed,
+and a few additions have been made to the work. [In the American
+edition, a few pages of matter, of no interest to American readers,
+have been omitted from the Appendix.]
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+The Chinese War having terminated, Captain Keppel in H.M.S. Dido
+appointed to command of the Straits station.--Meeting with
+Mr. Brooke.--Sketch of his life.--Mr. Brooke's outward voyage in the
+Royalist.--Touch at Singapore.--Arrival off the coast of Borneo.--Land
+at the island of Talang Talang.--Intercourse with the Bandar   _Page_ 1
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+Progress: observations.--Description of the coast of Borneo.--Account,
+&c. of a Pangeran.--Arrival at Sarawak.--Meetings with Rajah Muda
+Hassim, and conversations.--The Town.--Interchange of visits and
+presents.--Excursion to Dyak tribes.--Resources and commercial
+products   14
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+Second Cruise: up the River Lunda.--The Sibnowan Dyaks.--Their
+Town of Tungong.--Their Physical Proportions, and Words of their
+Language.--Their Customs.--Skull-trophies.--Religious Ceremonies
+and Opinions.--Their Ornaments.--Appearance of both Sexes.--Dress
+and Morals.--Missionary Prospects of Conversion, and Elevation in
+the Social Scale.--Government, Laws, and Punishments.--Dances.--Iron
+Manufacturing.--Chinese Settlement.--Excursion continued   32
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+Renewed intercourse with the Rajah.--Prospects of
+trade.--Ourang-outang, and other animals.--The two sorts of
+mias.--Description of the Rajah, his suite, and Panglimas, &c.--The
+character of the natives.--Leave Sarawak.--Songi Dyaks.--Visit Seriff
+Sahib.--Buyat tongue.--Attack by pirates.--Sail for Singapore   45
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+Summary of information obtained during this
+visit to Borneo.--Geographical and topographical
+observations.--Produce.--Various Dyak tribes.--Natural
+history.--Language.--Origin of Races.--Sail from
+Singapore.--Celebes.--Face of the country.--Waterfall   59
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+Dain Matara, the Bugis.--Excursions in Celebes.--Dispute
+with the Rajah's son-in-law.--Baboon shot.--Appearance of the
+country.--Visit the Resident.--Barometrical observations.--The
+Bugis.--Geography.--Coral reefs.--Visit the Rana of
+Lamatte.--Population and products of the country   72
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+Mr. Brooke's second visit to Sarawak.--The civil war.--Receives a
+present of a Dyak boy.--Excursion to the seat of war.--Notices of
+rivers, and settlements on their banks.--Deaths and burials.--Reasons
+for and against remaining at Sarawak.--Dyak visitors.--Council of
+war.--Why side with the Rajah.--Mode of constructing forts.--State
+of enemy's and Rajah's forces.--Conduct of the war   87
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+Appearance of the country.--Progress of the rebel war.--Character of
+the Sow and Singe Dyaks.--Their belief in augury.--Ruinous effects of
+protracted warfare.--Cowardice and boasting of the Malays.--Council
+of war.--Refuse to attack the enemy's forts.--Rebels propose to
+treat.--The Malays oppose.--Set out to attack the rebels, but
+frustrated by our allies.--Assailed by the rebels.--Put them to
+flight.--Treat with them.--They surrender.--Intercede with the Rajah
+for their lives.--Renewed treachery of the Malays   100
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+Retrospect of Mr. Brooke's proceedings and prospects.--Visit of
+a pirate fleet.--Intercourse with the chief leaders, and other
+characteristic incidents.--War dances.--Use of opium.--Story of
+Si Tundo.--Preparations for trading.--Conditions of the cession of
+Sarawak   119
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+Obstacles in the way of coming to a satisfactory conclusion with Muda
+Hassim.--The law of force and reprisal considered.--Capabilities of
+Sarawak.--Account of Sarebus and Sakarran pirates.--Excursion up the
+river.--Visit to the Singe Dyaks.--Description of Mr. Brooke's house at
+Sarawak.--Circumstances relating to the wreck off Borneo Proper   135
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+Return of the Royalist from Borneo Proper with intelligence of the
+sufferers from the wreck of the Sultana.--Effect of the arrival
+of the Diana on the negotiations for their release.--Outrage and
+oppression of Macota.--Fate of the Sultana and her crew.--Mr. Brooke
+made Rajah of Sarawak.--Liberation of rebel prisoners.--State of Dyak
+tribes.--Court of justice opened.--Dyak burials, and respect for the
+dead.--Malay cunning and treachery   151
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+Reflections on the new year.--The plundered village, and other
+wrongs.--Means for their suppression.--The new government proceeds
+to act.--The constitution.--Preparations for an expedition
+against the Sea Dyaks.--Form of a treaty.--Wreck of the Viscount
+Melbourne.--Administration of justice.--Difficulties and dangers.--Dyak
+troubles.--Views and arrangements of the Chinese.--Judicial
+forms.--Wrongs and sufferings of the Lundus   164
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+Ascent of the left-hand river to the Stabad.--Remarkable cave in
+the Tubbang.--Diamond works at Suntah.--Return.--Infested by Dyak
+pirates.--A meeting of prahus, and fight.--Seriff Sahib's treatment of
+the Suntah Dyaks.--Expedition against the Singe.--Their invasion of
+the Sigos, and taking heads.--The triumph over these trophies.--Arms
+and modes of war.--Hot and cold council-houses.--Ceremonies in the
+installation of the Orang Kaya Steer Rajah.--Meeting of various Dyak
+tribes.--Hostile plans of Seriff Sahib, and their issue.--Resolves
+to proceed to Borneo Proper   183
+
+CHAPTER XIV.
+
+Visit of Captain Elliott.--Mr. Brooke sails for Borneo
+Proper.--Arrival.--Visited by leading men.--Condition of
+the country.--Reception by the Sultan.--Objects in view.--The
+different chiefs, and communications with them.--The Sultan and
+his Pangerans.--Objects of the visit accomplished.--Return to
+Sarawak.--Ceremonies of the cession.--Sail for Singapore   199
+
+CHAPTER XV.
+
+Captain Keppel's voyage in the Dido with Mr. Brooke to Sarawak.--Chase
+of three piratical prahus.--Boat expedition.--Action with the
+pirates, and capture of a prahu.--Arrival at Sarawak.--Mr. Brooke's
+reception.--Captain Keppel and his officers visit the Rajah.--The
+palace and the audience.--Return royal visit to the Dido.--Mr. Brooke's
+residence and household.--Dr. Treacher's adventure with one of the
+ladies of Macota's harem.--Another boat affair with the pirates,
+and death of their chief   213
+
+CHAPTER XVI.
+
+The Rajah's letter to Captain Keppel, and his reply.--Prepares for
+an expedition against the Sarebus pirates.--Pleasure excursion up the
+river.--The Chinese settlement.--The Singe mountain.--Interior of the
+residences.--Dyak festival of Maugut.--Relics.--Sporting.--Return to
+Sarawak.--The expedition against Sarebus.--State and number of the
+assailing force.--Ascent of the river.--Beauty of the scenery   228
+
+CHAPTER XVII.
+
+Ascent of the river to Paddi.--Town taken and burnt.--Narrow
+escape of a reinforcement of friendly Dyaks.--Night-attack by the
+pirates.--Conference: they submit.--Proceed against Pakoo.--Dyak
+treatment of dead enemies.--Destruction of Pakoo, and submission
+of the pirates.--Advance upon Rembas.--The town destroyed: the
+inhabitants yield.--Satisfactory effects of the expedition.--Death
+of Dr. Simpson.--Triumphant return to Sarawak   242
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.
+
+Captain Keppel sails for China.--Calcutta.--The Dido ordered to
+Borneo again.--Arrival at Sarawak.--Effect of her presence at
+Sarawak.--Great improvements visible.--Atrocities of the Sakarran
+pirates.--Mr. Brooke's letter.--Captain Sir E. Belcher's previous
+visit to Sarawak in the Samarang.--Coal found.--Second letter from the
+Rajah Muda Hassim.--Expedition against the Sakarran pirates.--Patusen
+destroyed.--Macota remembered, and his retreat burnt.--Further
+fighting, and advance.--Ludicrous midnight alarm   257
+
+CHAPTER XIX.
+
+Seriff Muller's town sacked.--Ascend the river in pursuit of
+the enemy.--Gallant exploit of Lieutenant Wade.--His death and
+funeral.--Interesting anecdote of him.--Ascend the Sakarran
+branch.--Native boats hemmed in by pirates, and their crews
+slaughtered to a man.--Karangan destroyed.--Captain Sir E. Belcher
+arrives in the Samarang's boats.--Return to Sarawak.--New expedition
+against Seriff Sahib and Jaffer.--Macota captured.--Flight of Seriff
+Sahib.--Conferences.--Seriff Jaffer deposed.--Mr. Brooke's speech in
+the native tongue.--End of the expedition, and return to Sarawak.--The
+Dido sails for England   274
+
+CHAPTER XX.
+
+Later portion of Mr. Brooke's Journal.--Departure of Captain Keppel,
+and arrival of Sir E. Belcher.--Mr. Brooke proceeds, with Muda
+Hassim, in the Samarang to Borneo.--Labuan examined.--Returns to
+Sarawak.--Visit of Lingire, a Sarebus chief.--The Dyaks of Tumma
+and Bandar Cassim.--Meets an assembly of Malays and Dyaks.--Arrival
+of Lingi, as a deputation from the Sakarran chiefs.--The Malay
+character.--Excursion up the country.--Miserable effects of excess
+in opium-smoking.--Picturesque situation of the Sow village of
+Ra-at.--Nawang.--Feast at Ra-at.--Returns home.--Conferences with
+Dyak chiefs   290
+
+CHAPTER XXI.
+
+Mr. Brooke's memorandum on the piracy of the Malayan Archipelago.--The
+measures requisite for its suppression, and for the consequent
+extension of British commerce in that important locality   302
+
+CHAPTER XXII.
+
+Arrival of Captain Bethune and Mr. Wise.--Mr. Brooke appointed
+her Majesty's Agent in Borneo.--Sails for Borneo Proper.--Muda
+Hassim's measures for the suppression of piracy.--Defied by
+Seriff Houseman.--Audience of the Sultan, Muda Hassim, and the
+Pangerans.--Visit to Labuan.--Comparative eligibility of Labuan and
+Balambangan for settlement.--Coal discovered in Labuan.--Mr. Brooke
+goes to Singapore and visits Admiral Sir T. Cochrane.--The
+upas-tree.--Proceeds with the Admiral to Borneo Proper.--Punishment
+of Pangeran Usop.--The battle of Malludu.--Seriff Houseman obliged
+to fly.--Visit to Balambangan.--Mr. Brooke parts with the Admiral,
+and goes to Borneo Proper.--An attempt of Pangeran Usop defeated.--His
+flight, and pursuit by Pangeran Budrudeen.--Triumphant reception of
+Mr. Brooke in Borneo.--Returns to Sarawak   314
+
+CHAPTER XXIII.
+
+Borneo, its geographical bounds and leading divisions.--British
+settlements in 1775.--The province of Sarawak formally ceded by the
+sultan in perpetuity to Mr. Brooke its present ruler.--General view
+of the Dyaks, the aborigines of Borneo.--The Dyaks of Sarawak, and
+adjoining tribes; their past oppression and present position   329
+
+CHAPTER XXIV.
+
+Proposed British settlement on the northwest coast of Borneo, and
+occupation of the island of Labuan.--Governor Crawfurd's opinions
+thereon   345
+
+Concluding Observations   355
+
+Postscript to Second Edition   359
+
+APPENDIX.
+
+I. Natural History. Mr. Brooke's report on the Mias   365
+
+II. Philology   370
+
+III. Proposed Exploring Expedition to the Asiatic Archipelago, by
+James Brooke, Esq. 1838   373
+
+IV. Sketch of Borneo, or Pulo Kalamantan, by J. Hunt, Esq.   381
+
+V. Extracts from the late Mr. Williamson's Journal   409
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+EXPEDITION TO BORNEO.
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+
+    The Chinese War having terminated, Captain Keppel in H.M.S. Dido
+    appointed to command of the Straits station.--Meeting with
+    Mr. Brooke.--Sketch of his life.--Mr. Brooke's outward voyage
+    in the Royalist.--Touch at Singapore.--Arrival off the coast of
+    Borneo.--Land at the island of Talang Talang.--Intercourse with
+    the Bandar.
+
+
+At the conclusion of the Chinese war, the commander-in-chief,
+Vice-Admiral Sir William Parker, ordered the Dido to the Malacca
+Straits, a station in which was included the island of Borneo;
+our principal duties being the protection of trade, and suppression
+of piracy.
+
+In the month of March, 1843, while at Pinang, I received intimation
+from the governor of various daring acts of piracy having been
+committed near the Borneon coast on some vessels trading to
+Singapore. I proceeded to that port; and, while undergoing a partial
+refit, made the acquaintance of Mr. Brooke, who accepted my invitation
+to return to Sarawak in the Dido; and I could not have visited Borneo
+with a more agreeable or intelligent companion.
+
+The objects of Mr. Brooke in leaving England, the reasons which induced
+him to settle at Sarawak, and the circumstances which have led him to
+take so deep an interest in promoting the civilization and improving
+the condition of the singular people whom he has adopted, form indeed
+a story very unlike the common course of events in modern times.
+
+But before illustrating these circumstances from his own journals,
+it may be acceptable to say a few words respecting the individual
+himself, and his extraordinary career. I am indebted to a mutual
+friend, acquainted with him from early years, for the following brief
+but interesting outline of his life; and have only to premise, that
+Mr. Brooke is the lineal representative of Sir Robert Vyner, baronet,
+and lord mayor of London in the reign of Charles II.; Sir Robert had
+but one child, a son, Sir George Vyner, who died childless, and his
+estate passed to his heir-at-law, Edith, his father's eldest sister,
+whose lineal descendant is our friend. Sir Robert was renowned for
+his loyalty to his sovereign, to whom he devoted his wealth, and to
+whose memory he raised a monument.
+
+"Mr. Brooke was the second, and is now the only surviving son of the
+late Thomas Brooke, Esq., of the civil service of the East India
+Company; was born on the 29th April, 1803; went out to India as
+a cadet, where he held advantageous situations, and distinguished
+himself by his gallantry in the Burmese war. He was shot through
+the body in an action with the Burmese, received the thanks of the
+government, and returned to England for the recovery of his prostrated
+strength. He resumed his station, but shortly afterward relinquished
+the service, and in search of health and amusement left Calcutta for
+China in 1830. In this voyage, while going up the China seas, he saw
+for the first time the islands of the Asiatic Archipelago--islands
+of vast importance and unparalleled beauty--lying neglected, and
+almost unknown. He inquired and read, and became convinced that
+Borneo and the Eastern Isles afforded an open field for enterprise
+and research. To carry to the Malay races, so long the terror of the
+European merchant-vessels, the blessings of civilization, to suppress
+piracy, and extirpate the slave-trade, became his humane and generous
+objects; and from that hour the energies of his powerful mind were
+devoted to this one pursuit. Often foiled, often disappointed, but
+animated with a perseverance and enthusiasm which defied all obstacle,
+he was not until 1838 enabled to set sail from England on his darling
+project. The intervening years had been devoted to preparation and
+inquiry; a year spent in the Mediterranean had tested his vessel, the
+Royalist, and his crew; and so completely had he studied his subject
+and calculated on contingencies, that the least sanguine of his friends
+felt as he left the shore, hazardous and unusual as the enterprise
+appeared to be, that he had omitted nothing to insure a successful
+issue. 'I go,' said he, 'to awake the spirit of slumbering philanthropy
+with regard to these islands; to carry Sir Stamford Raffles' views
+in Java over the whole archipelago. Fortune and life I give freely;
+and if I fail in the attempt, I shall not have lived wholly in vain.'
+
+"In the admiration I feel for him, I may farther be permitted to
+add, that if any man ever possessed in himself the resources and
+means by which such noble designs were to be achieved, that man was
+James Brooke! Of the most enlarged views; truthful and generous;
+quick to acquire and appreciate; excelling in every manly sport and
+exercise; elegant and accomplished; ever accessible; and above all,
+prompt and determined to redress injury and relieve misfortune, he
+was of all others the best qualified to impress the native mind with
+the highest opinion of the English character. How he has succeeded,
+the influence he has acquired, and the benefits he has conferred,
+his own uncolored narrative, contained in the following pages, best
+declares, and impresses on the world a lasting lesson of the good
+that attends individual enterprise, when well directed, of which
+every Englishman may feel justly proud."
+
+Such is the sketch of Mr. Brooke by one well competent to judge of
+that to which he bears witness. In pursuance of the mission thus
+eloquently and truly described, that gentleman left his native shores
+in the year 1838, in his yacht the Royalist schooner, of 142 tons,
+belonging to the Royal Yacht Squadron, with a crew of upward of twenty
+men. His general views were distinct and certain; but the details
+into which they shaped themselves have been so entirely guided by
+unforeseen occurrences, that it is necessary to look to his first
+visit to Borneo for their explanation; and in order to do so, I must
+refer to his private journal, which he kindly confided to me, after I
+had in vain tried to persuade him to take upon himself the publication
+of its contents, so rich in new and interesting intelligence.
+
+
+
+
+
+EXTRACTS FROM Mr. BROOKE'S JOURNAL.
+
+"I had for some years turned my mind to the geography of the
+Indian Archipelago, and cherished an ardent desire to become better
+acquainted with a country combining the richest natural productions
+with an unrivaled degree of luxuriant beauty. Circumstances for a
+time prevented my entering on this field for enterprise and research;
+and when the barriers were removed, I had many preparations to make
+and some difficulties to overcome.
+
+"In an expedition conducted by government, the line of discipline is
+so distinctly understood, and its infringement so strictly punished,
+that small hazard is incurred of any inconvenience arising from such
+a source. With an individual, however, there is no such assurance,
+for he cannot appeal to the articles of war; and the ordinary legal
+enactments for the protection of the mariner will not enable him to
+effect objects so far removed beyond the scope of the laws. I was
+fully aware that many would go, but that few might stay; for while a
+voyage of discovery _in prospectu_ possesses great attractions for the
+imagination, the hardship, danger, and thousand other rude realities,
+soon dissipate the illusion, and leave the aspirant longing for that
+home he should never have quitted. In like manner, seamen can be
+procured in abundance, but cannot be kept from desertion whenever any
+matter goes wrong; and the total previous ignorance of their characters
+and dispositions renders this more likely, as the admission of one
+'black sheep' goes far to taint the entire crew.
+
+"These considerations fully convinced me that it was necessary to
+form _men_ to my purpose, and, by a line of steady and kind conduct,
+to raise up a personal regard for myself and attachment for the
+vessel, which could not be expected in ordinary cases. In pursuance
+of this object, I was nearly three years in preparing a crew to my
+mind, and gradually moulding them to consider the hardest fate or
+misfortune under my command as better than the ordinary service in a
+merchant-vessel. How far I have succeeded remains yet to be proved;
+but I cannot help hoping that I have raised the character of many,
+and have rendered all happy and contented since they have been with
+me; and certain am I that no men can do their duty more cheerfully
+or willingly than the crew of the Royalist.
+
+"I may pass over in silence my motives for undertaking so long and
+arduous a voyage; and it will be sufficient to say, that I have been
+firmly convinced of its beneficial tendency in adding to knowledge,
+increasing trade, and spreading Christianity. The prospectus
+of the undertaking was published in the _Geographical Journal_,
+vol. viii. part iii., of 1838, when my preparations for sea were
+nearly complete. I had previously avoided making any public mention
+of my intentions, for praise before performance is disgusting; and
+I knew I should be exposed to prying curiosity, desirous of knowing
+what I did not know myself.
+
+"On the 27th October, 1838, the Royalist left the river; and, after
+a succession of heavy gales, finally quitted the land on the 16th
+December. I may here state some farther particulars, to enable my
+readers to become better acquainted with her and her equipment. The
+Royalist, as already noticed, belonged to the Royal Yacht Squadron,
+which in foreign ports admits her to the same privileges as a
+man-of-war, and enables her to carry a white ensign. She sails fast,
+is conveniently fitted up, is armed with six six-pounders, a number
+of swivels, and small arms of all sorts, carries four boats, and
+provisions for four months. Her principal defect is being too sharp
+in the floor, which, in case of taking the ground, greatly increases
+the risk; but I comfort myself with the reflection that a knowledge of
+this will lead to redoubled precaution to prevent such a disaster. She
+is withal a good sea-boat, and as well calculated for the service as
+could be desired.
+
+"Most of her hands had been with me for three years or upward,
+and the rest were highly recommended. They are, almost without
+exception, young, able-bodied, and active--fit in all respects for
+enduring hardship and privation, or the more dangerous reverse of
+self-indulgence, and willing to follow the fortunes of the Royalist and
+her commander through all the various shades of good or evil fortune
+which may betide. A fine, though slow passage took us to Rio Janeiro,
+which presents features of natural beauty rarely equaled. The weather
+during our stay was hot in the extreme, and very wet, which marred,
+in some degree, the satisfaction I should otherwise have enjoyed in
+wandering about this picturesque country. I passed ten days, however,
+very agreeably, and departed with some regret from this brief visit to
+America and from my friends (if they will so allow me to call them)
+on board H.M.S. Calliope. I must not omit to mention that, during my
+stay, I visited a slaver, three of which (prizes to our men-of-war)
+lay in the harbor. It is a most loathsome and disgusting sight. Men,
+women, and children--the aged and the infant--crowded into a space as
+confined as the pens in Smithfield, not, however, to be released by
+death at the close of the day, but to linger, diseased and festering,
+for weeks or months, and then to be discharged into perpetual and
+hopeless slavery. I wish I could say that our measures tended toward
+the abolition of this detestable traffic; but from all that I could
+learn and observe, I am forced to confess that the exertions made to
+abolish slavery are of no avail in this country, and never will be
+till harsher means are resorted to.
+
+"There are points of view in which this traffic wears a more cheering
+aspect; for any one comparing the puny Portuguese or the bastard
+Brazilian with the athletic negro, cannot but allow that the ordinary
+changes and chances of time will place this fine country in the hands
+of the latter race. The negro will be fit to cultivate the soil, and
+will thrive beneath the tropical sun of the Brazils. The enfeebled
+white man grows more enfeebled and more degenerate with each succeeding
+generation, and languishes in a clime which nature never designed him
+to inhabit. The time will come when the debased and suffering negroes
+shall possess this fertile land, and when some share of justice shall
+be awarded to their cheerful tempers and ardent minds.
+
+"Quitting Rio on the 9th, we cruised for a day or two with
+H.M.S. Calliope and Grecian; and on the 11th, parting company,
+prosecuted our voyage for the Cape of Good Hope."
+
+The next notice runs thus:--"The aspect of Tristan d'Acunha is bold
+even to grandeur. The peak, towering upward of eight thousand feet
+above the sea, is inferior only to Teneriffe, and the precipitous
+cliffs overhanging the beach are a fitting base for such a mountain. I
+regretted not being able to examine this island for many reasons, but
+principally, perhaps, on account of the birds of the South Atlantic
+I had hoped to collect there, many of which are so often seen by
+voyagers, yet so little known and so vaguely described.
+
+"On the 29th March, after being detained a fortnight [at the Cape of
+Good Hope] by such weather as no one could regret, we sailed again
+in a southeaster, and after a passage of six weeks reached Java Head.
+
+"I had been suffering for some time under a severe indisposition,
+and consequently hailed the termination of our voyage with double
+satisfaction, for I greatly required rest and quiet--two things
+impossible to be had on ship-board. From Java Head we glided slowly
+through Prince's Strait, and coasting along the island, dropped our
+anchor in Anjer Roads. The scenery of this coast is extremely lovely,
+and comprises every feature which can heighten the picturesque; noble
+mountains, a lake-like sea, and deeply indented coast-line, rocks,
+islets, and, above all, a vegetation so luxuriant that the eye never
+wearies with gazing on its matchless tints. Anjer combines all these
+beauties, and possesses the incalculable advantage of being within a
+moderate ride of the refreshing coolness of the hills. We here procured
+water and provisions in abundance, being daily visited by crowds of
+canoes filled with necessaries or curiosities. Fowls, eggs, yams,
+cocoa-nuts, and sweet potatoes, were mixed with monkeys of various
+sorts, paroquets, squirrels, shells, and similar temptations on the
+stranger's purse or wardrobe. Great was the bartering for old clothes,
+handkerchiefs, and hats; and great the number of useless and noisy
+animals we received in exchange. Great, too, was the merriment aboard,
+and the excitement when the canoes first came. The transition from
+the monotony of a sea-life to the loquacious bustle of barter with
+a half-civilized people is so sudden, that the mind at once feels in
+a strange land, and the commonest productions proclaim the luxuriant
+climes of the tropics. Until this impression is made, we hardly know
+why we have been sailing onward for four months past, so quiet and
+unvarying is the daily tenor of a life aboard ship.
+
+"_1st June, Singapore._--On reaching Singapore I was most hospitably
+received by the kind inhabitants, and took up my abode with
+Mr. Scott. The quiet and repose of my present life, the gentle ride
+in the cool of the morning and evening drive after an early dinner,
+are already restoring my shattered strength, and I trust soon to be
+enabled to prosecute my farther undertaking. In the mean time the
+Royalist is undergoing a refit after her passage, and, like her owner,
+is daily improving in good looks.
+
+"I could say much of Singapore, for it is the pivot of the liberal
+system in the Archipelago, and owes its prosperity to the enlightened
+measures of Sir Stamford Raffles. The situation is happily chosen,
+the climate healthy, the commerce unshackled, and taxation light; and
+these advantages have attracted the vessels of all the neighboring
+nations to bring their produce to this market in order to exchange
+it for the manufactures of England.
+
+"The extent of the island is about 27 miles by 11 broad. The town
+of Singapore stands on the south side, facing the shores of Battam,
+and is intersected by a salt-water stream, which separates the native
+town from the pleasant residences of the European inhabitants; the
+latter stretch along the beach, and cover a space which extends to the
+foot of a slight eminence, on which stands the governor's house. Off
+the town lie the shipping of various countries, presenting a most
+picturesque and striking appearance. The man-of-war, the steamer,
+and the merchant-vessels of the civilized world, contrast with the
+huge, misshapen, and bedizened arks of China! The awkward prahus
+of the Bugis are surrounded by the light boats of the island. The
+semi-civilized Cochin-Chinese, with their vessels of antiquated
+European construction, deserve attention from this important step
+toward improvement; and the rude prahus of some parts of Borneo claim
+it from their exhibiting the early dawn of maritime adventure.
+
+"_27th July._--After various causes of delay I sailed on this day from
+Singapore. When I contrast my state of health at my arrival with what
+it now is, I may well be thankful for the improvement. Every kindness
+and hospitality has been shown me.
+
+"On Saturday at noon we got under weigh with a light breeze, and
+stood down the Strait on our way to Borneo.
+
+"_28th._--In the morning we were well out in the China Sea, running
+six knots per hour, N. 3/4 E. Lines of discolored water were seen
+about us, and about 11 A.M. we entered a field some two miles long
+and 400 yards wide. The consistence of this dirty mass was that of
+pea-soup, which it likewise resembled in color; and I doubt not the
+white water of the China Sea (vide _Nautical Magazine_) is referable
+to this appearance seen in the night, as may the report of rocks,
+&c. The Malays on board called it 'sara,' and declared it to come from
+the rivers. On examination it appeared, when magnified, somewhat like
+a grain of barley or corn. The particles were extremely minute, soft,
+and, when rubbed between the fingers, emitted a strong smell like
+paint-oil; a potent odor arose while passing through the thick patch.
+
+"It may not be superfluous to recount here the preparations I have
+made for this trip to Borneo, or my intentions when I get there. Borneo
+Proper, once the seat of piracy, which few vessels could approach with
+safety, is now under the sway of the Rajah Muda Hassim. The character
+given this rajah by many persons who know and have traded with him is
+good, and he is spoken of as generous and humane, and greatly inclined
+to the English. These reasons have induced me to abandon my intention
+of proceeding direct to Malludu Bay, and during the season of the
+southwest monsoon to confine myself principally to the northwest
+coast. Muda Hassim being at present reported to be at Sarawak, I
+propose, after taking a running sketch of the coast from Tanjong Api,
+to enter the river of that name, and proceed as far as the town.
+
+"I believe I have availed myself of every means within my reach
+to render my visit agreeable to the rajah. I carry with me many
+presents which are reported to be to his liking; gaudy silks of
+Surat, scarlet cloth, stamped velvet, gunpowder, &c., beside a large
+quantity of confectionery and sweets, such as preserved ginger, jams,
+dates, syrups, and to wind up all, a huge box of China toys for his
+children! I have likewise taken coarse nankeen to the amount of 100_l._
+value, as the best circulating medium in the country. Beside the
+above mentioned preparations, I carry letters from the government of
+Singapore, to state, as far as can be done, the objects of my voyage,
+and to caution the rajah to take every care of my safety and that
+of my men. The Board of Commerce have at the same time entrusted me
+with a letter and present to him, to thank him for his humanity to
+the crew of an English vessel wrecked on this coast. The story, as
+I had it from the parties shipwrecked, is highly creditable to his
+humanity. The vessel, called the Napoleon, was wrecked on the bar of
+Sarawak river in the northeast monsoon. The people were saved with
+difficulty, and remained in the jungle, where they were after a time
+discovered by some Malays. Muda Hassim, on receiving intelligence of
+this, sent down and brought them to his town, collected all that he
+could recover from the wreck, clothed them handsomely, and fed them
+well for several months, and, on an opportunity arriving, sent them
+back to Singapore free of expense.
+
+"At the same time, however, that I have prepared to meet the natives
+as friends, I have not neglected to strengthen my crew, in case I
+should find them hostile. Eight stout men of the Ourang Laut, or men of
+the sea (Malays), have been added to the force. They are an athletic
+race, cheerful and willing; and though not seaman in our sense of the
+term, yet well calculated for this expedition. They pull a good oar,
+and are invaluable in saving the Europeans the exposure consequent
+to wooding and watering. They possess, likewise, the knowledge of
+the jungle and its resources, and two of them have before been to
+Sarawak and along the coast. Beside these, a young gentleman named
+Williamson accompanies me as interpreter; and I have fortunately met
+with a medical gentleman, Mr. Westermann, a Dane, who is surgeon for
+this voyage, Mr. Williams having left me at Singapore. With these
+arrangements I look without apprehension to the power of the Malays;
+and without relaxing in measures of the strictest vigilance, I shall
+never sleep less soundly when it comes to my turn so to do.
+
+"_August 1st._--I am, then, at length, anchored off the coast of
+Borneo! not under very pleasant circumstances, for the night is pitchy
+dark, with thunder, lightning, rain, and squalls of wind.
+
+"_2d._--Squally bad night. This morning, the clouds clearing away, was
+delightful, and offered for our view the majestic scenery of Borneo. At
+nine got under weigh, and ran in on an east-by-south course 4 1/2 or
+5 miles toward Tanjong Api. Came to an anchor about five miles from
+the land, and dispatched the boat to take sights ashore, in order to
+form a base-line for triangulation. The scenery may really be called
+majestic. The low and wooded coast about Tanjong Api is backed by
+a mountain called Gunong [1] Palo, some 2000 feet in height, which
+slopes down behind the point and terminates in a number of hummocks,
+showing from a distance like islands.
+
+"The coast, unknown, and represented to abound in shoals and reefs, is
+the harbor for pirates of every description. Here, every man's hand is
+raised against his brother man; and here sometimes the climate wars
+upon the excitable European, and lays many a white face and gallant
+heart low on the distant strand.
+
+"_3d._--Beating between Points Api and Datu. The bay, as far as we
+have seen, is free from danger; the beach is lined by a feathery row
+of beautiful casuarinas, and behind is a tangled jungle, without fine
+timber; game is plentiful, from the traces we saw on the sand; hogs in
+great numbers, troops of monkeys, and the print of an animal with cleft
+hoofs, either a large deer, tapir, or cow. We saw no game save a tribe
+of monkeys, one of which, a female, I shot, and another quite young,
+which we managed to capture alive. The captive, though the young of
+the black monkey, is grayish, with the exception of his extremities,
+and a stripe of black down his back and tail. Though very young, he
+has already taken food, and we have some hope of preserving his life.
+
+"We witnessed, at the same time, an extraordinary and fatal leap
+made by one of these monkeys. Alarmed by our approach, he sprang
+from the summit of a high tree at the branch of one lower, and at
+some distance. He leaped short, and came clattering down some sixty
+or seventy feet amid the jungle. We were unable to penetrate to the
+spot on account of a deep swamp to ascertain his fate.
+
+"A rivulet flows into the sea not far from where we landed; the water
+is sweet, and of that clear brown color so common in Ireland. This
+coast is evidently the haunt of native prahus, whether piratical or
+other. Prints of men's feet were numerous and fresh, and traces of
+huts, fires, and parts of boats, some of them ornamented after their
+rude fashion. A long pull of five miles closed the day.
+
+"_Sunday, 4th._--Performed divine service myself! manfully overcoming
+that horror which I have to the sound of my own voice before an
+audience. In the evening landed again more to the westward. Shore
+skirted by rocks; timber noble, and the forest clear of brushwood,
+enabling us to penetrate with ease as far as caution permitted. Traces
+of wild beasts numerous and recent, but none discovered. Fresh-water
+streams, colored as yesterday, and the trail of an alligator from
+one of them to the sea. This dark forest, where the trees shoot up
+straight and tall, and are succeeded by generation after generation
+varying in stature, but struggling upward, strikes the imagination
+with pictures trite yet true. Here the hoary sage of a hundred years
+lies moldering beneath your foot, and there the young sapling shoots
+beneath the parent shade, and grows in form and fashion like the
+parent stem. The towering few, with heads raised above the general
+mass, can scarce be seen through the foliage of those beneath; but
+here and there the touch of time has cast his withering hand upon
+their leafy brow, and decay has begun his work upon the gigantic and
+unbending trunk. How trite and yet how true! It was thus I meditated
+in my walk. The foot of European, I said, has never touched where
+my foot now presses--seldom the native wanders here. Here I indeed
+behold nature fresh from the bosom of creation, unchanged by man, and
+stamped with the same impress she originally bore! Here I behold God's
+design when He formed this tropical land, and left its culture and
+improvement to the agency of man. The Creator's gift as yet neglected
+by the creature; and yet the time may be confidently looked for when
+the axe shall level the forest, and the plow turn the ground.
+
+"_6th._--Made sail this morning, and stood in for an island called
+Talang Talang, anchoring about eight miles distant, and sending a
+boat to take correct observations for a base-line.
+
+"Our party found Malays of Sarawak on the island, who were civil
+to them, and offered to conduct us up to-morrow, if we wanted their
+assistance. The pirates, both Illanuns and Dyaks, have been gone from
+the bay but a few days; the former seaward, the latter up the rivers.
+
+"_7th._--Morning calm. In the afternoon got under weigh, and anchored
+again near the island of Talang Talang; the smaller one a conical
+hill bearing south. The Bandar [2] of the place came off in his canoe
+to make us welcome. He is a young man sent by Rajah Muda Hassim to
+collect turtles' eggs, which abound in this vicinity, especially
+on the larger island. The turtles are never molested, for fear of
+their deserting the spot; and their eggs, to the amount of five or
+six thousand, are collected every morning and forwarded at intervals
+to Sarawak as articles of food.
+
+"Our visitor was extremely polite, and, in common with other Asiatics,
+possessed the most pleasing and easy manners. He assured us of a
+welcome from his rajah, and, in their usual phrase, expressed himself
+that the rajah's heart would dilate in his bosom at the sight of
+us. His dress consisted of trowsers of green cloth, a dark green
+velvet jacket, and his sarong round his waist, thrown gracefully
+over two krisses, which he wore at his girdle. His attendants were
+poorly attired, and mostly unarmed--a proof of confidence in us, and
+a desire to assure us of his own friendly intentions. I treated him
+with sweetmeats and syrup, and of his own accord he took a glass of
+sherry, as did his chief attendant. On his departure he was presented
+with three yards of red cloth, and subsequently with a little tea
+and gunpowder."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+    Progress: observations.--Description of the coast of
+    Borneo.--Account, &c. of a Pangeran.--Arrival at Sarawak.--Meetings
+    with Rajah Muda Hassim, and conversations.--The Town.--Interchange
+    of visits and presents--Excursion to Dyak tribes.--Resources and
+    commercial products.
+
+
+I Resume Mr. Brooke's Journal, which requires no introductory remark.
+
+"_Aug. 8th._--A cloudy day, preventing us from taking our wished-for
+observations. I made a boat-excursion round the two islands. The north
+one is somewhat the larger; the southern one, running north and south,
+consists of two hills joined by a low and narrow neck of land. The
+water between these islands is deep, varying from seven to six fathoms;
+but between the smaller one and the main there are rocks and reefs;
+and though a passage may exist, it would not be advisable for a vessel
+to try it. These two small islands possess all the characteristic
+beauties of the clime. Formed of brown granite, with a speck of
+white sandy beach, and rising into hills covered with the noblest
+timber, wreathed with gigantic creepers. Cream-colored pigeons flit
+from tree to tree, and an eagle or two soared aloft watching their
+motions. Frigate-birds are numerous; and several sorts of smaller
+birds in the bush, difficult to get at. A small species of crocodile,
+or alligator, was likewise seen: but we were not fortunate enough
+to shoot one. The natives, when asked whether they were alligators,
+answered in the negative, calling them crocodiles. The tides appear
+to be as irregular as tides usually are in a deep bay. The rise and
+fall of the tide is about fifteen feet.
+
+"_9th._--After breakfast this morning took our sights, and at twelve
+o'clock the latitude of the smaller Talang Talang and the ship for
+a base-line. We yesterday took the same base-line by sound, firing
+alternately three guns from the vessel and three from the shore.
+
+"_10th._--A squall from the northward brought in a chopping sea in
+the morning. We were favored with a visit from another native party,
+but the chief was in every respect inferior to our first acquaintance,
+Bandar Dowat.
+
+"_11th Sunday._--Got under weigh early, after a night of torrents of
+rain. The breeze being directly out of Lundu river, I stood as near
+it as I could, and then bore away for Santobong, in order to reach
+Sarawak. From Gunong Gading the coast gradually declines, and forms
+two points. The first of these is Tanjong Bloungei, near which, on the
+right hand, runs a small river, of the same name. The next point is
+Tanjong Datu, which shows prominently from most parts of the bay. From
+Tanjong Datu the coast recedes into a bay, and again forms a low point,
+which I have christened Tanjong Lundu. The river Lundu disembogues
+itself into the bay just beyond the point of the same name; and the
+land on its far bank forms a bight of considerable depth. The Lundu is
+a barred river with but little water; though, judging from the opening,
+it is by no means small. Our pilots inform me at the same time,
+however, that within the bar there is considerable depth of water.
+
+"From the Sungei Lundu the land rises behind a wooded beach. The first
+hill, which may be said to form the larboard entrance of the river,
+is peaked, and called Sumpudin, and near it is a barred river of the
+same name. This range of high land runs some distance; and near its
+termination is the river Tamburgan. The low coast runs into another
+bight; and the first opening after the termination of the high land is
+the mouth of the river Seboo. Then comes another river; after which
+the land rises into hills, gradually larger, till they terminate in
+a round-topped hill, which forms the starboard entrance (going in)
+of the Sarawak river.
+
+"This river discharges itself at the east corner of the bay; and its
+locality is easily recognized by the highest peak of Santobong, which
+towers over its left bank, close to the entrance. A ship rounding Datu
+will readily perceive the high land of Santobong, showing like a large
+island, with another smaller island at its northern extremity. Both
+these, however, are attached to the main: and the northernmost point,
+called Tanjong Sipang, is distinguished by two peaks, like horns, one
+small, the other larger. Steer from Datu a direct course toward this
+high land, and when within a mile and a half or two miles of the shore,
+haul in along the land, as there is a sand nearly dry at low water on
+the starboard hand, stretching from the shore to the Saddle island,
+or Pulo Satang. The leading mark to clear this sand is to bring the
+hollow formed between the round hill at the right entrance of the
+Sarawak river and the next hill a-head, and as you approach the river's
+mouth, steer for a small island close to the shore, called Pulo Karra,
+or Monkey Island. These marks will conduct you over a shoal with 1/4
+three, the least depth at high water; you will then deepen your water,
+and keep away for the low green point on the far side of the river,
+edging gradually in; and when you are some distance from the opposite
+low point on the port hand, cross the bar in three fathom (high water)
+nearly in the center of the river. You must not, however, encroach on
+the larboard side. The bar is narrow, and just within is 7 and 7 1/2
+fathom, where we are at present anchored. The scenery is noble. On our
+left hand is the peak of Santobong, clothed in verdure nearly to the
+top; at his foot a luxuriant vegetation, fringed with the casuarina,
+and terminating in a beach of white sand. The right bank of the river
+is low, covered with pale green mangroves, with the round hill above
+mentioned just behind it. Santobong peak is 2050 feet, or thereabouts,
+by a rough trigonometrical measurement.
+
+"_12th._--Lay at anchor; took angles and observations, and shot in
+the evening without any success. There is a fine species of large
+pigeon of a gray color I was desirous of getting, but they were too
+cunning. Plenty of wild hogs were seen, but as shy as though they
+had been fired at all their lives. When the flood made, dispatched
+my gig for Sarawak, in order to acquaint the rajah of my arrival.
+
+"_13th._--Got under weigh, and in the second reach met our gig
+returning, followed by a large canoe, with a Pangeran of note to
+welcome us. We gave him a salute of five guns; while he, on his part,
+assured us of his rajah's pleasure at our arrival, and his own desire
+to be of service. With the Pangeran Oula Deen (or Illudeen, anglice
+Aladdin), came the rajah's chief writer, his shroff, a renegade Parsee,
+a war-captain, and some others, beside a score of followers. They
+made themselves much at home, ate and drank (the less scrupulous
+took wine), and conversed with ease and liveliness. No difference
+can be more marked than between the Hindoostani and the Malay. The
+former, though more self-possessed and polished, shows a constraint
+in manners and conversation, and you feel that his training has made
+him an artificial character. The Malay, on the contrary, concealing as
+well the feelings upper-most in his mind, is lively and intelligent,
+and his conversation is not confined to a dull routine of unmeaning
+compliments.
+
+"_August 13th._--The Pangeran spoke to me of some ship-captain who
+was notoriously cruel to his Lascars, and insolent in his language
+to the Malays. He was murdered by his crew, and the circumstance was
+related to me as though I was to approve the act! 'No Malay of Borneo
+(added the Pangeran) would injure a European, were he well treated, and
+in a manner suitable to his rank.' And I am sure such a declaration,
+in a limited sense, is consonant with all known principles of human
+nature, and the action of the passions and feelings.
+
+"Our Pangeran was quite the gentleman, and a manly gentleman too. His
+dress was a black velvet jacket, trimmed with gold lace, and trowsers
+of green cloth, with a red sarong and kris. He was the only one of
+the party armed while aboard. The rest were good, quiet men, and one
+or two of them very intelligent. They took their leave of us to get
+back to the town at sunset; but the ebb making, returned and stayed
+until twelve at night, when the tide turned in their favor. We had
+some difficulty in providing beds. The Pangeran slept in my cabin,
+and the rest were distributed about on couches or carpets.
+
+"_August 14th._--Got under weigh with the flood, and, favored by a
+light breeze, proceeded up the river nearly as far as the town. From
+the ignorance of the pilots, however, we grounded on a rock in the
+middle of the river in 1 1/2 fathom water, and it took us an hour
+to heave the vessel off by the stern. Had the tide been falling, we
+should have been in a critical situation, as the rock is dry at low
+water; but as it was, we received no damage. Shortly after getting
+off, several boats with assistance came from the place, dispatched
+in haste by the rajah. The intention was kind, though we needed not
+the aid. Being dark, we dropped anchor in 5 1/2 fathom, about 1 1/2
+mile from the town.
+
+"_15th._--Anchored abreast of Sarawak at seven, and saluted the rajah
+with twenty-one guns, which were returned with eighteen from his
+residence. The rajah's own brother, Pangeran Mahammed, then saluted
+the vessel with seven guns, which were returned. Having breakfasted,
+and previously intimated our intention, we pulled ashore to visit the
+great man. He received us in state, seated in his hall of audience,
+which outside is nothing but a large shed, erected on piles, but
+within decorated with taste. Chairs were placed on each side of the
+ruler, who occupied the head seat. Our party were placed on one hand;
+on the other sat his brother Mahammed, and Macota and some others of
+his principal chiefs, while immediately behind him his twelve younger
+brothers were seated.
+
+"The dress of Muda Hassim was simple, but of rich material; and most
+of the principal men were well, and even superbly, dressed. His
+countenance is plain, but intelligent and highly pleasing, and
+his manners perfectly elegant and easy. His reception was kind,
+and, I am given to understand, highly flattering. We sat, however,
+trammeled with the formality of state, and our conversation did not
+extend beyond kind inquiries and professions of friendship. We were
+presented with tobacco rolled up in a leaf, each about a foot long,
+and tea was served by attendants on their knees. A band played wild and
+not unmusical airs during the interview, and the crowd of attendants
+who surrounded us were seated in respectful silence. After a visit
+of half an hour, we rose and took our leave.
+
+"Sarawak is but an occasional residence of the Rajah Muda Hassim,
+and he is now detained here by a rebellion in the interior. On my
+inquiring whether _the war_ proceeded favorably, he replied that there
+was _no war_, but merely _some child's play among his subjects_. From
+what I hear, however, from other quarters, it is more serious than he
+represents it; and hints have been thrown out that the rajah wishes
+me to stay here _as a demonstration_ to intimidate the rebels. We
+shall see.
+
+"The town consists of a collection of mud huts erected on piles, and
+may contain about 1500 persons. The residences of the rajah and his
+fourteen brothers occupy the greater part, and their followers are
+the great majority of the population. When they depart for Borneo (or
+Bruni), the remainder must be a very small population, and apparently
+very poor. The river affords a few fish; but there is little sign
+of cultivation either of rice or other grain. Fowls and goats seem
+the only other means of subsistence of these people. The geological
+features of the country are easily described. Vast masses of granite
+rock are scattered along the coast; for instance, Gunong Poe, Gading,
+Santobong, &c. &c., which have evidently at some former period been
+detached islands. The spaces between these granite masses is now filled
+in with alluvial soil, intersected in every direction with rivers and
+streams, and on the low alluvial bank of the Sarawak river stands this
+little town. The distance from the sea is about twenty-five miles,
+through banks of mangrove and the Nepa palm, until approaching the
+town, where some jungle-trees first appear. The breadth is about 100
+yards, and the depth six fathoms at low water spring-tides in mid
+river opposite the rajah's residence. In some places below, the river
+is narrower, and the depths considerable, varying from three to seven
+fathoms. The prominent points, however, are shallow, and the rocks
+below the town lie on the starboard hand coming up just as the first
+houses appear in sight. The larboard hand should then be kept close
+aboard. Some other rocks are likewise reported; and in ascending the
+stream, though it be generally clear, a vessel _with_ or without a
+pilot should have a boat a-head sounding. In the evening I went ashore
+suddenly to pay a visit to the rajah, in order, if possible, to break
+through the bonds of formality. The great man soon made his appearance,
+and received us very well. We talked much of the state of his country
+and of ours; but he was very guarded when I spoke of the Dutch. 'He
+had no dealings whatever (he said) with them, and never allowed their
+vessels to come here, and therefore could not say what they were
+like.' We sat in easy and unreserved converse, out of hearing of the
+rest of the circle. He expressed great kindness to the English nation;
+and begged me to tell him _really_ which was the most powerful nation,
+England or Holland, or, as he significantly expressed it, which is the
+'cat, and which the rat?' I assured him that England was the mouser,
+though in this country Holland had most territory. We took our leave
+after he had intimated his intention of visiting us to-morrow morning.
+
+"_16th._--We were ready to receive the rajah after breakfast; but these
+affairs of state are not so easily managed. There came two diplomatists
+on board to know, in the first place, how many guns we intended to
+salute with, and, in the second, whether I would go ashore in my gig,
+in order to fetch the chief and his brother off. The latter request
+I might have refused, and in a diplomatic light it was inadmissible;
+but I readily conceded it, because, in the first place, it was less
+troublesome than a refusal; and, in the next, I cared not to bandy
+paltry etiquets with a semi-savage; and whatever pride might whisper,
+I could not, as an individual traveler, refuse an acknowledgment
+of the supremacy of a native prince. I went accordingly. The great
+man came on board, and we treated him with every distinction and
+respect. Much barbaric state was maintained as he quitted his own
+residence. His sword of state with a gold scabbard, his war-shield,
+jewel-hilted kris, and flowing _horse_-tails, were separately carried
+by the grand officers of state. Bursts of wild music announced his
+exit. His fourteen brothers and principal Pangerans surrounded him,
+and a number (formidable on the deck of a vessel) covered the rear. He
+stayed two hours and a half; ate and drank, and talked with great
+familiarity; till the oppressive heat of the crowded cabin caused
+me to wish them all to another place. However, he departed at last,
+under a salute of twenty-one guns; and the fatigues of the day were
+satisfactorily brought to a close. I afterward sent the rajah the
+presents I had brought for him, consisting of a silk sarong, some
+yards of red cloth and velvet, a pocket-pistol, scissors and knives,
+with tea, biscuits, sweetmeats, China playthings, &c. &c. A person
+coming here should be provided with a few articles of small importance
+to satisfy the crowd of inferior chiefs. Soap, small parcels of tea,
+lucifers, writing-paper, a large stock of cigars, biscuits, and knives,
+are the best; for, without being great beggars, they seem greatly
+to value these trifles, even in the smallest quantity. The higher
+class inquired frequently for scents; and for the great men I know no
+present which would be more acceptable than a small pier-glass. All
+ranks seemed greatly pleased with those aboard; and some of the lower
+orders, quite ignorant of the reflection, were continually laughing,
+moving, sitting, and rising, to observe the corresponding effect.
+
+"_18th._--In the morning I intimated my intention of paying a visit to
+the Pangeran Muda Mahammed; and being apprised of his readiness to see
+us, I went ashore to his house. He was not, however, in the room to
+receive us; nor, indeed, was I much surprised at this slight, for he
+is a sulky-looking, ill-favored savage, with a debauched appearance,
+and wanting in the intelligence of his brother the rajah. I seated
+myself, however, and remained some time; but the delay exceeding
+what I considered the utmost limit of due forbearance, I expressed
+to the Pangeran Macota my regret that his compeer was not ready to
+receive me, adding that, as I was not accustomed to be kept waiting,
+I would return to my vessel. I spoke in the quietest tone imaginable,
+rose from my seat, and moved away; but the assembled Pangerans, rising
+likewise, assured me it was a mistake; that he was not yet dressed,
+and would greatly regret it himself. I repeated that when I visited the
+rajah, he received me in the hall. While this brief discussion passed,
+the culprit Muda Mahammed appeared and apologized for his remissness,
+assuring me that the error was his attendants', who told him I was not
+coming for an hour. The excuse of course passed current, though false,
+as excuses generally are. I vindicated my independence, not until it
+was necessary; and I am well aware that any endeavor of a native to
+commit an indirect rudeness, if met with firmness and gentleness,
+always recoils on his own head. The routine of the visit resembled
+our last--tea, cigars, complimentary conversation and departure. The
+Pangeran afterward sent me a present of fowls and goats, and I was
+right glad to have it over. Muda Mahammed is the 'own' brother to Muda
+Hassim, and next in rank here. As yet I had not made any request to the
+rajah to allow me to visit various parts of his country; but thinking
+the time to do so was come (the ceremonial of arrival being past),
+I sent Mr. Williamson, my interpreter, to express my wish to travel
+to some of the Malay towns and into the country of the Dyaks. The
+latter request I fully expected, would be evaded, and was therefore
+the more pleased when an answer came giving a cheerful consent to my
+going among the Dyaks of Lundu, and visiting the towns of Sadung,
+Samarahan, &c. At the same time the rajah informed me, that if I
+went up the river, he could not be answerable for my safety, as the
+rebels were not far distant, and constantly on the watch. Sarebus,
+another large Dyak town, he advised me not to visit, as they were
+inimical to his government, and a skirmish had lately taken place
+between them and some of his subjects.
+
+"_18th, Sunday._--Performed service. In the evening walked ashore,
+but the jungle was wet after rain. Every day or night since arriving
+it has rained, sometimes in torrents, at others in showers, and the
+sky has been so obscured that no observations can be obtained. The
+thermometer never ranges above 81 deg., and sometimes stands at 59 deg..
+
+"At twelve at night we were surprised by a boat sent from the rajah,
+to say he was taken ill, and wanted some physic. We dispatched our
+surgeon, but it was found impossible to admit him into the sacred
+precincts of the seraglio, and he returned with the information that
+the rajah was asleep.
+
+"_21st._--Our fleet were in readiness before daylight, and by five
+o'clock we left Kuching, [3] and dropped down the river. The Pangeran
+Illudeen and the Panglima, both in prahus, accompanied us, and with
+our long-boat (the Skimalong) formed quite a gay procession. The prahu
+of the Pangeran pulled twelve paddles, mounted two brass swivels, and
+in all had a crew of about twenty men. The Panglima's boat likewise
+carried a gun, and had about ten men; while the Skimalong mounted
+an iron swivel, and carried six Englishmen and one of our Singapore
+Malays. With this equipment we might be pronounced far superior to
+any force of the rajah's enemies we were likely to meet.
+
+"We passed from the Sarawak river into the Morotaba. At the junction
+of the two streams the Morotaba is narrow; but at no great distance,
+where it meets the Quop, it becomes wider, and in some places more
+than half a mile across.
+
+"The river Quop is a fine stream, fully, as far as I could see,
+as broad as the Morotaba or Sarawak. Beyond the junction of the
+Quop and Morotaba the latter river divides into two branches--the
+left-hand one, running to the sea, retains the name of Morotaba,
+while the right is called Riam.
+
+"The Riam is a fine stream; at its junction with the Morotaba it
+takes that name, as the Morotaba does that of Sarawak where they
+join. Low mangrove or Nepa palm banks characterize these streams;
+and occasionally slight eminences, with timber, are to be seen. The
+highest hill is about 3000 feet high, called Matang, and is at the
+point of junction between the Morotaba and Riam.
+
+"The next river on the starboard hand is the Tanjan, a small stream;
+and some distance from it, the Kulluong, or Parwheet river, more
+properly the continuation of the Riam. On the port hand is a smaller
+river, running N. 35 deg. E. We pursued this stream, called Ugong Passer;
+and after a hard pull against a strong tide, emerged into the larger
+river of Samarahan. The tide was so strong against us that we brought
+up for a couple of hours till it slacked, and between four and five
+got under weigh again, with the expectation of shortly arriving at
+our place of destination. Hour after hour passed, however; the sun
+set; the glorious moon rose upon our progress as we toiled slowly but
+cheerfully onward. Silence was around, save when broken by the wild
+song of the Malay boatmen, responded to by the song of our tars to
+the tune of 'Bonnie laddie, Highland laddie.'
+
+"It was such a situation as an excitable mind might envy. The
+reflection that we were proceeding up a Borneon river hitherto
+unknown, sailing where no European ever sailed before; the deep
+solitude, the brilliant night, the dark fringe of retired jungle,
+the lighter foliage of the river bank, with here and there a tree
+flashing and shining with fireflies, nature's tiny lamps glancing and
+flitting in countless numbers and incredible brilliancy! At eleven at
+night we reached Samarahan, having been eighteen hours in the boat,
+and fifteen at the oars, chiefly against tide. The men were tired,
+but cheerful. Indeed, I can give them no praise beyond their merits
+for conduct spirited, enduring, and yet so orderly as never to offend
+the native inhabitants, or infringe upon their prejudices. A glass of
+grog with our supper, and we all soon closed our eyes in comfortable
+sleep, such as fatigue alone can bring.
+
+"_22d._--The village of Samarahan consists of a few houses, built,
+as usual, upon posts, and standing close to the brink of the river. It
+contains from sixty to eighty inhabitants in all, and there is nothing
+in its site different from the rest of the country. While here, a boat,
+with a Dyak family, came alongside, consisting of a father, his son,
+and two daughters. They belonged to the Sibnowan tribe, and had a
+'ladang,' or farm, on the Samarahan, toward the sea. The women were
+good-looking; one, indeed, handsome, plump, and intelligent. They
+were naked to the waist, and ornamented with several cinctures of
+brass and colored rattans scraped very thin.
+
+"About ten we quitted Samarahan and proceeded up the river,
+stopping only to take a set of sights, and about seven in the evening
+reached Sibnow, having previously passed the villages of Rembas and
+Siniawan. Siniawan and Sibnow are not above half a mile from each
+other, and Rembas not far distant. They are all about the same size,
+consisting each of eight or ten houses, and containing sixty or eighty
+inhabitants. The river, during its course so far, is characterized by
+the same clay-mud bank, evidently an alluvial deposit, without one
+rock to be seen. The banks are low, and for the most part cleared a
+quarter of a mile or more on either side, but the jungle is rarely
+disturbed beyond that distance. Occasionally, however, the scene
+is varied by the rich foliage of this jungle, which here and there
+kisses the tide as it flows by, and in some spots on the cleared
+ground arise clumps of trees that would be the pride of any park
+in Europe. Monkeys in great numbers frisked among the branches; and
+though unable to shoot them, they amused us often by their grotesque
+attitudes and the tremendous leaps they made. On one occasion we
+saw as many as twenty throw themselves, one after the other, from
+the branch of a high tree into a thick bush full forty feet below,
+and not one missed his distance or hold! On our way to Sibnow the
+Pangeran had collected a number of men for a deer-hunt. The nets used
+for this purpose are formed of rattans strongly wove together, which,
+being stretched along the jungle, have nooses of the same material,
+at three feet apart, attached to this ridge-rope. Beaters and dogs
+then hunt from the opposite quarter, and the deer, in escaping them, is
+caught in this trap. A length of several hundred fathoms is stretched
+at once, each separate part of thirty or forty fathoms being joined
+on as required; and I was told that in this way many deer were taken.
+
+"A heavy rain came on directly after we had brought up, and quickly
+dispelled all our preparations for supper, by putting out our fire,
+cooling our hot water, and soaking our half-broiled fowls. To a hungry
+man such an event is very disastrous; but nothing could exceed the
+kindness of our Malay friends. They took us to the best house in the
+village, prepared our supper, and provided us with comfortable mats
+and pillows to sleep on. Some of our party preferred a bad supper and
+wet bed to these accommodations; and, to consummate their discomfort,
+they were kept awake a great part of the night by sandflies. Our
+lot in the house was more fortunate. We heard the rattling of the
+pitiless rain, and commiserated those whose choice or distrust kept
+them in the boat. I obtained by this means an excellent opportunity of
+seeing a Malay _menage_ in its primitive simplicity. Women, children,
+and all their domestic arrangements, were exposed to view. Nothing
+appeared to be concealed, nor could anything exceed the simple,
+kind-hearted hospitality of the inhabitants. The women gazed upon us
+freely; and their children, with the shyness natural to their age,
+yet took a glance at the strangers. Never having seen a white man,
+their curiosity was naturally excited; but it was never offensive. Our
+supper consisted of an excellent curry, and cold venison broiled on a
+stick, flavored with a glass of sherry, and concluded by a cigar. We
+retired to a dry bed, laying our head on the pillow with as entire
+a feeling of security as though reposing in England.
+
+"A description of this Malay dwelling, situated so far up this hitherto
+unknown river, may be interesting. Built, like other Malay houses,
+on posts, floored with split bamboo, and covered with the leaf of the
+Nepa palm, it presents the very _beau ideal_ of fragility, but affords,
+at the same time, many advantages, and with a little improvement
+might be rendered admirably calculated for a new settler in any warm
+country. It is built at very small expense, is remarkably roomy, free
+from damp, and weather-proof. The interior of the house consists of
+four rooms, the center one large and commodious, the front narrower,
+but thirty-six feet in length, a family sleeping-apartment on one side,
+and a kitchen at the back. These apartments are divided one from the
+other by partitions made of the Nepa; the floors were nicely spread
+with strong mats of Dyak manufacture, and on our arrival finer white
+mats were laid over these. The entrance of the house is approached
+by a steep ladder, which in case of attack is easily removed. The
+river Samarahan is admirably calculated for trade, and, indeed,
+the same may be said of the whole country, from the great facility
+it offers of inland communication. There is no impediment for small
+vessels of 200 or 300 tons navigating as far as Sibnow, the stream
+being deep and clear of danger. The tides in the river are strong,
+but not dangerously so; and, sounding occasionally in every reach,
+we never found less water than three fathoms. The distant mountains,
+called Bukar (and some other name), are inhabited by Dyaks, and are
+said to offer many valuable articles of trade; and we may presume
+this true from the riches of the region whence the Sarawak river
+takes its rise. It is highly probable, indeed, that both these rivers,
+as well as the Quop and others, have their source in the same range,
+and will be found to afford the same mineral productions. Tin, the
+natives confidently assert, can be procured, and birds' nests in
+very considerable quantities. The latter article, I have heretofore
+understood, was found only in the vicinity of the sea, whence the
+material of which they are composed is gathered; but both here and
+at Sarawak the best informed and most intelligent Malays assure me
+it is likewise found in the interior, and brought by the Dyaks from
+the mountains. The alluvial soil is a rich clay loam. The principal
+production at present is rice, of which considerable quantities are
+grown on the banks of the river, which accounts for the clearing
+of so many miles of the jungle. The mode of cultivation is similar
+to what is pursued in Sumatra, and so well described by Marsden. A
+small spot is cleared of jungle, and when the soil is exhausted of
+its primeval richness, is deserted for another, which again in turn
+is neglected, and returns to its wild state. The rice produced is of
+excellent quality, and of a smaller grain than the Java rice we have
+with us. It is very white and of excellent flavor, and I am inclined
+to think is the 'Padi ladang,' or rice grown on dry ground. (For rice,
+cultivation of, &c., &c., vide Marsden's _Sumatra_, p. 65.)
+
+"Beside rice, rattans are found in great quantities, and likewise
+Malacca canes, but whether of good quality I am not able to say. On my
+expressing a wish to see one, a man was dispatched into the jungle,
+and returned with one in a few minutes. Bees-wax is another article
+to be procured here _at present_ to the amount of thirty or forty
+peculs per year from Sibnow, Malacca canes a small ship-load, rattans
+in abundance, and any quantity of Garu wood. [4] When we consider the
+antimony of Sarawak, beside the other things previously mentioned (to
+say nothing of gold and diamonds), we cannot doubt of the richness
+of the country: but allowance must be made for the exaggeration of
+native statements.
+
+"It must likewise be borne in mind, that these articles are
+collected in small quantities in a country thinly populated; and
+for the purposes of trade it would be necessary to have a resident
+European on the spot to gather the produce of the country ready for
+exportation. I have no doubt that permission might be obtained for
+an English merchant to reside in the country, and that during the
+lifetime of the Rajah Muda Hassim he would be secure from outrage. The
+produce of the country might likewise be obtained (at first) at a
+low rate in exchange for European goods suited to native tastes. In
+addition to the articles I have already mentioned, I must here add
+pins, needles, and thread, both gold and white, showy cheap velvets,
+yellow, green, and red cloth, Surat silks, cottons, colored beads
+(for the Dyaks), nankeens in small quantities, gold-lace of various
+qualities, gunpowder, muskets, pistols, flints, &c., &c. The head man
+of Sibnow (Orang Kaya), when I asked him why he did not collect the
+produce of the country, replied, that the inhabitants were few, and
+unless an English merchant was settled at Kuching to buy the things,
+it was no use collecting them. The uncertainty of sale, as well as
+the very small prices to be obtained from trading Malays, prevents
+these people using the advantages of their country, and as yet they
+seemed to consider it impossible that vessels would come for them. That
+they will one day or other be convinced to the contrary, I am sure;
+that it will be soon, I sincerely hope; for I can see no reason, with
+a population and rulers so pacific, why a trade highly advantageous
+to Singapore should not be opened. I considered our reception as an
+additional proof how much better the natives are disposed where they
+have had no intercourse with Europeans; how perfectly willing they
+are to extend a friendly hospitality when never previously injured or
+aggravated; and as the first white men who ever visited their country,
+we can bear the most cordial testimony to their unaffected kindness.
+
+"It is true that we were under the protection of the rajah and
+accompanied by a Pangeran, and could have insisted on obtaining what
+was readily granted. But in case the natives had shown any aversion
+or antipathy toward us, it would easily have been observed.
+
+"_23d._--Heavy rain all the morning. Our salt provisions being
+exhausted, we procured a goat, which was cooked to last during our
+upward passage.
+
+"At 12, the flood making, we quitted Sibnow, and passing through the
+same description of country, reached the village of Guntong, consisting
+of eight houses, and about sixty or seventy inhabitants. The scattered
+population on the banks of the river amounts, however, to an equal,
+or probably greater number than in the villages. Beyond Guntong
+the country becomes wild, but beautiful, and the river gradually
+narrows until not above twenty-five yards wide. The depth, however,
+was three fathoms at high water, where we brought up for the night,
+about five hours' pull from Guntong. The course of the river is so
+tortuous, that in one place two reaches are only divided by a neck
+of land five yards across!
+
+"We were now fairly in the bush, and beyond the range of our Pangeran's
+knowledge; and I was not therefore surprised (though disappointed)
+when he intimated the necessity of returning. 'There was nothing to
+see; the river was narrow, rapid, and obstructed by trees; the Dyaks
+hostile; the rajah's enemies in ambush.'
+
+"I had nothing to answer, save my desire to proceed; but I felt, at
+the same time, bound in honor to return; for to abuse the indulgence
+of a native prince on our first excursion would have been a poor way
+to obtain his future permission to visit other places.
+
+"I did everything man could do to shake the Pangeran's resolution;
+and I believe I should have been successful, had his stock of tobacco
+and sirih [5] not been expended. My last resource was resorting to
+the means found efficient with most men to induce them to alter
+their opinion. I was content to gain a consent to our proceeding
+some miles farther up the stream in the morning, and then returning
+with the ebb. Nothing during this contention could be more polite
+than the Pangeran's manner; for he not only expressed but looked his
+regret, and urged on me his responsibility to the rajah. The plea was
+unanswerable, though I could not help suspecting the want of tobacco
+and betel as the leading motive.
+
+"_24th._--We proceeded, as previously agreed, up the river some
+ten or twelve miles farther, during which distance it narrows to
+an inconsiderable but deep stream. In many places it was not above
+eighteen feet wide, with trees overhanging the water. The depth was
+2 1/2 fathoms high water; but being the rainy season, it would not
+be deeper than necessary for boats all the year round. In the early
+morning the jungle presented a charming scene. Long vistas of noble
+trees with a diversity of richest foliage were before us--in some
+places overarching the water, and forming a verdant canopy above
+our heads. Birds were numerous, and woke the woods with their notes,
+but rarely approached within shot. Pigeons in numbers and of several
+varieties were seen, but very shy and wild.
+
+"We pushed on ahead of our attendant Pangeran, and pulled up long
+after the ebb had made. He had a long chase, and exhausted his
+lungs in shouting to us to return; and at last, from pity and
+according to promise, I did so. Poor fellow, he was very glad,
+fired his swivel-gun, and then brought up for breakfast. I believe
+a few hours' progress would have brought us to the vicinity of the
+hills and into the country of the Dyaks; and although disappointed
+at not being allowed to proceed thither, I nevertheless comfort
+myself that we have penetrated a hundred miles up a Borneon river
+hitherto unknown--a river likewise (as far as we have yet examined
+it) admirably calculated for the purposes of navigation and trade,
+and which may at some future period become of importance not only to
+the trade of our settlement of Singapore, but even to the commercial
+interests of Great Britain. The general character of the Samarahan
+is similar to that of other rivers flowing through alluvial soils;
+the stream is deep, with muddy banks and bottom, and apparently free
+from danger or obstruction. Of course these remarks are not meant
+to prevent the necessity of caution in any vessel proceeding up,
+as our survey was necessarily very brief; and, like other rivers,
+one bank will usually be found deep, the other shallow; which must
+be attended to.
+
+"It now remains for us to proceed up the river from its mouth to its
+junction with the Ugong Passer; and should it prove to have sufficient
+water for vessels on the bar, nothing more will be desired.
+
+"Returning, it took us five hours with a fair tide to Sibnow; the
+next ebb we reached Samarahan in three hours, where we stopped for
+the night. A heavy rain set in after we brought to, and continued
+till morning.
+
+"_25th._--The morning was cold and raw; but cleared up as the sun
+rose. At 7 we started, and at a quarter past 10 reached the mouth
+of the Ugong Passer and thence into the Riam. Thus it took us 11 1/4
+hours, with a strong ebb tide, to pull the distance. We had ascended
+the river from the junction of the Ugong Passer. Mr. Murray's plan
+of the river will show the distance as taken of each reach, together
+with its bearing. The ebb tide lasted us some distance up the Riam;
+but the flood making, we entered a small creek, called Tarusongong,
+scarce wide enough for the boat to get through, and entirely
+overarched with the Nepa palm. The general direction of the creek
+was N.W., and we emerged from it into the Boyur river; and pulling
+through several reaches, got into the Quop, [6] and thence, after a
+while, into the Morotaba; from the Morotaba into the Sarawak river,
+reaching the schooner at sunset, all well and happy. Thus ended our
+first cruise into the interior of Borneo."
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+    Second Cruise: up the River Lundu.--The Sibnowan Dyaks--Their
+    Town of Tungong.--Their Physical Proportions, and Words of
+    their Language.--Their Customs.--Skull-trophies.--Religious
+    Ceremonies and Opinions.--Their Ornaments.--Appearance of
+    both Sexes.--Dress and Morals.--Missionary Prospects of
+    Conversion, and Elevation in the Social Scale.--Government,
+    Laws, and Punishments.--Dances.--Iron Manufacturing.--Chinese
+    Settlement.--Excursion continued.
+
+
+"_Aug. 30th._--Our flotilla, constituted as before, quitted Sarawak
+with the ebb tide, and reached Santobong, at the mouth of the river,
+soon after the flood had made. We waited for the turn of the tide; and
+in wandering along the sand, I had a shot at a wild hog, but unluckily
+missed. I likewise saw a deer, very like a red deer, and nearly as
+large. The hog I fired at was a dirty white, with a black head, very
+unlike in this particular to any wild hogs I have hitherto seen either
+in India or Europe; but several young pigs, likewise seen, were black.
+
+"With the flood we weighed anchor, intending to bring up at the mouth
+of the Seboo river; but the Skimalong outsailing the prahus, foolishly
+parted company, causing me much uneasiness, and keeping the prahus
+under weigh all night. I was at this time aboard the Pangeran's boat,
+where I usually slept. About 10 on the 31st we reached Lobrek Bay,
+and rejoined our boat.
+
+"With the flood tide we proceeded up Lundu river, which has Gunong
+Gading on the right hand. The course of the river is very tortuous,
+but it appears every where of more than sufficient depth. The Dyak
+village of Tungong is situated about eighteen miles from the mouth, and
+takes its name from a small stream which joins the Lundu just below,
+on the left hand. It was dark when we arrived, and we ran against a
+boom formed of large trees run across the river as a defense against
+adverse Dyak tribes. We could see nothing of the town, save that it
+appeared longer than any we had yet visited.
+
+"_September 1st._--The River Lundu is of considerable breadth, about
+half a mile at the mouth, and 150 or 200 yards off Tungong. Tungong
+stands on the left hand (going up) close to the margin of the stream,
+and is inclosed by a slight stockade. Within this defense there is
+_one_ enormous house for the whole population, and three or four
+small huts. The exterior of the defense between it and the river is
+occupied by sheds for prahus, and at each extremity are one or two
+houses belonging to Malay residents.
+
+"The common habitation, as rude as it is enormous, measures 594 feet
+in length, and the front room, or _street_, is the entire length of the
+building, and 21 feet broad. The back part is divided by mat partitions
+into the private apartments of the various families, and of these there
+are forty-five separate doors leading from the public apartment. The
+widowers and young unmarried men occupy the public room, as only those
+with wives are entitled to the advantage of separate rooms. The floor
+of this edifice is raised twelve feet from the ground, and the means
+of ascent is by the trunk of a tree with notches cut in it--a most
+difficult, steep, and awkward ladder. In front is a terrace fifty feet
+broad, running partially along the front of the building, formed, like
+the floors, of split bamboo. This platform, as well as the front room,
+besides the regular inhabitants, is the resort of pigs, dogs, birds,
+monkeys, and fowls, and presents a glorious scene of confusion and
+bustle. Here the ordinary occupations of domestic labor are carried
+on--padi ground, mats made, &c., &c. There were 200 men, women, and
+children counted in the room and in front while we were there in the
+middle of the day; and, allowing for those abroad and those in their
+own rooms, the whole community can not be reckoned at less than 400
+souls. Overhead, about seven feet high, is a second crazy story, on
+which they stow their stores of food and their implements of labor
+and war. Along the large room are hung many cots, four feet long,
+formed of the hollowed trunks of trees cut in half, which answer the
+purpose of seats by day and beds by night. The Sibnowan Dyaks are a
+wild-looking but apparently quiet and inoffensive race. The apartment
+of their chief, by name Sejugah, is situated nearly in the center
+of the building, and is larger than any other. In front of it nice
+mats were spread on the occasion of our visit, while over our heads
+dangled about thirty ghastly skulls, according to the custom of these
+people. The chief was a man of middle age, with a mild and pleasing
+countenance and gentle manners. He had around him several sons and
+relations, and one or two of the leading men of his tribe, but the
+rest seemed by no means to be restrained by his presence, or to show
+him any particular marks of respect: certainly nothing of the servile
+obsequiousness observed by the Malays before their prince. Their
+dress consists of a single strip of cloth round the loins, with the
+ends hanging down before and behind, and a light turban, composed of
+the bark of trees, twined round the head, and so arranged that the
+front is stuck up somewhat resembling a short plume of feathers.
+
+"Their figures are almost universally well made, showing great activity
+without great muscular development; but their stature is diminutive,
+as will be seen by the following measurements, taken at random among
+them, and confirmed by general observation:
+
+
+    "Sejugah, the chief, height, 5 ft. 1 3/4 in. Head round, 1 ft. 9
+    in. Anterior portion, from ear to ear, 1 foot; posterior, 9 in.;
+    across the top, 1 1/4 ft.
+
+    "Kalong, the chief's eldest son, height, 5 ft. 2 1/4 in. Anterior
+    portion of head, 1 ft.; posterior, 8 3/4 in.; across the top,
+    1 ft., wanting a few lines.
+
+                                     Height
+
+                Man from the crowd   5 ft.  1 3/4 in.
+                Another              5      1 1/2
+                Another              5      4
+                Another              4     10
+                Another              5      3
+                Another              5      4
+
+
+
+"The following is a specimen of their names, and some few words
+of their dialect, the only ones I could get not Malayan. The fact,
+indeed, appears to be that, from constant intercourse, their Dyak
+language is fast fading away; and, while retaining their separate
+religion and customs, they have substituted the soft and fluent Malay
+for their own harsher jargon. The names are, Jugah or Sejugah, Kalong,
+Bunshie, Kontong, Lang, Rantie.
+
+The vocabulary:
+
+
+            hairs, _bok_ (similar to the Lundu Dyaks).
+            thigh, _pah_.
+            woman, _indo_.
+            father, _api_.
+            sea, _tasiek_.
+            slave, _ulon_.
+            spear, _sancho_.
+            black, _chelum_.
+            good, _badass_.
+            bad, _jaie_.
+            quick, _pantass_.
+            slow, _bagadie_.
+            that, _kneah_ (nasal, like _kgneah_).
+            this, _to_.
+            to go, _bajali_.
+            there, _kein_.
+            come, _jali_
+            here, _keto_.
+            come here, _jali keto_.
+            to give, _bri_.
+            give all, _bri samonia_ (M).
+            to bring, _bii_.
+            bring that, _bii kneah_.
+            bring here, _bii keto_.
+
+
+"The corruptions of the Malay are _langan_ for _tangon_, arm; _ai_
+for _ayer_, water; _menua_ for _benua_, country; _komah_ for _rumah_,
+house; _besi_ for _besar_, great.
+
+"Like the rest of the Dyaks, the Sibnowans adorn their houses with
+the heads of their enemies; but with them this custom exists in a
+modified form; and I am led to hope that the statements already made
+public of their reckless search after human beings, _merely_ for the
+purpose of obtaining their heads, will be found to be exaggerated, if
+not untrue; and that the custom elsewhere, as here and at Lundu, will
+be found to be more accordant with our knowledge of other wild tribes,
+and to be regarded merely as a triumphant token of valor in the fight
+or ambush; similar, indeed, to the scalps of the North American Indian.
+
+"Some thirty skulls were hanging from the roof of the apartment; and I
+was informed that they had many more in their possession; all, however,
+the heads of enemies, chiefly of the tribe of Sarebus. On inquiring,
+I was told that it is indispensably necessary a young man should
+procure a skull before he gets married. When I urged on them that the
+custom would be more honored in the breach than the observance, they
+replied that it was established from time immemorial, and could not
+be dispensed with. Subsequently, however, Sejugah allowed that heads
+were very difficult to obtain now, and a young man might sometimes
+get married by giving presents to his lady-love's parents. At all
+times they warmly denied ever obtaining any heads but those of their
+enemies; adding, they were bad people, and deserved to die.
+
+"I asked a young unmarried man whether he would be obliged to get a
+head before he could obtain a wife. He replied, 'Yes.' 'When would
+he get one?' 'Soon.' 'Where would he go to get one?' 'To the Sarebus
+river.' I mention these particulars in detail, as I think, had their
+practice extended to taking the head of any defenseless traveler,
+or any Malay surprised in his dwelling or boat, I should have wormed
+the secret out of them.
+
+"The men of this tribe marry but one wife, and that not until they have
+attained the age of seventeen or eighteen. Their wedding ceremony is
+curious; and, as related, is performed by the bride and bridegroom
+being brought in procession along the large room, where a brace of
+fowls is placed over the bridegroom's neck, which he whirls seven
+times round his head. The fowls are then killed, and their blood
+sprinkled on the foreheads of the pair, which done, they are cooked,
+and eaten by the new-married couple _alone_, while the rest feast
+and drink during the whole night.
+
+"Their dead are put in a coffin, and buried; but Sejugah informed
+me that the different tribes vary in this particular; and it would
+appear they differ from their near neighbors the Dyaks of Lundu.
+
+"Like these neighbors, too, the Sibnowans seem to have little or no
+idea of a God. They offer prayers to Biedum, the great Dyak chief of
+former days. Priests and ceremonies they have none; the thickest mist
+of darkness is over them: but how much easier is it to dispel darkness
+with light than to overcome the false blaze with the rays of truth!
+
+"The manners of the men of this tribe are somewhat reserved, but
+frank; while the women appeared more cheerful, and more inclined to
+laugh and joke at our peculiarities. Although the first Europeans
+they had ever seen, we were by no means annoyed by their curiosity:
+and their honesty is to be praised; for, though opportunities were
+not wanting, they never on any occasion attempted to pilfer any
+thing. Their color resembles the Malay, and is fully as dark; and
+the cast of their countenance does not favor the notion that they are
+sprung from a distinct origin. They never intermarry with the Malays,
+so as to intermingle the two people, and the chastity of their women
+gives no presumption of its otherwise occurring. Their stature, as I
+have before remarked, is diminutive, their eyes are small and quick,
+their noses usually flattened, and their figures clean and well
+formed, but not athletic. Both sexes generally wear the hair long
+and turned up, but the elder men often cut it short. As is natural,
+they are fond of the water, and constantly bathe; and their canoes
+are numerous. I counted fifty, besides ten or twelve small prahus,
+which they often build for sale to the Malays, at a very moderate
+price indeed. The men wear a number of fine cane rings, neatly worked
+(which we at first mistook for hair), below the knee or on the arm, and
+sometimes a brass ring or two; but they have no other ornaments. The
+ears of a few were pierced, but I saw nothing worn in them except a
+roll of thin palm-leaf, to prevent the hole closing. The women are
+decidedly good-looking, and far fairer than the men; their figures
+are well shaped, and remarkable for their _embonpoint_. The expression
+of their countenance is very good-humored, and their condition seems
+a happy one. Their dress consists of a coarse stuff, very scanty
+(manufactured by the Sakarran Dyaks), reaching from the waist to the
+knee; around the waist they have rings of ratan, either black or red,
+and the loins are hung round with a number of brass ornaments made by
+their husbands. Above the waist they are entirely naked, nor do they
+wear any covering or ornament on the head. They have a few bracelets
+of brass, but neither ear-rings nor nose-rings; and some, more lucky
+than the rest, wear a necklace of beads. They prefer the smallest
+Venetian beads to the larger and more gaudy ones of England. The labor
+of the house, and all the drudgery, falls on the females. They grind
+the rice, carry burdens, fetch water, fish, and work in the fields;
+but though on a par with other savages in this respect, they have many
+advantages. They are not immured; they eat in company with the males;
+and, in most points, hold the same position toward their husbands and
+children as European women. The children are entirely naked; and the
+only peculiarity I observed is filing their teeth to a sharp point,
+like those of a shark. The men marry but one wife, as I have before
+observed. Concubinage is unknown; and cases of seduction or adultery
+very seldom arise. Even the Malays speak highly of the chastity of the
+Dyak women; yet they are by no means shy under the gaze of strangers,
+and used to bathe before us in a state of nudity.
+
+"That these Dyaks are in a low condition there is no doubt; but,
+comparatively, theirs is an innocent state, and I consider them
+capable of being easily raised in the scale of society. The absence
+of all prejudice regarding diet, the simplicity of their characters,
+the purity of their morals, and their present ignorance of all forms
+of worship and all idea of future responsibility, render them open to
+conviction of truth and religious impression. Yet, when I say this,
+I mean, of course, only when their minds shall have been raised by
+education; for without previous culture I reckon the labors of the
+missionary as useless as endeavoring to read off a blank paper. I
+doubt not but the Sibnowan Dyaks would readily receive missionary
+families among them, provided the consent of the Rajah Muda Hassim
+was previously obtained. That the rajah would consent I much doubt;
+but if any person chose to reside at Tungong, for the charitable
+purpose of leading the tribe gradually, by means of education, to
+the threshold of Christianity, it would be worth the asking, and I
+would exert what influence I possess with him on the occasion. I feel
+sure a missionary would be safe among them, as long as he strictly
+confined himself to the gentle precepts and practice of his faith;
+he would live abundantly and cheaply, and be exposed to no danger
+except from the incursion of hostile tribes, which must always be
+looked for by a sojourner amid a Dyak community.
+
+"I must add, that this day, when so many of my friends are destroying
+partridges, I have had my gun in my hand, to procure a few specimens.
+
+"_2d._--To continue my account of the Sibnowan Dyaks. I made particular
+inquiry about the superstition stated to exist regarding birds,
+and the omens said to be drawn from their flight; but I could trace
+no vestige of such a belief, nor did they seem at all acquainted
+with its existence. The government of the Sibnowans may be called
+patriarchal. The authority of the chief appears limited within very
+narrow bounds; he is the leader in war, and the dispenser of the laws;
+but possesses no power of arbitrary punishment, and no authority for
+despotic rule. The distinction between Sejugah and the lowest of his
+tribe is not great, and rather a difference of riches than of power. A
+few ornamented spears, presented by the Malays, seem his only insignia
+of office; and these were never displayed in our presence, save in the
+dance. The chiefship would appear to be elective, and not hereditary;
+but I could not distinctly understand whether the appointment rested
+with the rajah or the tribe. The former claims it; but the latter
+did not speak as though his right were a matter of necessity or
+certainty. On asking Kalong, the eldest son of Sejugah (a young man
+of twenty years of age, active, clever, and intelligent), whether he
+would succeed his father, he replied, he feared he was not _rich _
+enough; but two or three of the tribe, who were present, asserted
+that he would be made chief. The Rajah Muda Hassim told me that the
+only hold he had on the Dyaks was through the chief and his family,
+who were attached to him; but that the tribe at large cared nothing
+for the Malays. I can easily believe this, as any ill treatment or
+cruelty directed against a Dyak community would soon drive them beyond
+the power and the territory of the prince. This is the best safeguard
+of the Dyaks; and the Malays are well aware that a Dyak alliance must
+be maintained by good treatment. They are called subjects and slaves;
+but they are subjects at pleasure, more independent and better used
+than any Malay under his native prince.
+
+"The laws of this Dyak tribe are administered by the chief and the two
+principal men. They have no fixed code, nor any standard of punishment,
+each case of crime being judged according to its enormity. In the
+event of murder in their own tribe, the murderer suffers death by
+decapitation, _provided he be in fault_. Theft is punished by fine,
+and adultery (stated as a heinous offense) by severe beating and heavy
+mulct [7]. Other crimes are, in like manner, punished by fine and
+beating--one or both, according to their various shades of evil. The
+latter varies greatly in degree, sometimes being inflicted on the
+head or arm, with a severity which stops short only of death. The
+arm is often broken under this infliction; so, according to their
+representation, it is a risk to be dreaded and avoided.
+
+"Slavery holds among them; and, as among the Malays, a debtor is
+reduced to this state until his debt be discharged. Children are
+likewise bought, and must be considered as slaves.
+
+"In the evening I requested Sejugah to collect his tribe, and to show
+me their dances and musical instruments. They readily consented,
+and about nine at night we went to witness the exhibition. The
+musical instruments were, the tomtom, or drum, and the Malayan gong;
+which were beat either slow or fast, according to the measure of
+the dance. The dances are highly interesting, more especially from
+their close resemblance, if not identity, with those of the South Sea
+Islanders. Two swords were placed on the mat, and two men commenced
+slowly, from the opposite extremities, turning the body, extending
+the arms, and lifting the legs, in grotesque but not ungraceful
+attitudes. Approaching thus leisurely round and round about, they at
+length seize the swords, the music plays a brisker measure, and the
+dancers pass and repass each other, now cutting, now crossing swords,
+retiring and advancing, one kneeling as though to defend himself from
+the assaults of his adversary; at times stealthily waiting for an
+advantage, and quickly availing himself of it. The measure throughout
+was admirably kept, and the frequent turns were simultaneously made
+by both dancers, accompanied by the same eccentric gestures. The
+effect of all this far surpasses the impression to be made by a
+meager description. The room partially lighted by damar torches;
+the clang of the noisy instruments; the crowd of wild spectators;
+their screams of encouragement to the performers; the flowing hair and
+rapid evolutions of the dancers, formed a scene I wish could have been
+reduced to painting by such a master as Rembrandt or Caravaggio. The
+next dance was performed by a single person, with a spear, turning
+like the last; now advancing, retiring, poising, brandishing, or
+pretending to hurl his weapon. Subsequently we had an exhibition with
+the sword and shield, very similar to the others, and only differing
+in the use of the weapons; and the performance was closed by a long
+and animated dance like the first, by two of the best performers.
+
+"The dance with the spear is called Talambong; that with the sword,
+Mancha. The resemblance of these dances to those of the South Seas is,
+as I have observed, a remarkable and interesting fact, and one of many
+others which may, in course of time, elucidate the probable theory that
+the two people are sprung from a common source. The Malays of Sarawak,
+and other places in the neighborhood of the Dyak tribes, dance these
+dances; but they are unknown to Borneo Proper, and the other Malay
+islands; and although the names may be given by the Malays, I think
+there is no doubt that the dances themselves belong to the Dyaks:
+a correcter judgment can be formed by a better acquaintance with
+other Dyak tribes.
+
+"The household utensils in use here are few and simple. The mode
+of grinding padi clear of the husk is through the trunk of a tree
+cut into two parts, the upper portion being hollow, the lower solid;
+small notches are cut where the two pieces fit, and handles attached
+to the upper part, which being filled with padi and kept turning round,
+the husk is detached and escapes by the notches.
+
+"The Dyaks, as is well known, are famous for the manufacture of
+iron. The forge here is of the simplest construction, and formed
+by two hollow trees, each about seven feet high, placed upright,
+side by side, in the ground; from the lower extremity of these, two
+pipes of bamboo are led through a clay-bank, three inches thick,
+into a charcoal fire; a man is perched at the top of the trees,
+and pumps with two pistons (the suckers of which are made of cocks'
+feathers), which being raised and depressed alternately, blow a
+regular stream of air into the fire. Drawings were taken of these
+and other utensils and instruments. The canoes are not peculiar,
+but the largest prahus (some forty feet long, with a good beam)
+are constructed, in the first place, exactly like a small canoe:
+a single tree is hollowed out, which forms the keel and kelson,
+and on this foundation the rest of the prahu is built with planks,
+and her few timbers fastened with ratans. A prahu of fifty feet long,
+fitted for service, with oars, mast, attops, &c., was ordered by the
+Panglima Rajah while we were with him, which, completed, was to cost
+thirty reals, or sixty Java rupees, or L6 English. During the course
+of the day we ascended the river to visit the settlement of Chinese
+lately established here. It is situated about two and a half miles
+up the river, on the same side as Tungong, and consists of thirty men
+(real Chinese), and five women of the mixed breed of Sambas. Nothing
+can be more flourishing than this infant settlement, and I could hardly
+credit their statement that it had only been formed between four and
+five months. The soil they represented as most excellent, and none
+are better judges; many acres were cleared and under cultivation;
+rice, sirih, sweet potatoes (convolvulus), Indian corn, &c., &c.,
+were growing abundantly; and they were able to supply us with seven
+pecul, or 933 pounds of sweet potatoes, without sensibly diminishing
+their crop. They showed me samples of birds' nests, bees' wax, garu
+wood (lignum aloes), and ebony, collected in the vicinity, chiefly
+from Gunong Gading. Several peculs of birds' nests and bees' wax, and
+the wood in large quantity, could _now_ be brought to market; and no
+doubt, when demand stimulates industry, the quantities would greatly
+increase. The Dyaks, they told me, collected ratans, and likewise
+canes, which are plentiful. The mixed breed of the Chinese with the
+Malay or Dyak are a good-looking and industrious race, partaking
+much more of the Chinese character than that of the natives of this
+country. This mainly arises from education and early-formed habits,
+which are altogether Chinese; and in religion and customs they likewise
+follow, in a great measure, the paternal stock. The race are worthy
+of attention, as the future possessors of Borneo. The numbers of this
+people can not be stated, but it must amount to many thousand persons:
+3000 were said to be on their way to the Borneon territory.
+
+"The head man of this settlement, a Chinese of Quantung, or Canton,
+but long resident in the vicinity of Sambas, gave me some valuable
+information respecting the Sarawak mountains. He had, with a
+considerable party of his countrymen, been employed there at the
+gold-mines, and he spoke of them as abundant, and of the ore as
+good. Tin they had not found, but thought it existed. Antimony ore was
+to be had in any quantities, and diamonds were likewise discovered. I
+mention these facts as coming from an intelligent Chinese, well able
+from experience to judge of the precious metals, and the probability
+of their being found.
+
+"_3d._--Night, as usual, set in with torrents of rain, which lasted
+until the morning: the days, however, are fine, though cloudy. Got
+sights in the afternoon; and, leaving our Dyak friends, we dropped
+down to the mouth of the river, where we slept.
+
+"_4th._--At 2 A.M. got under weigh for the Samatan river, which we
+reached at 8 A.M. I had been given to understand that the Lundu and
+Sibnowan Dyaks were to be found on this river; but on arriving, I
+was informed we must proceed to Seru, where we should see plenty of
+Dyaks. I accordingly started immediately after breakfast, and reached
+Seru after mid-day. Here we found a small Malay fishing village, with
+two or three stray Dyaks of the Sibnowan tribe; and, on inquiring, we
+were told by them that their country was far away. Being convinced that
+the Pangeran had dragged me all this distance to answer some purpose
+of his own, I re-embarked on the instant, and set off on my return
+to Lundu, indignant enough. However, I had the poor satisfaction of
+dragging them after me, and making them repent their trick, which I
+believe was nothing else than to visit the island of Talang Talang for
+turtles' eggs. We were pretty well knocked up by the time we reached
+Samatan, having been pulling thirteen hours, the greater part of the
+time under a burning sun.
+
+"The Samatan river, like the others, is inclosed in a bay choked with
+sand: the boat-passage is on the right-hand side, going in near Point
+Samatan. The sands are mostly dry at low water, and stretch out a
+considerable distance. There is a fishing station here, though not so
+large as at Seru, and the fish at both places are very plentiful, and
+are salted for exportation to Sambas, and along their own coast. Seru
+is a shallow creek; the village may consist of 50 or 60 inhabitants,
+and the sands stretch a long way out. We thus lost two days, through
+the cunning of our Malay attendant; and the only advantage gained is
+being enabled to fill up the details of our survey of this bay.
+
+"_5th._--The day consumed returning along the coast to the Lundu,
+and we did not reach Tungong till late.
+
+"_6th._--Remained at Tungong. Every impediment was thrown in my way to
+prevent my reaching the Lundu Dyaks; the distance was great, the tribe
+small and unsettled, there was little probability of finding them,
+&c. I would, however, have gone; but another cause had arisen of a more
+serious nature. My feet, from the heat of the sun, musqueto-bites, and
+cuts (for I foolishly went without shoes that unlucky day to Seru),
+had become so painful and inflamed that I felt great doubt whether,
+if I walked in pain to Lundu, I could come back again. With the best
+grace I could, I yielded the point; with a vow, however, never to
+have the same Pangeran again. I did _manage_ to be civil to him,
+from policy alone. He was superfluously kind and obliging.
+
+"_7th._--Left Tungong on our return to the vessel, and brought-to
+for the night at Tanjong Siri. In the evening I walked along the fine
+sandy beach as far as the entrance of the Sumpudin river. We saw many
+wild hogs; and on one occasion I was able to get within twenty yards
+of some ten of them together, among some large drift-wood. Just as I
+was crawling over a tree and balancing, I found myself confronted by
+these animals; but they were out of sight almost before I could cock
+my gun and fire. They were of a large size, and most of them we saw
+during the evening either dirty white, or white and black. At night,
+after we had retired to our quarters in the Pangeran's boat, she filled
+with water, and was near going down. The first intimation we had of
+it was the water wetting our mats on which we were sleeping. She was
+beached and baled out, and a hand kept baling all night, as they had
+laden her so deep that she leaked considerably.
+
+"_8th._--In the morning we got our anchor at daylight, and
+breakfasted on the island of Sumpudin. There are deer, hogs, and
+pigeons on Sumpudin Island; but what was more interesting to me was,
+the discovery of the wild nutmeg-tree in full flower, and growing to
+the height of twenty or thirty feet. The nutmegs lay in plenty under
+the trees, and are of considerable size, though elongated in shape,
+and tasteless, as usual in the wild sorts. While the East India Company
+were sending Captain Forest from their settlement of Balambangan as
+far as New Guinea in search of this plant, how little they dreamed
+of its flourishing so near them on the island of Borneo! The soil on
+which they grow is a yellowish clay, mixed with vegetable mould. I
+brought some of the fruit away with me. After breakfast, a breeze
+springing up, we sailed to the mouth of the Sarawak river, waited
+for the tide, and pushed on for the vessel, getting aboard about
+half past three in the morning. Our Malay attendants were left far,
+far behind, and there is little chance of their being here to-morrow,
+for their boats sail wretchedly."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+    Renewed intercourse with the Rajah.--Prospects of
+    trade.--Ourang-outang, and other animals.--The two sorts of
+    mias.--Description of the Rajah, his suite, and Panglimas, &c.--The
+    character of the natives.--Leave Sarawak.--Songi Dyaks.--Visit
+    Seriff Sahib.--Buyat tongue.--Attack by pirates.--Sail for
+    Singapore.
+
+
+Having returned to Sarawak, Mr. Brooke renewed his intercourse with
+the rajah; and his Journal proceeds:
+
+"_Sept. 9th._--Visited the rajah; civil and polite--I ought indeed to
+say friendly and kind. Der Macota was on board, speaking on the trade,
+and very anxious for me to arrange the subject with the rajah. I could
+only say, that I would do so if the rajah wished, as I believed it
+would be greatly for the benefit of their country and Singapore.
+
+"_10th._--Laid up with my bad legs, and hardly able to crawl. Muda
+Hassim presented us with another bullock, which we salted. At Lundu we
+bought eight pigs, which arrived to-day in charge of Kalong, the young
+Dyak. He is a fine fellow. I gave him a gun, powder-flask, powder,
+&c. He was truly delighted. Our Pangerans arrived at the same time.
+
+"_11th._--Very bad; got a novel, and read all day. Went ashore to
+see Muda Hassim in the evening. He gave us a private audience: and we
+finished our discussion respecting the trade, and I think successfully.
+
+"I began by saying, that I as a private gentleman, unconnected with
+commerce, could have no personal interest in what I was about to speak;
+that the rajah must clearly understand that I was in no way connected
+with the government of Singapore, and no way authorized to act for
+them: that he must, therefore, look upon it merely as my private
+opinion, and act afterward as his wisdom thought fit. I represented
+to him that the kingdom of Borneo was the last Malay state possessing
+any power, and that this might be in a great measure attributed to
+the little intercourse they had had with European powers. I thought
+it highly advisable to call into play the resources of his country,
+by opening a trade with individual European merchants. Sarawak,
+I stated, was a rich place, and the territory around produced many
+valuable articles for a commercial intercourse--bees-wax, birds-nests,
+rattans, beside large quantities of antimony ore and sago, which might
+be considered the staple produce of the country. In return for these,
+the merchants of Singapore could send goods from Europe or China which
+his people required, such as gunpowder, muskets, cloths, &c.; and both
+parties would thus be benefited by their commercial interchange of
+commodities. I conceived that Singapore was well fitted for trade with
+this place. The rajah must not suppose I was desirous of excluding
+other nations from trading here, or that I wished he should trade
+with the English alone; on the contrary, I thought that the Americans,
+the French, or any other nation, should be admitted on the same terms
+as the English.
+
+"Of course, I was not allowed to proceed without much questioning and
+discussion; many of the views were urged and re-urged, to remove their
+false notions. That Mr. Bonham had the supreme command of the trade
+of Singapore was the prominent one; and when he died, or was removed,
+would not the next governor alter all kind intentions and acts? 'What
+friend should they have at Singapore then?'
+
+"Again they thought that a few ships might come at first; but then
+they would deceive them, and not come again. It was very difficult
+to explain, that if they procured cargoes at an advantageous rate,
+they would come here for their own benefit; if not, of course it
+would not be worth their while to come at all. The entire discussion
+proceeded with the utmost good-will and politeness.
+
+"That the political ascendency of the English is paramount here is
+apparent. They might if they pleased, by means of an offensive and
+defensive alliance between the two powers, gain the entire trade of
+the northwest coast of Borneo, from Tanjong Datu to Malludu Bay.
+
+"I obtained subsequently from Macota the following list of imports
+and exports; which I here commit to paper, for the information of
+those whom it may concern.
+
+"_From Singapore._--Iron; salt, Siam; nankeen; Madras, Europe,
+and China cotton cloth, coarse and fine; Bugis and Pulicat sarongs;
+gold and other threads, of sorts and colors; brass wire, of sizes;
+iron pans from Siam, called qualis; chintzes, of colors and sorts;
+coarse red broadcloth, and other sorts of different colors; China
+crockery; gunpowder; muskets; flints; handkerchiefs (Pulicat and
+European); gambir; dates; Java tobacco; soft sugar; sugar-candy;
+biscuits; baharri; common decanters; glasses, &c. &c.; China silk,
+of colors; ginghams; white cottons; nails; beside other little things,
+such as Venetian beads; ginger; curry-powder; onions; ghee; &c. &c.
+
+"The returns from Sarawak are now: antimony ore, sago, timber
+(lackah, garu), rattans, Malacca canes, bees-wax, birds-nests, rice,
+&c. Other articles, such as gold, tin, &c. &c., Macota said, would be
+procured after the war, but at present he need say nothing of them;
+the articles above mentioned might subsequently be greatly increased
+by demand; and, in short, as every person of experience knows, in a
+wild country a trade must be fostered at first.
+
+"To the foregoing list I must add, pipeclay, vegetable tallow,
+which might be useful in commerce, being of fine quality; and the
+ore, found in abundance round here, of which I can make nothing,
+but which I believe to be copper.
+
+"_12th._--I received from the rajah a present of an ourang-outang,
+young, and like others I have seen, but better clothed, with fine
+long hair of a bright chestnut color. The same melancholy which
+characterizes her race is apparent in Betsy's face; and though but
+just caught, she is quite quiet unless teased.
+
+"From the man who brought Betsy I procured a _Lemur tardigradus_,
+called by the Malays _Cucan_, not _Poucan_, as written in
+Cuvier--Marsden has the name right in his dictionary--and at the same
+time the mutilated hand of an ourang-outang of _enormous_ size. This
+hand far exceeds in length, breadth, and power, the hand of any man
+in the ship; and though smoked and shrunk, the circumference of the
+fingers is half as big again as an ordinary human finger. The natives
+of Borneo call the ourang-outang the _Mias_, of which they say there
+are two distinct sorts; one called the _Mias rombi_ (similar to the
+specimen aboard and the two in the Zoological Gardens), and the _Mias
+pappan_, a creature far larger, and more difficult to procure. To the
+latter kind the hand belongs. The mias pappan is represented to be as
+tall or taller than a man, and possessing vast strength: the face is
+fuller and larger than that of the mias rombi, and the hair reddish,
+but sometimes approaching to black. The mias rombi never exceeds four
+or four and a half feet; his face, unlike the pappan, is long, and his
+hair redder. I must own myself inclined to this opinion from various
+reasons:--1st. The natives appear so well agreed on the point, and so
+well acquainted with the distinction and the different names, that it
+is impossible to suppose it a fabrication for our peculiar use. Of the
+many whom I asked respecting them, at different times and in different
+places, the greater part of their own accord mentioned the difference
+between the mias pappan and the mias rombi. The animal when brought
+aboard was stated to be the mias rombi, or small sort. In short,
+the natives, whether right or wrong, make the distinction. 2d. The
+immense size of the hand in my possession, the height of the animal
+killed on the coast of Sumatra, and the skull in the Paris Museum,
+can scarcely be referred to an animal such as we know at home; though
+by specious analogical reasoning, the great disparity of the skulls
+has been pronounced the result merely of age.
+
+"However, facts are wanting, and these facts I doubt not I can soon
+procure, if not actual proof; and whichever way it goes, in favor of
+Buffon's Pongo or not, I shall be contented, so that I bring truth
+to light.
+
+"_19th._--From the 12th to the 19th of September we lay, anxious to be
+off, but delayed by some trifling occurrence or other, particularly for
+the letters which I was to receive for the merchants of Singapore. Our
+intercourse the whole time was most friendly and frequent; almost
+daily I was ashore, and the rajah often visited the vessel. How
+tedious and _ennuyant_ to me can only be known by those who know me
+well, and how repugnant these trammels of society and ceremony are to
+nature. Nevertheless, I suffered this martyrdom with exemplary outward
+patience, though the spirit flagged, and the thoughts wandered, and the
+head often grew confused, with sitting and talking trifling nonsense,
+through a poor interpreter.
+
+"I here bid adieu to these kind friends, fully impressed with their
+kindness, and the goodness of their dispositions. To me they are far
+different from anything I was at all prepared to meet, and devoid
+of the vices with which their countrymen are usually stigmatized by
+modern writers. I expected to find an indolent and somewhat insolent
+people, devoted to sensual enjoyments, addicted to smoking opium, and
+eternally cock-fighting or gambling: let me speak it to the honor of
+the Borneons, that they neither cock-fight nor smoke opium; and in the
+military train of their rajah they find at Kuching few conveniences
+and fewer luxuries. Like all the followers of Islam, they sanction
+polygamy; and the number of their women, and, probably, the ease and
+cheerfulness of the seraglio, contrasted with the ceremonial of the
+exterior, induce them to pass a number of their hours amid their women,
+and excite habits of effeminacy and indolence. I should pronounce
+them indolent and unwarlike; but kind and unreserved to foreigners,
+particularly to Englishmen. They are volatile, generally speaking very
+ignorant, but by no means deficient in acuteness of understanding;
+and, indeed, their chief defects may be traced entirely to their
+total want of education, and the nature of their government. The
+lower orders of people are poor and wretched, and the freemen are
+certainly poorer and more wretched than the slaves. They are not
+greatly addicted to theft, and yet, unlike the scrupulous honesty
+of the Sibnowans, they pilfered some trifling articles occasionally
+when left in their way. The retainers of the court showed much the
+same mean intriguing spirit which is too often found in courts,
+and always in Eastern ones; and the rajah himself seldom requested
+any favor from me directly, but employed some intermediate person
+to sound me--to get whatever was required for himself if possible,
+if not for the rajah. I took the hint, and always expressed my
+wishes through the interpreter when not present myself. In this way
+we were enabled to grant or refuse without the chance of insult or
+offence. The suite of the rajah consists principally of slaves, either
+purchased or debtors: they are well treated, and rise to offices of
+some note. The Panglima rajah was a slave-debtor, though we did not
+know it for some time after our arrival. I never saw either cruelty
+or undue harshness exercised by the great men during my stay, and in
+general their manners were affable and kind to those about them. The
+Rajah Muda Hassim is a remarkably short man, and slightly built;
+about 45 years of age; active and intelligent, but apparently little
+inclined to business. His disposition I formed the highest estimate
+of, not only from his kindness to myself, but from the testimony of
+many witnesses, all of whom spoke of him with affection, and gave him
+the character of a mild and gentle master. Muda Hassim's own brother,
+Muda Mahammed, is a reserved and sulky man, but they spoke well of him;
+and the rajah said he was a good man, but given to fits of sulkiness.
+
+"Der Macota, unlike other Malays, neither smokes tobacco nor chews
+sirih. He sought our society, and was the first person who spoke to
+me on the subject of the trade. His education has been more attended
+to than that of others of his rank. He both reads and writes his own
+language, and is well acquainted with the government, laws, and customs
+of Borneo. From him I derived much information on the subject of the
+Dyaks, and the geography of the interior; and if I have failed to put
+it down, it is because I have not departed from my general rule of
+never giving any native statements unless they go far to verify my
+own actual observations. I parted from the rajah with regret, some
+six or seven miles down the river. Never was such a blazing as when
+we left Sarawak; twenty-one guns I fired to the rajah, and he fired
+forty-two to me--at least we counted twenty-four, and they went on
+firing afterward, as long as ever we were in sight. The last words
+the Rajah Muda Hassim said, as I took my leave, were--'Tuan Brooke,
+do not forget me.'
+
+"Among the curiosities in my possession are spears, swords, and
+shields, from various tribes; a coat of mail, made to the northward of
+Borneo, and worn by the pirates; specimens of Sakarran Dyak manufacture
+of cloth, and Sarebus ditto; ornaments and implements of the Sibnowans;
+and, last not least, a gold-handled kris, presented me by the rajah,
+which formerly belonged to his father, and which he constantly wore
+himself. I likewise presented him with a small English dagger, with
+a mother-of-pearl handle; and my favor was so high with him, that he
+used always to wear my gift, and I, to return the compliment, wore his.
+
+"The climate of Sarawak is good, and is seldom hot: the last eight or
+ten days were oppressive, but until then we could sleep with a blanket,
+and seldom found it too warm in the day. Rain at this season falls
+in great quantities; and from imprudence, our crew suffered on their
+first arrival from colds and rheumatism; but getting more careful,
+we had latterly no sick-list.
+
+"Farewell to Sarawak! I hope to see it again; and have obtained a
+promise from the rajah that he will go with me to Borneo, and show
+me every part of the country by the way.
+
+"I may here state the result of some inquiries I have made respecting
+the government of Borneo. The form of government may be considered
+aristocratic rather than oligarchical: it is ruled by the sultan, but
+his power is kept in check by four great officers of government. These
+are, the Rajah Muda Hassim, the Bandar, in whose hands is the
+government of the country; Pangeran Mumin, the Degadon, the treasurer,
+or, as Mr. Hunt says, controller of the household of the sultan;
+Pangeran Tizudeen, Tumangong, or commander-in-chief; and Pangeran
+Kurmaindar, the Pen-damei, or mediator and interceder. This officer
+is the means of communication or mediation between the sultan and
+his Pangerans; and in case of condemnation, he sues for the pardon or
+mercy of his sovereign. Mr. Hunt, in his short but excellent paper on
+Borneo, mentions some other officers of state: I will not follow him,
+but in the names, as well as duties of these officers, his account
+agrees with my information. Further than this, I have not yet learned,
+therefore state not; for I am not _manufacturing_ a book, but gaining
+information. I may add, however, that these offices are elective,
+and not hereditary: as far as I yet know, I am inclined to believe
+the election rests with the chief Pangerans of the state; not only
+those in office, but others. When I reach Borneo I can procure more
+ample details.
+
+"_23d._--Quitted the Royalist at the entrance of the Morotaba,
+and accompanied by Pangerans Subtu and Illudeen, set sail for the
+river Sadung.
+
+"The town called Songi is of considerable size, and the entire
+population along the river may certainty be reckoned at from 2000
+to 3000 persons, independent of Dyaks. The country has a flourishing
+aspect, but the soil is represented as bad, being soft and muddy. There
+is a good deal of trade from this river, and it annually sends several
+large prahus to Singapore: two were lying off the town when we arrived,
+and two others had sailed for that place twenty days before. The
+produce of the country is bees-wax, birds'-nests, rice, &c. &c., but
+they seem to be procured in less abundance than in the other contiguous
+rivers. There is nothing peculiar about the Malay population, except
+that, generally speaking, it struck me, they appeared better off than
+the people of Sarawak, or others I have visited hereabouts. We ascended
+the river by night, anchored a short distance from the Songi, in a
+tide-way like a sluice, and entered the smaller river shortly after
+daylight. Having sent the Pangerans ahead to advise Seriff Sahib of our
+arrival, we pulled slowly up to the campong of the Data Jembrong, where
+we brought up to breakfast. Data Jembrong is a native of Mindanao,
+an Illanun and a pirate; he is slightly advanced in years, but stout
+and resolute-looking, and of a most polite demeanor--as oily-tongued
+a cut-throat as a gentleman would wish to associate with. He spoke
+of his former life without hesitation, and confessed himself rather
+apprehensive of going to Singapore. He was remarkably civil, and sent
+us a breakfast of some fruit, salt fish, stale turtles' eggs, and
+coffee sweetened with syrup; but spite of all this, his blood-thirsty
+education and habits prejudiced me against him. Breakfast finished,
+we went forward to visit Seriff Sahib, who received us in an open
+hall; promised to get us as many animals as he could now; regretted
+our short stay, and assured me he would collect more by the time I
+returned. Among these is to be a mias pappan, living or dead. I at
+the same time offered ten dollars for the skeleton belonging to the
+hand already in my possession, and a less sum for the parts. Being the
+first Europeans Seriff Sahib had ever met, he was rather puzzled to
+know what we were like; but we had every reason to be satisfied with
+his kindness and the civility of his people: the inhabitants, though
+crowding to see us, are by no means intrusive, and their curiosity
+is too natural to be harshly repressed. I need hardly remark here
+how very erroneously the position of the Sadung river is laid down in
+the charts, it being placed in the bay, to the westward of Santobong,
+and nearly in the position of the Samatan river.
+
+"_25th._--The last night was passed off Datu Jembrong's house, and I
+left him with a firm impression that he is still a pirate, or at any
+rate connected with them. He resides generally at Tawarron, to the
+northward of Borneo Proper, where his wives and children now are,
+and he has come here to superintend the building of a prahu. The
+people about him speak of his pursuits without disguise, and many
+informed us the prahu near his house is intended for a piratical
+vessel. Nothing could exceed the polite kindness of our rascally host,
+and I spent the rainy evening in his house with some satisfaction,
+acquiring information of the coast to the northward, which he is well
+able to give.
+
+"In the morning we dropped down with the last of the ebb to the mouth
+of the Songi, and took the young flood to proceed up the Sadung. Beyond
+the point of junction with the Songi the Sadung retains an average
+breadth of from three-quarters of a mile to a mile. The banks continue
+to be partially cleared, with here and there a few Dyaks residing in
+single families or small communities on their ladangs or farms. The
+Dyak campong, which terminated our progress up the stream, consists
+of three moderately long houses inhabited by Sibnowans. The manners,
+customs, and language of the Sibnowans of the Sadung are the same as
+those of their Lundu brethren; they are, however, a wilder people,
+and appear poor. Like other Dyaks, they had a collection of heads
+hanging before the entrance of their chief's private apartments. Some
+of these heads were fresh, and, with the utmost _sang-froid_, they
+told us they were women's. They declared, however, they never took any
+heads but those of their enemies, and these women (unhappy creatures)
+had belonged to a distant tribe. The fresh heads were ornamented with
+fowl's feathers, and suspended rather conspicuously in separate rattan
+frames of open work. They professed themselves willing to go with
+me up the river to the mountains; and on the way, they informed me,
+were some large Malay towns, beside some more campongs of their own
+countrymen. Farther up they enumerated some twenty tribes of Dyaks,
+whose names I thought it useless to preserve. Late in the evening we
+set off on our return, and anchored once again near Datu Jembrong's
+house.
+
+"_26th._--Again visited Seriff Sahib. His name and descent are
+Arabic; his father, an Arab, having married a daughter of the Borneo
+Rajah. The Malays evidently honor this descent, and consider his birth
+very high. His power, they say, equals his family; as he is, in some
+measure, independent; and were he to instigate the Sadung country to
+take arms against Borneo, it is very probable he would overthrow the
+government, and make himself Sultan of Borneo. In person, this noble
+partakes much of his father's race, both in height and features, being
+tall and large, with a fine nose and contour of face. His manners are
+reserved but kind; and he looks as if too indolent to care much about
+acquiring power; too fat for an active traitor, though a dangerous
+man to oppress. We were the first Europeans he had ever seen; but,
+on our second visit, he lost much of his previous reserve, and
+was curious in examining our arms and accoutrements. We, as usual,
+_exchanged_ presents; mine consisting of some nankeen, red cloth,
+knife, scissors, and handkerchief; while he gave me the shield of a
+great Kayan warrior, a Bukar spear, a goat, fowls, and our dinner
+and breakfast daily. He promised me specimens of the arms of all
+the Dyak tribes, and plenty of animals, particularly my much-desired
+mias pappan; and I, in return, agreed to bring him two small tables,
+six chairs, and a gun. Subsequently to our interview he sent me a
+tattooed Dyak, the first I had seen. The lines, correctly and even
+elegantly laid in, of a blue color, extended from the throat to his
+feet. I gained but little information; yet the history of the poor
+man is curious, and similar to that of many other unfortunates. He
+represented himself as a chief among his own people in the country
+of Buyat, five days' journey up the Cotringen river (_vulgo_ Coti
+river). Going in his canoe from the latter place to Banjamassim, he
+was captured by Illanun pirates, with whom he was in bondage for some
+time, but ultimately sold as a slave to a resident of Sadung. It was
+now five years since he became first captive; but having lately got
+money enough to buy his liberty, he is again a freeman; and having
+married, and turned to the religion of Islam, desires no longer to
+revisit his native country. The language of the tribe of Buyat he
+represents as entirely Malay. I made him a small present for the
+trouble I had given him, and he departed well content.
+
+"About three o'clock in the afternoon we had a heavy thunder-storm,
+with lightning as vivid as the tropics produce. Torrents of rain
+descended, and continued a great part of the night; but, sheltered by
+our kajangs or mats, we managed to keep tolerably dry. Indeed, the
+voyager on this coast must be prepared for exposure to heavy rains,
+and considerable detention from thick and cloudy weather. The latter
+obstruction, of little moment or even agreeable to those making a
+passage, is a cause of much vexation in surveying the coast, as for
+days together no observations are to be had.
+
+"_27th._--About 7 A. M. we quitted Songi, and dropped down as far as
+Tanjong Balaban, a low point forming the larboard entrance into the
+Sadung river, and bounding the bay, which lies between it and Tanjong
+Sipang. Coming to this point gave us a good offing for our return,
+and enabled me to take a round of angles to finish the survey as far
+as this point and Pulo Burong, which lies off it. We crossed over
+the sand flats with a light breeze, and reached the Royalist at 4
+P.M. In the evening the Datu Jembrong, who had preceded us from Sadung,
+spent the evening aboard. He expressed his willingness to accompany
+me next season: whether I shall take him is another question; but,
+could he be trusted, his services might be highly useful.
+
+"Our Pangerans arrived early this morning from Sadung; and to-morrow
+was fixed for our departure, when an unforeseen occurrence caused a
+farther detention. The day passed quietly: in the evening I was ashore,
+and took leave of the Pangerans Subtu and Illudeen, who returned to
+Sarawak, leaving the Panglima Rajah to pilot us out. The first part of
+the night was dark; and the Panglima in his prahu, with twelve men,
+lay close to the shore, and under the dark shadow of the hill. About
+nine, the attention of the watch on deck was attracted by some bustle
+ashore, and it soon swelled to the wildest cries; the only word
+we could distinguish, however, being 'Dyak! Dyak!' All hands were
+instantly on deck. I gave the order to charge and fire a gun with a
+blank cartridge, and in the mean time lit a blue light. The gig was
+lowered, a few muskets and cutlasses thrown into her, and I started
+in the hope of rescuing our poor Malay friends. The vessel meanwhile
+was prepared for defence; guns loaded, boarding-nettings ready for
+running up, and the people at quarters; for we were ignorant of the
+number, the strength, or even the description of the assailants. I
+met the Panglima's boat pulling toward the vessel, and returned with
+her, considering it useless and rash to pursue the foe. The story is
+soon told. A fire had been lit on the shore; and after the people had
+eaten, they anchored their boat, and, according to their custom, went
+to sleep. The fire had probably attracted the roving Sarebus Dyaks,
+who stole upon them, took them by surprise, and would inevitably have
+cut them off but for our presence. They attacked the prahu fiercely
+with their spears; five out of twelve jumped into the water, and swam
+ashore; and the Panglima Rajah was wounded severely. When our blue
+light was seen they desisted; and directly the gun fired, paddled
+away fast. We never saw them. The poor Panglima walked aboard with a
+spear fixed in his breast, the barb being buried, and a second rusty
+spear-wound close to the first; the head of the weapon was cut out,
+his wounds dressed, and he was put to bed. Another man had a wound from
+a wooden-headed spear; and most had been struck more or less by these
+rude and, luckily, innocuous weapons. A dozen or two of Dyak spears
+were left in the Malay boat, which I got. Some were well-shaped, with
+iron heads; but the mass simply pieces of hard wood sharp-pointed,
+which they hurl in great numbers. Fire-arms the Dyaks had none,
+and during the attack made no noise whatever; while the Malays, on
+the contrary, shouted lustily, some perhaps from bravery, most from
+terror. The force that attacked them was differently stated; some
+said the boat contained eighty or a hundred men, others rated the
+number as low as fifty; and, allowing for an exaggeration, perhaps
+there might have been thirty-five--not fewer, from the number of
+spears thrown. Being fully prepared, we set our watch, and retired
+as usual to our beds; the stealthy and daring attack, right under
+the guns of the schooner, having given me a lesson to keep the guns
+charged in future. The plan was well devised; for we could not fire
+without the chance of hitting our friends as well as foes, and the
+deep shadow of the hill entirely prevented our seeing the assailants.
+
+"_29th._--I considered it necessary to dispatch a boat to Sarawak to
+acquaint the rajah with the circumstance of the attack made on his
+boat. The wound of the Panglima was so severe, that in common humanity
+I was obliged to wait until all danger for him was past. He was soon
+well; and, as with natives in general, his wound promises favorably; to
+a European constitution a similar wound would be imminently dangerous.
+
+"_30th._--Took the long boat, and sounded along the edge of the sand;
+soundings very regular. In the evening Mr. Williamson returned in
+the gig, and a host of Pangerans; the Pangeran Macota at the head. He
+urged me much to go and see Muda Hassim. The rajah, he said, desired
+it so much, and would think it so kind, that I consented to go up
+to-morrow. I am very desirous to fix their good feelings toward us: and
+I was prompted by curiosity to see the rajah's _menage_ as his guest.
+
+"_October 1st._--We had a heavy pull against tide, and arrived at
+Sarawak about 4 P.M. We had eaten nothing since breakfast at 8; and we
+had to sit and talk, and drink tea and smoke, till 8 in the evening;
+then dinner was announced, and we retired to the private apartments--my
+poor men came willingly too! The table was laid _a l'Anglaise_, a good
+curry and rice, grilled fowls, and a bottle of wine. We did justice
+to our cheer; and the rajah, throwing away all reserve, bustled about
+with the proud and pleasing consciousness of having given us an English
+dinner in proper style; now drawing the wine; now changing our plates;
+pressing us to eat; saying, 'You are at home.' Dinner over, we sat,
+and drank, and smoked, and talked cheerfully, till, tired and weary,
+we expressed a wish to retire, and were shown to a private room. A
+crimson silk mattress, embroidered with gold, was my couch: it was
+covered with white gold-embroidered mats and pillows. Our men fared
+equally well, and enjoyed their wine, a luxury to us; our stock of
+wine and spirits having been expended some time.
+
+"_2d._--Once more bade adieu to our kind friends; reached the vessel
+at 4 P.M., and got under weigh directly. At dusk anchored in the
+passage between the sands.
+
+"_3d._--Five A.M. under weigh. Clear of the sands about mid-day,
+and shaped our course for Singapore.
+
+"_4th._--Strong breeze from w.s.w. Beating from leeward of Datu to
+Pulo Murrundum, in a nasty chop of a head sea."
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+    Summary of information obtained during this
+    visit to Borneo.--Geographical and topographical
+    observations.--Produce.--Various Dyak tribes.--Natural
+    history.--Language.--Origin of Races.--Sail from
+    Singapore.--Celebes.--Face of the country.--Waterfall.
+
+
+Mr. Brooke's journal continues his observations on the people and
+country he had just left; and, I need hardly say, communicates much
+of novelty and interest in his own plain and simple manner.
+
+"_Oct. 5th._--Just laying our course. I may here briefly
+recapitulate the information acquired during the last two months and
+a half. Beginning from Tanjong Api, we have delineated the coast as
+far as Tanjong Balaban, fixing the principal points by chronometer and
+observation, and filling in the details by personal inspection. The
+distance, on a line drawn along the headlands, may be from 120 to
+130 miles, the entire coast being previously quite unknown.
+
+"Within this space are many fine rivers, and some navigable for
+vessels of considerable burden, and well calculated for the extension
+of commerce, such as Sarawak, Morotaba, and Sadung. The others, equally
+fine streams, are barred, but offer admirable means for an easy inland
+communication; these are the Quop, Boyur, Riam, Samarahan, Lundu,
+Samatan, &c. In our excursions into the interior of the island, most
+of these streams have been ascended to a distance of 25 or 30 miles,
+and some further. We traced the Samarahan river for 70 or 80 miles from
+its mouth, and passed through portions of the intermediate streams of
+the Riam, Quop, and Boyur. The Morotaba, which is but another mouth
+of the Sarawak, we passed through several times from the sea to its
+junction with that river. The Lundu and Sadung rivers were likewise
+ascended to the distance of near 30 miles; and plans of all these
+rivers have been taken as accurately as circumstances would permit,
+by observations of the latitude and longitude, and various points,
+and an eye-sketch of the distance of each reach and the compass
+bearing. The entrances into the Sarawak and Morotaba were carefully
+examined, and the former accurately laid down. The productions of
+the country attracted our attention, and the articles best fitted
+for commerce have been already enumerated. Among these are, first,
+minerals; say gold, tin, probably copper, antimony-ore, and fine
+white clay for pipes. Secondly, woods of the finest descriptions,
+for ship-building, and other purposes; besides aloes wood (_lignum
+aloes_), and arang or ebony wood, canes, and ratans. To these may be
+added, among vegetable productions, sago, compon, rice, &c., &c.
+
+"The wild nutmeg was found growing on the islands of Sadung and
+Sumpudin in abundance and perfection, proving that by cultivation it
+might be brought into the market as cheap, and probably as good,
+as those produced in the Moluccas. We have various specimens
+of ores and stones, which, on being tested, may prove valuable
+commodities. Among these is decomposed granite rock (I believe),
+containing minute particles of what we conceive to be gold, and an
+ore believed to be copper. Besides the articles above enumerated,
+are birds' nests and bees' wax in considerable quantities, and others
+not worth detailing here. We have been able, during our residence
+with the Borneons, to continue on the most friendly terms with them,
+and to open a field of research for our subsequent inquiries in the
+proper season. My attention has been anxiously directed to acquiring
+a knowledge of the Dyak tribes; and for this purpose I passed ten days
+among them at Lundu. I have made such vocabularies of the language of
+the Sibnowans and Lundus as my means allowed; and a further addition
+of their various dialects will furnish, I conceive, matters of high
+importance to those interested in tracing the emigration of nations. I
+may here briefly notice, that the nation of Kayans, included under the
+common denomination of Dyak, are a tattooed race, who use the sumpitan,
+or blow-pipe; while the other Dyak tribes (which are very numerous)
+are not tattooed, and never use the blow-pipe.
+
+"The arms and instruments of many tribes are in my possession; and
+among the Sibnowans I had the opportunity of becoming acquainted with
+their habits, customs, and modes of living.
+
+"The appellation of the Dyak tribes near the coast is usually the
+same as the rivers from which they originally came. The Dyaks of
+Sibnow come from the river of that name, just beyond Balaban Point,
+though large communities are dispersed on the Lundu and the Sadung. The
+same may be said of the Sarebus tribe (the most predaceous and wild
+on the coast), which has powerful branches of the original stock on
+the Skarran river. Beyond Point Balaban is a bay--between that point
+and Point Samaludum; the first river is the Sibnow; the next the
+Balonlupon, which branches into the rivers of Sakarran and Linga;
+passing Tanjong Samaludum you come to the two islands of Talison;
+and between it and the next point, or Banting Marron, lies the Sarebus
+river. Between Banting Marron and Tanjong Siri are the Kaleka river,
+a high mountain called Maban, and then Rejong, the chief river of the
+Kayans. I may here likewise correct some of the statements and names
+usually current in England. The Idaan, represented as a Dyak tribe,
+are a hill people, and probably not Dyaks; and the name Marat is
+applied by the natives of Borneo to the various wild tribes, Dyaks
+and others, without any specific meaning.
+
+"In natural history the expedition has done as much as was in its
+power, by forming collections of birds, animals, and reptiles; but
+these collections are as small as our means. Specimens of woods and
+seeds have been preserved; but the season was not the proper one for
+flowers, as very few indeed were seen. The specimen of the hand of
+the mias pappan and the head of an adult mias rombi will, I believe,
+go far to establish the existence of an animal similar to the Pongo
+of the Count Buffon. I have little doubt that I shall be able in the
+ensuing season to establish the fact, or set it at rest forever;
+though I confess myself greatly inclined to think that the former
+will be the case. I here leave the coast with an excellent prospect
+for the coming year; and I would not now have quitted it so soon,
+but for the want of provisions, added to which, the change of the
+monsoon, bringing squally and dark weather, greatly interferes with
+our further progress in surveying.
+
+"_Nov. 22d, 1839._--The Malayan language has been compared to the
+_lingua franca_ of Europe. They are both, indeed, used by various
+nations in their commercial transactions; but, beyond this, nothing
+can be more unjust or absurd than the comparison. The _lingua franca_
+is a jargon compounded at random, devoid of grammar or elegance; the
+Malayan, on the contrary, is musical, simple in its construction,
+and well calculated for the expression of poetry. It boasts many
+dialects, like the Italian, of superior softness, and, like the
+Italian, it is derived from many sources, refining all to the most
+liquid sounds by the addition of a final vowel. I fully concur with
+Mr. Marsden in his opinion that the Malayan tongue, though derived
+from the Sanscrit, the Arabic, the Hindoostani, &c., &c., is based
+on the language which he calls the Polynesian; a language which may
+be considered original (as far as we know), and which embraces so
+vast an extent of geographical surface. The proof of this rests
+mainly on the fact that the simple wants of man, as well as the
+most striking features of nature, are expressed in the Polynesian;
+while the secondary class of ideas is derived from the Sanscrit, or
+some other language, and usually grafted in a felicitous manner on the
+original stem. By an original language, I must be understood, however,
+to mean only a language which can not be derived from any other
+known tongue. I seek not to trace the language of Noah, or to raise
+a theory which shall derive the finished and grammatical Sanscrit,
+the pure and elegant Greek, from some barbarous stock, whether Celtic
+or Teutonic. Such inquiries are fitted for those with leisure and
+patience to undertake a hopeless task, and learning enough to achieve
+better things. When we look for the origin of languages we are lost,
+for those existing afford us no help. They present some affinities,
+as might be expected; but their discrepancies are irreconcilable; and,
+amid many equally good claims, who shall be able to demonstrate the
+only one which is right? Supposing even that all languages agreed as
+to primary ideas, it would be difficult to determine the original; but
+when this primary class of ideas is expressed by sounds entirely and
+totally different, the task becomes utterly hopeless, and the labor
+as vain as that of Sisyphus. Indeed, it would be very difficult to
+show how languages, derived from one stock, could possibly differ so
+far in their expression of the simplest ideas and wants as not to be
+mutually traceable: and truly, until this is done (which I conceive
+impossible), I am content to rest in the belief that there are more
+original languages _than one_--a conclusion agreeable to common sense,
+and consonant with the early history of the Hebrews.
+
+"To trace the original identity of distant races, and their early
+migrations, through the affinity of language, is indeed a limited
+task compared with the other, but one both feasible and useful. To
+further this labor, the smallest additional information is valuable;
+and the dialects of the rude people inhabiting the interior of the
+islands of Borneo and Celebes would be highly important. Previously,
+however, to instituting such a comparison, as far as in my power, I
+propose taking a brief glance at the different races whose languages
+may be included under the common name of Polynesian.
+
+"In the first place, the Malayan. Issuing from the interior of Sumatra,
+there is reason to conjecture, and even facts to prove, that originally
+the dialect of Menangkabau resembled the other dialects of its
+birthplace. The gradual extension of a warlike race gave a polish to
+the language; additional wants, increasing luxury, extended knowledge,
+and contact with the merchants of many Eastern nations, all combined
+to produce the Malayan in its present form. But, during the progress
+of this change, the radical Polynesian stock remained; and we find,
+consequently, that the words necessary to mankind in their earliest
+stage bear a striking and convincing resemblance to the dialects of
+Rejong and Lampung, in Sumatra. Subsequent improvements were largely
+adopted from the Sanscrit and the Arabic; but the fact of the primary
+ideas being expressed in the Polynesian must preclude the conclusion
+of either of these being the source whence the Malayan is derived,
+its improvement and extension being alone referable to them. Marsden
+positively states his inability to trace the Polynesian to any other
+Eastern language; and, at the same time, he has demonstrated, in
+what he considers a convincing manner, the identity of this language
+from Madagascar and the islands of the Pacific to the Philippines
+and Sumatra.
+
+"It may here be incidentally remarked, that while so many authors are
+endeavoring to prove that the Asiatic archipelago was peopled from the
+Western Continent, [8] they overlook the fact of the radical difference
+of language. Unless the roots of the language can be traced either to
+India, Cambodia, or other parts, it must follow, as a matter of course,
+that the islands were peopled at a time previous to the introduction of
+the language now spoken on the Continent; else how are we to account
+for the simple dialects of a rude people being radically distinct
+from the language of the mother country? If the Dyaks of Borneo
+and the Arafuras of Celebes and New Guinea speak a dialect of the
+Polynesian, it will go far to prove an original people as well as an
+original language, that is, as original as the Celtic, the Teutonic,
+the South American; original because not derived from any known source.
+
+"These brief remarks on the Malayan will, I believe, apply to the
+language of the Island of Java, which, equally improved and enlarged by
+the addition of Sanscrit and Arabic words, and differently modified,
+retains, nevertheless, its radical Polynesian stock and its distinct
+written character, as do likewise the dialects of the islands of Bally
+and Lombock. The districts of Rejong, Lampung, &c., in Sumatra, retain
+the original language in a much higher degree, possess distinctive
+written characters, and have little intermixture of Sanscrit or
+Arabic. Celebes, or Bugis-land, with a distinct language and character,
+will probably be found to follow the same rule; and the Philippines,
+including Mindanao, according to Marsden, possess the same language,
+though altered and modified into the Tagala tongue.
+
+"Madagascar, so far removed, exhibits in its language a dialect of
+Tagala, or, strictly speaking, of Polynesian; and the South Sea islands
+present striking and almost convincing proofs of the same origin.
+
+"The inquiry ought to be pushed to the languages of the Mexicans and
+Peruvians of South America; and, as far as our knowledge permits,
+their identity established or disproved; for the language of this
+by-gone people would go far toward tracing the course of emigration,
+it being evident that a strong argument would be raised in favor of
+the migration proceeding from east to west, if the language is common
+to South America and Sumatra, and not traceable to any country of
+the Continent of India.
+
+"It remains, however, to inquire into the language of the interior
+tribes of Borneo, Celebes, and New Guinea; and, on such inquiry,
+should they be found to possess the same primary roots as the rest, I
+believe the conclusion must ultimately be arrived at of the existence
+of a Polynesian language common to this vast geographical extent,
+and distinct from the languages of Asia. In tracing this identity,
+we can only, of course, find it in few instances in the cultivated
+Javanese and Malayan languages. Discrepancies must naturally be great
+from the intermixture, from early recorded times, of all languages
+in the archipelago; but, nevertheless, if the radical affinities be
+striking, they will be conclusive in establishing the original identity
+of all the races before mentioned; for, without this original identity,
+how can we account for these affinities of language? It may, indeed,
+be urged that this language has gradually crept into the dialects of
+Java and Menangkabau. But, in the first place, the affinities will
+be found in the very roots of the language--in the expressions for
+the primary and necessary ideas, which seldom alter in any people;
+in the next, there is a high degree of improbability in supposing
+a rude dialect to supplant a substantial portion of a more polished
+one; and, thirdly, we must not overlook the collateral evidence of the
+similarity of conformation pervading the entire race from Polynesia to
+the archipelago--distinct alike from the Caucasian and the Mongolian.
+
+"In tracing the identity of this language, we may reckon the dialects
+of the Dyaks of Borneo, &c., as the lowest step of the ladder; those
+of the Pacific islands next; and so through the dialects of Sumatra and
+Tagala, up to the Malayan and Javanese. For this purpose, a comparative
+view of all must be attained; and Eastern scholars should point out,
+when possible, the words taken from Sanscrit and other languages. For
+my own part, these remarks are made as a sketch to be enlarged on,
+and to assist in obtaining the vocabularies of the Dyaks and Arafuras.
+
+"_Dec. 6th._--In looking over Marsden's admirable Introduction to his
+Malayan Grammar, I find I have taken many of his views in the foregoing
+remarks; but I consider that his opinions may be pushed to conclusions
+more extended than he has ventured upon. Having described the 'exterior
+circumstance' of the Malayan language, he proceeds to point out those
+more original languages from whence we may presume it to be derived.
+
+"'The words of which it consists may be divided into three classes,
+and that two of these are Hindoo and Arabic has been generally
+admitted. The doubts that have arisen respect only the third, or
+that original and essential part which, to the Malayan, stands in the
+same relation as the Saxon to the English, and which I have asserted
+to be one of the numerous dialects of the widely-extended language
+found to prevail, with strong features of similarity, throughout
+the archipelago on the hither side of New Guinea, and, with a less
+marked resemblance, among the islands of the Pacific Ocean.... To
+show the general identity, or radical connection of its dialects,
+and, at the same time, their individual differences, I beg leave to
+refer the reader [9] to the tables annexed to a paper on the subject
+which I presented, so long ago as the year 1780, to the Society of
+Antiquaries, and is printed in vol. vi. of the _Archaeologia_; also,
+a table of comparative numerals, in the appendix to vol. iii. of
+Captain Cook's last voyage; and likewise to the chart of ten numerals,
+in two hundred languages, by the Rev. R. Patrick, recently published
+in Valpy's _Classical, Biblical and Oriental Journal_.'
+
+"Again, Marsden states:
+
+"'But whatever pretensions any particular spot may have to precedence
+in this respect, the so wide dissemination of a language common to all
+bespeaks a high degree of antiquity, and gives a claim to originality,
+as far as we can venture to apply that term, which signifies no more
+than the state beyond which we have not the means, either historically
+or by fair inference, of tracing the origin. In this restricted sense
+it is that we are justified in considering the main portion of the
+Malayan as original, or indigenous, _its affinity to any Continental
+tongue not having yet been shown_; and least of all can we suppose
+it connected with the monosyllabic, or Indo-Chinese, with which it
+has been classed.'
+
+"When we find an original language bearing no traces of being derived
+from any Continental tongue, we must conclude the people likewise to
+be original, in the restricted sense, or to have emigrated with their
+language from some source hitherto unknown. The Sanscrit and Arabic
+additions to the original stock are well marked, though the period
+of the introduction of the former is hidden in darkness. It may be
+inferred, however, that it came with the Hindoo religion, the remains
+of which are yet in existence. It is evident that the question resolves
+itself into two distinct branches: first, the original language, its
+extent, the coincidence of its dialects, its source, &c.; secondly,
+its discrepancies, whence arising, &c.; together with the inquiry into
+the probable time and mode of the introduction of the Sanscrit. With
+the latter of these inquiries I have nothing to do; on the former
+subject I may collect some valuable information by adding the dialects
+of the savage tribes in the interior of Borneo and Celebes.
+
+"The alphabets of the island of Java, of the Tagala, and the Bugis
+of Celebes, are given by Corneille, Le Brun, Thevenot, and Forrest."
+
+Of Mr. Brooke's sojourn at Singapore it is unnecessary to speak; and
+I accordingly resume my extracts with his ensuing voyage from that
+port, and again for the Indian archipelago, but contenting myself,
+for reasons which need not be entered into at length, with only
+that portion of his excursion to Celebes and among the Bugis which
+particularly bears upon his Borneon sequel.
+
+"_Dec. 7th, 1839._--Off Great Solombo. Never was there a more tedious
+passage than ours has been from Singapore. Sailing from that place on
+the 20th of November, we have encountered a succession of calms and
+light winds--creeping some days a few miles, and often lying becalmed
+for forty-eight hours without a breath to fill the sails. Passing
+through the straits of Rhio and Banca, and watering at the islands of
+Nanka, we stood thence for Pulo Babian, or Lubeck, lay a night becalmed
+close to the Arrogants Shoal, of which, however, we saw nothing,
+owing, probably, to the smoothness of the water. The depths are
+greater than laid down on Horsburgh's chart, varying from thirty-six
+to thirty-eight fathoms. A calm now keeps us off the greater Solombo,
+which it is my intention to visit when in my power.
+
+"_8th._--Drifted past Solombo in the calm, and, reluctant to return,
+I continued on my voyage with a light breeze from the eastward. This
+island is well laid down: from the sea we made its longitude 113 deg. 31';
+Horsburgh gives it 113 deg. 28', which, considering that both observations
+were made afloat, is a near enough approximation. The land is low, with
+a single hill, showing round from the westward, flat or wedge-shaped
+from the eastward. The smaller Solombo is low: both wooded.
+
+"_10th._--In sight of Laurots islands.
+
+"_11th._--In the evening stood within four miles of the southern island
+of Laurots. These islands are high and steep, covered with wood, and
+uninhabited. The easternmost island seems, by bearings, badly laid
+down, being not far enough to the southward and eastward. The southern
+island is called by the Bugis, Mata Siri; the eastern, Kadapangan;
+the northern one, Kalambow. A few rocks and islets lay off them;
+water deep, and apparently clear of all danger.
+
+"_15th._--Turatte Bay. After experiencing continued calms and light
+winds, and falling short of water, we at length reached this bay, and
+anchored in 7 1/2 fathoms. The first impression of Celebes is highly
+favorable. The mountains present a bold outline, and rise in confused
+masses, until crowned by what is commonly called _Bonthian Hill_. The
+sides of the mountains slope gradually to the sea, and present an
+inviting and diversified aspect of wood and cleared land. I dispatched
+a boat for water to a small village; and the crew were well received
+by the natives, after they became assured that they were not pirates.
+
+"The outline of this bay, in Norie's chart, is not badly laid down; but
+on either side there is great room for improvement and survey. Turatte
+Bay may be fairly so called, as the district (or _negri_) generally
+bears that name. The larboard point of Turatte Bay (approaching)
+is called Malasaro, which comes next to Tanjong Layken in the
+charts. The starboard point is Tanjong Uju Loke, and from Uju Loke
+the land runs low to the point of Galumpang, the entrance of a river
+marked in the charts. From Uju Loke (named Bolo Bolo in Norie's chart)
+the coast-line runs for 12 or 15 miles to Bolo Bolo, which space is
+entirely omitted. Bolo Bolo forms the entrance of Bonthian Bay.
+
+"_16th._--Bonthian Bay. Called Banthi by the natives: is in lat. 5 deg.
+37' S.; long. 119 deg. 33' E.
+
+"The bay is pretty well laid down by Dalrymple. The small Dutch fort,
+or intrenchment, stands rather on the eastern bight of the bay, and
+is composed of a few huts, surrounded by a ditch and green bank. Two
+guns at each corner compose its strength, and the garrison consists of
+about thirty Dutchmen and a few Javanese soldiers. We were cordially
+and hospitably received by the officers, and, after a great deal
+of trouble and many excuses, here procured horses to carry us to
+the waterfall. Bonthian Hill is immediately over this place; a flat
+space of rice-ground, some miles in extent, only intervening. The
+hill (so called) may with more propriety be designated as a range
+of mountains, which here attain their utmost height and sink down
+gradually almost across the peninsula. The view is most attractive;
+the green and refreshing rice-grounds in the front and behind, the
+slopes of the mountain and its various peaks, verdant grass, wooded
+chasms, and all the inequalities which mark a mountain region. I am
+very anxious to mount to the summit; but so many difficulties are
+thrown in the way, that I almost despair--horses and guides are not
+to be procured. The Dutch say the natives are lazy: the natives say
+they dare not go without authority--either way we are the losers;
+but the officers certainly exert themselves in our favor. Coming
+into this bay, there is some difficulty in distinguishing the fort;
+but coming from the westward, its position may readily be known by
+steering for two lumps on the S.E. declivity of the mountain.
+
+"_18th._--Got ashore by seven o'clock to start for the waterfall;
+till nine we were detained by want of horses, but after much trouble
+the animals were procured, and off we started. Our party consisted
+of three doctors (him of the fortification, a German gentleman,
+Treacher, and Theylingen) and myself, with native guides. The road
+lay for a short way along the beach, then struck into the thicket,
+and we commenced a gradual ascent. The scenery was most striking and
+lovely; glades and glens, grassy knolls and slopes, with scattered
+trees, and the voice of a hidden river which reached our ears from
+a deep valley on the left hand. Proceeding thus for some distance,
+we at length plunged into the wood, and descending a short space,
+found ourselves by the sides of the stream below the waterfall. Here,
+breakfast being finished, we all stripped to our trowsers, entered the
+water, and advanced along the bed of the river to the fall. The banks
+on either hand, steep and woody, prevented any other mode of approach,
+and the stream, rushing down and falling over huge rocks, rendered the
+only available one any thing but easy. At times we were up to the arms,
+then crawling out and stealing with care over wet and slippery stones,
+now taking advantage of a few yards of dry ground, and ever and anon
+swimming a pool to shorten an unpleasant climb. In this manner we
+advanced about half a mile, when the fall became visible; thick trees
+and hanging creepers intervened; between and through the foliage we
+first saw the water glancing and shining in its descent. The effect
+was perfect. After some little further and more difficult progress,
+we stood beneath the fall, of about 150 feet sheer descent. The wind
+whirled in eddies, and carried the sleet over us, chilling our bodies,
+but unable to damp our admiration. The basin of the fall is part of a
+circle, with the outlet forming a funnel; bare cliffs, perpendicular on
+all sides, form the upper portion of the vale, and above and below is
+all the luxuriant vegetation of the East; trees, arched and interlaced,
+and throwing down long fantastic roots and creepers, shade the scene,
+and form one of the richest sylvan prospects I have ever beheld. The
+water, foaming and flashing, and then escaping amid huge gray stones
+on its troubled course--clear and transparent, expanding into tranquil
+pools, with the flickering sunshine through the dense foliage--all
+combine to form at scene such as Tasso has described. [10]
+
+"Inferior in body of water to many falls in Switzerland, it is superior
+to any in sylvan beauty; its deep seclusion, its undisturbed solitude,
+and the difficulty of access, combine to heighten its charms to
+the imagination. Our descent was like our upward progress. Having
+again dressed ourselves, we rested for a time, and then started
+for Bonthian--wearing away the rest of the day shooting amid the
+hills. Theylingen and myself procured many specimens, and returned
+laden with our spoil, and charmed with our day's excursion. The
+waterfall is called Sapo, from the neighboring green peak of that
+name. The height of our resting-place (not the highest point of the
+day's ascent) was 750.5 feet, by Newman's two barometers; yet this is
+the bottom of the mountain on its western slope. The officers dined
+with us; they are very polite and kind; and we retired early to rest,
+all the better for our excursion.
+
+"_19th._--At 6 A.M. went with the Dutch officers shooting, and reached
+the same stream which forms the waterfall. The scenery delightful;
+water cool, and pleasant for bathing, a luxury I enjoyed in high
+perfection. Aboard again to a late breakfast."
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+    Dain Matara, the Bugis,--Excursions in Celebes.--Dispute
+    with the Rajah's son-in-law.--Baboon shot.--Appearance of the
+    country.--Visit the Resident.--Barometrical observations.--The
+    Bugis.--Geography.--Coral reefs.--Visit the Rana of
+    Lamatte.--Population and products of the country.
+
+
+"I may here, indulge in a brief episode to introduce my Bugis
+companion, Dain Matara,--which properly I should have done long
+since,--a man well born, and, for his country, affluent and educated:
+he offered at Singapore, to accompany me on this expedition,
+refusing all pay or remuneration, and stating that the good name
+to be acquired, and the pleasure of seeing different places, would
+recompense, him. At first, I must own this disinterestedness rendered
+me suspicious; but conceiving that the greatest utility might accrue
+from his assistance, I agreed to take him with his servant. Our long
+passage seemed to make us well acquainted, and, I believe, raised a
+mutual confidence. Dain, cheerful, good-tempered, and intelligent,
+gained daily on my esteem; and, by the time we reached Bonthian,
+I was rejoiced that he accompanied me.
+
+"On this day we succeeded in procuring horses and guides for the
+_hill_, as it is called.
+
+"_20th._--By 8 A.M. our preparations were complete, and we mounted our
+horses; a motley group we formed, composed of Treacher, Theylingen,
+and myself, two seamen (Spence and Balls), Dain Matara, a son-in-law
+of the Bonthian Rajah, and six footmen. Provisions for four days
+were on one of the horses, and a goodly stock of fowling-pieces,
+beside my mountain barometer. The plain was soon cleared; and three
+hours' ride by a good horse-path brought us to the village of Senua,
+consisting of a dozen houses. We found the inhabitants hospitable,
+and took refuge from a heavy squall of wind and rain in the best
+house the place afforded. During the rain the thermometer sunk to
+76 deg., but rose directly afterward. At half-past one the rain cleared
+away, but we were detained until three by the Bugis getting their
+dinner. During this time I strayed along the sparkling stream which
+runs by the village, and after enjoying a bathe, called to horse, in
+order to proceed. Great was my surprise, however, to be told by the
+rajah's son-in-law that he supposed we were going back. A discussion
+arose,--he declaring there was no road for the horses, and that we
+could not go farther; while I insisted, if he would not advance, I
+should continue my journey on foot. After much time had been lost,
+our guide set off slowly and reluctantly, and we proceeded for two
+or three miles, when, finding our head turned to the southward,
+and the road descending, I again called a halt, and was once more
+told it was not possible to mount farther. A scheme had been formed
+to lead us round about, and take us gradually down, until too late
+to mount again. A long parley ensued; both parties seemed resolute;
+and it finished by our unloading the baggage-horse, and making a
+small parcel of necessaries to carry on foot. Our guide, however,
+never intended matters to go so far, and we finished at last by taking
+half the horses, and allowing him (the rajah's son-in-law) to descend
+with the rest. This being done, we had to retrace our road nearly to
+Senua; and a little before sunset our party crossed an awkward stream,
+and struck into the path up the mountains.
+
+"A short walk brought us to Lengan Lengang about dusk, where we put
+up for the night. For the first time, this day I saw the cockatoo
+in his wild state; I was within easy shot of two of them, but the
+stream lay between us, and I felt some compunction at shooting these
+favorite birds.
+
+"Lourikeets were in great plenty, and many varieties of pigeons
+and doves, beside other birds. Near Lengan Lengang we encountered a
+community of dusky baboons, many of them very large and powerful:
+after a hard scramble I got within shot of them; on my firing the
+first barrel, the young ones and females made off, but the leaders
+of the band disdained to retreat, and, with threatening gestures and
+grimaces, covered the retreat of their party. The consequence was,
+I sacrificed one of these heroes, of a large size: he fell from
+the branch on which he was seated into a deep valley, and his fall
+completed the rout of the rest. Spence, in the mean time, having
+arrived, I dispatched him to secure the prize; but at the bottom
+of the valley the baboons again showed themselves, and manifested
+every inclination to fall on him; another barrel put them to flight,
+and between us we dragged the fallen hero to the horses.
+
+"The village of Lengan Lengang consists of about a dozen houses, is
+situated in a nook of the hills, and surrounded by cocoanut-trees. We
+were accommodated in the principal house, and treated with every
+hospitality. The people of the hills are poor, though their land is
+fertile, and produces abundance of rice and Indian corn. Theft is
+said to be common, especially of horses, and the care of the horses
+belonging to travelers devolves on the villagers; for, in case a
+horse is stolen, a fine is imposed on the population in general. To
+prevent this misfortune, our hosts kept playing, as long as we could
+bear it, on an instrument like a clarinet; but at twelve o'clock,
+after trying in vain to sleep, we were obliged to stop the noise and
+risk the horses.
+
+"This instrument is about three feet long, with five or six holes,
+and a flat mouthpiece on the cane-tube; the sound is musical when
+gently breathed into, but in their usual mode of playing, it emits
+frightful shrieks. During the night the thermometer sunk to 69 deg.,
+and we were glad of our blankets.
+
+"_21st._--Rose between five and six. Took some barometrical
+observations, and at half-past six continued our upward way. As far as
+Lengan Lengang the country presents beautiful woodland and mountain
+scenery, with luxuriant vegetation, thickly wooded valleys, and
+sparkling streams. The flats and valleys are occupied by rice-grounds,
+and the pasturage is of the very finest description for all sorts
+of cattle: the grass short and rich. Lengan Lengang is the last
+point where the cocoanut or other palms is seen; but there it grows
+remarkably well, and attains a great height. Above this point the wood,
+generally speaking, becomes smaller, and the vegetation more coarse,
+the hills being covered with a rank high grass, and ferns, similar to
+those in England. Three hours' slow traveling brought us to the village
+of Lokar, situated at the foot of the peak of that name. I mounted,
+while breakfast was preparing, nearly to the top, and up to the belt
+of thick wood which surrounds the last 100 or 150 feet. Observations
+were repeated here, showing a great fall of the mercury, and afterward
+taken at the village. Lokar consists of a few scattered huts, situated
+amid gardens of fruit and vegetables: the mango, the guava, the jack,
+and the plantain, with cabbages and Indian corn, compose the stock of
+the inhabitants; the latter constitutes their principal food, and is
+granaried for use in large quantities, not only in the house, but on
+frameworks of bamboo without, on which it is thickly hung in rows,
+with the head downward, to protect it from the weather. The highest
+summit, called Lumpu Balong, was visible when we first arrived, some
+miles in advance: at breakfast-time the clouds entirely covered it,
+and rolled down upon Lokar in heavy rain, driving us into a miserable
+hut for shelter.
+
+"During the rain the thermometer fell to 70 deg.. At 3 P.M. started for
+some huts we saw at the foot of Lumpu Balong, having first sent our
+horses back to Lengan Lengang, being assured their farther progress
+was impracticable. When, however, our guide from Lokar understood
+our intention of reaching Lumpu Balong, he objected to proceed, on
+the plea that the village in advance was inhabited by people from
+Turatte. We managed to coax him on, and, after two and a half hours'
+walk, reached Parontalas. The country, ascending gradually, becomes
+more and more wild; the wood stunted; and the streams, finding their
+way through masses of rock, leave strong traces of their occasional
+violence. Parontalas stands on the edge of the forest which skirts
+Lumpu Balong, from which it has not long been retrieved. It consists
+of a few scattered huts, far apart. Potatoes, tobacco, and coffee
+are grown here, the former in great abundance. Like the rest of the
+people, their food consists of Indian corn; and, as in the other
+villages, they breed horses. Our host of Parontalas was very polite,
+and gave us some fowls and the accommodation of his house; the latter,
+indeed, was needful, for we were all badly provided with covering,
+and the mountain air was raw and cold. To our request for guides to
+ascend the mountain he replied, that it was necessary to consult the
+head man of the district, who lived some little distance off. In the
+interim we made ourselves very happy, determined to ascend with or
+without a guide or guides. We lay down at nine, in order to be ready
+for the morning's work, the thermometer standing at 59 deg. in the house.
+
+"_22d._--At five, when we rose, the thermometer stood at 56 deg. in the
+air. The head man had arrived, and willingly gave us guides, warning
+us only of the difficulty of the ascent. Nothing could exceed the
+kindness and attention of this simple old man. He remembered the time
+the English had the country, and spoke of his people's respect for our
+nation, and their regret that we had left the country. At 6 A.M. we
+started, and, after walking about a mile, plunged into the belt of
+forest which environs Lumpu Balong. From six till half-past two,
+we were alternately ascending and descending, scrambling over rocks
+or fallen timber, or cutting a path through the most tangled thicket
+that ever tore the wayfarer. To add to our difficulty, during the
+latter half of the ascent, we could procure no water, which caused us
+considerable suffering. At length, however, we stood at the summit of
+Lumpu Balong, and looked, on either side, over a vast sea of fleecy
+clouds which rolled beneath. The top is a narrow ridge, covered with
+stunted trees and luxuriant moss; and a second peak to the westward,
+of rather less elevation, is separated from it by a declivity. I
+climbed to the top of a tree to look along the mountain, and make
+certain that we were at the highest point; and having convinced myself
+of this, I proceeded with the barometric observations, which were
+concluded by 3 P.M.; for it was highly necessary to get down before
+night overtook us in the dreary and inhospitable forest. Our thirst,
+too, was tormenting, and increased by hearing the fall of a torrent
+deep in the valley to the northward.
+
+"As far as I could observe, the northern face of the mountain was
+perpendicular, and the ascent on that side would have been attended
+with greater difficulty than from the point we chose. Our way down was
+easier, and the descent was made as expeditiously as the nature of the
+ground would allow. Having fairly worn our shoes off our feet, we were
+pierced by brambles and thorns in a cruel manner. Our guide, in going
+down, discovered a tree with a bee-hive in it containing great store of
+honey. The Bugis instantly attacked the tree, on seeing which my first
+impression was, that it would be prudent to retreat to a distance;
+but their composure induced me to remain; and, to my surprise, when
+the tree was laid open, the honey was taken out in large quantities,
+and the bees brushed off the comb without offering to sting. Though
+flying round about us, and on the hands of all the people, they were
+quite innocent of harm; and I conclude, therefore, they were different
+from the common honey-bee. The honey was excellent, and refreshed us
+for a few minutes, but ultimately only added to our thirst. At length,
+about five, we reached a stream of water, and quenched our thirst with
+draughts of the coolest and most limpid mountain stream. The Bugis,
+though, like ourselves, they had been, without any water from nine
+o'clock in the morning till five in the evening, refused to drink,
+alleging that it was highly injurious after eating honey! Glad were we,
+just at dark, to get clear of the forest; and a short walk farther
+brought us to our temporary dwelling. We were much knocked up, and
+very much torn with the thorns. A brief dinner and a delicious cigar,
+and we lay down to sleep--not even incommoded by the cold, which kept
+us awake the last night.
+
+"_23d._--Having, through mistake, forgotten to bring up any money,
+I had no means of repaying the obligations received from these
+simple hill-people except _by promises_. My old friend ordered the
+guide of yesterday to accompany us to the plains, to receive his own
+payment, and to bring some things, for others, up there. At ten we
+hobbled forth, very foot-sore, and lacking proper covering for our
+feet. The prospect of four or five hours' walk to Lengan Lengang
+was very unpleasant; and in proportion to our expected pain was
+our gratification on meeting _all_ our horses within three miles
+of Parontalas--_all_ the horses, which all the men swore could not,
+by any possibility, ascend, were there; and though without saddles
+and bridles, or the Bugis, we were too glad to mount. We went down
+by another road. Four hours brought us to Lengan Lengang, where we
+rested for two hours, and, remounting, reached Bonthian at about seven
+o'clock in the evening. Thus concluded this interesting excursion
+into a hill-region, where we attained the summit of Lumpu Balong,
+never before reached by European. The Dutch officers informed me that
+three successive residents of Bonthian had attempted it and failed.
+
+"Before I conclude, I may take a brief survey of the country. The
+hills are generally rounded or flat at top, and not offering any
+rugged or broken peaks. The scenery about Senua and Lengan Lengang
+is the perfection of woodland, with the picturesque characteristics
+of a mountain region; the climate admirably suited, thence to the
+summit, for Europeans, and capable of producing most European and
+tropical plants to perfection. Coffee plantations on these hills
+might be undertaken with certainty of success, and there is much in
+the character of the natives which would facilitate the operation. To
+the westward of Lokar, and somewhat lower, is a fine extensive plain,
+which we just skirted coming down; it was cultivated in every part,
+apparently with rice. The vegetable productions of the hills I have
+briefly mentioned; but I may add that the wild raspberry was found,
+and that wild guavas grow in the greatest abundance, as well as
+oranges and grapes.
+
+"The animal kingdom, of course, we had no time to examine; but
+the babi rupa is said to be found in the higher regions; and in
+the forest, toward the summit of Lumpu Balong, we saw the dung of
+wild cattle, which, I am told, are a species of urus. The birds we
+saw were, paroquets of two sorts, viz., the lourikeet and a small
+green paroquet; a large green pigeon, specimens of which we got;
+the cream-colored pigeon of Borneo, beside many others.
+
+"The geological formation of the region I must leave to others. I
+brought down some specimens of the rocks and loose stones, which are,
+I believe, pummice; if so, I presume the formation volcanic, similar
+to Java.
+
+"_24th._--Called on the resident, and saw the rajah.
+
+"_25th._--Christmas, with his jolly nose and icy hands. Here it is
+hot enough! Were I to live in this country, I should retire for the
+season up in the mountains. Dined with the Resident of Bonthian; by no
+means surprised that he and his congeners had failed in their attempt
+to climb the mountain: the resident is a native! In the evening,
+celebrated the day with all sorts of sports.
+
+"_26th._--Mid-day, quitted Bonthian, and ran to Boele Comba or Compa.
+
+"_27th._--I have little to say of Boele Comba. It is situated in the
+bight of the bay, eastward of Bonthian. There appears to be much,
+confusion an Horsburgh's Directory about the latitude and longitude,
+and the hill called after the place. This hill is the last of the
+mountain-range, somewhat detached, covered with wood, of moderate
+elevation, and peaked. From our anchorage, two miles from the fort,
+it bore N.N.W. The fort is similar to the one at Bonthian, the country
+pretty, and nearly level. The Bonthian mountains (_i. e._ Lumpu Balong
+and the range) show steep and well in the background. Game abounds,
+by report. Europeans are subject to complaints of the eyes, and
+occasionally to fever. Any vessel running in should be very careful,
+for the charts are defective, and Boele Comba reef is said to project
+farther to the westward of the fort than laid down.
+
+"I here subjoin a list of our barometric observations, the upper
+barometer reduced to the rate of the lower and standard one:--
+
+
+
+    _Senua, 20th December, 1839._
+
+       Bar.          A.   D.
+
+    1. 30.054       86   87  3h 15m P.M.
+    2. 28.385       79   80
+
+
+    _Lengan Lengang, 21st December._
+
+       Bar.          A.   D.
+
+    1. 30.119        79  78.5   6h 30m A.M.
+    2. 27.988        70  69.5   6h 0m   "
+
+
+    _Lokar Peak, 21st December, 100 feet below summit._
+
+       Bar.          A.   D.
+
+    1. 30.095        90   90  10h 30m A.M.
+    2. 25.975        79   79
+
+
+    _Hill on the way to Lumpu Balong, 22d December._
+
+       Bar.          A.    D.
+
+    1. 30.144        90    90     Mean between 8h and noon.
+    2. 23.612 ...    66    65.5   10h 40m A.M.
+
+
+    _Lumpu Balong Peak, 22d December._
+
+       Bar.          A.    D.
+
+    1. 30.146        89.5  90.5  2h 0m   P.M.
+    2. 23.718        64    63.5  2h 30m   "
+
+
+
+_28th._--Leaving Boele Comba after breakfast, we shaped our course
+for Point Berak.
+
+"With the richest country, the natives of these places are poor, and
+they bear no good-will to their rulers. It is likewise certain that few
+active measures are resorted to for forwarding the development of the
+native character and local resources. The resident is a Macassar-born
+native, and this fact alone speaks volumes for the mode and manner of
+government. The people of the country I found a kind and simple race;
+and though they are accused of pride and laziness by their masters, I
+could not, circumstances taken into consideration, discover any trace,
+of the latter vice, and the former I can readily forgive them. That the
+Bugis are not an indolent race is well proved by their whole conduct,
+wherever circumstances offer any inducement to exertion. Even here,
+the cleared country and the neat cultivation prove them far otherwise;
+and traces are visible everywhere on the mountains of their having
+been more highly cultivated than at present. Coffee plantations
+once flourished, and being destroyed during a war, years ago, have
+never been renewed. Inclosures and partition walls in decay are very
+frequent, marking the former boundary of cultivation. That they are
+independent enough to be proud, I honor them for! The officers allowed
+they were courageous, and one designated them as '_fier comme un
+Espagnol_;' and, on the whole, no doubt exists in my mind that they
+are people easily to be roused to exertion, either agricultural or
+commercial; their sullen and repulsive manners toward their masters
+rather indicating a dislike to their sway, and the idleness complained
+of only proving that the profits of labor are lower than they ought
+to be.
+
+"Nothing so strongly marks the degradation of a race or nation as
+a cheerful acquiescence under a foreign rule. The more virtuous,
+the more civilized, the more educated a people, the more turbulent,
+indolent, and sullen, when reduced to a state of subjection; the
+fewer qualities will they have to please their masters, when foreign
+rule is oppressive, or looks solely to the advantage of the country
+of the conquerors, and not of the conquered. There is no race will
+willingly submit: the bayonet and the sword, the gallows and the whip,
+imprisonment and confiscation, must be constantly at work to keep
+them under.
+
+"Leaving Boele Comba, as I before said, we shaped our course for
+Tanjong Berak, passing between that point and the north island. The
+passage is excellent, clear of all danger, as far as we could see,
+with deep water. The rocks reported to exist by Horsburgh, and put
+down on Norie's chart, have no existence. The Bugis prahus always use
+this channel, and know them not; and the captain of a Dutch cruiser
+informed me that he had often run through the passage at night,
+and that it was clear of all danger or obstruction.
+
+"My own observation went to verify the fact, for every part of the
+passage appears deep and clear, and we passed over the spots where
+these rocks are marked. Approaching Tanjong Berak, there is a sandy
+beach, where a vessel may get anchorage in case the wind dies away. The
+tides in the channel are strong; here, and along the south coast, the
+ebb runs from the eastward, the flood from the west. Having cleared
+the channel, we hauled into the Bay of Boni, which, although running
+in a north and south direction, has some headlands extending to the
+eastward. There are two places marked on the chart, viz. Berak and
+Tiero; but these, instead of being towns or villages, are names of
+districts; the first, reaching from Tanjong Berak, about 15 miles,
+till it joins Tiero; Tiero, extending from the northern confine of
+Berak to Tanjong Labu, 15 miles in all. To the northward and eastward
+is a high island called Balunrueh. From Tanjong Berak the water along
+the coast is very deep; no soundings with 50 fathoms. Toward evening we
+went into Tiero Bay, a pretty secluded spot. The southern part of the
+bay is foul, having a reef visible at low water, The northern headland
+has a spit running from it, with 14 fathom half a mile (or little more)
+off. Within the bay there is no bottom with 50 fathom till near its
+northern extremity, where the water shoals suddenly. Running in, in
+a squall, we got into 3 1/4 fathom, where we anchored. This country
+belongs to the Dutch as far as Point Labu.
+
+"_29th._--Calm all day. Sounded the bay: the southern point has a
+steep coral reef nearly a quarter of a mile off. The southern part of
+the bay is inclosed by a reef, part of which seems to me artificial,
+for the purpose of catching fish, and is shallow: outside the reef
+the water is deep dose to. The western shore is lined by a reef
+close to it, and the water is deep. The center part of the bay is
+very deep; and within 100 yards of where we lay we got no bottom
+at 17 fathoms. The next cast was 6, and the next 3 fathoms--hard
+clay bottom. A small river discharges itself, in the northern part,
+inside the anchorage: there is a considerable depth within, but the
+bar is shallow. The scenery on the river is beautiful; wild at first,
+and gradually becoming undulating and cultivated. Birds are plenty:
+cockatoos abound, of which I shot two. This part of the country
+possesses considerable geological interest: the hills round the bay
+are of slight elevation; and 80 or 100 feet from the sea level are
+large masses of coral rock, upheaved by some convulsion.
+
+"_30th._--Under weigh. Brought up in 23 fathoms, amid the coral shoals.
+
+"_31st._--Visited the island of Balunrueh for sights.
+
+"Tanjong Labu is bluff and bold, and of moderate elevation. The
+land from thence trends away westward, forming a long bay, which,
+for distinction, may be called Labu Bay, at the N.W. part of which is
+the town of Songi, the principal place about here. Between Labu and
+Songi are the following countries: Kupi Kajang, Pakah, Buah, Kalaku,
+Baringan, and Magnarabunbang; each with a separate petty rajah. The
+country is moderately well cleared; about an average height, near
+the shore, of 300 feet; with few habitations about, but no towns or
+villages. The mountain range throws a spur downward to the sea in the
+vicinity of Songi and the fine peaks of Lumpu Balong; and Wawa Karang,
+with the _confusion_ of mountains, form a magnificent background to the
+prospect. From Magnarabunbang the land runs away to the eastward toward
+Tanjong Salanketo, which must be described on a future occasion. In
+the offing are several islands and numerous reefs. The principal
+island is Balunrueh, 400 or 500 feet high; bold, steep, and covered
+with trees, except at its northern extremity; where it is low, with a
+sandy point. Off this north point runs a coral reef; direction 354 deg.,
+and extent about two miles. At the S.W. angle of the island there
+is likewise a reef stretching half a mile; and the shores all round,
+for a short distance, are lined with coral, outside of which the water
+is apparently very deep. We could get no soundings with a hand lead,
+half a mile to the westward.
+
+"Off Balunrueh, to the S.E., is the islet of Liang Liang; next to
+Liang Liang, Tanbunoh, which is larger; then Cadingareh Batantampeh
+(the largest), Cotingduan Lariahriah, and two islands to the northward
+called Canallo. Balunrueh and Batantampeh have both indifferent
+fresh water; the former near the low point at the north end. From
+the S.W. end of Liang Liang a reef runs out. The bearing, from the
+small hill, over the watering place of Balunrueh, was 77 deg.. The reef
+extends to 104 deg., and stretches to the southward beside: near Liang
+Liang it is narrow. Its limits I could not define.
+
+"Between Liang Liang and Tanbunoh a narrow reef, and spits from most
+of the islands. Two patches lay off Balunrueh about two miles and a
+half: the first, bearing 319 deg., is narrow, and about half a mile long;
+the other smaller, and bearing 287 deg.. Part of the day we passed on
+Balunrueh was very hot; but we got satisfactory sights, and sailed
+round the island, returning to the vessel about six in the evening.
+
+"I must now return to Labu, to give some account of the channel
+between the reefs; as, from the appearance of the charts, it would
+seem impossible to navigate the western side of the bay. Having
+passed Tanjong Labu at a distance of 3 1/2 or 4 miles, get the
+flat-topped hill called Bulu Tanna ahead. Close to the Bulu Tanna,
+in the foreground, is another smaller hill, with two remarkable tufts
+on the top: this hill, just open to the eastward of Bulu Tanna,
+is the leading mark for Songi, which stands to the westward. This
+mark will lead clear, or very nearly so, of all the reefs; but as
+there is uncertainty in the distance from Tanjong Labu, it may be
+necessary to diverge from the straight course in order to avoid some
+of the patches. In the daytime the coral is seen with the greatest
+ease; and a vessel with a lookout aloft, and a breeze, may proceed
+with safely. The first reef is on the starboard hand; part was dry,
+and shoal-water about. This first patch is in the proximity of the
+great reef called Melompereh, which runs to the eastward. Beside
+these, the channel is occasionally lined by patches on either hand;
+but is nowhere narrower than a mile and a half, and is anything but
+difficult navigation, so far, in clear weather.
+
+"_Jan. 4th, 1840._--Arrived off Songi on the 1st, and dispatched a
+boat to the old Rajah, or Rana, of Lamatte. Our answer was, that not,
+having been to Boni, she feared receiving us, as she felt inclined;
+but if we would come to her house, she should be glad to see us. On
+the following day, accordingly, we paid our visit at her residence,
+which is situated about four miles up the river Tanca.
+
+"The old lady is about sixty-five years of age, and (as she herself
+informed us) very poor. Her house, indeed, bears every mark of great
+poverty; having a leaky roof, and not sufficient matting to cover
+the bamboo floors. She was kind, and seemed pleased to see us; said
+I should henceforward be her son, and that nothing but her fear of
+the Boni Rajah prevented her receiving me in the best way in her
+power; but pointing to the roof and to the floor, she repeated,
+'I have nothing.' I presented her with such articles as I thought
+would be acceptable to her; and, in return, she gave me a sarong.
+
+"The population of the country is considerable. The last district
+I mentioned was Magnarabunbang. The town of that name, on the
+sea-side, consists of forty-five houses, beside a roving population of
+Badjows. Along the coast to the eastward, and close to Magnarabunbang,
+is the river of Songi. Proceeding up this shallow river, the first
+village is Tacolompeh, situated on the right bank, and consisting of
+twenty houses; nearly opposite the village of Pangassa, of thirteen
+houses; and farther up, about four miles from the river's mouth,
+stands Songi, consisting of 164 houses on the right bank, and 60
+on the left. These places are all on the low ground, and surrounded
+with cocoanut-trees.
+
+"Joining the district of Magnarabunbang, on the coast, is Lamatte, the
+rajanate of our old friend. The river, like the Songi, is shallow, and
+running through very low ground. On the left bank is Luppa, consisting
+of twenty-five houses; then, on the right, Ulo, twenty-two houses;
+and above Ulo comes Ullue, of twelve houses. Nearly opposite Ullue is
+Balammepa, with thirty houses, superior to the others, and inhabited by
+merchants who have made money in trading voyages. This village sends
+yearly two prahus to Singapore. Just above Ullue stand seven houses;
+and above Balammepa is Tanca, the residence of the Rajah of Lamatte,
+consisting of ten houses. The streams, as I have said, are shallow,
+and the ground low, neatly cultivated with Indian corn, and abounding
+in cocoanut-trees. Behind Magnarabunbang there is a narrow strip
+of low ground, which becomes wider as it advances to the eastward,
+with here and there moderate elevations.
+
+"The chief product of the country is coffee, which is grown in great
+quantities on the hills, but brought down as it ripens, when it
+is collected by the Bugis merchants for their yearly shipments. The
+yearly produce is stated to be 2000 coyans or 80,000 peculs. The price
+is from fifteen to sixteen Java rupees the pecul; to which must be
+added the trouble and expense of storing and clearing from the inner
+skin. Tortoise-shell is brought in by the Badjows; and mother-of-pearl
+shells in any quantity there is demand for. Taking the number of houses
+in this small space, above described, the total will be 308 houses,
+which reckoned at the low estimate of eight persons for each house,
+will give 2464 inhabitants; this, however, is far below the proper
+estimate, as there are villages scattered between the rivers, and
+numbers of detached houses; in all, therefore, safely computed at
+5000 persons. The villages, with the exception of Balammepa, have
+an aspect of poverty, and the country is ravaged by that frightful
+scourge the small-pox, and likewise some cases apparently of cholera,
+from the account given of the complaint. Near the hill of Bulu Tanna
+there is a hot spring, and likewise, by the report of the natives, some
+slight remains of an old building. I regretted much not seeing these;
+but the natives, with much politeness, begged me not to go previous to
+my visit to Boni, as they would be answerable for allowing strangers
+to see the country without orders from the chief rajah. All I see
+and hear convinces me that the Rajah of Boni has great power over
+the entire country. On a friendly communication with him, therefore,
+depends our chance of seeing something of the interior.
+
+"The inhabitants here are polite, but shy and reserved: and the death
+of the Rana of Songi and the absence of the Rajah Mooda, her reported
+successor, have been against us.
+
+"_5th._--Sailing from Songi about 4 P.M., we directed our course
+for Tanjong Salanketo. The breeze was stiff, which caused us to use
+considerable precaution in sailing among the shoals. Assisted by
+a native Nacodah, by name Dain Pativi, we were enabled to keep the
+tortuous channel, of which otherwise we should have been ignorant. A
+little farther than the Tanca river is a shoal stretching from the
+shore, to avoid which we kept Canallo on our lee bow: this being
+cleared, we gradually luffed up, ran between two shoals, and passed
+several others."
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+    Mr. Brooke's second visit to Sarawak.--The civil war.--Receives a
+    present of a Dyak boy.--Excursion to the seat of war.--Notices
+    of rivers, and settlements on their banks.--Deaths and
+    burials.--Reasons for and against remaining at Sarawak.--Dyak
+    visitors.--Council of war.--Why side with the Rajah.--Mode of
+    constructing forts.--State of enemy's and Rajah's forces.--Conduct
+    of the war.
+
+
+Mr. Brooke continued his cruise for some time, and made very
+interesting collections of natural history, beside acquiring much
+insight into the native history, language, and customs, his detailed
+remarks on which it is to be hoped he will at a future day give to
+the public. He then returned to Singapore, where he was detained for
+several months by ill health; but availed himself of the opportunity
+to recopper and refit the Royalist, and set everything else in order
+for his next visit to Sarawak, the remarkable results of which are
+related in the following pages. Still sick and languid though he was,
+the very air of Borneo, and the prospect of activity, seemed to restore
+him to life, after the listless rest at Singapore, with "nothing to
+observe;" and only cheered by the kindest attentions and hospitalities
+of the inhabitants of that interesting and important settlement.
+
+On the second visit of Mr. Brooke to Sarawak, about the end of August,
+1840, he found the inhabitants in nearly the same state as at first,
+although there was much talk of reinforcements, and decisive measures
+for bringing the war to a close. The two parties lay within thirty
+miles of each other, the rebels holding the upper part of the river,
+and communication with the interior. The sultan, however, had sent down
+the Orang Kaya de Gadong to take more active measures, and his arrival
+stimulated Muda Hassim to something like exertion. This occurred
+on the fourth September, 1840, as appears by Mr. Brooke's journal,
+from which I shall give various extracts indicative not only of the
+character of my friend, whose ideas were written down at the time the
+impressions were made, but also supplying a distinct picture of the
+progress of this novel and amusing civil warfare, and demonstrating
+the unwarlike character of the Sarawak Borneons.
+
+"An army of mixed Malays and Dyaks was raised to attack the Dyak
+tribes in rebellion, and this service was successfully performed;
+the rebel Dyaks were defeated, and most of them have since come
+over to the rajah. Their forces being weakened by desertion, were
+reported not to amount to more than 400 or 500 men, in four or five
+forts situated on the river; and it now remained to drive them from
+their last stronghold of resistance. It was confidently asserted by
+the rajah and Macota, that, were it not for the underhand assistance
+of the Sultan of Sambas, who had constantly supplied them with food
+and ammunition, the insurgents would long since have been dispersed.
+
+"At the period in question they were said to be in great distress
+for want of provisions; and as a force was collecting to attack them
+from various quarters, it was greatly to be hoped that the war was
+verging to a termination. During my week's stay I have frequently
+visited Muda Hassim, and he has likewise been on board: our good
+understanding knows no interruption; and these savage, treacherous,
+bloodthirsty Borneons are our good friends, with whom we chat and
+laugh every evening in familiar converse. I find no cause to alter my
+last year's opinion, that they have few active vices; but indolence
+is the root of their evils.
+
+"_Sept. 7th._--Last night I received a strange and embarrassing
+present, in the shape of a young Dyak boy of five years old--a
+miserable little prisoner, made during this war, from the tribe of
+Brong. The gift caused me vexation, because I knew not what to do
+with the poor innocent; and yet I shrink from the responsibility of
+adopting him. My first wish is to return him to his parents and his
+tribe; and if I find I cannot do this, I believe it will be bettor
+to carry him with me than leave him to become the slave of a slave:
+for should I send him back, such will probably be his fate. I wish
+the present had been a calf instead of a child.
+
+"_9th._--Situ, my Dyak boy, seems content and happy; and judging by his
+ways, and his fondness for tobacco, he must be older than I at first
+supposed. In pursuance of my desire to restore him to his parents
+I made every inquiry as to their probable fate; but have learned
+nothing that leaves me any hope that I shall be able to do so. The
+Brong tribe having taken part with the rebels, were attacked by the
+rajah's people; and many were killed and the rest scattered. Pino,
+the Brong, knows not whether Situ's parents are alive or dead; nor,
+if the former, whither they have fled. Supposing my endeavors to
+restore the child fail, I have resolved to keep him with me, for many
+reasons. The first is that his future prospects will be better, and
+his fate as a freeman at Singapore happier, than as a slave in Borneo;
+the second, that he can be made a Christian. I can easily provide
+for him in some respectable household, or take him to England, as may
+hereafter be most advantageous for him; and at the former place he can
+always be made a comfortable servant with good training. Yet with all
+this, I cannot disguise from myself that there is responsibility--a
+heavy moral responsibility--attached to this course, that might
+be avoided: but then, _should_ it be avoided? Looking to the boy's
+interests--temporal, perhaps, eternal--I think it ought not; and so,
+provided always I cannot place him where humanity and nature dictate,
+I will take the responsibility, and serve this wretched and destitute
+child as far as lies in my power. He is cast on my compassion;
+I solemnly accept the charge; and I trust his future life may bear
+good fruit and cause me to rejoice at my present decision.
+
+"_Oct. 2d._--Lying at Sarawak, losing valuable time, but pending the
+war difficult to get away; for whenever the subject is mentioned, Muda
+Hassim begs me not to desert him just as it is coming to a close; and
+daily holds out prospects of the arrival of various Dyak tribes. The
+rajah urged upon me that he was deceived and betrayed by the intrigues
+of Pangerans, who aimed at alienating his country; and that if I left
+him, he should probably have to remain here for the rest of his life,
+being resolved to die rather than yield to the unjust influence which
+others were seeking to acquire over him; and he appealed to me that
+after our friendly communication I could not, as an Engliah gentleman,
+desert him under such circumstances. I felt that honorably I could not
+do so; and though reluctantly enough, I resolved to give him the aid
+he asked;--small indeed, but of consequence in such a petty warfare.
+
+"_3d._--I started to join Macota at Leda Tanah. At 4h. 30m. P.M. a
+pouring rain delayed us some time: and darkness setting in, rendered
+our pull a long and very disagreeable one. We did not reach Leda Tanah
+until eleven, when we found _the army_ in their boats, and a small
+fort they had built on the bank of the river. I moved into Macota's
+large boat, and slept there; while he, as commander-in-chief, went
+backward and forward from one post to another during the night.
+
+"_4th._--At Leda Tanah the river divided into two branches; one part
+running past Siniawan, and the other to the left--likewise to another
+point of the mountain-range. Above Siniawan is Sarambo, a high detached
+mountain, perhaps 3000 feet in height, with a notch in the center. Off
+Leda Tanah is a sand and pebble bank formed by the junction of the
+two streams, and the country around is well cleared for this part;
+while the graves on the right bank bear witness to the population
+of former days. It is represented to have been a flourishing place,
+and the neighborhood well inhabited, until the breaking out of this
+unhappy war. The situation is delightful, and advantageously chosen
+at the confluence of the two streams.
+
+"_5th._--Ascended that to the left for a short distance. On the
+left hand, just above Leda Tanah, is the small creek of Sarawak, the
+original settlement, and from which the larger river now takes its
+name. I intended to have returned to-day; but as the weather threatened
+another deluge, I stopped till the following morning. It was a curious
+sight to see the whole army bathe, with the commander-in-chief at
+their head, and his Pangerans. The fare of these people is anything
+but luxurious, for they get nothing but rice and salt; and they
+were thankful in proportion for the small supplies of tea, sugar,
+and biscuit I was able to spare them.
+
+"_6th._--Quitted Leda Tanah, and reached the Royalist in five hours,
+one of which we were delayed by the way. The river is remarkably
+pretty; banks cleared of jungle, with fine trees, and a view of the
+mountains. Many parts are exceedingly shallow; but the natives state
+there is a channel for a moderate-sized vessel as far as Leda Tanah."
+
+On Mr. Brooke's return on board the Royalist, he found his steward
+Rankin, who had been lingering some time, still alive; and a seaman
+named Daniel, whom he had left with a slight fever, suddenly expired
+at ten at night in a fainting fit. He writes in his journal: "It is
+difficult to allege the immediate cause of his death, which probably
+arose from some organic complaint of the heart or the brain, quite
+independent of fever. Five minutes before his decease the man's
+pulse was high and full. The steward will follow in a few days; and
+death, which has never before entered on board, will thus strike
+two blows. To me it is a satisfaction that neither is in any way
+attributable to climate.
+
+"_7th._--Muda Hassim rendered me every assistance. A grave was
+prepared, and wood for a coffin, so that by two o'clock we proceeded to
+inter the dead. His last resting-place was situated on a gently rising
+ground behind the Chinamen's houses. The ensign was placed over his
+simple bier, and he was carried by his shipmates to the grave. All who
+could be spared attended, and I performed the service--that impressive
+and beautiful service of the Church of England.
+
+"_8th._--Having the melancholy duty of yesterday over was a relief,
+only alloyed by the sad prospect of a near recurrence. I now turned
+my mind seriously to departure, having well weighed the pros and cons
+of the subject.
+
+"In the first place, the greatest advantage would result from my
+accompanying the rajah along the coast of Borneo; and if I could hope
+a reasonable time would leave him free to go there, I would wait spite
+of the season: for it is evident that by myself I should have to form
+fresh connections among the chiefs, and without that I reckon it next
+to impossible to penetrate even a moderate distance from the coast in
+a strange place. The next reason is, that it has been intimated to me
+that a rival faction, headed by Pangeran Usop, exists in Borneo Proper,
+and that that Pangeran, from my known friendship to Muda Hassim,
+might endeavor to injure me, _i. e._ kill me. At any rate, during
+Muda Hassim's absence, I should be obstructed in all my proceedings,
+and could not do more than sketch the bare coast-line. These are
+strong and cogent reasons for remaining _for a time_, if the ultimate
+object be attainable; and to these may be added my own feelings--my
+reluctance to quit the rajah in the midst of difficulty and distress,
+and his _very very sad face_ whenever I mention the topic.
+
+"On the other hand must be weighed the approach of the adverse
+monsoon, the loss of time, and the failure of provisions, which,
+though but luxuries to gentlemen which they can readily dispense
+with, are nevertheless necessaries to seamen, without which they get
+discontented, perhaps mutinous. There are good reasons on both sides.
+
+"_9th._--I sent Williamson to intimate my approaching departure;
+and when I went in the evening the little man had such a sorrowful
+countenance that my heart smote me. When I told him I would remain
+if there were the slightest chance of a close to the war, his
+countenance cleared, and he gaily repeated that my fortune and his
+would bring this struggle to an end, though others forsook him. I
+then consented to await the issue a few days longer, and to revisit
+Leda Tanah to ascertain if the news were true. It ran to the effect
+that the rebels, under the Patingi and Tumangong, are fortified at
+the foot of the mountain of Sarambo, on which hill are three Dyak
+tribes below that of Sarambo; over them Bombak; and on the summit
+the Paninjow. The Bombak and Paninjow have already, in part, joined
+Macota, and the Sarambo are to come in as to-day. These three last
+Dyak tribes deserting the rebels will leave them surrounded in their
+forts, which are commanded by the rest of the hill; and everything
+promises well, if the opportunity be vigorously used. The Sow and the
+Singe are in part at Leda Tanah, and more Dyaks daily joining. I must
+push the rajah on to action, for help from without is not likely to
+come. Yet I wish still more to accommodate matters; and if he would
+spare the leaders' lives, I believe they would lay down their arms
+on my guaranty. But though he does not say that he will kill them,
+he will listen to no terms of compromise; and when I reflect that a
+European monarch, in the same circumstances, would act in the same
+way--that the laws of my own country would condemn the men for the
+same offence--I cannot urge the subject into a personal matter.
+
+"_16th._--Rankin's (my steward's) death having been some time
+inevitable, it was a relief when the event occurred. He was cut off in
+the flower of manhood, from the effects of hard drinking, which even
+his fine constitution could not resist. I buried him near the other
+man, and had a neat inscription, with the name of the individual,
+his ship and age, placed over each.
+
+"Days passed on, but not quite unrelieved by events. And now I may
+positively state, that the war will be over in a few days, or not
+over at all. The first of these events was the desertion of the Dyaks,
+and the arrival of their chiefs with Macota. Next arrived 200 Chinese
+from Sambas, under a very intelligent capitan. Rajah Ali came next,
+bringing some ourang-outangs' heads; then Datu Naraja; and lastly,
+Pangeran Jedut from Sarebus, with the information that the Dyaks
+of that name, in consequence of a war with Linga, would not come
+here. Thus they not only refused to come themselves, but obliged the
+Linga people to stay at home to defend their country. To quiet this
+coast the Sarebus should receive a severe lesson.
+
+"_17th._--I had a large party of Dyaks on board in the evening,
+viz. the Singe, Sow, Bombak, and Paninjow, in all about fifteen men
+and two old chiefs. They ate and drank, and asked for everything,
+but stole nothing. One man wore a necklace of beads set with human
+teeth, taken of course in war, which I got from him for two yards of
+red cloth. Another was ornamented with a necklace of bears' teeth;
+and several had such a profusion of small white beads about their
+necks as to resemble the voluminous foldings of the old fashioned
+cravat. As far as I could observe, they all seemed in earnest about
+attacking Siniawan; and their allegiance to the rajah was as warm now
+(in words) as it had been heretofore defective in action.
+
+"_18th._--Proceeded in the long-boat to Leda Tanah, which we reached
+in three and a half hours' pulling, and just in time to witness the
+start of 150 Malays and 100 Dyaks of Lundu for the mountain of Sarambo,
+at the foot of which Siniawan and the enemies' forts are situated.
+
+"_19th._--Did everything in my power to urge Macota to advance
+and divert the attention of the rebels from the party going up the
+mountain, but in vain: Malay-like, he would wait.
+
+"_20th._--I have before remarked that two rivers formed a junction
+at Leda Tanah; and this day I ascended the left hand stream, or, as
+they call it, the Songi besar (_i. e._ great Songi). The scenery is
+picturesque; the banks adorned with a light and variegated foliage
+of fruit-trees; and everywhere bearing traces of former clearing and
+cultivation. In the background is the range of mountains, among which
+Stat is conspicuous from his noble and irregular shape. On our return,
+the white flag (a Hadji's turban) was descried on the mountain,
+being the prearranged signal that all was well. No news, however,
+came from the party; and in spite of the white banner Macota took
+fright at the idea that the rebels had surrounded them.
+
+"_21st._--Detachments of Dyaks are coming in. Ten of the tribe of
+Sutor were dispatched as scouts; and in a few hours returned with
+the welcome intelligence that the detachment was safe on the top
+of the mountain, and that the three tribes of Paninjow, Bombak, and
+Sarambo, had finally decided on joining the rajah, and surrendering
+their fortified houses. Soon after this news the chiefs of the tribes
+arrived with about 100 men, and were of course well received; for if
+chargeable with deserting their cause, it is done with the utmost
+simplicity, and perfect confidence in their new associates. From
+their looks it was apparent they had suffered greatly from want of
+food; and they frankly confessed that starvation was their principal
+motive for coming over. I did all in my power to fix their new faith by
+presents of provisions, &c. &c.: and I think they are trustworthy; for
+there is a straightforwardness about the Dyak character far different
+from the double-faced dealings of the Malay. Their stipulations were,
+forgiveness for the past, and an assurance that none of the Dyaks from
+the sea (_i. e._ Sarebus and Sakarran) should be employed; for they
+were, they said, hateful to their eyes. These terms being readily
+conceded--the first from interest, the second from necessity--they
+became open and communicative on the best means of attacking
+the forts. A grand council of war was held, at which were present
+Macota, Subtu, Abong Mia, and Datu Naraja, two Chinese leaders, and
+myself--certainly a most incongruous mixture, and one rarely to be met
+with. After much discussion, a move close to the enemy was determined
+on for to-morrow, and on the following day to take up a position
+near their defences. To judge by the sample of the council, I should
+form very unfavorable expectations of the conduct in action. Macota is
+lively and active; but whether from indisposition or want of authority,
+undecided. The Capitan China is lazy and silent; Subtu indolent and
+self-indulgent; Abong Mia and Datu Naraja stupid. However, the event
+must settle the question; and, in the mean time, it was resolved that
+the small stockade at this place was to be picked up, and removed to
+our new position, and there erected for the protection of the fleet. I
+may here state my motives for being a spectator of, or participator
+(as may turn out), in this scene. In the first place I must confess
+that curiosity strongly prompted me; since to witness the Malays,
+Chinese, and Dyaks in warfare was so new, that the novelty alone might
+plead an excuse for this desire. But it was not the only motive;
+for my presence is a stimulus to our own party, and will probably
+depress the other in proportion. I look upon the cause of the rajah
+as most just and righteous: and the speedy close of the war would
+be rendering a service to humanity, especially if brought about by
+treaty. At any rate much might be done to ameliorate the condition
+of the rebels in case of their defeat; for though I cannot, perhaps
+ought not to, save the lives of the three leaders, yet all the others,
+I believe, will be forgiven on a slight intercession. At our arrival,
+too, I had stated that if they wished me to remain, no barbarities
+must be committed; and especially that the women and children must
+not be fired upon. To counterbalance these motives was the danger,
+whatever it might amount to, and which did not weigh heavily on my
+mind. So much for reasons, which, after all, are poor and weak when
+we determine on doing anything, be it right or be it wrong. _If_ evil
+befall, I trust the penalty may be on me rather than on my followers.
+
+"_22d._--At daylight the fleet was astir; and in an hour the defences
+were cut down, the timber, bamboos, &c., formed into rafts ready for
+transportation, and the stockade, by breakfast-time, had as completely
+vanished as though it had been bodily lifted away by some genius of the
+Wonderful Lamp. Everything was ready for a start, and we waited lazily
+for the flood-tide; but when it did make, the usual procrastination
+ensued, and there was no move till it was near done. Then, indeed,
+we proceeded up about two-thirds of the way, and brought up with two
+good hours' daylight, in spite of my remonstrances. No place could
+be better calculated than where we rested for an attack upon boats:
+high banks covered with grass and trees offered a safe shelter for
+musketry, against which no return could be made. The night, however,
+passed away quietly.
+
+"_24th._--Dawn found us on the advance to our proper position. A thick
+fog concealed us, and in half an hour the people were on shore busy
+reerecting our fort, less than a mile from two forts of the enemy,
+but concealed from them by a point of the river. No opposition was
+offered to us; and in a few hours a neat defence was completed from
+the _debris_ of the former. The ground was cleared of jungle; piles
+driven in a square, about fifteen yards to each face; and the earth
+from the center, scooped out and intermixed with layers of reeds, was
+heaped up about five feet high inside the piles. At the four corners
+were small watch-towers, and along the parapet of earth a narrow
+walk connecting them. In the center space was a house crowded by the
+Chinese garrison, a few of whose harmless gingalls were stuck up at
+the angles to intimidate rather than to wound. While they labored at
+the body of the defence, the Dyaks surrounded it by an outer work,
+made of slight sticks run into the ground with cross binding of
+split bamboo, and bristling with a _chevaux de frise_ (if it may be
+so styled) of sharpened bamboos about breast-high. The fastenings
+of the entire work were of rattan, which is found in plenty. It was
+commenced at 7 A.M. and finished about 3 P.M., showing how the fellows
+can get through business when they choose. This stockade, varying
+in strength according to circumstances, is the usual defence of the
+Sambas Chinese. The Malays erect a simple and quicker-constructed
+protection by a few double uprights, filled in between with timber
+laid lengthwise and supported by the uprights. Directly they are under
+cover, they begin to form the ranjows or sudas, which are formidable
+to naked feet, and stick them about their position. Above our station
+was a hill which entirely commanded both it and the river; to the top
+of which I mounted, and obtained an excellent view of the country
+around, including the enemies' forts and the town of Siniawan. A
+company of military might finish the war in a few hours, as these
+defences are most paltry, the strongest being the fort of Balidah,
+against which our _formidable_ assault was to be leveled. It was
+situated at the water's edge, on a slight eminence on the right bank
+of the river; and a large house with a thatched roof and a lookout
+house on the summit; a few swivels and a gun or two were in it, and
+around it a breastwork of wood--judging from a distance, about six
+or seven feet high. The other defences were more insignificant even
+than this; and the enemies' artillery amounted, by account, to three
+six-pounders and numerous swivels; from 350 to 500 men, about half
+of whom were armed with muskets, while the rest carried swords and
+spears. They were scattered in many forts, and had a town to defend,
+all of which increased their weakness. Their principal arm, however,
+consisted in the ranjows, which were stated to be stuck in every
+direction. These ranjows are made of bamboo, pointed fine and stuck
+in the ground; and there are beside, holes about three feet deep,
+filled with these spikes, and afterward lightly covered, which are
+called patobong. Another obstacle consists of a spring formed by
+bending back a stiff cane with a sharp bamboo attached to it, which,
+fastened by a slight twine, flies forcibly against any object passing
+through the bush and brushing against it: they resemble the mole-traps
+of England. The Borneons have a great dread of these various snares;
+and the way they deal with them is by sending out parties of Dyaks
+during the night to clear the paths from such dangers.
+
+"Though I have stated the insignificant nature of the enemies' lines,
+it must not be supposed I imagined them at all inferior to our own
+resources. Our grand army consisted of 200 Chinese, excellent workmen,
+but of whose qualities as soldiers I can say nothing. They were,
+however, a stout, muscular set of men, though wretchedly armed, having
+no guns and scarcely any muskets; but swords, spears, and shields,
+together with forty long thin iron tubes with the bore of a musket
+and carrying a slug. These primitive weapons were each managed by
+two men, one being the carrier of the ordnance, the other the gunnery
+for while one holds the tube over his shoulder, the other takes aim,
+turns away his head, applies his match, and is pleased with the
+sound. Their mode of loading is as curious as the piece and its mode
+of discharge. Powder is poured in, the end knocked on the ground,
+and the slug with another knock sent on the powder, without either
+ramming or cartridge. Indeed, it is difficult to imagine any weapon
+more rude, awkward, or inefficient.
+
+"Of Malays we had 250, of whom 150 were on the Sarambo mountain,
+occupied in defending the Dyak houses. Of the hundred remaining with
+the grand army, about half were armed with muskets. A few brass guns
+composed our artillery; and in the boats were a good many swivels. The
+Dyaks amounted to about 200, of various tribes, viz., Sibnowans,
+Paninjows, Bombak, Sarambo, Kampit, Tabah, Sanpro, Suntah; but these
+were merely pioneers, and would not face the report of fire-arms. The
+Borneons, in fighting, wear a quilted jacket or spencer, which reaches
+over the hips, and from its size has a most unservicelike appearance:
+the bare legs and arms sticking out from under this puffed-out coat,
+like the sticks which support the garments of a scarecrow. Such was
+our incongruous and most inefficient array; yet with 300 men who
+would fight, nothing would have been easier than to take the detached
+defences of the enemy, none of which could contain above thirty or
+forty men. But our allies seemed to have little idea of fighting except
+behind a wall; and my proposal to attack the adversary was immediately
+treated as an extreme of rashness amounting to insanity. At a council
+of war it was consequently decided that advances should be made from
+the hill behind our fort to Balidah by a chain of posts, the distance
+being a short mile, in which space they would probably erect four or
+five forts; and then would come a bombardment, noisy but harmless.
+
+"During the day we were not left quiet. The beating of gongs, shouts,
+and an occasional shot, gave life to the scene. With my glass I
+could espy our forces at the top of the hill, pleased no doubt to
+see us coming to their support. At night loud shouts and firing from
+the rebels caused us to prepare for an attack; but it proved to be
+nothing but lights moving about the hill-side, with what intent we
+were ignorant. The jungle on the left bank having been cleared, we
+did not much expect any skirmishers; but some spies were heard near
+our boats. With this exception the night passed away unbroken on
+our part, though the rebels kept up an incessant beating of gongs,
+and from time to time fired a few stray shots, whether against an
+enemy or not was doubtful.
+
+"_25th._--The grand army was lazy, and did not take the field when
+they possessed themselves of two eminences, and commenced forts on
+each. About 11 A.M. we got intelligence that the enemy was collecting
+on the right bank, as they had been heard by our scouts shouting one
+to another to gather together in order to attack the stockades in
+the course of building. Even with a knowledge of their usual want of
+caution, I could not believe this, but walked nevertheless to one of
+the forts, and had scarcely reached it when a universal rebel shout,
+and a simultaneous beating of the silver-tongued gongs, announced,
+as I thought, a general action. But though the shouts continued loud
+and furious from both sides, and a gun or two was discharged in the
+air to refresh their courage, the enemy did not attack, and a heavy
+shower damped the ardor of the approaching armies, and reduced all to
+inaction. Like the heroes of old, however, the adverse parties spoke
+to each other: 'We are coming, we are coming,' exclaimed the rebels;
+'lay aside your muskets and fight us with swords.' 'Come on,' was the
+reply; 'we are building a stockade, and want to fight you.' And so the
+heroes ceased not to talk, but forgot to fight, except that the rebels
+opened a fire from Balidah from swivels, all of which went over the
+tops of the trees. Peace, or rather rest, being restored, our party
+succeeded in entrenching themselves, and thus gained a field which had
+been obstinately assaulted by big words and loud cries. The distance
+of one fort from Balidah was about 800 yards, and manned with sixty
+Malays; while a party of Chinese garrisoned the other. Evening fell
+upon this innocent warfare. The Borneons, in this manner, contend with
+vociferous shouts; and, preceding each shout, the leader of the party
+offers up a prayer aloud to the Almighty, the chorus (or properly
+response) being the acclamation of the soldiery. We, on our side,
+kept up a firing and hallooing till midnight, to disguise the advance
+of a party who were to seize and build a stockade within a shorter
+distance of Balidah. When they reached the spot, however, the night
+being dark, the troops sleepy, and the leaders of different opinions,
+they returned without effecting anything."
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+    Appearance of the country.--Progress of the rebel war.--Character
+    of the Sow and Singe Dyaks.--Their belief in augury.--Ruinous
+    effects of protracted warfare.--Cowardice and boasting of
+    the Malays.--Council of war.--Refuse to attack the enemy's
+    forts.--Rebels propose to treat.--The Malays oppose.--Set out
+    to attack the rebels, but frustrated by our allies.--Assailed
+    by the rebels.--Put them to flight.--Treat with them.--They
+    surrender.--Intercede with the Rajah for their lives.--Renewed
+    treachery of the Malays.
+
+
+"_26th._--I must here pause in my account of this extraordinary
+and novel contest, briefly to describe the general appearance of
+the country.
+
+"It is one delightful to look upon, combining all the requisites of
+the picturesque, viz. wood, water, mountain, cliff, and a foreground
+gently undulating, partially cultivated, and of the richest soil. The
+mountain of Sarambo, about 3000 feet in height, is the principal
+feature in the scene, situated at a short distance from the left bank
+of the river. The remainder of the ground slopes gradually; and the
+town of Siniawan, likewise on the left bank, is close to the water,
+and at the foot of the eminence called Gunga Kumiel.
+
+"The advance of the party last night was, as I have said, disguised
+by firing, drumming, and shouting from the fleet and forts; and,
+in the deep stillness of the fine night, the booming of the guns,
+the clamor of the gongs, and the outcries raised from time to time,
+came on our ears like the spirit of discord breaking loose on a fair
+and peaceful paradise. About one o'clock the noises died away, and I
+enjoyed as quiet a slumber till daylight as though pillowed on a bed
+of down in the heart of Old England. About six I visited the three
+forts. The Chinese, Malays, and Dyaks were taking their morning meal,
+consisting of half a cocoanut-shell full of boiled rice with salt. The
+Dyaks were served in tribes; for as many of them are at war, it is
+necessary to keep them separate; and though they will not fight the
+enemy, they would have no objection to fall out with one another,
+and the slightest cause might give rise to an instant renewal of
+hostilities.
+
+"About 9 A.M. a party proceeded to the elevation previously marked,
+within 300 yards of Balidah, and worked quietly till 2 P.M., by which
+time they had made considerable progress; and being then reinforced,
+they soon finished this new stockade, with a strong face toward
+their adversaries, and an outer fence. This erection, however, being
+below the brow of the hill, is useless as a post whence to assault
+Balidah; and to-morrow another stockade is to be made close to it on
+the summit, the present being intended to cover the working party at
+the next. The enemy, about 4 P.M., having discovered the stockade,
+opened a fire for half an hour; but finding it ineffectual, they sank
+into their usual apathy. It is difficult to attribute this quietude
+to any other cause than weakness; and they are doubtless harassed by
+the want of Dyak light troops, as they are unable to oppose stockade
+to stockade. Our party, by these successful advances, seem to gain
+confidence; and it must soon come to an issue one way or other. To make
+it favorable, I have sent for two six-pounder carronades, guns of vast
+caliber here, together with a small addition to our force. I had the
+curiosity to inquire of Macota the progress of his former campaign,
+when he had 1000 Malays with only a few Dyaks. He represented the
+enemy as active and daring then, and very different from their want
+of spirit now. They had, he declared, combats by sea and by land;
+stockade was opposed to stockade, and the fighting was constant and
+severe; but he never lost a man killed during the two months, and
+only boasted of killing five of the enemy! The principal danger in
+Malay warfare is the 'Mengamuk' (_Anglice_, running a-muck), which
+is the last resource of a desperate man.
+
+"_27th._--The night passed quietly as usual. About 6 A.M. I started for
+the hills, and inspected each post in turn. They are about commencing
+another fort. I visited the spot to reconnoiter it; and the enemy
+opened a fire directly they perceived me, which we returned. They
+shot wretchedly ill; and the position is good, but exposed. About 10
+A.M. they again began to fire from their fort, and detached thirty
+or forty men, who crept out between our forts in order to interrupt
+the work. The Malays, however, received them steadily; while the
+Chinese placed them between two fires, and, by a discharge from a
+tube, knocked down _one_ man. The rebels showed anxiety to possess
+themselves of their fallen comrade, while the opposite party shouted,
+'Cut off his head;' but he was carried off; and the enemy, when they
+had saved his body, fled in all directions, dropping a number of
+their small bamboo powder flasks on the way. Some fierce alarms were
+given of an attack by water, and I went up the river to ascertain
+really whether there was any mischief to be expected; but there was
+no appearance of any adversary. A slack fire from the hill proclaimed
+that our work was going on there; and toward evening all was in repose.
+
+"_28th._--The stockade was completed in the evening, with ranjows stuck
+round the outer defence. It was excellently situated for battering
+Balidah; but Balidah, I fear, is too loosely constructed to be battered
+to the best advantage. During the day the Sow and Singe Dyaks joined,
+to the amount of about 150 men, and other tribes have been gradually
+dropping in; so that altogether there are not fewer than 500 of these
+men joined to our equipment. Most of them show all the characteristics
+of a wild people; never openly resisting their masters, but so
+obstinate that they can always get their own way in every thing;
+to all threats and entreaties opposing a determined and immovable
+silence. Many of them depend upon us for their food and salt, and
+their applications are endless. Three women of Singe are our regular
+pensioners; for their sex excludes them from the rations granted to the
+men. By these means we had many excellent opportunities of judging of
+their habits and temper. Among all these tribes the language differs
+but slightly--so slightly, indeed, that it is needless to note the
+variations in detail. They have the same superstition about particular
+birds, and I often heard this omen alluded to in conversation; but
+their birds are not the same as those of the sea Dyaks.... The chief
+of the Sarambo, explaining his reasons for leaving the rebels, urged
+the constant unfavorable omen of the birds as one. Often, very often,
+he said, when he went out, the bird cried, and flew in the direction
+of Siniawan, which will be explained by what I have before stated;
+for if they hear the bird to the right, they go to the left, and _vice
+versa_; so that the bird may be considered as warning them from evil.
+
+"The Sow Dyaks brought in the head of an unfortunate Malay whom
+they had decapitated in the jungle. This species of warfare is
+extremely barbarous, and in its train probably brings more evil
+than the regular campaigns of civilized nations. Not that it is
+by any means so fatal to human life directly; but it is the slow
+poison which wastes the strongest frame, the smoldering fire which
+does its work of destruction slowly but surely. Year after year it
+is protracted; few fall in open fight, but stragglers and prisoners
+are murdered; and while both weak parties, gradually growing weaker,
+hold their own ground, the country becomes a desert. First, trade
+stagnates, agriculture withers, food becomes scarce, all are ruined
+in finances, all half-starved and most miserable--and yet the war
+drags on, and the worst passions are aroused, effectually preventing
+the slightest concession, even if concession would avail. But each
+combatant knows the implacable spirit--the deep desperation--of the
+other too well to trust them; and if at length the fortunes of famine
+decide against them, they die rather than yield; for a Dyak can die
+bravely, I believe, though he will not fight as long as life has any
+prospect. This is also the case here: for the rebel chiefs know there
+is no pardon, and the Bandar is disgraced if he fails. It is indeed
+a slow process, but one of extermination.
+
+"_29th._--Our guns arrived with a welcome reinforcement. In the evening
+I dropped up the river to reconnoiter; but the adversary discovered
+us, as we were dressed in white clothes.
+
+"_30th._--Fort not finished. All quiet.
+
+"_31st._--Got the guns and ammunition up, and while fixing them opened
+a fire from one of our swivels to overbear the fire of the enemy. The
+little piece was well served; and, in a quarter of an hour, we silenced
+their fire entirely, and knocked about the timber considerably, making
+a breach which several men could enter together. Seeing the effect, I
+proposed to Macota to storm the place with 150 Chinese and Malays. The
+way from one fort to the other was protected. The enemy dared not
+show themselves for the fire of the grape and canister, and nothing
+could have been easier; but my proposition caused a commotion which it
+is difficult to forget, and more difficult to describe. The Chinese
+consented, and Macota, the commander-in-chief, was willing; but his
+inferiors were backward, and there arose a scene which showed me the
+full violence of the Malay passions, and their infuriated madness when
+once roused. Pangeran Houseman urged with energy the advantage of the
+proposal, and in the course of a speech lashed himself to a state of
+fury; he jumped to his feet, and with demoniac gestures stamped round
+and round, dancing a war-dance after the most approved fashion; his
+countenance grew livid, his eyes glared, his features inflamed; and,
+for my part, not being able to interpret the torrent of his oratory,
+I thought the man possessed of a devil, or about to 'run a-muck.' But
+after a minute or two of this dance, he resumed his seat, furious and
+panting, but silent. In reply, Subtu urged some objections to my plan,
+which was warmly supported by Illudeen, who apparently hurt Subtu's
+feelings; for the indolent, the placid Subtu leapt from his seat,
+seized his spear, and rushed to the entrance of the stockade, with
+his passions and his pride desperately aroused. I never saw finer
+action than when, with spear in hand, pointing to the enemy's fort,
+he challenged any one to rush on with him. Houseman and Surradeen
+(the bravest of the brave) like madmen seized their swords to inflame
+the courage of the rest--it was a scene of fiends--but in vain;
+for though they appeared ready enough to quarrel and fight among
+themselves, there was no move to attack the enemy. All was confusion;
+the demon of discord and madness was among them, and I was glad to
+see them cool down, when the dissentients to the assault proposed
+making a round to-night and attacking to-morrow. In the mean time our
+six-pounders were ready in battery, and it is certain the assailants
+might walk nearly to the fort without any of the rebels daring to
+show themselves in opposition to our fire.
+
+"_Nov. 1st._--The guns were ready to open their fiery mouths, and
+their masters ready to attend on them; but both had to wait till
+mid-day, when the chiefs of the grand army, having sufficiently
+slept, breakfasted, and bathed, lounged up with their straggling
+followers. Shortly after daylight the forts are nearly deserted of
+their garrisons, who go down at the time to the water more like a flock
+of geese than warriors. The instant the main division and head-quarters
+of the army arrived at the battery, I renewed my proposal for an
+assault, Which was variously received. If the Malays would go, the
+Chinese agreed; but the Malays had grown colder and colder. In order
+to encourage them, I opened a fire to show the effect of our guns; and
+having got a good range, every ball, as well as grape and canister,
+rattled against and through the wood. I then urged them again and
+again, but in vain; that coward Panglima rajah displayed that dogged
+resolution which is invincible--an invincible resolution to do nothing;
+and the cold damp looks of the others at once told the amount of their
+bravery! A council of war was called--grave faces covered timid hearts
+and fainting spirits. The Chinese contended with justice, that in
+fairness they could not be expected to assault without the Malays did
+the same; Abong Mia was not brave enough. The Datu agreed, and Panglima
+delivered himself of a wise harangue, to the effect that, 'the last
+campaign, when they had a fort, how had the enemy fired then?--stabbed
+them, speared them, &c. &c.; and without a fort, assaulting!--how could
+it be expected they should succeed? how unreasonable they should go
+at all!' But even his stolid head seemed to comprehend the sarcasm
+when I asked him how many men had been killed during all this severe
+fighting. However, it was clear that it was no battle. We were all
+very savage, and I intimated how useless my being with them was, if
+they intended to play instead of fight. 'What,' I asked, 'if you will
+not attack, are you going to do?' Oh, the wise councils of these wise
+heads! Abong Mia proposed erecting a fort in a tree, and thence going
+'puff, puff,' down into Balidah, accompanying the words 'puff, puff,'
+with expressive gestures of firing; but it was objected, that trees
+were scarce, and the enemy might cut down the tree, fort and all. [11]
+
+"_2d._--Till two o'clock last night, or thereabouts, I sat on our
+rampart and gazed upon the prospect around, shaded with gloom. The
+doctor was with me, and we ran over every subject--the past, present,
+and the future. Such a scene--a rude fort in the interior of Borneo;
+such a night, dark but starlight--leaves an indelible impression
+on the mind, which recurs to move it even after long years. The
+morning, however, found us ready, and no one else. The fort was
+left to ourselves; we waited and waited until 2 P.M., when I was
+made aware that all thoughts of attack were at an end. Macota, for
+very shame, staid below; and I must say there was not a countenance
+that met mine but had that bashful and hang-dog look which expresses
+cowardice and obstinacy predominant, yet shame battling within. They
+were now resolved not to make the attempt; and I asked them casually
+whether they would fly a white flag, and hold a conference with
+the enemy. They caught at the alternatives; the flag was hoisted;
+the rebels were ready to _meet me_, and it was agreed that we should
+assemble on the morrow. But no sooner was the arrangement made than a
+thousand objections were started, and any thing, even attack itself
+(though that was out of the question), was held to be preferable. I
+need not dwell on this mixture of deceit and fear; in short, as
+they would do nothing themselves, they expected us to do nothing:
+and without the courage to carry on the war, they had not either
+wisdom or sorcery to bring it to a conclusion.
+
+"_3d._--Dispatched an express during last night to the rajah, and
+received an answer that he was coming up in person; but my resolve was
+taken, and I quitted the grand army, much to their evident surprise
+and vexation. Nevertheless, they were still friendly and polite,
+and very very lazy about bringing down our guns. This was, however,
+done at last, and we were ready for a start.
+
+"_4th._--Reached the ship at two P.M., saw rajah, &c. &c.
+
+"From the 4th to the 10th of November I may condense into the shape of
+a narrative. I explained to the rajah how useless it was my remaining,
+and intimated to him my intention of departing; but his deep regret
+was so visible, that even all the self-command of the native could
+not disguise it. He begged, he entreated me to stay, and offered me
+the country of Siniawan and Sarawak, and its government and trade, if
+I would only stop, and not desert him. I could at once have obtained
+this grant, but I preferred interposing a delay; because to accept
+such a boon when imposed by necessity, or from a feeling of gratitude
+for recent assistance, would have rendered it both suspicious and
+useless; and I was by no means eager to enter on the task (the full
+difficulties of which I clearly foresaw) without the undoubted and
+spontaneous support of the rajah.
+
+"_Jan. 8th, 1841._--The following narrative, extracted from my journal,
+includes a period from the 10th of December to the 4th of January,
+and it is put into its present shape to avoid the tedium of detailing
+each day's proceedings. On the 10th of December we reached the
+fleet and disembarked our guns, taking up our residence in a house,
+or rather shed, close to the water. The rajah's brother, Pangeran
+Budrudeen, was with the army, and I found him ready and willing
+to urge upon the other indolent Pangerans the proposals I made for
+vigorous hostilities. We found the grand army in a state of torpor,
+eating, drinking, and walking up to the forts and back again daily;
+but having built these imposing structures, and their appearance not
+driving the enemy away, they were at a loss what next to do, or how
+to proceed. On my arrival, I once more insisted on mounting the guns
+in our old forts, and assaulting Balidah under their fire. Macota's
+timidity and vacillation were too apparent; but in consequence of
+Budrudeen's overawing presence, he was obliged, from shame, to yield
+his assent. The order for the attack was fixed as follows:--Our
+party of ten (leaving six to serve the guns) were to be headed by
+myself. Budrudeen, Macota, Subtu, and all the lesser chiefs, were to
+lead their followers, from 60 to 80 in number, by the same route,
+while 50 or more Chinese, under their captain, were to assault by
+another path to the left. Macota was to make the paths as near as
+possible to Balidah, with his Dyaks, who were to extract the sudas
+and fill up the holes. The guns having been mounted and their range
+well ascertained the previous evening, we ascended to the fort at about
+eight A.M., and at ten opened our fire, and kept it up for an hour. The
+effect was severe: every shot told upon their thin defences of wood,
+which fell in many places so as to leave storming breaches. Part
+of the roof was cut away and tumbled down, and the shower of grape
+and canister rattled so as to prevent their returning our fire,
+except from a stray rifle. At mid-day the forces reached the fort,
+and it was then discovered that Macota had neglected to make any road
+because it rained the night before! It was evident that the rebels
+had gained information of our intention, as they had erected a frieze
+of bamboo along their defences on the very spot which we had agreed
+to mount. Macota fancied the want of a road would delay the attack;
+but I well knew that delay was equivalent to failure, and so it was
+at once agreed that we should advance without any path. The poor man's
+cunning and resources were now nearly at an end. He could not refuse to
+accompany us; but his courage could not be brought to the point, and,
+pale and embarrassed, he retired. Everything was ready--Budrudeen,
+the Capitan China, and myself, at the head of our men--when he once
+more appeared, and raised a subtle point of etiquet which answered his
+purpose. He represented to Budrudeen that the Malays were unanimously
+of opinion that the rajah's brother could not expose himself in an
+assault; that their dread of the rajah's indignation far exceeded the
+dread of death; and in case any accident happened to him, his brother's
+fury would fall on them. They stated their readiness to assault the
+place; but in case Budrudeen insisted on leading in person, they must
+decline accompanying him. Budrudeen was angry, I was angry too, and the
+doctor most angry of all; but anger was unavailing: it was clear they
+did not intend to do anything in earnest; and after much discussion,
+in which Budrudeen insisted that if I went he should likewise go,
+and the Malays insisted that if he went they would not go, it was
+resolved we should serve the guns, while Abong Mia and the Chinese
+(not under the captain) should proceed to the assault. But its fate
+was sealed, and Macota had gained his object; for neither he nor
+Subtu thought of exposing themselves to a single shot. Our artillery
+opened and was beautifully served. The adverse troops advanced; but
+our fire completely subdued them, as only three rifles answered us,
+by one of which a seaman (Williams) was wounded in the hand, but not
+seriously. Two-thirds of the way the storming-party proceeded without
+the enemy being aware of their advance; and they might have reached
+the very foot of the hill without being discovered, had not Abong
+Mia, from excess of piety and rashness, begun most loudly to say his
+prayers. The three rifles then began to play on them; one Chinaman was
+killed, the whole halted, the prayers were more vehement than ever,
+and, after squatting under cover of the jungle for some time, they
+all returned. It was only what I expected; but I was greatly annoyed
+at their cowardice and treachery--treachery to their own cause. One
+lesson, however, I learned, and that was, that, had I assaulted with
+our small party, we should assuredly have been victimized! The very
+evening of the failure the rajah came up the river. I would not see
+him, and only heard that the chiefs got severely reprimanded; but
+the effects of reprimand are lost where cowardice is stronger than
+shame. Inactivity followed; two or three useless forts were built,
+and Budrudeen, much to my regret and the detriment of the cause,
+was recalled.
+
+"Among the straggling arrivals I may mention Panglima Dallam,
+with a number of men, consisting of the Orang Bentulu, Meri Muka,
+and Kayan, Dyaks from the interior. Our house--or, as it originally
+stood, shed--deserves a brief record. It was about twenty feet long,
+with a loose floor of reeds, and an attop roof. It served us for some
+time; but the attempts at theft obliged us to fence it in and divide
+it into apartments: one at the end served Middleton, Williamson,
+and myself; adjoining it was the store-room and hospital; and the
+other extreme belonged to the seamen. Our improvements kept pace with
+our necessities. Theft induced us to shut in our house at the sides,
+and the unevenness of the reeds suggested the advantage of laying
+a floor of the bark of trees over them, which, with mats over all,
+rendered our domicile far from uncomfortable. Our forts gradually
+extended at the back of the enemy's town, on a ridge of swelling
+ground; while they kept pace with us on the same side of the river
+on the low ground. The inactivity of our troops had long become a
+by-word among us. It was indeed truly vexatious, but it was in vain
+to urge them on, in vain to offer assistance, in vain to propose a
+joint attack, or even to seek support at their hands; promises were
+to be had in plenty, but performances never!
+
+"At length the leaders resolved on building a fort at Sekundis,
+thus outflanking the enemy and gaining the command of the river. The
+post was certainly an important one, and in consequence they set
+about it with the happy indifference which characterizes their
+proceedings. Pangeran Illudeen (the most active among them) had
+the building of the fort, assisted by the Orang Kaya Tumangong of
+Lundu. Macota, Subtu, &c. were at the next fort, and by chance I
+was there likewise; for it seemed to be little apprehended that any
+interruption would take place, as the Chinese and the greater number of
+Malays had not left the boats. When the fort commenced, however, the
+enemy crossed the river and divided into two bodies, the one keeping
+in check the party at Pangeran Gapoor's fort, while the other made an
+attack on the works. The ground was not unfavorable for their purpose;
+for Pangeran Gapoor's fort was separated from Sekundis by a belt of
+thick wood which reached down to the river's edge. Sekundis itself,
+however, stood on clear ground, as did Gapoor's fort. I was with
+Macota at the latter when the enemy approached through the jungle. The
+two parties were within easy speaking distances, challenging and
+threatening each other; but the thickness of the jungle prevented
+our seeing or penetrating to them. When this body had advanced,
+the real attack commenced on Sekundis with a fire of musketry, and
+I was about proceeding to the scene, but was detained by Macota,
+who assured me there were plenty of men, and that it was nothing at
+all. As the musketry became thicker, I had my doubts, when a Dyak
+came running through the jungle, and with gestures of impatience and
+anxiety begged me to assist the party attacked. He had been sent by
+my old friend the Tumangong of Lundu, to say they could not hold the
+post unless supported. In spite of Macota's remonstrances, I struck
+into the jungle, winded through the narrow path, and after crossing an
+ugly stream, emerged on the clear ground. The sight was a pretty one:
+to the right was the unfinished stockade, defended by the Tumangong;
+to the left, at the edge of the forest, about twelve or fifteen of
+our party, commanded by Illudeen, while the enemy were stretched along
+between the points and kept up a sharp shooting from the hollow ground
+on the bank of the river. They fired, and loaded, and fired, and had
+gradually advanced on the stockade as the ammunition of our party
+failed; and as we emerged from the jungle, they were within twenty or
+five and twenty yards of the defence. A glance immediately showed me
+the advantage of our position, and I charged with my Europeans across
+the padi-field; and the instant we appeared on the ridge above the
+river, in the hollows of which the rebels were seeking protection,
+their rout was complete. They scampered off in every direction,
+while the Dyaks and Malays pushed them into the river. Our victory
+was decisive and bloodless: the scene was changed in an instant,
+and the defeated foe lost arms, ammunition, &c. &c., whether on the
+field of battle or in the river, and our exulting conquerors set no
+bounds to their triumph.
+
+"I cannot omit to mention the name of Si Tundo, the only native who
+charged with us. His appearance and dress were most striking, the
+latter being entirely of red, bound round the waist, arms, forehead,
+&c. with gold ornaments; and in his hand bearing his formidable Bajuck
+sword, he danced or rather galloped across the field close to me,
+and mixing with the enemy was about to dispatch a hadji or priest
+who was prostrate before him, when one of our people interposed and
+saved him by stating that he was a companion of our own. The Lundu
+Dyaks were very thankful for our support, our praises were loudly
+sung, and the stockade was concluded. After the rout, Macota, Subtu,
+and Abong Mia arrived on the field; the latter with forty followers
+had ventured half way before the firing ceased, but the detachment,
+under a paltry subterfuge, halted, so as not to be in time. The enemy
+might have had fifty men at the attack; the defending party consisted
+of about the same number; but the Dyaks had very few muskets. I had a
+dozen Englishmen, Seboo, one of our boatmen, and Si Tundo. Sekundis
+was a great point gained, as it hindered the enemy from ascending
+the river and seeking any supplies.
+
+"Macota, Subtu, and the whole tribe arrived as soon as their safety
+from danger allowed, and none were louder in their own praise;
+but nevertheless their countenances evinced some sense of shame,
+which they endeavored to disguise by the use of their tongues. The
+Chinese came really to afford assistance, but too late. We remained
+until the stockade of Sekundis was finished, while the enemy kept up
+a wasteful fire from the opposite side of the river, which did no harm.
+
+"The next great object was to follow up the advantage by crossing the
+stream; but day after day some fresh excuse brought on fresh delay,
+and Macota built a new fort and made a new road within a hundred yards
+of our old position. I cannot detail further our proceedings for many
+days, which consisted on my part of efforts to get something done,
+and on the others a close adherence to the old system of promising
+everything and doing nothing. The Chinese, like the Malays, refused
+to act; but on their part, it was not fear, but disinclination. By
+degrees, however, the preparations for the new fort were complete, and
+I had gradually gained over a party of the natives to my views; and,
+indeed, among the Malays, the bravest of them had joined themselves
+to us, and what was better, we had Datu Pangeran, thirteen Illanuns,
+and the Capitan China allowed me to take his men whenever I wanted
+them. My weight and consequence were increased, and I rarely moved
+now without a long train of followers. The next step (while crossing
+the river was uncertain) was to take my guns up to Gapoor's fort,
+which was about 600 or 700 yards from the town, and half the distance
+from a rebel fort on the river's bank.
+
+"Panglima Rajah, the day after our guns were in battery, took it into
+his head to build a fort on the river's side close to the town, in
+front and between two of the enemy's forts. It was a bold undertaking
+for the old man, after six weeks of uninterrupted repose. At night,
+the wood being prepared, the party moved down, and worked so silently
+that they were not discovered till their defence was nearly finished,
+when the enemy commenced a general firing from all their forts,
+returned by a similar firing from all ours, none of the parties being
+quite clear what they were firing at or about, and the hottest from
+either party being equally harmless. We were at the time about going
+to bed in our habitation; but expecting some reverse, I set off
+(to scale the hills) to the stockade where our guns were placed,
+and opened a fire upon the town and the stockade near us, till the
+enemy's fire gradually slackened and died away. We then returned,
+and in the morning were greeted with the pleasing news that they had
+burned and deserted five of their forts, and left us sole occupants
+of the right bank of the river. The same day, going through the jungle
+to see one of these deserted forts, we came upon a party of the enemy,
+and had a brief skirmish with them before they took to flight. Nothing
+can be more unpleasant to a European than this bush-fighting, where
+he scarce sees a foe, while he is well aware that their eyesight is
+far superior to his own. To proceed with this narrative, I may say
+that four or five forts were built on the edge of the river opposite
+the enemy's town, and distant not above 50 or 60 yards; here our guns
+were removed, and a fresh battery formed ready for a bombardment,
+and fire-balls essayed to ignite the houses.
+
+"At this time Seriff Jaffer, from Singe, arrived with about seventy
+men, Malays and Dyaks of Balow. The river Singe being situated close
+to Sarebus, and incessant hostilities being waged between the two
+places, he, with his followers, was both more active and more warlike
+than the Borneons, but their warfare consists of closing hand to
+hand with spear and sword. They scarcely understood the proper use
+of fire-arms, and were of little use in attacking stockades. As a
+negotiator, however, the seriff bore a distinguished part; and on his
+arrival a parley ensued, much against Macota's will, and some meetings
+took place between Jaffer and a brother seriff at Siniawan, named
+Moksain. After ten days' delay nothing came of it, though the enemy
+betrayed great desire to yield. This negotiation being at an end,
+we had a day's bombardment and a fresh treaty brought about thus;
+Macota being absent at Sarawak, I received a message from Seriff
+Jaffer and Pangeran Subtu to say that they wished to meet me; and on
+my consenting, they stated that Seriff Jaffer felt confident the war
+might be brought to an end, though alone he dared not treat with the
+rebels; but in case I felt inclined to join him, we could bring it
+to a favorable conclusion. I replied that our habits of treating were
+very unlike their own, as we allowed no delays to interpose; but that
+I would unite with him for one interview, and if that interview was
+favorable, we might meet the chiefs at once and settle it, or put
+an end to all farther treating. Pangeran Subtu was delighted with
+the proposition, urged its great advantages, and the meeting by my
+desire for that very night, the place Pangeran Illudeen's fort at
+Sekundis. The evening arrived, and at dark we were at the appointed
+place, and a message was dispatched for Seriff Moksain. In the mean
+time, however, came a man from Pangeran Subtu to beg us to hold no
+intercourse; that the rebels were false, meant to deceive us, and
+if any did come, we had better make them prisoners. Seriff Jaffer,
+after arguing the point some time, rose to depart, remarking that with
+such proceedings he would not consent to treat. I urged him to stay;
+but finding him bent on going, I ordered my gig (which had some time
+before been brought overland) to be put into the water, my intention
+being to proceed to the enemy's campong, and there hear what they had
+to say. I added that it was folly to leave undone what we had agreed
+to do in the morning because Pangeran Subtu changed his mind--that I
+had come to treat, and treat I would. I would not go away now without
+giving the enemy a fair hearing--for the good of all parties I would
+do it; and if the seriff liked to join me, as we proposed before,
+and wait for Seriff Moksain, good; if not, I would go in the boat
+to the campong. My Europeans, on being ordered, jumped up, ran out
+and brought the boat to the water's edge, and in a few minutes oars,
+rudder, and rowlocks were in her. My companions, seeing this, came
+to terms, and we waited for Seriff Moksain; during which, however, I
+overheard a whispering conversation from Subtu's messenger, proposing
+to seize him; and my temper was ruffled to such a degree that I drew
+out a pistol, and told him I would shoot him dead if he dared to seize,
+or talk of seizing, any man who trusted himself from the enemy to
+meet me! The scoundrel slunk off, and we were no more troubled with
+him. This past, Seriff Moksain arrived, and was introduced into our
+fortress alone--alone and unarmed in an enemy's stockade, manned with
+two hundred men! His bearing was firm; he advanced with ease and took
+his seat; and, during the interview, the only sign of uneasiness was
+the quick glance of his eye from side to side. The object he aimed at
+was to gain my guaranty that the lives of all the rebels should be
+spared; but this I had it not in my power to grant. He returned to
+his campong, and came again toward morning, when it was agreed that
+Seriff Jaffer and myself should meet the Patingis and the Tumangong,
+and arrange terms with them. By the time our conference was over,
+the day broke, and we descended to the boats to enjoy a little rest.
+
+"On the 20th of December we met with the chiefs on the river; and they
+expressed themselves ready to yield, without conditions, to the rajah,
+if I would promise that they should not be put to death. My reply was,
+that I could give no such promise; that if they surrendered, it must
+be for life or death, according to the rajah's pleasure; and all I
+could do was to use my influence in order to save their lives. To this
+they assented after a while; but then there arose the more difficult
+question, how they were to be protected until the rajah's orders
+arrived. They dreaded both Chinese and Malays, especially the former,
+who had just cause for angry feelings, and who, it was feared, would
+make an attack on them directly their surrender had taken from them
+their means of defence. The Malays would not assail them in a body,
+but would individually plunder them, and give occasion for disputes
+and bloodshed. These apprehensions were almost sufficient to break off
+the hitherto favorable negotiations, had I not proposed to them myself
+to undertake their defence, and to become responsible for their safety
+until the orders of their sovereign arrived. On my pledging myself to
+this, they yielded up their strong fort of Balidah, the key of their
+position. I immediately made it known to our own party that no boats
+were to ascend or descend the river, and that any persons attacking
+or pillaging the rebels were my enemies, and that I should fire upon
+them without hesitation.
+
+"Both Chinese and Malaya agreed to the propriety of the measure,
+and gave me the strongest assurances of restraining their respective
+followers, the former with good faith, the latter with the intention of
+involving matters, if possible, to the destruction of the rebels. By
+the evening we were in possession of Balidah, and certainly found
+it a formidable fortress, situated on a steep mound, with dense
+defences of wood, triple deep, and surrounded by two inclosures,
+thickly studded on the outside with ranjows. The effect of our fire had
+shaken it completely, now much to our discomfort; for the walls were
+tottering, and the roof as leaky as a sieve. On the 20th of December,
+then, the war closed. The very next day, contrary to stipulation,
+the Malay Pangerans tried to ascend the river, and when stopped began
+to expostulate. After preventing many, the attempt was made by Subtu
+and Pangeran Hassim, in three large boats, boldly pulling toward
+us. Three hails did not check them, and they came on in spite of a
+blank cartridge and a wide ball, to turn them back. But I was resolved;
+and when a dozen musket-balls whistled over and fell close around them,
+they took to an ignominious flight. I subsequently upbraided them
+for this breach of promise, and Macota loudly declared they had _been
+greatly to blame_; but I discovered that he himself had set them on.
+
+"I may now briefly conclude this detail. I ordered the rebels to
+burn all their stockades, which they did at once, and delivered up
+the greater part of their arms; and I proceeded to the rajah to
+request from him their lives. Those who know the Malay character
+will appreciate the difficulty of the attempt to stand between the
+monarch and his victims; I only succeeded when, at the end of a long
+debate--I soliciting, he denying--I rose to bid him farewell, as it
+was my intention to sail directly, since, after all my exertions
+in his cause, if he would not grant me the lives of the people,
+I could only consider that his friendship for me was at an end. On
+this he yielded. I must own that during the discussion he had much
+the best of it; for he urged that they had forfeited their lives by
+the law, as a necessary sacrifice to the future peace of the country;
+and argued that in a similar case in my own native land no leniency
+would be shown. On the contrary, my reasoning, though personal,
+was, on the whole, the best for the rajah and the people. I stated
+my extreme reluctance to have the blood of conquered foes shed; the
+shame I should experience in being a party, however involuntarily,
+to their execution; and the general advantage of a merciful line
+of policy. At the same time I told him their lives were forfeited,
+their crimes had been of a heinous and unpardonable nature, and it
+was only from so humane a man as himself, one with so kind a heart,
+that I could ask for their pardon; but I added, he well knew that
+it was only my previous knowledge of his benevolent disposition,
+and the great friendship I felt for him, which had induced me to
+take any part in this struggle. Other stronger reasons might have
+been brought forward, which I forbore to employ, as being repugnant
+to his princely pride, viz. that severity in this case would arm many
+against him, raise powerful enemies in Borneo Proper, as well as here,
+and greatly impede the future right government of the country. However,
+I gained my point, and was satisfied.
+
+"Having fulfilled this engagement, and being moreover, together with
+many of my Europeans, attacked with an ague, I left the scene with all
+the dignity of complete success. Subsequently, the rebels were ordered
+to deliver up all their arms, ammunition, and property; and last, the
+wives and children of the principal people were demanded as hostages,
+and obtained. The women and children were treated with kindness,
+and preserved from injury or wrong. Siniawan thus dwindled away; the
+poorer men stole off in canoes and were scattered about, most of them
+coming to Sarawak. The better class pulled down the houses, abandoned
+the town, and lived in boats for a month; when, alarmed by the delay
+and impelled by hunger, they also fled--Patingi Gapoor, it was said,
+to Sambas; and Patingi Ali and the Tumangong among the Dyaks. After
+a time it was supposed they would return and receive their wives and
+children. The army gradually dispersed to seek food, and the Chinese
+were left in possession of the once-renowned Siniawan, the ruin of
+which they completed by burning all that remained, and erecting a
+village for themselves in the immediate neighborhood. Seriff Jaffer
+and many others departed to their respective homes, and the pinching
+of famine succeeded to the horrors of war. Fruit being in season,
+helped to support the wretched people, and the near approach of the
+rice-harvest kept up their spirits."
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+    Retrospect of Mr. Brooke's proceeding and prospects.--Visit of
+    a pirate fleet.--Intercourse with the chief leaders, and other
+    characteristic incidents.--War dances.--Use of opium.--Story of
+    Si Tundo.--Preparations for trading.--Conditions of the cession
+    of Sarawak.
+
+
+I have gone into the details of this curious rebellion, and selected
+from my friend's memoranda more, perhaps, than the actual and
+present importance of the circumstances might seem to require; but I
+have done so under the impression that in developing the traits and
+lineaments of the native character, I am laying the foundation for a
+more accurate estimate of them and their bearing upon futurity. The
+difference between the Malay and the Chinese, between the sea and the
+land Dyak, and even between one tribe and another, presents a variety
+of elements out of which a consistent whole has to be compounded, and
+a new state of things to be established in Borneo. It is, therefore,
+of considerable interest to view these elements in their earliest
+contact with European mind and civilization, and thence endeavor to
+shape out the course which is best calculated to insure the welfare of
+all in the closer ties and more extended connection which is springing
+out of this new intercourse. To enlarge the beneficial effects
+of trade and commerce, it is not enough to ascertain the products
+of a strange country, nor even the chief wants of its population;
+but to inform ourselves of their habits, feelings, and disposition,
+and so devise the wisest measures for supplying what is immediate,
+removing obstacles, and increasing demand by a continually growing
+improvement in government and general condition.
+
+Following the war, and receiving the investiture of the government of
+Sarawak, Mr. Brooke was enabled, from the insight he had obtained into
+the diversified relations and habits, motives and ways of thinking of
+these people, to address himself clearly and at once to reform the
+evils which oppressed, and the abuses which destroyed them. Had he
+not mixed with them and shared in this protracted contest, he must
+have begun rather as an experimentalist with a theory which might be
+right or might be wrong. But he had acquired the necessary experience,
+and could proceed to put his finger where it was required to repress
+or to foster, without danger of mistake. It was extraordinary what
+his energy produced within a small compass of time. Security succeeded
+the utmost uncertainty, equal justice superseded tyrannical caprice,
+order arose out of confusion, and peace was gradually spread over
+the fruitful soil so lately polluted by the murderous warfare of
+heads-taking and imperishable feud. It is to be hoped that such an
+example will not be lost in the further prosecution of international
+and commercial policy in this interesting and important quarter of
+the eastern world. Piracy must be put down, slavery must be effaced,
+industry must be cherished and protected; and these objects, we shall
+see, from the model afforded by our truly illustrious countryman,
+may be accomplished; and we may further learn from his example, that
+from the experience even of "a little war," an enlightened observer
+may deduce the most sound data on which to commence a mighty change,
+leading, probably, to the happiness of millions, and the foundation
+of colonial empire.
+
+With these few retrospective remarks, I resume the sequel of my
+friend's Bornean Journal.
+
+"Our subsequent adventures," he notes, "may be easily related. We
+lay for some days, after winding up our affairs, in order to have
+an agreement drawn out between the rajah and myself, and during this
+time heard the bruit of a pirate fleet being on the coast. In a day
+or two after, certain news arrived of their having taken two Sadung
+boats, bound from Singapore, and Datu Pangeran was, in consequence,
+dispatched to communicate with them. He returned from Tanjong Datu,
+bringing the fleet with him to the mouth of the river, whence they
+requested permission to visit Sarawak, and pay their respects to the
+rajah. I was consulted on the subject whether I would meet them; and
+as I preferred a pacific to a hostile rencounter, and had, moreover,
+a considerable curiosity to see these roving gentry, I consented
+without hesitation. Reports--a greater curse in Malay countries than
+elsewhere--stated their object to be the capture of the Royalist, as
+they had, it was averred, received positive accounts of her having
+fifty lacks of dollars on board, and that her figure-head was of
+solid gold. As, however, we had no such treasure, and the meeting
+was unavoidable, and might be hostile, I put myself into a complete
+posture of defense, with a determination neither to show backwardness
+nor suspicion. The day arrived, and the pirates swept up the river;
+eighteen prahus, one following the other, decorated with flags
+and streamers, and firing both cannon and musketry; the sight was
+interesting and curious, and heightened by the conviction that these
+friends of the moment might be enemies the next. Having taken their
+stations, the chief men proceeded to an interview with the rajah,
+which I attended to witness. Some distrust and much ceremony marked
+the meeting; and both parties had numerous followers, who filled
+the hall of audience and the avenues leading to it; and as few of
+the Illanuns spoke Malay, the communication was rendered difficult
+and troublesome. The pirates consisted of Illanuns and Malukus from
+Gillolo. The Illanuns are fine athletic men, with a strong resemblance
+in appearance to the Bugis; their bearing was haughty and reserved,
+and they seemed quite ready to be friends or foes, as best suited their
+purpose. The Malukus are from a bay in Gillolo, and their country is
+now in possession of the Dutch; they are a darker and an uglier race,
+but their manners more supple and pliant. They were the principal
+talkers, while the Illanuns maintained a dignified silence.
+
+"These Malukus, from their own account, since the capture of their
+rajah, and the subjugation of their country, have led a wandering,
+piratical life; they represent their force at about twenty-five boats,
+of which three are now joined by the Illanuns, as a matter of mere
+convenience. Beyond the usual formalities, this meeting had nothing
+to distinguish it; one party retired to their boats, while the other
+went to their respective houses, and every thing betokened quiet. In
+the evening I pulled through the fleet, and inspected several of
+the largest prahus. The entire force consisted of eighteen boats,
+viz., three Malukus and fifteen Illanuns; the smallest of these boats
+carried thirty men, the largest (they are mostly large) upward of a
+hundred; so that, at a moderate computation, the number of fighting
+men might be reckoned at from five to six hundred. The Illanum
+expedition had been absent from Magindano upward of three years,
+during which time they had cruised among the Moluccas and islands
+to the eastward, had haunted Boni Bay and Celebes, and beat up the
+Straits of Makassar. Many of their boats, however, being worn out,
+they had fitted out Bugis prize prahus, and were now on their return
+home. They had recently attacked one of the Tambelan islands, and had
+been repulsed; and report said they intended a descent upon Sirhassan,
+one of the Southern Natunas group. These large prahus are too heavy
+to pull well, though they carry thirty, forty, and even fifty oars:
+their armament is one or two six-pounders in the bow, one four-pounder
+stern-chaser, and a number of swivels, besides musketry, spears, and
+swords. The boat is divided into three sections, and fortified with
+strong planks, one behind the bow, one amidships, and one astern,
+to protect the steersman. The women and children are crammed down
+below, where the unhappy prisoners are likewise stowed away during an
+action. Their principal plan is boarding a vessel, if possible, and
+carrying her by numbers; and certainly if a merchantman fired ill, she
+would inevitably be taken; but with grape and canister fairly directed,
+the slaughter would be so great that they would be glad to sheer off
+before they neared a vessel. This is, of course, supposing a calm,
+for in a breeze they would never have the hardihood to venture far
+from land with a ship in sight, and would be sorry to be caught at a
+distance. Their internal constitution is as follows: one chief, a man
+usually of rank, commands the whole fleet; each boat has her captain,
+and generally from five to ten of his relations, free men: the rest,
+amounting to above four fifths, are slaves, more or less forced to
+pursue this course of life. They have, however, the right of plunder,
+which is indiscriminate with certain exceptions; viz., slaves, guns,
+money, or any other heavy articles, together with the very finest
+description of silks and cloths, belonging to the chiefs and free
+men; and the rest obey the rule of 'First come, first served.' No
+doubt the slaves become attached to this predatory course of life;
+but it must always be remembered that they are slaves and have no
+option; and it appears to me that, in the operation of our laws,
+some distinction ought to be drawn on this account, to suit the
+circumstances of the case. The Datus, or chiefs, are incorrigible;
+for they are pirates by descent, robbers from pride as well as taste,
+and they look upon the occupation as the most honorable hereditary
+pursuit. They are indifferent to blood, fond of plunder, but fondest
+of slaves: they despise trade, though its profits be greater; and,
+as I have said, they look upon this as their 'calling,' and the
+noblest occupation of chiefs and free men. Their swords they show
+with boasts, as having belonged to their ancestors who were pirates,
+renowned and terrible in their day; and they always speak of their
+ancestral heir-loom as decayed from its pristine vigor, but still
+deem the wielding of it as the highest of earthly existences. That
+it is in reality the most accursed, there can be no doubt, for its
+chief support is slaves they capture on the different coasts. If
+they attack an island, the women and children, and as many of the
+young men as they require, are carried off. Every boat they take
+furnishes its quota of slaves; and when they have a _full cargo_,
+they quit that coast or country and visit another, in order to
+dispose of their human spoil to the best advantage. Thus a cargo of
+slaves, captured on the east coast of Borneo, is sold on the west;
+and the slaves of the south find ready purchasers to the northward,
+and _vice versa_. As the woolly-haired Papuas are generally prized by
+the natives, constant visits are made to New Guinea and the easternmost
+islands, where they are procured, and afterward sold at high prices
+among any Malay community. The great nests of piracy are Magindano,
+Sooloo, and the northern part of Borneo; and the devastation and
+misery they inflict on the rest of the Archipelago are well known;
+yet are no measures adopted for their suppression, as every European
+community, be it English, Dutch, or Spanish, seems quite satisfied to
+clear the vicinity of its own ports, and never considers the damage
+to the native trade which takes place at a distance. To be attacked
+with success, they must be attacked on their own coasts with two or
+three steamers. A little money would gain every intelligence as to
+where they were preparing; and while the steamers were so worthily
+engaged in suppressing piracy, they might at the same time be acquiring
+information respecting countries little known, and adding to our stock
+of geography and science. A few severe examples and constant harassing
+would soon cure this hereditary and personal mania for a rover's life;
+and while we conferred the greatest blessings on the rest of the
+Archipelago, Magindano itself would be improved by the change.
+
+"The Illanun Datus and the Gillolo chiefs visited the schooner
+constantly, and were always considerate enough to bring but few
+followers. We conversed much upon piracy in general, their mode of
+life, their successes, and their privations. They seemed to have but
+few fears of the Dutch or English men-of-war being able to take them,
+and during their three years' cruise had never been chased by any
+of them.
+
+"After being three or four days in company with these worthies,
+_i. e._, the fleet of Illanuns and Malukus, the Royalist dropped down
+the river to Santobong, while Williamson and myself stayed yet a few
+days with Muda Hassim in his house. We had a week's incessant torrent
+of rain. Nothing could exceed the kindness of the rajah during our
+stay, with his brothers, of all ages, as our constant companions. We
+had one day a dance of the Illanuns and Gillolos: they might both
+be called war-dances, but are very different. The performer with the
+Illanuns is decked out with a _fine helmet_ (probably _borrowed_ from
+our early voyagers), ornamented with bird-of-paradise feathers. Two
+gold belts, crossed, like our soldiers', over the breast, are bound
+at the waist with a fantastical garment reaching half way down the
+thigh, and composed of various-colored silk and woolen threads one
+above another. The sword, or 'kempilan,' is decorated at the handle
+with a yard or two of red cloth, and the long upright shield is
+covered with small rings, which clash as the performer goes through
+his evolutions. The dance itself consists of a variety of violent
+warlike gestures, stamping, striking, advancing, retreating, turning,
+falling, yelling, with here and there bold stops, and excellent as to
+_aplomb_, which might have elicited the applause of the opera-house;
+but, generally speaking, the performance was outrageously fierce,
+and so far natural as approaching to an actual combat; and in half
+an hour the dancer, a fine young man, was so exhausted that he fell,
+fainting, into the arms of his comrades. Several others succeeded,
+but not equal to the first; and we had hardly a fair opportunity of
+judging of the Maluku dance from its short continuance; but it is of
+a more gentle nature, advancing with the spear stealthily, easting it,
+then retreating with the sword and shield. The Maluku shield, it should
+be observed, is remarkably narrow, and is brandished somewhat in the
+same way as the single stick-player uses his stick, or the Irishman
+his shillelah, that is to say, it is held nearly in the center, and
+whirled every way round. I procured some of the instruments, and found
+that the sword of the Malukus of Gillolo is similar to that of the
+Moskokas of Boni Bay, in Celebes. All these pirates are addicted to
+the _excessive_ use of opium; but the effects of it are by no means so
+deleterious or so strongly marked as has been represented; and it must
+likewise be remembered that they are in other respects dissolute and
+debauched. Among the Chinese it would be difficult--nay, impossible--to
+detect the smokers of the drug. Here and there you may see an emaciated
+man; but, out of a body of five hundred, some are usually emaciated
+and unhealthy. I do not mean to deny the bad effects of opium; but the
+stories of its pernicious results are greatly exaggerated where the
+habit exists in moderation. The Chinese themselves, when I spoke to
+them of the bad consequences, always argued that, taken moderately,
+it was a stimulus to industry and activity; but they allowed, at the
+same time, that excess was highly injurious.
+
+"The time at length came for my departure, but I was pressed to stay
+one day after another, for our society was a relief to the usual
+monotonous tenor of their lives. The papers were signed which made me
+Resident of Sarawak. I started to Santobong, and reached the vessel
+on the 13th of February; and after waiting two days, in the vain hope
+of a lull or change of wind, we beat out of the channel."
+
+Mr. Brooke did not remain long at Singapore. His principal object was
+to procure a vessel to trade between that place and Sarawak. Trading,
+however, was not his forte; but he already felt the deepest interest
+in the welfare of those people. By accident--or, more properly,
+by Providence--he appears to have been sent to put a stop to an
+unnatural war, and to save the lives of the unfortunate rebels;
+and the benefit he had conferred on so many of his fellow-creatures,
+the good he had already done, and the infinity of good which he saw
+he still might do, made him anxious to return.
+
+After some difficulty, he succeeded in purchasing a schooner of 90
+tons, called the Swift, which I recollected in the Malacca Straits as
+the Zephyr, then a cruiser in the East India Company's service. Having
+put a suitable cargo into her, he sailed with his squadron (Royalist
+and Swift) for Sarawak early in April, 1841.
+
+The rajah, already described as an indolent, weak-minded man, had
+promised Mr. Brooke the government of the country; but, among other
+obstacles with which he would have to contend in accepting it, I do not
+think my friend calculated on jealousy, low cunning, and treachery,
+or the dangerous enemy he had made in Pangeran Macota. He had been
+an eye-witness to his cowardice, and had more than once detected
+and exposed his cunning and trickery; sins not to be forgiven,
+especially by a Malay. Notwithstanding this, firmness, courage, and
+straightforward honesty gained the victory, as the sequel will show.
+
+Among the characters with whom Mr. Brooke got acquainted during the
+rebel war was a young chief named Si Tundo, who was constantly by his
+side whenever there was danger. He was an Illanun, and had been sent
+from Sadung, with some thirteen of his countrymen, by Seriff Sahib, to
+offer his services to Macota, commander-in-chief of the rajah's forces;
+and I resume Mr. Brooke's memoranda, with the following interesting
+account of this poor fellow's fate: "On my arrival at Sarawak, we
+were received with the usual honors; and the first thing I heard
+of was the decease of my poor companion, Si Tundo of Magindano, who
+had been put to death by the rajah's orders. The course of justice,
+or, rather, injustice, or perhaps, more justly, a mixture of both,
+is so characteristic of the people, that I am tempted to give the
+particulars. Si Tundo fell in love with a woman belonging to an adopted
+son of Macota, and the passion being mutual, the lady eloped from her
+master and went to her lover's house. This being discovered in a short
+time, he was ordered to surrender her to Macota, which he reluctantly
+did, on an understanding that he was to be allowed to marry her on
+giving a proper dowry. Either not being able to procure the money,
+or the terms not being kept, Si Tundo and a relation (who had left
+the pirate fleet and resided with him) mounted to Macota's hill,
+and threatened to take the woman and to burn the house. The village,
+however, being roused, they were unable to effect their purpose,
+and retired to their own residence. Here they remained for some days
+in a state of incessant watchfulness; and when they moved, they each
+carried their kempilan, and wore the krisses ready to the hand. The
+Rajah Muda Hassim, being well aware of the state of things, sent, at
+this crisis, to order Si Tundo and his friend to his presence; which
+order they obeyed forthwith, and entered the balei, or audience-hall,
+which was full of their enemies. According to Muda Hassim's account,
+he was anxious to save Si Tundo's life, and offered him another wife;
+but, his affections being fixed on the girl of his own choice, he
+rejected the offer, only praying he might have the woman he loved. On
+entering the presence of the rajah, surrounded by foes, and dreading
+treachery (which most probably was intended), these unfortunate men
+added to their previous fault by one which, however slight in European
+estimation, is here of an aggravated nature--they entered the presence
+with their kempilans in their hands, and their sarongs clear of the
+kris-handle; and instead of seating themselves cross-legged, they
+only squatted on their hams, ready for self-defense. From that hour
+their doom was resolved on: the crime of disrespect was deemed worthy
+of death, though their previous crime of abduction and violence might
+have obtained pardon. It was no easy matter, however, among an abject
+and timid population, to find executioners of the sentence against two
+brave and warlike men, well armed and watchful, and who, it was well
+known, would sell their lives dearly; and the subsequent proceeding
+is, as already observed, curiously characteristic of the people,
+and the deep disguise they can assume to attain their purposes. It
+was intimated to Si Tundo that, if he could raise a certain sum of
+money, the woman should be made over to him; and to render this the
+more probable, the affair was taken out of Macota's hands, and placed
+at the decision of the Orang Kaya de Gadong, who _was friendly_ to
+the offenders, but who received his private orders how to act. Four
+men were appointed to watch their opportunity, in order to seize the
+culprits. It is not to be imagined, however, that a native would trust
+or believe the friendly assurances held out to him; nor was it so in
+the case of Si Tundo and his companion; they attended at the Orang Kaya
+de Gadong's house frequently for weeks, with the same precautions,
+and it was found impossible to overpower them; but the deceit of
+their enemies was equal to the occasion, and delay brought no change
+of purpose. They were to die, and opportunity alone was wanting to
+carry the sentence into effect. Time passed over, suspicion was lulled;
+and as suspicion was lulled the professions to serve them became more
+frequent. Poor Si Tundo brought _all_ his little property to make good
+the price required for the woman, and his friend added his share;
+but it was still far short of the required amount. Hopes, however,
+were still held out; the Orang Kaya advanced a small sum to assist,
+and other _pretended_ friends, slowly and reluctantly, at his request,
+lent a little money. The negotiation was nearly complete; forty or
+fifty reals only were wanting, and the opposite party were ready to
+deliver the lady whenever the sum was made good. A final conference
+was appointed for the conclusion of the bargain at the Orang Kaya's,
+at which numbers were present; and the devoted victims, lulled into
+fatal security, had ceased to bring their formidable kempilans. At
+the last interview, the forty reals being still deficient, the Orang
+Kaya proposed receiving their gold-mounted krisses in pledge for
+the amount. The krisses were given up, and the bargain was complete,
+when the four executioners threw themselves on the unarmed men, and,
+assisted by others, overpowered and secured them. Si Tundo, wounded
+in the scuffle, and bound, surrounded by enemies flourishing their
+krisses, remarked, 'You have taken me by treachery; openly you could
+not have seized me.' He spoke no more. They triumphed over and insulted
+him, as though some great feat had been achieved, and every kris
+was plunged into his body, which was afterward cast, without burial,
+into the river. Si Tundo's relation was spared on pleading for mercy;
+and after his whole property, even to his clothes, was confiscated,
+he was allowed to retire to Sadung. Thus perished poor Si Tundo,
+a Magindano pirate, with many, if not all, the vices of the native
+character, but with boldness, courage, and constancy, which retrieved
+his faults, and raised him in the estimation of brave men. In person
+he was tall, elegantly made, with small and handsome features, and
+quiet and graceful manners; but toward the Malays, even of rank, there
+was in his bearing a suppressed contempt, which they often felt, but
+could not well resent. Alas! my gallant comrade, I mourn your death,
+and could have better spared a better man; for as long as you lived,
+I had one faithful follower of tried courage among the natives. Peace
+be with you in the world to come, and may the great God pardon your
+sins and judge you mercifully!
+
+"The case of poor Si Tundo proves that the feeling of love is not
+quite dead among Asiatics, though its power is obscured by their
+education and habits of polygamy; and that friendship and relationship
+may induce a man here, as elsewhere, to risk his life and sacrifice
+his property without any prospect of personal advantage. An old
+Magindano man, a sort of foster-father of Si Tundo's, when he saw
+me for the first time, clasped my arm, and repeatedly exclaimed,
+'Si Tundo is dead; they have killed him;' adding, 'had you been here,
+he would not have been killed.' I was touched by the old man's sorrow,
+and his expression of feeling."
+
+Datu Jembrong was likewise an Illanum, and retired to Sadung when the
+rebel war had closed, and died after a few days' illness. Mr. Brooke
+writes: "Thus I have lost the two bravest men--men whom I would rather
+trust for fair dealing than any score of Borneons; for the Magindanos,
+though pirates by descent and education, are a far superior people to
+any in the Archipelago, with the exception of the Bugis. Whatever may
+be their vices, they are retrieved by courage to a certain degree;
+and where we find a manly character, we may presume that the meaner
+arts of _finesse_ and treachery are less prevalent. Dampier and Forrest
+both give them an excellent character; and it is a pity that of late
+years little is known of them, and so little pains taken to hold a
+friendly intercourse either with them or the Sooloos."
+
+The important changes which ensued on the return of Mr. Brooke
+to Sarawak, in the spring of 1841, now demand attention; and, as
+heretofore, I proceed to describe them from the data intrusted to
+my charge.
+
+"In a former part of my journal," says Mr. Brooke, "I have mentioned
+briefly the occasions which led to my invitation, and the reasons
+which induced me to accept the offer of the Rajah Muda Hassim;
+but I will repeat these, in order to bring the narrative at once
+more distinctly before the memory. When I returned here for the
+second time, in August of last year, it was with the determination
+of remaining for a few days only on my way to the northward; and
+nothing but my feeling for the miserable situation of Muda Hassim
+induced me to alter my intention. The rebellion, which he had come
+from Borneo to quell, had defied every effort for nearly four years;
+and the attacks he had made on the rebels had failed entirely and
+almost disgracefully. His immediate followers were few in number,
+and aid from the neighboring countries was either denied, or withheld
+on trivial excuses; while the opposition of Pangeran Usop in Borneo
+paralyzed the efforts of his supporters in the capital, and, in case
+of non-success, threatened his own power. The pride, the petty pride
+of the Malay prince bent before these circumstances, and induced him
+to state his difficulties to me, and to request my assistance. His
+failure was strongly dwelt on, and his resolution to die here rather
+than abandon his undertaking--to die disgraced and deserted! Under
+these circumstances, could I, he urged upon me, forsake him? could I,
+'a gentleman from England,' who had been his friend, and knew the
+goodness of his heart, could I leave him surrounded and begirt with
+enemies? It was possibly foolish, it was perhaps imprudent, but it
+accorded with my best feelings; and I resolved not to abandon him
+without at any rate seeing the probabilities of success; and it must
+always be remembered that, in doing so, I had no ulterior object, no
+prospect of any personal advantage. I joined his miserable army, which,
+in numbers, barely exceeded that of the rebels, strongly stockaded. I
+joined them at the outset of their campaign; and in a few days (ten
+days) witnessed such scenes of cowardice, treachery, intrigue, and
+lukewarmness among his followers, such a determination not to take
+advice or to pursue any active measures, that I left them and returned
+to my vessel. The Chinese I do not include in this representation;
+they were true and willing, but wretchedly armed, and very justly
+refused to be thrust forward into posts of danger, which the Malays
+in their own country would not share. On my return to the vessel, I
+frankly stated how useless my presence was among men who would not do
+any thing I desired, yet would do nothing for themselves; and, under
+the circumstances, I intimated my intention of sailing. Here, again,
+I was pressed with the same entreaties; every topic was exhausted
+to excite my compassion, every aid was at my disposal; and lastly,
+if I would stay, and we were successful, the country was offered to
+me. The only inquiry was, whether the rajah had the right and authority
+to make over the country to me, and this I was assured he had. The
+government, the revenue (with slight deductions for the sultan), and
+one of his brothers to reside here in order to insure the obedience
+of the Malays, were all comprehended in this cession, freely and
+without condition. I might, at this point of the negotiation, have
+insured _the title_ to the government as far as a written agreement
+could give it; but for two sufficient reasons I declined all treaty
+upon the subject until the war was over. The first of these reasons
+was, that it would have been highly ungenerous to take advantage of
+a man's distress to tie him down to any agreement which, in other
+circumstances, he might not be willing to adopt; and by acting thus
+ungenerously, it would be tempting the rajah to deceive me when the
+treaty came to be ratified. The second reason was equally cogent; for
+a mere barren bond, which I had no means to enforce, was worse than
+useless, and no man would be nearer possession by merely holding a
+written promise. I may add, likewise, that I saw so many difficulties
+in the way of the undertaking, that I was by no means over-anxious to
+close with it; and, previously to accepting and entering on so bold
+a project, I was desirous thoroughly to be assured of the good faith
+of the promiser. To the Rajah Muda Hassim's proposal I, therefore,
+replied, that I could not accept it while the war was pending, as I
+considered it wrong to take any advantage of his present situation;
+and that, if he conferred authority on me in the camp, I would once
+more go up the river and assist him to the utmost of my power. It
+is needless to repeat any details of the war, except to say that I
+found every support from him, and the highest consideration, both
+in personal attentions and the bestowal of influence. He conquered,
+I may say without self-praise, through my means; and on the close
+of hostilities our negotiation about the country was revived. In its
+progress I stated to him that Malay governments were so bad, that the
+high were allowed so much license, and the poor so oppressed, that any
+attempt to govern without a change of these abuses was impossible;
+and as a foundation of my acceptance was the proposition, that all
+his exertions must be employed to establish the principle that one man
+was not to take any thing from another, and that all men were to enjoy
+the produce of their labor, save and except at such times as they were
+engaged in working for the revenue. That the amount of the revenue was
+to be fixed and certain for three years, at a stated quantity of rice
+per family; in lieu of which, should a man prefer it, he might pay in
+money or in labor: the relative price of rice to money or labor being
+previously fixed at as low a rate as possible. That the officers, viz.,
+Patingi, Bandar, and Tumangong, were to receive stated salaries out of
+this revenue, in order to prevent any extortion, either by themselves
+or in their name; and that they were to be answerable for the whole
+revenue under my superintendence. That the Dyaks were to be treated
+the same as the Malays, their property protected, their taxes fixed,
+and their labor free. At the same time, I represented to him the
+difficulty of doing this, and that nothing but his power could effect
+it; as any foreigner, without his unlimited support and confidence,
+would have no chance of finding obedience from the numerous inferior
+Pangerans and their followers. This, with much more, was the theme
+of my conversation; to which was replied, _imprimis_, That their
+customs and religion must not be infringed. That with regard to the
+violence and rapacity of the higher classes, and the uncertainty
+of taxation, which led to so much oppression, they were by no means
+any part of the Ondong Ondong, _i. e._, the written law of Borneo,
+but gross abuses which had arisen out of lax government. That it was
+the wish of his heart to see these things mended; and that nothing
+should be wanting on his part to assist me in accomplishing objects
+so desirable, particularly with respect to the Dyaks, who were so
+grossly abused. On this, a written agreement was made out, merely to
+the purport that I was to reside at Sarawak in order to 'seek for
+profit;' and on my remarking that this paper expressed nothing, he
+said I must not think that it was the one understood between us, but
+merely for him to show to the sultan at Borneo in the first place. I
+accepted this version of the story, though it looked suspicious; and
+on my part, over and above our written agreement, which expressed
+nothing, I consented to buy a vessel, and bring down trade to the
+place, in return for which I was assured of antimony ore in plenty;
+and though I knew that profit was not to be expected, I was desirous
+to comply, as, without a vessel regularly trading here, it would be
+impossible to develop the resources of the country. While I went to
+Singapore, the rajah promised to build me a house, in which I was to
+take up my residence. I sailed accordingly, and returned within three
+months, having performed all my engagements; but on reaching Sarawak,
+the first disappointment I experienced was, that the house was not
+commenced. I urged them to begin it, and after the most provoking
+delays at length got it finished. I mention this because it was the
+only instance in which good faith was kept.
+
+"_August 3d._--The two schooners, Royalist and Swift, having arrived
+at Sarawak, I found myself with a heavy monthly expense, and was
+naturally anxious to dispatch them as speedily as possible. I was
+assured that 6000 peculs of antimony ore would be down immediately,
+and that whenever the people were set to work, any quantity might
+be procured without difficulty; which, indeed, I knew to be true,
+as Macotah had loaded a ship, a brig, and three native vessels in
+six weeks. The procrastination, therefore, was the more provoking;
+but as I had determined to arm myself with patience, and did not
+anticipate foul play, I was content to wait for a time. The Swift
+being leaky and requiring repairs, was another inducement to me to
+lie by and land her cargo, which, ever since my arrival, the rajah
+petitioned to have ashore, giving every pledge for a quick and good
+return. At length I consented to let him have the cargo into his own
+hands, on the assurance that the antimony ore" (_i. e._, the 6000
+peculs which were ready?) "should be brought down directly. Nothing
+could be more correct than the way they received the cargo, taking an
+account of each separate article, comparing it with the invoice, and
+noting down the deficiency; and the rajah himself superintended this
+interesting process from morning till dark. At this time, having agreed
+with him for the whole, as the easiest and best mode of dealing under
+the circumstances, I did not much trouble myself about the deposit;
+and my attention was first roused by the extreme apathy of the whole
+party directly the cargo was in their possession--overhauled, reckoned,
+and disposed of among them."
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+    Obstacles in the way of coming to a satisfactory
+    conclusion with Muda Hassim.--The law of force and reprisal
+    considered.--Capabilities of Sarawak.--Account of Sarebus
+    and Sakarran pirates.--Excursion up the river.--Visit to
+    the Singe Dyaks.--Description of Mr. Brooke's house at
+    Sarawak.--Circumstances relating to the wreck off Borneo Proper.
+
+
+During the succeeding pages of my friend's journal, one hardly knows
+which to admire most; his firmness, his cool courage, his determined
+perseverance, or his patience. On the other hand, it is difficult to
+decide whether the rajah's indolence and ingratitude, or Macota's
+low cunning and treachery are the more disgusting. But I continue
+the narrative, and readers will judge for themselves.
+
+"Yet," says Mr. Brooke, "I had confidence, and was loth to allow
+any base suspicion to enter my mind against a man who had hitherto
+behaved well to me, and had not deceived me before. From the time the
+cargo had been disposed of, I found myself positively laid on the
+shelf. No return arrived; no steps were taken to work the antimony
+ore; no account appeared of the positive amount to be received: a
+promise was tendered; and all my propositions--nay, my very desire
+to speak of the state of the country--were evaded. I found myself
+clipped like Samson, while delay was heaped upon delay, excuse
+piled on excuse, and all covered with the utmost show of kindness
+and civility. It was provoking beyond sufferance; but with several
+strokes which I considered important, I bore it with saint-like
+patience. I remonstrated mildly but firmly on the waste of my money,
+and on the impossibility of any good to the country while the rajah
+conducted himself as he had done. I urged upon him to release the
+poor women whom he had kept confined for nearly five months; and I
+guarantied the peaceful disposition of the people if it were done. I
+might as well have whistled to the winds, or have talked reason to
+stones. I was overwhelmed with professions of affection and kindness,
+but nothing ensued. I had trusted--my eyes gradually opened--I feared I
+was betrayed and robbed, and had at length determined to be observant
+and watchful, when an event occurred which finished the delusion,
+and woke me fully to the treachery, or at any rate the weakness,
+at work against me. My house was finished, and I had just taken
+possession of it, when I understood that an overwhelming body of Dyaks,
+accompanied by Malays, were proceeding up the river, with the avowed
+purpose of attacking a hostile tribe, but with the real design of
+slaughtering all the weak tribes in their way. Upward of 100 boats,
+with certainly not fewer than 2500 men, had been at Sarawak a week,
+asking permission for this expedition; and I was informed there was
+not the slightest chance of its being granted, when to my surprise
+I saw the expedition start.
+
+"On being convinced that they really were going up the country,
+I instantly quitted the house and returned on board the Royalist,
+sending to know whether the rajah had granted leave for their entrance
+into the interior. By him the whole blame of the transaction was
+thrown upon Macota and the Orang Kaya de Gadong; and he himself was
+said to be so ill that he could not be seen; but it was added, as I
+disliked the measure so greatly, the same parties who had sent the
+Dyaks up could recall them down, which indeed I had insisted on being
+done. They accordingly retrograded and left; after which I continued
+sulky on board and the rajah, shamming sick, sulked in his harem. That
+any man beside the rajah himself would have been bold enough to grant
+the permission, I knew, from experience, was impossible. I accepted
+his denial as the groundwork of a reconciliation. In the mean time,
+as he continued indisposed, I intimated my intention of proceeding to
+Borneo in three days, and dispatching the Swift at the same time to
+proceed to Singapore; part of her cargo, 750 peculs of antimony ore,
+having been at length put on board. On this being made known to the
+rajah, he forgot his sickness, and came out and proffered me a meeting
+to discuss affairs, which I postponed until the following day. In
+the mean time I took a candid view of my position, and considered the
+best means of extricating myself from my difficulties with as little
+trouble and inconvenience as possible to either party.
+
+"I had lost much valuable time, spent much money, and risked my life
+and the lives of my crew, in order to render assistance to Rajah
+Muda Hassim in his distress; in return for which he had voluntarily
+offered me the country. The conditions of my acceptance had been
+discussed and mutually understood, and I had, in fulfillment of my
+part, brought vessel and cargo. Profit I did not much care about;
+the development of the country was my chief, I may say my only, aim;
+and on my arrival I had been delayed and cheated by false promises,
+which showed too plainly that he neither meant to adhere to his former
+agreement, nor to pay for what he had on false pretences obtained. It
+may appear to many that no measures ought to be kept with one who had
+so behaved; but for the following reasons I resolved still to wait his
+pleasure. In the first place, it was barely possible that indolence,
+and not treachery, might have actuated him; and in the next place, if
+it was possible to arrange so as to get back the amount of the Swift's
+cargo, I was in duty and justice bound to use every endeavor before
+resorting to measures of force. As for the cession of the country,
+and all the good which must have resulted from it, I put these
+considerations altogether out of the question. I had been deceived
+and betrayed, and had met with the grossest ingratitude; but I had no
+claim, nor would any written agreement have given me one; and I was
+therefore constrained to submit without returning evil for evil. Every
+point weighed, I felt, from every motive, inclined, nay desirous, to
+avoid a rupture, or taking an equivalent for my property by force. The
+Swift, with the part of her cargo received on board, after three
+months' detention, and no more even talked of, I therefore resolved,
+as already stated, to dispatch to Singapore. My first intention on
+arriving here had been to send the Royalist back to that port and
+dispose of her; but a native rumor being afloat that the crew of a
+shipwrecked vessel were in Borneo Proper, I deemed it incumbent on me
+to visit that place and effect their release. I had used every means
+in my power since my arrival to induce the Rajah Muda Hassim to send
+one or two of his Pangerans and a letter from himself to the sultan
+by the Royalist, in order to insure that object; but although, day by
+day, I had received promises, they were never performed. Seeing now
+that this duty of humanity could no longer be delayed with propriety,
+I resolved to dispatch the Royalist to Borneo, and myself to remain
+here, to endeavor, if I could, to obtain _my own_. Each vessel was
+to return as quickly as possible from her place of destination;
+and I then resolved to give two additional months to the rajah, and
+to urge him in every way in my power to do what he was bound to do
+as an act of common honesty. Should these means fail, after making
+the strongest representations and giving amplest time, I considered
+myself free to extort by force what I could not gain by fair means.
+
+"Having determined on these steps, I met the rajah by appointment,
+and repeated all my grievances, and set strongly before him the injury
+done in consequence; and lastly, plainly told him that I only came and
+now only stayed in his country at his request, but that the property
+he had taken must be repaid, and subsequently to that, if he had any
+proposition to make, I would endeavor to meet his wishes. To all this
+I received _no one satisfactory answer_, and, from the shuffling on
+every complaint, I formed the worst opinion of his intentions.
+
+"My determination, however, having been previously made, the result of
+this conversation had no effect upon me; and at the end of three days,
+the time I had limited, no letter for the sultan being forthcoming,
+on the fourth morning the two schooners proceeded to sea, one for
+Borneo, the other for Singapore, while, with three companions,
+I remained in my new house. [12]
+
+"I wish now to discuss a question which has often occupied my mind,
+and upon which I have been very desirous to arrive at a right
+conclusion. It is certain that a British subject cannot wrongfully
+attack or injure any prince or person in his own country without
+rendering himself liable to be punished by the laws of England. It is
+both right and just that it should be so, because in demi-civilized or
+savage countries the natives are often unable to protect themselves,
+and an attack upon them savors of piracy. On the other hand, if the
+native prince be the party to blame; if he fraudulently possess himself
+of property under false pretences, make promises which he breaks,
+and enter into agreements before witnesses which he never intends
+to fulfill; then, I ask, is a British subject to submit to the loss,
+when the party defrauding him is able to pay and will not? I answer
+decidedly, he is not bound to submit to be cheated, and, if he have
+the means, he has the right to enforce repayment. It may be urged that
+trust ought not to be reposed; but trust is the ordinary course of
+trade, and cannot alter the question. Again, it may be said, Apply
+to the government; but it is well known and acknowledged that the
+government will not interfere in any case of the sort. Seek redress by
+law! there is no law to meet the contingency. Bear the loss, _i. e._
+be betrayed, deceived, and cheated, and submit! It cannot be; for
+although the law may properly inquire into the circumstances, yet
+as it will not protect me here, or give me any redress for _fraud_
+or _murder_, it cannot punish, if right be on my side. Am I quite
+sure that the right is on my side? It is, as far as I can judge; and
+having candidly stated every fact and circumstance, I am convinced
+there can be but one opinion on the subject. I am sure that if I
+seize property to the amount of that taken from me, I act justly,
+though perhaps not legally; yet I firmly believe legally likewise,
+although law and justice do not necessarily go always hand in hand. On
+the whole, there was the old sore rankling--the false promises, the
+gross deceit, the base ingratitude to a man who had done everything
+to relieve this equivocating rajah from disgrace, defeat, and perhaps
+death. But here I close this account for the present, to be resumed
+on the return of the Royalist from Borneo.
+
+"_August 4th._--Both retrospectively and prospectively the grounds for
+all these transactions were ever pressing on my mind and guiding my
+actions. The capabilities of the Sarawak country were very great. It
+could abundantly supply the richest produce of the vegetable kingdom;
+it abounded in mineral wealth, and especially in a vast staple
+commodity of antimony ore; with a considerable population of Dyaks,
+whose condition was decidedly improvable; a Malay population, by no
+means large, which was advantageous; and a Chinese population ready to
+immigrate with even a moderate prospect of protection. Beside these
+inducements, must be added its propinquity to the Pontiana river,
+and the trade which by that route might flow even from the center
+of this little-known island. To crown all, there were the credit to
+myself in case of success, the amelioration of the native condition,
+however partial, and the benefit to commerce in general. These were
+the reasons that induced me to enter on this arduous task; and to
+these I may add a supplementary one, viz., that when I had struggled
+for a time, I might rouse the zeal of others, and find efficient
+support either from government or the mercantile body.
+
+"I have in a former part of my journal mentioned the Illanun pirates,
+and my meeting with them here. On our return we heard of their being
+still on the coast, and from that time to this they have been ravaging
+and plundering between Tanjong Datu, Sirhassan, and Pontiana. Malays
+and Chinese have been carried off in great numbers; Borneo and Sambas
+prahus captured without end; and so much havoc committed, that the
+whole coast, as far as the natives are concerned, may be pronounced
+in a state of blockade.
+
+"Beside the Illanuns, there are two other descriptions of pirates
+infesting these seas: one, the Dyaks of Sakarran and Sarebus, two
+predatory tribes already mentioned; the other called Balagnini, a wild
+people represented to come from the northward of Sooloo. I have not
+seen them; but their boats are said to be very long and swift, with
+sometimes outriggers; and one particular in their mode of attack is
+too curious to omit. In closing on their victims they use long poles,
+having a hook made fast at the extremity, with which, being expert,
+they hook their opponents at a distance and drag them overboard,
+while others are fighting with saligis and spears.
+
+"I have before mentioned the arrival of one hundred Dyak boats at
+Sarawak, to request permission from the rajah to ascend the river
+and attack a tribe toward Sambas. What a tale of misgovernment,
+tyranny, and weakness, does this request tell! These Dyaks were
+chiefly from Sakarran, mixed with the Sarebus, and with them three
+boats of the Malo tribe, whose residence is toward the Pontiana
+river. The Sakarrans are the most powerful, the most predatory,
+and the most independent tribe on the N.W. coast, their dependence
+on Borneo being merely nominal. The latter are likewise predatory
+and numerous, but they are on good terms with all the coast tribes
+and with the Malays, while the Sarebus are against all, and all are
+against them. Speaking generally, they are a remarkably fine body of
+people, handsome, intelligent, powerful, well-made, beautifully-limbed,
+and clear-skinned. They are somewhat fairer than the Malays and the
+mountain Dyaks; but in manners, customs, and language, exactly resemble
+the Sibnowans, except that the last, from misfortune, have become a
+peaceful tribe. The Sarebus and Sakarrans are only distinguishable
+by the numerous rings they wear in their ears. On one man I counted
+fourteen of brass, various sizes, in one ear only. They are rather
+fond of ornament, and wear grotesque caps of various-colored cloths
+(particularly red), some of them square, others peaked, and others like
+a cocked hat worn athwart-ships, and terminating in sharp points on
+the top of the head. These head-dresses are ornamented with tufts of
+red hair or black human hair, shreds of cloth, and sometimes feathers;
+but what renders them laughable to look at is, that the hair is cut
+close to match the shape of the cap; so that when a man displaces it,
+you find him bare of hair about the forehead and posterior part of
+the skull, that over the ears cut into points, and the rest of the
+skull showing a good crop of black bristles.
+
+"The commanders of this party were yclept poetically by their own
+people, as _noms de guerre_, the Sun and the Moon, _i. e._, _Bulan_,
+for moon, and _Matari_ for sun. The Sun was as fine a young man as the
+eye would wish to rest upon; straight, elegantly yet strongly made,
+with a chest and neck, and head set on them, which might serve Apollo;
+legs far better than his of Belvidere; and a countenance mild and
+intelligent. I became very good friends with both Sun and Moon, and
+gave them a great deal of good advice about piracy, which, of course,
+was thrown away.
+
+"Their boats are built very long, raised at the stern, and the largest
+pulling as many as sixty paddles; but I should not think them fast,
+and any boat with a swivel might cut them up. The least average I
+could give the hundred boats is twenty-five men per boat, making,
+as already observed, 2500 in all. We counted ninety, and there were
+others down the reach we could not see; and they themselves stated
+their force to be 140 boats and 4000 men. The manners of these Dyaks
+toward us were reserved, quiet, and independent. They stole nothing,
+and in trading for small quantities of rice, bees-wax, cotton, and
+their cloths, showed a full knowledge of the relative value of the
+articles, or rather they priced their own at far above their proper
+worth. I may indeed say of all the Dyaks I have seen, that they are
+anxious to receive, but very loth to give; and when they have obtained
+cloth, salt, copper, beads, &c. to the amount of two or three dollars
+as a present, will bring in a bunch of plantains or a little rice,
+and ask you _to buy_. The Sibnowans are the chief exceptions to this,
+and they are my pet tribe. The language of Sakarran and Sarebus is the
+same as the Sibnowan; and with all the word God, the _Allah Talla_
+of the Malays, is expressed by _Battara_, from which we may infer
+that their notion of the Deity, as probably was all the religion of
+these regions, was derived from the Hindoos.
+
+"When this force of Dyaks was, contrary to the assurance given to
+me, sweeping up the river, I had just finished a late dinner. I was
+_angry enough_, and resolved instanter to leave the house, when who
+should come in, _as if by pure accident_, but Pangeran Budrudeen,
+the rajah's brother. I controlled myself, spoke strongly withal but
+civilly, and sent him away wishing he had not come near me; and the
+boat being ready, I retired from the house to the Royalist. Their
+immediate recall was the consequence; for the rajah having denied his
+permission, those who fathered the act dared not persist in it when I
+told them it was an act of disobedience. They tried to frighten me with
+the idea that the Dyaks would attack us; but as I felt sure we could
+blow them away in ten minutes, it had not the desired effect. They
+had in the mean time reached Leda Tanah, whence they were brought down
+again sulky enough, and did show a slight inclination to see whether
+the people on board the Swift were keeping watch; for several of their
+boats dropped close to her, and one directly under the bowsprit, as
+silently as death; but on being challenged, and a musket leveled near
+them, they sheered off, and the next day finally departed. The poor
+Dyaks in the interior, as well as the Chinese, were in the greatest
+state of alarm, and thence I gained some credit among them for my
+interference on their behalf. The very idea of letting 2500 wild
+devils loose in the interior of the country is horrible; for though
+they have one professed object, they combine many others with it,
+and being enemies of all the mountain tribes, they cut them up as much
+as they can. What object, it may be inquired, can the Malays have in
+destroying their own country and people so wantonly? I must endeavor
+to explain, to the best of my belief and knowledge. The Malays take
+part in these excursions, and thirty men joined the Sakarrans on
+the present occasion, and consequently they share in the plunder,
+and share largely. Probably Muda Hassim would have got twenty shares
+(women and children); and these twenty being reckoned at the low rate
+of twenty reals each, makes four hundred reals, beside other plunder,
+amounting to one or two hundred reals more. Inferior Pangerans would
+of course partake likewise. Muda Hassim _must_ have given his consent,
+must have been a participator in this atrocity, nobody being desperate
+enough to do such a thing without his orders. In fact, they dare not
+move up the river themselves without leave, much less send up the
+Dyaks. It is a hateful feature in this government, newly developed
+since the close of the war.
+
+"_August 5th._--One excursion I made up the river over our old
+ground, staying a week, visiting various places. Where the village
+of Siniawan once stood is now a small Chinese settlement, and their
+garden bespeaks the fertility of the soil. From Siniawan I walked
+over to Tundong, now the principal Chinese station. The scenery was
+beautiful all the way from Siniawan to Tundong--gently undulating
+ground rising into respectable hills, and backed by noble mountains,
+and valleys so quiet and still, and looking so fertile, that I sighed
+to think man's cultivating hand was not here. We paused, and rested
+at a farm of the Paninjow. Their mode of cultivation is the same as
+described by Marsden--cutting, clearing, planting, and abandoning
+after one or two crops. They seem likewise to prefer the upland to
+the wet ground. Tundong is quite a new settlement, situated close on
+the banks of the river, which is here quite narrow and shallow. The
+distance may be ten miles by water, as it took our boat four hours
+and a half to pull against stream. We spent the same time walking,
+but diverged from the road. Wherever the Chinese are, the sound of
+the axe and the saw is to be heard in the woods as you approach, and
+all are industriously employed. They have their carpenters, sawyers,
+blacksmiths, and housebuilders, while the mass work the antimony
+ore, or are busy constructing the trench where they find and wash
+the gold. With such inhabitants a country must get on well, if they
+are allowed fair play. I was quite tired, and stayed all night at
+Tundong. On the following morning I started for the Singe mountain,
+which is the residence of the Dyak tribe of the same name. The walk,
+including a rest, occupied nearly three hours, the latter part uphill,
+and we reached the village a good deal knocked up from the heat of the
+sun and the badness of the way. Our entertainment was not of the best;
+yet the Singe were not inhospitable, but suspicious that we came to
+rob them. The rice and the fowls we required, although we paid for
+them at double their value, were reluctantly produced; while at the
+same time they showed themselves anxious enough to obtain the salt
+we had brought to exchange, without giving the equivalent.
+
+"The village is built on the shoulder of a mountain, not half way up,
+and only accessible by a ladder-like path on either side. It consists
+of about 200 miserable huts, and is as dirty and filthy as any place
+I ever was in, with numerous half-starved pigs and dogs running about
+it. The houses are small and mean, and detached from each other,
+contrary to the usage of the other Dyaks, who inhabit one large house
+containing numerous partitions for families; here, however, they have
+one or two public halls or council-houses, which are built and thatched
+in a circular form, and in which their young men and bachelors sleep;
+here likewise are deposited the heads, of which they have more than
+enow, as above one hundred ghastly remnants of mortality ornamented
+the abode in which we slept. I could not on this occasion find
+out that they professed to take the heads of friends or strangers,
+though the latter may fall victims if on enemies' ground. They seem
+to have no idea of cannibalism or human sacrifice, nor did they accuse
+their enemies of these practices. They have a custom, that in case of
+sickness in a house, or child-bearing, the house is forbidden to the
+males and strangers, which is something similar to the tabboo of the
+South-Sea Islands. This plea was urged as a reason why the head man or
+Orang Kaya Parembam could not receive us in his dwelling. The Dyaks
+are always decorous in their behavior, rarely give way to mirth, and
+never annoy by their curiosity. Toward the Malays they are extremely
+sulky and mulish; but they have good reasons, as the Malays are ever
+extorting from them, and threatening them with the anger of the rajah
+or the incursion of the Sakarrans. The women wear black bamboo stays,
+which are sewn on when they arrive at the age of puberty, and never
+removed save when _enceinte_. These Singe Dyaks, like the others,
+attend to the warning of birds of various sorts, some birds being
+in more repute than others. On starting for a hunting excursion we
+met one of them on the hill-side, who said, 'You will be fortunate:
+I heard the bird behind you.' Here, if a bird is before you, it is
+a sign that enemies are there too, and they turn back: if behind,
+they proceed in good spirits. They have a prejudice against the flesh
+of deer, which the men may not eat, but which is allowed to women and
+children. The reason given for this is, that if the warriors eat the
+flesh of deer, they become as faint-hearted as that animal. These may
+be called their superstitions, but religion they have none; and though
+they know a name for God, and entertain some faint notion of a future
+state, yet it is only in the abstract, for practically the belief
+seems to be a dead letter. At their marriage they kill fowls, as I
+have narrated; but this is a ceremony, not a sacrifice. They have no
+priests or idols, say no prayers, make no offerings to propitiate the
+Deity, and it is little likely therefore that human sacrifice should
+exist among them. In this respect they are different from any known
+people who have arrived at the same state of civilization. The New
+Zealanders, the inhabitants of the South Seas, &c. &c., for instance,
+all bow to their idols, toward which the same feelings of reverence
+and devotion, of awe and fear, obtain as with more civilized beings
+in regard to the invisible Deity; but here are the mere words, barren
+and without practice.
+
+"The day following our arrival at Singe we descended into the plains,
+amid their former rice-fields, to shoot deer. The place is called
+Pasar (bazaar or market), though it could scarcely ever have been
+one. The rice-cultivation was formerly very extensive, and the low
+ground all about the mountain is well cleared of wood by the industry
+of these Dyaks. But the country becoming unsettled and troubled, and
+roving parties of strange Dyaks landing on the coast near Onetong,
+cut off the people employed in the fields, and they consequently were
+abandoned. We took up our quarters in a ruinous little deserted hovel,
+and in the evening walked over the neighboring district, where the
+cocoanut and betel-trees mark its former state of prosperity. The sago
+is likewise planted in considerable quantity, and serves for food,
+when rice falls short. Deer, the large deer of Borneo, abound, and in
+a walk of a few miles we saw from fifteen to twenty, and from their
+tracks they must be very numerous indeed. The walking was difficult,
+for owing to the softness of the ground, we often sank in up to our
+thighs, and generally to our knees: and a short distance in this sort
+of wading in stiff mud serves to knock a man up. I was fortunate enough
+to kill one of the deer, and have no doubt that with more favorable
+light a man might get many. The night's repose in the hut was broken
+and uncomfortable, and our people were busy for several hours curing
+the flesh of the animal, which is done as follows: first it is slightly
+salted, and then burnt over a quick wood-fire in slices or lumps,
+and thus keeps for many days, and is very palatable. Seriff Hussein
+(formerly of Siniawan) was my companion on this excursion. He had
+three followers, while I had three Javanese with me, beside my Bugis
+boy Situ, who walks with the best of us. The morning after killing
+the deer we ascended the Singe again by a desperately steep path;
+and after resting an hour or two, walked to our boats, and descended
+the stream to Siniawan. The night was marked by torrents of rain,
+thunder, and lightning, which left the roads so bad that I resigned
+my intention of walking up to Sarambo, and in the evening dropped
+down to Leda Tanah, and tried unsuccessfully for another deer. We
+saw some, but could not get near them. Here likewise are plenty of
+rice-fields deserted, but which a little labor would bring again
+into cultivation. The day following we rejoined the schooner, and,
+as usual, found everything at a stand-still on shore.
+
+"I may here mention our house, or, as I fondly styled it, our
+palace. It is an edifice fifty-four feet square, mounted upon
+numerous posts of the Nibong palm, with nine windows in each
+front. The roof (_atap_) is of Nipah leaves, and the floor and
+partitions are all of plank: furnished with couches, tables, chairs,
+books, &c. the whole is as comfortable as man would wish for in
+this out-of-the-way country; and we have, beside, a bathing-house,
+cook-house, and servants' apartments detached. The view from the
+house to the eastward comprises a reach of the river, and to the
+westward looks toward the blue mountains of Matang; the north fronts
+the river, and the south the jungle; and but for the uncertainty of
+our affairs, I would have had a garden ere this, and found amusement
+in clearing and improving. Farewell, I fear, to these aspirations;
+our abode, however, though spacious, cool, and comfortable, can only
+be considered a temporary residence, for the best of all reasons--that
+in the course of a year it will tumble down, from the weight of the
+superstructure being placed on weak posts. The original plan was
+to have had a lower story, but about this I am now indifferent. The
+time here passes monotonously, but not unpleasantly. Had we but the
+animation of hope, and the stimulus of improvement, time would pass
+rapidly, though without a companion to converse with.
+
+"_August 6th._--The Royalist, as I mentioned before I reverted
+to the subject of the pirate fleet, started for Borneo Proper,
+to inquire respecting the crew of an English vessel, reported to
+have been shipwrecked. Pangeran Sulieman brought the intelligence
+from Borneo, but he knew very few particulars; and having been here
+four months before my arrival, the chances were that with the change
+of the monsoon they had sailed for Manilla. As, however, he assured
+me he had seen European men and women, and a numerous Lascar crew, I
+thought it right, at all events, to ascertain the fact; and in case of
+their being there still, to endeavor to obtain their release. For this
+purpose I was very desirous of procuring a letter from Muda Hassim to
+the sultan, conveyed by a Pangeran of rank; which, in addition to my
+own application, would most likely insure the object in view. This,
+however, though promised, I could not accomplish; delay coming upon
+delay, and the plague of my own affairs also intervening, postponed
+my intention till I could see the Swift fairly off for Singapore. The
+Royalist then went out with her on the Sunday, July 25th, proceeding
+to Borneo to demand the crew, if there: and the other to Singapore. On
+the 2d of August I was surprised by the receipt of a letter brought
+from Sadong, and bearing date the 10th of July. The gentleman who
+writes it can best tell his own story.
+
+
+
+
+    'Island Sirhassan, off Tan Datu,
+    'July 10th, 1841.
+
+
+    'A boat leaves this to-morrow for Sarawak; perhaps this may fall
+    into the hands of Mr. Brooke, or some of my countrymen, which,
+    should I not succeed in getting to Singapore, I trust will lose
+    no time in letting the authorities know, so that steps may be
+    taken for the release of the remaining thirty-six British subjects
+    now at Borneo; which I fear nothing but one of H. M. ships will
+    effect. The pirates are cruising in great force between Sambas
+    and this, and have taken thirteen Borneo prahus, or more; they
+    know that there are Europeans in the prahu, and have expressed a
+    wish to take them. Our situation is not very enviable. The bearer
+    of this has just escaped from them. I have been living ashore
+    with Abduramon, a native of Pulo Pinang, who knows Mr. Brooke,
+    and has been very kind to me. Trusting penmanship and paper will
+    be excused,
+
+
+    'I remain, &c. &c.
+    'G. H. W. Gill.'
+
+
+
+
+"On the reverse was the following attestation, which threw more light
+on the circumstances:--
+
+
+    'I, G. H. Willoughby Gill, late chief officer of the ship
+    Sultana, of Bombay, do hereby certify that the said ship was
+    totally destroyed by lightning, thirty miles N. E. of the Bombay
+    shoal, coast of Palawan, on the 4th of January, 1841. Part of
+    the crew, forty-one in number, succeeded in reaching Borneo on
+    the 16th of January, in a state of starvation and misery not to
+    be described; the remainder are reported to have landed on the
+    coast of Borneo per long-boat:--Captain John Page; G. H. W. Gill,
+    chief officer; Alexander Young, second officer; one gunner; five
+    sea-cunnies; two carpenters; twenty-three natives and Lascars; two
+    Nakodas. Passengers:--Mrs. Page (of a daughter, 31st of March);
+    Mr. and Miss de Souza; Mrs. Anderson, servant; one Ayah; in all
+    forty-two souls. The sultan has permitted myself, Mr. and Miss de
+    Souza, with three servants, to proceed to Singapore in one of his
+    prahus, where I hope to succeed in procuring the release of the
+    remainder of my companions from their present very uncomfortable
+    situation. I dare not say more. Mr. de Souza and myself left on
+    the 24th of May, and put in here dismasted on the 20th of June;
+    since then have been detained by a fleet of piratical prahus,
+    which arrived on the 24th, and left 9th of July. Should nothing
+    prevent, we expect to be ready by the 15th; but am very doubtful
+    of ever getting to Singapore, as I fear they are on the look-out
+    for us outside.'
+
+
+"This is the contents of the paper, which arriving after I had
+retired to rest, effectually banished sleep from my pillow. The
+'uncomfortable situation,' coupled with 'I dare say no more,' gives
+the worst suspicions of their treatment in Borneo; while the chance
+of the party at Sirhassan falling into the hands of the pirates is
+extremely shocking. I instantly, on the receipt of the letter, sent
+to the rajah to request that he would dispatch a boat for Sirhassan,
+with a person competent to treat with the pirates; and on the morning
+of the 3d I succeeded in dispatching a boat to Songi, in the Sadong,
+to get some of the Datu Pangeran's people, who are Illanuns; but up to
+this time they have not returned. I can only hope these poor people
+at Sirhassan will be wise enough to stay there, instead of risking a
+capture by the pirates. Should the Royalist return shortly, and have
+obtained the crew, we may fight our way to that place and release
+the party, who, I have little doubt, are still detained there. If the
+Royalist is long away, and the captain goes in search of the missing
+boat's crew, we may yet have the Illanuns from Sadong here in time
+to dispatch. As for myself, I am tied, and have not the means at
+present of locomotion; my situation is an anxious one. The Swift
+must have been liable to fall in with this great force of pirates
+on her way to Singapore, and will be again liable on her return. The
+doubt and uncertainty about the poor fellows in Borneo and Sirhassan,
+and the wretched condition of my own affairs, all cause unpleasant
+reflections to my mind; yet I yield not, but will fight it out.
+
+"I have just brought up my history to the present time; and, like a
+log on the water, must wait for events to develop themselves.
+
+"_7th._--A report arrived this morning that the Sirhassan party sailed
+for Singapore on the 3d of the moon; and as Mr. Gill says they would
+be ready for sea about the 15th of last month, I consider it likely
+to be true. I trust they may escape the pirates, and safely reach
+their destination."
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+    Return of the Royalist from Borneo Proper with intelligence of the
+    sufferers from the wreck of the Sultana.--Effect of the arrival
+    of the Diana on the negotiations for their release.--Outrage
+    and oppression of Macota.--Fate of the Sultana and her
+    crew.--Mr. Brooke made Rajah of Sarawak.--Liberation of rebel
+    prisoners.--State of Dyak tribes.--Court of justice opened.--Dyak
+    burials, and respect for the dead.--Malay cunning and treachery.
+
+
+While waiting events, Mr. Brooke amused himself by writing down
+such accounts of the interior as he was enabled to collect, from
+time to time, from the natives visiting Sarawak, as well as a brief
+description of the constitution and government, as enacted in Borneo
+Proper. But as my object now is to trace the progress of my friend
+up to the time when he embarked on board the Dido, I shall refer to
+these matters hereafter.
+
+"_Tuesday, August 17th, 1841._--Three weeks the Royalist has now been
+absent, and I begin, in spite of my determination to the contrary,
+to be somewhat uneasy about her. Suspense is certainly more difficult
+to bear than misfortune, for the certainty of an event arouses within
+us some of our best feelings to resist it; but suspense lets loose
+our imagination, and gives rise to that sickening feeling of 'hope
+deferred,' so truly characterized in the Scriptures.
+
+"_18th._--The Royalist arrived near Sarawak, having come into the
+river on the 16th, and in one tide from the Morotaba entrance as far as
+the Paduman [13] rocks. They reported that they had not effected the
+release of the prisoners, were very rudely treated, the boat detained
+at a fort near the entrance of the Borneo river, all communication
+denied with the Europeans, a letter for them seized from the native
+crew, and provisions and water refused. In addition to this, a letter
+from the sultan, addressed to me, stated to the effect, that the crew
+of the Sultana having entered into a treaty with him, the merchant
+and mate (Messrs. de Souza and Gill) had gone to Singapore to fulfill
+that agreement. The captain having a wife in the family way, preferred
+staying in Borneo, as the vessel was a small one, and therefore the
+sultan did not grant my request on this occasion; and further, having
+an agreement, he did not wish to be deceived regarding it. This was
+a falsehood from beginning to end, as will be clear by comparing it
+with Mr. Gill's statement, though I fear the poor men have been rash
+enough to enter into some arrangement to ransom themselves."
+
+On the 19th of August the Swift arrived; but the journal was laid by
+until the 24th of October, when it thus recommences:
+
+"I may now continue my narrative of events which have happened since I
+last used my pen, together with fresh details of my present intentions,
+and such additional knowledge as has been acquired. After the arrival
+of the Swift, I still adhered to my former resolution of waiting
+patiently for a settlement. I made several strong remonstrances,
+and urged for an answer to a letter I had addressed to Muda Hassim,
+in which was recapitulated our entire negotiation. This letter
+was acknowledged to be perfectly true and correct, and the rajah,
+in the conference which followed, again pledged himself to give me
+the country, saying he always intended to do so, but was involved
+in difficulties of the nature of which I could not be aware. Thus
+far things went well, and there appeared, indeed, a frankness in his
+manner which had formerly pleased me, but had long been in abeyance.
+
+"On the return of the Royalist from Borneo, I had assured them that
+a government vessel would be sent to demand the captives; but, taking
+this assurance for a mere boast, they paid little attention to it, and
+were therefore excessively frightened when, a week after the Swift,
+the Diana steamer entered the river. I had the pleasure of calming
+their fears, and was too generous to push matters to a settlement
+during the two days the steamer remained.
+
+"Muda Hassim now expressed himself desirous of sending some Pangerans
+to Borneo, and I wished him likewise to do so on account of the
+reflective power of the steamer, which, in that case, would have
+shone upon him. With his usual delay, however, he failed to be ready,
+and these Pangerans did not quit the river for two days afterward,
+when they proceeded in a native prahu. I accompanied the steamer to
+the mouth of the river, and wishing them success, pulled back to the
+capital of Sarawak.
+
+"_Oct 30th._--The Swift was slowly laden with antimony ore, worked
+by the Chinese; and I gradually robbed the Royalist of furniture for
+my house on shore. But I had no intention of allowing either vessel
+to sail until the time arrived which I had fixed on for the final
+adjustment of my affairs. By degrees, however, I learned many of the
+difficulties of poor Muda Hassim's situation, and much of the weakness
+of his character. The dissensions in Borneo; the intrigues of Macota;
+the rapacity of his own people, and their total want of fidelity;
+the bribes from the Sultan of Sambas; the false representations of
+numerous Borneo Pangerans who asserted the immense profit to be derived
+from the country; the dilatory movements of the Chinese; some doubts
+of my good faith; and, above all, the natural tenacity of power, all
+conspired to involve the rajah in the utmost perplexity, and would,
+but for counterbalancing circumstances, have turned the scale against
+me. Muda Hassim knew Macota to be false and in league with the Sultan
+of Sambas; and he felt that he had no power, and that if he broke with
+me, it would be extremely difficult to support himself against the
+former rebels. He was fond of me, and trusted me more than he trusted
+any one else; and pecuniary considerations had no doubt some weight,
+for with all Macota's promises he could not get sufficient ore to
+repay one quarter of his debt to me. However, all these conflicting
+considerations, instead of inducing Muda Hassim to take one course,
+only served to encourage his dilatory temper, and although puzzled,
+ashamed, and fearful, he could not decide.
+
+"At this period a robbery was committed up the river by some of
+Macota's followers on a Chinese hadji, a converted Mohammedan. They
+beat the old man, threw him into the water, and robbed him of a
+tael of gold. The beating and attempt at drowning were certain,
+for the Chinese hadji was so ill for several days under my care,
+that he was in considerable danger. He complained to me loudly of
+Macota; and from other sources I gained a pretty accurate account of
+that gentleman's proceedings. By threats, by intrigue, by falsehood,
+and even by violence, he had prevented or driven all persons from
+daring to visit or come near me, whether abroad or ashore. He was
+taxing the poor Dyaks, harassing the Siniawans, and leagued with the
+Borneo Pangerans to plunder and get all he possibly could. Every Dyak
+community was watched by his followers, and a spear raised opposite
+the chief's house, to intimate that no person was to trade or barter
+except the Pangeran. The mode of plunder is thus perpetrated. Rice,
+clothes, gongs, and other articles are sent to a tribe at a fixed
+price, which the Dyaks dare not refuse, for it is at the risk of losing
+their children! The prices thus demanded by Macota were as follows:
+one gantong of rice for thirty birds' nests. Twenty-four gantongs here
+is equal to a pecul of rice--a pecul of rice costs one dollar and a
+half; whereas thirty birds' nests weigh one catty, and are valued at
+two rupees, so that the twenty-fourth part of one and a half dollars
+is sold for two rupees. Was it surprising that these people were poor
+and wretched? My astonishment was, that they continued to labor, and,
+indeed, nothing but their being a surprisingly industrious race can
+account for it, and they are only enabled to live at all by secreting
+a portion of their food. Yet war and bad government, or, rather, no
+government, have had the effect of driving more than half the Dyak
+tribes beyond the limits of Sarawak.
+
+"The rapacity of these Malays is as unbounded as it is short-sighted;
+for one would think that the slightest degree of common sense
+would induce some of the chiefs to allow no one to plunder except
+themselves. But this is so far from being the case, that, when their
+demand has been enforced, dozens of inferior wretches extort and
+plunder in turn, each according to his ability; and though the Dyak
+is not wanting in obstinacy, he can seldom withstand these robberies,
+for each levy is made in the name of the rajah, or some principal
+Pangeran; and the threat of bringing the powerful tribe of Sakarrans
+or Sarebus to deprive them of their heads and wives and families,
+generally reduces them to obedience. While on this subject, I may as
+well mention a fact that came later to my knowledge, when several
+of the Dyak chiefs, and one of particular intelligence, Si Meta by
+name, assured me that each family paid direct revenue from thirty
+to fifty pasus (tubs) of padi, besides all the other produces, which
+are extorted at merely nominal prices.
+
+"To return to my relation: the Chinese hadji recovered, and I
+determined to punish the aggressors, for which purpose I seized an
+Illanun said to be concerned, but who was innocent. In the mean time
+the steamer returned from Borneo, and once more put in here for wood
+and water. She brought Captain and Mrs. Page, Mr. Young, the second
+officer, and all the rest of the crew, save only a few who had landed
+at the north part of Borneo, and there been seized and sold as slaves,
+and brought afterward as slaves to Borneo Proper. As the history
+of the shipwreck and detention is curious, I may here relate it as
+nearly as I can.
+
+"The Sultana, a fine ship of 700 tons, the day previous to her being
+struck by lightning, found the French frigate Magicienne aground and
+deserted on the Bombay shoal; Captain Page boarded her, and discovered
+every thing as it had been left by the crew--provisions, water,
+&c., in abundance. The day after, the Sultana met with a worse fate,
+being struck, and the cotton in the hold, fore and aft, fired by the
+electric fluid. They had scarcely time to hoist out the boat when the
+flames burst forth, and they quitted her very short of provisions, and
+saving only some money and jewels. Captain Page bore up for the wreck
+of the French frigate, intending to refit his long-boat aboard her,
+and take provisions and arms to last them to Singapore; but, on making
+her, there was so great a wash of the sea on the lee part of the reef,
+that it was totally impossible to reach the Magicienne. Under these
+unfortunate circumstances they bore up once more, still intending to
+prosecute the voyage to Singapore, and made the land to the southward
+of Palawan; and, being then short of water and provisions, landed
+on a small islet off Balabac, or Balambangan. Here they procured a
+few shell-fish and some very bad water; but seeing some natives in
+prahus on a neighboring islet, and being-unarmed and apprehensive,
+they lighted large fires in the evening to mislead these people, and,
+as night advanced, silently put to sea, and made the best of their way
+along the coast. With a heavy sea, and often high wind, they reached as
+far as Labuan, off the entrance of the Borneo river; and here, being
+in the utmost want, and reduced to an allowance of half a biscuit and
+a cup of water per day, they were forced to put into Borneo Proper,
+not without hopes of being well used, and enabled to buy provisions
+and stores sufficient to carry them to Singapore or Sambas. I have
+omitted to mention that, on making the land the first time, they parted
+from the cutter, in consequence of the tow-rope breaking in the night;
+but as they were then within sight of Borneo, and the wind fair, there
+was no doubt of its making the land somewhere. This, indeed, it did
+at Malludu Bay, where the native crew were seized and sold as slaves.
+
+"The arrival of Captain Page in his long-boat caused, as may well be
+imagined, considerable sensation in the campong; and they reached
+the sultan's house, thinking it the best place to seek shelter and
+protection. In this, however, they were soon undeceived; for neither
+the one nor the other was granted, but a message sent that they must
+deliver up all their property into the sultan's hands, as otherwise
+he was afraid they would be plundered by his people. Accordingly,
+having possessed himself of their money, some jewels, their boat,
+&c., he gave them a miserable shed to live in. Here they passed the
+time, and were gradually robbed of every thing they had in the world,
+even to the baby-linen which Mrs. Page had prepared for an expected
+infant. Sometimes, indeed, when Captain Page refused to yield to the
+sultan's demands, their provisions were stopped till they could no
+longer hold out; and in this way they were compelled to sign bonds
+for considerable sums, with the understanding that, till these were
+procured and paid, they should be detained.
+
+"In this sad situation Mrs. Page was confined of a daughter, on
+the 31st of March; and this miserable life continued from the 4th
+of January, 1841, to August of the same year. Their first ray of
+hope was the Royalist coming to fetch them: the steamer followed,
+and they were released.
+
+"After a stay of two or three days, the steamer once more sailed;
+though I would fain have persuaded Captain Congleton to search for
+the piratical fleet, of which I had excellent information; but he
+considered himself not authorized, or, in other words, he declined
+the responsibility.
+
+"As there was a chance that Mr. Gill and the De Souzas were either
+at Sirhassan or Tambelan, the steamer decided to touch at the latter
+place, and a native chuliah brig was directed to call at the former. I
+afterward learned that the pirates were then at Sirhassan; but as
+the brig knew nothing about Sirhassan, it is probable she never went
+there. In the evening the Diana sailed, and I reached Sarawak about
+two o'clock in the morning.
+
+"I now return to my concerns. The Chinese hadji, whom I had
+protected, continued to reside with my servants, till one evening
+we were alarmed at an attempt to poison my interpreter, a native
+of the name of Mia. Arsenic had certainly been put into his rice;
+but as the servants endeavored to point suspicion on this hadji,
+and as I learned, at the same time, that they did not agree with
+the old man, I cleared him in my own mind, and rather leaned to the
+opinion of Mia having placed the arsenic in the plate himself, for the
+express purpose of accusing the hadji. Connecting this event with all
+Macota's former intrigues, I determined to bring matters to a crisis,
+and test at once the strength of the respective parties. Accordingly,
+after complaining of the matter previously mentioned to the rajah,
+I landed a party of men, fully armed, and loaded the ship's guns
+with grape and canister; after which I once more proceeded to Muda
+Hassim, and, while I protested my kindness toward him, exposed Macota's
+machinations and crimes, his oppression and his deceit, and threatened
+him with an attack, as neither Muda Hassim nor myself were safe while
+he continued practicing these arts. Muda Hassim was frightened; but
+how Macota felt I can not say, as he never moved out of his house,
+and it was long afterward before he was seen. From my knowledge,
+however, of his temperament, I can well conceive that he was reduced
+to a pitiable state of terror. The Siniawans took my part directly;
+and their chiefs came to me to say that 200 men were all ready
+whenever I pleased to call for them. The Chinese and the rest of the
+inhabitants took no side; and Macota did not get a single follower
+besides his immediate slaves, perhaps about twenty in number. After
+this demonstration affairs proceeded cheerily to a conclusion. The
+rajah was active in settling; the agreement was drawn out, sealed,
+and signed; guns fired, flags waved; and on the 24th of September,
+1841, I became the Governor of Sarawak, with the fullest powers."
+
+Being now regularly established in his government, Mr. Brooke, with his
+usual activity and circumspection, applied himself to the discharge
+of the onerous duties it imposed upon him; and his first acts were
+such as equally displayed his wisdom, firmness, and humanity. His
+journal runs thus:
+
+"_Nov. 3d._--I have a country; but, oh! how beset with difficulties,
+how ravaged by war, torn by dissensions, and ruined by duplicity,
+weakness, and intrigue! Macota's underhand dealings, after the
+conclusion of my agreement with Muda Hassim had been ratified,
+soon brought letters from his Sambas friends, _i. e._, one from the
+sultan, one from the Tumangong, and one from another Pangeran--an
+immense effort of conspiracy and correspondence! Of these letters the
+sultan's alone was curious; for the rest only dealt in professions of
+devoted attachment to the person and interests of Muda Hassim. But
+the sultan, for want of some better plea, made use of the following
+singular specimen of reasoning, viz., that the Chinese Kunsi were
+indebted to him a sum of money, which they had agreed to pay him in
+antimony ore; the agreement was not to pay him in gold, or money, or
+other commodity--only in antimony ore; therefore he wanted antimony
+ore. To this it was properly replied, that an arrangement had been
+made with me, and that the Chinese could not agree to give antimony
+ore without his (Muda Hassim's) consent.
+
+"My first object, on holding the reins of government, was to release
+the unfortunate women confined for a whole year by the rajah. This,
+indeed, was not only necessary to inspire confidence in my just
+intentions, but was dictated by humanity. I found Muda Hassim not
+averse to take the measure, _now_ that he had really resolved to
+adhere to my advice, and consequently I had the sincere satisfaction,
+within a few days, of liberating upward of a hundred females and young
+children, and of restoring them to their husbands and fathers; this
+act being somewhat alloyed by Muda Hassim detaining twelve females,
+and among them _two wives_. I urged as strongly as I could, but without
+success, the advisability of releasing the whole; and I was obliged,
+at last, to content myself with the mass, and yield the few whom I
+could only have got _by force_ or the utter abrogation of our infant
+treaty. When I pressed the affair, it was answered that, except for
+me, _none_ would have regained their liberty; and that the release
+was an act of great kindness and unexampled confidence toward me;
+that what had been done was perfectly accordant with their customs;
+and that the women detained were for the rajah's brothers--so far,
+indeed, from being intended as an injury to the women, it was a great
+honor and advantage. I explained the circumstances to the Patingi
+and Tumangong, and they acquiesced in the decision--allowing the
+custom--and said they had gained so much more than they had ever
+hoped for, that they could submit to the rest.
+
+"The next step was to assemble the Siniawans, who, since the close
+of the war, would run away, and whom it was found impossible to keep
+here. Some had retired to Sambas; some (among them Patingi Ali) had
+gone to Sariki; and others had built a village on the borders of the
+Sambas territory. The whole aim and object of Macota's government
+was to get these people back; and those who were already here were
+constantly plying backward and forward to recall their companions;
+but as soon as they succeeded in getting one family, another
+absconded. Confidence alone could restore them; and I therefore
+intimated to the Patingi and Tumangong that there was no occasion for
+their seeking them; that I by no means desired their return; and that
+any of their people who wished to leave the country were at liberty
+to do so whenever they felt inclined. This had the desired effect,
+in a short time, of bringing back the fugitives from Pankalon Nibong;
+and they continued daily to arrive from Sambas.
+
+"My next measure was to inquire into the state of the Dyaks, to gain
+their confidence, and, as much as it was within my power, prevent
+the oppressions of the Malays. It was necessary, likewise, to fix a
+rate of tax to be levied yearly; and the prospect seemed fair, as the
+chief people of the following tribes had come in, and agreed that such
+a tax on rice, amounting to sixteen gantongs, would be required from
+each man, and that for the rest they would be obliged to labor; that
+they could trade at pleasure; that no man could demand any thing from
+them; that their wives and children were safe; and that, in case any
+trouble arose, they were to let me know, and I would myself come to
+their assistance. The tribes were, Lundu, Sarambo, Bombak, Paninjow,
+and Sow. The only other tribe on the right-hand river were the Singe,
+a powerful and stiff-necked people, with good reason to be shy; but
+when once they are treated justly, their strength will be advantageous,
+and give them confidence to resist oppression.
+
+"The story told me by the three heads of the Sow Dyaks brought tears
+into my eyes, as they each in turn related their grievances. One
+of them, a remarkably intelligent person, addressed me nearly in
+the following terms: 'From former times we have been the subjects
+of the Patek of Borneo. The Borneons are the elder brothers, we
+the younger; and the custom of old was, that we should pay revenue
+and find protection. But they forgot what was right, and departed
+from the custom, and robbed the Dyaks, and oppressed them. We have
+done no wrong: we listened to the commands of the Patingi who was
+put over us by the Patek. If he did wrong, he should be punished;
+but we have suffered because we obeyed the commands of the officer
+legally appointed. You might, sir, a few years ago, have sought in this
+river, and not have found a happier tribe than ours. Our children were
+collected around us; we had rice in plenty, and fruit-trees; our hogs
+and fowls were in abundance; we could afford to give what was demanded
+of us, and yet live happily. Now we have nothing left. The Sadong
+people and the Sakarran Dyaks attacked us: they burned our houses,
+destroyed our property, cut down our fruit-trees, killed many of our
+people, and led away our wives and young children into slavery. We
+could build another house; we could plant fruit-trees and cultivate
+rice; but where can we find wives? Can we forget our young children? We
+have asked the Patek to restore them; we have asked Pangeran Macota
+to restore them: they have told us they would, but have not; we can
+not trust them; their words are fair, but in their hearts they do not
+mean to help us. We have now no one to trust but you--will you help
+us? Will you restore our wives and children? If we get our families,
+you will never repent it: you will find us true.'
+
+"What could I answer? I could not deceive them, as I knew not how to
+obtain their object; I therefore told them I feared it was impossible;
+but I would try, and they themselves should go and try at the same
+time. Poor, unhappy people, who suffer for the crimes of others! God
+knows, I will aid you to the utmost of my power.
+
+"_Nov. 5th._--To-day the greatest, and I hope the final, struggle
+of the opposing faction was developed by the arrival of a brig from
+Sambas, with two of the sultan's sons on board; Macota in high spirits,
+and my party looking rather desponding; and, in fact, I can not trust
+them against Sambas. For good or for bad, for success or for failure,
+for life or for death, I will act justly, and preserve the high hand
+over Macota.
+
+"After the steps I have mentioned, I determined to open a court for
+the administration of justice, wherein I should preside, together with
+such of the rajah's brothers as liked to assist me. As for a jury,
+or any machinery of form or law, it was rejected, because it must
+be inefficient, if not corrupt; and the only object I aimed at was,
+keeping witnesses out of ear-shot of each other, hearing the evidence,
+deciding as appeared best, and in future punishing. This simple plan
+insured substantial redress; and it gave all the people confidence
+in me, and a notion of what was right.
+
+"The first case was a follower of the rajah's, of the name of Sunudeen;
+and a greater villain could not exist either in this or any other
+land. It was as follows: A man from Samarahan, named Bujong, had
+undertaken to marry his daughter to a Sarawak man called Abdullah; but
+Abdullah proving a dissolute character, and greatly in debt, Bujong
+broke off the engagement before the proper authorities, and returned
+the presents which Abdullah, according to custom, had made. Abdullah,
+it appeared, was indebted a small sum to Matassim (Mohammed Orsin),
+and, between Sunudeen and Matassim, they resolved to lay the debt
+on Bujong's shoulders; in other words, to plunder Bujong under false
+pretenses. Accordingly, Sunudeen, with his comrade, went to Samarahan;
+and, in his capacity of follower of the rajah, demanded the debt due
+by Abdullah to Matassim. Bujong having no money, Sunudeen proceeded
+and seized his nephew, a boy, and a slave-man belonging to him,
+as _his slaves_. Poor Bujong resisted, and recovered his nephew, but
+yielded his slave; he appealed, however, to the Orang Kaya de Gadong's
+sons, and they failing, a Nakodah stated the case secretly to me. I
+investigated it, and ordered the return of the slave in my presence,
+which was obeyed. This may give an idea of the state of the country,
+and the power of every petty scoundrel hanging about the rajah to
+rob and plunder at pleasure.
+
+"_7th._--I have before mentioned that the Dyaks of Sibnow bury their
+dead; but I always found a reluctance on their part to show me their
+place of sepulture. Once, indeed, chance led me to the burial-ground
+of part of that tribe settled at Simunjang; but, as they seemed
+restless to get away, I only took a hasty survey. The reason, I
+have lately learned, for this is, that in their graves they deposit
+the golden ornaments and other property of the person deceased,
+amounting frequently to a considerable value in the precious metals,
+brass swivels, gongs, &c.
+
+"The tribe now at Lundu were formerly settled on the Samarahan river
+for many years; and their burial-place there contained the ashes of the
+parents and grandparents of the present chief, who, with his followers,
+were not long ago driven to Lundu; and their former settlement being
+deserted, it has been the employment of some of the rascals here to
+rob these graves of their contents, and to desecrate the repose of the
+dead. The Orang Kaya of Lundu complained to me sadly, but mournfully,
+on this account, and said that if he could not find redress from the
+rajah, he must obtain it himself by taking the heads of those who had
+disinterred the bones of his ancestors. His whole manner convinced me
+that they hold the burying-places in great respect; and my advice,
+to remove the wealth and bones to a place of security at Lundu,
+was rejected on the ground that they could not disturb the remains
+of those whom they had once deposited in the earth.
+
+"While there is so much of right feeling and manly principle in the
+actions of these Dyaks, the miserable race who pretend to be their
+superiors have no single virtue or good intention. I do not, however,
+mean to confound the inhabitants of Sarawak, or the other rivers,
+with those of Borneo Proper. The latter are thoroughly corrupt and
+profligate. The former are Malays, but have their good qualities, and
+certainly are not possessed with the spirit of intrigue which seems
+the life, the only moving principle of the Borneons. It may truly be
+said of the latter, that they would tell a lie when the truth would
+serve them better. They will employ duplicity and treachery on every
+slight occasion; defeat their own purpose by their meanness, and yet
+continue in the same crooked paths. They will conspire without any
+object, or one too mysterious to arrive at; and, while they raise a
+cloud of doubts in the mind of the poor, their own equals look on and
+detect the game. Yet, after all, they gain but little individually;
+because so many are practicing the same arts at the same time with
+equal skill; and the country is so exhausted by their oppressions
+and rapacity, that in the end there is nothing to be got by their
+tricks and manoeuvers. It is a strange state of society, and it is
+only wonderful how it can exist; but they have their reward in being
+poor and ill-provided, though living in the midst of a marvelously
+fertile and luxurious country.
+
+"_December 31st._--The last day of the year, in which I must bring
+up the arrears of my account.
+
+"The Sambas brig left only yesterday, after exhausting every effort
+of intrigue, and every artifice which Malays can invent, to compass
+their ends.
+
+"With the Sambas brig came Seriff Hussein, a relation of the Sultan
+of Pontiana, and half Arab half Bugis by descent. He came with the
+avowed purpose of entering into the most friendly communication with
+me, and residing here, provided I gave him any encouragement. His
+real motive (if he has one) not being obvious, I, in the mean time,
+treated him with all kindness; and he is an intelligent and pleasing
+person, and, moreover, connected with the Siniawans, who have a good
+opinion of him."
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+    Reflections on the new year.--The plundered village, and other
+    wrongs.--Means for their suppression.--The new government
+    proceeds to act.--The constitution.--Preparations for an
+    expedition against the Sea Dyaks.--Form of a treaty.--Wreck of
+    the Viscount Melbourne.--Administration of justice.--Difficulties
+    and dangers.--Dyak troubles.--Views and arrangements of the
+    Chinese.--Judicial forms.--Wrongs and sufferings of the Lundus.
+
+
+"_Jan. 1st, 1842._--The past year is in the bosom of eternity,
+into which bourne we are all hurrying. Here we have no merry-making,
+no reunion of families, no bright fires or merry games, to mark the
+advent of 1842; but we have genial weather, and are not pinched by
+cold or frost. This is a year which to me must be eventful; for at its
+close I shall be able to judge whether I can maintain myself against
+all the circumstances and difficulties which beset me, or whether
+I must retreat, broken in fortune, to some retirement in my native
+land. I look with calmness on the alternative, and God knows no selfish
+motives weigh on me; and if I fail, my chief regret will be for the
+natives of this unhappy country. Let the year roll on, let the months
+pass; and whatever they bring--whether it be life or death, fortune
+or poverty--I am prepared; and in the deep solitude of my present
+existence I can safely say that I believe I could bear misfortune
+better than prosperity. In this, probably, I am not singular; for
+there is something in prosperity which, if it does not make us worse,
+makes us more foolish and more worldly--which decks passing time with
+wreaths of gay flowers, and gilds the things of this life with tinsel
+hopes and wishes, to the exclusion of the pure gold of reflection for
+the life to come. What are all these gewgaws, these artificial flowers,
+these momentary joys, these pleasures of the sense, before the war
+of time? Nothing! And yet, if exertion can benefit our race, or even
+our own country--if the sum of human misery can be alleviated--if
+these suffering people can be raised in the scale of civilization and
+happiness--it is a cause in which I could suffer, it is a cause in
+which I _have_ suffered and _do suffer_; hemmed in, beset, anxious,
+perplexed, and the good intent marred by false agents--surrounded
+by weakness, treachery, falsehood, and folly, is suffering enough;
+and to feel myself on the threshold of success, and only withheld by
+the want of adequate means, increases this suffering. Hail, however,
+1842! Come good, come ill, still hail! and many as are the light
+hearts which have already greeted thee, mine will be more ready to
+bow to the decrees of Providence which thy twelve months will develop.
+
+"_Jan. 3d._--I have mentioned that the Sanpro had been attacked from
+Sadong; and I now learn that, at the time, the men were out of the
+village, and thus the women and children alone suffered; twenty-two
+have been carried away into slavery. The village was burned after
+being plundered, and the unfortunate people have since been living
+in the jungle, with only such food as they could get there. The head
+of the tribe and about six of his followers came down the river on a
+raft to ask assistance from me, and I had the story from them. They
+were relieved as far as my means admitted, and returned far happier
+than they came. The very same day arrived news that six men of the
+Sows were cut off by a wandering party of the Sakarrans.
+
+"This leads me naturally to consider the means by which these
+atrocities may be prevented. I propose first to send letters to
+Seriff Sahib of Sadong, Seriff Muller of Sakarran, and Seriff Jaffer
+of Singe, stating that I wish to be on good terms with my neighbors,
+but am determined to attack any place which sends Dyaks to rob in my
+country; and that I call on them to restrain their subjects from making
+incursions here. In case this warning is neglected, I must strike one
+blow suddenly, as a farther warning, and keep a good lookout at sea to
+destroy any Dyak fleet that may be prowling outside. A good-sized boat,
+with a six-pounder and a swivel or two, will effect the latter object,
+backed by two or four light, fast-pulling boats, with musketry, which,
+when the Dyak prahus fly, may keep pace with them and thin their
+pullers, till the heavier boat can come up. To carry one of their
+campongs, I must have twenty-five Europeans, and from some thirty to
+fifty Bugis, who, coming from Singapore, may proceed at once to Sadong,
+or, rather, the campong Tangi. Seriff Sahib is a great freebooter,
+and dispatches his retainers to attack the weak tribes here for the
+sake of the slaves, calculating, on the rajah's presumed weakness,
+that he can do so with impunity. He may find himself mistaken.
+
+"Seriff Muller is a brother of Seriff Sahib, and lives at Sakarran,
+which powerful Dyak tribe are always willing to be sent by either
+brother on a forage for heads and slaves. It is certain, however,
+that they could never come from the Sadong side without Seriff Sahib's
+permission; and on the late attack on Sanpro they were accompanied
+by a party of Malays.
+
+"Seriff Jaffer is by no means mixed up with these brothers, and there
+is no love lost between them; nor would he, I think, do anything to
+annoy me. This is the foreign policy.
+
+"The domestic policy is as disturbed as the foreign. The rajah weak,
+Macota intriguing, and my ministers--viz., the Patingi (Abong Mia),
+the Bandar, and Tumangong--all false and foolish, and Macota's men;
+with me, however, are the Siniawans.
+
+"_Jan. 6th._--The Sambas brig returned, having been baffled and beat
+about, and nearly lost at sea, unable to weather Tanjong Datu. The
+crew say she was one hour under water. She now remains here to wait
+the change of the monsoon, and her intriguing Pangerans return by land.
+
+"_8th._--Seriff Hussein returned from Sambas, having been nearly
+stabbed while there. The assassins, it was understood, were here,
+and I endeavored to apprehend them; but, having heard of the seriff's
+arrival, they made off.
+
+"_10th._--This day the first laws and regulations are to be promulgated
+in Sarawak; and as the event is a rare one, I here inscribe a copy
+for the benefit of future legislators, observing that there is an
+absolute necessity for mildness and patience, and that an opposite
+course would raise such a host of enemies as to crush every good seed;
+for, as it is, the gentlest course of justice brings down much odium,
+and arouses intense dislike among a people who have had no law but
+their own vile intrigues to guide or control them.
+
+"Two cases have lately come to notice, which will serve as examples
+of their singular crimes.
+
+"One poor man owed another sixteen reals, and the debtor was away
+trading for a few days, when the creditor sold the daughter (a free
+woman) for thirty reals, to a person of influence.
+
+"The second case, a respectable man, or a respectably born man, owed
+a Pangeran fifty peculs of ore, and proposed to make over to him in
+payment, a slave woman and her four children. The woman _had been_
+a slave of his grandfather's, but was adopted as his daughter, and
+enfranchised publicly; yet by intimidation, they were near getting
+her and her offspring. Here the Pangerans and Nakodas bully a man
+into silence and acquiescence; and the people dare not, as yet, bring
+their complaints to me. But I hear these things, call the parties
+together, and often prevent the commission of a premeditated crime;
+by which means I save myself from the odium of punishing.
+
+"There is great difficulty in acting at once with temper and firmness,
+so as to appear the benefactor rather than the tyrant. It is, indeed,
+an arduous and troublesome task; but _I think I see_ a ray of light
+to encourage me.
+
+"Here are the regulations, which I had printed at Singapore in the
+Malayan language:--
+
+"James Brooke, esquire, governor (rajah), of the country of Sarawak,
+makes known to all men the following regulations:--
+
+"'1st. That murder, robbery, and other heinous crimes will be punished
+according to the ondong-ondong (_i.e._ the written law of Borneo);
+and no person committing such offences will escape, if, after fair
+inquiry, he be proved guilty.
+
+"'2d. In order to insure the good of the country, all men, whether
+Malays, Chinese, or Dyaks, are permitted to trade or labor according
+to their pleasure, and to enjoy their gains.
+
+"'3d. All roads will be open, that the inhabitants at large may seek
+profit both by sea or by land; and all boats coming from others are
+free to enter the river and depart, without let or hinderance.
+
+"'4th. Trade, in all its branches, will be free, with the exception
+of antimony ore, which the governor holds in his own hands, but which
+no person is forced to work, and which will be paid for at a proper
+price when obtained. The people are encouraged to trade and labor, and
+to enjoy the profits which are to be made by fair and honest dealing.
+
+"'5th. It is ordered that no person going among the Dyaks shall
+disturb them, or gain their goods under false pretences. It must be
+clearly explained to the different Dyak tribes, that the revenue will
+be collected by the three Datus, bearing the seal of the governor;
+and (except this yearly demand from the government) they are to give
+nothing to any person; nor are they obliged to sell their goods except
+they please and at their own prices.
+
+"'6th. The governor will shortly inquire into the revenue, and fix
+it at a proper rate; so that every one may know certainly how much
+he has to contribute yearly to support the government.
+
+"'7th. It will be necessary, likewise, to settle the weights, measures,
+and money current in the country, and to introduce doits, that the
+poor may purchase food cheaply.
+
+"'8th. The governor issues these commands, and will enforce obedience
+to them; and while he gives all protection and assistance to the
+persons who act rightly, he will not fail to punish those who seek
+to disturb the public peace or commit crimes; and he warns all such
+persons to seek their safety, and find some other country where they
+may be permitted to break the laws of God and man.'
+
+"_Jan. 11th._--I have frequently said that all law and custom have
+been long banished from this country; but I may here retrace the
+customs which once obtained, the best of which I wish to restore.
+
+"The inhabitants were all considered the property of the sultan--serfs
+rather than slaves--and were divided into four classes. Imprimis, the
+Dyaks (the aborigines); the Bruni, or people of the soil, probably
+the descendants of the first Malay emigrants; the Awang-Awang, the
+meaning of which I am ignorant of; and the Hamba Rajah, or rajah's
+slaves. There is every reason to believe the Dyaks are an aboriginal
+people; but between the Bruni and Awang-Awang it is difficult to
+decide the priority. The Hamba Rajah speaks for itself.
+
+"These three distinctions have been long confounded by intermarriage;
+and the names rather than the reality are retained. The governors
+of the country are the Patingi, a Bandar, and a Tumangong, who are
+appointed from Borneo. Each of the classes was formerly ruled by its
+particular officer, and the Dyaks were appropriated likewise among
+them; the Patingi holding the tribes on the right-hand river, the
+Bandar to the left, and the Tumangong on the sea-coast. The annual
+revenue paid to Borneo was 300 reals; but they were subject to extra
+demands, and to the extortions of the powerful chiefs.
+
+"The government of the Dyaks I have already detailed; and though we
+might hope that in a more settled state of things they would have been
+more secure from foreign pillage, yet they were annually deprived
+of the proceeds of their labor, debarred from trade, and deprived
+of every motive to encourage industry. The character of their rulers
+for humanity alone fixed the measure of their suffering, and bad was
+the best; but it seems to be a maxim among all classes of Malays,
+that force alone can keep the Dyaks in proper subjection; which is
+so far true, that force alone, and the hopelessness of resistance,
+could induce a wild people to part with the food on which they
+depend for subsistence. At a distance I have heard of and pitied
+the sufferings of the negroes and the races of New Holland--yet
+it was the cold feeling dictated by reason and humanity; but now,
+having witnessed the miseries of a race superior to either, the
+feeling glows with the fervor of personal commiseration: so true is
+it that visible misery will raise us to exertion, which the picture,
+however powerfully delineated, can never produce. The thousands
+daily knelled out of the world, who lie in gorgeous sepulchres, or
+rot unburied on the surface of the earth, excite no emotion compared
+to that conjured up by the meanest dead at our feet. We read of tens
+of thousands killed and wounded in battle, and the glory of their
+deeds, or the sense of their defeat attracts our sympathy; but if a
+single mangled warrior, ghastly with wounds and writhing with pain,
+solicited our aid, we should deplore his fate with tenfold emotion,
+and curse the strife which led to such a result. Among the thousands
+starving for want of food we trouble not ourselves to seek one; but
+if the object is presented before our eyes, how certain a compassion
+is aroused! To assist is a duty; but in the performance of this duty,
+to be gentle and feeling is god-like; and probably between individuals,
+there is no greater distinction than in this tender sympathy toward
+distress. Poor, poor Dyaks! exposed to starvation, slavery, death! you
+may well raise the warmest feelings of compassion--enthusiasm awakes
+at witnessing your sufferings! To save men from death has its merit;
+but to alleviate suffering, to ameliorate all the ills of slavery, to
+protect these tribes from pillage and yearly scarcity, is far nobler;
+and if, in the endeavor to do so, one poor life is sacrificed, how
+little is it in the vast amount of human existence!
+
+"_18th._--A Chinese boat with four men was chased into the river by
+four Dyak prahus, and escaped with difficulty. On the intelligence
+reaching me, I, with some trouble, mustered three canoes, and we
+proceeded down, about one o'clock in the morning, in search of the
+enemy. After rowing in the dark for some hours, we discovered a
+light gliding up the river, and gave chase, but did not succeed; and
+at daybreak returned, wet and tired, without seeing anything more,
+when we learnt that the chase was a Sarawak boat, which, mistaking
+us for Dyaks, as we did them, pulled with all speed home, and gave
+the alarm of being nearly captured.
+
+"In the evening I ordered a fine boat to be prepared for the war
+with Sarebus and Sakarran, which appears to me inevitable; as it
+is impossible, laying all motives of humanity aside, to allow these
+piratical tribes to continue their depredations, which are inconsistent
+with safety, and a bar to all trade along the coast. Eighty prahus
+of Sarebus and Sakarran are reported to be ready, and waiting for
+further reinforcements before putting to sea.
+
+"_19th._--Information of three more of my Dyaks being cut off in the
+interior by the predatory tribes.
+
+"_20th._--Opened the subject of restoring the old Patingi, Bandar, and
+Tumangong, and found Muda Hassim quite willing, but wishing to wait
+till he hears from Borneo; at the same time telling me that I might
+employ them in their respective situations. This matter I consider,
+therefore, settled; and as these men are natives, and have the command
+of all the common people, and are, moreover, willing to serve under
+me, I conceive it a great advance in my government. Since my return
+here they have proved themselves faithful and ready; but though true
+in adversity, will they continue equally so in prosperity? I hope the
+best from them, especially as their circumstances will be easy; and I
+will endeavor to pay them as much as I can. Pay well, and men may be
+trusted. Either way, it is a great advance; for every change will not
+occur immediately; and, in the mean time, I shall be strengthened by
+in-comers, especially Chinese, so that the parties may be balanced, and
+each look to me as the link which holds them together. The government
+must be a patchwork between good and evil, abolishing only so much of
+the latter as is consistent with safety. But never must I appear in the
+light of a reformer, political or religious; for to the introduction
+of new customs, apparently trivial, and the institution of new forms,
+however beneficial, the disgust of the semi-barbarous races may be
+traced. People settled like myself too often try to create a Utopia,
+and end with a general confusion. The feeling of the native which binds
+him to his chief is destroyed, and no other principle is substituted
+in its stead; and as the human mind more easily learns ill than good,
+they pick up the vices of their governors without their virtues, and
+their own good qualities disappear, the bad of both races remaining
+without the good of either.
+
+"We are in active preparation to fit out a fleet to meet the
+piratical Dyaks. The rajah has a fine prahu, which I have taken in
+hand to repair, and I have purchased a second; and the two, with
+three or four small canoes, will be able to cope with a hundred or
+a hundred and fifty Dyak boats. The largest of these boats is worth
+a description. Fifty-six feet in length and eight in breadth; built
+with a great sheer, so as to raise the bow and stern out of the water,
+and pulling thirty paddles, she is a dangerous customer when mounting
+four swivels and carrying a crew of twenty men with small arms. She is
+called the 'Snake,' or 'Ular.' The second boat, somewhat shorter and
+less fast, is named the 'Dragon;' her complement of paddles twenty, and
+her fighting-men twenty, make one hundred and forty in, two boats. The
+long canoes carry fifteen men each, which will bring the force up to
+one hundred and eighty-five; and one boat of the rajah's will complete
+two hundred men, of whom nearly one hundred are armed with muskets.
+
+"To show the system of these people, I may mention that one of the
+principal men proposed to me to send to Sakarran and Sarebus, and
+intimate that I was about to attack Siquong (a large interior tribe),
+and invite them to assist. 'They will all come,' he said: 'nothing
+they will like so well; and when they are up the Samarahan river, we
+will sally forth, attack; and destroy them at one blow.' My answer was,
+that I could not deceive; but if they did come, I would attack them.
+
+"_Feb. 1st._--Matari, or 'the Sun,' the Sakarran chief I have already
+mentioned, arrived with two boats, and paid me several visits. He
+assured me he wanted to enter into an agreement, to the effect that
+neither should injure the other. To this treaty I was obliged to
+add the stipulation, that he was neither to pirate by sea nor by
+land, and not to go, under any pretence, into the interior of the
+country. His shrewdness and cunning were remarkably displayed. He
+began by inquiring, if a tribe, either Sakarran or Sarebus, pirated on
+my territory, what I intended to do. My answer was, 'To enter their
+country and lay it waste.' But he asked me again, 'You will give me,
+your friend, leave to steal a few heads occasionally?' 'No,' I replied,
+'you cannot take a single head; you cannot enter the country: and
+if you or your countrymen do, I will have a hundred Sakarran heads
+for every one you take here.' He recurred to this request several
+times: 'just to steal one or two!' as a schoolboy would ask for
+apples. There is no doubt that the two tribes of Sakarran and Sarebus
+are greatly addicted to head-hunting, and consider the possession as
+indispensable. The more a man has, the greater his honor and rank; nor
+is there anything without to check or ameliorate this barbarous habit;
+for the Malays of all classes, on this coast, take the same pride in
+heads as the Dyaks themselves, with the exception that they do not
+place them in their houses, or attach any superstitious ideas to them.
+
+"I asked Matari what was the solemn form of agreement among his tribes;
+and he assured me the most solemn was drinking each other's blood,
+in which case it was considered they were brothers; but pledging the
+blood of fowls was another and less solemn form.
+
+"On the 26th of January the Royalist's boat, with Captain Hart and
+Mr. Penfold, second mate, of the Viscount Melbourne, arrived here. The
+reason, it appears, of the Royalist coming was, to seek the missing
+crew of the Viscount Melbourne, a large ship wrecked on the Luconia
+shoal. The captain in the launch, with some Coolies; the first and
+third mates, with Colonel Campbell of the 37th, M.N.I., in a cutter;
+the second mate, Mr. Penfold, and the surgeon, in the second cutter;
+a fourth boat with twenty-five Lascars, and the jolly-boat, making
+in all five boats, left the vessel well provisioned, and steered in
+company for the coast, which they made somewhere between Borneo and
+Tanjong Barram. The fourth boat was missed the night they made the
+land; and being all at anchor, and the weather fine, it was strongly
+suspected that the twenty-five Lascars deserted with her.
+
+"The other four boats proceeded a day or two, when the first cutter,
+with Colonel Campbell on board, went in the evening in search of water;
+and though the rest showed lights all night, returned no more. They
+were, on the following day, attacked by a prahu, which fired into
+them and severely wounded one man, and succeeded in capturing the
+jolly-boat; but finding nothing in her, set her on fire--Lascars and
+all. The crew, however, was rescued, and she was abandoned; and the
+two remaining boats, in course of time, arrived at Singapore. The
+Royalist was taken up by government to seek the missing boats, and
+just touched here for an hour or two, the boat coming up while the
+vessel kept the sea.
+
+"_Feb. 9th._--Mr. Williamson returned from Sanpro, where I sent
+him to watch a party of natives who had gone among the Dyaks; the
+Panglima Sadome, of the tribe of Sanpro, came with him, and brought
+the lamentable account of the death of eight more Dyaks, cut off by
+the Sakarrans. It frets me dreadfully; however, on the whole I see
+a vast improvement, and a degree of confidence in me arising among
+the Dyaks, greater than I expected.
+
+"_14th._--I have now entered on the most difficult task, and the one
+most likely to cause an ultimate failure in my undertaking, but which
+is indispensably necessary. I mean, the administration of justice. As
+long as my laws are applied to the people of the country, there is
+no trouble; but directly _equal_ justice is administered, it causes
+heartburn and evasion; the rajahs and Pangerans are surrounded by
+a gang of followers who heretofore have robbed, plundered, and even
+murdered, without inquiry being made. It was enough that a follower
+of the rajah was concerned, to hush up all wrongs; and any of the
+oppressed, who were bold enough to lodge a complaint, were sure to
+rue it. All the rascals and ruffians who follow the great men find
+this species of protection the best and the only reward; and as the
+slaves are looked upon as personal property, any punishment inflicted
+upon them is likewise inflicted upon their masters. I have all along
+foreseen these obstacles, and the necessity of at once combating
+them--whether successfully or not signifies little; but they must be
+encountered, and the result left to the Almighty.
+
+"Equal justice is the groundwork of society; and unless it can be
+administered, there can be no hope of ultimate improvement. The
+country may have bad laws; but such laws as it has must be enforced,
+gently and mildly as may be toward the superiors, but strictly toward
+the guilty; and all crimes coming under my cognizance must meet
+with their punishment. These remarks are preliminary to two cases,
+in which the rajah's followers have been concerned.
+
+"The first of these was a man stealing sago, which is stored without
+the houses at the water's edge; he was convicted. The other occurred
+some time since, but has only just been traced. A party at night
+gutted a house, getting a booty of upward of 200 reals; the goods
+have been discovered; but the three followers of the rajah have
+absconded since the affair has been blown; whether to return or not
+is uncertain. There can be no doubt, however, that they have been sent
+away to keep clear of the consequences, by one of the rajah's brothers
+named Abdul Khadir, who, when they were off, accused two accomplices,
+people of the country!
+
+"Another most shameful mode of exaction and tyranny is practiced
+by these Borneo people, particularly their Nakodas. It consists in
+lending small sums of money to the natives (that is, Sarawak people),
+and demanding interest at the rate of fifty per cent per month; by this
+means a small sum is quickly converted into one which is quite out
+of the power of the poor man to pay; and he, his wife, and children,
+are taken to the house of the creditor to work for him, while the debt
+still accumulates, and the labor is endless. I intend to strike at
+this slavery in disguise, but not just yet; the suppression of robbery,
+the criminal department of justice, being more immediately important.
+
+"_15th._--I may, in continuation of yesterday, mention another instance
+in illustration of this oppressive system. Si Pata (a Siniawan), son
+of the Tumangong, lost in gambling to Nakoda Ursat eighteen reals,
+which in eighteen months has now arisen to a debt of 170 reals; but
+all prospect of payment of such an accumulated sum being impossible
+from a poor man, Nakoda Ursat consigns the debt to Pangeran Abdul
+Khadir, who can demand it by fair means or by foul; and if Si Pata
+cannot pay, make his father pay. Thus a gambling transaction is run
+up to ten times its original amount, and a whole family involved in
+distress by these iniquitous proceedings. Such things must not be;
+and odious as they seem to a European, and indignant as they make
+him, yet he must not proceed with the strong hand. Reflection, too,
+teaches us that vice is comparative; and in forming a judgment, we
+must not forget a man's education, the society in which he lives,
+the absence of restraint, and the force of example from childhood;
+so that what would be heinous in a Christian long under a settled
+government, is light by comparison in a Malay, who is a nominal
+professor of Islam, and brought up with the idea that might makes
+right, and has no one external cause to deter him from crime.
+
+"_March 12th._--On the whole getting on very well, but with many
+reasons for vexation, and more for anxiety. The chief of these is,
+whether Mr. Bonham will come here, as I have suggested, or rather
+pressed. Another feature of inquietude is from the Chinese of Sipang,
+who certainly aim at greater power than I shall allow them, and
+perhaps, some day or other, it will come to a struggle.
+
+"Petty troubles I do not reckon, though there are enow on all sides,
+and for the last few days I have felt as if sinking under them;
+but that is not my usual temperament. I now look impatiently for
+intelligence. Blow, fair breezes, and waft Royalist here!
+
+"_25th._--A period of wearing uncertainty since my last, having news
+neither of the Royalist nor of Mr. Bonham, and kept on the _qui vive_
+by a schooner or two at the entrance of the river. The plot thickens
+in and around; and for the sake of keeping up a register of events in
+something like order, I will here mention the leading features. Seriff
+Sahib, of Sadong, pretends to be friendly, but is treacherous in his
+heart, as is his brother, Seriff Muller of Sakarran. We have been
+quite clear of Dyaks, and our own tribes enjoying rest and peace;
+and one tribe from without, namely Serang, has come in and claimed my
+protection. The only tribe at all troublesome is the Singe, the chief
+of which (the Orang Kaya Parembam) is decidedly opposed to me, and
+swears by Macota. I am given to believe, however, that the majority
+of his people do not agree with him; and I shall dispossess him of
+his dignity, and substitute a friendly chief. The Singe Dyaks are
+the most powerful and numerous in my territory, and the only ones
+who have not been attacked and plundered by the Sakarrans.
+
+"At Lundu are the Sibnowan Dyaks, under the Orang Kaya Tumangong; and
+the Lundu Dyaks, once a flourishing tribe, now, by ill-treatment of
+all sorts, reduced to twenty persons. I may mention among my other
+difficulties, that many, nay most, of the Dyak tribes are held
+as _private property_: any rascally Borneon making a present to
+the sultan, gets a grant of a Dyak tribe, originally to rule, now
+to plunder or sell; and in this way the portion of the Sibnowans
+settled at Lundu are under Bandar Sumsu; but, being a resolute
+people, he cannot do them much wrong. This Bandar Sumsu has lately
+been disturbing the Lundu Dyaks in the following manner: a Sibnowan
+Dyak lived with the Lundu Dyaks, which gave him an opening to demand
+of the Lundus the sum of fifty reals (100 rupees), which was paid;
+but unluckily the Sibnowan died in the course of a few months, still
+with the Lundus, and a farther sum of eighty reals, or 160 rupees,
+was demanded, which not being raised, the daughter of one of the head
+people was seized, and sold for that sum to a Chinaman!
+
+"Pangeran Macota has likewise been injuring these poor people,
+though I shall find it difficult to bring it home to him. His agent,
+Bandar Dowud (a man involved in debt), took fifteen Dyak cloths and
+sold them, or rather forced them to take them, at an exorbitant rate;
+in a month or two after, he returns and demands 200 reals over and
+above the large price already paid for articles worth seven or eight
+reals; the poor Dyaks not being able to pay, he seizes the chief's
+daughter (a married woman), and demands four other women in lieu
+of the sum. Happily for the poor Dyaks, this news came to my ears,
+and I sent to Lundu in haste. They had all fled, having _stolen_
+their two women, one from each Bandar, and carried them away. On the
+Patingi and Tumangong reaching Lundu, they found two of the tribe, one
+the Pangeran, the other the father of the girl sold to the Chinaman,
+after a long search in the jungle. These two men I have now with me,
+and wait for the Orang Kaya Tumangong before going into the case. The
+Pangeran is the same Dyak whose conversation I have detailed at large
+on my first visit to the place. He is a man of intelligence; and this
+tribe (if it may yet be so called) has always borne the character of
+being the most hospitable and generous among the Dyaks. I may at some
+future time revert to them.
+
+"There is a rumor of war between the Sarebus and Sakarran Dyaks, in
+consequence of the former tribe seizing a Balow woman on the territory
+of the latter, and refusing to restore her. Let these two predatory
+tribes employ and weaken one another, and it will be well for us and
+all the other people of this country, and they will afterward be the
+more easily brought into subjection.
+
+"From Borneo we have news, but as uncertain as everything else
+regarding the capital. A hundred vessels, it is reported, are coming
+to attack them; and they, in consequence, are building _a fort_. The
+Royalist had been there and departed.
+
+"Pangeran Usop, it is said, was about to come here, when the arrival
+of the Royalist induced him to postpone his design.
+
+"There is every reason to believe that the Chinese of Sambas,
+particularly those of Montrado, are extremely dissatisfied; and a
+report yesterday states that a man sent by the sultan to demand gold
+had been killed by them, and that the sultan's letter to the Kunsi,
+after being defiled, was publicly burned. Our own Chinese of Sipang are
+certainly intriguing with Sambas; and, as the rajah well expresses it,
+'their clothes-box is here, but their treasure-chest is at Sambas.'
+
+"It is impossible to say what quantity of gold the Kunsi may get;
+but their pretence that they _get none_ must be false, when every
+common Malay obtains from half to one bunkal per month.
+
+"To counteract the chance of evil, I have intimated that the Simbock
+Kunsi are to come here; and on the whole, they (of Sipang) have taken
+it more quietly than I expected. They are not in a state for war;
+but they have vague notions and intentions provided they can keep out
+opposition, to make this place subservient to them, as it would indeed
+be, provided they were allowed to strengthen themselves while the other
+parties remained stationary. But 'divide and rule' is a good motto in
+my case; and the Chinese have overlooked the difference between this
+country and Sambas. There they have numerous rivers in the vicinity
+of their settlements--here but one; and, the Dyak population being
+against them, starvation would soon reduce them to terms. The Royalist
+arrived about the end of March, and sailed again on the 9th April.
+
+"I have before mentioned the difficulty of administering justice;
+and experience teaches me that the risk to myself, on this score,
+is more to be apprehended than on any other. The forms I have not
+much alluded to; and the following is as nearly as possible the Malay
+custom:--The rajah's brothers and myself sit at one end of the long
+room in my house; at the sides are the Patingis and Tumangong, and
+other respectable people; in the center the parties concerned; and,
+behind them, anybody who wishes to be present. We hear both parties;
+question, if necessary; and decide--and from this decision there is
+no appeal. One only condition I insist upon; and that is, that in
+any intricate case, or whenever I dread confederacy, I do not allow
+the witnesses to hear each other. The laws of evidence, in a _free
+country_, prohibit any leading questions being put to witnesses: here,
+for the purposes of justice, it is indispensable; for the people, being
+ruled by fear, and apprehensive of consequences, often falter before
+the face of the accused, and their testimony has to be wrung from
+them. To decide also according to the technicalities of construction
+would be here ridiculous, and defeat the ends of justice. The people
+are rude and uncivilized; their oppressors crafty and bold, who have
+no hesitation about lying, and bringing others to lie for them. Oaths
+are a farce to them. The aggrieved are timid, vacillating, and simple,
+and cannot readily procure even necessary evidence; for their witnesses
+are afraid to speak. Under these circumstances, I look at the leading
+features of the case, the probability, the characters, the position of
+parties, and determine according to my judgment. It is not, indeed,
+a very difficult task; for the disputes are generally glaring, and,
+when bolstered up, usually fail in their most important links; and
+at a touch of cross-questioning, the witnesses, resolved to tell
+the same story, fall into opposite ones. In one case, about a slave,
+three witnesses had resolved on the sex; but, questioned separately
+as to size and age, all disagreed. They were not prepared. One
+represented her a woman grown and marriageable; another, as high as
+my walking-stick; the third, a little child.
+
+"I have now on hand a serious matter, of robbery to a large extent,
+and three of the rajah's followers are implicated. Would it were over
+and well!--but done it must be. How little can those at a distance
+know my difficulties--alone, unaided, the unceasing attention by day,
+the anxiety and sleeplessness by night, the mountain of doubt upon
+mountain piled, and the uncertainty of necessary support or assistance!
+
+"The Pangeran of the Lundu Dyaks lived with me three weeks, and
+I was able to do him substantial justice; and hope for the future
+that his life, and that of the remnant of his tribe, may be rendered
+more endurable.
+
+"His residence with me was doubly advantageous, as it enabled me to
+ascertain his character, and him to see something of our habits and
+manners. The impression on my part was highly favorable; for I found
+him a quiet, intelligent man, and a keen observer; and I believe
+the impression he received was equally favorable. The _poetry_ of
+the Dyak expressions is remarkable; and, like most wild people, they
+seem to delight in oratory, and to be a good deal swayed by it. For
+hours I have talked with the Pangeran, listened to his history,
+heard his complaints, sympathized in the misfortunes of his tribe,
+and shuddered at the wrongs and sufferings they have endured. 'We are
+few,' he exclaimed, 'and therefore our oppressions are aggravated;
+the same demands are made upon us as though we were many, and we have
+not the means of resisting or complying. We fly to the jungle; we are
+like deer--we have no home, no perch. Our wives and children are taken
+from us; our sufferings are very great.' On another occasion he said,
+'I have felt my sufferings to be so great, that I wished to die, if
+Jovata would permit it. I wished to die; for I remembered how happy
+we were once, and how miserable now.' I could dwell largely on these
+and suchlike language and descriptions, which appear to me highly
+pathetic and touching--at least I found them so in reality; and I
+cannot forbear adding one or two more such, highly characteristic.
+
+"'Our home,' said the Pangeran, 'was a happy one; none who came to
+us wanted. The fruit on the trees was saved; the fish in the river
+near us was never destroyed. Rice was plenty; if it was scarce, we
+kept it, and fed ourselves upon vegetables, that we might give it to
+those who visited our habitation. The fish, the fruit, and the rice
+were preserved, [14] that the men of the seas (Malays) might eat of
+them; yet they had no pity on us. We were free men, yet they treated
+us worse than slaves. We are now but few; and unless you protect us,
+we shall soon cease to be.' Again: 'The Tumangong was severe to us;
+and when Macota came, he said the Tumangong was a bad man, and he
+would shield us; but he was much worse than the Tumangong. Now, you
+say you will cherish us; we believe you; but you are at a distance,
+and perhaps may not be able.' Further: 'Pangeran Macota kept me nine
+months in his house, and wanted to make me a slave; but I escaped,
+and traveled through the woods, and swam the rivers, till I came to my
+own country. He thought the Dyak had no eyes except in the jungle;
+he thought he had no ears except to listen to the bird of omen;
+he thought he had no wit except to grow rice; but the Dyak saw, and
+heard, and understood, that while his words were sweet, his heart
+was crooked, and that, whether they were men of the sea or Dyaks,
+he deceived them with fair sayings; he said one thing to one man,
+and another to a second; he deceived with a honied mouth. I saw and
+understood it all while I lived in his house. How could I trust him
+afterward?' These expressions were concluded by significantly twisting
+his two fore-fingers round each other, to show the intrigues that were
+carried on. I grew very fond of this poor naked savage; for if honesty
+and a kind heart entitle a man to our esteem, he is worthy of it.
+
+"I had a long conference with Si Nimook, the Sow Dyak, and hope to
+recover his wife. Amid all the wealth and all the charity of England,
+how well bestowed would a small portion be for the purpose of restoring
+one hundred and fifty women and children to their husbands and parents,
+and releasing them from slavery! A small rill from the plenteous river
+would cheer this distant misery, and bestow the blessing of fertility
+on the now barren soil of these poor Dyaks. Oh, that I had the brass
+to beg--to draw out a piteous tale so as to touch the heart!"
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+    Ascent of the left-hand river to the Stabad.--Remarkable cave
+    in the Tubbang.--Diamond works at Suntah.--Return.--Infested
+    by Dyak pirates.--A meeting of prahus, and fight.--Seriff
+    Sahib's treatment of the Suntah Dyaks.--Expedition against the
+    Singe.--Their invasion of the Sigos, and taking heads.--The
+    triumph over these trophies.--Arms and modes of war.--Hot and
+    cold council-houses.--Ceremonies in the installation of the
+    Orang Kaya Steer Rajah.--Meeting of various Dyak tribes.--Hostile
+    plans of Seriff Sahib, and their issue.--Resolves to proceed to
+    Borneo Proper.
+
+
+The next portion of Mr. Brooke's Journal details another excursion
+up the country, and then proceeds to describe the early incidents of
+his infant government. As he advanced on his way, affairs began to
+assume more important aspects; and yet they could hardly be painted
+with greater force or interest than in his simple notes.
+
+"_April 25th._--Ascended the left-hand river, in order to introduce the
+Kunsi Simbock to their new territory; passed the night on a pebbly
+bank; moon at full, bright and unclouded, tinging the luxuriant
+foliage, and glancing on the clear rapid stream. Four distinct and
+distant races met on this lonely and lovely spot--English, Chinese,
+Malays, and Dyaks! What a scope for poetry and reflection--the time,
+the clime, the spot, and the company!
+
+"_26th._--After our morning meal and bath, entered the small river
+Stabad, which, according to report, runs from a source two or
+three days' journey further into the interior. At present it is so
+obstructed by fallen trees, that we were forced to return, after
+ascending about four miles. We left our boats near its entrance,
+and walked to the small but steep mountain, Tubbang. Its length may
+be about 400 feet. After mounting, by a winding path, about half-way
+up toward the top, we arrived at the entrance of a cave, into which
+we descended through a hole. It is fifty or sixty feet long, and the
+far end is supported on a colonnade of stalactites, and opens on a
+sheer precipice of 100 or 150 feet. Hence the spectator can overlook
+the distant scene; the forest lies at his feet, and only a few trees
+growing from the rock reach nearly to the level of the grotto. The
+effect is striking and panoramic; the grotto cheerful; floored with
+fine sand; the roof groined like Gothic, whence the few clear drops
+which filter through form here and there the fantastic stalactites
+common to such localities. The natives report the cave to be the
+residence of a fairy queen; and they show her bed, pillow, and other
+of her household furniture. Within the cave we found a few remnants
+of human bones; probably some poor Dyak who had crawled there to die.
+
+"Having finished our survey of the place, and wandered sufficiently
+about the mount, we reembarked, and dropped a short way down the
+river, and started again into the jungle to look for antimony ore,
+but without success, our guide having forgotten the road. After a
+couple of hours' wandering, the latter part in a heavy storm of rain,
+we reached the boats; and I thence ascended to Suntah, where we were
+all glad to house ourselves, as the deluge continued.
+
+"_27th._--I will say nothing of my works at Suntah, except that they
+run away with my money, are badly conducted by my Chinese hadji,
+and, above all, that I have great reason to suspect the integrity
+and steadiness of this said hadji. I must therefore make up my mind
+either to change him when the business is finished, or to watch him
+very narrowly; for the honesty of a diamond-worker, like the virtue of
+Caesar's wife, must be above suspicion, or he must be watched closely;
+but how?
+
+"_28th._--Descended the river, and, arriving at Sarawak, found
+both work and cause for inquietude. The rajah had heard of Dyak
+pirates, and dispatched four boats, two large and two small: the
+Snake, weakly manned by the Tumangong's people, and the rest led by
+Pangerans (who neither work nor fight) and a wretched crew, chiefly
+Borneons. Mr. Crimble, taking my servant Peter and four Javanese,
+went most imprudently in the second of the large boats. The whole,
+being dispatched in haste (foolish haste), insufficiently provided
+in every respect, may fall into trouble, and involve me in very
+unpleasant circumstances.
+
+"The other cause for uneasiness is the attack of a Chinese boat at the
+mouth of the river. The boat that attacked her is a small one, with
+eight or ten men, which came out of Sadong, and had been lying here
+for a week or more. She is commanded by a Pangeran named Badrudeen,
+has some Illanuns on board, and is bound on a piratical cruise. As she
+descended the river, she met with the small China boat, likewise from
+Sambas, with eight men, which she treacherously assailed, desperately
+wounding one man and severely another; but the China boat's consort
+heaving in sight, the pirate pulled away. I must redress this, if it
+be in my power; and have ordered the Datus to gather men to follow
+the rascals, as it is probable they will be lurking not far from
+hence. In the mean time it gave me great pain dressing the hurts of
+these poor Chinese, one of whom I think must die, being cut along the
+back and side--across the body from the side nearly to the backbone,
+a ghastly gaping wound, beside having his arm slashed through. The
+other man is very severely, and perhaps, without medical attendance,
+mortally, hurt, having his arm half cut through at the muscular
+development between the shoulder and elbow--poor fellow! I must say
+for the Chinese, they seem very grateful for any attention shown them.
+
+"_29th._--My birthday. Men collected, and to-morrow we start for
+Telang Telang. This morning, much to my relief, our fleet returned,
+after an encounter with thirteen Dyak boats. About one o'clock
+on the 28th, pulling into a bay between Morotaba and Tanjong Poe,
+they came unexpectedly on them. One Borneon boat had lagged behind;
+the Pangeran who commanded deserted the second, and sought refuge with
+the Tumangong, trying to induce him to fly; and the crew of the third,
+a large boat with my two Europeans on board, was, by their account,
+in a state of fear, which totally incapacitated them from acting. All
+rose, none would pull; all shouted, none would serve the guns; all
+commanded, none obeyed; most were screaming out to run; all bellowing
+out, in hopes of frightening the enemy; none to direct the helm. The
+Tumangong, with only seventeen men in all, insisted on advance;
+and the Borneons, encouraged by threats from the Europeans, and the
+good example of the Javanese, did not fly. The two boats opened their
+fire; the Dyaks retreated in confusion and alarm: but from the tumult,
+the noise, and the rocking of the boat, Mr. Crimble could only fire
+three times with the bow six-pounder carronade, and from other guns
+loaded with grape and canister, while the rascally Borneons never
+fired at all. The Dyaks suffered loss, and left behind them clothes,
+rice, fish, cooking-pots, swords, &c.; and, considering the state
+of the Borneons, it was lucky the dread of our prowess put them to
+flight so easily. Crimble assured me that, with a Siniawan crew, he
+could have destroyed half their force. The Dyaks behaved very well,
+pulling off with great steadiness and without noise.
+
+"_June 20th._--The events of the month may be compressed into a
+narrative comprising the internal and external.
+
+"The internal state of the country is decidedly improving
+and flourishing, and bears the aspect of gradually increasing
+prosperity. Justice has been strictly administered. Robberies, which
+a few months ago were of nightly occurrence, are now rarely heard of;
+and that vile intriguing to make poor people slaves, from debt or
+false claims, is entirely stopped.
+
+"The people who had scattered at the close of the war have been
+collected, and are building their houses a short way up the river
+at the Campong Jekiso, which, when finished, will be a neat-looking
+village.
+
+"The Pangeran Macota is intriguing; but as he is sure to do that,
+it need not be insisted upon.
+
+"Muda Hassim is true and agreeable, and entirely reconciled to the
+Patingi and Tumangongs; so far, indeed, nothing can be better than
+our internal state: there is peace, there is plenty; the poor are
+not harassed, and justice is done to all.
+
+"The Dyaks of the interior are improving and content, and gaining
+courage daily to complain of any wrong that may be offered them. To
+the sena, or forced trade, I have almost put a stop, by confiscating
+the goods wherever met with; and this plan once acted on, the Dyaks
+have not been slow to bring me bundles of bidongs (Dyak cloths),
+iron, and the like.
+
+"The tribes that continue unsettled are the Suntah and Singe: the
+affairs of the latter I will mention hereafter.
+
+"Suntah has been for a long time under the government of Seriff Sahib
+of Sadong, and through his _paternal_ charge has dwindled away from
+four hundred to fifty or sixty families. Shortly after my assuming the
+reins of government, he dispatched (according to custom) a mixed party
+of Malays and Dyaks, and falling on my helpless tribe of Sanpro, killed
+some, and carried away twenty women and children into captivity. I was
+not strong enough to resent the injury; but wrote him a strong letter,
+demanding the women, and telling him he was not to send, under any
+pretext, into my country. The women I did not get; but I heard that
+the communication frightened him: for, of course, they deem I am
+backed by all the power of my country. While the Royalist still lay
+here, I heard that his people were raising the revenue from the Suntah
+Dyaks; but it must be remarked, that the Suntah are on the edge of my
+territory, having left the former location. As this was done in the
+face of my caution not to intermeddle without my consent, I resolved
+at once to put the matter to the issue; and having armed four boats,
+went up and seized all the rice and padi collected for my neighbors'
+use. The Suntah Dyaks were and are alarmed to a pitiable degree;
+for they fear Seriff Sahib with good reason; and yet my being on the
+spot gave them no option of evading my demand. Thus the matter was
+brought to a crisis; and having taken the revenue (as it was called)
+for the poor Dyaks themselves, I shall be able to keep them from
+starvation, to the verge of which, so early in the season, they are
+already reduced. The Dyaks remain unsettled; but I am now in hopes of
+bringing them to the interior of the Quop, which is further within our
+own territory. Muda Hassim wrote to Seriff Sahib to tell him the Dyaks
+were no longer his, but mine; and Seriff Sahib, sore-hearted, conspired
+against us, and held for some time a higher tone than his wont.
+
+"I shall now narrate my proceedings at the mountain of Singe,
+from which I have just returned. The mountain, with its groves of
+fruit-trees, has been already described; and as a preface to my present
+description, I must particularize the circumstances of the Dyak tribe
+of Singe. The tribe consists of at least 800 males, the most ignorant,
+and therefore the most wild, of the Dyaks of my country; and, from
+their position, they have never been overcome or ruined, and are
+therefore a rich community, and proportionately independent. Their
+old chief is by name Parembam, and the Panglima, or head-warrior, his
+younger brother, by name Si Tummo. These men have for a very long time
+ruled this tribe; and the elder has certainly acquired from the Malays
+a portion of cunning and intrigue, and lost the general simplicity of
+the native Dyak character. He is unquestionably a man of ability. His
+sway, however, on the mountain has for a long time been unpopular;
+and a large proportion of the people, dissatisfied with his extortions,
+have been attached to a younger chief, by name Bibit. Some time past,
+finding it impossible to manage this old chief, Parembam, and being
+convinced that the change might readily be made, I called Bibit, and
+made him chief, or Orang Kaya of the tribe. Parembam neither was nor is
+inclined to give up his authority without a struggle; and though the
+mass adhere to the new chief, by title 'Steer Rajah,' yet Parembam's
+long-established customs, his great wealth, and his talents, render
+him a dangerous old man to the younger leader. One quality, however,
+Parembam is deficient in, as well as his brother the Panglima, and
+that is _bravery_; and on this much depends in a Dyak tribe. Steer
+Rajah, on the contrary, has always been renowned in war, and is the
+envied possessor of many heads. The Dyaks have among them a fashion
+which they call bunkit, or vaunting; for instance, in the present
+case Steer Rajah and Parembam dared each other to go on excursions
+to procure heads, _i. e._ against their enemies--this is bunkit. One
+of Steer Rajah's followers went accordingly, and quickly procured the
+head of a hostile warrior far out of my territory; and on the return
+of the party, Parembam in turn sent forty men to Simpoke, which is
+a tribe attached to Samarahan, and on our immediate border. Close to
+the Dyaks of Simpoke live a party of the Sigo Dyaks, who belong to me;
+and this party of Parembam's, confounding friends and enemies, killed
+some of the Sigo Dyaks--how many is not certain. The Sigos, taking
+the alarm, cut off their retreat, and killed two of the Singe Dyaks;
+and many beside were wounded by sudas and ranjows, and, all broken,
+fled back to their own country. Thus, though they obtained five heads,
+they lost two, and those belonging to their principal warriors. This
+news reaching me, I hurried up to the hill, and arrived just after
+part of the war-party had brought the heads.
+
+"I may here remark, that I have positively forbidden the Dyak tribes
+within my territory to war one upon the other; and this, therefore,
+was a serious offence against me on the part of Parembam. At once to
+aim at more than this restriction would be fruitless, and even risk
+my ability to effect this first step on the road to improvement. I
+likewise came up here to go through the ceremony of installing the
+Orang Kaya Steer Rajah in his office; and thus I have had an excellent
+opportunity of seeing their customs and manners. What follows will
+be a personal narration, or nearly so, of what I have seen; and it
+applies, with slight difference, to almost all the interior tribes.
+
+"On our ascending the mountain, we found the five heads carefully
+watched, about half a mile from the town, in consequence of the
+non-arrival of some of the war-party. They had erected a temporary
+shed close to the place where these miserable remnants of noisome
+mortality were deposited; and they were guarded by about thirty young
+men in their finest dresses, composed principally of scarlet jackets
+ornamented with shells, turbans of the native bark-cloth dyed bright
+yellow, and spread on the head, and decked with an occasional feather,
+flower, or twig of leaves. Nothing can exceed their partiality for
+these trophies; and in retiring from the 'war-path,' the man who has
+been so fortunate as to obtain a head hangs it about his neck, and
+instantly commences his return to his tribe. If he sleep on the way,
+the precious burden, though decaying and offensive, is not loosened,
+but rests on his lap, while his head (and nose!) reclines on his
+knees. The retreat is always silently made until close to home,
+when they set up a wild yell, which announces their victory and the
+possession of its proofs. It must, therefore, be considered, that
+these bloody trophies are the evidences of victory--the banner of the
+European, the flesh-pot of the Turk, the scalp of the North American
+Indian--and that they are torn from enemies, for taking heads is the
+effect and not the cause of war. On our reaching the Balei, or public
+hall, of the Orang Kaya Steer Rajah, I immediately called a number of
+their chiefs together, and opened a conference with them on the subject
+of Parembam having attacked and killed the Dyaks of Sigo. They _all_
+disapproved of it most highly, asserting that the Sigos were their
+younger brothers; that no sufficient cause had ever existed; that
+Parembam had acted badly, and must pay to purchase _peace_. Were they,
+I asked, willing to force Parembam into payment? They were. Would
+they insist on the heads being restored to the Sigos, and receive
+those of their own people? They would!
+
+"It may be observed, that their causes for war, as well as its
+progress and termination, are exactly the same as those of other
+people. They dispute about the limits of their respective lands; about
+theft committed by one tribe upon another; about occasional murders;
+the crossing each other on the war-path; and about a thousand other
+subjects.
+
+"When a tribe is on a warlike excursion, it often happens that their
+track (or 'trail') is crossed by another tribe. Those who strike the
+trail guard it at some convenient spot, apprehending the party to be
+enemies; they plant ranjows in the path, and wait till the returning
+party are involved among them to make an attack. If enemies, and they
+succeed, all is well; but if friends, though no attack be made, it
+is a serious offence, and mostly gives occasion to war if not paid
+for. The progress of the contest consists in attacking each other
+by these surprises, particularly about the time of sowing, weeding,
+and cutting the rice-crops. When one party is weaker, or less active,
+or less warlike than the other, they solicit a peace through some
+tribe friendly to both, and pay for the lives they have taken: the
+price is about two gongs, value 33 1/2 reals, for each life: thus
+peace is concluded. This is the custom with these Dyaks universally;
+but it is otherwise with the Sarebus and Sakarran. But Sarebus and
+Sakarran are not fair examples of Dyak life, as they are pirates as
+well as head-hunters, and do not hesitate to destroy all persons they
+meet with.
+
+"Parembam, having been called before me, declared that these heads
+belonged to the Simpoke Dyaks, and that they had not attacked the
+Sigos. As I was not quite certain of the fact, I thought it unjust
+to proceed against him till I had stronger proof.
+
+"On the following morning the heads were brought up to the village,
+attended by a number of young men all dressed in their best, and were
+carried to Parembam's house amid the beating of gongs and the firing
+of one or two guns. They were then disposed of in a conspicuous place
+in the public hall of Parembam. The music sounded and the men danced
+the greater part of the day; and toward evening carried them away
+in procession through all the campongs except three or four just
+about me. The women, in these processions, crowd round the heads as
+they proceed from house to house, and put sirih and betel-nut in
+the mouths of the ghastly dead, and welcome them! After this they
+are carried back in the same triumph, deposited in an airy place,
+and left to dry. During this process, for seven, eight, or ten days,
+they are watched by the boys of the age of six to ten years; and
+during this time they never stir from the public hall--they are not
+permitted to put their foot out of it while engaged in this sacred
+trust. Thus are the youths initiated.
+
+"For a long time after the heads are hung up, the men nightly meet
+and beat their gongs, and chant addresses to them, which were rendered
+thus to me: 'Your head is in our dwelling, but your spirit wanders to
+your own country.' 'Your head and your spirit are now ours: persuade,
+therefore, your countrymen to be slain by us.' 'Speak to the spirits of
+your tribe: let them wander in the fields, that when we come again to
+their country we may get more heads, and that we may bring the heads
+of your brethren, and hang them by your head,' &c. The tone of this
+chant is loud and monotonous, and I am not able to say how long it is
+sung; but certainly for a month after the arrival of the heads, as one
+party here had had a head for that time, and were still exhorting it.
+
+"These are their customs and modes of warfare; and I may conclude by
+saying that, though their trophies are more disgusting, yet their
+wars are neither so bloody, nor their cruelties so great, as those
+of the North American Indian. They slay all they meet with of their
+enemies--men, women, and children; but this is common to all wild
+tribes. They have an implacable spirit of revenge as long as the war
+lasts, retort evil for evil, and retaliate life for life; and, as I
+have before said, the heads are the trophies, as the scalps are to the
+red men. But, on the contrary, they never torture their enemies, nor do
+they devour them; and peace can always be restored among them by a very
+moderate payment. In short, there is nothing new in their feelings,
+or in their mode of showing them; no trait remarkable for cruelty; no
+head-hunting for the sake of head-hunting. They act precisely on the
+same impulses as other wild men: war arises from passion or interest;
+peace from defeat or fear. As friends, they are faithful, just, and
+honest; as enemies, blood-thirsty and cunning, patient on the war-path,
+and enduring fatigue, hunger, and want of sleep, with cheerfulness and
+resolution. As woodmen they are remarkably acute; and on all their
+excursions carry with them a number of ranjows, which, when they
+retreat, they stick in behind them, at intervals, at a distance of
+twenty, fifty, or a hundred yards, so that a hotly-pursuing enemy gets
+checked, and many severely wounded. Their arms consist of a sword, an
+iron-headed spear, a few wooden spears, a knife worn at the right side,
+with a sirih-pouch, or small basket. Their provision is a particular
+kind of sticky rice, boiled in bamboos. When once they have struck
+their enemies, or failed, they return, without pausing, to their homes.
+
+"To proceed with my journal. My principal object in coming up the hill
+was, to appoint the Orang Kaya Steer Rajah as the chief, beside Pagise
+as Panglima, or head warrior, and Pa Bobot as Pangeran, or revenue
+officer. It was deemed by these worthy personages quite unfit that
+this ceremony should take place in the public hall or circular house,
+as that was the place wherein the heads are deposited, and where they
+hold councils of war.
+
+"With the Dyaks, all council is divided into hot and cold; peace,
+friendship, good intentions, are all included under the latter
+head--war, &c., are under the former. Hot is represented by red, and
+cold by white. So in everything they make this distinction; and as the
+public hall is the place for war-councils and war-trophies, it is hot
+in the extreme, unfit for friendly conference. A shed was therefore
+erected close to the Orang Kaya's house, wherein the ceremony was to
+take place. About nine in the evening we repaired to the scene; loud
+music, barbarous but not unpleasing, resounded, and we took our seats
+on mats in the midst of our Dyak friends. A feast was in preparation;
+and each guest (if I may call them such) brought his share of rice
+in bamboos, and laid it on the general stock. As one party came up
+after another, carrying their burning logs, the effect was very good;
+and they kept arriving until the place and its vicinity was literally
+crammed with human beings. A large antique sirih-box was placed in
+the midst; and I contributed that greatest of luxuries, tobacco.
+
+"The feast, in the mean time, was in preparation, some of the
+principal people being employed in counting the number who were to
+eat, and dividing the bamboos into exactly equal portions for each
+person. About six inches were allotted to every man; and it took a
+very long time to divide it, for they are remarkably particular as
+to the proper size and quantity to each share. The bamboos of rice
+being, however, at length satisfactorily disposed, the Orang Kaya
+produced as his share a large basin full of sauce, composed of salt
+and chilis, and a small stock of sweetmeats; and then the ceremony
+of his installation commenced as follows:
+
+"A jacket, a turban, a cloth for the loins, and a kris (all of
+white) were presented to the chief as a token of sejiek dingin,
+or cold, _i.e._ good. The chief then rose, and, taking a white
+fowl and waving it over the eatables, repeated nearly the following
+words:--(The commencement, however, is curious enough to dwell upon:
+the opening is a sort of invocation, beginning with the phrase,
+'Samungut, Simungi.' Samungut is a Malay word, Simungi signifying
+the same in Dyak; the exact meaning it is difficult to comprehend;
+but it is here understood as some principle, spirit, or fortune,
+which is in men and things. Thus the Dyaks, in stowing their rice at
+harvest, do it with great care, from a superstitious feeling that the
+Simungi of the padi will escape. They now call this principle to be
+present--that of men, of pigs (their favorite animal), of padi, and
+of fruits. They particularly named my Simungi, that of my ancestors,
+of the Pangeran from Borneo, of the Datus and of their ancestors,
+and of the ancestors of their own tribe. They call them--that is,
+their Simungi--to be present. They then call upon Jovata to grant
+their prayer, that the great man from Europe, and the Datus, might
+hold the government for a length of time)--'May the government be
+cold' (good); 'May there be rice in our houses;' 'May many pigs
+be killed;' 'May male children be born to us;' 'May fruit ripen;'
+'May we be happy, and our goods abundant;' 'We declare ourselves to
+be true to the great man and the Datus; what they wish we will do,
+what they command is our law.' Having said this and much more, the
+fowl was taken by a leading Malay, who repeated the latter words,
+while others bound strips of white cloth round the heads of the
+multitude. The fowl was then killed, the blood shed in a bamboo,
+and each man dipping his finger in the blood, touched his forehead
+and breast, in attestation of his fidelity. The fowl was now carried
+away to be cooked: and when brought back, placed with the rest of the
+feast, and the dancing commenced. The chief, coming forward, uttered
+a loud yell ending in 'ish,' which was oftentimes repeated during
+the dance. He raised his hands to his forehead, and taking a dish,
+commenced dancing to lively music. Three other old chief men followed
+his example; each uttering the yell and making the salute, but without
+taking the dish. They danced with arms extended, turning the body
+frequently, taking very small steps, and little more than lifting
+their feet from the ground. Thus they turned backward and forward,
+passed in and out of the inner rooms, and frequently repeating the
+yell, and making the salutation to me. The dish, in the mean time,
+was changed from one to the other: there was little variety, no
+gesticulation, no violence; and, though not deficient in native
+grace, yet the movements were by no means interesting. The dance
+over, the feast commenced; and everything was carried on with great
+gravity and propriety. I left them shortly after they began to eat,
+and retired, very fagged, to my bed, or rather, to my board; for
+sitting cross-legged for several hours is surely a great infliction.
+
+"I may add to this account that, while writing it, the Dyak land-tribes
+of Siquong, Sibaduh, and Goon, sent their deputies to me. These people
+are not under any Malay government, and it is now for the first
+time they have trusted themselves as far as Sarawak. They have an
+objection to drinking the river-water, and expressed great surprise
+at the flood-tide. Their confidence is cheering to me, and will,
+I trust, be advantageous to themselves. Their trade in rice is very
+considerable: and toward Sambas they exchange eight or ten pasus of
+rice for one of salt.
+
+"Our conference was pleasing. They desired protection, they desired
+trade. 'They had all heard, _the whole world had heard_, that _a
+son of Europe_ was a friend to the Dyaks.' My visitors drank Batavia
+arrack with great gusto, declaring all the time it was not half so
+good as their own; however, at a pinch anything will do. Some other
+Dyaks met these strangers; they were not adversaries, and so they
+chewed sirih, and drank grog in company; but among enemies this may
+not be: they can neither eat nor drink in company without desiring
+a reconciliation. I may add, that the Siquong tribe consists of at
+least four hundred families, with forty public halls, or baleis,
+for heads. A Dyak family cannot be estimated at fewer than twelve
+people, which will give four thousand eight hundred or five thousand
+people. Sibaduh and Goon may be about seventy-five families: beside
+these, Si Panjong and Sam Penex want to come in to me, which will
+give one hundred and one more families. What might be done with these
+people, if I had a little more power and a little assistance!
+
+"I was going to close my account of the Dyaks; but I had scarcely
+penned the last sentence when a large party of Singe Dyaks and
+five Dyaks of Sigo arrived--thus all these enemies meeting. In
+the conference which followed, the Singe allowed they were wrong in
+attacking Sigo, and laid all the blame on the old chief, Parembam. They
+likewise allowed it to be just that Parembam should be forced to pay,
+and conclude a peace. With the Goon and Sibaduh Dyaks they had long
+been at enmity; but they agreed to make peace if Sibaduh would pay
+two gongs, formerly demanded, as the price of peace. The Sibaduh,
+however, did not allow the justice of the demand; but the parties were
+reconciled so far as that each promised to maintain a truce and to eat
+together: and the Singes declared they would not attack the Sibaduhs on
+account of the two gongs, but obtain them in a friendly conference. I
+have (being hurried) briefly mentioned these circumstances, which took
+a long time to settle, as the Dyaks are very fond of speechifying,
+which they do sitting, without action or vivacity, but with great
+fluency, and using often highly metaphysical and elegant language. It
+was a great nuisance having fifty naked savages in the house all night,
+extended in the hall and the anterooms. They finished a bottle of gin,
+and then slept; and I could not avoid remarking that their sleep was
+light, such as temperance, health, and exercise bestow. During many
+hours I heard but one man snore, while half the number of Europeans
+would have favored me with a concert sufficient to banish rest.
+
+"I shall now briefly mention our _foreign policy_ for the last
+few months.
+
+"For a time we were annoyed with incessant reports of their coming to
+attack us in force; but, though scarcely believing they would be bold
+enough, I took precautions, pushed on the completion of our boats,
+built a fort, and made a fence round the village. These precautions
+taken, and fifteen boats in the water ready for action, I cared very
+little, though the news reached me that Byong, the Sarebus chief,
+had hung a basket on a high tree which was to contain my head.
+
+"_Sadong._--Our relations with Seriff Sahib were very unsettled;
+and by the bullying tone of the people of Singe I thought it probable
+he might be induced to measure his strength, backed by the Sakarran
+Dyaks, against us. I have already mentioned his attack upon my Dyaks of
+Sanpro, and the second dispute about the Suntah Dyaks; in the first of
+these he came off with impunity; in the second I met him with success,
+and out-manoeuvered him, and wrested the Dyaks from him. Shortly after
+the transactions at Suntah, a boat of Sakarran Dyaks came to Sarawak
+nominally _to trade_, but in reality to tamper with the fidelity of the
+Datus and others. They proposed to the Tumangong to join Seriff Sahib,
+stating that they were sent by him to try all the people here. 'They
+had been ruined here; Seriff Sahib would restore them their property;
+and if they left Muda Hassim, James Brooke, and the Chinese, they
+could afterward easily make a prey of the Dyaks and Chinese, with
+Seriff Sahib's assistance, and get plenty of slaves.'
+
+"The plan proposed for the removal was as follows:--Seriff Sahib,
+with forty Malay boats, and the Sakarrans with one hundred boats,
+were to request permission from Muda Hassim to attack the Dyak tribe
+of Siquong, and under this pretence were to come up the river, when
+the Datus were to join, with their wives and children, and all were to
+take flight together. The Tumangong told me this as soon as he heard it
+himself; and, to make sure, I sent Patingi Gapoor to fish their story
+out of them, which he did most successfully. Being assured of the fact,
+I called the Dyaks, and, before some dozens of our people and one or
+two persons from Singe, taxed them with their guilt. They were obliged
+to confess, and insisted upon it that Seriff Sahib had sent them,
+&c. Many urged me to put these Dyaks to death; but the reluctance we
+all have to shedding blood withheld me, and I had no desire to strike
+at a wren when a foul vulture was at hand. I dismissed the emissaries
+scot-free, and then both Muda Hassim and myself indited letters to
+Seriff Sahib, that of Muda Hassim being severe but dignified. Before
+they were dispatched, an ambassador arrived from Singe with letters
+both to the rajah and myself, disclaiming warmly all knowledge of the
+treachery, swearing _the most solemn_ oaths in proof of his truth, and
+declaring that, so far from having committed so shameful an action,
+he had never even dreamed of such a thing in his worst dreams, as
+he hoped that God would save him. Our letters were sent before his
+ambassador was received, and a second disclaimer, like the first,
+quickly reached us. Of course it was my policy, whatever my opinion
+might be, to receive his offers of friendship and to believe all he
+said; and, therefore, the matter ended, and ended so far well, that
+Seriff Sahib lowered his former tone; and, certainly, whatever he may
+desire in his heart, or _dream_ of, he wants to be well with us here,
+and, I can see, fears us. I am content, because I really wish for
+peace, and not war; Muda Hassim is content, because he has humbled
+Seriff Sahib, and acted decisively; and the seriff is content as the
+fiend in the infernal regions. I leave it to all gentle readers to
+form their own opinion of his truth or treachery; but I must hint to
+them my private opinion that he did send agents to tempt, and would
+have gained the Datus if he could; and as for his oaths, my belief
+is, he would swear a basketful of the most sacred before breakfast to
+support a lie, and yet not lose his appetite! The Datus were too old,
+and knew him too well, to be caught in his trap.
+
+"Seriff Sahib has now sent a fleet of boats up the Sarebus river;
+but the result I do not yet know.
+
+"To conclude our foreign policy, I must mention Borneo Proper.
+
+"My great object is to reconcile Muda Hassim and the sultan, and
+to restore the former to Borneo, before the coming of Mr. Bonham on
+his diplomatic mission. To effect this, I have resolved to proceed
+myself; and Muda Hassim, equally anxious, has letters and two of
+his brothers ready to accompany me. If we can gain this object, I
+shall be firmly established, and relieved from the intriguing, mean,
+base Borneons. And it will be an advantage to the government measure,
+in as far as they will be enabled to form their arrangements with all
+instead of a single faction of the Borneo Pangerans. From all I hear,
+Muda Hassim is more powerful than either the sultan or Pangeran Usop;
+and if he appeals to arms, I am assured he will carry his point,
+and become the sovereign of Borneo virtually, if not nominally.
+
+"The Royalist now waits for us at the mouth of the river, which
+I hope to reach on the 14th, this being the 12th July. Heigh for
+the sea once more! But yet, though I go, I take my cares with me,
+and but for the necessity, the absolute necessity, of bringing the
+Borneo question to a crisis, good or bad, I would fain stop where I
+am. For even during one short month's absence I fear my poor people
+will suffer from the intrigues of the rascally Borneo Pangerans. In
+this I do not include Muda Hassim, who, with a most amiable private
+character, and with integrity and good faith, desires to do right,
+as far as his education and prejudices will permit. It is sad to
+reflect that this very prince, who really wishes to do good, and to
+conduce to the comfort of his people, should, from want of energy,
+have been so fearful an oppressor, through the agency of others; and
+it is not here alone that vile agents for vile purposes are plentiful."
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV.
+
+    Visit of Captain Elliott.--Mr. Brooke sails for Borneo
+    Proper.--Arrival.--Visited by leading men.--Condition of
+    the country.--Reception by the Sultan.--Objects in view.--The
+    different chiefs, and communications with them.--The Sultan and
+    his Pangerans.--Objects of the visit accomplished.--Return to
+    Sarawak.--Ceremonies of the cession.--Sail for Singapore.
+
+
+After Mr. Brooke's return from his expedition against the Singe
+Dyak chief Parembam, he was visited by his friend Captain Elliott,
+of the Madras engineers, whose acquaintance I had the pleasure of
+subsequently making at Singapore. He is, as Mr. Brooke describes him,
+"a man of science and education, and the best of good fellows." During
+his stay at Sarawak, he established his observatory, and all its
+apparatus; and a shed (now converted into a goat-house) will always
+retain the appellation of "the Observatory." Mr. Brooke and Captain
+Elliott appear to have made some very amusing and agreeable excursions
+up the different rivers, an account of which is given in the journal;
+but I shall pass it over, as I am anxious to follow my friend through
+with his government up to the time of my meeting him at Singapore.
+
+"_Thursday, July 14th._--We were to have started on this most lucky
+day at ten o'clock, but what with innumerable preparations and delays,
+it was near six before the rajah was ready to dismiss the procession;
+and my alarm became considerable that, Friday (an unlucky day) having
+commenced by the native reckoning, we should again be postponed till
+Sunday. However, by making six o'clock five, and keeping back the
+watches to suit our purpose, our departure was achieved. The state
+spears and swords were brought forth. The letters for the sultan, in
+their brass tray covered with embroidered cloth, were duly mounted,
+with the greatest reverence, on the head of Bandar Sumsu; and nothing
+remained but to take leave. The rajah addressed a few words to his
+brothers, requesting them to tell the sultan that his heart was always
+with him; that he could never separate from him, whether far or near;
+and that he was, and always had been, true to his son. Budrudeen then
+rose, and approaching the rajah, seated himself close to him, bending
+his head to the ground over his hand, which he had grasped. The rajah
+hastily withdrew his hand, and clasping him round, embraced, kissing
+his neck. Both were greatly agitated and both wept, and I could have
+wept for company, for it was no display of state ceremony, but genuine
+feeling. It is seldom, very seldom, they show their feelings; and the
+effect was the more touching from being unexpected; beside, it is a
+part of our nature (one's better nature) to feel when we see others
+feel. Pangeran Marsale followed; both brothers likewise parted with
+Muda Mahammed in the same way, and they certainly rose in my opinion
+from this token of affection toward each other. My adieus followed; we
+all rose; the rajah accompanied us to the wharf; and as we embarked,
+I could see the tears slowly steal from his eyes. I could not help
+taking his hand, and bidding him be of good cheer; he smiled in a
+friendly manner, pressed my hand, and I stepped into my boat. Our gongs
+struck up; the barge, decorated with flags and streamers, was towed
+slowly along against the flood-tide; the guns fired from the wharf,
+from the Chinese houses, and from our fort, and we passed along in
+all the pomp and pride of _Sarawak state_. It was dusk when we got
+down to the first reach, and there we brought up to wait for the ebb."
+
+I shall omit that part of my friend's journal containing his remarks
+and observations along the coast between Sarawak and the entrance of
+the Borneo river. On the 21st July his narration continues thus:
+
+"I must now leave geography, and turn to politics. On casting anchor
+we acted on a plan previously formed, and sent off the gig, with Seriff
+Hussein and Nakoda Ahmed, to the city, to intimate my arrival, and that
+of the rajah's brothers, with letters from Muda Hassim. I trusted to
+their dread of and curiosity about the English expedition to insure
+my reception; but I gave particular directions, in case the sultan
+asked about me, that my ambassadors were to say I was here; that I had
+been corresponding about the English coming; that I was not a man in
+authority, or belonging to the East India Company; and that they were
+sure I should not land unless he invited me to come and see him. To
+show eagerness would have raised suspicion; backwardness excites the
+contrary feeling, and a desire to entertain some intercourse.
+
+"_July 22d._--At the unconscionable hour of 2 A.M., a mob of Pangerans
+came on board, in number not fewer than fifty, and with a multitude
+of followers. They awoke us out of our first sleep, and crowded the
+vessel above and below, so that we could scarce find room to make
+our toilet in public, while the heat was suffocating us. However,
+we did manage it, and sat talking till daylight. Our visitors were
+chiefly relations or adherents of Muda Hassim, and some of the first
+men in the country. Pangeran Budrudeen and Pangeran Marsale were in
+their glory, and happy; and it was evident at once that our affairs
+were likely to succeed to our heart's content. All were anxious and
+eager in inquiries about Muda Hassim, and wishing his return. The
+sultan, Pangeran Usop, Pangeran Mumin, and others declared, 'Borneo
+could never be well till he came back.' In short, it was clear that
+the country was in distress and difficulty from within: trade ruined,
+piracy abounding, the mouth of the river unsafe, their forts insulted
+by the pirates, the communication with their dependencies cut off,
+food dear, and the tobacco, which comes from the northward, not to
+be had. Everything conspires to forward Muda Hassim's views and mine;
+and during this conversation, it was evident they were looking to me
+as a friend.
+
+"At daylight a boat from the sultan arrived to carry up the letters;
+but Budrudeen and his brother resolved to proceed first, in order to
+make sure of an honorable reception for the chop. At 7 o'clock there
+was a stir. I saw them over the side with delight, and gave them a
+salute with pleasure. Breakfast done, I was too happy to lie down,
+and slept till past midday, having then only to wait for Budrudeen's
+return.
+
+"_23d._--Budrudeen came at 3 P.M., bringing with him good news
+of the most favorable reception from all parties, all wishing for
+reconciliation and the return of Muda Hassim. To-morrow, boats are
+to come for the letters, which are to be conveyed in state. The
+day following I am to go up, and am likewise to be received in all
+honorable form.
+
+"_24th._--At 7 A.M. the state-boat, a shabby concern, decorated with
+yellow flags, arrived, and at eight the letters were borne away under
+a salute. Thus we had a second time the satisfaction of getting rid
+of the mob at an early hour.
+
+"_25th._--At 9 1/2 A.M. I started with Williamson in the gig, with
+the long-boat in company, carrying the presents. On approaching the
+town, before the ebb had run long, it appeared to be a very Venice of
+hovels, a river Cybele rising from the water. For those who like it,
+the locality is not ill chosen. The hills recede from the river, and
+form an amphitheatre; and several other rivers or streams flowing in,
+cause a muddy deposit, on which the houses are built. At high water
+they are surrounded; at low water stand on a sheet of mud. On nearing
+it, we were encompassed by boats which preceded and followed us,
+and we passed the floating market, where women, wearing immense hats
+of palm-leaves, sell all sorts of edibles, balanced in their little
+canoes, now giving a paddle, now making a bargain, and dropping down
+with the tide, and again regaining their place when the bargain is
+finished. The first impression of the town is miserable. The houses
+are crowded and numerous, and even the palace does not present a
+more captivating aspect, for, though large, it is as incommodious
+as the worst. Our presentation was exactly similar to that of
+our first meeting with Muda Hassim at Sarawak, only the crowd was
+much greater. We had been seated but a few minutes when Pangeran
+Usop arrived, and directly afterward the sultan. He gave us tea,
+leaf-cigars, and sirih, and, in short, showed us every attention;
+and what was best of all did not keep us very long. Our apartment
+was partitioned off from the public hall, a dark-looking place,
+but furnished with a table brought by us, and three rickety chairs,
+beside matresses and plenty of mats. We were kept up nearly all night,
+which, after the fatigues of the day, was hard upon us.
+
+"Further observation confirmed us in the opinion that the town
+itself is miserable, and its locality on the mud fitted only for
+frogs or natives; but there is a level dry plain above the entrance
+of the Kiangi river, admirably suited for a European settlement; and
+across the Kiangi is swelling ground, where the residents might find
+delightful spots for their country-houses. The greatest annoyance to
+a stranger is the noisome smell of the mud when uncovered; and all
+plated or silver articles, even in the course of one night, get black
+and discolored. The inhabitants I shall estimate moderately at 10,000,
+and the Kadien population are numerous amid the hills.
+
+"_27th._--Our objects in coming to Borneo were threefold. Firstly,
+to effect a reconciliation between the sultan and Muda Hassim;
+secondly, to gain the sultan's approval and signature to my holding
+Sarawak; and thirdly, to release the Kleeses [Hindoostanees] of the
+shipwrecked vessels, the Sultana and Lord Melbourne. The first object
+was gained at once, as the sultan seemed really overjoyed at being good
+friends with his uncle; and Pangeran Usop, from whom we anticipated
+difficulty, stepped forward directly to aid us while Pangeran Mumin
+was not averse. I will not now stop to sketch the characters of these
+worthies, as I shall hereafter have a better knowledge of them; but I
+may remark, _en passant_, that it was evident, even to my inexperience,
+that no two of them were on good terms, and all probably united in
+a feeling that Muda Hassim's return would be a personal as well as
+public advantage. The other principal Pangerans, namely, Tizudeen (the
+sultan's natural brother), Kurmaindar (the father of the country),
+Bahar (the rajah's brother-in-law), Tizudeen second (the rajah's
+natural brother), were all for Muda Hassim; and the population, as
+far as I could learn, decidedly desirous of his being restored to them.
+
+"Each day I had several interviews with the sultan, in his surow
+or private room; and he assured me of his fondness for Muda Hassim,
+his wish to have him near him again, and the great benefit it would
+be. Moreover, he was pleased to express great personal regard for me;
+and every five minutes I had to swear 'eternal friendship,' while he,
+clasping my hand, kept repeating, 'amigo _suya_,' 'amigo _suya_,'
+meaning, _my_ friend, _my_ friend. At the same time he professed great
+readiness to give me Sarawak--inquired the amount of revenue--seemed
+satisfied, and said, 'I wish you to be there; I do not wish any
+body else; you are my amigo, and it is nobody's business but mine;
+the country is mine, and if I please to give you all, I can.' His
+majesty is very proud of displaying his very small smattering of
+Spanish or Portuguese; and almost all the higher people having
+acquired a few words, shows there must have been a communication at
+no very distant date. I was also warned not to care for any of the
+other Pangerans,--not, indeed, to have anything to say to them.
+
+"With this advice I took the liberty to dispense; and sent to Pangerans
+Mumin and Usop to intimate my wish to visit them. The former pleaded
+that his house was unfit to receive me; but the latter immediately
+sent a most polite message, that any time, either by day or night,
+he should be happy to see me; and accordingly I went. The house _and
+style_ are the best in Borneo. I was politely and kindly greeted;
+and I soon found that I was with a man of sense and quickness. There
+was a little diplomacy at first on his part; but as I proceeded direct
+to my object, he at once laid it aside. In fact, candor is the basis
+of our right influence with the natives; and as I desired to make
+Pangeran Usop my friend, I went candidly to work, and immediately
+told him all that I had already told the sultan. The amount of my
+conversation was as follows: The first topic being the anticipated
+visit of the English, 'Were the English coming?' 'Was Mr. Bonham
+coming?' were the first questions; and 'With what intent?' I replied,
+that the English were certainly coming, but with no evil intentions;
+that it was true they were offended by the ill usage the captain and
+people of the Sultana had met with; yet that I had endeavored to put
+it in the best light, and had urged that a friendly communication
+for the future was better than a retrospect which might give rise to
+unpleasant feelings: I was sure that the English desired a friendly
+intercourse; and I hoped, though I could not say, that they would
+look to the future, and not to the past. I had, I added, no authority;
+but my friendship for the sultan induced me to inform him what I had
+heard abroad. When Mr. Bonham came, he would be able to tell them
+all; but I could say now that I thought he would demand a treaty
+between Singapore and Borneo for the mutual protection of trade,
+and the care of individuals of each nation who were shipwrecked or
+otherwise sought protection at either place.
+
+"On the whole, it is certain that the feelings of Borneo are decidedly
+friendly, and equally certain that the persons of influence will
+receive us in their warmest manner, and grant us every thing, if we
+resort only to measures of conciliation. It never can be too often
+repeated, that conciliation is the only policy with Malays, and
+particularly the Borneons, who have very vague and confused ideas
+of our power. A harsh truth, a peremptory demand, they have never
+heard in their lives, and they will not hear it for the first time
+and remain friendly; for all who have the least acquaintance with the
+native character know their acute sense of false shame. To demand,
+therefore, of the chief here to acknowledge our superiority would,
+I am sure, be met with a haughty refusal. In a few years, if we
+proceed mildly to establish a beneficial influence, they will fall
+into our views without reserve; for, as I have often before stated,
+their government is in the last stage of destruction and decay.
+
+"The reconciliation of Muda Hassim was soon complete; and as to
+the Kleeses of the Lord Melbourne, twenty in number, they were at
+once surrendered to me, with a request that I would forward them to
+Singapore as quickly as I could. The boat of the Lord Melbourne was
+likewise given to me. I had some scruples about three Kleeses of the
+Sultana, who had been sold at Malludu Bay, bought there by an Arab
+seriff, and brought here. By all their laws and customs they were his
+slaves, purchased at a distance, and, as I had no right to claim them
+(supposing even that to be just), and was resolved not to leave them
+in captivity, I paid a fair price for them at the rate of twenty-five
+dollars per man. I regret to add, there is one other man not in the
+place; and one is gone to Tutorga--about a day's journey hence.
+
+"_28th._--I may here draw a brief sketch of the principal personages of
+this most primitive court, beginning with its worthy head, the sultan.
+
+"The sultan is a man past fifty years of age, short and puffy
+in person, with a countenance which expresses very obviously the
+imbecility of his mind. His right hand is garnished with an extra
+diminutive thumb, the natural member being crooked and distorted. His
+mind, indexed by his face, seems to be a chaos of confusion; without
+acuteness, without dignity, and without good sense. He can neither
+read nor write; is guided by the last speaker; and his advisers, as
+might be expected, are of the lower order, and mischievous from their
+ignorance and their greediness. He is always talking, and generally
+joking; and the most serious subjects never meet with five minutes'
+consecutive attention. The favorable side of his character is, that he
+is good-tempered and good-natured; by no means cruel; and, in a certain
+way, generous, though rapacious to a high degree. His rapacity, indeed,
+is carried to such an excess as to astonish a European, and is evinced
+in a thousand mean ways. The presents I made him were unquestionably
+handsome; but he was not content without begging from me the share
+I had reserved for the other Pangerans; and afterward, through
+Mr. Williamson, solicited more trifles, such as sugar, penknives,
+and the like. To crown all, he was incessantly asking what was left
+in the vessel; and when told the truth,--that I was stripped as bare
+as a tree in winter,--he frequently returned to the charge. In the
+middle of the night, when our boat came up with some gifts for him,
+he slipped out his royal person, that he might see what packages there
+were. I must say, however, that this was not intended for me to know;
+and, personally, he did not behave very ill toward me, only dunning
+me occasionally. In regard to the Sarawak revenue, he was eager in his
+inquiries; and was very ready, on the strength of his thousand dollars,
+and my generosity, to give me a list of things which amounted to 10,000
+dollars in value. I may note one other feature which marks the man. He
+requested, as the greatest favor,--he urged, with the earnestness of
+a child,--that I would send back the schooner before the month Ramban
+(Ramadan of the Turks); remarking, 'What shall I do during the fast
+without soft sugar and dates?' What effect the exaggerated promises of
+Mr. de Souza must have had on such a temper, may readily be imagined;
+and what the evil influence of such a prince on the country, needs
+not be stated; for, like other fools, he is difficult to guide where
+the object is right, and facile whenever it promises any immediate
+advantage. I will only add, that during my intercourse of six days,
+he has given me the impression that he is not in his right mind; and,
+at any rate, that flattery and bad counsel have deprived him of the
+little wit he might probably originally have possessed.
+
+"Of Pangeran Mumin, the De Gadong and the sultan's son-in-law, I
+know little; and he is, in secret, a most determined opposer of mine;
+but I believe he, as well as most, is desirous of being good friends
+with the English, and will readily listen to any overtures which
+promise increase of trade. He seemed to me a shrewd, cunning man,
+fit for a Nakoda.
+
+"Pangeran Usop is a man of middle age, short, active, and intelligent,
+and, I may add, ambitious. Pangeran Muda Hassim will throw himself into
+the arms of the English, from his partiality, and from the hope of a
+better order of things, and the eventual succession to the throne,
+to which he stands next,--the present sultan having no legitimate
+children.
+
+"Two of my objects were thus achieved at once; and the Kleeses
+(twenty-three) were, much to their satisfaction, dispatched to the
+vessel in the Melbourne's gig. My own affair of Sarawak meets with some
+opposition from Mumin, who is decidedly friendly to Macota. The sultan,
+however, is steady to me, gabbles daily and hourly of his intentions;
+and Pangeran Usop likewise pushes on my suit with his influence,
+at the same time giving me this one piece of good advice, viz. that
+Muda Hassim must be induced to return to Borneo, for that two persons
+(Muda Hassim and myself) cannot govern together; and he added, 'If
+Muda Hassim returns, you will have a fine trade at Sarawak; but while
+he is there, no native prahus will visit the place.' This is true: I
+have no fear of ultimate success in my suit; but delay is formidable,
+and I have already intimated that I propose making my _conge_ on the
+2d of August.
+
+"_30th._--I have little more to add about Borneo, save my plaint
+against our dungeon, though the said dungeon be honorably situated
+behind the throne, and within the royal apartments. Just below
+the town are several rills of the finest water; and the natives
+report that they issue from a small but deep lake at a very short
+distance. Beneath one of these spouts we each evening took a most
+delicious bath in water as cold as it is limpid. I am no great bustler
+at any time; but since being here, I have purposely abstained from
+all manifestation of curiosity, and never desired or requested to see
+much; it rouses suspicion, and suspicion rouses distrust, and distrust
+draws the kris. On the contrary, by being backward at first, you become
+subsequently a sort of domesticated animal, and privileged to use your
+eyes and limbs. Most Europeans do themselves great injury by searching
+the mountains and the waters, breaking the rocks, shooting the birds,
+and gathering the plants. The natives can never believe they would take
+so much trouble without being well paid by the value of the treasures
+found, or employed by the East India Company to espy their land,
+in order that the said company might seize it at their convenience.
+
+"_31st._--A conclave of Pangerans, when it was finally resolved to
+grant the country of Sarawak to me as rajah or governor.
+
+"_August 1st, 1842._--An important day in my history, and I hope one
+which will be marked with a white stone in the annals of Sarawak. The
+letters to Muda Hassim being finished and signed, the contract giving
+me the government of Sarawak came under discussion, and was likewise
+completed by ten at night, signed, sealed, and witnessed. Thus I
+have gained every object for which I came to Borneo; and to-morrow,
+God willing, I take my leave.
+
+"The miserable state of Borneo I have already mentioned; and it is now
+a saying of the Balagnini pirates, that 'it is difficult to catch fish,
+but easy to catch Borneons.' Externally and internally they are equally
+wretched, and torn by factions; yet, on the whole, I am not inclined to
+judge harshly of the poorer order of them. They are a good-tempered,
+very hospitable, and unwarlike people, the victims of their rajahs;
+the oppressed, but not the oppressors. In this character, however,
+I do not reckon the Pangerans and their followers. It is from these
+latter that Europeans take their estimate of the people generally,
+and consequently truly account them, from that standard, to be a
+wretched sample of humanity--mean, thievish, arrogant, insolent, and
+ready for any wickedness. The Pangerans themselves are only a step
+better: but even here I must make a little allowance; for I believe
+their crimes arise more from their poverty and impunity than from
+any inherent viciousness.
+
+"_3d._--The Pangerans Budrudeen and Marsale, and a host more, came
+on board this night, and kept us up as usual.
+
+"_4th._--Another mob arrived the middle of last night. I retreated
+from them, being far from well, and got some sleep. At 2 P.M. the
+letters came on board; were received with honors; and as soon as we
+could rid ourselves of our troublesome visitors, we dropped outside
+Tanjong Sapo, and sailed the following day.
+
+"The Kleeses sold at Malludu were brought from Ambun, and reported
+to the authorities that a European woman was detained there. I made
+particular inquires of the Borneon Pangerans, and they said they had
+always understood that such was the case. Unhappy lady, if she be
+a lady! Is it a compassionate part to release her after many years
+of captivity?
+
+"_14th._--Anchored off the Morotaba, having had nothing but calms,
+light winds, and squalls.
+
+"_15th._--Got part of the way up the river, and at 8 P.M. dropped our
+anchor; and in about an hour later two boats started for Sarawak. The
+night was moonlight, with a cold breeze; and, after a pleasant pull,
+we arrived, and created as much sensation as we could desire. But it
+was better, and I was gratified with the intelligence that everything
+had gone on well during our absence. At break of day I went, fagged,
+to bed. So ended our mission to Borneo.
+
+"On the evening of the 18th the sultan's letters were produced in all
+the state which could possibly be attained. On their arrival they were
+received and brought up amid large wax torches, and the person who
+was to read them was stationed on a raised platform; standing below
+him was the rajah, with a saber in his hand; in front of the rajah
+was his brother, Pangeran Jaffer, with a tremendous kempilan drawn;
+and around were the other brothers and myself, all standing--the rest
+of the company being seated. The letters were then read, the last one
+appointing me to hold the government of Sarawak. After this the rajah
+descended, and said aloud, 'If any one present disowns or contests
+the sultan's appointment, let him now declare.' All were silent. He
+next turned to the Patingis, and asked them; they were obedient to
+the will of the sultan. Then came the other Pangerans--'Is there any
+Pangeran or any young rajah that contests the question? Pangeran
+Der Macota, what do you say?' Macota expressed his willingness to
+obey. One or two other obnoxious Pangerans who had always opposed
+themselves to me were each in turn challenged, and forced to promise
+obedience. The rajah then waved his sword, and with a loud voice
+exclaimed, 'Whoever he is that disobeys the sultan's mandate now
+received, I will separate his skull;' at the moment some ten of his
+brothers jumped from the verandah, and, drawing their long krisses,
+began to flourish and dance about, thrusting close to Macota, striking
+the pillar above his head, pointing their weapons at his breast. This
+_amusement_, the violence of motion, the freedom from restraint, this
+explosion of a long pent-up animosity, roused all their passions;
+and had Macota, through an excess of fear or an excess of bravery,
+started up, he would have been slain, and other blood would have
+been spilt. But he was quiet, with his face pale and subdued, and,
+as shortly as decency would permit after the riot had subsided, took
+his leave. This scene is a custom with them; the only exception to
+which was, that it was pointed so directly at Macota. I was glad,
+at any rate, that all had gone off without bloodshed.
+
+"_22d._--I found that though matters had been quiet during my absence,
+repeated efforts had been made to disturb the country. First, it was
+positively stated and industriously circulated that I was certain
+to be killed in Borneo; and next a report was propagated that 6000
+Chinese were on their march from Sambas, with evil intentions. These
+rumors did not serve any object, and my return has set them at rest;
+but I regretted to hear that the Singe Dyaks had, contrary to my
+positive prohibition, killed a Dyak of Sanpro.
+
+"Other affairs are prosperous. Macota is to be sent out of the country,
+and the rajah himself talks of returning to Borneo; and both these
+events will please me greatly.
+
+"_January 1st, 1843._--Another year passed and gone; a year, with all
+its anxieties, its troubles, its dangers, upon which I can look back
+with satisfaction--a year in which I have been usefully employed in
+doing good to others.
+
+"Since I last wrote, the Dyaks have been quiet, settled, and improving;
+the Chinese advancing toward prosperity; and the Sarawak people,
+wonderfully contented and industrious, relieved from oppression,
+and fields of labor allowed them.
+
+"Justice I have executed with an unflinching hand; and the amount of
+crime is certainly small--the petty swindling very great.
+
+"The month of January was a dreary month. A sick man in the house, and
+very little medicine; and what was worse, the Royalist did not make her
+appearance. Yet both these troubles disappeared nearly together; for
+M'Kenzie got well, and the schooner, bringing with her Dr. Treacher,
+arrived. She had been detained undergoing some necessary repairs. The
+accession of a medical man is particularly valuable.
+
+"I have nothing to say about the country, except that I have given
+Pangeran Macota orders to leave, which he is obeying in as far as
+preparing his boat; and I hope that in six weeks we shall be rid of
+his cunning and diabolically intriguing presence.
+
+"The Rajah Muda Hassim, his brothers, and the tag-rag following,
+I also hope soon to be rid of; for although they behave far better
+than they did at first, it is an evil to have wheel within wheel;
+and these young rajahs of course expect, and are accustomed to,
+a license which I will not allow.
+
+"Budrudeen is an exception--a striking and wonderful instance of the
+force of good sense over evil education.
+
+"The rest of the people go on well; the time revolves quietly; and
+the Dyaks, as well as the Malays and Chinese, enjoy the inestimable
+blessing of peace and security. At intervals a cloud threatens
+the serenity of our political atmosphere; but it speedily blows
+over. However, all is well and safe; and so safe that I have resolved
+to proceed in person to Singapore.
+
+"My motives for going are various; but I hope to do good, to excite
+interest, and make friends; and I can find no season like the present
+for my absence. It is now two years since I left Singapore, 'the
+boundary of civilization.' I have been out of the civilized world,
+living in a demi-civilized state, peaceably, innocently, and usefully.
+
+"_Feb. 8th._--After ten days' delay at the mouth of the river,
+got out."
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV.
+
+    Captain Keppel's voyage in the Dido with Mr. Brooke
+    to Sarawak.--Chase of three piratical prahus.--Boat
+    expedition.--Action with the pirates, and capture of a
+    prahu.--Arrival at Sarawak.--Mr. Brooke's reception.--Captain
+    Keppel and his officers visit the Rajah.--The palace and the
+    audience.--Return royal visit to the Dido.--Mr. Brooke's residence
+    and household.--Dr. Treacher's adventure with one of the ladies
+    of Macota's harem.--Another boat affair with the pirates, and
+    death of their chief.
+
+
+I have now followed Mr. Brooke's journal up to the time of our first
+meeting at Singapore, and his accompanying me to Sarawak, and have
+no remarks of my own to offer that could add in the slightest degree
+to its interest; happily, none such are needed. I had not yet seen my
+friend's journal when I arrived at Sarawak, nor was it until some time
+after that I by degrees learned the progress of his infant government
+from its commencement. It was with unfeigned pleasure I then found
+that, while performing my duty in the suppression of piracy, I was,
+at the same time, rendering the greatest assistance and support to
+an individual in his praiseworthy, novel, and important position.
+
+I had long felt a desire to explore the Island of Borneo, which the
+few travelers who have called there describe as not only one of the
+largest and most fertile in the world, but one of the most productive
+in gold and diamonds, and other rich minerals and ores; one from which
+the finest camphor known is brought into merchandise, and which is
+undoubtedly capable of supplying every kind of valuable spice, and
+articles of universal traffic and consumption. Yet, with all these
+capabilities and inducements to tempt the energetic spirit of trade,
+the internal condition of the country, and the dangers which beset
+its coasts, have hitherto prevented the interior from being explored
+by Europeans; and to prove how little we are acquainted even with its
+shores, I actually sailed by the best Admiralty chart eighty miles
+inland, and over the tops of mountains!
+
+_May 4th, 1843._--Passed through the Tambelans, a beautiful group
+of between 100 and 150 small islands. They are very extensive, and
+but thinly inhabited. There is good anchorage near some of them; but
+we had nothing less than twenty fathoms. They are placed so close
+together that, after passing the first, we were to all appearance
+completely land-locked in a magnificent and capacious harbor. The
+following morning we anchored off the mouth of the Sambas river,
+and sent the boats away to examine the creeks, islands, and rivers
+along the coast for traces of pirates--which were discovered by the
+remains of their fires on different parts, although no clew could be
+obtained as to the direction in which they had gone. On the morning
+of the 8th I again sent the pinnace and two cutters, Mr. Partridge,
+Messrs. D'Aeth and Jenkins, with a week's provisions, the whole under
+the command of Lieutenant Wilmot Horton, Mr. Brooke kindly offering
+his assistance, which, from his knowledge of the Malay language, as
+well as of the kind of vessels used by the pirates, was thankfully
+accepted. I directed them to proceed to the Island of Marundum, and,
+after visiting the South Natunas, to rejoin the Dido at Sarawak. In
+the mean time I proceeded leisurely along the coast, anchoring where
+convenient, and finding regular soundings all the way in from four
+to ten fathoms: weather remarkably fine, and water smooth. On the
+morning of the 9th, on rounding Tanjong Datu, we opened suddenly on a
+suspicious-looking boat, which, on making us out, ran for a small, deep
+bay formed by Cape Datu and the next point to the eastward. Standing
+a little further on, we discovered a second large boat in the offing,
+which likewise stood in shore, and afterward a third at the bottom
+of the bay. From the description I had received, I easily made these
+out to be Illanuns, an enterprising tribe of pirates, of whose daring
+adventures I had heard much. They inhabit a small cluster of islands
+off the N.E. coast of Borneo, and go out in large fleets every year to
+look for prahus bound to Singapore or the Straits; and, after capturing
+the vessels, reduce their crews to slavery. It is of a cruel nature;
+for Mr. Brooke observes: "Nor is the slavery of that mild description
+which is often attributed to the Asiatics; for these victims are bound
+for months, and crowded in the bottom of the pirate vessels, where
+they suffer all the miseries which could be inflicted on board an
+African slaver."--Having fairly pinned these worthies into a corner,
+and knowing that the only two small boats I had left on board would
+stand no chance with them in pulling, to make sure of my prizes I
+loaded the two foremost guns on each side, and, having no proper chart
+of the coast, proceeded under easy sail, feeling my way into the bay
+with the lead. When just within musket-range, I let go the anchor,
+which was no sooner done than the three boats commenced making a
+move. I thought at first they were coming alongside to sue for pardon
+and peace; and my astonishment was great when I discovered that nothing
+was further from their intention. One pulled away, close in shore,
+to the eastward, and the other two to the westward. They were rowed
+by about forty oars each, and appeared, from their swiftness, to be
+flying, and that, too, from under my very nose; and what rendered it
+still more ridiculous and disagreeable, owing to a strong ebb tide,
+the ship remained exactly in a position that no gun could be brought
+to bear on either side. The dingy and jolly-boat gave chase; but the
+pirates had the start, and it was useless; for although a few men were
+seen to drop from their oars in consequence of our fire of musketry
+from the forecastle, still their pace never slackened; and when they
+did come within the bearing of our guns, which they were obliged to
+do for a minute or two while rounding the points that formed the bay,
+though our thirty-two pound shot fell thickly about their heads,
+frequently dashing the spray all over them, not a man flinched from
+his oar. We could not help admiring their plan of escape, and the
+gallant manner in which it was effected. I saw that it would be quite
+unavailing to attempt to catch the boats that had pulled to windward;
+but we lost no time in slipping our cable and making all sail in
+chase of the one that had gone to leeward. But the "artful dodger"
+was still too fast for us: we lost sight of him at dusk, close off
+the mouth of a river, up which, however, I do not think he went; for
+our two boats were there very shortly after him; and although they
+searched all night and next morning, they could discover no traces
+of the fugitive. Besides, these pirates have no friends among the
+inhabitants of the province of Sarawak who would have screened them
+from us; on the contrary, they would have put them to death if once
+in their power. I certainly never made so sure of any thing in my
+life as of capturing the three prahus after I had seen them safe at
+the bottom of the little bay at Tanjong Datu: but "there is many a
+slip between the cup and the lip." We returned the following day to
+pick up the anchor and cable, and observed that it was a place well
+adapted as a rendezvous for pirates. The bay is studded with rocks;
+and, to my horror, I found that I had run her majesty's ship Dido
+inside two that were a-wash at low water! A mountain stream of most
+delicious water runs into the bay between two rocks, and the coast
+abounds with oysters.
+
+On the 13th the Dido anchored off Tanjong Poe, outside the bar at
+the entrance of the river leading to Mr. Brooke's residence and seat
+of government, at the town of Sarawak, situated about twenty-four
+miles up. At half-tide on the following morning we crossed the bar,
+carrying no less than three and a half fathoms, and entered the
+beautiful river of Morotaba, which we ran up for the first fifteen
+miles under all sail, with a fresh, leading breeze. The Dido was the
+first square-rigged vessel that had ever entered those waters. We came
+to at the junction river which unites the two principal entrances to
+the Sarawak.
+
+In the evening our boats returned on board from their expedition,
+having reached Sarawak the day previous by the western entrance. On
+leaving the Dido, on the morning of the 8th, they proceeded to the
+Island of Marundum, a favorite rendezvous for pirates, where they
+came on a fleet of the Illanum tribe, who, however, did not give them
+an opportunity of closing; but, cutting their sampans adrift, made a
+precipitate flight, opening fire as they ran out on the opposite side
+of a small bay, in which they had been watering and refitting. This,
+of course, led to a very exciting chase, with a running fire kept up
+on both sides; but the distance was too great for the range of the
+guns on either side; and the pirates, who, in addition to sailing
+well, were propelled by from forty to sixty oars each, made their
+escape. It was not until nearly hull-down that they (probably out
+of bravado) ceased to fire their stern guns. As they went in the
+direction of the Natunas, our boats steered for those islands, and
+anchored under the south end of one of them. At daylight next morning,
+although in three fathoms water, the pinnace, owing to the great rise
+and fall of tide, grounded on a coral reef, and Lieutenant Horton
+and Mr. Brooke proceeded in one of the cutters to reconnoiter. As
+they neared the s.w. point, they were met by six prahus, beating
+their tom-toms as they advanced, and making every demonstration of
+fighting. Lieutenant Horton judiciously turned to rejoin the other
+boats; and the pinnace having, fortunately, just then floated, he
+formed his little squadron into line abreast, cleared for action,
+and prepared to meet his formidable-looking antagonists. Mr. Brooke,
+however, whose eye had been accustomed to the cut and rig of all
+the boats in these seas, discovered that those advancing were not
+Illanuns, and fancied there must be some mistake. The Natunas people
+had been trading with Sarawak, and he was intimately acquainted with
+a rich and powerful chief who resided on the island; he therefore
+raised a white flag of truce on his spy-glass, and from the bow of
+the pinnace hailed, waved, and made all the signs he could to warn
+them of the danger into which they were running; but a discharge of
+small arms was the only reply he got. They then detached their three
+smallest vessels inshore, so as to command a cross-fire, and cut off
+the retreat of our boats; and the rest advanced, yelling, beating
+their tom-toms, and blazing away with all the confidence of victory,
+their shot cutting through the rigging, and splashing in the water
+all around. It was an anxious moment for the Dido's little party. Not
+a word was spoken. The only gun of the pinnace was loaded with grape
+and canister, and kept pointed on the largest prahu. The men waited,
+with their muskets in hand, for permission to fire; but it was not
+until within pistol-range that Lieutenant Horton poured into the
+enemy his well-prepared dose. It instantly brought them to a halt;
+yet they had the temerity to exchange shots for a few minutes longer,
+when the largest cried for quarter, and the other five made for the
+shore, chased by the two cutters, and keeping up a fire to the last.
+
+The prize taken possession of by the pinnace proved to be a prahu
+mounting three brass guns, with a crew of thirty-six men, belonging
+to the Rajah of Rhio, and which had been dispatched by that chief to
+collect tribute at and about the Natunas islands. They had on board ten
+men killed, and eleven (four of them mortally) wounded. They affected
+the greatest astonishment on discovering that our boats belonged
+to a British man-of-war, and protested that it was all a mistake;
+that the island had lately been plundered by the Illanun pirates,
+for whom they had taken us; that the rising sun was in their eyes,
+and that they could not make out the colors, &c. Lieutenant Horton,
+thinking that their story might possibly have some foundation in truth,
+and taking into consideration the severe lesson they had received,
+directed Dr. Simpson, the assistant-surgeon, to dress their wounds;
+and after admonishing them to be more circumspect in future, restored
+them their boat, as well as the others which belonged to the island,
+two of them being a trifle smaller, but of the same armament as
+the one from Rhio, and the remaining three still smaller, carrying
+twelve men each, armed with spears and muskets. These had been taken
+possession of by the cutters after they had reached the shore and
+landed their killed and wounded, who were borne away from the beach
+so smartly by the natives that our people had not time to ascertain
+the number hurt. The surgeon went ashore, and dressed the wounds of
+several of them, an act of kindness and civilization far beyond their
+comprehension. The natives, however, appeared to bear us no malice
+for the injury we had inflicted on their countrymen, but loaded our
+boats with fruit, goats, and every thing we required. It afforded some
+amusement to find that among the slightly wounded was Mr. Brooke's
+old, wealthy, and respectable friend already alluded to, who was not
+a little ashamed at being recognized; but piracy is so inherent in a
+Malay, that few can resist the temptation when a good opportunity for
+plunder presents itself. The fact, which I afterward ascertained, was,
+that they took our boats for some coming from a wreck with whatever
+valuables they could collect; and their not having seen any thing of
+the ship rather strengthened this conjecture; the excuse they made
+for continuing the fight after they had discovered their mistake
+being that they expected no quarter. [15]
+
+_May 16th._--We proceeded up the river twelve miles further into the
+interior of this interesting country, and with my friend Mr. Brooke
+on board, approached Sarawak, his seat of government; in the reach
+before you near which, and off the right bank of the river, is a long
+and dangerous shelf of rocks. The deep channel which lies between the
+bank and the rocks is not more than sixty or seventy feet wide, and
+required some little care in passing; but, with the exception of the
+flying jibboom, which got nipped off in the branch of a magnificent
+overhanging tree, we anchored without accident in six fathoms water,
+and greatly astonished the natives with a royal salute in honor of Muda
+Hassim, the Rajah of Borneo. During the whole morning large boats, some
+carrying as many as two hundred people, had been coming down the river
+to hail Mr. Brooke's return; and one of the greatest gratifications I
+had was in witnessing the undisguised delight, mingled with gratitude
+and respect, with which each head man welcomed their newly-elected
+ruler back to his adopted country. Although many of the Malay chiefs
+had every reason to expect that in the Dido they saw the means by
+which their misdeeds were to be punished, they showed their confidence
+in Mr. Brooke by bringing their children with them--a sign peculiar
+to the Malay. The scene was both novel and exciting; presenting to
+us, just anchored in a large fresh-water river, and surrounded by a
+densely-wooded jungle, the whole surface of the water covered with
+canoes and boats dressed out with their various-colored silken flags,
+filled with natives beating their tom-toms, and playing on their wild
+and not unpleasant-sounding wind-instruments, with the occasional
+discharge of firearms. To them it must have been equally striking
+and extraordinary (as few of them had ever seen any larger vessel
+than their own war-boats, or a European, until Mr. Brooke's arrival)
+to witness the Dido anchored almost in the center of their town, her
+mast-heads towering above the highest trees of their jungle; the loud
+report of her heavy two-and-thirty pounder guns, and the running aloft,
+to furl sails, of 150 seamen, in their clean white dresses, and with
+the band playing, all which helped to make an impression that will
+not easily be forgotten at Sarawak. I was anxious that Mr. Brooke
+should land with all the honors due to so important a personage,
+which he accordingly did, under a salute. The next business was my
+visit of ceremony to the rajah, which was great fun, though conducted
+in the most imposing manner. The band, and the marines, as a guard,
+having landed, we (the officers) all assembled at Mr. Brooke's house,
+where, having made ourselves as formidable as we could with swords
+and cocked hats, we marched in procession to the royal residence,
+his majesty having sent one of his brothers, who led me by the hand
+into his presence. The palace was a long, low shed, built on piles,
+to which we ascended by a ladder. The audience-chamber was hung with
+red and yellow silk curtains, and round the back and one side of the
+platform occupied by the rajah were ranged his ministers, warriors,
+and men-at-arms, bearing spears, swords, shields, and other warlike
+weapons. Opposite to them were drawn up our royal marines, the
+contrast between the two body-guards being very amusing. Muda Hassim
+is a wretched-looking, little man; still there was a courteous and
+gentle manner about him that prepossessed us in his favor, and made
+us feel that we were before an individual who had been accustomed to
+command. We took our seats in a semicircle, on chairs provided for
+the occasion, and smoked cigars and drank tea. His majesty chewed
+his sirih-leaf and betel-nut, seated with one leg crossed under him,
+and playing with his toes. Very little is ever said during these
+audiences, so we sat staring at one another for half an hour with
+mutual astonishment; and, after the usual compliments of wishing our
+friendship might last as long as the moon, and my having offered him
+the Dido and every thing else that did not belong to me in exchange
+for his house, we took our leave.
+
+_May 19th._--This was the day fixed for the rajah's visit to the Dido,
+about which he appeared very anxious, although he had seldom been
+known to go beyond his own threshold. For this ceremony all the boats,
+guns, tom-toms, flags, and population were put in requisition; and the
+procession to the ship was a very gorgeous and amusing spectacle. We
+received him on board with a royal salute. He brought in his train a
+whole tribe of natural brothers. His guards and followers were strange
+enough, and far too numerous to be admitted on the Dido's deck,
+so that as soon as a sufficient number had scrambled on board, the
+sentry had orders to prevent any more from crowding in; but whether,
+in so doing, the most important personages of the realm were kept out,
+we did not ascertain. One fellow succeeded in obtaining a footing
+with a large yellow silk canopy, a corner of which having run into
+the eye of one of the midshipmen, the bearer missed his footing, and
+down came the whole concern--as I was informed, by _accident_! The
+party assembled in my cabin, and the remarks were few, nor did they
+manifest great astonishment at any thing. In fact, a Malay never
+allows himself to be taken by surprise. I believe, however, the rajah
+did not think much of my veracity, when I informed him that this was
+not the largest ship belonging to her Britannic majesty, and that she
+had several mounting upward of 100 guns, though he admitted that he
+had seen a grander sight than any of his ancestors. There was much
+distress depicted in the royal countenance during his visit which I
+afterward ascertained was owing to his having been informed that he
+must not spit in my cabin. On leaving the ship, whether the cherry
+brandy he had taken made him forget the directions he had received,
+I do not know, but he squirted a mouthful of red betel-nut juice over
+the white deck, and then had the temerity to hold out his hand to the
+first lieutenant, who hastily applied to him the style (not royal)
+of "a dirty beast," which not understanding, he smiled graciously,
+taking it as some compliment peculiar to the English.
+
+This farce over, I had now some time to look about me, and to refit my
+ship in one of the prettiest spots on earth, and as unlike a dock-yard
+as any thing could be.
+
+Mr. Brooke's then residence, although equally rude in structure with
+the abodes of the natives, was not without its English comforts of
+sofas, chairs, and bedsteads. It was larger than any of the others,
+but being, like them, built on piles, we had to mount a ladder to
+get into it. It was situated on the same side of the river (the
+right bank), next to, but rather in the rear of, the rajah's palace,
+with a clear space of about 150 yards between the back and the edge
+of the jungle. It was surrounded by palisades and a ditch, forming a
+protection to sheep, goats, pigeons, cats, poultry, geese, monkeys,
+dogs, ducks, and, occasionally, bullocks. The house consisted of but
+one floor. A large room in the center, neatly ornamented with every
+description of firearms, in admirable order and ready for use, served
+as an audience and mess-room; and the various apartments round it
+as bed-rooms, most of them comfortably furnished with matted floors,
+easy chairs, pictures, and books, with much more taste and attention
+to comfort than bachelors usually display. In one corner of the square
+formed by the palisades were the kitchen and offices. The Europeans
+with Mr. Brooke consisted of Mr. Douglas, formerly in the navy,
+a clever young surgeon, and a gentleman of the name of Williamson,
+who, being master of the native language, as well as active and
+intelligent, made an excellent prime minister. Besides these were two
+others, who came out in the yacht, one an old man-of-war's man, who
+kept the arms in first-rate condition, and another worthy character,
+who answered to the name of Charley, and took care of the accounts and
+charge of every thing. These were attended by servants of different
+nations. The cooking establishment was perfect, and the utmost harmony
+prevailed. The great feeding-time was at sunset, when Mr. Brooke
+took his seat at the head of the table, and all the establishment,
+as in days of yore, seated themselves according to their respective
+grades. This hospitable board was open to all the officers of the Dido;
+and many a jovial evening we spent there. All Mr. Brooke's party were
+characters--all had traveled; and never did a minute flag for want of
+some entertaining anecdote, good story, or song, to pass away the time;
+and it was while smoking our cigars in the evening that the natives,
+as well as the Chinese who had become settlers, used to drop in,
+and, after creeping up according to their custom, and touching the
+hand of their European rajah, retire to the further end of the room,
+and squat down upon their haunches, remain a couple of hours without
+uttering a word, and then creep out again. I have seen sixty or
+seventy of an evening come in and make this sort of salaam. All the
+Malays were armed; and it is reckoned an insult for one of them to
+appear before a rajah without his kris. I could not help remarking
+the manly, independent bearing of the half-savage and nearly naked
+mountain Dyak compared with the sneaking deportment of the Malay.
+
+The following little adventure was told me during my stay at Sarawak,
+by Dr. Treacher, who had lately joined Mr. Brooke, his former medical
+attendant having returned to England. It appears that Dr. Treacher
+received a message by a confidential slave that one of the ladies of
+Macota's harem desired an interview, appointing a secluded spot in
+the jungle as the rendezvous. The doctor, being aware of his own good
+looks, fancied he had made a conquest, and, having got himself up as
+showily as he could, was there at the appointed time. He described
+the poor girl as both young and pretty, but with a dignified and
+determined look, which at once convinced him that she was moved to
+take so dangerous a step by some deeper feeling than that of a mere
+fancy for his person. She complained of the ill treatment she had
+received from Macota, and the miserable life she led, and avowed that
+her firm resolve was to destroy (not herself, gentle creature! but)
+him; for which purpose she wanted a small portion of arsenic. It was
+a disappointment that he could not comply with her request; so they
+parted--he full of pity and love for her, and she, in all probability,
+full of contempt for a man who felt for her wrongs, but would not
+aid in the very simple means she had proposed for redressing them.
+
+While at Singapore, Mr. Whitehead had kindly offered to allow his
+yacht, the Emily, a schooner of about fifty tons, with a native crew,
+to bring our letters to Borneo, on the arrival at Singapore of the
+mail from England. About the time she was expected, I thought it
+advisable to send a boat to cruise in the vicinity of Cape Datu, in
+case of her falling in with any of these piratical gentry. The Dido's
+largest boat, the pinnace, being under repair, Mr. Brooke lent a large
+boat which he had had built by the natives at Sarawak, and called the
+Jolly Bachelor. Having fitted her with a brass six-pounder long gun,
+with a volunteer crew of a mate, two midshipmen, six marines, and
+twelve seamen, and a fortnight's provisions, I dispatched her under
+the command of the second lieutenant, Mr. Hunt; Mr. Douglas, speaking
+the Malayan language, likewise volunteered his services. One evening,
+after they had been about six days absent, while we were at dinner,
+young Douglas made his appearance, bearing in his arms the captured
+colors of an Illanun pirate. It appears that the day after they had
+got outside they observed three boats a long way in the offing, to
+which they gave chase, but soon lost sight of them, owing to their
+superior sailing. They, however, appeared a second and a third time,
+after dark, but without the Jolly Bachelor being able to get near
+them; and it now being late, and the crew both fatigued and hungry,
+they pulled inshore, lighted a fire, cooked their provisions,
+and then hauled the boat out to her grapnel, near some rocks, for
+the night; lying down to rest with their arms by their sides, and
+muskets round the mast, ready loaded. Having also placed sentries and
+look-out men, and appointed an officer of the watch, they one and all
+(sentries included, I suppose), owing to the fatigues of the day,
+fell asleep! At about three o'clock the following morning, the moon
+being just about to rise, Lieut. Hunt happening to be awake, observed
+a savage brandishing a kris, and performing his war-dance on the bit
+of deck, in an ecstasy of delight, thinking, in all probability, of
+the ease with which he had got possession of a fine trading-boat, and
+calculating the cargo of slaves he had to sell, but little dreaming of
+the hornets' nest into which he had fallen. Lieut. Hunt's round face
+meeting the light of the rising moon, without a turban surmounting it,
+was the first notice the pirate had of his mistake. He immediately
+plunged overboard; and before Lieut. Hunt had sufficiently recovered
+his astonishment to know whether he was dreaming or not, or to rouse
+his crew up, a discharge from three or four cannon within a few yards,
+and the cutting through the rigging by the various missiles with which
+the guns were loaded, soon convinced him there was no mistake. It
+was as well the men were still lying down when this discharge took
+place, as not one of them was hurt; but on jumping to their legs,
+they found themselves closely pressed by two large war-prahus,
+one on each bow. To return the fire, cut the cable, man the oars,
+and back astern to gain room, was the work of a minute; but now came
+the tug of war; it was a case of life and death. Our men fought as
+British sailors ought to do; quarter was not expected on either side;
+and the quick and deadly aim of the marines prevented the pirates from
+reloading their guns. The Illanun prahus are built with strong bulwarks
+or barricades, grape-shot proof, across the fore part of the boat,
+through which ports are formed for working the guns; these bulwarks
+had to be cut away by round shot from the Jolly Bachelor before the
+musketry could bear effectually. This done, the grape and canister
+told with fearful execution. In the mean time, the prahus had been
+pressing forward to board, while the Jolly Bachelor backed astern; but,
+as soon as this service was achieved, our men dropped their oars, and,
+seizing their muskets, dashed on: the work was sharp, but short, and
+the slaughter great. While one pirate boat was sinking, and an effort
+made to secure her, the other effected her escape by rounding the point
+of rocks, where a third and larger prahu, hitherto unseen, came to her
+assistance, and putting fresh hands on board, and taking her in tow,
+succeeded in getting off, although chased by the Jolly Bachelor, after
+setting fire to the crippled prize, which blew up and sunk before the
+conquerors got back to the scene of action. While there, a man swam off
+to them from the shore, who proved to be one of the captured slaves,
+and had made his escape by leaping overboard during the fight. The
+three prahus were the same Illanun pirates we had so suddenly come
+upon off Cape Datu in the Dido, and they belonged to the same fleet
+that Lieut. Horton had chased off the Island of Marundum. The slave
+prisoner had been seized, with a companion, in a small fishing canoe,
+off Borneo Proper; his companion suffered in the general slaughter. The
+sight that presented itself on our people boarding the captured boat
+must indeed have been a frightful one. None of the pirates waited on
+board for even the chance of receiving either quarter or mercy, but
+all those capable of moving had thrown themselves into the water. In
+addition to the killed, some lying across the thwarts, with their
+oars in their hands, at the bottom of the prahu, in which there was
+about three feet of blood and water, were seen protruding the mangled
+remains of eighteen or twenty bodies. During my last expedition I
+fell in with a slave belonging to a Malay chief, one of our allies,
+who informed us that he likewise had been a prisoner, and pulled an
+oar in one of the two prahus that attacked the Jolly Bachelor; that
+none of the crew of the captured prahu reached the shore alive, with
+the exception of the lad that swam off to our people; and that there
+were so few who survived in the second prahu, that, having separated
+from their consort during the night, the slaves, fifteen in number,
+rose and put to death the remaining pirates, and then ran the vessel
+into the first river they reached, which proved to be the Kaleka, where
+they were seized, and became the property of the governing Datu; and
+my informant was again sold to my companion, while on a visit to his
+friend the Datu. Each of the attacking prahus had between fifty and
+sixty men, including slaves, and the larger one between ninety and
+a hundred. The result might have been very different to our gallant
+but dosy Jolly Bachelors.
+
+I have already mentioned the slaughter committed by the fire of the
+pinnace, under Lieutenant Horton, into the largest Malay prahu; and
+the account given of the scene which presented itself on the deck of
+the defeated pirate, when taken possession of, affords a striking
+proof of the character of these fierce rovers; resembling greatly
+what we read of the Norsemen and Scandinavians of early ages. Among
+the mortally wounded lay the young commander of the prahu, one of
+the most noble forms of the human race; his countenance handsome
+as the hero of Oriental romance, and his whole bearing wonderfully
+impressive and touching. He was shot in front and through the lungs,
+and his last moments were rapidly approaching. He endeavored to speak,
+but the blood gushed from his mouth with the voice he vainly essayed
+to utter in words. Again and again he tried, but again and again
+the vital fluid drowned the dying effort. He looked as if he had
+something of importance which he desired to communicate, and a shade
+of disappointment and regret passed over his brow when he felt that
+every essay was unavailing, and that his manly strength and daring
+spirit were dissolving into the dark night of death. The pitying
+conquerors raised him gently up, and he was seated in comparative
+ease, for the welling out of the blood was less distressing; but the
+end speedily came: he folded his arms heroically across his wounded
+breast, fixed bis eyes upon the British seamen around, and, casting
+one last glance at the ocean--the theater of his daring exploits,
+on which he had so often fought and triumphed--expired without a sigh.
+
+The spectators, though not unused to tragical and sanguinary sights,
+were unanimous in speaking of the death of the pirate chief as the
+most affecting spectacle they had ever witnessed. A sculptor might have
+carved him as an Antinous in the mortal agonies of a Dying Gladiator.
+
+The leaders of the piratical prahus are sometimes poetically addressed
+by their followers as _Matari_, i. e., the sun; or _Bulan_, the moon;
+and from his superiority in every respect, physical and intellectual,
+the chief whose course was here so fatally closed seemed to be worthy
+of either celestial name.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI.
+
+    The Rajah's letter to Captain Keppel, and his reply.--Prepares
+    for an expedition against the Sarebus pirates.--Pleasure
+    excursion up the river.--The Chinese settlement.--The Singe
+    mountain.--Interior of the residences.--Dyak festival of
+    Maugut.--Relics.--Sporting.--Return to Sarawak.--The expedition
+    against Sarebus.--State and number of the assailing force.--Ascent
+    of the river.--Beauty of the scenery.
+
+
+_May 21st._--I received intimation that the rajah had written a letter,
+and wished me to appoint a time and place, that it might be presented
+in due form. Accordingly I attended in Mr. Brooke's hall of audience on
+the following day, where I found collected all the chiefs, and a crowd
+of natives, many of them having already been informed that the said
+letter was a requisition for me to assist in putting down the hordes
+of pirates who had so long infested the coast. I believe many of those
+present, especially the Borneons, to have been casually concerned,
+if not deeply implicated, in some of their transactions. After I had
+taken my seat with Mr. Brooke at the head of the table, the rajah's
+sword-bearers entered, clearing the way for the huge yellow canopy,
+under the shade of which, on a large brass tray, and carefully sewn
+up in a yellow silk bag, was the letter, from which it was removed,
+and placed in my hands by the Pangeran Budrudeen. I opened the bag
+with my knife, and giving it to an interpreter, he read it aloud
+in the Malayan tongue. It was variously received by the audience,
+many of whose countenances were far from prepossessing.
+
+The following is a copy of the letter, to which was affixed the
+rajah's seal:
+
+
+    "This friendly epistle, having its source in a pure mind,
+    comes from Rajah Muda Hassim, next in succession to the royal
+    throne of the kingdom of Borneo, and who now holds his court at
+    the trading city of Sarawak, to our friend Henry Keppel, head
+    captain of the war-frigate belonging to her Britannic Majesty,
+    renowned throughout all countries--who is valiant and discreet,
+    and endowed with a mild and gentle nature:
+
+    "This is to inform our friend that there are certain great pirates,
+    of the people of Sarebus and Sakarran, in our neighborhood,
+    seizing goods and murdering people on the high seas. They have
+    more than three hundred war-prahus, and extend their ravages even
+    to Banjarmassim; they are not subject to the government of Bruni
+    (Borneo); they take much plunder from vessels trading between
+    Singapore and the good people of our country.
+
+    "It would be a great service if our friend would adopt measures
+    to put an end to these piratical outrages.
+
+    "We can present nothing better to our friend than a kris, such
+    as it is.
+
+    "20th day of Rahial Akhir, 1257."
+
+
+To which I sent the following reply:--
+
+
+    "Captain Keppel begs to acknowledge the receipt of the Rajah
+    Muda Hassim's letter, representing that the Dyaks of Sarebus and
+    Sakarran are the pirates who infest the coast of Borneo, and do
+    material damage to the trade of Singapore.
+
+    "Captain Keppel will take speedy measures to suppress these and
+    all other pirates, and feels confident that her Britannic Majesty
+    will be glad to learn that the Rajah Muda Hassim is ready to
+    cooeperate in so laudable an undertaking."
+
+
+Not being prepared for the oriental fashion of exchanging presents,
+I had nothing to offer to his rajahship; but I found out afterward
+that Mr. Brooke had (unknown to me) sent him a clock in my name. The
+royal kris was handsome, the handle of carved ivory, with a good deal
+of gold about it.
+
+This information about the pirates gave me good ground to make a
+beginning; and having arranged with Mr. Brooke to obtain all necessary
+intelligence relative to their position, strength, and numbers, [16]
+I determined on attacking them in their strongholds, commencing with
+the Sarebus, who, from all accounts, were by far the most strongly
+fortified. Mr. Brooke accepted my invitation to accompany us, as well
+as to supply a native force of about three hundred men, who, should
+we succeed in the destruction of the pirate forts, would be useful in
+the jungle. Mr. Brooke's going to join personally in a war against (in
+the opinion of the Datus) such formidable opponents as the Sakarran and
+Sarebus pirates--who had never yet been conquered, although repeatedly
+attacked by the united forces of the surrounding rajahs--was strongly
+opposed by the chiefs. On his informing them that he should go, but
+leaving it optional whether they would accompany him or not, their
+simple reply was, "What is the use of our remaining? If you die,
+we die; and if you live, we live; we will go with you." Preparations
+for the expedition were accordingly commenced.
+
+No place could have suited us better for a refit. Within a few yards
+of the ship was a Chinese workshop. Our boats were hauled up to repair
+under sheds, and we drew our fresh water alongside; and while the
+Dido was at Sarawak, Mr. Jago, the carpenter, built a very beautiful
+thirty-foot gig, having cut the plank up in the Chinaman's sawpit.
+
+While these works were in progress, I accompanied Mr. Brooke up the
+river. The Royalist having been dispatched to Singapore with our
+letters, we started on our pleasure-excursion. With the officers
+from the Dido and the chiefs, who always accompany the "Tuan Besar,"
+we mustered about sixty persons; and with our guns, walking-sticks,
+cigars, and a well supplied commissariat, determined to enjoy
+ourselves.
+
+We were not long in making the acquaintances of the chiefs. Men
+who had formerly rebelled, who were conquered by Mr. Brooke, and
+had their (forfeited) lives saved, their families restored to them,
+and themselves finally reinstated in the offices they had previously
+held--these men were very naturally and faithfully attached. Our young
+gentlemen found their Malayan names difficult to remember, so that the
+gallant old Patingi Ali was seldom called any other name than that of
+"Three-Fingered Jack," from his having lost part of his right hand;
+the Tumangong was spoken of as the "Father of Hopeful," from one of
+his children, a fine little fellow, whom he was foolishly attached to,
+and seldom seen without.
+
+Der Macota, who had sometime before received the appellation of
+"the Serpent," had, ever since he got his orders to quit, some six
+months before, been preparing his boats, but which were ready in an
+incredibly short time after the Dido's arrival; and thus Mr. Brooke got
+rid of that most intriguing and troublesome rascal; a person who had,
+from the commencement, been trying to supplant and ruin him. He it was
+that gave the Sakarran pirates permission to ascend the river for the
+purpose of attacking the comparatively defenceless mountain Dyaks;
+and he it was that persecuted the unfortunate young Illanun chief,
+Si Tundo, even to his assassination. He was at last got rid of from
+Sarawak, but only to join and plan mischief with that noted piratical
+chief, Seriff Sahib; he, however, met his deserts.
+
+We ascended the river in eight or ten boats. The scene to us was
+most novel, and particularly fresh and beautiful. We stopped at an
+empty house on a cleared spot on the left bank during the ebb-tide,
+to cook our dinner; in the cool of the afternoon we proceeded with
+the flood; and late in the evening brought up for the night in a
+snug little creek close to the Chinese settlement. We slept in native
+boats, which were nicely and comfortably fitted for the purpose. At
+an early hour Mr. Brooke was waited on by the chief of the Kunsi;
+and on visiting their settlement he was received with a salute of
+three guns. We found it kept in their usual neat and clean order,
+particularly their extensive vegetable gardens; but being rather
+pressed for time, we did not visit the mines, but proceeded to the
+villages of different tribes of Dyaks living on the Sarambo mountain,
+numbers of whom had been down to welcome us, very gorgeously dressed
+in feathers and scarlet.
+
+The foot of the mountain was about four miles from the landing-place;
+and a number of these kind savages voluntarily shouldered our
+provisions, beds, bags, and baggage, and we proceeded on our march. We
+did not expect to find quite a turnpike-road; but, at the same time,
+I, for one, was not prepared for the dance led us by our wild cat-like
+guides through thick jungle, and alternately over rocky hills, or up
+to our middles in the soft marshes we had to cross. Our only means of
+doing so was by feeling on the surface of the mud (it being covered
+in most places about a foot deep with grass or discolored water)
+for light spars thrown along lengthwise and quite unconnected, while
+our only support was an occasional stake at irregular distances,
+at which we used to rest, as the spars invariably sunk into the mud
+if we attempted to stop; and there being a long string of us, many
+a fall and flounder in the mud (gun and all) was the consequence.
+
+The ascent of the hill, although as steep as the side of a house,
+was strikingly beautiful. Our resting-places, unluckily, were but few;
+but when we did reach one, the cool, fresh breeze, and the increasing
+extent and variety of scene--our view embracing, as it did, all the
+varieties of river, mountain, wood, and sea--amply repaid us for the
+exertion of the lower walk; and, on either hand, we were sure to have a
+pure cool rivulet tumbling over the rocks. While going up, however, our
+whole care and attention were requisite to secure our own safety; for
+it is not only one continued climb up ladders, but such ladders! They
+are made of the single trunk of a tree in its rough and rounded state,
+with notches, not cut at the reasonable distance apart of the ratlins
+of our rigging, but requiring the knee to be brought up to the level
+of the chin before the feet are sufficiently parted to reach from
+one step to another; and that, when the muscles of the thigh begin
+to ache, and the wind is pumped out of the body, is distressing work.
+
+We mounted, in this manner, some 500 feet; and it was up this steep
+that Mr. Brooke had ascended only a few months before, with two hundred
+followers, to attack the Singe Dyaks. He has already described the
+circular halls of these Dyaks, in one of which we were received,
+hung round, as the interior of it is, with hundreds of human heads,
+most of them dried with the skin and hair on; and to give them, if
+possible, a more ghastly appearance, small shells (the cowry) are
+inserted where the eyes once were, and tufts of dried grass protrude
+from the ears. But my eyes soon grew accustomed to the sight; and by
+the time dinner was ready (I think I may say _we_) thought no more
+about them than if they had been as many cocoa-nuts.
+
+Of course the natives crowded round us; and I noticed that with these
+simple people it was much the same as with the more civilized, and
+that curiosity was strongest in the gentler sex; and again, that the
+young men came in more gorgeously dressed, wearing feathers, necklaces,
+armlets, ear-rings, bracelets, beside jackets of various-colored silks,
+and other vanities--than the older and wiser chiefs, who encumbered
+themselves with no more dress than what decency actually required,
+and were, moreover, treated with the greatest respect.
+
+We strolled about from house to house without causing the slightest
+alarm: in all we were welcomed, and invited to squat ourselves on
+their mats with the family. The women, who were some of them very
+good-looking, did not run from us as the plain-headed Malays would have
+done; but laughed and chatted to us by signs in all the consciousness
+of innocence and virtue.
+
+We were fortunate in visiting these Dyaks during one of their grand
+festivals (called Maugut); and in the evening, dancing, singing,
+and drinking were going on in various parts of the village. In one
+house there was a grand _fete_, in which the women danced with the
+men. The dress of the women was simple and curious--a light jacket
+open in front, and a short petticoat not coming below the knees,
+fitting close, was hung round with jingling bits of brass, which kept
+"making music" wherever they went. The movement was like all other
+native dances--graceful, but monotonous. There were four men, two of
+them bearing human sculls, and two the fresh heads of pigs; the women
+bore wax-lights, or yellow rice on brass dishes. They danced in line,
+moving backward and forward, and carrying the heads and dishes in both
+hands; the graceful part was the manner in which they half turned the
+body to the right and left, looking over their shoulders and holding
+the heads in the opposite direction, as if they were in momentary
+expectation of some one coming up behind to snatch the nasty relic
+from them. At times the women knelt down in a group, with the men
+leaning over them. After all, the music was not the only thing wanting
+to make one imagine oneself at the opera. The necklaces of the women
+were chiefly of teeth--bears' the most common--human the most prized.
+
+In an interior house at one end were collected the relics of the
+tribe. These consisted of several round-looking stones, two deer's
+heads, and other inferior trumpery. The stones turn black if the
+tribe is to be beaten in war, and red if to be victorious; any one
+touching them would be sure to die; if lost, the tribe would be ruined.
+
+The account of the deer's heads is still more curious: A young Dyak
+having dreamed the previous night that he should become a great
+warrior, observed two deer swimming across the river, and killed
+them; a storm came on with thunder and lightning, and darkness
+came over the face of the earth; he died immediately, but came to
+life again, and became a rumah guna (literally a _useful house_)
+and chief of his tribe; the two deer still live, and remain to watch
+over the affairs of the tribe. These heads have descended from their
+ancestors from the time when they first became a tribe and inhabited
+the mountain. Food is always kept placed before them, and renewed from
+time to time. While in the circular building, which our party named
+"the scullery," a young chief (Meta) seemed to take great pride in
+answering our interrogatories respecting different skulls which we
+took down from their hooks: two belonged to chiefs of a tribe who had
+made a desperate defence; and judging from the incisions on the heads,
+each of which must have been mortal, it must have been a desperate
+affair. Among other trophies was half a head, the skull separated
+from across between the eyes, in the same manner that you would
+divide that of a hare or rabbit to get at the brain--this was their
+division of the head of an old woman, which was taken when another
+(a friendly) tribe was present, who likewise claimed their half. I
+afterward saw these tribes share a head. But the skulls, the account
+of which our informant appeared to dwell on with the greatest delight,
+were those which were taken while the owners were asleep--cunning with
+them being the perfection of warfare. We slept in their "scullery;"
+and my servant Ashford, who happened to be a sleep-walker, that
+night jumped out of the window, and unluckily on the steep side;
+and had not the ground been well turned up by the numerous pigs,
+and softened by rain, he must have been hurt.
+
+_May 25th._--Having returned to our boats, we moved up another branch
+of the river, for the purpose of deer-shooting, and landed under some
+large shady trees. The sportsmen divided into two small parties, and,
+under the guidance of the natives, went in search of game, leaving
+the remainder of the party to prepare dinner against our return.
+
+The distance we had to walk to get to our ground was what our guides
+considered nothing--some five miles through jungle; and one of the
+most distressing parts in jungle-walking is the having to climb over
+the fallen trunks of immense trees.
+
+A short time before sunset we came to a part of the jungle that
+opened on to a large swamp, with long rank grass about six feet high,
+across which was a sort of Dyak bridge. The guide having made signs
+for me to advance, I cautiously crept to the edge of the jungle; and
+after some little trouble, and watching the direction of his finger, I
+observed the heads of two deer, male and female, protruding just above
+the grass at about sixty yards' distance. From the manner the doe was
+moving about her long ears, it had, to my view, all the appearance of a
+rabbit. Shooting for the pot, I selected her. As soon as I fired, some
+of my boat's crew made a dash into the grass; and in an instant three
+of them were nearly up to their chins in mud and water, and we had
+some difficulty in dragging them out: Our Malay guide more knowingly
+crossed the bridge; and being acquainted with the locality, reached the
+deer from the opposite side, taking care to utter a prayer and cut the
+throat with the head in the direction of the Prophet's tomb at Mecca,
+without which ceremony no true follower of Islam could partake of the
+meat. The doe was struck just below the ear; and my native companion
+appeared much astonished at the distance and deadly effect with which
+my smooth-bored _Westley Richards_ had conveyed the ball.
+
+The buck had got off before the smoke had cleared sufficiently for me
+to see him. From what I had heard, I was disappointed at not seeing
+more game. The other party had not killed anything, although they
+caught a little fawn, having frightened away the mother.
+
+My time was so occupied during my stay in Borneo, that I am unable
+to give any account of the sport to be found in the island. Neither
+had Mr. Brooke seen much of it; unless an excursion or two he had
+made in search of new specimens of the ourang-outang, or mias, may
+be brought under that head. This excursion he performed not only
+with the permission and under the protection, but as the guest,
+of the piratical chief Seriff Sahib; little thinking that, in four
+years afterward, he would himself, as a powerful rajah, be the cause
+of destroying his town, and driving him from the country.
+
+So much for sporting. The pleasure, I believe, increases in
+proportion to the risk. But, while on the subject, I may mention
+that of pig-shooting, which I found an amusement not to be despised,
+especially if you approach your game before life is extinct. The jaws
+are long, tusks also, and sharp as a razor; and when once wounded,
+the animals evince a strong inclination to return the compliment:
+they are active, cunning, and very fast. I shot several at different
+times. The natives also describe a very formidable beast, the size of
+a large bullock, found farther to the northward, which they appear to
+hold in great dread. This I conceive to be a sort of bison; and if so,
+the sporting in Borneo altogether is not so bad.
+
+The following day we went to other ground for deer; but the Dyaks had
+now enjoyed peace so long that the whole country was in a state of
+cultivation; and after scrambling over tracts of wild-looking country,
+in which Mr. Brooke, two years before, had seen the deer in hundreds,
+we returned to our boats, and down the river to Sarawak.
+
+We now began to prepare in earnest for work of another sort. The
+news of our intended attack on the Sarebus pirates had soon reached
+them, and spread all over the country; and we had daily accounts of
+the formidable resistance they intended to make. By the 4th July
+our preparations were complete, and the ship had dropped down to
+the mouth of the river. I forgot to mention that all the adjoining
+seriffs had, in the greatest consternation, sent me assurances
+of their future good intentions. Seriff Jaffer, who lived with an
+industrious but warlike race of Dyaks up the Linga river, a branch
+of the Batang Lupar, had never been known to commit piracy, and had
+been frequently at war with both the Sarebus and Sakarrans, offered
+to join our expedition. From Seriff Sahib, who lived up a river at
+Sadong, adjoining the Sarebus territory, and to whom the "Serpent"
+Macota had gone, Mr. Brooke and myself had invitations to partake of
+a feast on our way to the Sarebus river. This was accompanied with a
+present of a couple of handsome spears and a porcupine, and also an
+offer to give up the women and children he had, with the assistance of
+the Sakarran pirates, captured from the poor Sow Dyaks up the Sarawak.
+
+Farther to the eastward, and up the Batang Lupar, into which the
+Sakarran runs, lived another powerful seriff by the name of Muller,
+elder brother and coadjutor of Seriff Sahib. These all, however,
+through fear at the moment, sent in submissive messages; but their
+turn had not yet come, and we proceeded toward the Sarebus.
+
+The island of Burong, off which the Dido was to remain at anchor, we
+made the first place of rendezvous. The force from the Dido consisted
+of her pinnace, two cutters, and a gig; beside which Mr. Brooke lent us
+his native-built boat, the Jolly Bachelor, carrying a long six-pounder
+brass gun and thirty of our men; also a large tope of thirty-five tons,
+which carried a well-supplied commissariat, as well as ammunition.
+
+The native force was extensive; but I need only mention the names of
+those from Sarawak. The three chiefs (the Tumangong and two Patingis,
+Gapoor and Ali) had two large boats, each carrying about 180 men. Then
+there was the rajah's large, heavy boat, with the rascally Borneons
+and about 40 men, and sundry other Sarawak boats; and, beside,
+a Dyak force of about 400 men from the different tribes of Lundu,
+Sow, Singe, &c. Of course, it caused some trouble to collect this
+wild, undisciplined armament, and two or three successive points of
+rendezvous were necessary; and it was the morning of the 8th before
+we entered the river. Lieutenant Wilmot Horton was to command the
+expedition; with him, in the pinnace, were Mr. W. L. Partridge, mate;
+Dr. Simpson, assistant-surgeon; Mr. Hallowes, midshipman; 14 seamen,
+and 5 marines. In the first cutter was Mr. D'Aeth, Mr. Douglas,
+from Sarawak, and Mr. Collins, the boatswain; in the second cutter,
+Mr. Elliott, the master, and Mr. Jenkins, midshipman. The Jolly
+Bachelor was commanded by Lieutenant Tottenham, and Mr. Comber,
+midshipman, with Mr. Brooke's medical friend, Dr. Treacher, and an
+amateur gentleman, Mr. Ruppel, from Sarawak. The force from the
+Dido was about 80, officers and men. The command of the boats,
+when sent away from a man-of-war, is the perquisite of the first
+lieutenant. My curiosity, however, would not allow me to resist the
+temptation of attending the party in my gig; and I had my friend
+Mr. Brooke as a companion, who was likewise attended by a sampan and
+crew he had taken with him to Sarawak from Singapore. His coxswain,
+Seboo, we shall all long remember: he was civil only to his master,
+and, I believe, brave while in his company. He was a stupid-looking
+and powerfully-built sort of savage, always praying, eating, smiling,
+or sleeping. When going into action, he always went down on his knees
+to pray, holding his loaded musket before him. He was, however, a
+curious character, and afforded us great amusement--took good care
+of himself and his master, but cared for no one else.
+
+In the second gig was Lieutenant E. Gunnell, whose troublesome duty it
+was to preserve order throughout this extensive musketoe fleet, and to
+keep the natives from pressing too closely on the rear of our boats--an
+office which became less troublesome as we approached the scene of
+danger. The whole formed a novel, picturesque, and exciting scene; and
+it was curious to contemplate the different feelings that actuated the
+separate and distinct parties--the odd mixture of Europeans, Malays,
+and Dyaks, the different religions, and the eager and anxious manner
+in which all pressed forward. The novelty of the thing was quite
+sufficient to excite our Jacks, after having been cooped up so long
+on board ship, to say nothing of the chance of a broken head.
+
+Of the Malays and Dyaks who accompanied us, some came from curiosity,
+some from attachment to Mr. Brooke, and many for plunder, but I
+think the majority to gratify revenge, as there were but few of the
+inhabitants on the north coast of Borneo who had not suffered more or
+less from the atrocities of the Sarebus and Sakarran pirates--either
+their houses burned, their relations murdered, or their wives and
+children captured and sold into slavery.
+
+We did not get far up the river the first day, as the tope was
+very slow, and carried that most essential part of all expeditions,
+the commissariat. Patingi Ali, who had been sent the day before to
+await the force in the mouth of the Sarebus, fell in with five or six
+native boats, probably on the look-out for us, to which he gave chase,
+and captured one, the rest retreating up the river.
+
+On the 9th June, 1843, we had got some thirty miles in the same
+direction; every thing was in order; and, as we advanced, I pulled
+from one end of my little fleet to the other, and felt much the same
+sort of pride as Sir William Parker must have experienced when leading
+seventy-five sail of British ships up the Yeang-tse Keang river into
+the very heart of the Celestial Empire. It rained hard; but we were
+well supplied with kajans, a mat admirably adapted to keep out the wet;
+and securely covered in, my gig had all the appearance of a native
+boat, especially as I had substituted paddles for oars. In this manner
+I frequently went a little in advance of the force; and on the 9th I
+came on a couple of boats, hauled close in under the jungle, apparently
+perfectly unconscious of my approach. I concluded them to be part
+of the small fleet of boats that had been chased, the previous day,
+in the mouth of the river; and when abreast of them, and within range,
+I fired from my rifle. The crews of each boat immediately precipitated
+themselves into the water, and escaped into the jungle. They were
+so closely covered in, that I did not see any one at first; but I
+found that my ball had passed through both sides of an iron kettle,
+in which they were boiling some rice. How astonished the cook must
+have been! On coming up, our Dyak followers dashed into the jungle
+in pursuit of the fugitives, but without success.
+
+We moved on leisurely with the flood-tide, anchoring always on the
+ebb, by which means we managed to collect our stragglers and keep the
+force together. Toward the evening, by the incessant sound of distant
+gongs, we were aware that our approach was known, and that preparations
+were making to repel us. These noises were kept up all night; and we
+occasionally heard the distant report of ordnance, which was fired,
+of course, to intimidate us. During the day, several deserted boats
+were taken from the banks of the river and destroyed, some of them
+containing spears, shields, and ammunition, with a few fire-arms.
+
+The place we brought up at for the night was called Boling; but here
+the river presented a troublesome and dangerous obstacle in what is
+called the bore, caused by the tide coming in with a tremendous rush,
+as if an immense wave of the sea had suddenly rolled up the stream,
+and, finding itself confined on either side, extended across,
+like a high bank of water, curling and breaking as it went, and,
+from the frightful velocity with which it passes up, carrying all
+before it. There are, however, certain bends of the river where the
+bore does not break across: it was now our business to look out for
+and gain these spots between the times of its activity. The natives
+hold them in great dread.
+
+From Boling the river becomes less deep, and not safe for large
+boats; so that here we were obliged to leave our tope with the
+commissariat, and a sufficient force for her protection, as we had
+received information that thirteen piratical boats had been some time
+cruising outside, and were daily expected up the river on their return,
+when our unguarded tope would have made them an acceptable prize. In
+addition to this, we were now fairly in the enemy's country: and for
+all we knew, hundreds of canoes might have been hid in the jungle,
+ready to lanch. Just below Boling, the river branches off to the
+right and left; that to the left leading to another nest of pirates
+at Pakoo, who are (by land) in communication with those of Paddi,
+the place it was our intention to attack first.
+
+Having provisioned our boats for six days, and provided a strong guard
+to remain with the tope, the native force not feeling themselves
+safe separated from the main body,--we started, a smaller and more
+select party than before, but, in my opinion, equally formidable,
+leaving about 150 men. This arrangement gave but little satisfaction
+to those left behind, our men not liking to exchange an expedition
+where a fight was certain, for a service in which it was doubtful,
+although their position was one of danger, being open to attack
+from three different parts of the river. Our party now consisted of
+the Dido's boats, the three Datus from Sarawak, and some Sow Dyaks,
+eager for heads and plunder. We arrived at our first resting-place
+early in the afternoon, and took up a position in as good order as
+the small space would admit.
+
+I secured my gig close to the bank, under the shade of a large tree,
+at some little distance from the fleet of boats; and, by myself,
+contemplated my novel position--in command of a mixed force of
+500 men, some seventy miles up a river in the interior of Borneo;
+on the morrow about to carry all the horrors of war among a race of
+savage pirates, whose country no force had ever yet dared to invade,
+and who had been inflicting with impunity every sort of cruelty on
+all whom they encountered, for more than a century.
+
+As the sun went down, the scene was beautiful, animated by the variety
+and picturesque appearance of the native prahus, and the praying of
+the Mussulman, with his face in the direction of the Prophet's tomb,
+bowing his head to the deck of his boat, and absorbed in devotions from
+which nothing could withdraw his attention. For a time--it being that
+for preparing the evening meal--no noise was made: it was a perfect
+calm; and the rich foliage was reflected in the water as in a mirror,
+while a small cloud of smoke ascended from each boat, to say nothing of
+that from my cigar, which added much to the charm I then experienced.
+
+Late in the evening, when the song and joke passed from boat to boat,
+and the lights from the different fires were reflected in the water,
+the scenery was equally pleasing; but later still, when the lights
+were out, there being no moon, and the banks overhung with trees,
+it was so dark that no one could see beyond his own boat.
+
+A little after midnight, a small boat was heard passing up the river,
+and was regularly hailed by us in succession; to which they replied,
+"We belong to your party." And it was not until the yell of triumph,
+given by six or eight voices, after they had (with a strong flood-tide
+in their favor) shot past the last of our boats, that we found how
+we had been imposed on.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII.
+
+    Ascent of the river to Paddi.--Town taken and burnt.--Narrow
+    escape of a reinforcement of friendly Dyaks.--Night-attack by the
+    pirates.--Conference: they submit.--Proceed against Pakoo.--Dyak
+    treatment of dead enemies.--Destruction of Pakoo, and submission
+    of the pirates.--Advance upon Rembas.--The town destroyed: the
+    inhabitants yield.--Satisfactory effects of the expedition.--Death
+    of Dr. Simpson.--Triumphant return to Sarawak.
+
+
+_June 11th._--We moved on immediately after the passing up of the bore,
+the dangers of which appeared to have been greatly exaggerated. The
+beating of gongs and discharge of cannon had been going on the whole
+of the previous night.
+
+The scenery improved in beauty every yard that we advanced; but our
+attention was drawn from it by the increase of yelling as we approached
+the scene of action. Although as yet we had only heard our enemies,
+our rapid advance with a strong tide must have been seen by them from
+the jungle on the various hills which now rose to our view.
+
+Being in my gig, somewhat ahead of the boats, I had the advantage of
+observing all that occurred. The scene was the most exciting I ever
+experienced. We had no time for delay or consideration: the tide was
+sweeping us rapidly up; and had we been inclined to retreat then, we
+should have found it difficult. A sudden turn in the river brought us
+(Mr. Brooke was by my side) in front of a steep hill which rose from
+the bank. It had been cleared of jungle, and long grass grew in its
+place. As we hove in sight, several hundred savages rose up, and gave
+one of their war-yells: it was the first I had heard. No report from
+musketry or ordnance could ever make a man's heart feel so _small_
+as mine did at that horrid yell: but I had no leisure to think. I had
+only time for a shot at them with my double barrel, as they rushed
+down the steep, while I was carried past. I soon after heard the
+report of our large boat's heavy gun, which must have convinced them
+that we likewise were prepared.
+
+On the roof of a long building, on the summit of the hill, were several
+warriors performing a war-dance, which it would be difficult to imitate
+on such a stage. As these were not the forts we were in search of,
+we did not delay longer than to exchange a few shots in sweeping along.
+
+Our next obstacle was more troublesome, being a strong barrier right
+across the river, formed of two rows of trees placed firmly in the
+mud, with their tops crossed and secured together by ratans; and
+along the fork, formed by the crossing of the tops of these stakes,
+were other trees firmly secured. Rapidly approaching this barrier,
+I observed a small opening that might probably admit a canoe;
+and gathering good way, and putting my gig's head straight at it,
+I squeezed through. On passing it the scene again changed, and I had
+before me three formidable-looking forts, which lost not a moment in
+opening a discharge of cannon on my unfortunate gig. Luckily their
+guns were properly elevated for the range of the barrier; and, with
+the exception of a few straggling grape-shot that splashed the water
+round us, the whole went over our heads. For a moment I found myself
+cut off from my companions, and drifting fast upon the enemy. The banks
+of the river were covered with warriors, yelling and rushing down to
+possess themselves of my boat and its crew. I had some difficulty in
+getting my long gig round, and paddling up against the stream; but,
+while my friend Brooke steered the boat, my cockswain and myself
+kept up a fire with tolerable aim on the embrasures, to prevent, if
+possible, their reloading before the pinnace, our leading boat, could
+bring her twelve-pound carronade to bear. I was too late to prevent
+the pinnace falling athwart the barrier, in which position she had
+three men wounded. With the assistance of some of our native followers,
+the ratan-lashings which secured the heads of the stakes were soon cut
+through; and I was not sorry when I found the Dido's first cutter on
+the same side with myself. The other boats soon followed; and while
+the pinnace kept up a destructive fire on the fort, Mr. D'Aeth, who
+was the first to land, jumped on shore, with his crew, at the foot
+of the hill on the top of which the nearest fort stood, and at once
+rushed for the summit. This mode of warfare--this dashing at once
+in the very face of their fort--was so novel and incomprehensible
+to our enemies, that they fled, panic-struck, into the jungle; and
+it was with the greatest difficulty that our leading men could get
+even a snap-shot at the rascals as they went.
+
+That evening the country was illuminated for miles by the burning
+of the capital, Paddi, and adjacent villages; at which work, and
+plundering, our native followers were most expert.
+
+At Paddi the river branches off to the right and left; and it was on
+the tongue of land formed by them that the forts were very cleverly
+placed. We took all their guns, and burned the stockades level with
+the ground.
+
+The banks of the river were here so confined, that a man might with
+ease throw a spear across; and, as the jungle was close, it was
+necessary to keep pretty well on the alert. For the greater part of
+the night, the burning of the houses made it as bright as day. In
+the evening, Drs. Simpson and Treacher amputated a poor fellow's
+arm close to the shoulder, which, in the cramped space of the boat,
+was no easy operation. He was one of our best men, and captain of
+the forecastle on board the Dido.
+
+Early on the following morning (12th) our boats, with the exception
+of the Jolly Bachelor, now become the hospital, proceeded up the
+two branches of the river; almost all the native force remaining to
+complete the work of destruction.
+
+An accident had nearly occurred at this period. A report had reached
+us that several large boats--supposed to be a fleet of Sarebus pirates
+returning from a cruise--were in the river; and knowing that they could
+not well attack and pass our force at Boling without our hearing of
+it, I took no further notice of the rumor, intending to go down in
+my gig afterward and have a look at them. While we were at breakfast
+in the Jolly Bachelor, a loud chattering of many voices was heard,
+attended by a great beating of tom-toms; and suddenly a large prahu,
+crowded with savages, came sweeping round the bend of the river,
+rapidly nearing us with a strong flood-tide. As she advanced, others
+hove in sight. In a moment pots and spoons were thrown down, arms
+seized, and the brass six-pounder, loaded with grape and canister,
+was on the point of being fired, when Williamson, the only person who
+understood their character, made us aware that they were a friendly
+tribe of Dyaks, from the River Linga, coming to our assistance,
+or, more likely, coming to seek for plunder and the heads of their
+enemies, with whom they had for many years been at war. Those in
+the leading boat had, however, a narrow escape. I had already given
+the order to fire; but luckily the priming had been blown off from
+the six-pounder. Had it not been so, fifty at least out of the first
+hundred would have been sent to their long homes. They were between
+eight and nine hundred strong. The scene to me was indeed curious
+and exciting: for the wild appearance of these fellows exceeded any
+thing I had yet witnessed. Their war-dresses--each decorating himself
+according to his own peculiar fancy, in a costume the most likely
+at once to adorn the wearer and strike terror into the enemy--made
+a remarkable show. Each had a shield and a handful of spears; about
+one in ten was furnished with some sort of firearm, which was of more
+danger to himself or his neighbor than to any one else. They wore
+short padded jackets, capable of resisting the point of a wooden spear.
+
+The first thing necessary was to supply each with a strip of white
+calico, to be worn in the head-dress as a distinguishing mark, to
+prevent our people knocking them over if met by accident while prowling
+about the jungle. We also established a watchword, "Datu," which many
+of them, who had great dread of the white men, never ceased to call
+out. Sheriff Jaffer, in command of their force, had promised to join
+us from the beginning; but as they did not make their appearance off
+the mouth of the river, we thought no more of them. It was necessary
+to dispatch messengers up the rivers to inform our boats of this
+re-enforcement, as in all probability an attack would have been made
+immediately on the appearing in sight of so formidable a force.
+
+At 10 A.M. our boats returned, having gone up the right-hand branch
+as far as it was practicable. That to the left having been obstructed
+by trees felled across the stream, was considered, from the trouble
+taken to prevent our progress, to be the branch up which the enemy
+had retreated, and not being provisioned for more than the day,
+they came back, and started again in the afternoon with the first
+of the flood-tide. Of this party Lieutenant Horton took charge,
+accompanied by Mr. Brooke. It was a small, but an effective, and
+determined, and well-appointed little body, not likely to be deterred
+by difficulties. A small native force of about forty men accompanied
+them, making, with our own, between eighty and ninety people. The
+forts having been destroyed, no further obstacles were expected
+to our advance beyond the felling of trees and the vast odds as to
+numbers in case of attack, the pirates being reckoned to be about
+six thousand Dyaks and five hundred Malays.
+
+The evening set in with rain and hazy weather. Our native skirmishing
+parties were returning to their boats and evening meals; our
+advancing party had been absent about an hour and a half, and I had
+just commenced a supper in the Jolly Bachelor on ham and poached eggs,
+when the sound of the pinnace's twelve-pounder carronade broke through
+the stillness of the night. This was responded to by one of those
+simultaneous war-yells apparently from every part of the country. My
+immediate idea was that our friends had been surrounded. It was
+impossible to move so large a boat as the Jolly Bachelor up to their
+assistance; nor would it be right to leave our wounded without a
+sufficient force for their protection. I immediately jumped into my
+gig, taking with me a bugler, whom I placed in the bow, and seeing
+our arms in as perfect readiness as the rain would allow us to keep
+them in, I proceeded to join the combatants.
+
+Daylight had disappeared, as it does in tropical climates, immediately
+after the setting of the sun. The tide had just turned against me;
+and as I advanced up the river, the trees hung over many parts,
+nearly meeting across; at the same time the occasional firing that
+was kept up assured me that the enemy were on the alert, and with all
+the advantages of local knowledge and darkness on their side. From
+the winding of the stream, too, the yells appeared to come from every
+direction, sometimes ahead and sometimes astern. I had pulled, feeling
+my way, for nearly two hours, when a sudden and quick discharge of
+musketry, well on my left hand, intimated to me that I was approaching
+the scene of action; and, at the same time, passing several large
+canoes hauled up on the bank, I felt convinced that my anticipation
+was right, that our party were surrounded, and that we should have to
+fight our way to each other. My plan was to make it appear as if I was
+bringing up a strong re-enforcement; and the moment the firing ceased,
+I made the bugler strike up "Rory O'More," which was immediately
+responded to by three British cheers, and then followed a death-like
+stillness--if any thing, more unpleasant than the war-yell--and I
+could not help feeling certain that the enemy lay between us.
+
+The stream now ran rapidly over loose stones. Against the sky, where
+the jungle had been cleared, I could distinctly see the outlines of
+human beings. I laid my double-barrel across my knees, and we pulled
+on. When within shot-range, I hailed, to make certain, and receiving
+no answer, after a second time, I fired, keeping the muskets of the
+gig's crew ready to repel the first attack in case the enemy did not
+decamp. My fire was answered by Lieutenant Horton, "We are here,
+sir." At first I was much distressed from the fear that I might
+have hurt any one. They had not heard me hail, owing, I suppose,
+to the noise of the water rushing over the stones; and they had not
+hailed me, thinking that I must of course know that it was them, and
+the enemy being in the jungle all round, they did not like to attract
+attention to where they were. I found they had taken up a very clever
+position. The running stream had washed the ground away on the right
+bank, leaving a sort of little, deep bay, just big enough to hold
+the boats, from which the bank rose quite perpendicularly. On the
+top of this bank the jungle had been cleared for about thirty yards,
+and on this Lieutenant Gunnel, with seven royal marines, was posted
+as a rear-guard. This was an important position, and one of danger,
+as the jungle itself was alive with the enemy; and although the spears
+were hurled from it continually during the night, no shot was thrown
+away unless the figure of the pirate could be distinctly seen.
+
+It continued to rain: the men wore their great-costs for the purpose of
+keeping their pieces dry; and several times, during that long night,
+I observed the muskets of these steady and good men brought to the
+shoulder and again lowered without firing, as that part of the jungle
+whence a spear had been hurled to within a few feet of where they stood
+did not show a distinct form of any thing living. The hours were little
+less interesting for those who, in the boats below, stood facing the
+opposite bank of the river with their arms in their hands. It appears
+that the enemy had come down in great force to attack the boats from
+that side; and as the river was there very shallow, and the bottom
+hard, they could, by wading not more than knee-deep, have approached
+to within five or six yards of them; but in the first attack they had
+lost a great many men, and it is supposed that their repeated advances
+throughout the night were, more to recover their dead and wounded than
+to make any fresh attack on our compact little force, whose deadly aim
+and rapid firing must have astonished them, and who certainly were,
+one and all, prepared to sell their lives as dearly as possible.
+
+To the left of our position, and about 200 yards up the river, large
+trees were being felled during the night; and by the torch-lights
+showing the spot, the officer of the boat, Mr. Partridge, kept up
+a very fair ball-practice with the pinnace's gun. Toward morning a
+shot fell apparently just where they were at work; and that being
+accompanied by what we afterward ascertained caused more horror and
+consternation among the enemy than any thing else, a common signal
+sky-rocket, made them resign the ground entirely to us. The last shot,
+too, that was fired from the pinnace had killed three men.
+
+As daylight broke I found that most of our party had squatted down
+with their guns between their knees, and, being completely exhausted,
+had fallen asleep in spite of the rain. Few will ever forget that
+night. There were two natives and one marine only of our party badly
+wounded; the latter was struck by a rifle shot, which entered his
+chest and lodged in his shoulder; and this poor fellow, a gallant
+young officer named Jenkins, already distinguished in the Chinese
+war, volunteered to convey in the second gig, with four boys only,
+down to the Jolly Bachelor. He performed this duty, and was again up
+with the party before daylight.
+
+At daylight we found the pirates collecting in some force above us; and
+several shots were fired, as if to try the range of their rifles; but
+they took good care not to come within reach of our muskets. Shortly
+after, the tide beginning to rise, we made preparations for ascending
+further up the river. This was more than they bargained for, as we
+were close to where they had removed their families, with such little
+valuables as they could collect, when we so unexpectedly carried their
+forts and took possession of their town; and we were not sorry on
+observing, at that moment, a flag of truce advance from their party
+down the stream, and halt half way to our position. We immediately
+sent an unarmed Malay to meet them; and after a little talk, they
+came to our boats. The message was, that they were ready to abide by
+any terms we might dictate. I promised that hostilities should cease
+for two hours; but told them we could treat only with the chiefs,
+whose persons should be protected, and I invited them to a conference
+at 1 P.M.
+
+In the mean while, having first sent notice by the messengers, I
+took advantage of the time, and ascended in my gig, without any great
+difficulty, above the obstruction they had been so busy throwing across
+the river during the night. The news that hostilities were to cease
+was not long in being communicated; and, by the time I had got up,
+the greatest confidence appeared to be established. Having pulled up
+into shoal water, and where the river widened, the banks were soon
+covered with natives; and some seventy or eighty immediately laid
+aside their spears and walked off to my boat, the whole of which,
+together with its crew, they examined with the greatest curiosity.
+
+In the heat of the day we indulged in a most refreshing bath under
+the shade of overhanging trees, the bottom of the river being fine
+sand and pebbles worn smooth by the running stream.
+
+At the appointed hour the chiefs made their appearance, dressed in
+their best, but looking haggard and dejected. Mr. Brooke, the "Tuan
+Besar," or great man, officiated as spokesman.
+
+He fully explained that our invasion of their country, and destruction
+of their forts and town, was not for the purposes of pillage or gain
+to ourselves, but as a punishment for their repeated and aggravated
+acts of piracy; that they had been fully warned, for two years before,
+that the British nation would no longer allow the native trade between
+the adjacent islands and Singapore to be cut off and plundered,
+and the crews of the vessels cruelly put to death, as they had been.
+
+They were very humble and submissive; admitted that their lives were
+forfeited, and if we said they were to die, they were prepared;
+although, they explained, they were equally willing to live. They
+promised to refrain forever from piracy, and offered hostages for
+their good behavior.
+
+Mr. Brooke then explained how much more advantageous trade would be
+than piracy, and invited them to a further conference at Sarawak,
+where they might witness all the blessings resulting from the line
+of conduct he had advised them to follow. If, on the other hand,
+we heard of a single act of piracy being committed by them, their
+country should be again invaded and occupied; and their enemies,
+the whole tribe of Linga Dyaks, let loose upon them, until they were
+rooted out and utterly destroyed.
+
+To other questions they replied, that although the chief held
+communication, and was in the habit of cruising with the people
+of the other settlements of Pakoo and Rembas, still they could not
+hold themselves responsible for their good conduct; and as both held
+strongly fortified positions (of course supposed by themselves to be
+impregnable), they did not think that they would abstain altogether
+from piracy unless we visited and inflicted a similar chastisement
+to that they themselves had suffered. They also stated that, although
+they never would again submit to the orders of the great and powerful
+chiefs, Seriffs Sahib and Muller, still they could not join in any
+expedition against them or their old allies, their blood-thirsty and
+formidable neighbors in the Sakarran river.
+
+On our return to the still smoking ruins of the once picturesque town
+of Paddi, we found that Seriff Jaffer, with his 800 warriors, had
+not been idle. The country round had been laid waste. All had been
+desolated, together with their extensive winter-stores of rice. It
+was a melancholy sight; and, for a moment, I forgot the horrid acts
+of piracy and cruel murders of these people, and my heart relented
+at what I had done--it was but for a few minutes.
+
+Collecting our forces, we dropped leisurely down the river, but not
+without a parting yell of triumph from our Dyak force--a yell that
+must have made the hearts of those quail whose wives and children
+lay concealed in the jungle near to where we had held our conference.
+
+We arrived at Boling soon after midnight, where we found the tope,
+with our provision, quite safe. Several shots had been fired at her
+the night before; and large parties had repeatedly come down to the
+banks, and endeavored to throw spears on board.
+
+At daylight (Wednesday, 14th) we lost no time in completing to four
+days' provisions, and starting, with the flood-tide, for Pakoo. It
+took us until late in the evening before we appeared in sight of two
+newly-built stockades, from which the pirates fled, panic-struck,
+without firing a shot, on our first discharge. We had evidently come
+on them before they were prepared, as we found some of the guns in
+the forts with the slings still on by which they had been carried.
+
+The positions of the forts here, as at Paddi, were selected with great
+judgment; and had their guns been properly served, it would have been
+sharp work for boats. The same work of destruction was carried on;
+but the town was larger than at Paddi, and night setting in, the
+conflagration had a grand effect.
+
+Although the greater part of their valuables had been removed, the
+place was alive with goats and poultry, the catching of which afforded
+great sport for our men. Some of the Singe Dyaks succeeded in taking
+the heads of a few pirates, who probably were killed or wounded in
+the forts on our first discharge. I saw one body afterward without its
+head, in which each passing Dyak had thought proper to stick a spear,
+so that it had all the appearance of a huge porcupine.
+
+The operation of extracting the brains from the lower part of the
+skull, with a bit of bamboo shaped like a spoon, preparatory to
+preserving, is not a pleasing one. The head is then dried, with the
+flesh and hair on it, suspended over a slow fire, during which process
+the chiefs and elders of the tribe perform a sort of war-dance.
+
+Soon after daylight the following morning (Thursday, 15th) the chiefs
+of the tribe came down with a flag of truce, when much the same sort
+of conference took place as at Paddi. They were equally submissive,
+offering their own lives, but begging those of their wives and children
+might be spared. After promising to accede to all we desired, they
+agreed to attend the conference about to assemble at Sarawak, where
+the only terms on which they could expect lasting peace and mutual
+good understanding would be fully explained and discussed.
+
+Like their friends at Paddi, they were of opinion that their
+neighbors at Rembas would not abstain from piracy until they had
+received convincing proof that the power existed which was capable
+and determined to put down piracy. All these misguided people appeared
+not only to listen to reason, but to be open to conviction; and I am
+far from imputing to them that treachery so commonly attributed to
+all classes of Malays. The higher grades, I admit, are cunning and
+deceitful; but subsequent events during the last two years have proved
+the truth and honesty of the intentions of these people. They have
+strictly adhered to their promises; and have since, although surrounded
+by piratical tribes, been carrying on a friendly trade with Sarawak.
+
+Our next point of attack was Rembas. Although there was a nearer
+overland communication between those places, the distance by water was
+upward of sixty miles; but the strong tides were of great assistance,
+as we could always rest when they were against us. High water was the
+only time, however, that suited us for landing, as the fall of tide
+left a considerable space of soft mud to wade through before reaching
+_terra firma_: this was sufficiently unpleasant to our men, without the
+additional trouble of having to load and fire when in that position;
+besides, when stuck fast in the mud, you become a much easier object to
+be fired at. At Rembas the tide was not up until just before daylight;
+and, having no moon to light us, a night attack was not considered
+advisable; so that we brought up about a quarter tide below the town,
+on the evening of the 16th. As Rembas contained a larger proportion
+of Malays (who are always well supplied with firearms) than the other
+settlements, though we had not experienced any opposition at Pakoo,
+we fully expected they would here make a better stand.
+
+We advanced early in the morning, and soon came up with a succession
+of formidable barriers, more troublesome to cut through than any
+we had before encountered. About a mile below the town we landed
+700 of the Linga Dyaks on the left bank of the river, who were to
+separate into two divisions--commanded by Seriff Jaffer and his son,
+a remarkably fine and spirited youth--and creep stealthily through
+the jungle, for which the country was well adapted, so as to get
+to the rear of the town and forts, and make a simultaneous attack
+on the first shot being fired from our boats. The last barrier (and
+there were four of them) was placed just within point-blank range;
+the gig being a light boat, I managed to haul her over, close to the
+bank, and advanced so as to be both out of sight and out of range;
+and just as our first boat came up with the barrier, I pushed out
+from under the bank, and opened a fire of musketry on the stockade,
+which was full of men. This, with the war-yell that followed from
+their rear (both unexpected), together with their fears having been
+already worked upon by the destruction of Paddi and defeat of Pakoo,
+threw them into the greatest confusion. They fled in all directions,
+without provoking us by firing a shot, although we found the guns
+loaded. Seriff Jaffer and his Dyaks were gratified by having all
+the fighting to themselves, and by some very pretty hand-to-hand
+encounters. We were much amused, afterward, by their own account of
+the heroic deeds they had performed. Lives were lost on both sides,
+and heads taken. This Rembas was by far the largest and strongest place
+we had assaulted. We found some very large war-boats, both fitted and
+building; one measured ninety-two feet in length, with fourteen beam;
+and in addition to the usual good supply of fruit, goats, and poultry,
+our men were gratified by finding several bullocks. The plunder was
+great; and although, with the exception of the guns, of no value to
+us, it was very much so to our native followers.
+
+After we had destroyed every thing, we received a flag of truce,
+when similar explanations and promises were made as at Paddi and
+Pakoo; and here ended for the present, the warlike part of our
+expedition. The punishment we had inflicted was severe, but not
+more than the crime of their horrid piracies deserved. A few heads
+were brought away by our Dyak followers, as trophies; but there was
+no unnecessary sacrifice of life, and I do not believe there was
+a woman or child hurt. The destruction of these places astonished
+the whole country beyond description. In addition to the distance
+and difficulty of access to their strongly-fortified positions, they
+looked for protection from the bore that usually ran up the Sarebus,
+and which they imagined none but their own boats could manage. As the
+different Malay chiefs heard that, in ten days, a handful of white men
+had totally destroyed their strongholds, they shook their heads, and
+exclaimed, "God is great!" and the Dyaks declared that the Tuan Besar
+(Mr. Brooke) had charmed the river to quiet the bore, [17] and that
+the whites were invulnerable. Although this expedition would have a
+great moral effect on all the more respectable and thinking natives,
+inasmuch as the inhabitants of the places destroyed were looked upon,
+from the large proportion of Malays, as more civilized than their
+formidable and savage neighbors, the Dyaks inhabiting the Sakarran
+river; still, it was not to be supposed, when the settlements of Paddi,
+Pakoo, and Rembas could not be responsible for the good behavior of
+one another, that it was probable the severe lesson taught them would
+have any great effect on the Sakarrans.
+
+On regaining the tope at Boling, we found our assistant surgeon,
+Dr. Simpson, who had been left in charge of the sick, laid up with
+fever and ague. For conveniency's sake, the wounded men had been
+removed to a large native boat; and while the doctor was passing
+along the edge of the boat, his foot slipped, he fell overboard,
+and not being much of a swimmer, and a strong tide running, he was
+a good while in the water, though a native went after him. He had,
+for some time past, been in bad health; but the cold he then caught
+brought on inflammation in the lungs, under the effects of which he
+sank soon after our return to Singapore. Poor Simpson! he was not
+only clever in his profession, but endeared to us all by his kind
+and gentle manner, so grateful to the sick. There were few of us,
+while in China, who had not come under his hands, and experienced
+his tender, soothing, and unremitting attention.
+
+We now gave our native followers permission to depart to their
+respective homes, which they did loaded with _plunder_, usually, in
+India, called _loot_; ourselves getting under weigh to rejoin the Dido
+off the Island of Burong, and from thence we proceeded to the mouth
+of the Morotaba, where, leaving the ship, Mr. Brooke and I went in
+my boat, with two others in attendance, to take leave of the rajah,
+prior to my return to Singapore and China. Although the greater part
+of the native boats attached to the expedition had already arrived at
+Sarawak, the rajah had sent them back, some miles down the river, with
+as many others as he could collect, gorgeously dressed out with flags,
+to meet Mr. Brooke and myself, the heroes of the grandest expedition
+that had ever been known in the annals of Malayan history. Our
+approach to the grand city was, to them, most triumphant, although
+to us a nuisance. From the moment we entered the last reach, the
+saluting from every gun in the capital that could be fired without
+bursting was incessant; and as we neared the royal residence, the
+yells, meant for cheers, and the beating of gongs, intended to be a
+sort of "See, the conquering hero comes!" were quite deafening. The
+most minute particulars of our deeds, of course greatly exaggerated,
+had been detailed, long before our arrival, by the native chiefs, who
+were eye-witnesses; and when we were seated in the rajah's presence,
+the royal countenance relaxed into a smile of real pleasure as he
+turned his wondering eyes from Mr. Brooke to myself and back again. I
+suppose he thought a great deal of us, as he said little or nothing;
+and, as we were rather hungry after our pull, we were very glad to
+get away once more to Mr. Brooke's hospitable board, to which we did
+ample justice.
+
+My stay at Sarawak was but of short duration, as, before I had time to
+carry out the arrangements I had made to put down this horrid traffic,
+the Dido was, owing to some changes in the distribution of the fleet,
+recalled to China.
+
+As the tide would not suit for my return to the Dido until two
+o'clock the following morning, we sat up until that hour, when,
+with mutual regret, we parted. I had just seen enough of Borneo and
+my enterprising friend, Mr. Brooke, to feel the deepest interest in
+both. No description of mine can in any way give my readers a proper
+idea of the character of the man I had just then left; and however
+interesting his journal may appear in the reading, it is only by being
+in his company, and by hearing him advocate the cause of the persecuted
+inland natives, and listening to his vivid and fair description of
+the beautiful country he has adopted, that one can be made to enter
+fully into and feel what I would fain describe, but can not.
+
+We parted; and I did not then expect to be able so soon to return
+and finish what I had intended, viz., the complete destruction of
+the strongholds belonging to the worst among the pirate hordes, so
+long the terror of the coast, either by capturing or driving from
+the country the piratical Seriffs Sahib and Muller, by whose evil
+influence they had been chiefly kept up. From all that I had seen,
+the whole country appeared to be a large garden, with a rich and
+varied soil, capable of producing anything. The natives, especially
+the mountain Dyaks, are industrious, willing, inoffensive, although
+a persecuted race; and the only things wanted to make the country
+the most productive and happiest in the world were, the suppression
+of piracy, good government, and opening a trade with the interior,
+which could not fail of success. All these I saw partially begun;
+and I felt assured that with the assistance of a vessel of war, and
+the countenance only of the government, Mr. Brooke would, although
+slowly, yet surely, bring about their happy consummation.
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.
+
+    Captain Keppel sails for China.--Calcutta.--The Dido ordered to
+    Borneo again.--Arrival at Sarawak.--Effect of her presence at
+    Sarawak.--Great improvements visible.--Atrocities of the Sakarran
+    pirates.--Mr. Brooke's letter.--Captain Sir E. Belcher's previous
+    visit to Sarawak in the Samarang.--Coal found.--Second letter
+    from the Rajah Muda Hassim.--Expedition against the Sakarran
+    pirates.--Patusen destroyed.--Macota remembered, and his retreat
+    burnt.--Further fighting, and advance.--Ludicrous midnight alarm.
+
+
+_June 24th._--I reached the Dido at 8 o'clock, and immediately got
+under weigh. After remaining twenty-four hours to water at Singapore,
+I sailed for Hong Kong. My time, during the year that I was absent
+from Borneo, if not quite so usefully, was not unpleasantly passed. We
+lay a few months in the Canton river. In addition to having good
+opportunities of seeing the natives of China in their domestic state,
+I witnessed one of those most curious and extraordinary sights that
+occasionally occur during the winter months in the city of Canton,
+namely, a fire. The one I saw was about the most extensive that had
+ever been experienced; and the Dido's crew had the gratification of
+being of some assistance in the protection of British property. From
+China the Dido accompanied the commander-in-chief, in the Cornwallis,
+to the Spanish colony at Manilla, which is a place that few forget;
+and a short description of our visit there has been given in an
+interesting little work, written by Captain Cunynghame. On my return
+to Hong Kong, I had the gratification of receiving on board the Dido,
+Major-General Lord Saltoun and his staff, consisting of two old and
+esteemed friends of mine, Captain, now Major Arthur Cunynghame,
+his lordship's aid-de-camp, and Major Grant, of the 9th Lancers,
+who had been adjutant-general to the forces. A more agreeable cruise
+at sea I never experienced. We called at the island of Pinang, in the
+Malacca straits, on our way, where we again fell in with the admiral;
+and I was most agreeably surprised at meeting my friend Mr. Brooke,
+who had come on to Singapore to meet Sir William Parker, and had
+followed him up in the Wanderer, commanded by my friend Captain
+Henry Seymour,--that vessel, in company with the Harlequin, Captain
+the Hon. George Hastings, and the H. C. steamer Diana, having just
+returned from an expedition to Acheen, whither they had been dispatched
+by the commander-in-chief, to inquire into and demand redress for an
+act of piracy, committed on an English merchant-vessel. An account
+of the expedition has already been published. The pirates had made a
+desperate resistance, and several lives were lost, and many severely
+wounded on our side; among the latter was my friend Mr. Brooke (in the
+head and arm), for which I took the liberty of giving him a lecture
+on his rashness, he having quite sufficient ground for fighting over
+in his newly-adopted country. He was much pleased at the admiral's
+having promised that the Dido should return again to the Straits
+station as soon as she had completed her voyage to Calcutta.
+
+On the 11th March, 1844, we anchored off the grand City of Palaces,
+and well does it merit the name. We could not have, timed our
+visit better. The governor-general, the Earl of Ellenborough,
+was being _feted_ on his return from the frontiers, which _fetes_
+were continued on the arrival, a few days after ourselves, of the
+Cornwallis at Kedgeree, when the flag of Sir William Parker was shifted
+to the Dido. The admiral experienced the same style of hospitable
+entertainment that had previously been given to General Sir Hugh Gough
+on his return from the Chinese expedition. At Calcutta I was kindly
+invited by the "Tent Club," and introduced to that noble and most
+exciting of all field-sports, "Hog-hunting in India;" but with which
+the pleasures of the day did not cease. The subsequent convivial
+meeting was a thing not easily to be forgotten. Although under a
+tent pitched by the edge of the jungle, thirty miles from the city,
+none of the comforts of the house were wanting; there were the punkah
+and the hookah, those luxuries of the East, to say nothing of heaps
+of ice from the far West, which aided considerably the consumption of
+champagne and claret; and to better all these good things, every man
+brought with him the will and the power to please and to be pleased.
+
+A few days before my departure from Calcutta, the governor-general
+finding it necessary to send treasure to China, the admiral desired
+me to receive it on board. Although a welcome cargo, it delayed for a
+couple of months my return to Borneo. I found Mr. Brooke awaiting my
+arrival at Singapore; but as I could not then receive him on board,
+Captain Hastings took him over to Sarawak in the Harlequin.
+
+On arriving at Hong Kong, Rear-Admiral Sir T. Cochrane appointed
+Mr. Frederick Wade as first lieutenant, Lieutenant Wilmot Horton having
+been promoted to the rank of commander for his gallant defence when
+the Dido's boats were attacked by the very superior force of pirates
+off the island of Sirhassan.
+
+Having landed the treasure at Hong Kong, and completed stores and
+provisions, I sailed from Macao on the 21st June, and working down
+against the monsoon, arrived at Singapore on the 18th July. I here
+found letters from Mr. Brooke, stating that the Sakarrans had been
+out in great force; and although he was not aware of any danger to
+himself or his settlement, still, by coming over quickly, I might
+have a fair chance of catching and crushing them in the very act
+of piracy. I lost no time in preparing for another expedition. The
+government at Calcutta had become fully sensible of the necessity
+of protecting the native trade to Singapore, and had sent down the
+Phlegethon steamer, of light draught of water, and better adapted to
+service in the straits or rivers than any of her majesty's larger
+vessels. She was, moreover, fitted in every way for the peculiar
+service on which she was to be employed, with a zealous, experienced,
+and active commander, F. Scott, [18] as well as a fine enterprising
+set of young officers. I lost no time in making application for her
+to the resident counselor, Mr. Church (in the absence of Colonel
+Butterworth, the Governor of the Straits), who immediately placed
+her at my disposal; and with such means, I was anxious to commence
+operations as speedily as possible, leaving the Vixen and Wolverine
+to perform the other duties of the station.
+
+_Thursday, 25th July._--Sailed from Singapore, having dispatched
+the Phlegethon the previous night, with orders to rendezvous at the
+entrance to the Morotaba, which we entered in the evening of the 29th;
+and anchoring the ship inside the river, I went on in the steamer to
+within four miles of Sarawak, when I pulled up in my gig, accompanied
+by the Dido's pinnace, that I might, by firing her carronade as a
+signal, be enabled to give notice of our approach, not feeling myself
+quite secure from a shot from the forts, which were very judiciously
+placed so as to command the last reach approaching the town, as I
+knew that before Mr. Brooke's return they had been put in a state
+of defence, and a regular watch kept, by self-appointed officers,
+sleeping on their arms. I, however, got up without accident, in time
+to receive a hearty welcome, about daylight.
+
+Not expecting to revisit Borneo during the period that the ship had to
+run before completing her usual time of commission, it was gratifying
+for me to read in my friend's journal, alluding to my former visit;
+"I came myself in the Dido; and I may say that her appearance was
+the consummation of my enterprise." "The natives saw directly that
+there was a force to protect and to punish; and most of the chiefs,
+conscious of their evil ways, trembled; Muda Hassim was gratified,
+and felt that this power would exalt his authority both in Borneo and
+along the coast, and he was not slow in magnifying the force of the
+Dido. The state in which Captain Keppel and his officers visited the
+rajah all heightened the effect; and the marines and the band excited
+the admiration and the fears of the natives. I felt the rajah's hand
+tremble at the first interview; and not all the well-known command
+of countenance, of which the natives are masters, could conceal
+his emotion."
+
+Gentle reader, excuse my vanity if I continue a little further with
+my friend's journal, although it gets rather personal:
+
+"I believe the first emotion was anything but pleasurable; but Captain
+Keppel's conciliatory and kind manner soon removed any feeling of
+fear; and was all along of the greatest use to me in our subsequent
+doings. The first qualification, in dealing with a Malay, is a kind
+and gentle manner; for their habitual politeness is such that they
+are hurt by the ordinary _brusquerie_ of the European.
+
+"I shall not go over the chase of the three boats of the Balagnini
+pirates, or the attack made on the Dido's boats by the Sirhassan,
+people, except to remark, that in the latter case, I am sure Lieutenant
+Horton acted rightly in sparing their lives and property; for, with
+these occasional pirates, a severe lesson, followed by that degree of
+conciliation and pardon which shall best insure a correction of their
+vices, is far wiser and preferable to a course of undistinguishing
+severity."
+
+I found Sarawak much altered for the better, and the population
+considerably increased. Mr. Brooke had established himself in a
+new house built on a beautiful and elevated mound, from which the
+intriguing Macota had just been ejected on my first visit. Neat and
+pretty-looking little Swiss cottages had sprung up on all the most
+picturesque spots, which gave it quite a European look. He had also
+made an agreeable addition to his English society; and a magazine
+of English merchandise had been opened to trade with the natives,
+together with many other improvements.
+
+On the other hand, Seriff Sahib, not deterred, as I had anticipated
+he would be, by the example I made of his neighbors in the Sarebus,
+had taken measures for withdrawing from the adjoining river of Sadong,
+where he had been living in a comparatively unguarded state, and
+had, during the last nine months, been making busy preparations for
+fortifying himself at a place called Patusen, up the Batang Lupar. He
+had lately got things in a forward state, had called out a large
+fleet of Sakarrans as an escort; and being puffed up with his own
+power and importance, had thought proper to prolong the performance
+of his voyage, of about 100 miles, from his residence in Sadong
+to his fortified position at Patusen, for three weeks or a month,
+during which time he had dispatched small parties of his fleet, which
+consisted of upward of 150 war-prahus, on piratical excursions. These
+robbers had, in addition to their piracies on the high seas, scoured
+the coast in all directions, and committed the greatest atrocities,
+attended with some of the most cruel murders. One sample will be
+sufficient to show their brutal character:--A detachment of three of
+their boats, having obtained information that a poor Dyak family,
+belonging to a tribe in Mr. Brooke's territory, had come down from
+their mountain to cultivate a small portion of land nearer the coast,
+and, for their better security, had made their dwelling in the upper
+branches of a large tree on the outskirts of the forest, determined to
+destroy them. Their little children were playing in the jungle when
+the pirates were seen approaching the tree with their diabolical
+war-yells. As the poor man did not descend immediately on being
+summoned, he was shot; when other ruffians, to save their ammunition,
+mounted the tree, murdered the woman, and returned in triumph to their
+boats with the heads of both victims. The children, who had witnessed
+this from their hiding-places, succeeded in getting to Sarawak.
+
+Taking advantage of Mr. Brooke's unusually long absence, Sarawak itself
+was threatened, and open defiance hurled at any European force that
+should dare approach Patusen. Reports, too, had been industriously
+spread that Mr. Brooke never intended to return; and when he did
+get back to his home, he found the town guarded and watched like a
+besieged city. With his usual nerve and decision he withdrew his men
+from the forts, and sent to Seriff Sahib to inform him that he should
+suffer for his temerity.
+
+A letter I received from him is so characteristic, and gives so lively
+a description of these events, that I am tempted to print it.
+
+
+
+
+    "Sarawak, 26th May, 1844.
+
+    "My Dear Keppel,
+
+
+    "It is useless applying a spur to a willing horse; so I will only
+    tell you that there is plenty to do here, and the sooner you can
+    come the better for all of us, especially your poor friends the
+    Dyaks. Bring with you as much force as you can to attack Sakarran.
+
+    "The case stands thus:--Seriff Sahib, quite frightened at Sadong
+    since last year, enraged likewise at his loss of power and his
+    incapability of doing mischief, collected all the Sakarran Dyaks,
+    and was joined by many of the Dyaks of Sarebus and some Balows. He
+    likewise had a good many Malays, and bullied every one in his
+    vicinity. This force met at the entrance of the Sadong Delta, and
+    committed depredations. They were not less than 200 Dyak boats,
+    and some 15 or 20 armed Malay prahus, beside others. Just as
+    they were collected, the Harlequin appeared off the coast, and
+    had the Dido been with us, we might have _had them all_; but the
+    opportunity will never again occur. Seriff Sahib, with this force,
+    has started to-day for Sakarran, and I was not strong enough with
+    my eight native boats to attack him. It is really greatly to be
+    lamented, because we should most completely have crushed the head
+    of the snake. We must, however, make the best of it. It is his
+    intention, on his arrival at Sakarran, to fortify and wait for
+    our attack, and in the mean time to send out his Dyaks along the
+    coast and inland to such places as they dare venture to attack.
+
+    "Come then, my dear Keppel, for there is plenty to do for all
+    hands. I have ordered a gun-boat from Mr. Goldie, to make our
+    force stronger; and had I possessed such a one the day before
+    yesterday, I would have pulled away for the Sadong to-day.
+
+    "My regards to all. I still propose Pepper-Pot Hall for your
+    residence. I only wish I felt _quite sure_ that Fortune had it in
+    store that you would be here on your return from China. That dame,
+    however, seems to delight in playing me slippery tricks just at
+    present; and never was the time and tide so missed before, which
+    would have led to fortune, as the other day. All the queen's
+    ships and all the queen's men could not bring such a chance
+    together again.
+
+
+
+    "Ever, my dear Keppel, your sincere friend,
+
+
+    "J. Brooke.
+    "Captain the Hon. Henry Keppel."
+
+
+
+
+No one could have been more disappointed or have regretted more than
+my gallant friend Captain Hastings, that his orders did not admit of
+any delay, or of his attacking that redoubtable pirate Seriff Sahib,
+especially as he had a small score to settle with that kind of gentry,
+having had his first lieutenant, H. Chads, severely wounded in two
+places, and several men killed, in the affair at Acheen Head. It was,
+however, all for the best, as the few boats that the Harlequin could
+have sent would have stood but a poor chance against upward of 200
+war-prahus, all fitted and prepared for fight.
+
+On the 1st of August, with the Dido and Phlegethon at anchor off
+Sarawak, the warlike preparations were going on rapidly. I had saluted
+and paid my visit to Muda Hassim; he was delighted to see me again,
+and we went through the form of holding several conferences of war
+in his divan. He appears to be a good well-meaning man, well inclined
+toward the English, moderately honest, and, if roused, I daresay not
+without animal courage; and altogether, with the assistance of his
+clever younger brother, Budrudeen, a very fit person to govern that
+part of Borneo of which he is rajah.
+
+During my absence, Sarawak had been visited by H.M.S. Samarang,
+Captain Sir Edward Belcher, who had received directions to call on and
+communicate with Mr. Brooke. In dropping down the river the Samarang
+grounded on a long shelf of rocks, at the top of high water, and with
+the ebb-tide rolled over, filling with the succeeding flood. She was
+nearly a fortnight in this position, but was ultimately saved by the
+skill and almost unparalleled perseverance (aided by such assistance of
+men and spars as Mr. Brooke could afford) of her captain, officers,
+and crew--a feat that must have given the natives a good idea of
+what British seamen are capable of. This accident delayed for a
+short time a visit that was afterward made by Sir Edward Belcher,
+accompanied by Mr. Brooke, to Borneo Proper. A hurried inspection of
+the capabilities of that part of the coast took place; and the fact
+of there being coal on the island was ascertained.
+
+I received a second letter from Muda Hassim, of which the following
+is a translation:
+
+
+    "This comes from Pangeran Muda Hassim, Rajah of Borneo, to our
+    friend Captain Keppel, in command of her Britannic Majesty's ship.
+
+
+(After the usual compliments):
+
+
+    "We beg to let our friend Captain Keppel know, that the pirates
+    of Sakarran, whom we mentioned last year, still continue their
+    piracies by sea and land; and that many Malays, under Seriff Sahib,
+    who have been accustomed to send or to accompany the pirates
+    and to share in their spoils, have gone to the Sakarran river,
+    with a resolve of defending themselves rather than accede to our
+    wishes that they should abandon piracy.
+
+    "Last year Captain Belcher told the sultan and myself, that it
+    would be pleasing to the Queen of England that we should repress
+    piracy; and we signed an agreement, at his request, in which we
+    promised to do so; and we tell our friend of the piracies and evil
+    actions of the Sakarran people, who have, for many years past,
+    done much mischief to trade, and make it dangerous for boats to
+    sail along the coast; and this year many prahus, which wanted
+    to sail to Singapore, have been afraid. We inform our friend
+    Captain Keppel of this, as we desire to end all the piracy,
+    and to perform our agreement with the Queen of England."
+
+
+_Monday, 5th August, 1844_, being the morning fixed for the departure
+of our expedition against the Sakarran pirates, the Phlegethon steamer
+weighed at 8 o'clock, and proceeded down the river to await at the
+mouth the collection of our force. Among those who accompanied us from
+Sarawak was the Pangeran Budrudeen, the intelligent brother of the
+rajah already noticed. This was a great and unusual event in the royal
+family; and the departure from the rajah's wharf, which I viewed from
+Mr. Brooke's house, on the opposite bank of the river, was intended
+to be very imposing. The barge of state was decked out with banners
+and canopies; all the chiefs attended, with the Arab priest Mudlana
+at their head, and the barge pushed off amid the firing of cannon,
+and a general screech, invoking the blessing of Mahomet.
+
+Having seen the last boat off, Mr. Brooke and myself took our departure
+in the gig, when another and last farewell salute was fired from the
+rajah's wharf.
+
+Three hours brought us to the steamer, anchored off the fishing huts
+at the mouth of the river. Here we heard that a small boat from
+the enemy's country had, under the pretence of trading, just been
+in to spy into our force, but decamped again on the appearance of
+the steamer. We now all got fairly away together, the smaller boats
+keeping near the shoals in shore, while the steamer was obliged to make
+an offing some miles from the coast. From the masthead we distinctly
+made out the small boat that had left the mouth of the river before,
+both pulling and sailing in the direction of the Batang Lupar, up which
+the Sakarran country lies; and as it was desirable that the pirates
+should not get information of our approach, at dusk, being well in
+advance, and our auxiliary force following, I dispatched Mr. Brooke's
+Singapore sampan and one of the Dido's cutters in chase. At half-past
+nine we anchored in the stream within the entrance.
+
+We were fortunate at Sarawak in picking up two excellent and
+intelligent pilots, who had long known the whole river, and had
+themselves been several times forced to serve in the boats while on
+their piratical excursions.
+
+_Tuesday 6th._--With the flood-tide arrived all the well appointed
+and imposing little fleet, and with them the cutter and sampan with
+two out of the three men belonging to the boat of which they had
+been in chase; the third having been speared by Seboo, on showing a
+strong inclination to run a-muck in his own boat, _i. e._ to sell his
+life as dearly as he could. From these men we obtained information
+that Seriff Sahib was fully prepared for defence--that his harem had
+been removed--and that he would fight to the last. We also learned
+that Macota, better known among us by the name of the "Serpent," and
+often mentioned in Mr. Brooke's journal, was the principal adviser,
+in whose house the councils of war were generally held.
+
+We anchored, in the afternoon, off the mouth of the river Linga;
+and while there we dispatched a messenger to Seriff Jaffer to
+caution him against giving any countenance or support to either of
+the Seriffs Sahib and Muller, on whose punishment and destruction we
+were determined.
+
+The Batang Lupar, as far as this, is a magnificent river, from three to
+four miles wide, and, in most parts, from five to seven fathoms water.
+
+_Wednesday, 7th._--We weighed at daylight, but were obliged to anchor
+again before appearing in sight of Patusen, until the tide should
+rise sufficiently to enable us to pass a long flat shoal, over which,
+during the spring-tides, a bore rushes with frightful velocity.
+
+We now collected our boats, and made our arrangements as well as
+we could, for attacking a place we had not yet seen. We had now a
+little more difficulty in keeping our native force back, as many of
+those who had accompanied the expedition last year had gained so much
+confidence that the desire of plunder exceeded the feeling of fear.
+
+After weighing at 11, with a strong tide sweeping us up, we were not
+many minutes in coming in sight of the fortifications of Patusen; and
+indeed they were not to be despised. There were five of them, two not
+quite finished. Getting suddenly into six feet water, we anchored the
+steamer; not so formidable a berth, although well within musket-range,
+as we might have taken up had I been aware of the increasing depth
+of water nearer the town; but we approached so rapidly there was no
+time to wait the interpretation of the pilot's information.
+
+The Dido and Phlegethon's boats were not long in forming
+alongside. They were directed to pull in shore, and then attack the
+forts in succession; but my gallant first-lieutenant, Wade, who had
+the command, was the first to break the line, and pull directly in
+the face of the largest fort. His example was followed by the others;
+and dividing, each boat pulled for that which appeared to the officer
+in command to be the one most likely to make a good fight. The forts
+were the first to open fire on both steamer and boats, which was
+quickly and smartly returned. It is impossible to imagine a prettier
+sight than it was from the top of the Phlegethon's paddle-box. It was
+my intention to have fired on the enemy from the steamer, so as to
+draw their attention off the boats; but owing to the defective state
+of the detonating priming-tubes, the guns from the vessel did not go
+off, and the boats had all the glory to themselves.
+
+They never once checked in their advance; but the moment they touched
+the shore the crews rushed up, entering the forts at the embrasures,
+while the pirates fled by the rear.
+
+In this sharp and short affair we had but one man killed, poor John
+Ellis, a fine young man, and captain of the main-top in the Dido. He
+was cut in two by a cannon-shot while in the act of ramming home a
+cartridge in the bow-gun of the Jolly Bachelor. Standing close to
+poor Ellis at the fatal moment was a fine promising young middy,
+Charles Johnson, a nephew of Mr. Brooke's, who fortunately escaped
+unhurt. This, and two others badly wounded, were the only accidents
+on our side.
+
+Our native allies were not long in following our men on shore. The
+killed and wounded on the part of the pirates must have been
+considerable. Our followers got several heads. There were no fewer
+than sixty-four brass guns of different sizes, beside many iron,
+found in and about the forts: the latter we spiked and threw into
+the river. The town was very extensive; and after being well looted,
+made a glorious blaze.
+
+Our Sarawak followers, both Malays and Dyaks, behaved with the
+greatest gallantry, and dashed in under the fire of the forts. In
+fact, like their country, anything might be made of them under a good
+government; and such is their confidence in Mr. Brooke's judgment,
+and their attachment to his person, that he might safely defy in his
+own stronghold the attacks of any foreign power.
+
+After our men had dined, and had a short rest during the heat of the
+day, we landed our whole force in two divisions--and a strange but
+formidable-looking force they made--to attack a town situated about
+two miles up, on the left bank of a small river called the Grahan,
+the entrance to which had been guarded by the forts; and immediately
+after their capture the tide had fallen too low for our boats to get
+up. Facing the stream, too, was a long stockade; so that we determined
+on attacking the place in the rear, which, had the pirates only waited
+to receive us, would have caused a very interesting skirmish. They,
+however, decamped, leaving everything behind them. In this town we
+found Seriff Sahib's residence, and, among other things, all his
+curious and extensive wardrobe. It was ridiculous to see our Dyaks
+dressed out in all the finery and plunder of this noted pirate, whose
+very name, a few days previous, would have made them tremble. Goats
+and poultry there were in abundance. We likewise found a magazine
+in the rear of the seriff's house, containing about two tons of
+gunpowder; also a number of small barrels of fine powder, branded
+"Dartford," in exactly the same state as it had left the manufactory
+in England. It being too troublesome and heavy to convey on board
+the steamer, and each of our native followers staggering up to his
+knees in mud, under a heavy load of plunder, I had it thrown into the
+river. It was evident how determined the chief had been to defend
+himself, as, beside the defences already completed, eight others,
+in different states of forwardness, were in the course of erection;
+and had the attack been delayed a few weeks, Patusen would not have
+been carried by boats without considerable loss of life. It was the
+key to this extensive river; the resort of the worst of pirates; and
+each chief had contributed his share of guns and ammunition toward
+its fortification and defence.
+
+We returned to our boats and evening meal rather fatigued, but much
+pleased with our day's work, after ascending nearly seventy miles
+from the mouth of the river. The habitations of 5000 pirates had
+been burnt to the ground; four strong forts destroyed, together with
+several hundred boats; upward of sixty brass cannons captured, and
+about a fourth that number of iron spiked and thrown into the river,
+beside vast quantities of other arms and ammunition; and the powerful
+Seriff Sahib, the great pirate-patron for the last twenty years, ruined
+past recovery, and driven to hide his diminished head in the jungle.
+
+The 8th and 9th were passed in burning and destroying the rest of
+the straggling town, and a variety of smaller boats, which were very
+numerous. I had also an account to settle with that cunning rascal
+Macota, for his aiding and abetting Seriff Sahib in his piracies. He
+had located himself very pleasantly near a bend in the river,
+about a mile above Seriff Sahib's settlement, and was in the act
+of building extensive fortifications, when I had the satisfaction
+of anticipating the visit and some of the compliments he would have
+conferred on my friend Mr. Brooke at Sarawak. Budrudeen, the rajah's
+brother, had likewise been duped by this fellow, and was exceedingly
+anxious to insert the blade of a very sharp and beautiful kris into
+the body of his late friend. Mr. Brooke, however, was anxious to
+save his life, which he afterward had the satisfaction of doing. I
+shall never forget the tiger-like look of the young Pangeran when we
+landed together in the hopes of surprising the "Serpent" in his den;
+but he was too quick for us, having decamped with his followers,
+and in so great a hurry as to leave all his valuables behind--among
+them a Turkish pipe, some chairs once belonging to the Royalist, and
+other presents from Mr. Brooke. Everything belonging to him was burnt
+or destroyed save some handsome brass guns. There was one of about
+12 cwt. that had been lent by the sultan when Macota was in favor,
+and which I returned to Budrudeen for his brother.
+
+We were here joined by a large number of the Linga Dyaks, the same
+force that had joined us the year previous, while up the Sarebus,
+but unaccompanied by Seriff Jaffer, of whom it was not quite clear
+that he had not been secretly aiding the pirates. I sent them back with
+assurances to their chiefs that they should not be molested unless they
+gave shelter or protection to either Seriff Sahib or Muller. Seriff
+Sahib, with a considerable body of followers, escaped inland in the
+direction of the mountains, from the other side of which he would be
+able to communicate with the river Linga. Macota was obliged to fly
+up the river toward the Undop, on which the village and residence of
+Seriff Sahib's brother, Seriff Muller, was situated.
+
+Having destroyed every boat and sampan, as well as house or hut, on
+the 10th, as soon as the tide had risen sufficiently to take us over
+the shoals, we weighed, in the steamer, for the country of the Sakarran
+Dyaks, having sent the boats on before with the first of the flood.
+
+About fifteen miles above Patusen is the branch of the river called
+the Undop: up this river I dispatched Lieutenant Turnour, with
+Mr. Comber, in the Jolly Bachelor, and a division of our native
+boats, while we proceeded to where the river again branches off to
+the right and left, as on the tongue of land so formed we understood
+we should find a strong fort; beside, it was the highest point to
+which we could attempt to take the steamer. The branch to the left
+is called the Sakarran; that to the right retains the name of Lupar,
+inhabited chiefly by Sakarrans. We found the place deserted and the
+houses empty. Knowing that these people depended almost entirely
+for protection on the strongly fortified position at Patusen, I did
+not expect any similar opposition from either Seriff Muller or the
+desperate bloodthirsty Sakarrans, and consequently divided my force
+into three division--the one, already mentioned, under Lieutenant
+Turnour, up the Undop; another, under Mr. D'Aeth, up the Lupar; while
+Lieutenant Wade, accompanied by Mr. Brooke, ascended the Sakarran. I
+had not calculated on the disturbed and excited state in which I
+found the country; and two wounded men having been sent back from
+the Undop branch with accounts of the pirates, chiefly Malays, who
+were collected in great numbers, both before and in the rear of our
+small force; and an attempt having been made to cut off the bearer
+of this information, Nakoda Bahar, who had had a very narrow escape,
+and had no idea of taking back an answer unless attended by a European
+force,--I determined on sending assistance. But I had some difficulty
+in mustering another crew from the steamer, and was obliged to leave my
+friend Capt. Scott, with only the idlers, rather critically situated.
+
+I deemed it advisable to re-collect my whole force; and before
+proceeding to the punishment of the Sakarrans, to destroy the power
+and influence of Seriff Muller, whose town was situated about twenty
+miles up, and was said to contain a population of 1500 Malays,
+independently of the surrounding Dyak tribes. Having dispatched
+boats with directions to Lieutenant Wade and Mr. D'Aeth to join
+us in the Undop, I proceeded in my gig to the scene of action,
+leaving the steamer to maintain as strict a blockade of the Sakarran
+and Lupar branches as, with their reduced force, they were capable
+of. On my joining Lieutenant Turnour, I found him just returned from
+a very spirited attack which he had made, assisted by Mr. Comber,
+on a stockade situated on the summit of a steep hill; Mr. Allen, the
+master, being still absent on a similar service, on the opposite side
+of the river. The gallant old chief Patingi Ali was likewise absent,
+in pursuit of the enemy that had been driven from the stockades,
+with whom he had had a hand-to-hand fight, the whole of which--being
+on the rising ground--was witnessed by our boats' crews, who could
+not resist hailing his return from his gallant achievement with three
+hearty British cheers. This had the effect of giving such an impulse
+to his courage, that, in a subsequent affair, it unhappily caused a
+serious loss among this active and useful branch of our force.
+
+We had now to unite in cutting our way through a barrier across
+the river similar to that described in the attack on the Sarebus,
+which having passed, we brought up for the night close to a still more
+serious obstacle, being a number of huge trees felled, the branches of
+which meeting midway in the river, formed apparently an insurmountable
+obstacle to our progress. But "patience and perseverance overcome
+all difficulties;" and by night only three of the trees remained to
+be cleared away. We were now within a short distance of their town,
+so that we could distinctly hear the noise and confusion which our
+advance had occasioned. On the right bank, and about fifty yards in
+advance of the barrier, stood a farm-house, which we considered it
+prudent to occupy for the night, for which advanced post we collected
+about fifty volunteers. These consisted of Messrs. Steward, Williamson,
+and Comber; a corporal and four marines; my gig's crew; and a medley
+of picked men from our Dyak and Malay followers; not forgetting my
+usual and trusty attendant John Eager with his bugle, the sounding of
+which was to be the signal for the whole force to come to the rescue,
+in the event of surprise--not at all improbable from the nature of
+our warfare and our proximity to the enemy's town.
+
+And here a most ludicrous scene occurred during the night. Having
+placed our sentries and look-out men, and given "Tiga" as the
+watchword, we were, shortly after midnight, suddenly aroused from
+sound sleep by a Dyak war-yell, which was immediately responded to by
+the whole force. It was pitch dark: the interior of our farmhouse, the
+partitions of which had been removed for the convenience of stowage,
+was crowded to excess. In a moment every man was on his legs: swords,
+spears, and krisses dimly glittered over our heads. It is impossible
+to describe the excitement and confusion of the succeeding ten minutes:
+one and all believed that we had been surrounded by the enemy, and cut
+off from our main party. I had already thrust the muzzle of my pistol
+close to the heads of several natives, whom, in the confusion, I had
+mistaken for Sakarrans; and as each in his turn called out "Tiga,"
+I withdrew my weapon to apply it to somebody else; until, at last,
+we found that we were all "Tigas." I had prevented Eager, more than
+once, from sounding the alarm, which, from the first, he had not
+ceased to press me for permission to do. The Dyak yell had, however,
+succeeded in throwing the whole force afloat into a similar confusion,
+and not hearing the signal, they concluded that they, and not we,
+were the party attacked. The real cause we afterward ascertained to
+have arisen from the alarm of a Dyak, who dreamt, or imagined, that he
+felt a spear thrust upward through the bamboo-flooring of our building,
+and immediately gave his diabolical yell. The confusion was ten times
+as much as it would have been had the enemy really been there. So
+ended the adventures of the night in the wild jungle of Borneo.
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX.
+
+    Seriff Muller's town sacked.--Ascend the river in pursuit
+    of the enemy.--Gallant exploit of Lieutenant Wade.--His
+    death and funeral.--Interesting anecdote of him.--Ascend the
+    Sakarran branch.--Native boats hemmed in by pirates, and their
+    crews slaughtered to a man.--Karangan destroyed.--Captain
+    Sir E. Belcher arrives in the Samarang's boats.--Return to
+    Sarawak.--New expedition against Seriff Sahib and Jaffer.--Macota
+    captured.--Flight of Seriff Sahib.--Conferences.--Seriff Jaffer
+    deposed.--Mr. Brooke's speech in the native tongue.--End of the
+    expedition, and return to Sarawak.--The Dido sails for England.
+
+
+At daylight we were joined by Lieutenant Wade and Mr. Brooke--their
+division making a very acceptable increase to our force--and by
+8 o'clock the last barrier was cut through between us and Seriff
+Muller's devoted town. With the exception of his own house, from which
+some eight or nine Malays were endeavoring to move his effects, the
+whole place was deserted. They made no fight; and an hour afterward
+the town had been plundered and burnt. The only lives lost were a few
+unfortunates, who happened to come within range of our musketry in
+their exertions to save some of their master's property. A handsome
+large boat, belonging to that chief, was the only thing saved; and
+this I presented to Budrudeen. After a short delay in catching our
+usual supply of goats and poultry, with which the place abounded, we
+proceeded up the river in chase of the chief and his people; and here
+again we had to encounter the same obstacle presented by the felled
+trees thrown across the river--if possible of increased difficulty,
+owing to their greater size and the narrow breadth of the stream;
+but although delayed we were not to be beaten. We ascertained that
+the pirates had retreated to a Dyak village, situated on the summit
+of a hill, some twenty-five miles higher up the Undop, five or six
+miles only of which we had succeeded in ascending, as a most dreary
+and rainy night closed in, during which we were joined by Mr. D'Aeth
+and his division from the Lupar river.
+
+The following morning, the 13th of August, at daybreak, we again
+commenced our toilsome work. With the gig and the lighter boats we
+succeeded better; and I should have despaired of the heavier boats
+ever getting up, had they not been assisted by an opportune and sudden
+rise of the tide, to the extent of twelve or fourteen feet, though
+with this we had to contend against a considerably increased strength
+of current. It was on this day that my ever active and zealous first
+lieutenant, Charles Wade, jealous of the advanced position of our
+light boats, obtained a place in my gig. That evening the Phlegethon's
+first and second cutters, the Dido's two cutters, and their gigs,
+were fortunate enough to pass a barrier composed of trees evidently
+but recently felled; from which we concluded ourselves to be so near
+the enemy, that, by pushing forward as long as we could possibly see,
+we might prevent further impediments from being thrown in our way. This
+we did; but at 9 P.M. arriving at a broad expanse of the river, and
+being utterly unable to trace our course, we anchored our advanced
+force for the night.
+
+On Wednesday, 14th, we again pushed on at daylight. We had gained
+information of two landing-places leading to the Dyak village on the
+hill, round three-fourths of the foot of which the Undop flowed. The
+first landing-place we had no trouble in discovering, from the number
+of deserted boats collected near it. Leaving these to be looted by our
+followers, we proceeded in search of the second, which we understood
+was situated more immediately under the village, and which, having
+advanced without our guides, we had much difficulty in finding. The
+circuit of the base of the hill was above five miles. In traversing
+this distance, we had repeated skirmishing with straggling boats
+of the enemy, upon whom we came unexpectedly. During this warfare,
+Patingi Ali, who, with his usual zeal, had here come up, bringing a
+considerable native force of both Malays and Dyaks, was particularly
+on the alert; and while we in the gig attacked the large war-prahu
+of Seriff Muller himself--the resistance of whose followers was only
+the discharge of their muskets, after which they threw themselves
+into the river, part only effecting their escape--the Patingi nearly
+succeeded in capturing that chief in person. He had escaped from his
+prahu into a remarkably beautiful and fast-pulling sampan, in which he
+was chased by old Ali, and afterward only saved his life by throwing
+himself into the water, and swimming to the jungle; and it was with
+no small pride that the gallant old chief appropriated the boat to his
+own use. In the prahu were captured two large brass guns, two smaller
+ones, a variety of small arms, ammunition, provisions, colors and
+personal property, among which were also two pair of handsome jars of
+English manufacture. After this, having proceeded some considerable
+distance without finding the second landing-place, we put in close
+to a clear green spot, with the intention of getting our breakfasts,
+and of waiting the arrival of the other boat with the guides.
+
+While our crew were busily employed cooking, Lieutenant Wade and
+myself fancied we heard the suppressed voices of many people not
+far distant, and taking up our guns we crept into the jungle. We had
+not penetrated many yards before I came in sight of a mass of boats
+concealed in a snug little inlet, the entrance to which had escaped
+our notice. These were filled with the piratical Dyaks and Malays,
+and on shore at various points were placed armed sentinels. My first
+impulse was to conceal ourselves until the arrival of our force; but
+my rash, though gallant friend deemed otherwise; and without noticing
+the caution of my upheld hand, dashed in advance, discharging his gun,
+and calling upon our men to follow. It is impossible to conceive the
+consternation and confusion this our sudden sally occasioned among
+the pirates. The confused noise and scrambling from their boats I
+can only liken to that of a suddenly-roused flock of wild ducks. Our
+attack from the point whence it came was evidently unexpected; and it
+is my opinion that they calculated on our attacking the hill, if we
+did so at all, from the nearest landing-place, without pulling round
+the other five miles, as the whole attention of their scouts appeared
+to be directed toward that quarter. A short distance above them was
+a small encampment, probably erected for the convenience of their
+chiefs, as in it we found writing materials, two or three desks of
+English manufacture, on the brass plate of one of which, I afterward
+noticed, was engraved the name of "_Mr. Wilson_." To return to the
+pirates: with our force, such as it was--nine in number--and headed
+by Lieutenant Wade, we pursued our terrified enemy, who had not the
+sense or courage to rally in their judiciously selected and naturally
+protected encampment, but continued their retreat (firing on us from
+the jungle) toward the Dyak village on the summit of the hill.
+
+We here collected our force, reloaded our fire-arms; and Lieutenant
+Wade, seeing from this spot the arrival at the landing-place of the
+other boats, again rushed on in pursuit. Before arriving at the foot
+of the steep ascent on the summit of which the before-mentioned
+Dyak village stood, we had to cross a small open space of about
+sixty yards, exposed to the fire from the village as well as the
+surrounding jungle. It was before crossing this plain that I again
+cautioned my gallant friend to await the arrival of his men, of
+whom he was far in advance; and almost immediately afterward he fell
+mortally wounded at my feet, having been struck by two rifle-shots,
+and died instantaneously. I remained with the body until our men
+came up, and giving it in charge, we carried the place on the height
+without a check or further accident. The Dyak village we now occupied
+I would have spared, as on no occasion had we noticed any of the tribe
+fighting against us; but it was by shot fired from it that poor Wade
+was killed, and the work of destruction commenced simultaneously with
+the arrival of our men. It was most gratifying to me throughout the
+expedition to observe the friendly rivalry and emulation between the
+crews of the Phlegethon and the Dido's boats. On this occasion the
+former had the glory of first gaining the height; and one of the
+officers of the former, Mr. Simpson, wounded, with a pistol-shot,
+a man armed with a rifle, supposed to have been the person who had
+slain our first-lieutenant.
+
+I may here narrate a circumstance, from which one may judge of the
+natural kind-heartedness of my lamented friend. During the heat of
+the pursuit, although too anxious to advance to await the arrival of
+his men, he nevertheless found time to conceal in a place of security
+a poor terrified Malay girl whom he overtook, and who, by an imploring
+look, touched his heart. The village and the piratical boats destroyed,
+and the excitement over, we had time to reflect on the loss we had
+sustained of one so generally beloved as the leader of the expedition
+had been among us all. Having laid the body in a canoe, with the
+British union-jack for a pall, we commenced our descent of the river
+with very different spirits from those with which we had ascended only
+a few hours before. In the evening, with our whole force assembled,
+we performed the last sad ceremony of committing the body to the deep,
+with all the honors that time and circumstance would allow. I read
+that beautiful, impressive service from a prayer-book, the only one,
+by the by, in the expedition, which he himself had brought, as he said,
+"in case of accident."
+
+Before we again got under weigh, several Malay families, no longer
+in dread of their piratical chief, Seriff Muller, who had fled nobody
+knew whither, gave themselves up to us as prisoners, trusting to the
+mercy of a white man; the first instance of any of them having done
+so. We heard, also, that Macota had retreated with the seriff; and on
+examination we found the papers captured in the encampment belonged to
+them, exposing several deep intrigues and false statements addressed
+to the sultan, the purport of which was to impress his mind with the
+belief of a hostile intention on the part of the British government
+toward his country. We brought-up for the night off the still-burning
+ruins of Seriff Muller's town.
+
+On Thursday the 15th we again reached the steamer. We found her
+prepared for action, having been much annoyed during the night by the
+continued Dyak war-yells--sounds, to uninitiated ears, as unpleasant
+as those of musketry. Having driven away the two principal instigators
+and abettors of all the piracies committed along the coast of Borneo
+and elsewhere, and destroyed their strongholds, it now remained for
+us to punish the pirates themselves as far as lay in our power. The
+Sakarran Dyaks being the only ones now remaining who had not received
+convincing proofs that their brutal and inhuman trade would be no
+longer allowed, the 15th and 16th were passed on board the steamer,
+to rest the men after the severe fatigue encountered up the Undop,
+and in making preparations for an advance up the Sakarran. During the
+night of the 16th, several of our native followers were wounded. Their
+boats not being furnished with anchors, and the river being deep, they
+were obliged to make fast to the bank, which in the dark afforded great
+facility for the enemy to creep down through the jungle unperceived,
+so close as to fire a shot and even thrust their spears through the
+thin mat covering of the boats. One poor fellow received a shot in
+his lungs, from which he died the following day; a Dyak likewise
+died from a spear-wound; and in the morning we witnessed the pile
+forming for burning the Dyak, and the coffin making for conveying the
+body of the Malay to Sarawak, his native place; both parties having
+an equal horror of their dead falling into the hands of the enemy,
+although differing in their mode of disposing of them.
+
+On Saturday, the 17th, the expedition, consisting of the Dido's
+pinnace, her two cutters and gig, the Jolly Bachelor, and the
+Phlegethon's first and second cutters and gig, started up the
+Sakarran. A small division of light native boats, under the command of
+the brave old Patingi Ali, were selected to keep as a reconnoitering
+party with our leading boats, while the remaining native force, of
+above thirty boats, followed as a reserve. We advanced the first day
+some twenty miles without so much as seeing a native, although our
+progress was considerably delayed by stopping to burn farm-houses,
+and a number of war-prahus found concealed in the jungle or long grass
+on either side of the river. We brought up early in the afternoon, for
+the purpose of strongly fortifying ourselves, both ashore and afloat,
+against surprise before the night set in, by which time it would have
+taken a well-disciplined and powerful force to have dislodged us.
+
+This evening we had unusually fine weather; and we squatted down to
+our meal of curry and rice with better appetites and higher spirits
+than we had done for some days. We advanced the following day: and
+although we reached several villages, the grain had been removed
+from them all; which, in all probability, was done immediately upon
+their hearing of the fall of their supposed impregnable Patusen. In
+the evening we took the same precautions as on the preceding night,
+considering that our enemies were not to be despised. Owing to heavy
+rains which fell during the night, and caused a strong current, our
+progress was considerably retarded. The scenery was beautiful--more
+so than in any of the rivers we had yet visited. We likewise now
+repeatedly fell in with small detachments of the enemy, and spears
+were thrown from the banks, which added considerably to our excitement
+and amusement. On every point we found the remains of the preceding
+night's watch-fires, so that news of our approach would have been
+conveyed rapidly along. While leading in the gig with a select
+few of our followers, we came suddenly on a boat full of warriors,
+all gorgeously dressed, and apparently perfectly unconscious of our
+approach. The discharge of our muskets and the capsizing of their
+war-boat was the work of an instant; but most of their crew saved
+their lives by escaping into the jungle.
+
+This evening, Sunday, the 18th, we experienced some difficulty
+in finding a suitable place for our bivouac. While examining the
+most eligible-looking spot on the bank of the river, the crew of
+one of the Phlegethon's boats, having crept up the opposite bank,
+came suddenly on a party of Dyaks, who saluted them with a war-yell
+and a shower of spears; and it was absurd to see the way in which
+they precipitated themselves into the water again to escape from
+this unexpected danger. The Dyaks, too, appear to have been equally
+surprised. The place we selected for the night was a large house about
+forty yards from the edge of the river; and for a musket-range around
+which we had not much difficulty in clearing the ground. Here we all
+united our different messes, and passed a jovial evening. The night,
+however, set in with a most fearful thunder-storm, accompanied by the
+most vivid flashes of lightning I ever witnessed. The rain continued
+to fall in torrents; it cleared up at daylight, when we proceeded. As
+yet the banks of the river had been a continued garden, with sugarcane
+plantations and banana-trees in abundance. As we advanced, the scenery
+assumed a wilder and still more beautiful appearance, presenting high
+steep points, with large overhanging trees, and occasionally forming
+into pretty picturesque bays, with sloping banks. At other times we
+approached narrow gorges, looking so dark that, until past, you almost
+doubted there being a passage through. We were in hopes that this
+morning we should have reached their capital, a place called Karangan,
+supposed to be about ten miles farther on. At 9 o'clock Mr. Brooke,
+who was with me in the gig, stopped to breakfast with young Jenkins
+in the second cutter. Not expecting to meet with any opposition for
+some miles, I gave permission to Patingi Ali to advance cautiously
+with his light division, and with positive instructions to fall back
+upon the first appearance of any natives. As the stream was running
+down very strong, we held on to the bank, waiting for the arrival of
+the second cutter. Our pinnace and second gig having both passed up,
+we had remained about a quarter of an hour, when the report of a few
+musket-shots told us that the pirates had been fallen in with. We
+immediately pushed on; and as we advanced, the increased firing from
+our boats, and the war-yells of some thousand Dyaks, let us know that
+an engagement had really commenced. It would be difficult to describe
+the scene as I found it. About twenty boats were jammed together,
+forming one confused mass; some bottom up; the bows or sterns of
+others only visible; mixed up, pell-mell, with huge rafts; and among
+which were nearly all our advanced little division. Headless trunks,
+as well as heads without bodies, were lying about in all directions;
+parties were engaged hand to hand, spearing and krissing each other;
+others were striving to swim for their lives; entangled in the common
+_melee_ were our advanced boats; while on both banks thousands of
+Dyaks were rushing down to join in the slaughter, hurling their
+spears and stones on the boats below. For a moment I was at a loss
+what steps to take for rescuing our people from the embarrassed
+position in which they were, as the whole mass (through which there
+was no passage) were floating down the stream, and the addition of
+fresh boats arriving only increased the confusion. Fortunately, at
+this critical moment one of the rafts, catching the stump of a tree,
+broke this floating bridge, making a passage, through which (my gig
+being propelled by paddles instead of oars) I was enabled to pass.
+
+It occurred to Mr. Brooke and myself simultaneously, that, by advancing
+in the gig, we should draw the attention of the pirates toward us,
+so as to give time for the other boats to clear themselves. This had
+the desired effect. The whole force on shore turned, as if to secure
+what they rashly conceived to be their prize.
+
+We now advanced mid-channel: spears and stones assailed us from
+both banks. My friend Brooke's gun would not go off; so giving
+him the yoke-lines, he steered the boat while I kept up a rapid
+fire. Mr. Allen, in the second gig, quickly coming up, opened upon
+them, from a congreve-rocket tube, such a destructive fire as caused
+them to retire panic-struck behind the temporary barriers where they
+had concealed themselves previous to the attack upon Patingi Ali,
+and from whence they continued, for some twenty minutes, to hurl
+their spears and other missiles. Among the latter may be mentioned
+short lengths of bamboo, one end heavily loaded with stone, and
+thrown with great force and precision; the few fire-arms of which
+they were possessed were of but little use to them after the first
+discharge, the operation of reloading, in their inexperienced hands,
+requiring a longer time than the hurling of some twenty spears. The
+sumpitan was likewise freely employed by these pirates; but although
+several of our men belonging to the pinnace were struck, no fatal
+results ensued, from the dextrous and expeditious manner in which
+the wounded parts were excised by Mr. Beith, the assistant-surgeon;
+any poison that might remain being afterward sucked out by one of
+the comrades of the wounded men.
+
+As our force increased, the pirates retreated from their position,
+and could not again muster courage to rally. Their loss must have
+been considerable; ours might have been light, had poor old Patingi
+Ali attended to orders.
+
+It appears that the Patingi (over-confident, and probably urged
+on by Mr. Steward, who, unknown to me, was concealed in Ali's beat
+when application was made by that chief for permission to proceed
+in advance for the purpose of reconnoitering), instead of falling
+back, as particularly directed, on the first appearance of any of
+the enemy, made a dash, followed by his little division of boats,
+through the narrow pass above described. As soon as he had done so,
+huge rafts of bamboo were lanched across the river, so as to cut off
+his retreat. Six large war-prahus, probably carrying 100 men each,
+then bore down--three on either side--on his devoted followers;
+and one only of a crew of seventeen that manned his boat escaped to
+tell the tale. When last seen by our advanced boats, Mr. Steward and
+Patingi Ali were in the act (their own boats sinking) of boarding the
+enemy. They were doubtless overpowered and killed, with twenty-nine
+others, who lost their lives on this occasion. Our wounded in all
+amounted to fifty-six.
+
+A few miles higher up was the town and capital of Karangan, which
+place it was their business to defend, and ours to destroy, and this
+we succeeded in effecting without further opposition. We ascended a
+short distance above this, but found the river impracticable for the
+further progress of the boats; but our object having been achieved,
+the expedition may be said to have closed, as no more resistance was
+offered; so we dropped leisurely down the river, and that evening
+reached our resting-place of the previous night: but having burnt
+the house in the morning, we were obliged to sleep in our boats,
+with a strong guard on shore.
+
+Attempts were made to molest the native boats by hurling spears
+into them from the jungle under cover of the night; but after a few
+discharges of musketry the enemy retired, leaving us to enjoy another
+stormy and rainy night as we best could.
+
+On the 20th we reached the steamer, where we remained quiet all the
+next day, attending to the wounded, and ascertaining the exact extent
+of our loss. On the 22d we again reached Patusen. We found everything
+in the same wretched state as when we left; and a pile of firewood,
+previously cut for the use of the steamer, had not been removed. After
+dark a storm of thunder, lightning, and heavy rain, came on as usual,
+and with it a few mishaps. A boat belonging to the old Tumangong was
+capsized by the bore, by which his plunder, including a large brass
+gun, was lost, and the crew with difficulty saved their lives. At
+eight we heard the report of a gun, which was again repeated much
+nearer at nine; and before a signal-rocket could be fired, or a
+light shown, we were astonished by being hailed by the boats of
+a British man-of-war; and the next moment Captain Sir E. Belcher,
+having been assisted by a rapid tide, came alongside the steamer with
+the welcome news of having brought our May letters from England. On
+the arrival of the Samarang off the Morotaba, Sir Edward heard of
+the loss we had sustained; and, with his usual zeal and activity,
+came at once to our assistance, having brought his boats no less
+than 120 miles in about thirty hours. At the moment of his joining
+us, our second mishap occurred. The night, as previously mentioned,
+was pitch dark, and a rapid current running, when the cry of "a man
+overboard" caused a sensation difficult to describe. All available
+boats were immediately dispatched in search; and soon afterward we
+were cheered by the sound of "all right." It appears that the news
+of the arrival of the mail was not long in spreading throughout our
+little fleet, when Mr. D'Aeth, leaving the first cutter in a small
+sampan, capsized in coming alongside the steamer; the man in the bow
+(who composed the crew) saved himself by catching hold of the nearest
+boat; Mr. D'Aeth would have been drowned had he not been an excellent
+swimmer. This was not the last of our mishaps; for we had no sooner
+arranged ourselves and newly-arrived visitors from the Samarang
+comfortably on board the steamer from the pelting rain, than the
+accustomed and quick ear of Mr. Brooke heard the cry of natives in
+distress. Jumping into his Singapore sampan, he pushed off to their
+assistance, and returned shortly afterward, having picked up three,
+half drowned, of our Dyak followers, whom he had found clinging
+to the floating trunk of a tree. They too had been capsized by the
+bore; when, out of eleven composing the crew, only these three were
+saved--although the Dyaks are invariably expert swimmers.
+
+On the 23d, after waiting to obtain meridian observations, we moved
+down as far as the mouth of the river Linga, and then dispatched one
+of our Malay chiefs to the town of Bunting to summon Seriff Jaffer
+to a conference. This, however, he declined on a plea of ill health,
+sending assurance, at the same time, of his goodwill and inclination
+to assist us in our endeavors to suppress piracy.
+
+On the night of the 24th, we once again reached Sarawak, where the
+rejoicings of the previous year, when we returned from a successful
+expedition, were repeated. On the third evening after our return,
+we were just settling down to enjoy a little rest, having got our
+sick and wounded into comfortable quarters, and were beginning
+heartily to indulge in the comforts of a bed after our fatigue and
+harassing duties in open boats during the previous three weeks, when
+information arrived that Seriff Sahib had taken refuge in the Linga
+river, where, assisted by Seriff Jaffer, he was again collecting his
+followers. No time was to be lost; and on the 28th, with the addition
+of the Samarang's boats, we once more started, to crush, if possible,
+this persevering and desperate pirate; and, in the middle of the night,
+came to an anchor inside the Linga river.
+
+When our expedition had been watched safely outside the Batang
+Lupar, on its return to Sarawak, all those unfortunate families that
+had concealed themselves in the jungle, after the destruction of
+the different towns of Patusen and Undop, had emerged from their
+hiding-places, and, embarking on rafts, half-ruined boats, or,
+in short, anything that would float, were in the act of tiding and
+working their passage toward the extensive and flourishing town of
+Bunting. Their dismay can well be imagined, when, at daylight on the
+morning of the 29th, they found themselves carried by the tide close
+alongside the long, black, terror-spreading steamer, and in the midst
+of our augmented fleet. Escape to them was next to hopeless; nor did
+the softer sex seem much to mind the change--probably thinking that to
+be swallowed up by the white man was not much worse than dying in the
+jungle of starvation. I need not say that, instead of being molested,
+they were supplied with such provisions and assistance as our means
+would permit us to afford, and then allowed to pass quietly on;
+in addition to which we dispatched several of our native followers
+into the Batang Lupar, to inform the poor fugitives that our business
+was with the chiefs and instigators of piracy, and not to molest the
+misguided natives.
+
+With the ebb tide a large number of boats came down from the town--the
+news of our arrival having reached them during the night--containing
+the principal chiefs, with assurances of their pacific intentions,
+and welcoming us with presents of poultry, goats, fruit, &c., which
+we received, paying the fair market-price for them, either by way of
+barter or in hard dollars. They assured us that Seriff Sahib should not
+be received among them; but that they had heard of his having arrived
+at Pontranini, on a small tributary stream some fifty miles above
+their town. We immediately decided on proceeding in pursuit before he
+could have time to establish himself in any force. It was also evident
+that the Balow Dyaks, who inhabit this part of the country, were
+decidedly in favor of our operations against Seriff Sahib, although
+afraid--on account of Seriff Jaffer and his Malays--to express their
+opinions openly. We also ascertained that Macota, with a remnant of
+his followers, was hourly expected in the mouth of the river, from the
+jungle, into which he had been driven during the fight on the Undop
+heights. Knowing that it would fare badly with this treacherous and
+cunning, although now harmless chief, should he fall into the hands of
+any of our native followers, I dispatched two boats to look out for and
+bring him to us alive. This they succeeded in doing, securing him in a
+deep muddy jungle, into which he had thrown himself upon perceiving the
+approach of our men. Leaving him a prisoner on board the Phlegethon,
+we, with the floodtide pushed forward in pursuit of Seriff Sahib.
+
+For two days we persevered in dragging our boats, for the distance
+of twenty miles, up a small jungly creek, which, to all appearance,
+was impassable for anything but canoes. But it had the desired
+effect, proving to the natives what determination could achieve in
+accomplishing our object, even beyond the hopes of our sanguine Balow
+Dyak guides. The consequence was, that Seriff Sahib made a final and
+precipitate retreat, across the mountains, in the direction of the
+Pontiana river. So close were we on his rear--harassed as he was by the
+Balow Dyaks, who had refused him common means of subsistence--that he
+threw away his sword, and left behind him a child whom he had hitherto
+carried in the jungle; and this once dreaded chief was now driven,
+single and unattended, out of the reach of doing any further mischief.
+
+The boats returned, and took up a formidable position off the town of
+Bunting, where we summoned Seriff Jaffer to a conference. To this he
+was obliged to attend, as the natives had learnt that we were not to
+be trifled with, and would have forced him on board rather than have
+permitted their village to be destroyed. With Pangeran Budrudeen,
+acting as the representative of the sultan, Seriff Jaffer was obliged
+to resign all pretensions to the government of the province over
+which he had hitherto held sway, since it was considered, from his
+being a Malay and from his relationship to Seriff Sahib, that he was
+an unsafe person to be intrusted With so important a post.
+
+A second conference on shore took place, at which the chiefs of
+all the surrounding country attended, when the above sentence was
+confirmed. On this occasion I had the satisfaction of witnessing what
+must have been--from the effect I observed it to have produced on
+the hearers--a fine piece of oratory, delivered by Mr. Brooke in the
+native tongue, with a degree of fluency I had never witnessed before,
+even in a Malay. The purport of it, as I understood, was, to point
+out emphatically the horrors of piracy on the one hand, which it was
+the determination of the British government to suppress, and on the
+other hand, the blessings arising from peace and trade, which it was
+equally our wish to cultivate; and it concluded by fully explaining,
+that the measures lately adopted by us against piracy were for the
+protection of all the peaceful communities along the coast. So great
+was the attention bestowed during the delivery of this speech that
+the dropping of a pin might have been heard.
+
+From these people many assurances were received of their anxiety
+and willingness to cooperate with us in our laudable undertaking;
+and one and all were alike urgent that the government of their river
+should be transferred to the English.
+
+On the 4th September the force again reached Sarawak, and thus
+terminated a most successful expedition against the worst pirates on
+the coast of Borneo.
+
+We found the Samarang off the Morotaba entrance, when Mr. Brooke
+and myself became the guests of Sir Edward Belcher for several days,
+during which time we made excursions to all the small islands in that
+neighborhood, discovered large quantities of excellent oysters, and
+had some very good hog-shooting. Afterward, accompanied by the boats
+of the Samarang, we paid a visit to the Lundu Dyaks, which gave them
+great delight. They entertained us at a large feast, when the whole
+of the late expedition was fought over again, and a war-dance with
+the newly-acquired heads of the Sakarran pirates was performed for
+our edification. Later in the evening, two of the elder chiefs got
+up, and, walking up and down the long gallery, commenced a dialogue,
+for the information, as they said, of the women, children, and poorer
+people who were obliged to remain at home. It consisted in putting
+such questions to one another as should elicit all the particulars of
+the late expedition, such as, what had become of different celebrated
+Sakarran chiefs (whom they named)? how had they been destroyed? how
+did they die? by whom had they been slain? &c. All these inquiries
+received the most satisfactory replies, in which the heroic conduct
+of themselves and the white men was largely dwelt upon. While this
+was performing, the two old warriors, with the heads of their enemies
+suspended from their shoulders like a soldier's cartouch-box, stumped
+up and down, striking the floor with their clubs, and getting very
+excited. How long it lasted none of our party could tell, as one and
+all dropped off to sleep during the recital. Mr. Brooke has given so
+good a description of these kind and simple people that I need not
+here farther notice them.
+
+Shortly after our return to the Samarang, she, getting short of
+provisions, sailed for Singapore, and Mr. Brooke and myself went up
+to Sarawak, where the Dido was still lying. Great rejoicings and
+firing of cannon, as on a former occasion, announced our return;
+and, after paying our respects to the rajah, we visited the Tumangong
+and Patingis.
+
+A curious ceremony is generally performed on the return of the chiefs
+from a fortunate war expedition, which is not only done by way of
+a welcome back, but is supposed to insure equal success on the next
+excursion. This ceremony was better performed at the old Tumangong's
+than at the other houses. After entering the principal room we seated
+ourselves in a semicircle on the mat floor, when the old chief's
+three wives advanced to welcome us, with their female relatives,
+all richly and prettily dressed in sarongs suspended from the waist,
+and silken scarfs worn gracefully over one shoulder, just hiding or
+exposing as much of their well-shaped persons as they thought most
+becoming. Each of these ladies in succession taking a handful of
+yellow rice, threw it over us, repeating some mystical words, and
+dilating on our heroic deeds, and then they sprinkled our heads with
+gold-dust. This is generally done by grating a lump of gold against
+a dried piece of shark's skin. Two of these ladies bore the pretty
+names of Inda and Amina. Inda was young, pretty, and graceful; and
+although she had borne her husband no children, she was supposed to
+have much greater influence over him than the other two. Report said
+that she had a temper, and that the Tumangong was much afraid of her;
+but this may have been only Sarawak scandal. She brought her portion
+of gold-dust already grated, and wrapped up in a piece of paper,
+from which she took a pinch; and in reaching to sprinkle some over
+my head, she, by accident, put the prettiest little foot on to my
+hand, which, as she wore neither shoes nor stockings, she did not
+hurt sufficiently to cause me to withdraw it. After this ceremony we
+(the warriors) feasted and smoked together, attended on by the ladies.
+
+Another conference with Muda Hassim took place, and I subsequently
+quitted Sarawak for Singapore, intending to re-provision the Dido
+at that port, and then return to Sarawak, in order to convey the
+rajah and his suite to Borneo Proper. At Singapore, however, I found
+orders for England, and sailed accordingly; but the service alluded
+to was readily performed by Sir Edward Belcher, in H.M.S. Samarang,
+accompanied by the H. C.'s steamer Phlegethon.
+
+On my return to England I had the gratification to learn that
+Mr. Brooke had been appointed agent for the British government in
+Borneo, and that Captain Bethune, R.N., C.B., had been dispatched on
+special service to that island: events I cannot but consider of great
+importance to the best interests of humanity, and to the extension
+of British commerce throughout the Malayan Archipelago.
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX.
+
+
+    Later portion of Mr. Brooke's Journal.--Departure of Captain
+    Keppel, and arrival of Sir E. Belcher.--Mr. Brooke proceeds, with
+    Muda Hassim, in the Samarang to Borneo.--Labuan examined.--Returns
+    to Sarawak.--Visit of Lingire, a Sarebus chief.--The Dyaks of Tumma
+    and Bandar Cassim.--Meets an assembly of Malays and Dyaks.--Arrival
+    of Lingi, as a deputation from the Sakarran chiefs.--The Malay
+    character.--Excursion up the country.--Miserable effects of excess
+    in opium-smoking.--Picturesque situation of the Sow village of
+    Ra-at.--Nawang.--Feast at Ra-at.--Returns home.--Conferences with
+    Dyak chiefs.
+
+
+The return to England of Captain Bethune, C.B., bringing with him a
+further portion of Mr. Brooke's Journal to my charge, enables me to
+afford my readers some interesting details relative to the important
+events that have occurred in Borneo subsequent to my departure from
+Sarawak.
+
+"_January_, 1845.--The departure of the Dido left me sad and lonely,
+for Captain Keppel had been really my companion and friend; and he
+so thoroughly entered into my views for the suppression of piracy,
+and made them his own, that I may not expect any successor to act
+with the same vigour and the same decision. Gallant Didos! I would
+ask no further aid or protection than I received from you. Sir
+Edward Belcher, with the Phlegethon in company, arrived not long
+after the Dido's departure, and conveyed the Rajah Muda Hassim and
+his train to Borneo Proper. H.M.S. Samarang and Phlegethon visited
+and examined Labuan, and proceeded thence to Ambun. Ambun is a
+miserable village; and it at once gave the lie to the report of a
+European female being there in captivity, for no _poor Orang Kaya_
+could retain such a prize. The inhabitants of Ambun are Badjows,
+and the country people or Dyaks of the interior are called Dusuns, or
+villagers. I saw many of them, and they appeared a gentle mild race,
+and far less warlike by account than our Dyaks. They are not tattooed,
+and the sumpitan is unknown amongst them. Leaving Ambun, which is
+situated in a pretty bay, we proceeded to Tampasuk, a considerable
+town, inhabited by Illanuns and Badjows. This is a piractical town;
+and I was informed by an Arab in captivity there that scarcely a
+week passes without strife and contention amongst themselves. There
+likewise I received information respecting the Balagnini, the great
+pirates of these seas. They are represented as in habiting numerous
+small islands in the vicinity of Sooloo: their origin is Badjow. I
+apprehend there would be little difficulty in breaking their power,
+and curing the propensity to piracy.
+
+"This cruise being over, I established myself quietly at Sarawak. The
+country is peaceable; trade flourishes; the Dyaks are content;
+the Malays greatly increased in number--in short, all goes well. I
+received a visit from Lingire, a Dyak chief of Sarebus. At first he
+was shy and somewhat suspicions; but a little attention soon put him
+at his ease. He is an intelligent man; and I hail with pleasure his
+advent to Sarawak, as the dawn of a friendship with the two pirate
+tribes. It is not alone for the benefit of these tribes that I
+desire to cultivate their friendship, but for the greater object of
+penetrating the interior through their means. There are no Malays
+there to impede our progress by their lies and their intrigues;
+and, God willing, these rivers shall be the great arteries by which
+civilization shall be circulated to the heart of Borneo.
+
+"_14th._--The Dyaks of Tumma, a runaway tribe from Sadong, came
+down last night, as Bandar Cassim of Sadong wishes still to extract
+property from them. Bandar Cassim I believe to be a weak man, swayed
+by stronger-headed and worse rascals; but, now that Seriff Sahib and
+Muda Hassim are no longer in the country, he retains no excuse for
+oppressing the poor Dyaks. Si Nankan and Tumma have already flown,
+and most of the other tribes are ready to follow their example, and
+take refuge in Sarawak. I have fully explained to the Bandar that he
+will lose all his Dyaks if he continues his system of oppression,
+and more especially if he continues to resort to that most hateful
+system of seizing the women and children.
+
+"I had a large assembly of natives, Malay and Dyaks, and held forth
+many good maxims to them. At present, in Sarawak, we have Balows
+and Sarebus, mortal enemies; Lenaar, our extreme tribe, and our new
+Sadong tribe of Tumma. Lately we had Kantoss, from near Sarambow,
+in the interior of Pontiana; Undops, from that river; and Badjows,
+from near Lantang--tribes which had never thought of Sarawak before,
+and perhaps never heard the name. Oh, for power to pursue the course
+pointed out!
+
+"_16th._--The Julia arrived, much to my relief; and Mr. Low, a botanist
+and naturalist, arrived in her. He will be a great acquisition to
+our society, if devoted to these pursuits. The same day that the
+Julia entered, the Ariel left the river. I dismissed the Tumma Dyaks;
+re-warned Bandar Cassim of the consequences of his oppression; and
+had a parting interview with Lingire. I had another long talk with
+Lingire, and did him honor by presenting him with a spear and flag,
+for I believe he is true, and will be useful; and this Orang Kaya
+Pa-muncha, the most powerful of these Dyaks, must be mine. Lingire
+described to me a great fight he once had with the Kayans, on which
+occasion he got ninety-one heads, and forced a large body of them
+to retire with inferior numbers. I asked him whether the Kayans used
+the sumpitan? he answered, 'Yes.' 'Did many of your men die from the
+wounds?' 'No; we can cure them.' This is one more proof in favor of
+Mr. Crawfurd's opinion that this poison is not sufficiently virulent
+to destroy life when the arrow is (as it mostly is) plucked instantly
+from the wound.
+
+"_26th._--Linn, a Sakarran chief, arrived, deputed (as he asserted,
+and I believe truly) by the other chiefs of Sakarran to assure me of
+their submission and desire for peace. He likewise stated, that false
+rumors spread by the Malays agitated the Dyaks; and the principal rumor
+was, that they would be shortly attacked again by the white men. These
+rumors are spread by the Sariki people, to induce the Sakarrans to quit
+their river and take refuge in the interior of the Rejong; and once
+there, the Sakarrans would be in a very great measure at the mercy of
+the Sariki people. This is a perfect instance of Malay dealing with
+the Dyaks; but in this case it has failed, as the Sakarrans are too
+much attached to their country to quit it. I am inclined to believe
+their professions; and at any rate it is convenient to do so and to
+give them a fair trial.
+
+"_28th._--How is it to be accounted for, that the Malays have so
+bad a character with the public, and yet that the few who have had
+opportunities of knowing them well speak of them as a simple and
+not unamiable people? With the vulgar, the idea of a Malay--and by
+the Malay they mean the entire Polynesian race, with the exception
+of the Javanese--is that of a treacherous, blood-thirsty villain;
+and I believe the reason to be, that from our first intercourse to
+the present time, it is the Pangerans or rajahs of the country, with
+their followers, who are made the standard of Malay character. These
+rajahs, born in the purple; bred amid slaves and fighting-cocks,
+inheriting an undisputed power over their subjects, and under
+all circumstances, whether of riches or poverty, receiving the
+abject submission of those around their persons, are naturally the
+slaves of their passions--haughty, rapacious, vindictive, weak,
+and tenacious unto death of the paltry punctilio of their court
+The followers of such rajahs it is needless to describe; they are
+the tools of the rajah's will, and more readily disposed for evil
+than for good; unscrupulous, cunning, intriguing, they are prepared
+for any act of violence. We must next contrast these with a burly,
+independent trader, eager after gain; probably not over-scrupulous
+about the means of obtaining it, ignorant of native character, and
+heedless of native customs and native etiquet. The result of such
+a combination of ingredients causes an explosion on the slightest
+occasion. The European is loud, contemptuous, and abusive; the Malay
+cool and vindictive. The regal dignity has been insulted; the rajah
+has received 'shame' before his court; evil counselors are at hand
+to whisper the facility of revenge, and the advantages to be derived
+from it. The consequence too frequently follows--the captain and crew
+are krissed, and their vessel seized and appropriated. The repeated
+tragedy shocks the European mind; and the Malay has received, and
+continues to this day to receive, a character for treachery and
+bloodthirstiness. Even in these common cases an allowance must be
+made for the insults received, which doubtless on numerous occasions
+were very gross, and such flagrant violations of native customs as to
+merit death in native eyes; and we must bear in mind, that we never
+hear but one side of the tale, or only judge upon a bloody fact. It
+is from such samples of Malays that the general character is given
+by those who have only the limited means of trade for forming a
+judgment; but those who have known the people of the interior and
+lived among them, far removed from the influence of their rajahs,
+have given them a very different character. Simple in their habits,
+they are neither treacherous nor bloodthirsty; cheerful, polite,
+hospitable, gentle in their manners, they live in communities with
+fewer crimes and fewer punishments than most other people of the
+globe. They are passionately fond of their children, and indulgent
+even to a fault; and the ties of family relationship and good feeling
+continue in force for several generations. The feeling of the Malay,
+fostered by education, is acute, and his passions are roused if shame
+be put upon him; indeed, this dread of shame amounts to a disease;
+and the evil is, that it has taken a wrong direction, being more the
+dread of exposure or abuse, than shame or contrition for any offence.
+
+"I have always found them good-tempered and obliging, wonderfully
+amenable to authority, and quite as sensible of benefits conferred,
+and as grateful, as other people of more favored countries. Of
+course there is a reverse to this picture. The worst feature of
+the Malay character is the want of all candor or openness, and the
+restless spirit of cunning intrigue which animates them, from the
+highest to the lowest. Like other Asiatics, truth is a rare quality
+among them. They are superstitious, somewhat inclined to deceit in
+the ordinary concerns of life, and they have neither principle nor
+conscience when they have the means of oppressing an infidel, and a
+Dyak who is their inferior in civilization and intellect.
+
+"If this character of the Malay be summed up, it will be anything but
+a bad one on the whole; it will present a striking contrast to the
+conduct and character of the rajahs and their followers, and I think
+will convince any impartial inquirer, that it is easily susceptible
+of improvement. One of the most fertile sources of confusion is,
+classing at one time all the various nations of the Archipelago under
+the general name of Malay, and at another restricting the same term
+to one people, not more ancient, not the fountain-head of the others,
+who issued from the center of Sumatra, and spread themselves in a
+few parts of the Archipelago.
+
+"The French, the German, the English, Scotch, and Irish are not
+more different in national character than the Malay, the Javanese,
+the Bugis, the Illanun, and the Dyak; and yet all these are
+indiscriminately called Malay, and a common character bestowed upon
+them. It would be as wise and as sensible to speak of a European
+character.
+
+"_31st._--Started on a short excursion up the country, and slept
+at Siniawan. Here I found a young Pangeran (who came from Sambas
+with Mr. Hupe, a German missionary) enchained in the delights of
+opium. He left Sarawak for Sambas two months since, proceeded five
+hours' journey, and has since been smoking the drug and sleeping
+alternately. His life passes thus: between four and five he wakes,
+yawns, and smokes a pipe or two, which fits him for the labors of
+taking his guitar and playing for an hour. Then follows a slightly
+tasted meal, a pipe or two succeeds, and content and merriment for
+another hour or two. About eight o'clock the gentleman reclines, and
+pipe succeeds pipe till, toward daylight, he sinks intoxicated and
+stupid on his pillow, to wake up again in due course to play again the
+same part. Poor wretch! two months of this life of dissipation have
+reduced him to a shadow--two more months will consign him to his grave.
+
+"_Feb. 1st._--Started after breakfast, and paddled against a strong
+current past Tundong, and, some distance above, left the main stream
+and entered the branch to the right, which is narrower, and rendered
+difficult of navigation by the number of fallen trees which block up
+the bed, and which sometimes obliged us to quit our boat, and remove
+all the kajang covers, so as to enable us to haul the boat under the
+huge trunks. The main stream was rapid and turbid, swollen by a fresh,
+and its increase of volume blocked up the waters of the tributary, so
+as to render the current inconsiderable. The Dyaks have thrown several
+bridges across the rivers, which they effect with great ingenuity; but
+I was surprised on one of these bridges to observe the traces of the
+severe flood which we had about a fortnight since. The water on that
+occasion must have risen twenty feet perpendicularly, and many of the
+trees evidently but recently fallen, are the effects of its might. The
+walk to Rat, or Ra-at, is about two miles along a decent path. Nothing
+can be more picturesque than the hill and the village. The former is
+a huge lump (I think of granite), almost inaccessible, with bold bare
+sides, rising out of a rich vegetation at the base, and crowned with
+trees. The height is about 500 feet; and about a hundred feet lower is
+a shoulder of the hill on which stands the eagle-nest-like village of
+Ra-at, the ascent to which is like climbing by a ladder up the side
+of a house. This is one of the dwelling-places of the Sow Dyaks,
+a numerous but dispersed tribe. Their chief, or Orang Kaya, is an
+imbecile old man, and the virtual headship is in the hands of Nimok,
+of whom more hereafter. Our friends seemed pleased to see us, and Nimok
+apologized for so few of his people being present, as the harvest was
+approaching; but being anxious to give a feast on the occasion of my
+first visit to their tribe, it was arranged that to-morrow I should
+shoot deer, and the day following return to the mountain. The views
+on either side from the village are beautiful--one view enchanting
+from its variety and depth, more especially when lighted up by the
+gleam of a showery sunshine, as I first saw it. Soon, however, after
+our arrival, the prospect was shut out by clouds, and a soaking rain
+descended, which lasted for the greater part of the night.
+
+"_2d._--Started after breakfast, and after a quiet walk of about
+three hours through a pleasant country of alternate hill and valley,
+we saw the valley of Nawang below us. Nawang is the property of
+the Singe Dyaks, and is cultivated by poor families, at the head
+of which is Niarak. The house contained three families, and our
+party was distributed among them, ourselves, i. e. Low, Crookshank,
+and myself, occupying one small apartment with a man, his wife, and
+daughter. The valley presented one of the most charming scenes to
+be imagined--a clearing amid hills of moderate elevation, with the
+distant mountains in the background; a small stream ran through it,
+which, being damned in several places, enables the cultivator to flood
+his padi-fields. The padi looked beautifully green. A few palms and
+plantains fringed the farm at intervals, while the surrounding hills
+were clothed in their native jungle. Here and there a few workmen in
+the fields heightened the effect; and the scene, as evening closed,
+was one of calm repose, and, I may say, of peace. The cocoa-nut, the
+betel, the sago, and the gno or gomati, are the four favorite palms of
+the Dyaks. In their simple mode of life, these four trees supply them
+many necessaries and luxuries. The sago furnishes food; and after the
+pith has been extracted, the outer part forms a rough covering for
+the rougher floor, on which the farmer sleeps. The leaf of the sago
+is preferable for the roofing of houses to the nibong. The gomati, or
+gno, gives the black fibre which enables the owner to manufacture rope
+or cord for his own use; and over and above, the toddy of this palm
+is a luxury daily enjoyed. When we entered, this toddy was produced
+in large bamboos, both for our use and that of our attendant Dyaks;
+I thought it, however, very bad. In the evening we were out looking
+for deer, and passed many a pleasant spot which once was a farm, and
+which will become a farm again. These the Dyaks called rapack, and they
+are the favorite feeding-grounds of the deer. To our disappointment
+we did not get a deer, which we had reckoned on as an improvement to
+our ordinary dinner-fare. A sound sleep soon descended on our party,
+and the night passed in quiet; but it is remarkable how vigilant their
+mode of life renders the Dyaks. Their sleep is short and interrupted;
+they constantly rise, blow up the fire, and look out on the night:
+it is rarely that some or other of them are not on the move.
+
+"Yearly the Dyaks take new ground for their farm; yearly they fence
+it in, and undergo the labor of reclaiming new land; for seven years
+the land lies fallow, and then may be used again. What a waste of
+labor! more especially in these rich and watered valleys, which,
+in the hands of the Chinese, might produce two crops yearly.
+
+"_3d._--Took leave of this pleasant valley, and by another and shorter
+road than we came reached Ra-at. We arrived in good time on the hill,
+and found everything prepared for a feast. There was nothing new in
+this feast. A fowl was killed with the usual ceremony; afterward a
+hog. The hog is paid for by the company at a price commensurate with
+its size: a split bamboo is passed round the largest part of the body,
+and knots tied on it at given distances; and according to the number
+of these knots are the number of pasus or padi for the price.
+
+"Our host of Nawang, Niarak, arrived to this feast with a plentiful
+supply of toddy; and before the dance commenced, we were requested
+to take our seats. The circumstances of the tribe, and the ability of
+Nimok, rendered this ceremony interesting to me. The Sow tribe has long
+been split into four parties, residing at different places. Gunong
+Sow, the original locality, was attacked by the Sakarran Dyaks,
+and thence Nimok and his party retired to Ra-at. A second smaller
+party subsequently located at or near Bow, as being preferable;
+while the older divisions of Jaguen and Ahuss lived at the places so
+named. Nimok's great desire was to gather together his scattered tribe,
+and to become _de facto_ its head. My presence and the Datus' was a
+good opportunity for gathering the tribe; and Nimok hoped to give them
+the impression that we countenanced his proposition. The dances over,
+Nimok pronounced an oration: he dwelt on the advantages of union;
+how desirous he was to benefit his tribe; how constantly it was his
+custom to visit Sarawak in order to watch over the interests of the
+tribe--the trouble was his, the advantage theirs; but how, without
+union, could they hope to gain any advantage--whether the return of
+their remaining captive women, or any other? He proposed this union;
+and that, after the padi was ripe, they should all live at Ra-at,
+where, as a body, they were always ready to obey the commands of the
+Tuan Besar or the Datu.
+
+"This was the substance of Nimok's speech. But the effect of his
+oratory was not great; for the Bow, and other portions of the tribe,
+heard coldly his proposition, though they only opposed it in a few
+words. It was evident they had no orator at all a match for Nimok: a
+few words from Niana drew forth a second oration. He glanced at their
+former state; he spoke with animation of their enemies, and dwelt
+on their great misfortune at Sow; he attacked the Singe as the cause
+of these misfortunes: and spoke long and eloquently of things past,
+of things present, and things to come. He was seated the whole time;
+his voice varied with his subject, and was sweet and expressive;
+his action was always moderate, principally laying down the law with
+his finger on the mats. Niarak, our Singe friend, attempted a defence
+of his tribe; but he had drunk too freely of his own arrack; and his
+speech was received with much laughter, in which he joined. At this
+juncture I retired, after saying a few words; but the talk was kept
+up for several hours after, amid feasting and drinking.
+
+"_4th._--After breakfast, walked to our boats, and at six P.M. reached
+home, just in time; weather very rainy.
+
+"_10th._--Nothing to remark in these days, except the ordinary course
+of business and of life.
+
+"_13th._--The Tumangong returned from Sadong, and brought me a far
+better account of that place than I had hoped for. It appears that
+they really are desirous to govern well, and to protect the Dyaks;
+and fully impressed with the caution I gave them, that unless they
+protect and foster their tribes, they will soon lose them from their
+removal to Sarawak.
+
+"One large tribe, the Maluku, a branch of the Sibnowans, are, it
+appears, very desirous of being under my protection. It is a tempting
+offer, and I should like to have them; but I must not deprive the
+rulers of Sadong of the means of living comfortably, and the power
+of paying revenue. Protect them I both can and will. There are great
+numbers of Sarawak people at Sadong, all looking out for birds'-nests;
+new caves have been explored; mountains ascended for the first time
+in the search. It shows the progress of good government and security,
+and, at the same time, is characteristic of the Malay character. They
+will endure fatigue, and run risks, on the chance of finding this
+valuable commodity; but they will not labor steadily, or engage in
+pursuits which would lead to fortune by a slow progress.
+
+"_15th._--Panglima Laksa, the chief of the Undop tribe, arrived, to
+request, as the Badjows and Sakarrans had recently killed his people,
+that I would permit him to retort. At the same time came Abong Kapi,
+the Sakarran Malay, with eight Sakarran chiefs, named Si Miow, one of
+the heads, and the rest Tadong, Lengang, Barunda, Badendang, Si Bunie,
+Si Ludum, and Kuno, the representatives of other heads. Nothing could
+be more satisfactory than the interview, just over. They denied any
+knowledge or connection with the Badjows, who had killed some Dyaks
+at Undop, and said all that I could desire. They promised to obey me,
+and look upon me as their chief: they desired to trade, and would
+guaranty any Sarawak people who came to their river; but they could
+not answer for all the Dyaks in the Batang Lupar. It is well known,
+however, that the Batang Lupar Dyaks are more peaceable than those of
+Sakarran, and will be easily managed; and as for the breaking out of
+these old feuds, it is comparatively of slight importance, compared
+to the grand settlement; for as our influence increases we can easily
+put down the separate sticks of the bundle. There is a noble chance,
+if properly used! It may be remarked that many of their names are
+from some peculiarity of person, or from some quality. Tadong is a
+poisonous snake; but, on inquiry, I found the young chief so named had
+got the name from being black. They are certainly a fine-looking race.
+
+"_17th._--Plenty of conferences with the Sakarran chiefs; and,
+as far as I can judge, they are sincere in the main, though some
+reserves there may be. Treachery I do not apprehend from them; but,
+of course, it will be impossible, over a very numerous, powerful,
+and warlike tribe, to gain such an ascendency of a sudden as at once
+to correct their evil habits."
+
+Here again Mr. Brooke appears to have been placed on the horns of a
+dilemma by his ignorance of the views of the British Government. Had
+his position in Borneo been certain--had he either been supported
+or deserted--his path of policy would have been clear; whereas he
+evidently did not know what the morrow would bring forth; whether
+it would find him with an English force at his back, or abandoned to
+his own resources.
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI.
+
+    Mr. Brooke's memorandum on the piracy of the Malayan
+    Archipelago.--The measures requisite for its suppression, and for
+    the consequent extension of British commerce in that important
+    locality.
+
+
+I cannot afford my readers a more accurate idea of the present state
+of piracy in the Malayan Archipelago, of the best mode of suppressing
+it, and of the vast field which the island of Borneo offers for the
+extension of British commerce, than by quoting a few of Mr. Brooke's
+observations on these important subjects, written before the operations
+of the squadron under command of Rear-Admiral Sir Thomas Cochrane
+took place, of which an account will be given in Chapter XXII. With
+reference to the first topic, piracy, Mr. Brooke remarks:--
+
+"The piracy of the Eastern Archipelago is entirely distinct from
+piracy in the Western world; for, from the condition of the various
+governments, the facilities offered by natural situation, and the total
+absence of all restraint from European nations, the pirate communities
+have attained an importance on the coasts and islands most removed from
+foreign settlements. Thence they issue forth and commit depredations on
+the native trade, enslave the inhabitants at the entrance of rivers,
+and attack ill-armed or stranded European vessels; and roving from
+place to place, they find markets for their slaves and plunder.
+
+"The old-established Malay governments (such as Borneo and Sooloo),
+weak and distracted, are, probably without exception, participators
+in or victims to piracy; and in many cases both--purchasing from
+one set of pirates, and enslaved and plundered by another; and while
+their dependencies are abandoned, the unprotected trade languishes
+from the natural dread of the better-disposed natives to undertake
+a coasting voyage.
+
+"It is needless to dwell upon the evil effects of piracy; but before
+venturing an opinion on the most effectual means of suppression,
+I propose briefly to give an account of such pirate communities as
+I am acquainted with.
+
+"The pirates on the coast of Borneo may be classed into those who
+make long voyages in large heavy-armed prahus, such as the Illanuns,
+Balignini, &c., and the lighter Dyak fleets, which make short but
+destructive excursions in swift prahus, and seek to surprise rather
+than openly to attack their prey. A third, and probably the worst
+class, are usually half-bred Arab seriffs, who, possessing themselves
+of the territory of some Malay state, form a nucleus for piracy,
+a rendezvous and market for all the roving fleets; and although
+occasionally sending out their own followers, they more frequently
+seek profit by making advances, in food, arms, and gunpowder, to all
+who will agree to repay them at an exorbitant rate in slaves.
+
+"The Dyaks of Sarebus and Sakarran were under the influence of two
+Arab seriffs, who employed them on piratical excursions, and shared
+in equal parts the plunder obtained. I had once the opportunity of
+counting ninety-eight boats about to start on a cruise; and reckoning
+the crew of each boat at the moderate average of twenty-five men,
+it gives a body of 2450 men on a piratical excursion. The piracies
+of these Arab seriffs and their Dyaks were so notorious, that it is
+needless to detail them here; but one curious feature, which throws
+a light on the state of society, I cannot forbear mentioning. On all
+occasions of a Dyak fleet being about to make a piratical excursion,
+a gong was beat round the town ordering a particular number of Malays
+to embark; and in case any one failed to obey, he was fined the sum
+of thirty rupees by the seriff of the place.
+
+"The blow struck by Captain Keppel of her majesty's ship Dido on these
+two communities was so decisive as to have put an entire end to their
+piracies; the leaders Seriff Sahib and Seriff Muller have fled, the
+Malay population has been dispersed, and the Dyaks so far humbled,
+as to sue for protection; and in future, by substituting local Malay
+rulers of good character in lieu of the piratical seriffs, a check
+will be placed on the Dyaks, and they may be broken of their piratical
+habits, in as far as interferes with the trade of the coast.
+
+"The next pirate horde we meet with is a mixed community of
+Illanuns and Badjows (or sea-gipsys) located at Tampasuk, a few
+miles up a small river; they are not formidable in number, and their
+depredations are chiefly committed on the Spanish territory; their
+market, until recently, being Bruni, or Borneo Proper. They might
+readily be dispersed and driven back to their own country; and the
+Dusuns, or villagers (as the name signifies), might be protected and
+encouraged. Seriff Houseman, a half-bred Arab, is located in Malludu
+Bay, and has, by account, from fifteen hundred to two thousand men with
+him. He is beyond doubt a pirate direct and indirect, and occasionally
+commands excursions in person, or employs the Illanuns of Tampasuk,
+and others to the eastward, who for their own convenience make common
+cause with him. He has no pretension to the territory he occupies;
+and the authority he exerts (by means of his piratical force) over
+the interior tribes in his vicinity, and on the island of Palawan,
+is of the worst and most oppressive description. This seriff has
+probably never come in contact with any Europeans, and consequently
+openly professes to hold their power in scorn.
+
+"To my own knowledge Seriff Houseman seized and sold into slavery
+a boat's crew (about twenty men) of the Sultana, a merchant ship,
+which was burned in the Palawan passage. Within the last few months he
+has plundered and burned a European vessel stranded near the Mangsi
+Isles; and to show his entire independence of control, his contempt
+for European power, and his determination to continue in his present
+course, he has threatened to attack the city of Bruni, in consequence
+of the Bruni government having entered into a treaty with her majesty's
+government for the discouragement and suppression of piracy. This fact
+speaks volumes; an old-established and recognized Malay government is
+to be attacked by a lawless adventurer, who has seized on a portion
+of its territory, and lives by piracy, for venturing to treat with a
+foreign power for the best purposes. If any further proof of piracy
+were requisite, it would readily be established by numerous witnesses
+(themselves the victims), and by the most solemn declaration of
+the Bruni authorities, that peaceful traders on the high seas have
+been stopped by the prahus of this seriff and his allies, their
+vessel seized, their property plundered, and their persons enslaved;
+numerous witnesses could attest their having been reduced to slavery
+and detained in the very household of Seriff Houseman! When, however,
+the facts of his having sold into slavery the crew of a British vessel
+(which has been established before the Singapore authorities) come
+to be known, I conceive every other proof of the character of this
+person is completely superfluous.
+
+"The indirect piracy of Seriff Houseman is even more mischievous
+than what is directly committed; for he supplies the Balagnini
+(a restless piratical tribe, hereafter to be mentioned) with food,
+powder, arms, salt, &c. under the agreement that they pay him on
+their return from the cruise, at the rate of five slaves for every
+100 rupees' worth of goods. The Balagnini are in consequence enabled,
+through his assistance, to pirate effectively, which otherwise they
+would not be able to do; as, from their locality, they would find it
+difficult to obtain fire-arms and gunpowder. The most detestable part
+of this traffic, however, is Seriff Houseman selling, in cold blood,
+such of these slaves as are Borneons, to Pangeran Usop, of Bruni,
+for 100 rupees for each slave, and Pangeran Usop re-selling each
+for 200 rupees to their relations in Bruni. Thus, this vile seriff
+(without taking into account the enormous prices charged for his
+goods in the first instance) gains 500 per cent for every slave, and
+Pangeran Usop clears 100 per cent on the flesh of his own countrymen,
+thereby _de facto_ becoming a party to piracy, though doubtless veiled
+under the guise of compassion.
+
+"More might be added on the subject of the piracies committed by this
+seriff; and it could easily be shown that the evils accruing from
+them affect, not only the peaceful trader, but extend to the peaceful
+agriculturist; but, for the sake of brevity, I deem it sufficient to
+add, that he exercises the same malign influence on the north coast as
+Seriff Sahib exercised on the northwest; and that, having surrounded
+himself by a body of pirates, he arrogates the rights of sovereignty,
+defies European power, contemns every right principle, and threatens
+the recognized and legitimate governments of the Archipelago.
+
+"The Balagnini inhabit a cluster of small islands somewhere in the
+vicinity of Sooloo; they are of the Badjow or sea-gipsy tribe, a
+wandering race, whose original country has never been ascertained. At
+present, as far as I can learn, they are not dependent on Sooloo,
+though it is probable they may be encouraged by some of the rajahs
+of that place, and that they find a slave market there.
+
+"The Balagnini cruise in large prahus, and to each prahu a fleet
+sampan is attached, which, on occasion, can carry from ten to fifteen
+men. They seldom carry large guns, like the Illanuns, but in addition
+to their other arms, big lelas (brass pieces, carrying from a one
+to a three pound ball), spears, swords, &c. They use long poles with
+barbed iron points, with which, during an engagement or flight, they
+hook their prey. By means of the fleet sampans already mentioned,
+they are able to capture all small boats; and it is a favorite device
+with them to disguise one or two men, while the rest lie concealed
+in the bottom of the boat, and thus to surprise prahus at sea, and
+fishermen or others at the mouths of rivers. By being disguised as
+Chinese they have carried off numbers of that nation from the Sambas
+and Pontiana rivers. The cruising-grounds of these pirates are very
+extensive; they frequently make the circuit of Borneo, proceed as far
+as the south of Celebes, and in the other direction have been met off
+Tringanu, Calantan, and Patani. Gillolo and the Moluccas lie within
+easy range, and it is probable that Papua is occasionally visited by
+them. It will readily be conceived how harassing to trade must be the
+continued depredations of the Balagnini pirates, and more especially
+to the trade of Bruni, which seems, from the unwarlike habits of the
+natives, the chosen field of their operations. The number of Borneons
+yearly taken into slavery is very considerable, as a fleet of six
+or eight boats usually hangs about the island of Labuan, to cut off
+the trade, and to catch the inhabitants of the city. The Borneons,
+from being so harassed by these pirates, call the easterly wind 'the
+pirate wind.' The Balagnini commence cruising on the northwest coast
+about the middle of March, and return, or remove to the eastern side
+of the island, about the end of November.
+
+"Of Magindano, or Mindanao, we are at the present time very ignorant;
+but we know that the inhabitants are warlike and numerous, and that
+that part of the island called Illanun Bay sends forth the most daring
+pirates of the Archipelago. The first step requisite is to gain more
+information concerning them, to form an acquaintance with some of
+their better-disposed chiefs, and subsequently we might act against
+them with a suitable force; but it would be rash and premature, in
+the present state of our knowledge, to come in contact with them in
+their own country. On one occasion I met eighteen Illanun boats on
+neutral ground, and learned from their two chiefs that they had been
+two years absent from home; and from the Papuan negro-slaves on board
+it was evident that their cruise had extended from the most eastern
+islands of the Archipelago to the north-western coast of Borneo.
+
+"Having now enumerated the pirates I have become acquainted with
+since my residence in Sarawak, I shall proceed to offer an opinion
+of the best mode for the suppression of piracy in these seas.
+
+"In the first place, a blow should be struck at the piratical
+communities with which we are already acquainted, and struck with
+a force which should convince all other pirates of the hopelessness
+of resistance; subsequently the recognized Malay governments may be
+detached from all communication with pirates; and, joining conciliation
+with punishment, laying down the broad distinction of piracy and no
+piracy, we may foster those who abandon their evil habits, and punish
+those who adhere to them.
+
+"A system of supervision will, however, be necessary to carry out these
+measures: our knowledge of the native states must be improved; and as
+we become able to discriminate between the good and the bad, our sphere
+of action may be enlarged, and we may act with decision against all
+descriptions of pirates; against the indirect as well as the direct
+pirate; against the receiver of stolen goods as well as the thief;
+and against the promoter as well as the actual perpetrator of piracy.
+
+"I would especially urge that, to eradicate the evil, the pirate-haunts
+must be burned and destroyed, and the communities dispersed; for merely
+to cruise against pirate-prahus, and to forbear attacking them until we
+see them commit a piracy, is a hopeless and an endless task, harassing
+to our men, and can be attended with but very partial and occasional
+success; whereas, on the contrary principle, what pirate would venture
+to pursue his vocation if his home be endangered--if he be made to
+feel in his own person the very ills he inflicts upon others?
+
+"A question may arise as to what constitutes piracy; and whether,
+in our efforts to suppress it, we may not be interfering with the
+right of native states to war one upon another. On the first point,
+it appears clear to me, that the plunder or seizure of a peaceful
+and lawful trader on the high seas constitutes an act of piracy,
+without any reference to the nation or color of the injured party;
+for if we limit our construction of piracy, we shall, in most cases,
+be in want of sufficient evidence to convict, and the whole native
+trade of the Archipelago will be left at the mercy of pirates, much
+to the injury of our own commerce and of our settlement of Singapore.
+
+"On the second point, we can only concede the right of war to
+recognized states; and even then we must carefully avoid introducing
+the refinements of European international law among a rude and
+semi-civilized people, who will make our delicacy a cloak for
+crime, and declare war merely for the sake of committing piracy with
+impunity. On the contrary, all chiefs who have seized on territory and
+arrogate independence (making this independence a plea for piracy)
+can never be allowed the right of declaring war, or entering on
+hostilities with their neighbors; for, as I have before remarked,
+all native trade must in that case be at an end, as the piratical
+chiefs, no longer in dread of punishment from European powers, would
+doubtless declare war against every unwarlike native state which they
+did not need as a market for the sale of their slaves and plunder.
+
+"Practically acting, however, on the broad principle, that the seizure
+of any lawful trader constitutes piracy, I consider no injustice could
+be done to the native states, and no interference occur with their
+acknowledged rights; for in practice it would be easy to discriminate
+a war between native nations from the piracies of lawless hordes of
+men; and without some such general principle, no executive officer
+could act with the requisite decision and promptitude to insure the
+eradication of this great evil.
+
+"With a post such as is proposed to be established, our measures for
+the suppression of piracy (after the punishment of Seriff Houseman
+and the Balagnini) would advance step by step, as our knowledge
+increased, and with alternate conciliation and severity, as the
+case might require. By detaching the recognised governments from the
+practice, and gradually forming among the chief men a friendly and
+English party opposed to piracy, we should, I doubt not, speedily
+obtain our principal object of clearing the sea of marauders, and
+ultimately correct the natural propensity of the natives for piracy.
+
+"In order to extend our commerce in these seas generally, and more
+particularly on the N.W. coast of Borneo, it is requisite, 1st, that
+piracy be suppressed; 2dly, that the native governments be settled,
+so as to afford protection to the poorer and producing classes; and,
+3dly, that our knowledge of the interior should be extended, and our
+intercourse with the various tribes more frequent.
+
+"That our commerce may be largely extended is so clear that I shall
+not stop to detail the productions of the island of Borneo, as it
+will suffice here to state generally that all authorities agree in
+representing it as one of the richest portions of the globe, and in
+climate, soil, and mineral and vegetable productions, inferior to no
+portion of the same extent.
+
+"If these opinions be true--and from my experience I believe them to be
+so--it follows that the materials for an extensive and extended trade
+exist, and only require development, while a numerous and industrious,
+though wild population, which inhabits the interior, is debarred from
+all intercourse with Europeans from the badness of Malay government.
+
+"On the first requisite for the development of commerce I need add
+nothing further, as it is a duty incumbent on all governments to
+eradicate piracy at any cost; and in the present case it would not
+be found a difficult or tedious task.
+
+"A post like Labuan or Balambangan would, beyond doubt, give an
+impetus to trade, merely from the freedom from all restrictions,
+and the absence of all exactions, which the natives would enjoy;
+and (piracy being checked) countries which now lie fallow would,
+from their proximity, be induced to bring their produce into market.
+
+"This limited extension is, however, of little moment when compared
+with the results which must attend our exerting a beneficial influence
+over the native governments for the purposes of affording protection
+to the poorer classes, insuring safety to the trader, and opening a
+field for the planter or the miner.
+
+"The slightest acquaintance with the northwest coast of Borneo would
+convince any observer of the ease with which these objects might be
+effected; for the native government, being in a state of decadence,
+requires protection, and would willingly act justly toward traders and
+capitalists, and encourage their enterprises, in order to continue on
+friendly terms with any European power located in their vicinity. The
+numerous rivers on the coast, with their local rulers, are harassed
+by the demands of every petty Pangeran; and while the sovereign is
+defrauded of his revenue, which the people would cheerfully pay, and
+his territory ruined, this host of useless retainers (acting always
+in his name) gain but very slight personal profits to counterbalance
+all the mischief they do.
+
+"The principal feature is the weakness of the governments, both of the
+capital and its dependencies; and in consequence of this weakness there
+is a strong desire for European protection, for European enterprise,
+and for any change effected by Europeans. Supposing Labuan to be
+taken as a naval post, I consider that European capital might with
+safety be employed in Bruni.
+
+"In the rivers contiguous to Sarawak the presence of Europeans would
+be hailed with joy, not only by the Dyaks, but by the Malays; and
+subsequently it would depend on their own conduct to what degree they
+retained the good-will of the natives; but with ordinary conciliation,
+and a decent moral restraint on their actions, I feel assured that
+their persons and property would be safe, and no obstruction offered
+to fair trade or to mining operations.
+
+"Supposing, as I have before said, the occupation of Labuan by the
+English, our influence over the government of Bruni would be complete;
+and one of our principal objects would be to maintain this ascendency,
+as a means of extending our trade.
+
+"Our position at Labuan would, it must be borne in mind, differ
+from the position we occupied in relation to the native princes
+in Singapore. In the latter case, the native princes were without
+means, without followers, and with a paltry and useless territory,
+and became our pensioners. In the case of Labuan, we shall have an
+acknowledged independent state in our vicinity; and for the prosperity
+of our settlement we must retain our ascendency by the support of
+the government of Muda Hassim. Let our influence be of the mildest
+kind; let us, by supporting the legitimate government, ameliorate the
+condition of the people by this influence; let us pay every honor to
+the native princes; let us convince them of our entire freedom from all
+selfish views of territorial aggrandizement on the mainland of Borneo,
+and we shall enjoy so entire a confidence that virtually the coast
+will become our own without the trouble or expense of possession. I
+have impressed it on the Rajah Muda Hassim and Pangeran Budrudeen,
+that the readiest and most direct way of obtaining revenues from their
+various possessions will be by commuting all their demands for a stated
+yearly sum of money from each; and by this direct taxation, to which
+Muda Hassim and his brother seem ready to accede, the system of fraud
+and exaction would be abolished, the native mind tranquillized, and
+the legitimate government would become the protector rather than the
+oppressor of its dependencies. By this measure, likewise, a tone might
+be imparted to the native chiefs and rulers of rivers, and the people
+at large taught to feel that, after the payment of a specified sum,
+a right existed to resist all extra demands. Beside this, these rajahs
+are convinced that a certain yearly revenue is what they require,
+and is the only means by which they can retain their independence;
+and I have impressed it on their minds that, to gain a revenue,
+they must foster trade and protect Europeans in their dealings.
+
+"If Labuan were English, and if the sea were clear of pirates, I
+see no obstacle to bringing these and other measures into immediate
+operation; and I am assured we should have the sincere and hearty
+cooperation of the Borneon government.
+
+"Since the advent of Europeans in the Archipelago, the tendency of
+the Polynesian governments generally has been to decay; here the
+experiment may be fairly tried on the smallest scale of expense,
+whether a beneficial European influence may not reanimate a falling
+state, and at the same time extend our own commerce. We are here devoid
+of the stimulus which has urged us on to conquest in India. We incur
+no risk of the collision of the two races: we occupy a small station
+in the vicinity of a friendly and unwarlike people; and we aim at
+the development of native countries through native agency.
+
+"If this tendency to decay and extinction be inevitable; if this
+adaptation of European policy to a native state be found unable to
+arrest the fall of the Borneon government, yet we shall retain a people
+already habituated to European manners, industrious interior races,
+and at a future period, if deemed necessary, settlements gradually
+developed in a rich and fertile country. We shall have a post in time
+of war highly advantageous as commanding a favorable position relative
+to China, we shall extend our commerce, suppress piracy, and prevent
+the present and prospective advantages from falling into other hands;
+and we shall do this at small expense.
+
+"I own the native development through their own exertions is but a
+favorite theory; but whatever may be the fate of the government of
+Borneo, the people will still remain; and if they be protected and
+enabled to live in quiet security, I cannot entertain a doubt of the
+country's becoming a highly productive one, eminently calculated as
+a field for British enterprise and capital.
+
+"If the development of the resources of the country can be effected by
+its native rulers it will be a noble task performed; but if it fail,
+the people of the coast will still advance and form governments for
+themselves under British influence.
+
+"In concluding this hasty and general view of the subject, I may remark
+that commerce might be extended and capital laid out on the northwest
+coast of Borneo, to an amount to which it is difficult to fix limits,
+as the country is capable of producing most articles of commerce
+in demand from this quarter of the world, and the natives (who, as
+far as we know them, are an unwarlike, mild, and industrious race)
+would receive our manufactures, from which they are now in a great
+measure debarred. I have not alluded to any other countries of the
+Archipelago: for we must first become acquainted with them; we must
+become intimate, cultivate an English party, and accustom them to our
+manners; and probably the same conciliatory policy, the same freedom
+from design, which has succeeded in Borneo, will succeed elsewhere,
+if pushed with temper and patience.
+
+"The general principle ought to be--to encourage established
+governments, such as those of Borneo and Sooloo, provided they will
+with all sincerity abandon piracy, and assist in its suppression;
+but at the same time, by supervision to convince ourselves of the
+fact, and keep them in the right path; for all treaties with these
+native states (and we have had several) are but so much waste paper,
+unless we see them carried into execution.
+
+"I have now only to mention the third means for the extension of
+commerce. Our intercourse with the natives of the interior should be
+frequent and intimate: these people (beyond where I am acquainted with
+them) are represented as very numerous, hospitable, and industrious;
+and a friendly intercourse would develop the resources of their
+country, draw its produce to our markets, and give the natives a taste
+for British manufactures. This intercourse, however, must be prudently
+introduced and carefully advanced; for to bring these wild people into
+contact with ignorant and arrogant Europeans would produce bloodshed
+and confusion in a month. In Borneo, it is an advantage that the two
+races can not come in collision; for from its climate it precludes
+all idea of colonization; and that which is next to an impossibility,
+the maintaining a good understanding between ignorant civilized
+men and ignorant savages. It is a field for commerce and capital,
+but no violent change of native customs should be attempted; and in
+this way alone, by gradual means, can we really benefit the natives
+and ourselves. When we consider the amount of produce obtained from
+the countries of the Archipelago, and their consumption of British
+manufactures, under the worst forms of government, living in a state
+of distraction and insecurity, and exposed to the depredations of
+pirates at sea, we may form some idea how vast may be the increase,
+should peace and security be introduced among them; and judging of
+the future by the past--by the limited experiment made at Sarawak--we
+may hope that the task is neither so difficult nor so uncertain as
+was formerly supposed."
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII.
+
+    Arrival of Captain Bethune and Mr. Wise.--Mr. Brooke appointed
+    her Majesty's Agent in Borneo.--Sails for Borneo Proper.--Muda
+    Hassim's measures for the suppression of piracy.--Defied by
+    Seriff Houseman.--Audience of the Sultan, Muda Hassim, and
+    the Pangerans.--Visit to Labuan.--Comparative eligibility
+    of Labuan and Balambangan for settlement.--Coal discovered
+    in Labuan.--Mr. Brooke goes to Singapore and visits Admiral
+    Sir T. Cochrane.--The upas-tree.--Proceeds with the Admiral
+    to Borneo Proper.--Punishment of Pangeran Usop.--The
+    battle of Malludu.--Seriff Houseman obliged to fly.--Visit
+    to Balambangan.--Mr. Brooke parts with the Admiral, and goes
+    to Borneo Proper.--An attempt of Pangeran Usop defeated.--His
+    flight, and pursuit by Pangeran Budrudeen.--Triumphant reception
+    of Mr. Brooke in Borneo.--Returns to Sarawak.
+
+
+"_February 25th._--Borneo River, H.M.S. Driver. Scarcely, on the 17th,
+had I finished writing, when a boat from her majesty's steamer Driver,
+bringing Captain Bethune and my friend Wise, arrived. How strange,
+the same day, and almost the same hour, I was penning my doubts and
+difficulties, when a letter arrives from Lord Aberdeen appointing
+me confidential agent in Borneo to her majesty, and directing me to
+proceed to the capital, with a letter addressed to the sultan and the
+Rajah Muda Hassim, in reply to the documents requesting the assistance
+of the British government to effect the suppression of piracy.
+
+"My friend Wise I was glad to see, and a few hours' conversation
+convinced me how greatly I have been indebted to his exertions
+for success and my present position. His knowledge of trade,
+his cheerfulness regarding our pecuniary future, all impart
+confidence. Thus I may say, without much self-flattery, that the
+first wedge has been driven which may rive Borneo open to commerce and
+civilization, which may bestow happiness on its inhabitants. Captain
+Bethune is commissioned to report on the best locality for a settlement
+or station on the N.W. coast. I will only say here that no other
+person's appointment would have pleased me so well: he is intelligent,
+educated, and liberal, and in concert with him I am too happy to work.
+
+"On the 18th of February the Driver arrived; on the 21st left Sarawak,
+and at noon of the 24th arrived at the anchorage in Borneo river,
+having towed the gun-boat against the N.E. monsoon. Mr. Williamson was
+dispatched to Borneo, and found all right. They were delighted with
+our coming and our mission, and the sultan himself has laid aside his
+fears. A few presents have been sent, which will delight the natives,
+and all will prosper.
+
+"_26th._--Budrudeen arrived, and from him I learned the politics
+of Borneo since my last visit, when Muda Hassim was reinstated in
+authority.
+
+"As my mission refers more especially to piracy, I may here notice Muda
+Hassim's measures relative to that subject. Shortly after his arrival
+he addressed a letter to the Illanuns of Tampasuk, informing them of
+the engagement with the English to discourage and suppress piracy,
+advising them to desist, and ordering them not to visit Borneo until
+he (Muda Hassim) was convinced they were pirates no longer. This is
+good and candid. Muda Hassim at the same time requested Seriff Schaik
+to address a communication to Seriff Houseman of Malludu, acquainting
+him with his engagements, and the resolve of the Europeans to suppress
+piracy, adding that he was friends with the English, and no man could
+be friends with the English who encouraged piracy. The answer to this
+letter of Seriff Schaik, as far as I have yet learned, is a positive
+defiance. Three months since, I am informed, a brig or schooner was
+wrecked at a place called Mangsi, and she has been completely plundered
+and burned by Seriff Houseman: her cargo consisted of red woolens,
+fine white cloths, Turkey red cotton handkerchiefs, tin, pepper,
+Malacca canes, ratans, &c., &c. This evidently is a vessel bound to
+China, whether English or not is doubtful: the crew have not been
+heard of or seen here; and it is to be hoped may have reached Manilla.
+
+"_28th._--Borneo, or Bruni city. Left the Driver at 9 A.M. in the
+gun-boat, with the pinnace and cutter in company: a fine breeze carried
+us to Pulo Chermin, and nearly the whole way to Pulo Combong, where
+we met with the state-boat bearing the letter. We entered the town
+straggling, and _the letter_ having been received with firing of guns,
+banners displayed, and all the respect due to a royal communication,
+we were dragged in haste to the audience; the sultan on his throne,
+Muda Hassim and every principal Pangeran waiting for us--Pangeran Usop
+to boot. The letter was read; twenty-one guns fired. I told them in
+all civility that I was deputed by her majesty the queen to express
+her feelings of good will, and to offer every assistance in repressing
+piracy in these seas. The sultan stared. Muda Hassim said, 'We are
+greatly indebted; it is good, very good.' Then, heated, and sunburned,
+and tired, we took leave, and retired to the house prepared for us.
+
+"_March, 1st._--A long conference with Budrudeen, when, I believe,
+we exhausted all the important topics of Borneo politics: subsequently
+we visited Muda Hassim and the sultan. The latter was profuse in his
+kind expressions, and inquired of the interpreter when the English
+would come to Labuan, adding, 'I want to have the Europeans near
+me.' On this head, however, he gained no information. The presents
+were given to the sultan and rajah.
+
+"_5th._--In the evening visited Muda Hassim, and heard news from
+Malludu, which, divested of exaggerations, amounted to this: that
+Seriff Houseman was ready to receive us; was fortified, and had
+collected a fleet of boats; and that if the English did not come and
+attack him, he would come and attack Borneo, because they were in
+treaty with Europeans. After leaving Muda Hassim, paid the sultan
+a visit.
+
+"_10th._--I have nothing to say of our departure. Budrudeen accompanied
+us to the Mooarra, and thence, on Friday evening, we crossed to the
+anchorage of Labuan.
+
+"_12th._--Labuan. An island of about fifty feet high; twenty-five
+miles in circumference; woody; timber good; water from wells and
+a few small streams, which, after a drought, are dry; natives say
+water never fails. Anchorage good for the climate; well protected
+from the N.E.; not extensive; situation of contemplated town low;
+climate healthy, _i.e._, the same as Borneo; soil, as far as seen,
+sandy or light sandy loam. Coal found near the extreme N.E. point:
+by native reports it is likewise to be found in many other places;
+traces of coal are frequent in the sandstone strata. Anchorage not
+difficult of defense against a European enemy; entrance sufficiently
+broad and deep between two islands, with a shoal: vide chart. The
+island of Labuan, for the purposes of refuge for shipwrecked vessels,
+of a windward post relative to China, for the suppression of piracy,
+and the extension of our trade, is well suited; it is no paradise,
+and any other island, with good climate, wood, and water, would suit
+as well. Its powerful recommendation is its being in the neighborhood
+of an unwarlike and friendly people. There is no other island on
+the N.W. coast, and the abandoned Balambangan, to the northward of
+Borneo, is the only other place which could by possibility answer. The
+comparison between Balambangan and Labuan may be stated as follows:
+Balambangan, as a windward post relative to China, is superior, and it
+commands in time of war the inner passage to Manilla, and the eastern
+passages to China by the Straits of Makassar. Of its capabilities
+of defense we know nothing. It was surprised by the Sooloos. Its
+climate was not well spoken of. The island is larger than that of
+Labuan, and, as far as we know, has no coal. The great, and to me
+conclusive consideration against Balambangan is, that it is in the
+very nest of pirates, and surrounded by warlike and hostile people;
+and that to render it secure and effective, at least double the force
+would be necessary there that would suffice at Labuan. If Labuan
+succeeds and pays its own expenses, we might then take Balambangan;
+for the next best thing to a location on the main is to influence the
+people thereon by a succession of insular establishments. Yesterday
+we made an agreeable excursion to the n.e. point of Labuan; near
+the point it is picturesque, the cliffs are bold and cave-worn; the
+trees hang over the cliffs, or encroach on the intermediate sands,
+till they kiss the wave. Near a small cavern we discovered a seam of
+coal, which afforded us employment while Captain Bethune and Mr. Wise
+walked to obtain a view of the southern coast of the island.
+
+"_Bruni, 21st May, 1845._--After a longer time passed in Singapore than
+I wished, we at length started, in the Phlegethon steamer, for this
+city. At Singapore I had several interviews with Sir Thomas Cochrane.
+
+"_22d._--On the authority of Sulerman, an intelligent Meri man, I am
+told that the tree below the town is the real upas, called by the
+Meri men _tajim_--the Borneons call it _upas_. _Bina_ (the name we
+formerly got from a Borneon for upas) is, by Sulerman's statement,
+a thin creeper, the root or stem of which, being steeped in water,
+is added to the upas, to increase the poisonous quality; it is not,
+however, poisonous in itself. There is another creeper, likewise called
+bina, the leaves of which are steeped and mixed with the upas, instead
+of the stem of the first sort. This information may be relied on (in
+the absence of personal knowledge), as the man is of a tribe which uses
+the sumpitan, and is constantly in the habit of preparing the poison.
+
+"_August 8th._--Off Ujong Sapo, at the entrance of Borneo river. The
+time since I last added to my most desultory journal is easily
+accounted for. I have been at Singapore and Malacca, and am now
+anchored off Borneo Proper, with seven vessels, and an eighth is
+hourly expected. It is difficult, with such a force, to be moderate;
+and, with Sir Thomas Cochrane's other duties and engagements, it is
+probably impossible to devote any length of time on this coast; yet
+moderation and time are the key-stones of our policy. I have settled
+all the ceremonial for a meeting between the sultan and the admiral.
+
+"The Pangeran Budrudeen came on board H.M.S. Agincourt, with every
+circumstance of state and ceremony, and met the admiral, I acting
+as interpreter. It was pleasing to witness his demeanor and bearing,
+which proved that, in minds of a certain quality, the power of command,
+though over savages, gives ease and freedom. The ship, the band,
+the marines, the guns, all excited Budrudeen's attention. On the 9th,
+it is arranged that the admiral shall meet the sultan and the rajah.
+
+"_9th._--In the course of the day, after the audience had terminated,
+the admiral made his demand of reparation on the sultan and Muda
+Hassim for the detention and confinement of two British subjects
+subsequent to their agreement with the British government. Of course,
+the sultan and the rajah replied that they were not in fault; that
+the act was Pangeran Usop's, and that he was too powerful for them
+to control by force. If Sir Thomas Cochrane would punish him, they
+should be much obliged, as they desired to keep the treaty inviolate.
+
+"_10th._--Pangeran Usop had to be summoned; come he would not, and yet
+I was in hopes that, when he saw the overwhelming force opposed to him,
+his pride would yield to necessity. About 2 P.M. the steamers took up
+their positions; the marines were landed, every thing was prepared,
+yet no symptom of obedience. At length a single shot was fired from
+the Vixen, by the admiral's order, through the roof of Usop's house,
+which was instantly returned, thus proving the folly and the temper
+of the man. In a few minutes his house was tenantless, having been
+overwhelmed with shot. Usop was a fugitive; the amount of mischief
+done inconsiderable, and no damage except to the guilty party. Twenty
+captured guns the admiral presented to the sultan and the rajah;
+two he kept, from which to remunerate the two detained men. So far
+nothing could be more satisfactory. Usop has been punished severely,
+the treaty strictly enforced, and our supremacy maintained. No evil has
+been done except to the guilty; his house and his property alone have
+suffered, and the immediate flight has prevented the shedding of blood.
+
+"_11th._--At mid-day the admiral, with the Vixen and Nemesis, went
+down the river, leaving the Pluto to me, to follow in next day.
+
+"_12th._--This morning I visited the sultan in company with Muda
+Hassim. By twelve at night the Pluto was anchored in the creek at
+Labuan, and on the 13th I once more took up my quarters aboard the
+flag-ship.
+
+"_14th._--Wooding.
+
+"_16th._--Last evening anchored within the point called in the chart
+Sampormangio, or, properly, Sampang Mengayu, which, being translated,
+signifies piratical or cruising waiting-place. The weather was thick
+and squally, and it was late before the Daedalus and Vestal arrived
+with their tows, the Nemesis and Pluto, the former frigate having
+carried away her mizzen top-mast.
+
+"_17th._--Squadron under weigh pretty early, getting into Malludu
+Bay. After breakfast, had a very heavy squall. Agincourt heeled
+to it, and sails of various sorts and sizes were blowing about in
+ribbons aboard some of the ships: afterward brought up nearly off
+the Melow river.
+
+"_18th._--Vixen, Nemesis, Pluto, and boats, proceeded up the bay, and
+anchored as near as possible to the entrance of the Marudu, or Malludu
+river. The character of Malludu bay generally may be described as clear
+of danger, with high, wooded banks on either side, till in the bight,
+when the land gets flat and mangrovy, and the water shallow, and where
+the mouths of several small rivers are seen, one of which is Malludu.
+
+"_19th._--On the 19th of August was fought the celebrated battle
+of Malludu; the boats, 24 in number, and containing 550 marines
+and blue-jackets, having left the previous afternoon. As I was not
+present, I can say only what I heard from others, and from what I
+know from subsequently viewing the position. A narrow river with two
+forts mounting eleven or twelve heavy guns (and defended by from 500
+to 1000 fighting men), protected by a strong and well-contrived boom,
+was the position of the enemy. Our boats took the bull by the horns,
+and indeed had little other choice; cut away part of the boom under a
+heavy fire; advanced, and carried the place in a fight protracted for
+fifty minutes. The enemy fought well and stood manfully to their guns;
+and a loss of six killed, two mortally and fifteen severely wounded,
+on our side, was repaid by a very heavy loss of killed and wounded on
+theirs. Gallant Gibbard, [19] of the Wolverine, fell mortally wounded
+while working at the boom, ax in hand. In short, the engagement was
+severe and trying to our men from the fire they were exposed to. At
+two minutes to nine, aboard the Vixen, we heard the report of the
+first heavy gun, and it was a time of anxiety and uneasiness till
+the first column of black smoke proclaimed that the village was fired.
+
+"I may here mention that before the fight commenced a flag of truce
+came from the enemy, and asked for me. Captain Talbot (in command)
+offered to meet Seriff Houseman either within or without the boom,
+provided his whole force was with him. Seriff Houseman declined; but
+offered (kind man!) to admit two gigs to be hauled over the boom. No
+sooner was this offer declined, and the flag returned the second time
+with a young Seriff, son of Seriff Layak of Bruni, than the enemy
+opened fire, which was promptly returned. Had Captain Talbot entered
+as proposed, I deem it certain he would never have quitted the place
+alive; for the Seriff and his followers had made themselves up to
+fight, and nothing but fight. Many chiefs were killed; two or three
+Seriffs in their large turbans and flowing robes; many Illanuns in
+their gay dresses and golden charms; many Badjows; many slaves--among
+them a captive Chinaman; many were wounded; many carried away; and
+many left on the ground dead or dying.
+
+"_20th._--On the evening of the 19th a detachment of ten boats, with
+fresh men and officers, quitted the Vixen, and arrived at the forts
+shortly after daylight. I accompanied this party; and the work of
+destruction, well begun yesterday, was this day completed. Numerous
+proofs of the piracies of this Seriff came to light. The boom was
+ingeniously fastened with the chain cable of a vessel of 300 or 400
+tons; other chains were found in the town; a ship's long-boat; two
+ship's bells, one ornamented with grapes and vine leaves, and marked
+'Wilhelm Ludwig, Bremen;' and every other description of ship's
+furniture. Some half-piratical boats, Illanun and Balagnini, were
+burned; twenty-four or twenty-five brass guns captured; the iron
+guns, likewise stated to have been got out of a ship, were spiked
+and otherwise destroyed. Thus has Malluda ceased to exist; and Seriff
+Houseman's power received a fall from which it will never recover.
+
+"Amid this scene of war and devastation was one episode which moved
+even harder hearts than mine. Twenty-four hours after the action,
+a poor woman, with her child of two years of age, was discovered in
+a small canoe; her arm was shattered at the elbow by a grape shot;
+and the poor creature lay dying for want of water in an agony of
+pain, with her child playing round her and endeavoring to derive
+the sustenance which the mother could no longer give. This poor
+woman was taken on board the Vixen, and in the evening her arm was
+amputated. To have left her would have been certain death; so I
+was strongly for the measure of taking her to Sarawak, where she
+can be protected. To all my inquiries she answered, 'If you please
+to take me, I shall go. I am a woman, and not a man; I am a slave,
+and not a free woman: do as you like.' She stated too, positively,
+that she herself had seen Seriff Houseman wounded in the neck, and
+carried off; and her testimony is corroborated by two Manilla men, who,
+among others, ran away on the occasion, and sought protection from us,
+who likewise say that they saw the Seriff stretched out in the jungle,
+but they cannot say whether dead or wounded. The proof how great a
+number must have been killed and wounded on their part is, that on
+the following day ten dead men were counted lying where they fell;
+among them was Seriff Mahomed, the bearer of the flag of truce, who,
+though offered our protection, fought to the last, and in the agonies
+of death threw a spear at his advancing foes.
+
+"The remnant of the enemy retired to Bungun; and it will be some time
+before we learn their real loss and position. It is needless here
+to say any thing on the political effects to be expected from the
+establishment of a government in Bruni, and the destruction of this
+worst of piratical communities. When I return to Bruni, and see how
+measures advance, I may mention the subject again; but I will venture
+here to reurge, that mere military force, however necessary, can not
+do what it is desirable should be done. Supervision and conciliation
+must go hand in hand with punishment; and we must watch that the snake
+does not again rear his head through our neglect. The key-stone is
+wanting as yet, and must be supplied if possible; we must, to back
+the gallant deeds of the admiral and fleet, continue to pursue a
+steady course of measures. In the evening returned to the Vixen.
+
+"_21st._--The morning quiet. After breakfast, under weigh; proceeded
+off the river Bankoka, where we found the Cruiser at anchor. As there
+was nothing to detain us, crossed over to the squadron--remained
+an hour aboard Agincourt; then rejoined Sir Thomas Cochrane aboard
+Vixen, and before dinner-time were at anchor in the northeast side
+of Balambangan. Our woman prisoner doing well, and pleased with the
+attention paid her.
+
+"_23d._--Southwestern harbor of Balambangan. Yesterday examined the
+N.E. harbor; a dreary-looking place, sandy and mangrovy, and the harbor
+itself filled with coral patches; here the remains of our former
+settlement were found: it is a melancholy and ineligible spot. The
+S.W. harbor is very narrow and cramped, with no fitting site for a
+town, on account of the rugged and unequal nature of the ground; and if
+the town were crammed in between two eminences, it would be deprived
+of all free circulation of air. Water is, I hear, in sufficient
+quantity, and good. On the whole, I am wretchedly disappointed with
+this island; it has one, and only one recommendation, viz., that it
+is well situated in the Straits for trading and political purposes;
+in every other requisite it is inferior to Labuan. Balambangan is
+commercially and politically well placed. Labuan, though inferior,
+is not greatly inferior in these points; the harbor, the aspect,
+the soil, are superior: it may probably be added, that the climate
+is superior likewise; and we must remember that those who had an
+opportunity of trying both places give the preference to Labuan.
+
+"Then, on other points, Labuan has a clear advantage. It commands the
+coal; it is in the vicinity of a friendly people, and settlement may
+be formed with certainty and at a moderate expense, and with small
+establishments. Can this be done at Balambangan? I own I doubt it;
+the people in the vicinity we know nothing of, but we shall find
+them, in all probability, hostile. The Sooloos we are already too
+well acquainted with. The Illanuns are in the vicinity. In the case
+of Labuan, the details of the first establishment (no small step)
+can be clearly seen and arranged; but I do not see my way regarding
+Balambangan. The matter is of secondary importance, but a languishing
+settlement at first is to be dreaded; food will be scarce, and houses
+difficult to build; while at Labuan the population of Bruni are at
+our disposal, and the government our own. I leave others to judge
+whether a superior (but somewhat similar) position, commercially
+and politically, will outweigh the other disadvantages mentioned,
+and repay us for the extra expenses of the establishment; but, for
+myself, I can give a clear verdict in favor of Labuan.
+
+"_24th._--Buried poor Mr. East, of the Agincourt, on
+Balambangan. Gibbard, poor, gallant fellow, was consigned to the deep
+a day or two before.
+
+"_25th._--A day of disaster and parting: the morning blowy, with an
+unpleasant sea. Vestal ran ashore on a coral-patch, but soon swung
+off. I was very sorry to part with the Agincourt. Farewell, gallant
+Agincourts! farewell, kind admiral! farewell, the pride, pomp, and
+panoply of a flag-ship liner! My occupation's over for the present,
+and I retire with content to solitude and the jungle of Sarawak. I
+step down the huge side, wave a parting adieu, jump on the Cruiser's
+deck--the anchor is weighed, and away we fly.
+
+"_30th._--Coming down in her majesty's ship Cruiser, and now off
+Ujong Sapo. On our passage we had some good views of Kina Balow,
+and from various points; judging the distance by the chart, the angle
+of elevation gives the mountain not less than 12,000 feet and up to
+14,000; the latter result agreeing with the computation of the master
+of the Daedalus.
+
+"_31st._--Started for Bruni, and half way met a boat with Pangeran
+Illudeen, bringing the news of the place. Two days after the admiral
+and his steamers left, Pangeran Usop seized the hill behind his late
+house with 300 Kadiens, and commenced an attack on the town. Pangeran
+Budrudeen on this mustered about the like number and mounted the
+hill, and by a fire of musketry dislodged the enemy, who retired,
+stood again, were again defeated, and finally dispersed. This victory
+raised the courage of the Brunions, and a counter-attack was planned,
+when the arrival of her majesty's ship Espiegle delayed them. As
+the officers of the Espiegle and the rajah could not speak a word
+of each other's language, the boat only stayed a few hours, and went
+away in ignorance of the condition of the town. After her departure,
+Budrudeen gathered about a thousand men of all arms, with some hundred
+muskets; and leaving Bruni at three o'clock in the morning, reached the
+landing-place at 6 A.M., and at eight marched for Barukas, where they
+arrived at one o'clock. On the way the Kadiens humbled themselves, and
+begged their houses might be spared, which were spared accordingly. On
+reaching Barukas, they found Pangeran Usop had been deserted by the
+Kadiens, and was in no way expecting their coming. The few persons who
+remained fled ignominiously, Pangeran Usop showing them the example;
+and his women, children, gold, and other property, fell into the hands
+of his victors. The same evening Budrudeen returned to the city in
+triumph; and there can be no doubt these vigorous measures have not
+only settled them in power, but have likewise raised the spirits
+of their adherents, and awed the few who remain adverse. 'Never,'
+the Brunions exclaim, 'was such a war in Bruni. Pangeran Budrudeen
+fights like a European; the very spirit of the Englishman is in him;
+he has learned this at Sarawak.' Fortune favored Usop's escape. He
+fled to the sea-shore near Pulo Badukan, and there met a boat of
+his entering from Kimanis: he took possession and put out to sea,
+and returned with her to that place.
+
+"Budrudeen we found in active preparation for pursuit. A dozen
+war-prahus were nearly ready for sea, and this force starts directly
+we depart.
+
+"Budrudeen's vigor has given a stimulus to this unwarlike people,
+and he has gained so great a character--victory sits so lightly on
+his plume--that his authority will now be obeyed; while Usop, in
+consequence of his cowardly flight (for so they deem it), from the
+want of energy he has displayed, has lost character as well as wealth,
+and would scarce find ten men in Bruni to follow him. Unluckily for
+himself, he was a great boaster in the days of his prosperity; and
+now the contrast of his past boasting with his present cowardice is
+drawn with a sneer. 'His mouth was brave,' they exclaim, 'but his heart
+timid.' 'He should have died as other great men have died, and not have
+received such shame; he should have amoked, [20] or else given himself
+up for execution.' This seems to be the general impression in the city.
+
+"My mind is now at rest about the fate of my friends; but I still
+consider a man-of-war brig coming here every month or two as of
+great importance; for it will be necessary for the next six months
+to consolidate the power of Muda Hassim and Budrudeen; and if, with
+the new order of things, they constantly see white faces, and find
+that they are quiet and inoffensive, the ignorant terror which now
+prevails will abate. Besides this, we might find the opportunity
+a favorable one for becoming acquainted with the Kadiens and the
+Marats, and giving them just impressions of ourselves; for I have
+no doubt that on the late occasion the Kadiens were worked upon by
+all kinds of false reports of the pale faces taking their lands,
+burning their houses, &c., &c., &c. We only see the effects; we do
+not see (until we become very well acquainted with them) the strings
+which move the passions of these people. The Kadiens are, however, an
+unwarlike and gentle race, and have now given in their submission to
+Muda Hassim. I do not mention the sultan, because, as I before said,
+he is so imbecile that, as regards public affairs, he is a cipher:
+he will some day cease to be sultan, and give place to a better man.
+
+"Our interview with the rajah, with Budrudeen, and all the other host
+of our acquaintance, was quite a triumph--they hot with their success,
+and we bringing the account of Malludu's sanguinary fight. Happy
+faces and wreathed smiles supplied the place of the anxious and
+doubtful expression which I had left them wearing. All vied in their
+attentions; fruit enough to fill a room: the luscious durian, the
+delicate mangosteen and lousch, the grateful rombusteen, the baluna,
+pitabu, mowha, plantain, &c., &c., were showered upon us from all
+quarters. The rajah daily sent a dinner; all was rejoicing, and few
+or no clouds lowered in the distance. I was proud and happy; for I
+felt and feel that much of this has been owing to my exertions. I
+will not stop to say how or why; but I first taught them to respect
+and to confide in Englishmen, and no one else has yet untaught them
+this lesson.
+
+"_September 3d._--After parting interviews we quitted the city at two,
+and arrived aboard her majesty's ship cruiser at eight P.M. To-morrow
+morning we sail for Sarawak, where, at any rate, I hope for rest for
+a month or two.
+
+"_19th._--Sarawak. Thus concludes a large volume. Captain Bethune and
+myself, with Commander Fanshawe and a party of Cruisers, returned from
+a five days' excursion among the Dyaks, having visited the Suntah,
+Stang, Sigo, and Sanpro tribes. It was a progress; at each tribe there
+was dancing, and a number of ceremonies. White fowls were waved as I
+have before described, slaughtered, and the blood mixed with kunyit,
+a yellow root, &c., &c., which delightful mixture was freely scattered
+over them and their goods by me, holding in my hand a dozen or two
+women's necklaces. Captain Bethune has seen and can appreciate the
+Dyaks: to-morrow he leaves me, and most sorry shall I be to lose
+him. A better man or a better public servant is not to be found.
+
+"Among my Dyak inquiries, I found out that the name of their god is
+Tuppa, and not Jovata, which they before gave me, and which they use,
+but do not acknowledge. Tuppa is the great god; eight other gods were
+in heaven; one fell or descended into Java--seven remained above;
+one of these is named Sakarra, who, with his companions and followers,
+is (or is in) the constellation of a cluster of stars, doubtless the
+Pleiades; and by the position of this constellation the Dyaks can
+judge good and bad fortune. If this cluster of stars be high in the
+heavens, success will attend the Dyak; when it sinks below the horizon,
+ill luck follows; fruit and crops will not ripen; war and famine
+are dreaded. Probably originally this was but a simple and natural
+division of the seasons, which has now become a gross superstition.
+
+"The progress is ended; to-morrow I shall be left in the solitude
+and the quiet of the jungle: but, after witnessing the happiness,
+the plenty, the growing prosperity of the Dyak tribes, I can scarcely
+believe that I could devote my life to better purpose, and I dread
+that a removal might destroy what I have already done.
+
+"We must now wait the decision of government with patience. Captain
+Bethune, in making his report, will have the advantage of real
+substantial personal knowledge. I esteem him highly, and regard him
+as a man of the most upright principles, who is not, and will not be
+swayed in his duty by any considerations whatever. I am glad we are
+to stand the ordeal of such a man's inquiry."
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII.
+
+    Borneo, its geographical bounds and leading divisions.--British
+    settlements in 1775.--The province of Sarawak formally ceded by
+    the sultan in perpetuity to Mr. Brooke its present ruler.--General
+    view of the Dyaks, the aborigines of Borneo.--The Dyaks of Sarawak,
+    and adjoining tribes; their past oppression and present position.
+
+
+I will now endeavor to make the reader better acquainted with the
+nature of a country and people so imperfectly known, by offering that
+general view of its past events and present condition which will
+make the information respecting them more intelligible, as well as
+applicable to new circumstances and future measures.
+
+By looking at the map, it will be seen that the island of Borneo
+extends over 11 degrees of latitude and as many of longitude, from
+4 deg. N. to 7 deg. S., and 108 deg. to 119 deg. E. The N.W. coast is but thinly
+populated; and the natives who inhabit the banks of some of the
+beautiful rivers differ, as has been already stated, from each
+other in manners and customs, and have but little communication
+among themselves. The S., E., and N.E. coasts of Borneo are also
+but thinly inhabited, and very little known. There are various
+divisions of Malays, as well as different tribes of Dyaks, who live
+in an unsettled state, and occasionally make war on one another:
+their principal occupation, however, is piracy. The north part of
+the island was once in the possession of the East India Company, who
+had a settlement and factory on the island of Balambangan, which was
+attacked in 1775, when in a weak and unguarded state, by a powerful
+piratical tribe of Sooloos, who surprised the fort, put the sentries
+to death, and turned the guns on the troops, who were chiefly Buguese
+(or Bugis) Malays. Those who escaped got on board the vessels in
+the harbor, and reached the island of Labuan, near the mouth of the
+Borneo river; while the booty obtained by the pirates was estimated
+at 375,000_l._ From that time to this these atrocious pirates have
+never been punished, and still continue their depredations.
+
+The remainder of the coast on the N.W. is now called Borneo Proper,
+to distinguish it from the name that custom has given to the whole
+island, the original name of which was Kalamantan, and Bruni that of
+the town now called Borneo. The latter was probably the first part
+of the coast ever visited by Europeans, who consequently extended
+the appellation to the island itself. The town of Borneo, situated
+on the river of that name, was, until the last few years, a port
+of some wealth, and carrying on an extensive trade, which has been
+ruined entirely by the rapacity of the Malay chiefs, who have now
+but little control over that part of Borneo Proper which lies to the
+northward of the river. The province of Sarawak is situated at the
+S.W. end of Borneo Proper, and was formally ceded in perpetuity by the
+sultan in 1843 to Mr. Brooke, who, indeed, had possessed the almost
+entire management of the district for the two previous years. "It
+extends from Tanjong Datu (I quote from Mr. Brooke's description of
+his territory) to the entrance of the Samarahan river, a distance
+along the coast of about sixty miles in an E.S.E. direction, with
+an average breadth of fifty miles. It is bounded to the westward
+by the Sambas territory, to the southward by a range of mountains
+which separate it from the Pontiana river, and to the eastward by
+the Borneon territory of Sadong. Within this space then are several
+rivers and islands, which it is needless here to describe at length,
+as the account of the river of Sarawak will answer alike for the
+rest. There are two navigable entrances to this river, and numerous
+smaller branches for boats, both to the westward and eastward; the
+two principal entrances combine at about twelve miles from the sea,
+and the river flows for twenty miles into the interior in a southerly
+and westerly direction, when it again forms two branches--one running
+to the right, the other to the left hand, as far as the mountain
+range. Beside these facilities for water-communication, there exist
+three other branches from the easternmost entrance, called Morotaba,
+one of which joins the Samarahan river, and the two others flow from
+different points of the mountain range already mentioned. The country
+is diversified by detached mountains, and the mountain range has an
+elevation of about three thousand feet. The aspect of the country may
+be generally described as low and woody at the entrance of the rivers,
+except a few high mountains; but in the interior undulating in parts,
+and part presenting fine level plains. The climate may be pronounced
+healthy and cool, though for the six months from September to March a
+great quantity of rain falls. During my three visits to this place,
+which have been prolonged to eight months, and since residing here,
+we have been clear of sickness, and during the entire period not one
+of three deaths could be attributed to the effects of climate. The
+more serious maladies of tropical climates are very infrequent; from
+fever and dysentery we have been quite free, and the only complaints
+have been rheumatism, colds, and ague; the latter, however, attacked
+us in the interior, and no one has yet had it at Sarawak, which is
+situated about twenty-five miles from the mouth of the river.
+
+"The soil and productions of this country are of the richest
+description, and it is not too much to say, that, within the same
+given space, there are not to be found the same mineral and vegetable
+riches in any land in the world. I propose to give a brief detail
+of them, beginning with the soil of the plains, which is moist and
+rich, and calculated for the growth of rice, for which purpose
+it was formerly cleared and used, until the distractions of the
+country commenced. From the known industry of the Dyaks, and their
+partiality to rice-cultivation, there can be little doubt that it
+would become an article of extensive export, provided security
+were given to the cultivator and a proper remuneration for his
+produce. The lower grounds, beside rice, are well adapted for the
+growth of sago, and produce canes, rattans, and forest-timber of the
+finest description for ship-building and other useful purposes. The
+Chinese export considerable quantities of timber from Sambas and
+Pontiana, particularly of the kind called Balean by the natives,
+or the lion-wood of the Europeans; and at this place it is to be had
+in far greater quantity and nearer the place of sale. The undulating
+ground differs in soil, some portions of it being a yellowish clay,
+while the rest is a rich mold; these grounds, generally speaking, as
+well as the slopes of the higher mountains, are admirably calculated
+for the growth of nutmegs, coffee, pepper, or any of the more valuable
+vegetable productions of the tropics. Beside the above mentioned
+articles, there are birds'-nests, bees-wax, and several kinds of
+scented wood, in demand at Singapore, which are all collected by the
+Dyaks, and would be gathered in far greater quantity provided the
+Dyak was allowed to sell them.
+
+"Turning from the vegetable to the mineral riches of the country,
+we have diamonds, gold, tin, iron, and antimony ore certain; I have
+lately sent what I believe to be a specimen of lead ore to Calcutta;
+and copper is reported. It must be remembered, in reading this list,
+that the country is as yet unexplored by a scientific person, and that
+the inquiries of a geologist and a mineralogist would throw further
+light on the minerals of the mountains, and the spots where they are
+to be found in the greatest plenty. The diamonds are stated to be
+found in considerable numbers, and of a good water; and I judge the
+statement to be correct from the fact that the diamond-workers from
+Sandak come here and work secretly, and the people from Banjamassim,
+who are likewise clever at this trade, are most desirous to be allowed
+to work for the precious stone. Gold of a good quality certainly is to
+be found in large quantities. The eagerness and perseverance of the
+Chinese to establish themselves is a convincing proof of the fact;
+and ten years since a body of about 3000 of them had great success
+in procuring gold by their ordinary mode of trenching the ground.
+
+"The quantity of gold yearly procured at Sambas is moderately stated
+at 130,000 bunkals, which, reckoned at the low rate of 20 Spanish
+dollars a bunkal, gives 2,600,000 Spanish dollars, or upward of half
+a million sterling. The most intelligent Chinese are of opinion,
+that the quantity here exceeds that at Sambas; and there is no good
+reason to suppose it would fall short of it were once a sufficient
+Chinese population settled in the country.
+
+"Antimony ore is a staple commodity, which is to be procured in any
+quantity. Tin is said to be plentiful, and the Chinese propose working
+it; but I have had no opportunity of visiting the spot where it is
+found. Copper, though reported, has not been brought; and the iron ore
+I have examined is of inferior quality. The specimen of what I supposed
+to be lead ore has been forwarded to Calcutta, and it remains to be
+seen what its value may be. And beside the above-mentioned minerals,
+there can be little doubt of many others being discovered, if the
+mountain range was properly explored by any man of science. Many
+other articles of minor importance might be mentioned; but it is
+needless to add to a list which contains articles of such value,
+and which would prove the country equal in vegetable and mineral
+productions to any in the world.
+
+"From the productions (continues Mr. Brooke) I turn to the inhabitants,
+and I feel sure that in describing their sufferings and miseries I
+shall command the interest and sympathy of every person of humanity,
+and that the claims of the virtuous and most unhappy Dyaks will meet
+with the same attention as those of the African. And these claims have
+the advantage, that much good may be done without the vast expenditure
+of lives and money which the exertions on the African coast yearly
+demand, and that the people would readily appreciate the good that was
+conferred upon them, and rapidly rise in the scale of civilization."
+
+The inhabitants may be divided into three different classes, viz. the
+Malays, the Chinese, and the Dyaks; of the two former little need be
+said, as they are so well known.
+
+The Dyaks (or more properly Dyak) of Borneo offer to our view
+a primitive state of society; and their near resemblance to
+the Tarajahs of Celebes, [21] to the inland people of Sumatra,
+and probably to the Arafuras of Papua, [22] in customs, manners,
+and language, affords reason for the conclusion that these are the
+aboriginal race of the Eastern Archipelago, nearly stationary in their
+original condition. While successive waves of civilization have swept
+onward the rest of the inhabitants, while tribes as wild have arisen
+to power, flourished, and decayed, the Dyak in his native jungles
+still retains the feelings of earlier times, and shows the features
+of society as it existed before the influx of foreign races either
+improved or corrupted the native character.
+
+The name "Dyak" has been indiscriminately applied to all the wild
+people on the island of Borneo; but as the term is never so used
+by themselves, and as they differ greatly, not only in name, but in
+their customs and manners, we will briefly, in the first instance,
+mention the various distinct nations, the general locality of each,
+and some of their distinguishing peculiarities.
+
+1st. The Dusun, or villagers of the northern extremity of the island,
+are a race of which Mr. Brooke knows nothing personally; but the name
+implies that they are an agricultural people: they are represented as
+not being tattooed, as using the sumpitan, and as having a peculiar
+dialect. [23]
+
+2d. The Murut. They inhabit the interior of Borneo Proper. They are
+not tattooed, always use the sumpitan, and have a peculiar dialect. In
+the same locality, and resembling the Murut, are some tribes called
+the Basaya.
+
+3d. The Kadians (or Idaans of voyagers) use the sumpitan, and have
+likewise a peculiar dialect; but in other respects they nowise differ
+from the Borneons, either in religion, dress, or mode of life. They
+are, however, an industrious, peaceful people, who cultivate the
+ground in the vicinity of Borneo Proper, and nearly as far as Tanjong
+Barram. The wretched capital is greatly dependent upon them, and,
+from their numbers and industry, they form a valuable population. In
+the interior, and on the Balyet river, which discharges itself near
+Tanjong Barram, is a race likewise called Kadian, not converted to
+Islam, and which still retains the practice of "taking heads."
+
+4th. The Kayan. The Kayans are the most numerous, the most powerful,
+and the most warlike people in Borneo. They are an inland race,
+and their locality extends from about sixty miles up the country
+from Tanjong Barram to the same extent farther into the interior, in
+latitude 3 deg. 30' N., and thence across the island to probably a similar
+distance from the eastern shore. Their customs, manners, and dress are
+peculiar, and present most of the characteristic features of a wild
+and independent people. The Malays of the N.W. coast fear the Kayans,
+and rarely enter their country; but the Millanows are familiar with
+them, and there have thence been obtained many particulars respecting
+them. They are represented as extremely hospitable, generous, and kind
+to strangers, strictly faithful to their word, and honest in their
+dealings; but on the other hand, they are fierce and bloodthirsty,
+and when on an expedition, slaughter without sparing. The Kayans are
+partially tattooed, use the sumpitan, have many dialects, and are
+remarkable for the strange and apparently mutilating custom adopted
+by the males, and mentioned by Sir Stamford Raffles.
+
+5th. To the southward and westward of Barram are the Millanows,
+[24] who inhabit the rivers not far from the sea. They are, generally
+speaking, an intelligent, industrious, and active race, the principal
+cultivators of sago, and gatherers of the famous camphor barus. Their
+locality extends from Tanjong Barram to Tanjong Sirak. In person
+they are stout and well-made, of middling height, round good-tempered
+countenances, and fairer than the Malays. They have several dialects
+among them, use the sumpitan, and are not tattooed. They retain the
+practice of taking heads, but they seldom seek them, and have little
+of the ferocity of the Kayan.
+
+6th. In the vicinity of the Kayans and Millanows are some wild tribes,
+called the Tatows, Balanian, Kanowit, &c. They are probably only a
+branch of Kayans, though differing from them in being elaborately
+tattooed over the entire body. They have peculiar dialects, use the
+sumpitan, and are a wild and fierce people.
+
+7th. The Dyak. They are divided into Dyak Darrat and Dyak Laut, or
+land and sea Dyaks. The Dyak Lauts, as their name implies, frequent
+the sea; and it is needless to say much of them, as their difference
+from the Dyak Darrat is a difference of circumstances only. The tribes
+of Sarebus and Sakarran, whose rivers are situated in the deep bay
+between Tanjong Sipang and Tanjong Sirak, are powerful communities,
+and dreadful pirates, who ravage the coast in large fleets, and murder
+and rob indiscriminately; but this is by no means to be esteemed a
+standard of Dyak character. In these expeditions the Malays often join
+them, and they are likewise made the instruments for oppressing the
+Laut tribes. The Sarebus and Sakarran are fine men, fairer than the
+Malays, with sharp keen eyes, thin lips, and handsome countenances,
+though frequently marked by an expression of cunning. The Balows and
+Sibnowans are amiable tribes, decidedly warlike, but not predatory;
+and the latter combines the virtues of the Dyak character with much
+of the civilization of the Malays. The Dyak Laut do not tattoo, nor
+do they use the sumpitan; their language assimilates closely to the
+Malay, and was doubtless originally identical with that of the inland
+tribes. The name of God among them is Battara (the Avatara of the
+Hindoos). They bury their dead, and in the graves deposit a large
+portion of the property of the deceased, often to a considerable
+value in gold ornaments, brass guns, jars, and arms. Their marriage
+ceremony consists in two fowls being killed, and the forehead and
+breast of the young couple being touched with the blood; after which
+the chief, or an old man, knocks their heads together several times,
+and the ceremony is completed with mirth and feasting. In these two
+instances they differ from the Dyak Darrat.
+
+It must be observed that the Dyak also differs from the Kayan in not
+being tattooed; and from the Kayan Millanows, &c., in not using the
+_national_ weapon--the sumpitan. The Kayan and the Dyak, as general
+distinctions, though they differ in dialect, in dress, in weapons,
+and probably in religion, agree in their belief of similar omens,
+and, above all, in their practice of taking the heads of their
+enemies; but with the Kayan this practice assumes the aspect of an
+indiscriminate desire of slaughter, while with the Dyak it is but
+the trophy acquired in legitimate warfare. The Kadians form the only
+exception to this rule, in consequence of their conversion to Islam;
+and it is but reasonable to suppose, that with a slight exertion
+in favor of Christianity, others might be induced to lay aside this
+barbarous custom.
+
+With respect to the dialects, though the difference is considerable,
+they are evidently derived from a common source; but it is remarkable
+that some words in the Millanow and Kayan are similar to the Bugis and
+Badjow language. This intermixture of dialects, which can be linked
+together, appears to be more conclusive of the common origin of the
+wild tribes and civilized nations of the Archipelago than most other
+arguments; and if Marsden's position be correct (which there can be
+little or no reason to doubt), that the Polynesian is an original race
+with an original language, [25] it must likewise be conceded that the
+wild tribes represent the primitive state of society in these islands.
+
+We know little of the wild tribes of Celebes beyond their general
+resemblance to the Kayans of the east coast of Borneo; and it is
+probable that the Kayans are the people of Celebes, who crossing the
+Strait of Makassar, have in time by their superior prowess possessed
+themselves of the country of the Dyaks. Mr. Brooke (from whom I am
+copying this sketch) is led to entertain this opinion from a slight
+resemblance in their dialects with those used in Celebes, from the
+difference in so many of their customs from those of the Dyaks, and
+from the Kayans of the _northwest coast of Borneo_ having one custom
+in common with the wild tribe of Minkoka in the Bay of Boni. Both
+the Kayans and Minkokas on the death of a relative seek for a head;
+and on the death of their chief many human heads must be procured:
+which practice is unknown to the Dyak. It may further be remarked,
+that their probable immigration from Celebes is supported by the
+statement of the Millanows, that the Murut and Dyak give place to the
+Kayan whenever they come in contact, and that the latter people have
+depopulated large tracts in the interior, which were once occupied
+by the former.
+
+Having thus briefly noticed the different wild people of the island,
+I proceed with the more particular task of describing the Dyak Darrats.
+
+The locality of these Dyaks may be marked as follows:--The Pontiana
+river, from its mouth, is traced into the interior toward the northward
+and westward, until it approaches at the farthest within 100 miles of
+the northwest coast; a line drawn in latitude 3 deg. N. till it intersects
+the course of the Pontiana river will point out the limit of the
+country inhabited by the Dyak. Within this inconsiderable portion of
+the island, which includes Sambas, Landak, Pontiana, Sangow, Sarawak,
+&c., are numerous tribes, all of which agree in their leading customs,
+and make use of nearly the same dialect. Personally (writes our sole
+authority for any intelligence respecting them), I am acquainted only
+with the tribes of Sarawak and some tribes further in the interior
+beyond the government of the Malays, who inhabit the country between
+Sarawak and Landak; and the description of one tribe will serve as
+a description of all, so little do they vary.
+
+Before, however, I say anything of the character of the Dyaks, or their
+temper, it will be necessary to describe briefly the government under
+which they live, and the influence it has upon them; and if afterward
+in the recital there appear some unamiable points in their character,
+an allowance will be made for their failings, which those who rule
+them would not deserve.
+
+The Dyaks have from time immemorial been looked upon as the bondsmen
+of the Malays, and the rajahs consider them much in the same light
+as they would a drove of oxen--_i. e._ as personal and disposable
+property. They were governed in Sarawak by three local officers, called
+the Patingi, the Bandar, and the Tumangong. To the Patingi they paid a
+small yearly revenue of rice, but this deficiency of revenue was made
+up by sending them a quantity of goods--chiefly salt, Dyak cloths,
+and iron--and demanding a price for them six or eight times more than
+their value. The produce collected by the Dyaks was also monopolized,
+and the edible birds'-nests, bees-wax, &c. &c. were taken at a price
+fixed by the Patingi, who moreover claimed mats, fowls, fruits, and
+every other necessary at his pleasure, and could likewise make the
+Dyaks work for him for merely a nominal remuneration. This system,
+not badly devised, had it been limited within the bounds of moderation,
+would have left the Dyaks plenty for all their wants; or had the local
+officers known their own interest, they would have protected those upon
+whom they depended for revenue, and under the worst oppression of one
+man the Dyaks would have deemed themselves happy. Such unfortunately
+was not the case; for the love of immediate gain overcame every other
+consideration, and by degrees old-established customs were thrown
+aside, and new ones substituted in their place. When the Patingi
+had received all he thought proper to extort, his relatives first
+claimed the right of arbitrary trade, and gradually it was extended
+as the privilege of every respectable person in the country to serra
+[26] the Dyaks. The poor Dyak, thus at the mercy of half the Malay
+population, was never allowed to refuse compliance with these demands;
+he could plead neither poverty, inability, nor even hunger, as an
+excuse, for the answer was ever ready: "Give me your wife or one of
+your children;" and in case he could not supply what was required,
+the wife or the child was taken, and became a slave. Many modes of
+extortion were resorted to; a favorite one was convicting the Dyak of
+a fault and imposing a fine upon him. Some ingenuity and much trickery
+were shown in this game, and new offences were invented as soon as
+the old pleas would serve no longer; for instance, if a Malay met a
+Dyak in a boat which pleased him, he notched it, as a token that it
+was his property; in one day, if the boat was a new one, perhaps three
+or more would place their marks on it; and as only one could get it,
+the Dyak to whom the boat really belonged had to pay the others _for
+his fault_. This, however, was only "a fault;" whereas, for a Dyak
+to injure a Malay, directly or indirectly, purposely or otherwise,
+was a _high offence_, and punished by a proportionate fine. If a
+Dyak's house was in bad repair, and a Malay fell in consequence and
+was hurt, or pretended to be hurt, a fine was imposed; if a Malay in
+the jungle was wounded by the springs set for a wild boar, or by the
+wooden spikes which the Dyaks for protection put about their village,
+or scratched himself and said he was injured, the penalty was heavy;
+if the Malay was _really hurt_, ever so accidentally, it was the
+ruin of the Dyak. And these numerous and uninvited guests came and
+went at pleasure, lived in free quarters, made their requisitions,
+and then forced the Dyak to carry away for them the very property of
+which he had been robbed.
+
+This is a fair picture of the governments under which the Dyaks live;
+and although they were often roused to resistance, it was always
+fruitless, and only involved them in deeper troubles; for the Malays
+could quickly gather a large force of sea Dyaks from Sakarran, who
+were readily attracted by hope of plunder, and who, supported by
+the fire-arms of their allies, were certain to overcome any single
+tribe that held out. The misfortunes of the Dyaks of Sarawak did not
+stop here. Antimony ore was discovered; the cupidity of the Borneons
+was roused; then Pangerans struggled for the prize; intrigues and
+dissensions ensued; and the inhabitants of Sarawak in turn felt
+the very evil they had inflicted on the Dyaks; while the Dyaks were
+compelled, amid their other wrongs, to labor at the ore without any
+recompense, and to the neglect of their rice-cultivation. Many died in
+consequence of this compulsory labor, so contrary to their habits and
+inclinations; and more would doubtless have fallen victims, had not
+civil war rescued them from this evil, to inflict upon them others
+a thousand times worse.
+
+Extortion had before been carried on by individuals, but now it
+was systematized; and Pangerans of rank, for the sake of plunder,
+sent bodies of Malays and Sakarran Dyaks to attack the different
+tribes. The men were slaughtered, the women and children carried
+off into slavery, the villages burned, the fruit-trees cut down,
+[27] and all their property destroyed or seized.
+
+The Dyaks could no longer live in tribes, but sought refuge in
+the mountains or the jungle, a few together; and as one of them
+pathetically described it--"We do not live," he said, "like men; we are
+like monkeys; we are hunted from place to place; we have no houses; and
+when we light a fire, we fear the smoke will draw our enemies upon us."
+
+In the course of ten years, under the circumstances detailed--from
+enforced labor, from famine, from slavery, from sickness, from
+the sword--one half of the Dyak population [28] disappeared; and
+the work of extirpation would have gone on at an accelerated pace,
+had the remnant been left to the tender mercies of the Pangerans;
+but chance (we may much more truly say Providence) led our countryman
+Mr. Brooke to this scene of misery, and enabled him, by circumstances
+far removed beyond the grounds of calculation, to put a stop to the
+sufferings of an amiable people.
+
+There are twenty tribes in Sarawak, on about fifty square miles
+of land. The appearance of the Dyaks is prepossessing: they have
+good-natured faces, with a mild and subdued expression; eyes set
+far apart, and features sometimes well formed. In person they are
+active, of middling height, and not distinguishable from the Malays
+in complexion. The women are neither so good-looking nor well-formed
+as the men, but they have the same expression, and are cheerful and
+kind-tempered. The dress of the men consists of a piece of cloth
+about fifteen feet long, passed between the legs and fastened round
+the loins, with the ends hanging before and behind; the head-dress
+is composed of bark-cloth, dyed bright yellow, and stuck up in front
+so as to resemble a tuft of feathers. The arms and legs are often
+ornamented with rings of silver, brass, or shell; and necklaces
+are worn, made of human teeth, or those of bears or dogs, or of
+white beads, in such numerous strings as to conceal the throat. A
+sword on one side, a knife and small betel-basket on the other,
+complete the ordinary equipment of the males; but when they travel
+they carry a basket slung from the forehead, on which is a palm-mat,
+to protect the owner and his property from the weather. The women wear
+a short and scanty petticoat, reaching from the loins to the knees,
+and a pair of black bamboo stays, which are never removed except the
+wearer be _enceinte_. They have rings of brass or red bamboo about the
+loins, and sometimes ornaments on the arms; the hair is worn long;
+the ears of both sexes are pierced, and earrings of brass inserted
+occasionally; the teeth of the young people are sometimes filed to a
+point and discolored, as they say that "Dogs have white teeth." They
+frequently dye their feet and hands of a bright red or yellow color;
+and the young people, like those of other countries, affect a degree
+of finery and foppishness, while the elders invariably lay aside all
+ornaments, as unfit for a wise person or one advanced in years.
+
+In character the Dyak is mild and tractable, hospitable when he is
+well used, grateful for kindness, industrious, honest, and simple;
+neither treacherous nor cunning, and so truthful that the word of
+one of them might safely be taken before the oath of half-a-dozen
+Borneons. In their dealings they are very straightforward and correct,
+and so trustworthy that they rarely attempt, even after a lapse
+of years, to evade payment of a just debt. On the reverse of this
+picture there is little unfavorable to be said; and the wonder is,
+they have learned so little deceit or falsehood where the examples
+before them have been so rife. The temper of the Dyak inclines to be
+sullen; and they oppose a dogged and stupid obstinacy when set to a
+task which displeases them, and support with immovable apathy torrents
+of abuse or entreaty. They are likewise distrustful, fickle, apt to
+be led away, and evasive in concealing the amount of their property;
+but these are the vices rather of situation than of character, for
+they have been taught by bitter experience that their rulers set no
+limits to their exactions, and that hiding is their only chance of
+retaining a portion of the grain they have raised. They are, at the
+same time, fully aware of the customs by which their ancestors were
+governed, and are constantly appealing to them as a rule of right,
+and frequently arguing with the Malay on the subject. Upon these
+occasions they are silenced, but not convinced; and the Malay, while
+he evades or bullies when it is needful, is sure to appeal to these
+very much-abused customs whenever it serves his purpose. The manners
+of the Dyaks with strangers are reserved to an extent rarely seen
+among rude or half-civilized people; but on a better acquaintance
+(which is not readily acquired), they are open and talkative, and,
+when heated with their favorite beverage, lively, and evincing
+more shrewdness and observation than they have gained credit for
+possessing. Their ideas, as may well be supposed, are very limited;
+they reckon with their fingers and toes, and few are clever enough to
+count beyond twenty; but when they repeat the operation, they record
+each twenty by making a knot on a string.
+
+Like other wild people, the slightest restraint is irksome, and
+no temptation will induce them to stay long from their favorite
+jungle. It is there they seek the excitement of war, the pleasures of
+the chase, the labors of the field, and the abundance of fruit in the
+rich produce which assists in supporting their families. The pathless
+jungle is endeared to them by every association which influences the
+human mind, and they languish when prevented from roaming there as
+inclination dictates.
+
+With reference to the gradual advance of the Dyaks, Mr. Brooke
+observes in an early part of his journal:--"The peaceful and
+gentle aborigines--how can I speak too favorably of their improved
+condition? These people, who, a few years since, suffered every extreme
+of misery from war, slavery, and starvation, are now comfortably
+lodged, and comparatively rich. A stranger might now pass from village
+to village, and he would receive their hospitality, and see their padi
+stored in their houses. He would hear them proclaim their happiness,
+and praise the white man as their friend and protector. Since the
+death of Parembam, no Dyak of Sarawak lost his life by violence, until
+a month since, when two were cut off by the Sakarran Dyaks. None of
+the tribes have warred among themselves; and I believe their war
+excursions to a distance in the interior have been very few, and
+those undertaken by the Sarambos. What punishment is sufficient for
+the wretch who finds this state of things so baleful as to attempt
+to destroy it? Yet such a wretch is Seriff Sahib. In describing the
+condition of the Dyaks, I do not say that it is perfect, or that it
+may not be still further improved; but with people in their state
+of society innovations ought not rashly or hastily to be made; as
+the civilized being ought constantly to bear in mind, that what is
+clear to him is not clear to a savage; that intended benefits _may_
+be regarded as positive injuries; and that his motives are not, and
+scarcely can be, appreciated! The greatest evil, perhaps, from which
+the Dyaks suffer, is the influence of the Datus or chiefs; but this
+influence is never carried to oppression, and is only used to obtain
+the expensive luxury of 'birds'-nests' at a cheap rate. In short,
+the Dyaks are happy and content; and their gradual development must
+now be left to the work of time, aided by the gentlest persuasion,
+and advanced (if attainable) by the education of their children."
+
+The latest accounts from Sarawak describe the increasing prosperity
+of that interesting settlement. Among other recent intelligence I
+have heard from Mr. Brooke that Seriff Sahib died of a broken heart,
+shortly after his arrival at the Pontiana river.
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIV.
+
+    Proposed British settlement on the northwest coast of Borneo,
+    and occupation of the island of Labuan.--Governor Crawfurd's
+    opinions thereon.
+
+
+The establishment of a British settlement on the northwest coast of
+Borneo, and the occupation of the island of Labuan, are measures that
+have for some time past been under consideration by her majesty's
+government; and I am courteously enabled to lay before my readers
+the valuable opinions of Mr. Crawfurd (late Governor of Singapore)
+on this subject:
+
+"I am of opinion (Mr. Crawfurd writes) that a settlement on the
+northwest coast of Borneo--that is, at a convenient point on the
+southern shore of the China Sea--would be highly advantageous to
+this country, as a coal depot for steam navigation; as a means of
+suppressing Malayan piracy; as a harbor of refuge for ships disabled
+in the China Sea; and finally, as a commanding position during a
+naval war.
+
+"The island of Labuan has been pointed out for this purpose; and as
+far as our present limited knowledge of it will allow me to judge, it
+appears to possess all the necessary qualities for such a settlement.
+
+"The requisite properties are, salubrity of climate, a good harbor, a
+position in the track of steam-navigation, conveniency of position for
+ships disabled in typhoons, conveniency of position for our cruisers
+during war, and a locality strong and circumscribed by nature, so as
+to be readily capable of cheap defence.
+
+"Labuan lies in about 6 deg. of north latitude, and consequently the
+average heat will be about 83 deg. of Fahrenheit; the utmost range of
+the thermometer will not exceed ten degrees. In short, the year is a
+perpetual hot summer. It is, at the same time, well ventilated by both
+monsoons; and being near twenty miles from the marshy shores of the
+Borneo river, there is little ground to apprehend that it will be found
+unhealthy, even if those shores themselves had been ascertained to be
+so, which, however, is not the case; for, in proof of their salubrity,
+it may be stated, that the town of Borneo is healthy, although it
+stands, and has stood for centuries, on the flooded banks of the river;
+the houses being built on posts, and chiefly accessible by boat.
+
+"With respect to harbor, a most essential point, I do not perceive
+that the island is indented by any bay or inlet that would answer the
+purpose of one. [29] The channel, however, which lies between it and
+the mainland of Borneo is but seven miles broad, and will probably
+constitute a spacious and convenient harbor. The name of the island
+itself, which means anchorage, I have no doubt is derived from the
+place affording shelter to native shipping, and those probably, in
+most cases, fleets of pirate prahus. This channel is again further
+restricted by four islets, and these, with four more lying to the
+southwest, will afford shelter in the southwest or mild monsoon;
+protection is given in the northeast, the severest monsoon, by Labuan
+itself: and I may add, that the island is, by four degrees of latitude,
+beyond the extreme southern limit of the typhoons of the Chinese Sea.
+
+"In the channel between Labuan and the main, or rather between Labuan
+and the islets already mentioned, the soundings on the Admiralty
+chart show that vessels drawing as much as eighteen feet water may
+anchor within a mile of the shore, and the largest vessels within
+a mile and a half; a convenience for shipping which greatly exceeds
+that of Singapore. One of the advantages of Labuan will be that it
+will prove a port of refuge for shipping disabled in the storms of
+the Chinese Seas. Many examples, indeed some of recent occurrence,
+might be adduced to show the need there is of such a port.
+
+"Labuan lies nearly in the direct track both of steam and sailing
+navigation from India to China, during the northeast, the worst
+and severest of the two monsoons; and is as intermediate a position
+between Singapore and Hong Kong as can be found, being 700 miles from
+the former and 1000 from the latter.
+
+"The insular character and narrow limits of Labuan will make it
+easily and cheaply defensible. The extreme length of the island
+appears to be about six miles, its greatest breadth about four and a
+half, and probably its whole area will not be found to exceed thirty
+square miles.
+
+"From the rude tribes of the immediate vicinity no hostile attack is
+to be apprehended that would make the present erection of forts or
+batteries necessary. No Asiatic enemy is at any time to be feared that
+would make such defences requisite. In five-and-twenty years it has
+not been found imperative to have recourse to them at Singapore. It
+is only in case of war with a naval power that fortifications would be
+required; but I am not informed what local advantages Labuan possesses
+for their erection. A principal object of such fortifications would
+be the defence of the shipping in the harbor from the inroads of an
+enemy's cruisers. At one point the soundings, as given in the Admiralty
+chart, are stated nine fathoms, within three quarters of a mile of
+the shore; and I presume that batteries within this distance would
+afford protection to the largest class of merchantmen. In Singapore
+Roads no class of shipping above mere native craft can lie nearer than
+two miles of the shore; so that in a war with a European naval power,
+the merchant shipping there can only be defended by her majesty's navy.
+
+"One of the most striking national advantages to be expected from
+the possession of Labuan would consist in its use in defending our
+own commerce, and attacking that of opponents, in the event of a
+naval war. Between the eastern extremity of the Straits of Malacca
+and Hong Kong, a distance of 1700 miles, there is no British harbor,
+and no safe and accessible port of refuge; Hong Kong is, indeed,
+the only spot within the wide limits of the Chinese Sea for such a
+purpose, although our legitimate commercial intercourse within it
+extends over a length of 2000 miles. Everywhere else, Manilla and
+the newly opened ports of China excepted, our crippled vessels or our
+merchantmen pursued by the enemy's cruisers, are met by the exclusion
+or extortion of semi-barbarous nations, or in danger of falling into
+the power of robbers and savages.
+
+"Labuan fortified, and supposing the Borneon coal to be as productive
+and valuable in quality as it is represented, would give Great Britain
+in a naval war the entire command of the China Sea. This would be the
+result of our possessing or commanding the only available supply of
+coal, that of Bengal and Australia excepted, to be found in the wide
+limits which extend east of the continents of Europe and America.
+
+"The position of Labuan will render it the most convenient possible
+for the suppressing of piracy. The most desperate and active pirates
+of the whole Indian Archipelago are the tribes of the Sooloo group
+of islands lying close to the north shore of Borneo, and the people
+of the north and northeastern coast of Borneo itself; these have
+of late years proved extremely troublesome both to the English and
+Dutch traders; both nations are bound by the Convention of 1824 to
+use their best endeavors for the suppression of piracy, and many
+efforts have certainly been made for this purpose, although as yet
+without material effect in diminishing the evil.
+
+"From Labuan, these pirates might certainly be intercepted by armed
+steamers far more conveniently and cheaply than from any other position
+that could be easily pointed out: indeed, the very existence of a
+British settlement would tend to the suppression of piracy.
+
+"As a commercial depot, Labuan would have considerable advantages
+by position; the native trade of the vicinity would of course resort
+to it, and so would that of the north coast of Borneo, of the Sooloo
+Islands, and of a considerable portion of the Spice Islands. Even for
+the trade of the Philippines and China, it would have the advantage
+over Singapore of a voyage by 700 miles shorter; a matter of most
+material consequence to native commerce.
+
+"With all the countries of the neighborhood lying west of Labuan I
+presume that a communication across both monsoons might be maintained
+throughout the year. This would include a portion of the east coast
+of the Malay peninsula, Siam, and part of Cochin China.
+
+"Labuan belongs to that portion of the coast of Borneo which is the
+rudest. The Borneons themselves are of the Malay nation, originally
+emigrants from Sumatra, and settled here for about six centuries. They
+are the most distant from their original seat of all the colonies which
+have sprung from this nation. The people from the interior differ from
+them in language, manners, and religion, and are divided into tribes
+as numerous and as rude as the Americans when first seen by Europeans.
+
+"From such a people we are not to expect any valuable products of art
+or manufacture, for a British mercantile depot. Pepper is, however,
+produced in considerable quantity, and the products of the forests
+are very various, as bees-wax, gum-benjamin, fine camphor, camphor
+oil, esculent swallows' nests, canes and rattans, which used to form
+the staple articles of Borneon import into Singapore. The Borneon
+territory opposite to Labuan abounds also, I believe, in the palm
+which yields sago, and indeed the chief part of the manufactured
+article was thirty years ago brought from this country. The Chinese
+settlers would, no doubt, as in Singapore and Malacca, establish
+factories for its preparation according to the improved processes
+which they now practice at those places.
+
+"There may be reason to expect, however, that the timber of the
+portion of Borneo referred to may be found of value for ship-building;
+for Mr. Dalrymple states that in his time, above seventy years ago,
+Chinese junks of 500 tons burden used to be built in the river
+of Borneo. As to timber well-suited for boats and house-building,
+it is hardly necessary to add that the northwest coast of Borneo,
+in common with almost every other part of the Archipelago, contains
+a supply amounting to superfluity.
+
+"I may take this opportunity of stating, as evidence of the conveniency
+of this portion of Borneo for a commercial intercourse with China,
+that down to within the last half century a considerable number of
+Chinese junks were engaged in trading regularly with Borneo, and that
+trade ceased only when the native government became too bad and weak
+to afford it protection. Without the least doubt this trade would
+again spring up on the erection of the British flag at Labuan. Not
+a single Chinese junk had resorted to the Straits of Malacca before
+the establishment of Singapore, and their number is now, of one size
+or another, and exclusive of the junks of Siam and Cochin China,
+not less than 100.
+
+"From the cultivation of the land I should not be disposed to expect
+anything beyond the production of fresh fruits and esculent vegetables,
+and when the land is cleared, of grass for pasture. The seas in this
+part of the world are prolific in fish of great variety and great
+excellence; and the Chinese settlers are found everywhere skillful
+and industrious in taking them.
+
+"Some difficulty will, in the beginning, be experienced with respect to
+milk, butter, and fresh meat: this was the case at first in Singapore,
+but the difficulty has in a good measure been overcome. The countries
+of the Archipelago are generally not suited to pasture, and it is
+only in a few of them that the ox and buffalo are abundant. The sheep
+is so nowhere, and for the most part is wanting altogether; cattle,
+therefore, must be imported.
+
+"As to corn, it will unquestionably be found far cheaper to import
+than to raise it. Rice will be the chief bread-corn, and will come in
+great abundance and cheapness from Siam and Cochin China. No country
+within 700 miles of Singapore is abundant in corn, and none is grown
+in the island: yet from the first establishment of the settlement
+to the present time, corn has been both cheap and abundant, there
+has been wonderfully little fluctuation, there are always stocks,
+and for many years a considerable exportation. A variety of pulses,
+vegetable oil, and culinary salt, will be derived from the same
+countries, as is now done in abundance by Singapore.
+
+"The mines of antimony are 300 miles to the southwest of Labuan,
+and those of gold on the west and the south coasts; and I am not
+aware that any mineral wealth has been discovered in the portion of
+Borneo immediately connected with Labuan, except that of coal--far
+more important and valuable, indeed, than gold or antimony. The
+existence of a coal-field has been traced from Labuan to the islands
+of Kayn-arang--which words, in fact, mean coal island--to the island
+of Chermin, and from thence to the mainland over a distance of thirty
+miles. With respect to the coal of Labuan itself, I find no distinct
+statement beyond the simple fact of the existence of the mineral;
+but the coal of the two islands in the river, and of the main, is
+proved to be--from analysis and trial in steam-navigation--superior
+to nearly all the coal which India has hitherto yielded, and equal
+to some of our best English coals. This is the more remarkable, as
+it is known that most surface-minerals, and especially coals, are
+inferior to the portions of the same veins or beds more deep-seated.
+
+"Nearly as early as the British flag is erected, and, at all events,
+as soon as it is permanently known to be so, there may be reckoned
+upon with certainty a large influx of settlers. The best and most
+numerous of these will be the Chinese. They were settled on the Borneo
+river when the Borneo government, never very good, or otherwise than
+comparatively violent and disorderly, was most endurable.
+
+"Borneo is, of all the great islands of the western portion of the
+Archipelago, the nearest to China, and Labuan and its neighborhood the
+nearest point of this island. The distance of Hong Kong is about 1000
+miles, and that of the island of Hainan, a great place for emigration,
+not above 800; distances which to the Chinese junks--fast sailers
+before the strong and favorable winds of the monsoons--do not make
+voyages exceeding four or five days. The coasts of the provinces
+of Canton and Fokien have hitherto been the great hives from which
+Chinese emigration has proceeded; and even Fokien is not above 1400
+miles from Labuan, a voyage of seven or eight days. Chinese trade
+and immigration will come together. The northwest coast of Borneo
+produces an unusual supply of those raw articles for which there
+is always a demand in the markets of China; and Labuan, it may be
+reckoned upon with certainty, will soon become the seat of a larger
+trade with China than the river of Borneo ever possessed.
+
+"I by no means anticipate the same amount of rapid advance in
+population, commerce, or financial resources for Labuan, that has
+distinguished the history of Singapore, a far more centrical position
+for general commerce; still I think its prospect of success undoubted;
+while it will have some advantages which Singapore cannot, from its
+nature, possess. Its coal-mines, and the command of the coal-fields
+on the river of Borneo, are the most remarkable of these; and its
+superiority as a post-office [30] station necessarily follows. Then
+it is far more convenient as a port of refuge; and, as far as our
+present knowledge will enable us to judge, infinitely more valuable
+for military purposes, more especially for affording protection to the
+commerce which passes through the Chinese Sea, amounting at present
+to probably not less than 300,000 tons of shipping, carrying cargoes
+certainly not under the value of 15,000,000_l_. sterling.
+
+"Labuan ought, like Singapore, to be a free port; and assuredly
+will not prosper if it is not. Its revenue should not be derived
+from customs, but, as in that settlement, from excise duties:
+upon the nature of these, as it is well known, it is unnecessary
+to enlarge. They covered during my time, near twenty years ago,
+and within five years of the establishment of the settlement, the
+whole charges of a small but sufficient garrison (100 Sepoys), and
+a moderate but competent civil establishment.
+
+"The military and civil establishments have been greatly increased
+of late years; but the revenue, still in its nature the same, has
+kept pace with them. During my administration of Singapore, the
+municipal charges fell on the general fund; but they are at present
+amply provided for from a distinct source, chiefly an assessment
+on house-property.
+
+"If the military and civil charges of Labuan are kept within moderate
+bounds, I make no doubt but that a similar excise revenue will be
+adequate to cover the charges of both, and that in peace at least the
+state need not be called on to make any disbursement on its account;
+while during a naval war, if the state make any expenditure, it will
+be fully compensated by the additional security which the settlement
+will afford to British commerce, and the annoyance it will cause to
+the enemy.
+
+"As to the disposal of the land, always a difficult question in a new
+and unoccupied colony, the result of my own inquiries and personal
+experience lead me to offer it as my decided conviction that the most
+expedient plan--that which is least troublesome to the government,
+most satisfactory to the settler, and ultimately most conducive to the
+public prosperity--is to dispose of it for a term of years, that is,
+on long leases of 1000 years, or virtually in perpetuity; the object in
+this case of adopting the leasehold tenure being, by making the land
+a chattel interest, to get rid of the difficulties in the matter of
+inheritance and transfer, which, under the administration of English
+law, and in reference more particularly to the Asiatic people who
+will be the principal landowners, are incident to real property. Town
+allotments might be sold subject to a considerable quit-rent, but
+allotments in the country for one entirely nominal. Those of the
+latter description should be small, proportionate with the extent of
+the island, and the time and difficulty required in such a climate
+to clear the land, now overgrown for the most part with a stupendous
+forest of evergreen trees, and the wood of which is too abundant to be
+of any value, certainly for the most part not worth the land-carriage
+of a couple of furlongs.
+
+"A charter for the administration of justice should be as nearly as
+possible contemporaneous with the cession. Great inconvenience has
+resulted in all our Eastern settlements of the same nature with that
+speculated on at Labuan, from the want of all legal provision for
+the administration of justice; and remembering this, it ought to be
+guarded against in the case of Labuan.
+
+"Whether in preparing for the establishment of a British settlement
+on the coast of Borneo, or in actually making one, her majesty's
+ministers, I am satisfied, will advert to the merits and peculiar
+qualifications of Mr. Brooke. That gentleman is unknown to me,
+except by his acts and writings; but, judging by these, I consider
+him as possessing all the qualities which have distinguished the
+successful founders of new colonies; intrepidity, firmness, and
+enthusiasm, with the art of governing and leading the masses. He
+possesses some, moreover, which have not always belonged to such men,
+however otherwise distinguished; a knowledge of the language, manners,
+customs, and institutions of the natives by whom the colony is to be
+surrounded; with benevolence and an independent fortune, things still
+more unusual with the projectors of colonies. Toward the formation of
+a new colony, indeed, the available services of such a man, presuming
+they are available, may be considered a piece of good fortune."
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CONCLUDING OBSERVATIONS.
+
+
+[First Edition.]
+
+
+The recent proceedings of Government in following up the impression
+made upon Malay piracy, as related in these pages; the appointment
+of Mr. Brooke as British Agent in Borneo, armed with the moral and
+physical power of his country; the cession of the island of Labuan to
+the British crown; and the great advance already made by the English
+ruler of Sarawak, in laying broad foundations for native prosperity,
+while extending general security and commerce; all combine to add an
+interest to the early individual steps which have led to measures of
+so much national consequence.
+
+Deeply as I felt the influence of that individual on the condition of
+Borneo, and the Malayan Archipelago generally, while employed there,
+and much as I anticipated from his energetic character, extraordinary
+exertions, and enlarged views for the future, I confess that my
+expectations have been greatly increased by the progress of events
+since that period. It needed nothing to confirm my faith in the
+results that were sure to follow from his enlightened acts--from
+his prudence and humanity in the treatment of his Dyak subjects,
+and the neighboring and interior independent tribes--from his firm
+resistance to the Malay tyranny exercised upon the aborigines,
+and his punishment of Malay aggression, wherever perpetrated. But
+when I see these elements of good wisely seconded by the highest
+authorities of England, I cannot but look for the consummation of
+every benefit desired, much more rapidly and effectively than if left
+to the efforts of a private person, even though that person were a
+Brooke! If the appearance of H.M.S. Dido on the coast and at Sarawak
+produced a salutary effect upon all our relations with the inhabitants,
+it may well be presumed that the mission of Captain Bethune, and the
+expedition under Rear-Admiral Sir Thomas Cochrane, must have greatly
+improved and extended that wholesome state of affairs. Indeed, it is
+evident, by the complete success which attended Mr. Brooke's official
+visit to Borneo Proper in H.M.S. Driver, after receiving dispatches
+from Lord Aberdeen appointing him British agent in the island,
+carried out by Captain Bethune in November, 1844, that the presence
+of a British force in those seas was alone necessary to enable him
+to suppress piracy, and perfect his plans for the establishment of
+a native government which should not oppress the country, and which
+should cultivate the most friendly intercourse with us. Thus we find
+the piratical Pangeran Usop put down, and Muda Hassim exercising the
+sovereign power in the name of his imbecile nephew, who still retains
+the title of sultan. The principal chiefs, and men distinguished by
+talent and some acquaintance with foreign affairs, are now on our side;
+and it only requires to support them in order that civilization may
+rapidly spread over the land, and Borneo become again, as it was one
+or two centuries ago, the abode of an industrious, rich, pacific,
+and mercantile people, interchanging products with all the trading
+nations of the world, and conferring and reaping those blessings
+which follow in the train of just and honorable trade wheresoever its
+enterprising spirit leads in the pursuit of honest gain. As the vain
+search for the philosopher's stone conducted to many a useful and
+valuable discovery, so may we be assured that the real seeking for
+gold through the profitable medium of commerce has been, is, and will
+be the grand source of filling the earth with comfort and happiness.
+
+Among the numerous visions of this kind which open to our sense while
+reflecting on the new prospects of this vast island--so little known,
+yet known to possess almost unbounded means to invite and return
+commercial activity--is the contemplation of the field it presents
+to missionary labors. When we read Mr. Brooke's description of the
+aboriginal Dyak, and observe what he has himself done in one locality
+within the space of four or five short years, what may we not expect
+to be accomplished by the zeal of Christian missions judiciously
+directed to reclaim such a people from utter barbarism, and induce
+them to become true members of a faith which teaches forbearance and
+charity between man and man, and inculcates, with the love and hope
+of heaven, an abhorrence of despotism and blood, and a disposition to
+live in good-will and peace with all our fellow-creatures? There are
+here no prejudices of caste, as in India, to impede the missionaries'
+progress. Mr. Brooke has pointed out what may be effected in this way,
+and we have only to say amen to his prayer, with an earnest aspiration
+that it may be speedily fulfilled.
+
+Having enjoyed the pleasure of communicating to the public this
+satisfactory description of the _status quo_ in Borneo to the latest
+period (September, 1845), I venture to congratulate them upon it. Thus
+far all is well and as it should be, and promising the happiest issue;
+but I hope I may not be charged with presumption in offering an opinion
+from my experience in this quarter, and respectfully suggesting that,
+in addition to a permanent British settlement at Labuan, it will be
+absolutely necessary to proceed with the suppression of Malay piracy,
+by steadily acting against every pirate-hold. Without a continued and
+determined series of operations of this sort, it is my conviction that
+even the most sanguinary and fatal onslaughts will achieve nothing
+beyond a present and temporary good. The impression on the native mind
+is not sufficiently lasting: their old impulses and habits return
+with fresh force; they forget their heavy retribution; and in two
+or three years the memory of them is almost entirely effaced. Till
+piracy be completely suppressed there must be no relaxation; and
+well worth the perseverance is the end in view, the welfare of one
+of the richest and most improvable portions of the globe, and the
+incalculable extension of the blessings of Britain's prosperous
+commerce and humanizing dominion.
+
+In looking forward to the certain realization of these prospects,
+I may mention the important circumstance of the discovery of coal in
+abundance for the purposes of steam navigation. The surveys already
+made afford assurances of this fact, and the requisite arrangements
+are in progress for opening and working the mines. It is generally
+known that the Dutch assert very wide pretensions to colonies
+and monopolies in those seas. A treaty has been concluded between
+the Netherlands government and England; and although that important
+document contains no reference whatever to Borneo, it is most desirable
+for the general extension of commerce that no national jealousies, no
+ideas of conflicting interests, no encroaching and ambitious projects,
+may be allowed to interfere with or prevent the beneficial progress
+of this important region. With such a man as Mr. Brooke to advise the
+course most becoming, disinterested, and humane for the British empire
+to pursue, it is not too much to say that, if the well-being of these
+races of our fellow-creatures is defeated or postponed, the crime will
+not lie at our door. The sacrifices we have made to extinguish slavery
+throughout the world are a sure and unquestionable pledge that we will
+do our utmost to extirpate the horrid traffic in those parts, and to
+uproot the system of piracy that feeds it. It is the bounden duty of
+both Holland and Great Britain to unite cordially in this righteous
+cause. The cry of nature is addressed to them; and if rejected, as
+surely as there is justice and mercy in the Providence which overrules
+the fate of nations, no blessing will prosper them, but wealth, and
+dominion, and happiness will pass away from them forever. Mr. Brooke
+invokes their cooeperation, and his noble appeal cannot be withstood.
+
+The central position of Labuan is truly remarkable. That island is
+distant from
+
+
+                Hong Kong   1009 miles.
+                Singapore    707   "
+                Siam         984   "
+                Manilla      650   "
+
+
+On the other hand, Mr. Brooke's territory of Sarawak is distant from
+
+
+                Singapore    427 miles.
+                Labuan       304   "
+                Hong Kong   1199   "
+
+
+How direct and central are these valuable possessions for the universal
+trade of the East!
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+POSTSCRIPT TO THE SECOND EDITION.
+
+
+June 6th, 1846.
+
+In the foregoing remarks with which I closed the first edition of this
+book, I ventured to congratulate the public on the cheerful aspect
+of affairs in Borneo at the latest period of which accounts had then
+reached me. I could then say, with a joyful heart, "Thus far all
+is well and as it should be, and promising the happiest issue." But
+now I must write in a different strain. The mischiefs I pointed out
+above as likely to ensue from a desultory and intermittent mode of
+dealing with Malay piracy have revealed themselves even sooner and in
+a more formidable manner than I had anticipated. The weak and covetous
+sultan of Borneo has, with more than the usual fickleness of Asiatics,
+already forgotten the lessons we gave him and the engagements he
+solemnly and voluntarily contracted with us. Mr. Brooke's faithful
+friends, Muda Hassim and the Pangeran Budrudeen, with numbers of
+their families and retainers, have been basely murdered by their
+treacherous kinsman, because of their attachment to the English
+and their unswerving determination to put down piracy; and what is
+worst of all, Mr. Brooke's arch-enemy, the subtle and indefatigable
+villain Macota, the man whose accursed head was thrice saved by my
+too-generous friend, has now returned triumphantly to the scene
+of his former crimes, and is commissioned by the sultan to take
+Mr. Brooke's life by poison, or by any other of those treacherous arts
+in which there is no more consummate adept than Macota. I could trust
+securely to Mr. Brooke's gallantry and skill for the protection of
+his life against the attacks of open foes; and my only fears arise
+when I reflect on his utter insensibility to danger, and think how
+the admirable qualities of his own guileless, confiding nature may
+facilitate the designs of his enemies.
+
+H.M.S. Hazard, from Hong Kong, having touched at Bruni about the
+end of March last, was boarded by a native, who gave the captain
+such information as induced him to sail with all speed for Sarawak;
+and there this man made the following deposition:--
+
+
+
+
+    Japper, a native of Bruni, deposes that he was sent aboard
+    H.M.S. Hazard by the Pangeran Muda Mahomed, to warn the captain
+    against treachery, and to communicate the following details to
+    Mr. Brooke at Sarawak.
+
+    The Rajah Muda Hassim was raised by the sultan to the title of
+    Sultan Muda (or young sultan), and, together with his brothers and
+    followers, was living in security, when he was attacked by orders
+    of the sultan at night, and together with thirteen of his family,
+    killed in different places. Four brothers, viz. Pangeran Muda
+    Mahomed, Pangeran Abdul Kader, Pangeran Abdulraman, and Pangeran
+    Mesahat, together with several young children of the Rajah Muda
+    Hassim, alone survive. The deponent Japper was in attendance on
+    his lord, the Pangeran Budrudeen, at the time of the attack. The
+    Pangeran, though surprised by his enemies, fought for some time,
+    and when desperately wounded, retired outside his house with his
+    sister and another woman named Koor Salem. The deponent was there
+    and was wounded, as were both the women. The Pangeran Budrudeen
+    ordered deponent to open a keg or cask of gunpowder, which he did;
+    and the last thing his lord did was to take his ring from his
+    finger and desire the deponent to carry it to Mr. Brooke; to bid
+    Mr. Brooke not to forget him, and not to forget to lay his case
+    before the Queen of England. The deponent then quitted his lord,
+    who was with the two women, and immediately after his lord fired
+    the powder, and the three were blown up. The deponent escaped
+    with difficulty; and a few days afterward, the ring intrusted
+    to his charge, was taken from him by the sultan. The sultan,
+    and those with him, killed the Rajah Muda Hassim and his family,
+    because he was the friend of the English and wanted to suppress
+    piracy. The sultan has now built forts and defied the English. He
+    talked openly of cutting out any vessel that arrived; and two
+    Pangerans went down, bearing the flag of the Rajah Muda Hassim,
+    to look at the vessel, and to kill the captain if they could get
+    him ashore. The deponent had great difficulty in getting to the
+    ship; and should his flight be discovered, he considers the lives
+    of the surviving portion of the Rajah Muda Hassim's family will be
+    in danger. The deponent did what he was ordered, and what his late
+    lord, the Pangeran Budrudeen, desired him to do. The sultan had
+    a man ready to send, named Nakoda Kolala, to Kaluka, to request
+    that Pangeran Macota would kill Mr. Brooke by treachery or poison.
+
+
+    (_Signed_)
+    J. Brooke.
+
+
+
+
+Having put Mr. Brooke on his guard, the Hazard proceeded to Singapore,
+whence the H.E.I.C. war-steamer Phlegethon would be immediately
+dispatched to Sarawak.
+
+
+H h
+
+
+
+
+
+Suggestions for Accelerating the Communication Between Great Britain
+and China.
+
+------------------------+-----------------+---------+-------+---------+---------+---------+-------------------
+                        |                 |         |Average|Interval |Interval |         |
+                        |                 |         | Rate  | under   |   at    |  Total  |
+  Proposed Route from   |                 |         |  per  | Weigh.  | Anchor. |Interval.|
+  Hong Kong to London,  |                 |Distance,| Hour, |----+----+----+----+----+----|
+    and vice versa.     |     Course.     | Miles.  | Miles.| D  | h  | D  | h  | D  | h  |      Duties at Anchor.
+------------------------+-----------------+---------+-------+----+----+----+----+----+--- +----------------
+Hong Kong to Pulo Labuan| S.  2 deg.18'E.     |  1009   |   7   |  6 | -- |  1 | 12 |  7 | 12 |To receive Coal.[A]
+Pulo Labuan to Singapore| S. 69 23 W.     |   707   |  --   |  4 |  6 | -- | 12 |  4 | 18 |{To receive Coal, land and
+                        |                 |         |       |    |    |    |    |    |    |{receive Mails.
+Singapore to Malacca    |{S. 64 48 W. 19} |   122   |  --   | -- | 18 | -- |  6 |  1 | -- |To land and receive Mails.
+                        |{N. 51 41 W. 103}|         |       |    |    |    |    |    |    |
+Malacca to Pinang       | N. 30 37 W.     |   222   |  --   |  1 |  8 | -- | 16 |  2 | -- |(To receive Coal, land and
+                        |                 |         |       |    |    |    |    |    |    | receive Mails.
+Pinang to Ceylon [B]    |{N. 82 24 W. 303}|  1219   |  --   |  7 |  6 |  2 | 12 |  8 | 18 |    Ditto       Ditto
+                        |{S. 80 45 W. 916)|         |  --   |    |    |    |    |    |    |
+                        |-----------------+---------+-------+----+----+----+----+----+----+-------------------
+Ceylon to Aden         {|As now performed by the Peninsular and Oriental Steam }| 11 | -- |
+                       {|  Navigation Co., detention of 2 days included        }|    |    |
+Aden to Suez            |          Ditto           Ditto                        |  8 | -- |
+Suez to Alexandria      |          Ditto                  all stoppages included|  3 | -- |
+Alexandria to Malta     |          Ditto                                Ditto   |  4 | -- |
+Malta to Marseilles     |As now performed by H.M. Post-Office Packets,  ditto   |  4 | -- |
+Marseilles to London    |      Ditto      by regular course of Post     ditto   |  5 | -- |
+                                                                                |----+----|
+Total Interval from Hong Kong to London, and vice versa, by the proposed        |    |    |
+  Route.                                                                   Days | 59 | -- |
+Average interval of transmission of China Correspondance, via Calcutta and     }|    |    |
+  Bombay, during the last Twenty Overland Mails, viz. from 10th October, 1841, }|    |    |
+  to 6th May, 1843                                                             }| 89 | -- |
+                                                                                |----+----|
+      Difference of time in favor of proposed Route                        Days | 30 |    |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------+----+----+-------------------
+
+KEY:  D - Days.
+      h - Hours.
+
+
+
+Mem.--I have adopted an average rate of seven miles per hour as a fair
+estimate of the speed well-appointed Steam Vessels, of moderate size
+and power, will be enabled to accomplish and maintain, throughout
+the proposed Route, at all seasons of the year; for, during the
+whole distance from Pinang to Aden, and _vice versa_, neither
+monsoon, from the course steered, becomes at any period a directly
+adverse wind, an advantage which the route hitherto observed does
+not possess. Assuming that the Hon. East India Company continue the
+management of the Bombay line, and that the Peninsular and Oriental
+Steam Navigation Company are encouraged to render their operations
+more comprehensive, by the establishment of branch steamers between
+Ceylon and Singapore, to which latter port her majesty's steam
+vessels on the China station could convey the mails from Hong Kong,
+this all-important object might, without difficulty, be attained. The
+advantages to the Straits settlements, consequent on the adoption of
+improved arrangements, require no comment; and the _practicability_
+of effecting a very considerable acceleration of the communication
+with China is evident from the simple fact that the average interval
+which has occurred in the transmission of letters from China, by the
+last twenty Overland Mails (irrespective of the unfortunate July mail
+from Bombay), exceeds the period occasionally occupied by fast-sailing
+ships, in accomplishing the voyage via the Cape of Good Hope.
+
+
+London, _14th Sept. 1843._ [33]
+HENRY WISE,
+
+13, Austin Friars.
+
+P.S.--_Oct. 9th._ The arrival at Suez on the 16th ult. of the
+H.C.S. Akbar, in _forty-six_ days from Hong Kong, after accomplishing
+the passage down the China seas, against the S.W. monsoon--unassisted
+also by any previously arranged facilities for coaling, exchange of
+steamers at Aden, and other manifest advantages requisite for the
+proper execution of this important service, confirms the correctness
+of my estimate for performing the voyage from Hong Kong to Suez,
+or _vice versa_, viz. _forty-three_ days, including stoppages.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+APPENDIX.
+
+
+
+No. I.
+
+NATURAL HISTORY.
+
+
+_Mr. Brooke's Report on the Mias._ (From the Transactions of the
+Zoological Society.)
+
+JAMES BROOKE, Esq., to Mr. WATERHOUSE.
+
+
+My dear Sir:--Singapore, 25th March, 1841.
+
+I am happy to announce the departure of five live ourang-outangs by
+the ship Martin Luther, Captain Swan; and I trust they will reach you
+alive. In case they die, I have directed Captain Swan to put them into
+spirits, that you may still have an opportunity of seeing them. The
+whole of the five are from Borneo: one large female adult from Sambas;
+two, with slight cheek-callosities, from Pontiana; a small male,
+without any sign of callosities, from Pontiana likewise; and the
+smallest of all, a very young male with callosities, from Sadung. I
+will shortly forward a fine collection of skulls and skeletons from
+the northwest coast of Borneo, either shot by myself or brought by
+the natives; and I beg you will do me the favor to present the live
+ourangs and this collection to the Zoological Society. I have made
+many inquiries and gained some information regarding these animals,
+and I can, beyond a doubt, prove the existence of two, if not three,
+distinct species in Borneo.
+
+First, I will re-state the native account: secondly, give you my own
+observations; and thirdly, enter into a brief detail of the specimens
+hereafter to be forwarded.
+
+1st. The natives of the northwest coast of Borneo are all positive as
+to the existence of two distinct species, which I formerly gave you
+by the names of the _Mias pappan_ and _Mias rombi_; but I have since
+received information from a few natives of intelligence that there are
+three sorts, and what is vulgarly called the Mias rombi is in reality
+the _Mias kassar_, the rombi being a distinct and third species. The
+Mias pappan is the _Simia Wurmbii_ of Mr. Owen, having callosities
+on the sides of the face: the natives treat with derision the idea
+of the Mias kassar, or _Simia morio_, being the female of the Mias
+pappan or Simia Wurmbii; and I consider the fact can be established
+so clearly that I will not trouble you with their statements: both
+Malays and Dyaks are positive that the female of the Mias pappan has
+cheek-callosities the same as the male; and if on inquiry it prove
+to be so, the existence of three distinct species in Borneo will
+be established. The existence of the Mias rombi is vouched by a few
+natives only, but they were men of intelligence, and well acquainted
+with the animals in the wild state. They represent the Mias rombi to
+be as tall as the pappan, or even taller, but not so stout, with longer
+hair, a smaller face, and no callosities either on the male or female;
+and they always insisted that it was not the female of the pappan.
+
+The Mias kassar or Simia morio is of the same color as the Mias pappan,
+but altogether smaller, and devoid of callosities either on the male
+or female adults.
+
+By the native statements, therefore, we find three distinct species,
+viz. the Mias pappan or Simia Wurmbii, the Mias kassar or Simia morio,
+and the Mias rombi, which is either the _Simia Abelii_, or a fourth
+species. The existence of the Sumatran ourang in Borneo is by no
+means impossible; and I have already compared so many of the native
+statements, that I place more confidence in them than I did formerly,
+more especially as their account is in a great measure borne out by
+the skulls in my possession. I had an opportunity of seeing the Mias
+pappan and the Mias kassar in their native woods, and killing one of
+the former and several of the latter species. The distribution of these
+animals is worthy of notice, as they are found both at Pontiana and
+Sambas in considerable numbers, and at Sadung on the northwest coast,
+but are unknown in the intermediate country which includes the rivers
+of Sarawak and Samarahan. I confess myself at a loss to account for
+their absence on the Sarawak and Samarahan rivers, which abound with
+fruit, and have forests similar and contiguous to the Sadung, Linga,
+and other rivers. The distance from Samarahan to Sadung does not
+exceed twenty-five miles; and though pretty abundant on the latter,
+they are unknown on the former river. From Sadung, proceeding to the
+northward and eastward, they are found for about 100 miles, but beyond
+that distance do not inhabit the forests. The Mias pappan and Mias
+kassar inhabit the same woods, but I never met them on the same day;
+both species, according to the natives, are equally common, but from
+my own experience the Mias kassar is the most plentiful. The Mias
+rombi is represented as unfrequent and rarely to be met with. The
+pappan is justly named _Satyrus_, from the ugly face and disgusting
+callosities. The adult male I killed was seated lazily on a tree, and
+when approached only took the trouble to interpose the trunk between
+us, peeping at me, and dodging as I dodged. I hit him on the wrist,
+and he was afterward dispatched. I send you his proportions, enormous
+relative to his height; and until I came to actual measurement my
+impression was that he was nearly six feet in stature. The following
+is an extract from my journal relating to him, noted down directly
+after he was killed:--
+
+"Great was our triumph as we gazed on the huge animal dead at our feet,
+and proud were we of having shot the first ourang we had seen, and
+shot him in his native woods, in a Borneo forest, hitherto untrodden by
+European feet. The animal was adult, having four incisors, two canines,
+and ten molars in each jaw; but by his general appearance he was not
+old. We were struck by the length of his arms, the enormous neck,
+and the expanse of face, which altogether gave the impression of great
+height, whereas it was only great power. The hair was long, reddish,
+and thin; the face remarkably broad and fleshy, and on each side, in
+the place of a man's whiskers, were the callosities or rather fleshy
+protuberances, which I was so desirous to see, and which were nearly
+two inches in thickness. The ears were small and well shaped, the nose
+quite flat, mouth prominent, lips thick, teeth large and discolored,
+eyes small and roundish, face and hands black, the latter being very
+powerful. The following are the dimensions:
+
+
+                                                        ft. in.
+Height from head to heel                                 4   1
+Length of foot                                           1   0
+Ditto hand                                               0  10 1/2
+Length of arm from shoulder-blade to finger-end          3   5 3/4
+Shoulder-blade to elbow                                  1   6
+Elbow to wrist                                           1   1 1/2
+Hip to heel                                              1   9
+Head to os coccygia                                      2   5 1/2
+Across the shoulders                                     1   5 1/2
+Circumference of neck                                    2   4
+Ditto below the ribs                                     3   3 1/4
+Ditto under the arms                                     3   0
+From forehead to chin                                    0   9 3/4
+Across the face, below the eyes, including callosities   1   1
+From ear to ear across the top of the head               0   9 1/2
+From ear to ear behind the head                          0   9 3/4
+
+
+The natives asserted the animal to be a small one; but I am skeptical
+of their ever attaining the growth of a tall man, though I bear in mind
+that full-grown animals will probably differ as much in height as man."
+
+Some days after this, and about thirty miles distant, I was fortunate
+enough to kill two adult females (one with her young), and a male
+nearly adult, all the Mias kassar. The young male was not measured,
+owing to my having waded up to my neck in pursuit of him, and thereby
+destroyed my paper and lost my measure; but he certainly did not exceed
+3 feet, while the two females were about 3 ft. 1 in. and 3 ft. 2 in. in
+height. The male was just cutting his two posterior molars: the color
+of all resembled that of the Mias pappan, but the difference between
+the two animals was apparent even to our seamen. The kassar has no
+callosities either on the male or female, whereas the young pappans
+dispatched by the Martin Luther (one of them not a year old, with two
+first molars) show them prominently. The great difference between the
+kassar and the pappan in size would prove at once the distinction of
+the two species; the kassar being a small, slight animal, by no means
+formidable in his appearance, with hands and feet proportioned to the
+body, and they do not approach the gigantic extremities of the pappan
+either in size or power; and, in short, a moderately strong man would
+readily overpower one, when he would not stand the shadow of a chance
+with the pappan. Beside these decisive differences may be mentioned
+the appearance of the face, which in the Mias kassar is more prominent
+in the lower part, and the eyes exteriorly larger, in proportion to
+the size of the animal, than in the pappan. The color of the skin in
+the adult pappan is black, while the kassar, in his face and hands,
+has the dirty color common to the young of both species. If further
+evidence was wanted, the skulls will fully prove the distinction of
+species; for the skulls of two adult animals compared will show a
+difference in size alone which must preclude all supposition of their
+being one species. Mr. Owen's remarks are, however, so conclusive,
+that I need not dwell on this point; and with a suite of skulls,
+male and female, from the adult to the infant, of the Mias kassar,
+which I shall have the pleasure to forward, there can remain, I should
+think, little further room for discussion. I may mention, however,
+that two young animals I had in my possession alive, one a kassar,
+the other a pappan, fully bore out these remarks by their proportionate
+size. The pappan, with two molars, showed the callosities distinctly,
+and was as tall and far stouter than the kassar with three molars,
+while the kassar had no vestige of the callosities. Their mode of
+progression likewise was different, as the kassar doubled his fists
+and dragged his hind quarters after him, while the pappan supported
+himself on the open hands sideways placed on the ground, and moved one
+leg before the other in the erect sitting attitude; but this was only
+observed in the two young ones, and cannot be considered as certainly
+applicable to all.
+
+On the habits of the ourangs, as far as I have been able to observe
+them, I may remark, that they are as dull and as slothful as can
+well be conceived, and on no occasion when pursuing them did they
+move so fast as to preclude my keeping pace with them easily through
+a moderately clear forest; and even when obstructions below (such
+as wading up to the neck) allowed them to get way some distance,
+they were sure to stop and allow us to come up. I never observed the
+slightest attempt at defence; and the wood, which sometimes rattled
+about our ears, was broken by their weight, and not thrown, as some
+persons represent. If pushed to extremity, however, the pappan could
+not be otherwise than formidable; and one unfortunate man, who with a
+party was trying to catch a large one alive, lost two of his fingers,
+beside being severely bitten on the face, while the animal finally
+beat off his pursuers and escaped. When they wish to catch an adult,
+they cut down a circle of trees round the one on which he is seated,
+and then fell that also, and close before he can recover himself,
+and endeavor to bind him.
+
+In a small work entitled "The Menageries," published in 1838, there
+is a good account of the Borneon ourang, with a brief extract from
+Mr. Owen's valuable paper on the Simia morio; but, after dwelling on
+the lazy and apathetic disposition of the animal, it states in the same
+page that they can make their way amid the branches of the trees with
+surprising agility; whereas they are the slowest and least active of
+all the monkey tribe, and their motions are surprisingly awkward and
+uncouth. The natives on the northwest coast entertain no dread, and
+always represent the ourangs as harmless and inoffensive animals; and
+from what I saw, they would never attack a man unless brought to the
+ground. The rude hut which they are stated to build in the trees would
+be more properly called a seat or nest, for it has no roof or cover
+of any sort. The facility with which they form this seat is curious,
+and I had an opportunity of seeing a wounded female weave the branches
+together, and seat herself within a minute; she afterward received
+our fire without moving, and expired in her lofty abode, whence it
+cost us much trouble to dislodge her. I have seen some individuals
+with nails on the posterior thumbs, but generally speaking, they are
+devoid of them: of the five animals sent home, two have the nails,
+and three are without them; one has the nail well formed, and in the
+other it is merely rudimentary. The length of my letter precludes my
+dwelling on many particulars which, as I have not seen the recent
+publications on the subject, might be mere repetitions; and I will
+only mention, as briefly as I can, the skulls of these animals in my
+possession. From my late sad experience I am induced to this, that
+some brief record may be preserved from shipwreck. These skulls may
+be divided into three distinct sorts. The first presents two ridges,
+one rising from each frontal bone, which, joining on the top of the
+head, form an elevated crest, which runs backward to the cerebral
+portion of the skull.
+
+The second variety is the Simia morio; and nothing need be added to
+Mr. Owen's account, save that it presents no ridge whatever beyond the
+frontal part of the head. No. 9 in the collection is the skull of an
+adult male: No. 2 the male, nearly adult, killed by myself: Nos. 11
+and 3 adult females, killed by myself: No. 12 a young male, with three
+molars, killed by myself: No. 21 a young male, died aboard, with three
+molars: No. 19, young male, died aboard, with two molars. There are
+many other skulls of the Simia morio which exactly coincide with this
+suite, and this suite so remarkably coincides through the different
+stages of age, one with another, that no doubt can exist of the
+Simia morio being a distinct species. The different character of the
+skull, its small size and small teeth, put the matter beyond doubt,
+and completely establish Mr. Owen's acute and triumphant argument,
+drawn from a single specimen.
+
+The third distinction of the skulls is, that the ridges rising from the
+frontal bones do not meet, but converge toward the top of the head,
+and again diverge toward the posterior portion of the skull. These
+ridges are less elevated than in the first-mentioned skulls, but the
+size of the adult skulls is equal, and both present specimens of aged
+animals. For a long time I was inclined to think the skulls with the
+double ridge were the females of the animals with the single and more
+prominent ridge; but No. 1 (already described as killed by myself)
+will show that the double ridge belongs to an adult and not young
+male animal, and that it belongs to the Simia Wurmbii with the huge
+callosities. The distinction therefore cannot be a distinction of
+sex, unless we suppose the skulls with the greater development of
+the single ridge to belong to the female, which is improbable in the
+highest degree. The skulls with the double and less elevated ridges
+belong, as proved by No. 1, to the Simia Wurmbii; and I am of opinion
+the single and higher ridge must be referred to another and distinct
+species, unless we can account for this difference on the score of
+age. This, I conceive, will be found impossible, as Nos. 7 and 20
+are specimens similar to No. 1, with the double and less elevated
+ridges decidedly old, and Nos. 4 and 5 are specimens of the single
+high ridge, likewise decidedly old.
+
+These three characters in the skulls coincide with the native
+statements of there being three distinct species in Borneo, and this
+third Borneon species may probably be found to be the Simia Abelii, or
+Sumatran ourang. This probability is strengthened by the adult female
+on her way home: her color is dark brown, with black face and hands;
+and in color of hair, contour, and expression, she differs from the
+male ourangs with the callosities to a degree that makes me doubt her
+being the female of the same species. I offer you these remarks for
+fear of accident; but should the specimens, living and dead, arrive
+in safety, they will give a fresh impetus to the inquiry, and on my
+next return to Borneo I shall, in all probability, be able to set
+the question at rest, whether there be two or three species in that
+country. Believe me, my dear sir, with best wishes, to remain,
+
+
+Yours very truly, J. Brooke.
+
+
+Borneo, like Celebes, teems with Natural History unknown to European
+science; and Mr. Brooke has sent some remarkable specimens to England,
+though his own large collection was, unfortunately, wrecked on its
+voyage homeward. Every arrival, however, is now adding to the stores
+we already possess. The British Museum has been much enriched, even
+within the last year, with rare specimens of zoology and botany; and
+at the Entomological Society there have been exhibited and described
+many curious insects hitherto strange and unclassified.
+
+
+
+
+
+No. II.
+
+PHILOLOGY.
+
+
+It was intended in this work to convey to the studious in
+philology,--upon which science, rationally investigated, so
+much depends on our ability to ascertain the origin and trace the
+earliest relations of mankind,--as copious a vocabulary of the Dyak
+language, with definitions of meaning and cognate references, as
+might be considered a useful contribution to that important branch
+of learning. But various considerations have induced us to forego
+the design; and not the least of them has been, not the difficulty,
+but the impossibility of reducing the whole collection to a system,
+or of laying down any certain rule of orthography in this Oriental
+confusion. Nearly all the vowels, for example, have been found of
+equal value; and as they have but one general Malay name, so it
+happens that (for instance) the consonants _b d_might be pronounced
+with the intervening sound, _bad_, _bed_, _bid_, _bod_, _bud_, and
+sundry variations beside, unknown to the English tongue. This will in a
+great degree account for the universally vexatious, because puzzling,
+spelling, inflections, and pronunciation of Eastern names, which
+is so injurious to the literature and knowledge of those countries
+among Europeans.
+
+The vowel-sounds adopted are:
+
+    _a_         like              _a_ in _father_.
+    _e_           "               _a_ in _fan_.
+    _i_           "               Italian _i_, or _ee_ in _thee_.
+    _i_           "               _i_ in _pin_.
+    _o_           "               _o_ in _spoke_.
+    _u_           "               _oo_ in _cool_.
+    _u_           "               u in run.
+    _y_         occasionally like _i_.
+    _ow_ (_ou_) like              _ow_ in _cow_.
+
+
+The final _k_ in Malayan is frequently mute: thus Dyak is pronounced
+Dyaa, with the slightest possible aspiration.
+
+_gn_ is a liquid sound.
+
+We add an alphabetical list of some of the words which have occurred
+in the preceding pages.
+
+
+_Arafuras_, or _Haraforas_, natives of Papua.
+
+_Balanian_, wild tribes in Borneo.
+
+_Bandar_, or _Bandhara_, treasurer, high steward, high officer
+of state.
+
+_Basaya_, tribes in the interior of Borneo Proper, locating near and
+resembling the Murut.
+
+_Battara,_ one of the Dyak names of God (the Hindu _Avatara_).
+
+_Borneo_, the island of, written "Bruni" by the inhabitants.
+
+_Borneo Proper,_ the northern and northwestern part of the island;
+an independent Malay state.
+
+_Borneons_, the Malay inhabitants of Borneo Proper.
+
+_Bruni_, the native name for Borneo.
+
+_Bugis_, natives of Celebes.
+
+_Bulan_, the Moon, a poetical title of honor to a pirate-chief.
+
+_Campong_, a native village, or town.
+
+_Datu_, a cape or point of land to the northwest of the river
+Banjamassim.
+
+_Datus_, strictly, native chiefs, heads of tribes.
+
+_Dusun,_ agricultural villagers on the northern extremity of Borneo.
+
+_Dyaks_; or Dyak, aborigines of Borneo, and generally pronounced Dyah.
+
+_Dyak Darrat,_ Land Dyaks.
+
+_Dyak Laut,_ Sea Dyaks.
+
+_Gantong_, a Malay measure for rice.
+
+_Gunong_, a mountain.
+
+_Hadji_, a Mahomedan who has made a pilgrimage to Mecca.
+
+_Haraforas_, or _Arafuras_, natives of Papua.
+
+_Idaans_ [Kadiens], Borneon tribes, and the name generally given to
+most of the varieties of the Indian Archipelago.
+
+_Illanuns_ or _Lanuns_, pirates inhabiting the small cluster of
+islands between Borneo and Magindano.
+
+_Jovata_, a Dyak name of God, of Hindu origin.
+
+_Kadiens_, Borneon tribes, Mahomedans, the Idaan of preceding voyagers
+and writers. See _Idaans_.
+
+_Kalamantan_, an original name of Borneo.
+
+_Kanowit_, wild tribes in Borneo.
+
+_Kaya_, a title of authority, Orang Kaya de Gadong, chief man of
+Gadong.
+
+_Kayans_, the most powerful and warlike people of Borneo, living
+inland.
+
+_Kuching_, the former name of the town of Sarawak.
+
+_Lubuan_, the island off Borneo river, ceded by the sultan to the
+British crown.
+
+_Lelas_, guns.
+
+_Magindano_, an island off the northeast of Borneo, the natives of
+which are pirates.
+
+_Makassar_, the straits of, usually written Macassar, but more
+accurately Mangkassar.
+
+_Malays_, settled on the Malayan peninsula, coasts of Borneo, &c. &c.,
+a race of seafaring character, often piratical, and conquerors of
+various native tribes in the Indian Archipelago.
+
+_Malukus_, pirates from a bay in Gillolo, whose country is in the
+possession of the Dutch.
+
+_Marundum_, an island off Borneo.
+
+_Matari_, or _Mata-hari_(the eye of day), the Sun, a poetical title
+of honor to a pirate-chief.
+
+_Mias Rombi_ and _M. Pappan_, two species of ourang-outang, determined
+by Mr. Brooke.
+
+_Millanows_, a tribe resembling the Kayans, living near the river Meri,
+river Bentulu, tolerably civilized, and fairer than the Malays.
+
+_Minkokas_, a wild tribe near the Bay of Boni.
+
+_Morotaba_ river, one of the mouths of the Sarawak.
+
+_Montrado_, a very large and populous Chinese settlement near Point
+Data.
+
+_Murut_, inhabitants of the interior of Borneo Proper.
+
+_Natunas_, islands off Borneo.
+
+_Ondong-ondong_, the written law of Borneo.
+
+_Orang_, a man.
+
+_Orang outang_, a wild man.
+
+_Pangeran_, or _Pangiran_, the title of a high Malay authority.
+
+_Panglima_, the head warrior of a Dyak tribe.
+
+_Patingi_, or _Patingus_, a high local officer.
+
+_Patobong_, the name of the ranjows and sudas, defences in war.
+
+_Patakan Dyaks_, said by the Malays to be cannibals.
+
+_Pontiana_, one of the finest rivers in Borneo; also the name of
+natives on its banks. The Dutch have a settlement on this river.
+
+_Ranjows_, bamboo-spikes stuck in the ground to wound the feet of
+attacking enemies, or concealed in pits to wound or destroy them.
+
+_Rhio_, a Malay settlement, under Dutch control.
+
+_Sadung_, a river adjoining the Sarawak.
+
+_Sakarra_, a Dyak god, residing in the Pleiades.
+
+_Sakarran_, a river like the Sarebus (which see), with a similar
+native population on its banks.
+
+_Satigi_, a wooden spear, or dart.
+
+_Sampan_, a small prahu.
+
+_Sarebus_, a river flowing into the deep bay between Tanjong Sipang
+and Tanjong Sirak.
+
+_Sarebus_, powerful Dyak tribes and pirates, located on the above,
+and other rivers flowing into the bay. They have thrown off the Malay
+yoke, and plunder as far as Celebes.
+
+_Seriff_, or _Sheriff_, a high Malay title, peculiar to persons of
+Arab descent.
+
+_Sibnowans_, or _Sibnyons_, Mr. Brooke's favorite tribe of Dyaks,
+of superior character.
+
+_Singe_, Dyak tribes.
+
+_Songi Besar_, large river.
+
+_Sooloo_, on the northeast of Borneo, a powerful piratical nest,
+the natives of which massacred the garrison of Balambangan in 1775.
+
+_Sudahs_, defences to wound the feet of attacking enemies.
+
+_Sumpitan_, or _Simpote_, a tube seven or eight feet in length,
+through which the Borneons blow small sharp-pointed arrows.
+
+_Tanjong_, a point of land.
+
+_Turaj_, or _Tarajahs_, natives of Celebes.
+
+_Tatows_, wild tribes in the interior of Borneo.
+
+_Tiran_, natives on the north of Borneo, reported (on doubtful
+authority) to be pirates and cannibals.
+
+_Tuan_, sir, an exclamation of assent to an approved speaker, instead
+of "hear, hear," or "yes."
+
+_Tuan Besar_, sir, great, great chief, higher applause and deference.
+
+_Tumangong_, a local Malay officer.
+
+_Tumbilans_, a beautiful group of about 150 small islands between
+Borneo and Singapore.
+
+_Tuppa_, a Dyak god.
+
+_Wakil_, a deputy.
+
+_Zedong_, like the Tiran, which see.
+
+
+
+
+No. III.
+
+_Proposed Exploring Expedition to the Asiatic Archipelago, by_ James
+Brooke, Esq. 1838.
+
+
+The voyage I made to China opened an entirely new scene, and showed
+me what I had never seen before, savage life and savage nature. I
+inquired, and I read, and I became more and more assured that there
+was a large field of discovery and adventure open to any man daring
+enough to enter upon it. Just take a map and trace a line over the
+Indian Archipelago, with its thousand unknown islands and tribes. Cast
+your eye over the vast island of New Guinea, where the foot of European
+has scarcely, if ever, trod. Look at the northern coast of Australia,
+with its mysterious Gulf of Carpentaria; a survey of which, it is
+supposed, would solve the great geographical question respecting the
+rivers of the mimic continent. Place your finger on Japan, with its
+exclusive and civilized people; it lies an unknown lump on our earth,
+and an undefined line on our charts! Think of the northern coast of
+China, willing, as is reported, to open an intercourse and trade
+with Europeans, spite of their arbitrary government. Stretch your
+pencil over the Pacific Ocean, which Cook himself declares a field
+of discovery for ages to come! Proceed to the coast of South America,
+from the region of gold-dust to the region of furs--the land ravaged
+by the cruel Spaniard and the no less cruel Bucaneer--the scene of
+the adventures of Drake and the descriptions of Dampier. The places
+I have enumerated are mere names, with no specific ideas attached to
+them: lands and seas where the boldest navigators gained a reputation,
+and where hundreds may yet do so, if they have the same courage and
+the same perseverance. Imagination whispers to ambition that there
+are yet lands unknown which might be discovered. Tell me, would not
+a man's life be well spent--tell me, would it not be well sacrificed,
+in an endeavor to explore these regions? When I think on dangers and
+death, I think of them only because they would remove me from such
+a field for ambition, for energy, and for knowledge.
+
+Borneo, Celebes, Sooloo, the Moluccas, and the islands of the Straits
+of Sunda and Banka, compose what is called the Malayan group; and
+the Malays located on the sea-shores of these and other islands may
+with certainty be classed as belonging to one people. It is well
+known, however, that the interior of these countries is inhabited
+by various tribes, differing from the Malays and each other, and
+presenting numerous gradations of early civilization: the Dyaks of
+Borneo, the Papuans of New Guinea, and others, beside the black race
+scattered over the islands. Objects of traffic here as elsewhere
+present interesting subjects of inquiry; and while our acquaintance
+with every other portion of the globe, from the passage of the Pole
+to the navigation of the Euphrates, has greatly extended, it is matter
+of surprise that we know scarcely anything of these people beyond the
+bare fact of their existence, and remain altogether ignorant of the
+geographical features of the countries they inhabit. Countries which
+present an extended field for Christianity and commerce, which none
+surpass in fertility, rich beyond the Americas in mineral productions,
+and unrivaled in natural beauty, continue unexplored to the present
+day; and, spite of the advantages which would probably result, have
+failed to attract the attention they so well deserve. The difficulty
+of the undertaking will scarcely account for its non-performance,
+if we consider the voluntary sacrifices made on the shrine of African
+research, or the energy displayed and the sufferings encountered by
+the explorers of the Polar regions: yet the necessity of prosecuting
+the voyage in an armed vessel, the wildness of the interior tribes,
+the lawless ferocity of the Malays, and other dangers, would prevent
+most individuals from fixing on this field for exertion, and points
+it out as one which could best and most fully be accomplished by
+Government or some influential body.
+
+It is not my object to enter into any detail of the past history of
+the Malayan nations, but I may refer to the undoubted facts that they
+have been in a state of deterioration since we first became acquainted
+with them; and the records of our early voyagers, together with the
+remains of antiquity still visible in Java and Sumatra, prove that once
+flourishing nations have now ceased to exist, and that countries once
+teeming with human life are now tenantless and deserted. The causes
+of such lamentable change need only be alluded to; but it is fit to
+remark, that while the standard of education is unfurled, and dreams
+are propagated of the progressive advancement of the human race, a
+large part of the globe has been gradually relapsing and allowed to
+relapse into barbarism. Whether the early decay of the Malay states,
+and their consequent demoralization, arose from the introduction of
+Mahommedism, or resulted from the intrigues of European ambition, it
+were useless to discuss; but we are very certain that this "Eden of the
+Eastern wave" has been reduced to a state of anarchy and confusion,
+as repugnant to every dictate of humanity as it is to the prospect
+of commercial advantage.
+
+Borneo and Celebes, and indeed the greater portion of the islands
+of the Malayan Archipelago, are still unknown, and the apathy of two
+centuries still reigns supreme with the enlightened people of England;
+while they willingly make the most expensive efforts favorable to
+science, commerce, or Christianity in other quarters, the locality
+which eminently combines these three objects is alone neglected
+and alone uncared for. It has unfortunately been the fate of our
+Indian possessions to have labored under the prejudice and contempt
+of a large portion of the well-bred community. While the folly of
+fashion requires an acquaintance with the deserts of Africa, and a
+most ardent thirst for a knowledge of the usages of Timbuctoo, it at
+the same time justifies the most profound ignorance of all matters
+connected with the government and geography of our vast acquisitions
+in Hindoostan. The Indian Archipelago has fully shared this neglect;
+and even the tender philanthropy of the present day, which originates
+such multifarious schemes for the amelioration of doubtful evils,
+which shudders at the prolongation of apprenticeship for a single year
+in the West, is blind to the existence of slavery in its worst and most
+aggravated form in the East. Not a single prospectus is spread abroad;
+not a single voice is upraised to relieve the darkness of Paganism,
+and the horrors of the Eastern slave-trade. While the trumpet-tongue
+of many an orator excites thousands to the rational and charitable
+objects of converting the Jews and reclaiming the Gipsys; while the
+admirable exertions of missionary enterprise in the Ausonian climes
+of the South Sea have invested them with worldly power as well as
+religious influence; while we admire the torrent of devotional and
+philosophical exertion, we cannot help deploring that the zeal and
+attention of the leaders of these charitable crusades have never
+been directed to the countries under consideration. These unhappy
+countries have failed to rouse attention or excite commiseration;
+and as they sink lower and lower, they afford a striking proof how
+civilization may be dashed, and how the purest and richest lands
+under the sun may be degraded and brutalized by a continued course of
+oppression and misrule. It is under these circumstances that I have
+considered individual exertion may be usefully applied to rouse the
+zeal of slumbering philanthropy, and to lead the way to an increased
+knowledge of the Indian Archipelago. Such an exertion will be made at
+some cost and some sacrifice; and I shall here quit the general topic,
+and confine myself to the specific objects of my intended voyage.
+
+It must be premised, however, that any plan previously decided on
+must always be subject during its execution to great modifications in
+countries where the population is always rude and often hostile, and
+where the influence of climate is sometimes so fatally opposed to the
+progress of inquiry. Local information, likewise, frequently renders
+such a change both advisable and advantageous; and circumstances, as
+they spring up, too often influence us beyond the power of foresight,
+more especially in my own case, where the utmost care would still
+leave the means very inadequate to the full accomplishment of the
+proposed undertaking. With a small vessel properly equipped, and
+provided with the necessary instruments for observation, and the means
+for collecting specimens in natural history, it is proposed in the
+first instance to proceed to Singapore, which may be considered as
+head-quarters for the necessary intervals of refreshment and repose,
+and for keeping open a certain communication with Europe. Here the
+best local information can be obtained, interpreters procured, the
+crew augmented for any particular service; and here, if needful, a
+small vessel of native construction may be added to the expedition,
+to facilitate the objects in view. An acquaintance may likewise be
+formed with the more respectable Bugis merchants, and their good-will
+conciliated in the usual mode, viz., by civility and presents, so as
+to remove any misconceived jealousy on the score of trading rivalry,
+and to induce a favorable report of our friendly intentions in their
+own country, and at the places where they may touch. The Royalist
+will probably reach Singapore in the month of March, 1839, at the
+latter end of the northwest, or rainy monsoon. The delay consequent
+on effecting the objects above mentioned, beside gaining a general
+acquaintance with the natural history and trade of the settlement,
+and some knowledge of the Malay language, will usefully occupy the
+time until the setting in of the southeast, or dry monsoon. It may be
+incidentally mentioned, however, that in the vicinity of Singapore
+there are many islands imperfectly known, and which, during the
+intervals of the rainy season, will afford interesting occupation. I
+allude, more especially, to the space between the Straits of Rhio and
+those of Duryan, and likewise to the island called Bintang, which,
+although laid down as one large island, is probably composed of small
+ones, divided by navigable straits; a better acquaintance with which
+might facilitate the voyage from Singapore to the more eastern islands,
+by bringing to light other passages beside those of Rhio and Duryan;
+and, at any rate, would add something to our geographical knowledge
+in the immediate vicinity of our settlement. On the commencement of
+the healthy season I propose sailing from Singapore, and proceeding
+without loss of time to Malludu Bay, at the north end of Borneo. This
+spot has been chosen for the first essay; and in a country every part
+of which is highly interesting, and almost unknown, the mere fact of
+its being a British possession gives it a prior claim to attention.
+
+The objects in view may be briefly mentioned. 1. A general knowledge of
+the bay, and the correct position of various points--more especially
+the two principal headlands at its entrance, so as to determine its
+outline. The westernmost of these headlands, called Sampanmange, will
+likewise determine the extreme north point of Borneo. 2. Inquiries for
+the settlement of Cochin Chinese, reported, on Earl's authority, to be
+fixed in the vicinity of Bankoka: an intercourse will, if possible,
+be opened with this settlement, if in existence. 3. The rivers which
+flow into the bay will be carefully and minutely explored, and an
+attempt will be made to penetrate into the interior as far as the lake
+of Kini Ballu. 4. For the same purpose, every endeavor will be used to
+open a communication with the aboriginal inhabitants of the country,
+and every means employed to conciliate their good opinion; and (if
+the ceremony exists in this part of the island) to enter into the
+bonds of fraternity (described by Mr. Dalton) with some of the chiefs.
+
+I speak with great diffidence about penetrating into the interior of
+this country, for I am well aware of the insurmountable difficulties
+which the hard reality often presents, which are previously
+overlooked and easily overcome in the smoothness of paper, or the
+luxury of a drawing-room. The two points to be chiefly relied upon
+for this purpose are, a friendly intercourse with the natives, and
+the existence of navigable rivers. It is mentioned by Sir Stamford
+Raffles, on native authority, that a land communication, of not more
+than forty miles, exists between Malludu Bay and Lake Kini Ballu;
+but neither this computation, nor any other derived from the natives,
+however intelligent otherwise, can be relied on; for the inhabitants of
+these countries are generally ignorant of any measure for distance; and
+their reckoning by time is so vague, as to defy a moderately-certain
+conclusion. The fact, however, of the vicinity of the lake to the bay
+may be concluded; and it follows, as a reasonable inference, that the
+river or rivers flowing into the bay communicate with the lake. The
+existence of such rivers, which were from the locality to have been
+expected, is vouched for by Captain Forrest. "Most of this north part
+of Borneo (he says), granted to the English East India Company by the
+Sooloos, is watered by noble rivers: those that discharge themselves
+into Malludu Bay are not barred." It is by one or other of these rivers
+that I should hope to penetrate as far as the lake and mountain of
+Kini Ballu, and into the country of the Idaan. I have not been able to
+learn that any Malay towns of importance are situated in the bight of
+Malludu Bay, and their absence will render a friendly communication
+with the aborigines a matter of comparative ease. The advantages
+likely to result from such friendly relations are so evident, that
+I need not dwell upon them; though the mode of effecting such an
+intercourse must be left to the thousand contingencies which govern
+all, and act so capriciously on the tempers of the savage races. The
+utmost forbearance, and a liberality guided by prudence, so as not
+to excite too great a degree of cupidity, appear the fundamental
+rules for managing men in a low state of civilization. The results
+of an amicable understanding are as uncertain as its commencement;
+for they depend on the enterprise of the individual, and the power
+of the native tribe into whose hands he may have fallen. I will not,
+therefore, enter into a visionary field of discovery; but it appears
+to me certain that, without the assistance of the natives, no small
+party can expect to penetrate far into a country populous by report,
+and in many parts thickly covered with wood. Without entertaining
+any exaggerated expectation, I trust that something may be added
+to our geographical knowledge of the sea-coast of this bay, its
+leading features, productions, rivers, anchorages, and inhabitants,
+the prospect of trade, and the means of navigation; and although my
+wishes lead me strongly to penetrate as far as the lake of Kini Ballu,
+yet the obstacles which may be found to exist to the fulfillment of
+this desire will induce me to rest satisfied with the more moderate
+and reasonable results.
+
+It may not be superfluous to notice here, that a foregone conclusion
+appears to be spread abroad regarding the aboriginal (so called)
+inhabitants of Borneo, and that they are usually considered and
+mentioned under the somewhat vague appellation of Dyaks. They are
+likewise commonly pronounced as originating from the same stock as the
+Arafuras of Celebes and New Guinea, and radically identical with the
+Polynesian race. The conclusion is not in itself highly improbable,
+but certainly premature, as the facts upon which it is built are so
+scanty and doubtful as to authorize no such structure. On an island
+of the vast size of Borneo, races radically distinct might exist;
+and at any rate, the opposite conclusion is hardly justifiable, from
+the specimens of language or the physical appearance of the tribes
+of the southern portion of the country. We have Malay authority for
+believing that there are many large tribes in the interior, differing
+greatly in their degree of civilization, though all alike removed from
+the vicinity of a superior people. We have the Dyaks of the south; the
+Idaan of the north; the Kagins; and a race little better than monkeys,
+who live in trees, eat without cooking, are hunted by the other tribes,
+and would seem to exist in the lowest conceivable grade of humanity. If
+we may trust these accounts, these latter people resemble in many
+particulars the Orang Benua, or aborigines of the peninsula; but the
+Dyaks and Idaans are far superior, living in villages, cultivating
+the ground, and possessing cattle. Beside these, likewise, we have
+the names of several other tribes or people; and, in all probability,
+many exist in the interior with whom we are unacquainted.
+
+There are strong reasons for believing that the Hindoo religion,
+which obtained so extensively in Java and Sumatra, and yet survives at
+Bali and Lombock, was likewise extended to Borneo; and some authors
+have conceived grounds for supposing a religion anterior even to
+this. If only a portion of these floating opinions should be true,
+and the truth can only be tested by inquiry, we may fairly look for the
+descendants of the Hindoo dynasty as well as an aboriginal people. It
+never seems to have occurred to any one to compare the Dyaks with the
+people of Bali and Lombock. We know indeed but little of the former;
+but both races are fair, good-looking, and gentle. Again, respecting
+the concluded identity of the Dyaks and the Arafuras, it is clear we
+have a very limited knowledge indeed of the former; and, I may ask,
+what do we know of the Arafuras?
+
+In short, I feel as reluctant to embrace any preconceived theory as
+I am to adopt the prevailing notion on this subject; for it requires
+a mass of facts, of which we are wholly deficient, to arrive at
+anything approaching a reasonable conclusion. To return, however,
+to the proceedings of the Royalist, I would remark, that it depends
+greatly on the time passed in Malludu Bay whether our next endeavor
+be prosecuted at Abai on the western, or Tusan Abai on the eastern
+coast. The object in visiting Abai would he chiefly to penetrate to
+the lake, which, on the authority of Dalrymple and Burton, is not
+far distant thence, by a water communication; but should any success
+have attended similar efforts from Malludu Bay, this project will be
+needless, as in that case the enterprise will have been prosecuted to
+the westward, and reach to the vicinity of Abai. As Kaminis is the
+limit of the British territory to the westward, so Point Kaniungan,
+situated to the southward of the bay of Sandakan, forms the eastern
+boundary; and a line drawn from coast to coast between these points
+is represented as including our possessions. A reference to the chart
+will show the extent to be considerable; and the eastern coast from
+Malludu Bay to Point Kaniungan is so very little known, that it is
+highly desirable to become acquainted with its general features and
+conformation, and to seek thence the means of gaining an inlet into
+the interior, should it be denied at Malludu Bay.
+
+The reported proximity of Kini Ballu to Malludu Bay, and likewise to
+Abai would (supposing it is anything like the size it is affirmed to
+be) lead us to expect that it cannot be far distant from the eastern
+coast; and it is but reasonable to conclude that some rivers or streams
+discharge themselves into the sea in the numerous indentations that
+abound on this shore. However this may be, the coast, with its bays
+and islands and bold headlands, is one of great interest, and almost
+unknown; and the careful inspection of it as far as Point Kaniungan
+will, I trust, add something to our knowledge. The longitude of
+Point Kaniungan and Point Unsang will likewise determine the eastern
+extremity of Borneo.
+
+Much more might be added on this topic, especially of the reported
+communication by a line of lakes from Malludu Bay to Banjarmassim,
+which, if true, would in all probability place some of these lakes
+near particular points of the east coast, as the whole line, from the
+relative position of the two extremes, must be on the eastern side
+of the island. These reports, and the various surmises which arise
+from them, are rather matters for verification than discussion; and I
+will therefore only add that, tempted by success, I shall not devote
+less than a year and a half to this object; but, in case of finding
+a sickly climate, or meeting with a decidedly hostile population,
+I shall more easily abandon the field, and turn to others of not less
+interest, and perhaps of less risk.
+
+Equal to Borneo in riches, and superior in picturesque beauty to any
+part of the Archipelago, is the large and eccentric country of the
+Bugis, called Celebes. So deep are the indentations of its coasts,
+that the island may be pronounced as being composed of a succession
+of peninsulas, nearly uniting in a common center in the district of
+Palos; and thus, by the proximity of every part to the sea, offering
+great facilities for brief and decisive interior excursions. The
+Dutch are in possession of Makassar, and had formerly settlements
+on the northwest coast and in the bay of Sawa. Their power appears,
+however, never to have been very extensively acknowledged; and
+at present I have not been able to meet with any account of the
+condition of their factories. This information will probably be gained
+at Singapore. Avoiding the Dutch settlements, I propose limiting my
+inquiries to the northern and northeastern portion of the island, more
+especially the great bay of Gunong Tella. It is impossible to state
+here the direction of these inquiries, or any definite object to which
+they should be turned, as I am acquainted with no author who speaks
+of the country, save in a general and vague manner. It is reported
+as rich, fertile, mountainous, strikingly beautiful, and possessed of
+rivers; abounding in birds, and inhabited, like Borneo, by wild tribes
+in the interior, and by the Bugis on the sea-shores and entrance of
+rivers. The character of the Bugis, though so variously represented,
+gives me strong hopes of rendering them, by care and kindness, useful
+instruments in the prosecution of these researches; for all writers
+agree that they are active, hardy, enterprising, and commercial; and
+it is seldom that a people possessing such characteristics are deaf
+to the suggestions of self-interest or kindly feeling. The arrogance,
+and especially the indolence, of the Malays, counteracts the influence
+of these strong incentives; and the impulse which governs such rude
+tribes as the Dyaks and Arafuras is a dangerous weapon, which cuts all
+ways, and often when least anticipated. The Badjows, or sea-gipsys,
+are another race on whom some dependence may be placed. Mr. Earl,
+who had a personal acquaintance with this tribe, and could speak their
+language, always expressed to me a degree of confidence in their good
+faith, which must have had some grounds.
+
+I may here conclude the first stage of the expedition, during the
+progress of which the head-quarters will be fixed at Singapore. During
+some of the intervals I hope to see Manilla, and to acquire a cursory
+knowledge of the unexplored tract at the southern extremity of Celebes,
+called in Norie's general chart the Tiger Islands.
+
+The time devoted to the objects above mentioned must, as I have before
+said, be regulated by the degree of fortune which attends them; for,
+cheered by success, I should not readily abandon the field; yet, if
+persecuted by climate, or other serious detriments, I shall frequently
+shift the ground, to remove myself beyond such evil influence. It
+is scarcely needful to continue a detail of projects so distant,
+having already carved out for myself a work which I should be proud to
+perform, and which is already as extended as the chances of human life
+and human resolves will warrant. The continuation of the voyage would
+lead me to take the Royalist to Timor or Port Essington, thence making
+excursions to the Arru Isles, Timor Laut, and the southern shores
+of New Guinea. That part of the coast contiguous to Torres Straits I
+am particularly desirous of visiting; as it has been suggested to me
+by Mr. Earl, and I think with reason, that a better channel than the
+one we are at present acquainted with may be found there. That such
+a channel exists, and will be discovered when the coast is surveyed,
+I entertain but little doubt; but the navigation is hazardous, and
+must, from the westward, be attempted with great caution.
+
+My own proceedings must, of course, be regulated by the discoveries
+previously made by Captain Wickham or others; and as this gentleman
+has orders to survey Torres Straits, the field may be well trodden
+before I reach it. The rest of the voyage I shall consider as one
+merely of pleasure, combining such utility as circumstances will
+permit. It is probable that I shall visit our Australian settlements;
+glance at the islands of the Pacific; and return to Europe round
+Cape Horn. Before concluding, I may observe, that there are points
+of inquiry which may be useful to the studies of the learned, which
+(provided the process be moderately simple) I shall be willing to make,
+and I shall always be happy to receive any directions or suggestions
+regarding them. I allude to observations on the tides, to geology,
+to the branches of natural history, &c. &c., for the general inquirer
+often neglects or overlooks highly intersting facts, from his attention
+not having been called to them. The specimens of natural history will
+be forwarded home on every visit to Singapore; and the information
+will be sent ot the Geographical Society, and may always, if it be of
+any value, be used as freely as it is communicated. In like manner,
+the objects of natural history will be open to any person who is at
+all interested in such pursuits. I cannot but express my regret,
+that from pecuniary considerations as well as the small size of
+the vessel, and the limited quantity of provision she carries, I
+am unable to take a naturalist and draughtsman; but I should always
+hail with pleasure any scientific person who joined me abroad, or who
+happened to be in the countries at the time; and I may venture to
+promise him every encouragement and facility in the prosecution of
+his pursuits. I embark upon the expedition with great cheerfulness,
+with a stout vessel, a good crew, and the ingredients of success as
+far as the limited scale of the undertaking will permit; and I cast
+myself upon the waters--like Mr. Southey's little book--but whether
+the world will know me after many days, is a question which, hoping
+the best, I cannot answer with any positive degree of assurance.
+
+
+
+
+
+No. IV.
+
+
+_Sketch of Borneo, or Pulo Kalamantan, by J. Hunt_, Esq.
+
+(Communicated, in 1812, to the Honourable Sir Thomas Stamford Raffles,
+late Lieutenant-Governor of Java.)
+
+
+The island of Borneo extends from 7 deg. 7' north to 4 deg. 12' south latitude,
+and from 108 deg. 45' to 119 deg. 25' east longitude; measuring at its extreme
+length nine hundred miles, at its greatest breadth seven hundred,
+and in circumference three thousand. It is bounded on the north by the
+Solo seas, on the east by the Straits of Macassar, on the south by the
+Java, and on the west by the China seas. Situated in the track of the
+most extensive and valuable commerce, intersected on all sides with
+deep and navigable rivers, indented with safe and capacious harbors,
+possessing one of the richest soils on the globe, abounding in all
+the necessaries of human life, and boasting commercial products that
+have in all ages excited the avarice and stimulated the desires of
+mankind,--with the exception of New Holland, it is the largest island
+known. Of the existence of this extensive territory, so highly favored
+by Providence, and enriched by the choicest productions of nature,
+there remains scarce a vestige in the geographical descriptions of
+the day; and its rich products and fertile shores, by one tacit and
+universal consent, appear abandoned by all the European nations of
+the present age, and handed over to the ravages of extensive hordes
+of piratical banditti, solely intent on plunder and desolation.
+
+The natives and the Malays, formerly, and even at this day, call
+this large island by the exclusive name of Pulo Kalamantan, from
+a sour and indigenous fruit so called. Borneo was the name only
+of a city, the capital of one of the three distinct kingdoms on the
+island. When Magalhaens visited it in the year 1520, he saw a rich and
+populous city, a luxuriant and fertile country, a powerful prince,
+and a magnificent court: hence the Spaniards hastily concluded that
+the whole island not only belonged to this prince, but that it was
+likewise named Borneo. In this error they have been followed by
+all other European nations. The charts, however, mark this capital
+"Borneo Proper," or in other words, the only place properly Borneo:
+this is the only confession of this misnomer that I have met with
+among Europeans. The natives pronounce Borneo, Bruni, and say it
+is derived from the word Brani, courageous; the aboriginal natives
+within this district having ever remained unconquered.
+
+The aborigines of Borneo, or Pulo Kalamantan, still exist in the
+interior in considerable numbers; there are various tribes of them,
+speaking different dialects. Some of them acknowledge Malay chiefs,
+as at Landa, Songo, Mantan, &c. Several communities of them still
+remain under independent chiefs of their own nation; and everywhere
+their origin, their language, their religion, their manners and
+customs, are totally distinct and apparent from those of the Islams,
+or Malays, who have settled on the island. About Pontiana and Sambas
+they are called Dayers; at Benjarmasing, Biajus; at Borneo Proper,
+Moruts; farther northward, Orang Idan. Their original history is as
+much enveloped in obscurity as that of the Monocaboes of Malaya, the
+Rejangs and Battas of Sumatra, or the Togals of the Philippines. On
+a nearer acquaintance with their language, customs, traditions, &c.,
+perhaps an affinity in origin may be discovered among all the original
+possessors of the Eastern isles. The Moruts and Orang Idan are much
+fairer and better featured than the Malays, of a more strong and robust
+frame, and have the credit of being a brave race of people. The Dayer
+is much darker, and approaches nearer in resemblance to the Malay. The
+Biajus I never saw. The few particulars which I have been able to
+collect of these people I shall briefly state: They live in miserable
+small huts; their sole dress consists of a slight wrapper round their
+waists, sometimes made of bark, at others from skins of animals, or
+perhaps of blue or white cloth; they eat rice or roots, and indeed
+any description of food, whether beast, reptile, or vermin: they are
+extremely filthy; this and bad food give them a cutaneous disorder,
+with which they are very generally afflicted. Several tribes of them
+smear themselves with oil and pigments, which gives them the appearance
+of being tattooed. Whether this is intended to defend them against the
+bites of insects, to operate as a cure or prevention of this epidemic,
+or to adorn their persons, I cannot take upon me to decide. They
+believe, it is said, in a Supreme Being, and offer sacrifices of
+gratitude to a beneficent Deity. Polygamy is not allowed among them;
+no man has more than one wife; they burn their dead. They are said
+to shoot poisoned balls or arrows through hollow tubes; and whenever
+they kill a man, they preserve the skull to exhibit as a trophy to
+commemorate the achievement of their arms. They are said to have
+no mode of communicating their ideas by characters or writing, like
+the Battas. Driven from the sea-coast of Borneo into the mountains
+and fastnesses in the interior, they are more occupied in the chase
+and the pursuits of husbandry than in commerce. They, however, barter
+their inland produce of camphor, gold, diamonds, birds'-nests, wax, and
+cattle, for salt (which they hold in the highest degree of estimation,
+eating it with as much _gout_ as we do sugar), china, porcelain,
+brass and iron cooking utensils, brass bracelets, coarse blue and
+white cloth, Java tobacco, arrack (which they also like), parangs,
+hardware, beads, &c. Some tribes of them are said to pull out their
+front teeth and substitute others of gold, and others adorn themselves
+with tigers' teeth. The greatest numbers and most considerable bodies
+of these men are found near Kiney Balu and about Borneo Proper.
+
+The Malays represent them as the most savage and ferocious of men;
+but to be more savage or ferocious than a Malay is a thing utterly
+impossible. Their representations may be accounted for. These
+aborigines have always evinced a strong disposition and predilection
+for liberty and freedom; they have either resisted the yoke of the
+Malay, or have retired to their mountains to enjoy this greatest of
+all human blessings. The Malay, unable to conquer them, lays plans
+for kidnapping as many as he can fall in with. Every Dyak so taken is
+made a slave of, his children sold, and his women violated. The Malay,
+hence, is justly considered by them as the violator of every law,
+human and divine; and whenever any of these people meet with one,
+they satiate their vengeance, and destroy him as the enemy of their
+race, and as a monster of the human kind. The Portuguese missionaries
+found these people very tractable converts, and very large bodies of
+them are very easily governed by a single Malay chief, as at Landa,
+Songo, and Matan. I have seen very large bodies of them at Kimanis
+and Maludu, but none of them possessing the ferocity of a Malay.
+
+The Islams, or Malayans, who now possess the sea-coasts of Borneo
+(as well as the sea-coasts of all the Eastern islands), are said to be
+colonies from Malacca, Johore, &c., planted in the fourteenth century;
+at this period, according to Mr. Poivre, "Malacca was a country
+well peopled, and was consequently well cultivated. This nation was
+once one of the greatest powers in the Eastern seas, and made a very
+considerable figure in the theater of Asia; they colonized Borneo,
+Celebes, Macassar, Moluccas, &c." The Malays on Borneo are like the
+Malays everywhere else, the most atrocious race of beings on the
+earth; and from their general character, and imprudent institutions,
+both political and religious, are fast moldering in self-decay,
+or mutual destruction.
+
+From the earliest date that I have been able to trace, the island of
+Borneo was always divided into three distinct kingdoms. The kingdom of
+Borneo, properly so called, extended from Tanjong Dato, in latitude
+3 deg. 15' north, to Kanukungan point, in the Straits of Macassar, 1 deg.
+15' north, which included the whole north part of the island. The
+kingdom of Sukadana (from _suka_, happiness, and _dunia_, the world,
+or earthly paradise), extending from Tanjong Dato to Tanjong Sambar,
+which belonged to the King of Bantam (when or how acquired I have
+not learned): and the remainder of the island from Tanjong Sambar
+to Kanukungan Point aforesaid, to the kingdom of Benjarmasing (from
+_bendar_, a port of trade, and _masing_, usual, or the ordinary port
+of trade).
+
+When the Portuguese first visited Borneo, in 1520, the whole island
+was in a most flourishing state. The numbers of Chinese that had
+settled on her shores were immense; the products of their industry,
+and an extensive commerce with China in junks, gave her land and
+cities a far different aspect from her dreary appearance at this day,
+and their princes and courts exhibited a splendor and displayed a
+magnificence which has long since vanished.
+
+Pigofetta says there were twenty-five thousand houses in the city of
+Borneo Proper, and that it was rich and populous. Much later accounts
+describe the numbers of Chinese and Japanese junks frequenting her
+ports as great; but in 1809 there were not three thousand houses in
+the whole city, nor six thousand Chinese throughout that kingdom,
+and not a junk that had visited it for years. But the ports of Borneo
+have not dwindled away more than Acheen, Johore, Malacca, Bantam,
+Ternate, &c. All these places likewise cut a splendid figure in
+the eyes of our first navigators, and have since equally shared a
+proportionate obscurity.
+
+Were the causes required which have eclipsed the prosperity of Borneo
+and the other great emporiums of Eastern trade that once existed, it
+might be readily answered--a decay of commerce. They have suffered the
+same vicissitudes as Tyre, Sidon, or Alexandria; and like Carthage--for
+ages the emporium of the wealth and commerce of the world, which now
+exhibits on its site a piratical race of descendants in the modern
+Tunisians and their neighbors the Algerines--the commercial ports of
+Borneo have become a nest of banditti, and the original inhabitants
+of both, from similar causes--the decay of commerce--have degenerated
+to the modern pirates of the present day.
+
+In exact proportion as the intercourse of the Europeans with China
+has increased, in precise ratio has the decrease of their direct trade
+in junks become apparent. The Portuguese first, and subsequently the
+Dutch, mistress of the Eastern seas, exacted by treaties and other ways
+the Malay produce at their own rates, and were consequently enabled
+to undersell the junks in China. But these powers went further;
+by settling at ports on Borneo, or by their guardas de costas, they
+compelled the ports of Borneo to send their produce, calculated for
+the China market, to Malacca and Batavia, which at length completely
+cut up the direct trade by means of the Chinese junks.
+
+The loss of their direct intercourse with China affected their
+prosperity in a variety of ways. First, by this circuitous direction
+of their trade, the gruff goods, as rattans, sago, cassia, pepper,
+ebony, wax, &c., became too expensive to fetch the value of this
+double carriage and the attendant charges, and in course of time were
+neglected; the loss of these extensive branches of industry must
+have thrown numbers out of employment. But the loss of the direct
+intercourse with China had more fatal effects; it prevented large
+bodies of annual emigrants from China settling upon her shores;
+it deprived them of an opportunity of visiting the Borneon ports,
+and exercising their mechanical arts and productive industry; and
+of thus keeping up the prosperity of the country in the tillage of
+the ground, as well as in the commerce of her ports. The old Chinese
+settlers by degrees deserted these shores; and to fill up the chasms
+in their revenues by so fatal a change, the rajahs have been tempted
+to turn their views to predatory habits, and have permitted their
+lands to run to jungle, by dragging their wretched laborers from
+agricultural employments to maritime and piratical enterprises.
+
+The first material alteration in the sovereignty of the territorial
+possession took place in the kingdom of Borneo Proper, when her rajah
+was obliged to call in the aid of the Solos to defend him against
+an insurrection of the Maruts and Chinese. In consideration of this
+important aid, the Rajah of Borneo Proper ceded to the Sultan of Solo
+all that portion of Borneo then belonging to him, from Kimanis, in
+latitude 5 deg. 30' north, to Tapean-durian, in the Straits of Macassar,
+which includes the whole north of Borneo. After this period, the power
+and fortunes of the Sultan of Solo rapidly declined. The Spaniards
+succeeded in conquering all their islands. Solo, the capital, was
+taken and fortified; the sultan and his court made prisoners. When the
+English captured Manilla, they found this sultan incarcerated. They
+agreed to relieve him from prison, and reinstate him on the musnud of
+his forefathers under the express stipulation that the whole of the
+aforesaid territory of Borneo, ceded to Solo by the rajah of that
+kingdom, should be transferred to the English East India Company,
+together with the south of Palawan, and the intermediate islands. These
+terms were joyfully acceded to by the Sultan of Solo, and signed,
+sealed, and delivered by him to the late Alexander Dalrymple, in the
+year 1763.
+
+The kingdom of Sukadana was ceded by the Rajah of Bantam (in what year
+I know not) to the Dutch East India Company. Whether the kingdom of
+Benjarmasing was ever actually ceded to the Dutch or not, I have not
+been able to learn. But the occupancy of her capital, the military
+government of the country, by the erection of forts, and a permanent
+standing force, since transferred to the English arms, give to the
+East India Company, actually or virtually, the entire sovereignty
+and rule over the whole of this large island, with the exception of
+the piratical port of Borneo Proper, and the portion of territory
+yet annexed thereto.
+
+The Portuguese, at a very early period, established themselves at
+Benjarmasing: at Borneo Proper there still remain two bastions and a
+curtain of a regular stone fort built by them: they had also one on
+the island of Laboan, since destroyed. They fixed themselves at old
+Sambas, from which they were driven by the Dutch in the year 1690,
+and nearly about this period from all their establishments on Borneo.
+
+When, or from what causes, the Dutch were induced to evacuate Sambas, I
+know not, nor have I learned the period when they fortified themselves
+at Benjarmasing and Pasir, but believe it could not have taken place
+before the middle of the last century. They, however, settled at
+Pontiana in 1786, and built a fortified wall round the palace and
+factory, but were compelled to withdraw from it when the war broke out
+with the English in 1796. The ports at Benjarmasing, when evacuated,
+were sold by the Dutch to the sultan, and are since said to have
+been repurchased from him by the English. The Dutch obtaining the
+cession of the kingdom of Sukadana from the Rajah of Bantam, and their
+subsequent measures in different parts of this territory, will show
+that they had extensive views of firmly establishing themselves on this
+island; and waking from an age of lethargy, at last began to see the
+great advantages and unbounded resources these rich possessions were
+capable of affording them, without any cost or expense whatever. The
+year they withdrew from Pontiana they had it in contemplation to take
+repossession of Sambas, and to unite all the ports, as well as the
+interior, under the Rajah of Pontiana, in trust for them. Some letters
+to this effect were written by the Dutch government to the late rajah.
+
+That the English were not insensible to the value and importance
+of the once valuable commerce of Borneo may be inferred not only
+from the number of the Honorable Company's regular ships annually
+dispatched to her ports prior to the year 1760 (vide Hardy's Shipping
+Register), but from the efforts they have repeatedly made to establish
+themselves on her shores. There still exist the remains of a British
+factory at Borneo Proper. Before the year 1706, they had made two
+successive attempts to fortify themselves at Benjarmasing; twice they
+have attempted an establishment on the sickly island of Balambangan
+(lying north of Borneo, near Maludu); and in 1775, the Honorable
+Company's ship Bridgewater was sent to Pasir with similar views.
+
+The failure of these British attempts, as well as the exclusion of all
+other powers from the ports of Borneo, may be principally attributed
+to the sordid desire of the Dutch of monopolizing the whole produce
+of the Eastern Archipelago, and their rooted jealousy in opposing
+the establishment of every other power in the vicinity of Java,
+or that of the Spice Islands.
+
+These considerations and feelings have induced them to commit the
+most flagrant crimes, not only against the natives of these regions,
+but against every European power. Their infamous massacres at Amboyna,
+Banda, Bantam, &c., have been historically recorded to their eternal
+disgrace. By their intrigues at Benjarmasing, the British attempts at
+a settlement twice failed; and Forrest, in his Voyage to New Guinea,
+says, that the Solos were by Dutch instigation induced to cut off the
+infant establishment of Balambangan, in 1775. They frustrated the
+attempts of the Bridgewater at Pasir; and even the massacre of the
+garrison of Pulo Condore was effected by Javanese soldiers supplied
+by the governor of Batavia. The English, from their strong desire
+of having a port in the China seas, hastily pitched upon the most
+unhealthy spots for that purpose, viz. Balambangan and Pulo Condore.
+
+The father of the present Sultan of Pontiana was the descendant of an
+Arab, residing at Simpan, near Matan. By the advice and concurrence
+of the Dutch he was induced, about forty-two years ago, to settle
+on the unfrequented shores of the river Pontiana, or Quallo Londa,
+with promises of early cooeperation and assistance, as well as of
+rendering it the mart of the trade and capital of all Sukadana. As
+soon as Abdul Ramman (the name of the first sultan) had succeeded in
+attracting around him several Chinese, Buguese, and Malay settlers,
+and in building a town, the Dutch (in 1786) came with two armed
+brigs and fifty troops to establish their factory. To make good
+their promises to Abdul Ramman (the treaty I have never seen), they
+immediately overthrew the chief of Mompava, and gave his country in
+trust to this ally: they shortly after invested the ancient city of
+Sukadana, burned it to the ground, transferred the inhabitants to
+Pontiana, or dispersed them and their chief into the interior. The
+Dutch likewise placed the present rajas on the musnuds of Songo, Landa,
+&c., and kept up a force at the former, with the express stipulation
+that the whole of their produce should be sent from each of their
+respective districts to the Dutch factory of Pontiana. They had it
+in contemplation, in 1795, to take repossession of Sambas, and wrote
+to Abdul Ramman as to the preparatory measures requisite, when the
+English war, as before observed, obliged them to abandon Pontiana.
+
+This Abdul Ramman, the first sultan or chief of Pontiana, reigned
+thirty-five years, and died in 1807, leaving his eldest son, the
+present Sultan Kasim, now forty-six years of age, his successor;
+who has a second brother, called Pangeran Marko, aged thirty-eight,
+and Pangeran Hosman, thirty-six years, beside four sisters, one
+of whom married the present Rajah of Matan, and about seventy half
+brothers and sisters, the natural children of his father, with an
+extensive sub-progeny. The present sultan has three sons (Abibuker,
+heir-apparent, twenty-one years old, Ali, and Abdul Ramman), and
+four daughters, lawfully begotten. None of the royal family make use
+of either opium, betel, or tobacco, in any shape whatever; and the
+present sultan has much the appearance of an Arab. The grandfather
+of the present sultan was from Arabia, a Sayed Suriff; one of his
+relations was fixed at Palimbang, whose name is unknown to me, and
+the other, Shad Fudyel, at Acheen, who has been long dead.
+
+The wet season commences from September, and ends in April,
+when heavy rain, hard squalls, and much thunder and lightning are
+experienced. From April till September is called the dry season, but
+even in this portion of the year seldom a day elapses without a smart
+shower or two. The monsoons on the northerly shores of Borneo are found
+to correspond with those prevalent in the China seas, viz. from the
+N.E. from October to April, and from the S.W. the rest of the year. To
+the southward, about Benjarmasing, the monsoons are the same as in the
+Java seas, _i. e._ westerly from October to April, and easterly the
+rest of the year. Those parts of Borneo near or upon the equator have
+variable winds all the year, and land and sea breezes close in shore.
+
+This country is by no means so warm as one would be led to imagine by
+its proximity everywhere to the line: this arises from the perpetual
+refreshing showers and the land and sea breezes, the former being
+wafted over innumerable rivers. In the month of November, the
+thermometer at Pontiana ranges from 78 deg. to 82 deg..
+
+During the wet season, the rivers swell and overflow the adjacent
+shores, and run down with such continued rapidity, that the water may
+be tasted fresh at sea at the distance of six or seven miles from the
+mouths: these overflowings fertilize the banks and adjacent country,
+and render the shores of Borneo, like the plains of Egypt, luxuriantly
+rich. Susceptible of the highest possible culture, particularly in
+wet grain, in the dry season the coast, from these overflowings,
+presents to the eye the richest enameled fields of full grown grass
+for miles around. It is at this season that whole herds of wild cattle
+range down from the mountains in the interior to fatten on the plains,
+but during the wet season they ascend to their hills.
+
+The whole of the north, the northwest, and the center of Borneo is
+extremely mountainous. The greatest portion of the ancient kingdom
+of Borneo Proper is extremely elevated. That of Kiney Baulu, or
+St. Peter's Mount, in latitude 6 deg. north, is perhaps one of the
+highest mountains known. The country about Sambas, Pontiana, and
+Sukadana is occasionally interspersed with a few ranges of hills,
+otherwise the land here might be deemed low. But to the southward,
+and more particularly to the east, in the Straits of Macassar, it
+is very low. The shore in these latter places is extremely moist and
+swampy, but the interior is said to be dry.
+
+The common charts of Borneo will show the innumerable rivers that
+water this vast island in every possible direction; but it is worthy of
+remark, that all the principal rivers on this island have their main
+source in a large lake in the vicinity of that stupendous mountain
+before mentioned, Kiney Baulu. The river Benjarmasing takes its rise
+from thence, and after traversing in all its windings a distance of
+1500 miles, intersecting the island into two parts, falls into the
+Java sea. Its rise and fall is said to be twelve feet, and it has
+only nine feet at low water on the bar. It is said to have numberless
+villages scattered on its banks; but I have obtained no particular
+accounts of them, or their produce.
+
+The great river of Borneo Proper is certainly the finest on the
+island. It is a deep, navigable, and majestic stream; it has three
+fathoms upon the bar at low water; the rise and fall is, I believe,
+fifteen feet; there are docks here for Chinese junks of five or six
+hundred tons, and a first-rate ship of war might get up far above
+the town. The country, too, is populous, productive, and healthy. The
+southern branch of this river has been well surveyed, but the branch
+leading to the Marut country is little known; it has its source in
+Kiney Baulu.
+
+In the ancient kingdom of Sukadana, the five principal rivers are
+the Sukadana, the Lava, the Pogore, the Pontiana, and the Sambas. The
+former rivers communicate inland, and their main source is in Kiney
+Baulu. The whole of these rivers are deep and navigable for seventy
+or eighty miles; but have all of them mud flats at their mouths,
+which would not admit of the entry of vessels exceeding fourteen feet
+at high water springs.
+
+The third most considerable river on Borneo is the Kinabatangan, lying
+in the north of the island, and emptying itself into the Sulo seas. It
+is said to be deep and navigable much farther than the Benjarmasing
+river; it has several mouths, but it has never been surveyed. The
+rivers Kuran, Pasir, and a variety of others that fall into the Straits
+of Macassar, are said to be noble streams, navigable for vessels
+of large burthen; but I have no accurate information of them. The
+harbor of Sandakan is one of the finest in the world; a correct chart
+of the same is published. The harbor of Tambisan, near Cape Unsing,
+is equal to Pulo Pinang, and calculated for careening and building
+ships; a tolerable chart of these is also published. The harbors of
+Pulo Laut, Punangan, Maludu, and several others in the Straits of
+Macassar, afford good anchorage and complete shelter for shipping.
+
+Situated as Borneo is, immediately under the equator, everything
+that can be produced in vegetation by the combined influence of
+heat and moisture is here displayed in the highest luxuriance and
+super-excellence. All the Oriental palms, as the cocoa-nut, the areca,
+the sago, &c., abound here. The larger grasses, as the bamboo, the
+canna, the nardus, assume a stately growth, and thrive in peculiar
+luxuriance. Pepper is found wild everywhere, and largely cultivated
+about Benjarmasing and the districts of Borneo Proper. The _laurus
+cinnamomum_ and _cassia odoriferata_ are produced in abundance about
+Kimanis. In no part of the world does the camphor-tree flourish in
+equal perfection as in the districts of Maludu and Payton, in the north
+of Borneo. The ebony, the dammar, the tree that yields the finest
+dragon's blood in the world, all abound here. The cotton and coffee
+trees are found in all parts of Borneo, though not much attended
+to. The chocolate nut of Sulo is preferred at Manilla to that from
+South America. The tree that yields the clove-bark, and the nutmeg,
+and clove, thrive luxuriantly, though never tried to any extent.
+
+The woods about Pontiana for carpentry and joinery, are kayu bulean,
+chena, mintangore, laban, ebony, iron-wood, dammar, and dammar laut,
+&c. &c. The pine abounds in the bay of Maludu, teak at Sulo. The
+fruit-bearing trees which enrich and adorn the Indian continent,
+offer, on the Borneon shore, all their kindred varieties, nurtured
+by the bountiful hand of luxuriant nature. The durian, mangustin,
+rambutan, proya, chabi, kachang, timon, jambu, kniban, beside the
+nanka or jack, tamarind, pomplemose, orange, lemon, and citron,
+all the kindred varieties of the plantain, banana, melon, annanas,
+pomegranate, &c., are found on Borneo.
+
+The garden-stuffs met with are onions, garlic, yams, pumpkins,
+brinjals, greens, beans, cucumbers; and turnips, cabbages, and potatoes
+would succeed, were there Europeans to attend to them.
+
+The elephant was said to be seen about Cape Unsing, where several
+teeth are still found; but it is conceived this animal is extinct on
+the island. There are no dromedaries nor camels; nor are horses, asses,
+or mules met with on Borneo (the former are seen at Sulo). None of the
+larger breed of the feline species are found here, as the lion, tiger,
+leopard; nor the bear, the wolf, the fox, nor even a jackal, or dog,
+that I ever saw. The ourang-outang, or the man of the woods, is the
+most singular animal found in these regions. The rivers swarm with
+alligators, and the woods with every variety of the monkey tribe. The
+names of other animals on Borneo are the bodok or rhinoceros, pelando
+or rabbit, rusa or stag, kijang or doe, minjagon, babi utan or wild
+hog, tingileng, bintangan, &c. There are buffaloes, goats, bullocks,
+hogs, beside the rat and mouse species; a dog I never saw on Borneo.
+
+There are few snakes on the sea-coast, owing to the moisture; plenty,
+however, are found in the interior. The musketoe, the fly, the frog,
+and the noisy beetle, with other insects and vermin found in Malay
+countries, abound here.
+
+The coasts and rivers abound with excellent and wholesome fish in
+the greatest variety, and of the most delicious flavors; but such
+is the miserable state of society, that few Malays have either the
+inclination or the inducement to venture beyond the mouths of their
+rivers in quest of them; and even there they are more indebted to the
+industry of the Chinese with their fishing-stakes than to their own
+labor for the supply of their markets. The names of their fish are,
+the kakab, klabaw, jilawat, lai-is, pattain, udang or prawn, shrimp,
+talang, sinanging, bawan, rowan, taylaon, duri, bleda, tingairy,
+alu-alu, pako, jumpul, pari or skait, boli ayam, tamban or shad,
+belut or eel, iyu or shark, lida or sole, batu batu, kabab batu, klaoi,
+krang or cockle, tiram or oyster, tipy and lapis pearl oysters, cupang
+or muscle, all the varieties of the turtle, with several other sorts.
+
+The ornithology of Borneo is somewhat limited. There are the bayan,
+nuri, dara, pepit or sparrow, tukukur or turtle-dove, berkey, kandang,
+kiridi, gogaw or crow, seyrindit, layang or swallow, kalilawan. The
+Chinese rear ducks; the tame fowl abounds; but the turkey, goose,
+and peafowl are seldom met with.
+
+The principal gold mines on Borneo are in the vicinity of Sambas. There
+is a mountain called Guning Pandan, about eighty miles inland; from
+this branch out three rivers--one leads to Mompava, one to Batu Bulat
+near Tanjong Mora, and one to Landa; the whole intermediate area
+between the above rivers is of a firm yellow argillaceous schistus,
+or ferruginous quartz, interspersed with horn and vitreous ores, of
+a remarkable dark reddish color, abounding with the richest veins of
+gold, and equal if not superior to any mine extant. There are only
+fifty parets or mines now wrought in the whole kingdom of Sukadana,
+thirty of which are in the Sambas district, each mine having at least
+three hundred men, Chinese, employed in them. Their pay, one with
+another, is four dollars per mensem.
+
+The mines are rented from the rajah at the rate of fifty bunkals of
+gold per mine per annum, beside a capitation tax of three dollars
+per head on every Chinaman. There are thirty thousand Chinese in the
+Sambas districts, and they feel themselves strong enough to oppose or
+evade this tax; it hence becomes a perpetual contest between greedy
+extortion on the one side, and avaricious chicane on the other;
+there are beside about twelve thousand Malays and Dayers.
+
+The Laurat gold mines are situated to the eastward of the town of
+Sambas, and are particularly rich and productive. The mines of Siminis
+are one day's journey from Sambas, up a small creek leading from
+Sambas river, below the town; and the mines are abundant. Salako is
+up a river fifteen miles south of the Sambas river; it lies nearly
+forty miles up, but communicates with Sambas by another river:
+here the metal is found more abundant than anywhere else; and twenty
+thousand Chinese are found in this district. Mantrado is three days'
+journey up the Mompava river; it is under an independent Malay
+prince. Some accounts make the population of this district great,
+near fifty thousand Dayers, Malays, and Chinese; but perhaps half
+the number may be nearer the truth; these are chiefly employed on
+the gold mines, and in producing food for the miners; these mines,
+however, do not produce that quantity which they might under Chinese
+management. Mandore is about a day's journey from Pontiana, and belongs
+to the sultan; it is reckoned a very rich mine, though but recently
+wrought. There are as yet only twelve parets of about two hundred
+men each, but it is capable of extension. Likewise are found in this
+district some very rich specimens of copper ore; it has not as yet
+been wrought, gold being deemed a much more productive article. The
+sultan wishes, however, he had some boring utensils and an experienced
+miner, to enable him to decide whether it would be worth working under
+the peculiar circumstances above mentioned. Numbers of Chinese are
+settled in this district, and the population is annually increasing.
+
+About three days' journey up the Pongole river lies the district of
+Songo, with a population of twenty-five thousand souls, Dayers, and a
+few Chinese, under a Malay and an independent prince. The population
+is chiefly employed on the rich mines of gold in the neighborhood,
+which is particularly pure and abundant; but the mines are not wrought
+with the same industry as those under Chinese management. The Dutch
+thought it of so much consequence as to keep a force at Songo, and to
+place the present rajah on that musnud. About two days' journey farther
+up lies another gold district, called Santam, the inhabitants of which
+are principally Dayers. Beyond Santam, and higher up on the same river,
+lies the town of Sukadow, abounding in gold, the inhabitants of which
+are also Dayers.
+
+Matan belongs to the rajah of that name: he had the title of Rajah
+of Sukadana, until driven out of the latter place by the Dutch,
+seventeen years ago. There are ten thousand Dayers in this district,
+and a few Chinese and Malays. The mines of gold are abundant, and
+capable of becoming highly productive, as well as the mines of iron
+and unwrought tin; but the sultan is much addicted to the use of
+opium, and hence neglects a valuable country, capable, under better
+management, of becoming the most valuable district on all Borneo.
+
+About three days' journey from Pontiana lies the celebrated mountain
+of Landa, which, after Golconda, is the most valuable diamond mine
+in the world. There are at least thirty thousand people, principally
+Dayers, employed on the mines and agriculture; it belongs to a Malay
+prince, raised to that musnud twenty-five years ago by the Dutch,
+through the agency of the present Sultan of Pontiana: here also much
+gold is produced; and much more might be had under proper management.
+
+There is a very valuable gold mine in the north of Borneo, at a place
+called Tampasuk, situated in the district ceded to the English by
+the Sultan of Sulo; but having become the principal pirate port on
+the coast, the working of the mines has been discontinued.
+
+The whole produce of the gold mines of Sukadana is said to be
+annually about twenty piculs, or a million of dollars, at twenty-five
+dollars a bunkal; but no calculation of this sort can possibly be
+correct. Living, as the Chinese do, under the rapacity of despotic
+and ferocious freebooters, who are actuated by no one principle of
+honor, justice, or good faith, it is their interest to conceal the
+riches they amass, not only to preserve themselves from the clutches of
+these tyrants, but as the most compact substance to transport to their
+native shores, to which they repair with the fruits of their industry,
+by the annual junks that arrive at Pontiana, leaving the mines to
+new settlers: from two to three hundred leave Pontiana every year.
+
+The standard of Slakow gold at Pontiana is affixed at twenty-three
+Spanish dollars the bunkal, of two dollars weight. The Songo and
+Laurat is twenty-five dollars the said bunkal.
+
+Not having had an opportunity to inspect any of the gold mines
+personally, I know not if the ores readily melt of themselves, or
+whether they require the aid of any fluxes before they yield the metal;
+but I believe the principal attention of the miners is directed to the
+rich veins of pure native gold, and that no operation is performed
+beyond that of pulverizing, and simple washing; all the gold about
+Pontiana being in dust, though some I have met with in Borneo Proper
+was run into bars. About Landa, where the diamonds are found, the whole
+of the stratum is observed to be a clay of a red burnt appearance,
+nearly to the same degree as that of burnt bricks, which gives to the
+rivers hereabouts a peculiar tinge. Whether this has been formed by
+the action of subterraneous fires, or is the effect of volcanoes or
+earthquakes, I cannot decide; the latter are said to be frequently
+felt at Pontiana and at Sambas; and the former are said to exist in
+the central mountains of Borneo.
+
+From the slovenly manner in which the diamonds are sought for by
+the Dayers, they seldom collect them of a size exceeding three or
+four carats weight each. When rough, the Landa diamond has a white
+or yellow hue; but none are found of that inky and flinty tinge,
+so valuable in some of the Golconda diamonds. But that Landa does
+produce them of a very considerable size, the extensive and valuable
+specimens in Java, as well as the quantities annually sent to Batavia,
+will evince. The King of Matan is at this instant in possession of a
+diamond weighing 367 carats: the value of which, according to the old
+mode of calculation, would be (367 x 367 x 2 = 269,378_l._) The Sultan
+of Pontiana says, however, that a much larger price was offered for it
+by the Dutch government of Java. He refused, it is said, twenty-five
+laks of dollars, two sloops of rice, fifty pieces of cannon, and
+a hundred muskets. Several from twenty to thirty carats have been
+dug up. At Mompava there are said to be very rich copper mines;
+but from want of population, a vigorous government, and scientific
+mineralogists, little is to be hoped from them at the present day. At
+Pulo Bongorong, near Borneo Proper, there is plenty of loadstone found.
+
+About one degree north of Sambas there is a country called Sarawak,
+belonging to the Rajah of Borneo Proper; there is a vast district
+abounding in tin, in veins as rich and as plentiful as those wrought
+on Banca: but they have been neglected for a series of years; they
+were partially wrought before those of the latter were discovered, in
+the beginning of the last century. The tyranny of that government, the
+want of hands, and the contiguity of rich and valuable gold-mines, have
+together caused their utter neglect; and there is little probability
+of more favorable results, except under a change of government,
+and a happier order of things.
+
+In the Matan districts there is an extensive and most valuable
+iron-mine, producing pure metal without any admixture of ore: it is
+fully equal in quality to the best Swedish iron. They run it into
+shot, and much of it is exported; but the gold-mines in its vicinity,
+and the want of a proper government, are obstacles to its further
+productiveness and utility. At Maday, on the northeast coast of
+Borneo, in the province of Mangidara, there is a very rich mine of
+gold. Pasir and Coti, in the Straits of Macassar, produce considerable
+quantities of gold; and gold and diamonds are brought down by the
+river to Benjarmasing. I have, however, no accurate information on
+the subject, and can simply note the general fact.
+
+There are several fine specimens of crystal found at Kimanis and Sulo;
+they call them water diamonds. To give full effect to the mines in
+the kingdom of Sukadana, says the Sultan of Pontiana, and to raise
+the excess of food required for the additional hands, would together
+give employment to at least a million of Chinese. Under the British
+flag, he thinks thousands of new settlers will find their way in the
+annual junks.
+
+All that extensive range, from Cape Unsing, passing by the Tawi Tawi
+islands and Sulo, as far as Baselan, is one vast continued bed of
+pearl-oysters, principally of the Behoren or mother-of-pearl-shell
+species; these are called by the natives _tipi_. There is likewise
+an extensive bed of the Ceylon oyster, called by the Malays _kapis_;
+the principal banks of the latter are found in Maludu Bay. The Sulo
+pearls have, from time immemorial, been the most celebrated, and
+praised as the most valuable of any in the known world. Pigofetta,
+the companion of Magalhaens, mentions having seen in 1520 two Sulo
+pearls in the possession of the Rajah of Borneo as large as pullet
+eggs. Very large ones, from one to two hundred _chaw_ weight, are at
+all times to be purchased at Sulo; and there are altogether sold here
+to the China junks, the Spaniards, &c. more than two laks of dollars
+worth annually. The quantity of mother-of-pearl-shell, _communibus
+annis_, sold there is two thousand piculs, at six dollars a picul. The
+fishery is partly carried on by the Malays, and partly by the Chinese;
+the large pearls they endeavor to conceal as much as possible, from
+a law that all pearls above a certain size of right belong to the
+sultan. "The small narrow guts," says Dalrymple in his account of the
+Sulo seas, "about Tawi Tawi, are the most rich and valuable fishery in
+the world." I have had an opportunity of inspecting the banks about
+Manar and Tutacoryn, as well as all the banks in the Sulo seas; but
+the former have not banks near as extensive, equaling in the quantity
+of oysters, in productiveness, size, or richness, the Sulo pearl, nor
+are they to be compared in any way to the Sulo beds. Still the Ceylon
+fishery has netted the British Government from one to two laks of
+pagodas for permitting it to be fished fourteen days annually. As this
+portion of Borneo belongs to the English, a much greater revenue might
+be drawn from these vast sources of wealth, under proper management.
+
+As there are no people of sufficient opulence to contract for so vast
+a fishery, the Company might undertake it themselves; three or four
+gun-boats would be necessary to protect the fishermen; and a small
+fort should be erected at Tambisan or Tawi Tawi. But it is necessary
+to observe, the Sulo people do not practice diving at all, as is
+the case at Beharen and Ceylon, but only comprehend the slow method
+of dredging for the tipy with a thing like the fluke of a wooden
+anchor. It would be a desirable thing, in the event of prosecuting
+this valuable fishery as a national concern, to obtain forty or fifty
+Arab divers from Beharen, and perhaps an equal number of Chulias
+from Nagore and Negapatam, from the number employed annually on the
+Ceylon fishery. These men would teach the Malay the superiority of
+diving, which can, in fourteen days' fishing, bring into government
+a revenue of two laks of pagodas, pay the expenses of the fishery,
+and enrich all parties concerned; while the Malayan operose plan of
+dredging perhaps affords but a precarious subsistence. But had they
+divers, from the extent of the banks, instead of fourteen days in the
+year, they might, one after another, be fished the whole year round,
+and never be exhausted. The Chinese fishermen, though laborious,
+possess no enterprise, and can never be prevailed on to dive, from
+apprehension of the sharks. The Caffris from New Guinea and the Arroes
+would be superior to them.
+
+The Sultan of Sulo, in 1810, proposed to me to bring over one hundred
+Chulia divers from Negapatam on our joint expense and profit: and
+the divers agreed to go over on receiving each twenty-five rupees
+advance, their victuals being found, and one-fourth of the produce of
+oysters allowed them, as at Ceylon. Circumstances, however, occurred
+to prevent an undertaking which I think must have turned out highly
+lucrative. They dredge the banks all the year round. The water on the
+Tahow, Maludu, and Tawi Tawi banks, is from seven to ten fathoms deep;
+in other places they fish in fifteen fathoms water.
+
+The Malays of Borneo understand the art of cutting, polishing, and
+setting their diamonds. Gold and silver filagree works they excel in;
+gunpowder is manufactured at Pontiana; brass cannon is cast at Borneo
+Proper; iron-shot is run from their mine. They can manufacture and
+repair krises, and clean their arms. Their carpentry extends to the
+building and repairing of prows, and the erecting of a hut. Their
+industry is further exerted in collecting birds'-nests and wax; in
+cutting rattan and felling timber; in the pearl and tripan fisheries;
+or as mariners in commercial or piratical pursuits. The tillage
+of the ground and the edible fisheries are often left to the more
+indefatigable industry of the Chinese. For the exercise of every
+other useful occupation also, the mechanical and scientific arts,
+and the labor of the mines, these indolent savages are indebted solely
+to the superior industry and civilization of the Chinamen.
+
+The amusements of the Malays in other parts are unpractised on the
+shores of Borneo: the only ones I ever saw were flying the kite,
+swimming, and the songs of their women; this latter is confined to
+the rajahs.
+
+Wherever a water-communication on Borneo presents, the indolence of the
+Malay will not permit him to think of the construction of a road. In
+the interior, however, there are pathways in all directions; about
+Mompava, where the river is narrow and shallow, they have constructed
+several roads. Being a people much occupied in maritime pursuits,
+they prefer, like the amphibious Dutch, traveling by rivers, or the
+innumerable cuts, canals, and creeks, which everywhere intersect the
+country: beside, their prows afford more protection from surprise,
+and they conceive their town as safer by being surrounded by a
+jungle and situated in a swamp; nor have they any conception beyond
+water-carriage.
+
+Their laws neither depend upon the Koran nor any written code,
+human or divine, beyond the whim and caprice of the chief (assassin)
+and his gang of desperadoes. The Sultan of Pontiana has, however,
+established the following regulations:
+
+Punishments for murder:--Life for life, except when the parties can
+commute the same by fine.
+
+
+
+A proclamation is publicly affixed announcing the law, that if any
+person be found adulterating gold-dust, or uttering it, so depreciated,
+with a view to defraud, the perpetrator shall lose his right arm,
+and the adulterated gold shall be confiscated.
+
+For theft:--Five dollars per head is given by the sultan to any one
+bringing in the head of a thief: if brought in alive, he is suspended
+by the heels and flogged as far as nature can bear short of death,
+and the punishment repeated _ad libitum_.
+
+Prisoners taken from an enemy, whether found in arms or not, are made
+slaves of, or suffer death, at the option of the captor.
+
+The Malay government is said to exhibit the feudal system in its most
+perfect form. The chief, or rajah, issues his orders to the Pangerans,
+or princes of the blood; to the Datus, or nobles of royal descent;
+or to the Orang Kayas, or wealthy vassals. All these obey and follow
+him to war, free of expense, when the king is sufficiently powerful
+to enforce it; but whenever the vassal feels himself strong enough
+to throw off the yoke, and to assert his independence, he sets up for
+himself. These vassals exact the same obedience from their slaves or
+villains, who pay the like deference only so long as they are compelled
+to observe and obey them. The property acquired by a slave he is often
+allowed to enjoy unmolested during his lifetime; but at his death, his
+master administers to the estate as heir, executor, and sole legatee.
+
+In fact, it is a government that inspires on all sides one universal
+distrust--that rules by precedents of oppression without a view
+to protection. The chiefs dread the power of their vassals, who,
+in return, apprehend everything from the rapacity of the governing
+power; while the bulk of the people, having no property to lose, are
+still compelled to appear abroad armed to defend their very persons
+from the outrage and violence of the next assassin they meet.
+
+Where governments not only tolerate murder, rapine, thefts, piracies,
+conflagrations, with every outrage violating the happiness and safety
+of society, but are the first to set the example and to consecrate the
+atrocity--where the people are taught no one principle of morality
+or religion--where the arts and sciences are wholly unknown or
+despised--where the amusements and sociabilities of human life are
+totally disregarded--where the bounties and comforts of nature are
+rather dispensed with than enjoyed, and where the absolute necessaries
+to existence and the decorations of life are more scanty and wretched
+than yet discovered among the rudest set of barbarians extant; if,
+from the experience of the past, expectations of the future are to be
+formed, we may safely infer that every vestige of Malay government
+and dominion will be ingulfed in the vortex of self and mutual
+destruction. Such a system of society has in itself the seeds of
+dissolution, and is rapidly verging to an inherent decay and general
+oblivion, which it will doubtless meet, unless some beneficent power
+arrest its baneful impetus, and direct its feverish energies through
+channels calculated to promote the happiness and to consolidate the
+welfare of the inhabitants of these scattered regions.
+
+Should so fortunate an occurrence ever fall to the lot of
+Borneo--should a strong and a wise government ever be established on
+her shores--a government that will religiously respect property and
+secure to industry the fruits of her labor--that will, by a wise system
+of laws, protect the peaceable and punish the violator of the laws of
+a well-organized society--that will direct their industry to useful
+purposes, and check their propensities to violence and plunder--such
+a government, in a short series of years, would behold, as if by
+magic, a paradise burst from her wilds, see cultivation smile upon
+her jungles, and hail a vast and increasing population, blessing the
+hand that awoke them to life, to happiness, and to prosperity. That so
+felicitous a change is not the mere reverie of a glowing imagination,
+or the sheer effusion of benevolence alone, is easily demonstrable.
+
+Whoever has seen the Egyptian fertility of the soil, from the
+moistness of the climate, the numberless rivers meandering around and
+intersecting the country in all directions, with the mild temperature
+of the climate, from similar causes--whoever considers the vast extent
+and inexhaustible wealth of her innumerable mines of pure native gold,
+her block-tin, her copper, her iron, her diamonds, &c., her various
+valuable fisheries of pearl and tripan--whoever views her ports,
+her harbors, and her productive shores, at the threshold of the
+over-teeming population of China, and at the same moment recollects
+that the country abounds in various valuable products in the highest
+possible estimation, and of increasing demand in the empire of China,
+must easily conceive what a tempting field and rich harvest this
+land of promise holds out to their industry and cupidity under such
+a system of laws and government as we have deemed a _sine qua non_.
+
+If, under the present codes of tyranny, oppression, and general
+ferocity, where nothing is permanent but violence and desolation--if,
+under such a system of barbarism, a hundred thousand Chinese (which
+is the fact) have found inducements sufficiently strong to settle on
+her shores, what might we not hope and expect from the overburdened
+population of that vast empire under a happier order of things? The
+astonishing number of Chinese settled within a few years at Pulo
+Pinang, on a contracted soil, possessing no peculiar advantages
+but from a free trade and equitable laws impartially administered,
+is both a fact and an illustration; and what might not Borneo hope
+for from a happier soil, greater inducements, and other physical
+advantages? Java, under the despotism of the Dutch, with the character
+of a sickly climate, and the remembrance of the cruel massacre of sixty
+thousand innocent Chinese, could still boast a hundred thousand of
+these people at the period it fell to the British arms; and withal,
+let it be remembered that these shores were once blessed with the
+industry of these people to a far greater extent under a happier
+period of her history.
+
+Whatever, indeed, might prove the work of ages in various other parts
+of the globe would, under the present circumstances of the Chinese
+empire, be instantaneous on these shores; and their habits of industry
+and civilization, when once rooted to the soil, would soon spread
+their genial influence to the extensive population of the interior,
+unite them in the bonds of social life, cement them in the general
+prosperity, and render these extensive shores a valuable appendage
+and an increasing resource to the wealth and power that brought about
+so happy a revolution in their affairs.
+
+For a considerable series of years past, the piratical ports of
+Borneo, &c., have been in the habit of committing depredations upon
+the commerce of British India, in the capture of her ships, the
+insulting of her flag, the offering of outrageous violence to the
+persons and lives of her mariners, merchants, &c., and this, too,
+with the most perfect impunity; no retribution having been exacted,
+no reprisals made, no remonstrance presented, and, in fact, no notice
+taken of their atrocious depredations. Hence these desperadoes, from
+inference and experience of the past, have been led to conclude, that
+whatever was practicable would be tolerated; that wherever they had
+the means or opportunity of overpowering, it was their duty, as it was
+to their advantage, to seize it to their own use, without any other
+apprehensions of the consequences than what might arise in the attempt.
+
+Under this discouraging aspect of affairs, there was but little more
+left to the commercial community of India than either to abandon the
+valuable commerce of Borneo wholly; or, if allured to it by a prospect
+of gain, to proceed in armed vessels at an increased expense and high
+insurance, so as to cover the extraordinary risks. These enhanced
+prices either operated as a prohibition to the trade, or circumscribed
+it so much, that an occasional capture excited no surprise, and was
+frigidly dismissed as a matter of course.
+
+But, from the prodigious accession of territorial possession, including
+the whole of the vast Dutch empire in the East, the communications
+between these and British India have necessarily increased a thousand
+fold; consequently, the recent alarming depredations upon our commerce,
+the serious obstacles to a safe communication, almost tantamount to a
+blockade of our Eastern ports by these pirates, imperiously call upon
+the British Government to adopt the most energetic means and decisive
+measures to crush their power and annihilate their resources, either by
+extirpating them wholly, or placing them and their possessions under
+such future control and checks, as shall prevent the possibility of
+a revival of a power capable of recurring to enormities that have so
+long outraged and disgraced the British flag in the Eastern seas.
+
+The idea of extirpating whole hordes of piratical states, were it
+possible, must, from its cruelty, be incompatible with the liberal
+principles and humane policy of a British government. The simple
+burning down of a Malay town can prove no serious impediment to
+future piratical enterprises: constructed, as they are, of bamboos,
+mats, and atap leaves, a town is almost rebuilt in the same period
+of time as it takes to destroy it. The Dutch, who had centuries of
+dear-bought experience, knew there was no other mode of prevention
+and radical cure than building small redoubts at the principal towns,
+and keeping up an adequate force to check piratical enterprises, and
+to turn their restless minds to exertions of industry; satisfied if,
+with the attainment of these objects, they covered the expenses of
+the establishment. This is the true history of the innumerable little
+forts on Celebes, Borneo, Timor, and all the Eastern isles.
+
+The principal piratical ports that still exist, beside those of
+Lingin, Rhio, and Billiton, are--1st, Pangeran Annam, at Sambas; 2d,
+Port Borneo Proper, and four hundred prows at Tampasuk, both under the
+Rajah of Borneo Proper; 3d, the Pasir pirates; 4th, the Sulo pirates;
+5th, the Illano, or pirates on the Isle of Magindano.
+
+I shall, from memory, cite such few of their depredations as I
+recollect.
+
+In 1774, says Forrest, the British were expelled from their infant
+settlement of Balambangan by an insurrection of the Sulos, who,
+finding the garrison weak and sickly, unprepared and off their guard,
+murdered and plundered them, and set fire to their settlement:--this
+was in return for having released their sultan from prison, and
+reestablished him on the musnud of his ancestors. In 1800, Captain
+Pavin and a boat's crew were cruelly murdered in the palace of the
+Sultan of Sulo while the commander was drinking a cup of chocolate:
+they fired upon the ship Ruby, but did not succeed in capturing her. In
+1810, they plundered the wreck of the ship Harrier of a valuable cargo:
+several of her crew are still in slavery at Bagayan Sulo. In 1788,
+the ship May of Calcutta, 450 tons burden, Captain Dixon, was cut off
+at Borneo Proper: they were invited up to the town with the ship,
+and while at dinner, the sultan and his people fell upon them, and
+murdered Captain Dixon, three officers, and ten Europeans; the lascars
+were retained in slavery, the valuable cargo plundered, and the ship
+burnt. In 1803 the ship Susanna of Calcutta, Captain Drysdale, was
+cut off near Pontiana by the Sambas and Borneo pirates; the Europeans
+were all massacred, and the vessel taken. In 1769, Captain Sadler,
+with his boat's crew, was murdered by the Sambas pirates off Mompava,
+having a prodigious quantity of gold-dust: they did not succeed in
+cutting off the ship. In 1806, Mr. Hopkins and crew, of the Commerce,
+were murdered by the pirates of Borneo Proper; the ship was plundered
+by them and the Sambas pirates. In 1810, Captain Ross was cut off. In
+1811, Captain Graves was cut off by the Pasir pirates with a rich
+cargo. In 1812, the enormities of Pangeran Annam have out-heroded
+Herod: these are too recent to require recapitulation. Independent
+of his depredations on the Coromandel, a Portuguese ship, &c., nine
+Europeans of the Hecate have been seized and made slaves; two have
+been since murdered; two have escaped; and five are hamstrung and
+otherwise maimed. Mrs. Ross and her son are still in slavery there.
+
+The Tampasuk pirates, belonging to the Rajah of Borneo Proper, aiding
+and abetting Pangeran Annam against the English, are Datu Akop,
+Datu Aragut, and Datu Jumbarang, with ten large men-of-war prows:
+there is also there the Rajah Endut, a Siak chief.
+
+Matan is under an independent rajah, who was formerly styled Sultan
+of Sukadana; but about seventeen years ago the Dutch burnt down his
+city. At length, by some pecuniary aid received from the late Sultan of
+Pontiana, he was enabled to reestablish his affairs as Rajah of Matan;
+and, in consideration of this aid, entered into a treaty of alliance,
+which stipulated, that on his daughter's marriage with the grandson
+of the late, and son of the present. Sultan of Pontiana, he would
+cede his kingdom and large diamond as a marriage-portion: the parties
+yet remain single. Under the head mineralogy we have pointed out how
+valuable a country this might become under better management. Iron,
+gold, tin, and diamonds abound here; also much wax, pepper, rattans,
+garu, and about two piculs of the finest birds'-nests, which sell at
+twenty-eight dollars the catty at Pontiana. Most of the trade finds
+its way to Pontiana, Benjar, or Java, in prows. The population is
+about ten thousand Dayers, &c.
+
+Sukadana, once the most celebrated city on Borneo, as the name implies,
+a terrestrial paradise, the capital of a kingdom and a great mart of
+trade, since burnt down and destroyed by the Dutch, exhibits nothing
+but ruins. There still remain numberless delicious fruit-trees, and
+a country still susceptible of general cultivation, being yet clear
+of jungle and morass. It is utterly abandoned: that it has not been
+rebuilt is owing to the Rajah of Pontiana, at whose suggestion it was
+destroyed, and whose interest it was to keep it down, having himself
+risen upon its ashes.
+
+There are no towns of any importance between Matan and Pontiana. The
+rise of this dynasty of sultans has been noted in another place; it
+is, however, almost the only power that has been expressly raised,
+supported, and that still exists, by commerce. It is situated in
+latitude 4 deg. north of the equator. The river has two mouths to it; the
+northern mouth is the deepest, the most direct, and of the greatest
+breadth; there are in this branch only two reaches up to the town. The
+city is no more than fifteen miles from the mouth of the rivers; its
+site is on the junction of the Matan and Landa rivers. About two-thirds
+of the way up it is fortified; first, with a battery on piles in the
+center of the stream, mounting five guns; on the left bank is another
+with wooden pales, mounting likewise five guns; on the opposite bank
+is a third, similar to the foregoing, with a like number of cannon;
+and, lastly, on the same bank is their grand battery, constructed of
+stone, mounting five eighteen-pounders, at the batu, or rock. Here the
+mausoleum of the royal family is erected, containing the tomb of the
+late sultan. The whole of this side of the river exhibits the marks
+of infant cultivation. The jungle has been, in part, cleared away,
+and here and there a solitary hut greets the eye. The sultan's palace
+has a battery of eleven guns of all sizes; none of these are calculated
+to make any serious resistance. So sensible is the sultan of this that
+he has commenced staking round with piles a low, swampy island, just
+detached from the palace. On this stands the grand mosk. He proposes
+throwing mud and stones within the ranges of piles, and planting
+upon them the heaviest-calibered cannon: it is a commanding site,
+and capable of being rendered formidable. There are no roads about
+Pontiana; the town is situated in the midst of a swamp, so low that
+the tide at high water overflows the lower parts of the houses, and
+this, with the addition of a country overrun with impenetrable jungle,
+renders it extremely unhealthy, and a most disagreeable residence.
+
+The campo China contains about two thousand souls, and lies on the left
+bank of the Matan river, abreast of the palace; the campo Buguese,
+on the right bank of the Landa; and the campo Malayu adjoins the
+palace. The whole population is about seven thousand souls: no Dayers
+are found hereabout. The whole of the districts under Pontiana produce
+about three hundred coyans of rice, the average selling price of which
+is from fifty-five to seventy Spanish dollars the coyan. The king's
+revenue is forty thousand dollars per annum. The Chinese plead poverty,
+but some of the Buguese are pointed out as wealthy. The quantity of
+gold that finds its way to Pontiana is annually from three to four
+piculs. The imports there consist of opium, iron, steel, salt, rice,
+hardware, cutlery, blue and white gurras, salampories, Java cloths,
+gunpowder, beside China produce of all possible descriptions. They
+make their returns in gold, diamonds, birds'-nests, wax, rattans,
+garu, ebony, agar-agar; beside pepper, sago, camphor, cassia, tripan,
+&c. brought here by the prows: five Chinese junks annually visit
+Pontiana, bringing down produce amounting to about fifty thousand
+dollars. The depredations of the Pangeran Annam prevent an extension
+of this most useful of all trades to this country. One or two Siamese
+junks arrive annually. The Tringanu, Timbilan, Karimata, and Borneo
+Proper prows trade here; and before Java fell to the British arms,
+the Buguese from the eastward traded here to a considerable amount.
+
+The stone walls built by the Dutch still encompass the palace. The
+piles on which their factory stood are yet discernible, but the
+buildings have been pulled down. Should the English hoist their flag
+here, a new factory must be erected; the most eligible situation for
+which would be where the mosk now stands, or the mosk itself might
+be converted into one, and another rebuilt elsewhere; but to this
+the sultan has insuperable objections. In an English fort, to think
+to have a mosk open to the ingress of a large body of Malays at all
+times is wholly incompatible with a certain reserve and security
+required from it. Beside, as the island is small, and soldiers at
+times inconsiderate, they might profane or defile its holy precincts,
+and thus lay the foundation of perpetual disputes, or even a serious
+rupture. The fort and factory, if built at all at Pontiana, must hence
+be fixed in some detached place. The sultan is building a new palace
+and covering it with tiles; a novelty in this quarter. There is but
+a scanty supply of fowls and buffaloes, and the necessaries of life
+are scarce and dear. It is altogether the most uncouth and dreary
+spot under the sun, though the sultan prefers it to Sambas and Mompava.
+
+Their naval force consists of two small ships, two brigs, fifty prows
+large and small, and about one thousand men. There is water on the bar
+to admit vessels drawing nine feet water. The roadstead, with seven
+fathoms water on it, lies seven miles from the river's mouth. Care
+must be taken not to mistake the Pongole river seen from the offing,
+and which lies ten miles farther southward. The only stock procurable
+here were hogs at ten dollars the picul, and water shipped off in
+China tank-boats at four and a half dollars the ton.
+
+The next port is Mompava, about sixteen miles to the northward of
+Pontiana, and the second port belonging to the sultan. The river is
+shallow, narrow, extremely serpentine, and constantly running down
+with great rapidity. The country around is a paradise in comparison
+with Pontiana. It is upon an elevated site, and, wherever the eye
+reaches, it is clear of jungle, and of fine rich mold, susceptible
+of the highest culture. There is a walk up to the town about eight
+miles from the mouth of the river; here the fishing-stakes nearly
+extend across the river, beside two miserable forts, mounting each
+five or six pounders, to defend the river. The population is seven
+thousand men, Malays, Buguese, and Dayers, and about two thousand
+Chinese. Formerly the territory of Mompava extended as far as 1 deg. north
+latitude. This territory belonged to a chief or rajah, reduced by the
+Dutch twenty-five years ago, shortly after they settled at Pontiana;
+the territory thus conquered was delegated in trust to the Rajah of
+Pontiana. The Sambas rajah has forcibly taken possession of a part
+of it. Sultan Kassim, of Pontiana, governed this district during his
+father's lifetime. On his accession to the musnud, five years ago, he
+placed a half-brother there, a stupid fellow, about twenty-five years
+of age. This man, about eight months ago, was trying to establish his
+independence, which he found he could not maintain. It has the same
+trade as Pontiana, but the regulations of the sultan do not admit of
+any vessel's touching here for that purpose. The palace is extensive,
+paled round with a sort of a fortification. The campo China, in
+October last, was in part burnt down by the people of Sambas, to the
+number of four hundred houses. There is a variety of roads hereabout;
+one leading to Sambas, one to Landa, one to Mintrada, &c. Groves of
+cocoanut-trees mark the site of ancient villages, since demolished; and
+indicate that it once enjoyed a superiority and preeminence, of which
+it has been despoiled. In point of susceptibility of cultivation, it
+is a full half century beforehand with Pontiana; it is capable of great
+improvement, and much grain might be raised with very little trouble.
+
+There is a considerable mud-flat at the mouth of the Sambas river,
+extending four or five miles out, but no regular bar. Vessels
+drawing thirteen feet may get in at high water springs; nine feet is
+the least water, and there is thirteen at the flood. In the offing
+there is a rise and fall of seven feet. At the entrance of the river
+neither shore must be too closely hugged, having ledges of rocks near
+them. Twelve miles above the bar the river branches into two parts;
+the broad or northern branch is called the Borneo river, having its
+source in Kiney Baulu; the other, leading to the town of Sambas,
+is named the Landa river, having its source in the diamond mines;
+where these two unite below there was formerly a fort. The Landa
+river is extremely serpentine, deep to the very bushes on both sides,
+and quite clear of danger up to the town, except near Siminis creek,
+about ten miles below the fort; here a reef of rocks runs across
+the stream, and as the fair way over them is somewhat intricate,
+the channel ought to be buoyed before attempted to be passed. The
+Barracouta, drawing thirteen feet, just scraped them at high water.
+
+About five or six leagues up the Landa branch, and about thirteen from
+the sea, stands the town and palace of Sambas, on the confluence of the
+Landa and Salako rivers. The fort on the right bank of the Landa is
+about a league below the town, built of two rows of large piles, the
+interstices being filled up with mud and stones, apparently mounting
+five guns, eighteens and twelves in the lower tier, and an equal number
+of smaller caliber on the ascend or more elevated range. A boom or
+dam of fishing-stakes was constructed across the river one-eighth of a
+mile below the fort, a large armed prow was moored in the center of the
+river, mounting two long twelves, and a masked battery opposite to the
+right, the number of guns unknown. The reach which these forts command
+is a mile and a half. The land makes an elbow where these forts are,
+which obliged the Barracouta to haul athwart the river, to get her
+broadside to bear. The whole of this Landa river is very narrow,
+but near the forts not one-third additional to her length. Both
+sides of this river toward the fort appear tolerably clear from
+the mast-head, interspersed with pleasant hills inhabited by the
+Chinese. The tides are pretty regular, six hours and six hours,
+running a knot and a half per hour. This river is too serpentine
+and narrow to admit sailing up; sweeps, towing, or tiding it up are
+the only modes that can be resorted to. The great branch of Borneo
+river, before mentioned, when up it twenty miles, divides into two;
+the branch running north being called Tampasan river, the other still
+retaining the name of Borneo. The Tampasan branch leads to old Sambas;
+it is from hence they get their supplies of rice and provisions,
+by the two cuts above the town of Sambas, which reunites the Landa
+and Borneo streams. There are roads from the great branch leading
+to the town, fort, and palace. Since the Dutch abandoned Sambas,
+three sultans have reigned on this musnud (within fifty years, or
+thereabout). There are four Pangerans, Annam being the most daring of
+the whole. His naval force consists of the Portuguese ship of 400 tons,
+one brig, and eight or ten large fighting prows, beside his allies
+from Borneo Proper, with ten large prows. The population amounts to
+twelve thousand Dayers and Malays, and thirty thousand Chinese.
+
+Under the head mineralogy we have given a detailed account of the
+principal sources of its industry. Sambas produces, beside gold, ten
+piculs of birds'-nests annually (of an inferior quality), much ebony,
+rattans, wax, &c. The trade here is much the same as at Pontiana,
+and susceptible of a tenfold increase: it is every way superior to the
+latter for the capital of a large mart. The country is better cleared,
+and hence susceptible of more easy cultivation; the land more elevated
+and less swampy, consequently healthier; the river deeper and farther
+navigable; the population more dense, and, the land being clear of
+jungle, more capable of being increased. Beside, it is the vicinage of
+the most considerable gold-mines on all Borneo. The Sultan of Pontiana
+would make it his capital if desired; his apprehensions of the power
+of the Sambas princes lead him to give the preference to Pontiana.
+
+The town of Calaca, belonging to the Rajah of Borneo Proper, lies
+north of Tanjong Datu; it is the principal port of trade south of
+the capital, and the mart of the Sedang country. Here much grain
+is produced, one hundred piculs of black birds'-nests, two hundred
+piculs of wax, some gold, pepper, camphor, &c., but the tin-mines,
+before mentioned, are utterly neglected. There are several other towns
+upon each of the rivers along this coast; the principal ones are Salat,
+Bacalo, Pasir, and Baram. They produce nearly the same articles as the
+above, which are, however, sent on to the capital as fast as collected.
+
+It is here necessary to observe, that all the rocks and shoals laid
+down on this coast do not exist at all; such as Volcano Island, the
+Byhors, Krenpel, the whole Slykenburgh, five Comadas, &c. Having
+beat up this coast twice, and carefully surveyed the whole, I can
+declare a finer and clearer coast does not anywhere exist. The old
+chart, published by A. Dalrymple, is much more correct than the recent
+ones. The numbers of immense drifts and floating isles hereabout must
+have given birth to all these imaginary dangers.
+
+The town of Borneo Proper, the capital of the kingdom of the same
+name, lies in latitude 5 deg. 7' north; it is situated fifteen miles up
+one of the finest rivers in the world, with three fathoms low water on
+the bar, and a rise and fall of fifteen feet. A correct plan of the
+river and town is published by Mr. Dalrymple. Here are mud docks for
+vessels of 500 or 600 tons. The town consists of about three thousand
+houses, built on stakes, in the middle of the river, with a population
+altogether of fifteen thousand souls, Chinese, Malays, Moruts, &c.
+
+The palace is slightly fortified; but the Rajah of Pontiana says, the
+Rajah of Borneo Proper is preparing the means of defence, apprehending
+the resentment of the English in vindicating the rights of their flag,
+so frequently insulted by them with impunity; however, as there is
+sufficient water for a line-of-battle ship to the city, nothing need
+be apprehended from them. The remains of a stone fort up the river
+are still seen, but the one on Pulo Laboan is destroyed. Both banks
+of the river are planted with pepper, which formerly produced sixty
+thousand piculs annually; these are now running to decay from want
+of commerce. The Chinese junks, for years past, have ceased touching
+here, from the numberless piratical depredations committed upon them;
+and the Portuguese from Macao have attempted to renew the trade
+from time to time, but at length, in 1808, their agent withdrew to
+Macao, a large ship having been cut off and the crew murdered the year
+preceding. They now have no other resource but piracy; and the produce,
+such as it is, finds its way in prows to Tringan, Sambas, Pontiana,
+Lingin, and Malacca. Very large quantities of the finest camphor in
+the world are procurable here; it comes down from the Morut country, by
+the great river; a great deal of wax, some gold, much birds'-nests of
+an inferior quality, any quantity of sago, cassia, clove-bark, pepper,
+betel-nut, rattans, camphor-oil, &c., tripan, tortoise-shell, &c.
+
+The hills hereabout are clear of jungle, and wear a beautiful
+appearance, and, without the aid of history, bear evident marks of
+a more extensive population and culture. There are plenty of black
+cattle, buffaloes, goats, fruits and vegetables of all kinds, abundance
+and variety of fish, turtle, &c. The articles best suited for this
+market are coarse China, white cangyans, brass plates, China crockery,
+brass wire, tea, sugar-candy, coarse China silks and satins, blue and
+white coarse guras and salampories, coarse ventipallam handkerchiefs,
+arcot chintzes, iron and steel, quallies, cooking utensils, and other
+articles suited to a Malay market--all coarse; no opium. The Borneo
+catty is two and a half lbs.
+
+The English have been very desirous of a port in the China seas for
+ages past, but have generally appeared to stumble on the most unhealthy
+and ill-adapted places possible, such as Balambangan, Pulo Condore,
+&c.; and even the principal object of Lord Macartney's embassy was
+the obtaining of a cession of this nature. But if a capital harbor,
+a navigable and majestic river, a productive country, a healthy site,
+population ready formed, and a commerce all sufficient to pay the
+expenses of an establishment (within one hundred miles of Balambangan)
+is required, the East India Company ought to have pitched upon Borneo
+Proper. It was once a most flourishing country, and a very short
+period under British auspices would render it the first mart in the
+East for China-Malayan commerce. There are large, populous towns of
+Moruts, and Orang Idan, who abhor the Malays, but who would be soon
+reconciled to a milder and less traitorous government.
+
+Kimanis lies in latitude 5 deg. 8' north; this is the first port on this
+coast ceded to the English by the Sultan of Sulo. The town lies ten
+miles up the river, at the foot of some of the most beautiful hills
+I ever saw, and is inhabited by thirty-five thousand Orang Idan. The
+river is small, and almost choked up at the mouth. This province
+has the following sea-ports in it, viz., Kimanis, Benome, Papal,
+and Pangalat, each governed by Orang Kayas, which still continue
+to send their produce to Borneo Proper, consisting of ten piculs
+of birds'-nests annually, two hundred piculs of wax, two piculs of
+camphor, and cassia, sago, betel-nut, and pepper, as much as required;
+tripan, camphor-oil, and rice; with fruit, fish, and provisions,
+of sorts which are cheap and plentiful. The articles mentioned as
+fit for Borneo answer here, only their produce is had about fifty
+per cent cheaper.
+
+The province of Kiney Baulu has the following seaports:--Putatan,
+Mangatal, Innanam, Labatuan, Mangabong, Tawaran, Sulaman, Ambung, Abai,
+Tampasuk, and Padasan. The whole of this province is tremendously
+high. The stupendous mountain of Kiney is about fifteen miles from
+Tampasuk, which at present is the most considerable pirate-port in the
+Malay seas, and belongs to the Rajah of Borneo Proper. The pirates
+frequenting this place have committed such depredations hereabout
+as to have induced the English to call the north of Borneo Pirates'
+Point. These desperate banditti originally resided at Tawaran, but
+were compelled to leave it from the resentment of whole tribes of
+Orang Idan. The whole of this province is very fertile; it is the
+source of all the great rivers on the island, and is more populous
+with the aborigines of the country than perhaps the rest of the island
+put together. The gold mines of Tampasuk have been mentioned; there
+are also mines of rock-crystal. Tawaran and several other places
+abound in goats and cattle. Abai has a small harbor, and the whole
+of this coast is accurately laid down by Lieutenant James Burton,
+in the sloop Endeavor. There are produced in this province much
+wax, tortoise-shell, very fine camphor, sago, rattans, and a red
+birds'-nest (which comes from Mantanane isle to Pandasan). They send
+their produce to Borneo Proper. The pirates are commanded by Datus
+from Borneo Proper. The lake in the vicinity of Kiney Baulu is said
+to be delightful; it is many miles in circumference, well cultivated,
+populous, and productive. It is said to be very cold, from the extreme
+elevation, and the inhabitants are almost as fair as Europeans. There
+is a valuable coral-tree somewhere hereabout.
+
+The Bay of Maludu, on the north of Borneo, is thirty miles in length,
+and from four to six in breadth, with numberless rivers flowing into
+it. There is no danger on the right-hand shore going up, but what
+is seen; on the larboard shore considerable coral-reefs are met
+with. Laurie and Whittle's chart of it is tolerably correct. The
+principal towns are, Sungy Bassar, nearly at the head of the bay,
+and Bankaka, on the left; the former, under Sheriff Mahomed, sends
+its produce to Sulo; the latter, under Orang Kayas, trades with Borneo
+Proper. The British, when last at Balambangan, threw up a small redoubt
+on the Bankaka side, with a view to supplies of rice and provisions;
+and this part is tranquil and a good roadstead, being sheltered from
+the swell brought in by the sea-breeze.
+
+The rich and valuable fishery of copis or Ceylon oyster in this bay
+has been mentioned; it might be rendered of considerable value. The
+whole of the rivers for miles up abound in rattans; Mr. A. Dalrymple
+thinks four thousand tons might be easily cut down every year without
+exhausting it, and sent by junks to China. There are forests of
+beautiful pines of stately growth, well calculated for the largest
+masts, and in high esteem at China. There is no quarter of the world
+which abounds more in that species of the sea-turtle (called by the
+Malays pakayan) which yields the shell; any quantity may be had on
+all the shores and isles of this bay.
+
+The interior abounds in camphor, which can be had in any quantities;
+so vastly abundant is it, and so little does the Orang Idan know of
+the extreme value of this commodity, that a bamboo of camphor may
+be procured in exchange for a bamboo of salt. The petty towns are
+Sandeck, Bowengun, Patasan, Pone, and Milawi. It produces in one
+year two hundred piculs of wax, fifty piculs of tortoise-shell,
+ten piculs of best camphor, and as much inferior; ten piculs of
+birds'-nests, at ten dollars the catty; 1st camphor, twenty-five;
+rattans, one dollar per picul; tortoise-shell, one dollar the catty;
+wax, twenty the picul. Articles required are the same as at Borneo
+Proper. Rice, provisions, fish, and fruits are abundant and cheap;
+the sugar-cane also.
+
+The province of Paytan is the principal district for camphor of any
+in the world. Whole forests for miles everywhere meet the eye, and
+the produce from them is the finest that can be conceived, large and
+transparent as Chin-chew sugar-candy. The principal towns are Pitan,
+Kinarubatan, Kulepan, and the famous town of Sugut. The coast is so
+full of coral-reefs, and has been so very indifferently surveyed,
+that it is only frequented by prows; there is a road from Sugut to
+Bankaka in Maludu Bay. Much wax, tripan, sago, &c., is produced here.
+
+Labuk has the towns of Camburcan, Labuk, and Songsohi; its produce is
+somewhat similar to that of Paytan, with the addition of clove-bark
+and birds'-nests.
+
+Sandakan. This celebrated harbor has been already mentioned as one
+of the finest in the world. The towns within it are Towsam, Duyom,
+Lu, Bokean, Dom or Doung, Seagally-hood and Tong luly luku; all
+these are governed by Datus from Sulo, who have expressly settled
+here to collect the prodigious quantities of birds'-nests abounding
+in this district. They are procured here at ten dollars the catty;
+and sent to Sulo, with tripan, wax, &c. The Sulos are very jealous of
+any ships going in here, and will leave no attempt untried in cutting
+off a vessel going in, although an English port.
+
+In the province of Mangidora lies the great river Kinnabatingan,
+which is navigable a vast way up, with several towns of Orang Idan
+on its shores. The other towns are Salasany, Supabuscul, Tambesan,
+which forms also an elegant harbor, Laboan or Saboan, Tuncu, Salurong,
+Giong, and Maday, which has a gold-mine, before mentioned. The whole
+of this province, it is said, will produce above one hundred piculs
+of the finest birds'-nests, much black ditto, some camphor, tripan,
+honey, wax, dammer, Buru mats, fine spars; sago and pepper were
+formerly largely cultivated here. The pearl-banks of Tawi Tawi have
+been mentioned.
+
+Tirun. The sea-ports of this last mentioned and valuable province,
+ceded to the English by the Sulos, are chiefly inhabited by Buguese
+people. The towns are Sibuku, Sambakung, Leo or Ledong, Sikatak,
+Sabellar, Kuran or Barrow, Talysion Dumaung, Tapeandurian. The
+principal ports are Kuran and Sibuku; they produce a large quantity
+of very fine white birds'-nests, a quantity of black ditto, much
+dammer, sago, tripan, wax, rattans, camphor, honey, Buru mats, gold,
+&c. The people of Tapeandurian are represented as very ferocious,
+and the sea-coast hereabout requires surveying.
+
+The ports of Pasir and Coti originally belonged to the King of
+Benjarmasing; very fine birds'-nests are procured here at twenty
+dollars the catty; much gold, tripan, wax, &c.
+
+Were Borneo to be settled, I think the principal factory ought to be
+at Borneo Proper; the second at Sambas; the third at Benjarmasing;
+the fourth at Pasir; the fifth at Tabesan or Sandakan.
+
+In looking over the map of the world, it is a melancholy reflection to
+view so large a portion of the habitable globe as all Borneo abandoned
+to barbarism and desolation; that, with all her productive wealth
+and advantages of physical situation, her valuable and interesting
+shores should have been overlooked by all Europeans; that neither
+the Dutch nor the Portuguese, with centuries of uncontrolled power in
+these seas, should have shed a ray of civilization on shores bordering
+upon their principal settlements; that her ports and rivers, instead
+of affording a shelter to the extensive commerce of China, should
+at this enlightened period of the world hold out only terror and
+dismay to the mariner; and that all that she should have acquired
+from the deadly vicinage and withering grasp of Dutch power and
+dominion has been the art of more speedily destroying each other,
+and rendering themselves obnoxious to the rest of mankind. Now that
+her destinies are transferred to the enlightened heads and liberal
+hearts of Englishmen,--now that her fortunes are embarked under the
+administration of a wise and liberal government,--we may confidently
+hope that a happier order of things will, under the blessing of an
+all-ruling Providence, speedily restore these extensive shores to
+peace, to plenty, and to commerce; and we ardently trust that another
+age may not be suffered to pass away without exhibiting something
+consolatory to the statesman, the philosopher, and the philanthropist.
+
+
+
+
+
+No. V.
+
+_Extracts from the late Mr. Williamson's Journal._
+
+
+In October, 1845, Mr. Brooke commissioned some of the European
+gentlemen of his party to make a tour of inspection through the
+outlying Dyak tribes dependent on Sarawak, for the purpose of
+ascertaining their condition and prospects, and taking steps for the
+redress of any grievances of which they might have to complain. A few
+extracts from the rough journal kept on that occasion by Mr. Williamson
+may not be uninteresting to the reader, as showing what a large
+measure of success had already attended Mr. Brooke's wise and earnest
+efforts to restore peace and plenty to the poor persecuted Dyaks;
+what incessant vigilance on his part was still requisite to check the
+inveterate propensity of the knavish Malays to plunder and oppress
+them; and with what well-directed activity he pursues his labors
+for the physical welfare and the moral regeneration of his subjects
+and neighbors.
+
+"_Wednesday, Oct. 8th._--At 11 A.M. arrived at Pankalum Bunting,
+where we found about thirty Dyaks in a small hut ready to welcome us,
+and carry our luggage up to the village. At one o'clock started for
+the Bakar village, about five miles from the landing place, at the
+foot of the Sadong hills. This tribe consists of one hundred families,
+occupying four villages. There are about twenty-five houses in Mungu
+Babi (_i. e._ Hog Hill), the village where we are at present, and
+five padi stores. It is very recently that the Dyaks have ventured
+to store their padi in houses. At 8 P.M. attended the feast given in
+our honor, where we saw the women dancing; they appeared very happy,
+and pleased to see us.
+
+"_9th._--This morning we had all the Orang Kayas of the four villages,
+who informed me they were very comfortable and happy. I told them the
+object of my mission, at which they all seemed pleased, and said that
+that if they were oppressed they would come to Sarawak and complain
+to the Tuan Besar, When I asked them about the Sadong Dyaks, they said
+I should hear all when I met them, as they will hide nothing from me.
+
+"The only thing these Dyaks complain of is, that Nakodah Mahomed told
+them he had the Tuan Besar's chop, and gave them to understand that the
+powder, muskets, &c., in his possession, belonged to the Tuan Besar;
+in consequence of which they carried these goods for Nakodah Mahomed
+without receiving any payment for their labor. I told them that in
+future they need not carry goods for any man coming from Sarawak, or
+elsewhere, without due payment in ready money; and that should traders
+at any time leave their goods in the Dyak houses, they need not be
+alarmed, but bring the goods to the Tuan Besar and tell him how they
+were left behind. They further told me that the Siringi wish to claim
+their siri cave, where they get their birds'-nests which is close
+to Kumpung, and has belonged to them as long as they can remember;
+that this cave is a whole day's journey from Siring--how, then, can
+it belong to the Siringi? I answered, that on my return the Tuan Besar
+would set the matter right, and give the cave to its proper owners.
+
+"_Same day._--Proceeded to Jinan, about eight miles distant. There
+are here fifteen houses, and the Dyaks are very comfortable, having
+plenty of grain, and being well off for sugar-cane, sweet potatoes,
+plantains, betel-nut, beside various other fruit-trees. The houses
+here, as at Mungu Babi, are very shabby.
+
+"_10th._--This morning met Orang Kaya Kusunan, who told me the
+Toup Dyaks were waiting half way to receive us. At 4 P.M. I had the
+Orang Kaya Tumangong of Toup, and the Orang Kaya of Kurran, Si Labi,
+Si Mabong, Daah, Bugu (Sadong tribes), and the Orang Kaya Pasunan,
+beside other Dyaks, the Bandar Cassim, with his Sadong Malays, and our
+own people, at the house where I was staying. I explained my mission
+to them, and made them understand that, at the Bandar's express wish,
+the Tuan Besar had sent me to them to ascertain their condition. The
+Bandar then told them it was his wish to institute the same laws and
+customs as at Sarawak; after which, I informed the Dyaks that there
+will be no more forcing of goods on them at exorbitant prices, and
+that for the future, should any one 'serra' them, they must complain
+to the Bandar, and subsequently lay their case before Mr. Brooke. The
+conference, I am glad to say, ended to every one's satisfaction.
+
+"At 8 P.M. the Orang Kaya Rih and two others of the same tribe
+complained to me of their grievances, and told me that Si Tore,
+a Sadong man, had forced 10 pieces of iron, weighing 15 catties,
+on them about two years and a half ago, and that he now demanded 100
+pasus of padi for it. (This is serra with a vengeance: 100 pasus are
+equal to 2 1/2 tons weight!) They had paid 10 pasus; should they,
+they asked me, pay the rest? I told them I would settle the business
+at Bandar Cassim's village.
+
+"_11th._--The Dyaks gave us a feast last night; the women danced and
+the merriment was kept up till morning. At 11 started in boats with
+Bandar Cassim, and at 2 P.M. arrived at his village [34] called * * *,
+where every thing had been got ready for our reception; a house was
+well fitted with gay curtains and mats, and after a salute of three
+guns as we approached, we took up our residence and made ourselves
+very comfortable. At 7 in the evening we met all the respectable
+part of the community of this little Malay village. I told them what
+I was sent for, the Bandar as usual giving way to our wishes, and
+repeating that Sarawak and Sadong, and Sadong and Sarawak, were as
+one country. I told Si Tore, Sebi Gani, and Sirdeen, that they must
+make no further demands on the Rih Dyaks, and that neither they nor
+anybody else could serra the Dyaks any longer--not even the Bandar
+himself; for they must recollect that the Sadong Dyaks would take
+refuge in Sarawak if oppressed.
+
+"After the Bandar had left, the brother-in-law of the Orang Kaya
+of Sinkaru, together with the Orang Kaya of Si Nankau Kujang, and
+Orang Kaya Kurang, came to me. The former of these complained that
+Abang Tahar (the old Patingi's son-in-law), about two years ago,
+forced a small tatawak [35] and one brass dish on them, for which
+he demanded three Dyaks as slaves, whom he seized at the time and
+took away, and that now he demanded another Dyak boy. I replied they
+were on no account to comply, that they must complain to the Bandar;
+and if he took no notice of it, to go to Sarawak to the Tuan Besar.
+
+"The Orang Kaya likewise told me that formerly there were twenty-five
+families in his tribe, but now they were reduced to fifteen, the
+rest having been seized and sold into slavery! (Here follow other
+complaints. The day's journal concludes thus:)--The Sinkaru Dyaks have
+not yet returned to their former Tumbawong, [36] but are scattered
+about in the jungle and very poorly off. I told them to return to
+their former place of residence, and to collect the tribes there.
+
+"_Sunday, 12th._--Orang Kaya Si Rubin and Orang Kaya Signa Mantay,
+of Rubin, likewise came to me to say that they were scattered, some
+at * * * some at Bedope, and some at Rubin, and all badly off for
+grain. When collected, they have about thirty families; formerly
+they had about fifty. Those missing had mostly been seized and made
+slaves. At 11h 30m we started for * * * (part of Rubin tribe), where
+we arrived about half-past two. We found one house with five families
+in it, and a Pangah [37] attached. Pa Rigan, the * * * of this tribe,
+told me that Abang Tahar, Abang Ally, Abang Bakar, &c. &c. (all of
+Gadong, under Patingi Mueel), demand from the Dyaks old serras, which
+have been paid long ago. Dangon, a Sirkaru Dyak, told me that Abang
+Tahar, a short time since, demanded from his tribe a Dyak boy, and
+four Dyak boys from the En Singi Dyaks. Bandar Cassim put a stop to
+these demands at the time; but he has revived them since. The Malays
+of Sadong, whenever they go among the Dyaks, seize their fowls, eggs,
+rice, cocoa-nuts, and all sorts of property. The Bandar tells me he
+never permits these people to go among the Dyaks, but that they do
+it by stealth over land, and that the Tuan Besar must do something
+to prevent them from oppressing and frightening the Dyaks. (Here
+follow other complaints against the Gadong people, after which the
+journal continues.)
+
+"_13th._--Girang, a Bedope Dyak of the Rubin tribe, told me how
+very much he is bullied and troubled by the Gadong people, who are
+constantly threatening to attack him. I advised him to collect the
+tribe at Rubin, their old Tumbawong. At 7 started back for the Bandar's
+village, where we arrived at 10 o'clock. After a bath and breakfast,
+the Bandar's mother came to me with a present of two sarongs, one
+for the Tuan Besar and one for myself, and begged that I would urge
+the Tuan Besar to take care of the Bandar as if he were his own son,
+and not to cast him off. I told her that Mr. Brooke would support
+the Bandar as long as he conducted himself properly. The Orang Kaya
+Baga, Orang Kaya Sinching of Milikin, * * * of En Tayen, Orang Kaya
+Laja of Rahmone, Orang Kaya Rinjou of Sirkaru, Orang Kaya Mior
+Muntah, Pangara Lilli of Bunan, Orang Kaya Nijou of Mapuh, Orang
+Kaya Ganggong of En Kelas, and Pangara Achong of En Singi, all met
+me. I told them the object of my mission in presence of the Bandar
+and several other Malays, and they were highly delighted. They asked
+me to allow the Bandar to govern them, as they are much troubled
+by the Gadong people. Abang Tahar lately demanded four Dyak boys
+of Pangara Achong, and two from the Orang Kaya of Sirkaru; beside
+which, the Sadong people seize their property whenever they go among
+them. They are very poorly off for grain. They asked me for a letter
+which should prevent people from annoying them. I told them I should
+represent the matter to the Tuan Besar, and that no doubt he will
+give his chop to each tribe. They all speak well of Bandar Cassim;
+but his people are bad, and those at Gadong [38] are worse.
+
+"_14th._--At 6h 30m started up the river Kayan toward Tumma,
+having left Talip with nineteen men to return to Sarawak by way of
+Samarahan. At 8 we stopped at Mang-garut, where the Dyaks presented
+us with a deer they had caught. These Dyaks are badly off for grain,
+and it is the same tribe Bandar Cassim attacked in the Goa Siri (siri
+cave) some few years ago. Orang Kaya Pa Jampat told me, that on that
+occasion the Bandar seized eight Dyaks and took them with him. [39]
+The river here begins to be narrow and shallow, with pebbly banks,
+and clear water. At noon we stopped at Muara Rubin, where we intended
+to stay a day to inquire for coal, which was stated to have been
+found in this neighborhood; but as nobody knew the whereabout, and
+as the Hindoo remains (said to consist of one stone in the shape of
+a Malay hat) were five hours out of our way, we continued our route
+till evening, having parted company with the Bandar at Muara Rubin,
+as I well knew the Tumma Dyaks would be afraid of his approach.
+
+"_15th._--At daylight started toward Tumma, and at 9 stopped below
+Muora Sangan, where we breakfasted, after which we pushed up again,
+and at 1 arrived at Si Sijack, where the Tumma are. Orang Kaya Pa
+Muany, the chief, told me they were very much bullied, as a Sarawak
+man, named Pakar, and Marrat, the father-in-law of Bandar Mulana of
+Sarawak, forced upon them a quantity of goods in the name of the
+Tuan Besar and the Bandar Mulana. (Here follows a list of things,
+such as gongs, tatawaks, jackets, handkerchiefs, and the like, with
+the most exorbitant prices affixed to them. The rice and padi had not,
+however, been paid for.) There are three villages of this tribe; two
+about 250 yards apart; one of which, containing about ten families,
+is ruled by the Orang Kaya Pa Muany, and the other, with about thirty
+families, by the Orang Kaya Mayo and the Orang Kaya Pa Balet. In the
+other village, about three reaches above, is the Orang Kaya Pa Magong,
+with ten families. They said they were very comfortable under the
+Patingi Ali (father of the present Bandar Mulana), but that since
+Bandar Mulana has succeeded, they have been oppressed. They told
+me they had run away from Sadong because they heard the Tuan Besar
+was a just and good rajah, and that all his Dyaks were comfortable,
+but now they are oppressed. Pakar told them that if they did not take
+his tatawaks they must not remain here, but run away!
+
+"There are forty families of the Si Nangkan Soyar tribe, and thirteen
+families of the Tibader tribe. The Orang Kayas told me that, had I not
+arrived, the rice in payment of the goods forced on them would have
+been taken down, as Pakar was here hurrying them to carry it to Sanar;
+but that when he heard of my coming he could not be persuaded to wait
+and meet me. The following goods have just been returned by the Gregan
+Dyaks (here follows a long list of goods and prices). Pangara Achong
+of the En Singi tribe told me that he has one family of his tribe at
+Gregan, and he wanted them to return with him. I asked the Pangara of
+Gregan whether this family wished to return, but he did not know. I
+then told them no one could force them, but that they might do just as
+they pleased. The Orang Kaya Pa Jampat goes down with me to Kuching to
+lay before the Tuan Besar a claim made upon him by the Malay Pangeran
+of Samarahan. Beside which, I take down the Orang Kaya and Pangara
+of Tumma, Si Markan Singan and Tebadu, together with all the goods
+forced on them, that the case may be judged by the Tuan Besar.
+
+"Bandar Cassim demands a debt of the Orang Kaya Pa Muany of Tumma;
+he originally sold them (_i. e._ forced on them, of course) a gong
+for 150 pasus of padi, 100 of which was paid; and the question is,
+whether they were to pay the rest. This was four years ago. I left it
+for the Tuan Besar's decision." (Here follows a list of goods forced
+on the Tebadu Dyaks.) [40]
+
+
+
+THE END.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+HARPER'S NEW MISCELLANY
+OF
+POPULAR STERLING LITERATURE.
+
+
+"Books that have an _aim_ and _meaning_ in them."
+
+Now in course of publication, a new and attractive library of sterling
+books, elegantly printed in duodecimo, on fine paper, and _bound in
+extra muslin gilt, fitted for permanent preservation_.
+
+
+PRICE FIFTY CENTS A VOLUME.
+
+_The cheapest Popular Series of Works yet Published._
+
+
+
+I., II.
+
+Elements of Morality and Polity.
+
+BY WILLIAM WHEWELL, D.D.,
+
+AUTHOR OF "HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF THE INDUCTIVE SCIENCES," &c.
+
+2 vols. 12mo, Muslin, extra gilt, $1 00.
+
+Dr. Whewell's work ought to be read, because it can not be read
+without advantage: the age requires such books.--_London Athenaeum._
+
+A text-book of simple truths, from which, by induction, a complete
+system of morality is constructed, applicable to all the relations
+and circumstances of life, and embracing every department of human
+action. The reader who shall carefully study these volumes--and a
+more inviting page, clear and legible, the eye does not often rest
+upon--will find his labor more than rewarded.--_New York Commercial
+Advertiser._
+
+Professor Whewell's "Elements of Morality" have been universally
+received in England as a contribution of rare value to the department
+of moral and political science.--_Baltimore American._
+
+A splendid production by one of the most distinguished of the
+scientific men of the age. This is a book, not to be read merely, but
+to be re-perused and patiently studied, we have heard it pronounced by
+no mean critic the most complete and lucid work on ethical philosophy
+ever produced. We commend this work to the especial notice of thinkers
+and readers, to scholars and schools generally, as a most admirable
+text-book--_Sun._
+
+The style of the work, though simple, is extremely clear, strong, and
+eloquent. It is a book to be _studied_ rather than superficially read,
+and can not fail to be of the very highest importance in instructing
+and disciplining the public mind.--_American Patriot._
+
+This is beyond all comparison the most complete, comprehensive, and
+luminous treatise on the important subjects it discusses, that is to
+be found in the language, and its careful study is indispensable to
+every one who would obtain true and definite notions in regard to the
+principles of public and private morals. It is profoundly learned
+and philosophical, but the writer thinks logically and clearly,
+and is therefore at all times lucid and comprehensible.--_Buffalo
+Commercial Advertiser._
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+III.
+
+The Philosophy of Mystery.
+
+BY WALTER COOPER DENDY.
+
+12mo, Muslin, extra gilt, 50 cents.
+
+This is a learned and elaborate work, in which the writer goes
+into the investigation of all the phenomena of mind in the erratic
+operations and phantasies of ghost seeing and spectral hallucinations,
+and aims to give the true philosophy of all such delusions. He is a
+medical man of considerable eminence, and has spared no pains in his
+researches, giving a great number of facts and cases to illustrate
+his philosophy. The volume will be much sought for, as it is really
+a desideratum in the world of literature. We know of no work on this
+subject which lays the same just claim to public attention, or the
+study of the philosopher.--_Christian Advocate and Journal._
+
+The volume before us is both instructive and amusing, and at this
+particular time, when the extremes of superstition and philosophy have
+shaken hands, it will be likely to effect an inconceivable amount of
+good, if properly studied. It is one of the most remarkable productions
+of the day, and must create an extraordinary degree of interest in
+the public mind.--_Merchant's Magazine._
+
+It belongs to that class of writings which you can take up and put down
+at pleasure, and which may be subjected to repeated readings. The work
+is pleasant, however, in spite of this--pleasant because of its facts,
+its numerous details of mystery, its vast collection of anecdote, its
+developments of _diablerie_, its tidings from the spiritual world,
+and the many cases which it brings together of the curious and the
+wonderful in nature and art, which former ages, and ignorance and
+superstition, have concluded to consider supernatural. Where science
+and modern speculation furnish the solution to the mystery, Mr. Dendy
+couples it with the statements, and the book is thus equally valuable
+and amusing.--_Charleston Transcript._
+
+Here lies a remarkable work; beautiful in its style, and wondrous
+in its matter. The work is strictly philosophical in its tendency,
+yet more amusing than a novel.--_True American._
+
+This is a book for the lovers of marvels and of mysteries. It
+contains an immense collection of anecdotes of spectral apparitions,
+of illusions of vision or of hearing, of striking phenomena exhibited
+in dreams, in insanity, in trance, or in magnetism, and furnishes
+many very valuable hints to aid in the solution of these mysteries,
+by which so many have been bewildered or affrighted. It is written
+in a style of great ease and elegance, and can not fail to find a
+very wide circle of welcoming readers.--_Albion._
+
+This unique and remarkable book has just been placed on our table;
+we know its reputation of old; it is an admirable discourse on the
+subject of supernaturalisms, such as mental illusions, dreams, ghosts,
+mesmeric phenomena, &c. If any one will but read the first half dozen
+pages, we will vouch for it he will not neglect the rest of the volume:
+it is one of the best written books on one of the most curious range
+of topics that could engage the pen of a writer, or the attention of a
+reader. It is, in fact, one of the most curious volumes ever perused,
+upon a series of the most singular subjects, and, in this new and
+neat form, it will command a vast number of readers.--_Sunday Times._
+
+"The Philosophy of Mystery" is an exceedingly able work; far better,
+we think, than the "Natural Magic" of Brewster, a book of identical
+purpose, carried out in a totally different way. The "Natural Magic"
+is the more ratiocinative, Mr. Dendy's essay the more poetical, the
+more imaginative, and to us the more interesting.--_National Press._
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+IV.
+
+The Life of Mozart:
+
+INCLUDING HIS CORRESPONDENCE.
+
+BY EDWARD HOLMES,
+
+AUTHOR OF "A RAMBLE AMONG THE MUSICIANS Of GERMANY," &c.
+
+12mo, Muslin, extra gilt, 50 cents.
+
+It is written in a beautiful, narrative style, and can not but be
+every where acceptable. To all who appreciate the extraordinary
+genius of Mozart, the delicate structure of his mind, the incidents
+of his life, and his romantic death, this volume will indeed be a
+treasure.--_Boston Gazette_.
+
+It contains, in addition to much of his interesting correspondence,
+and other papers, a detailed account of his life, adventures, and
+rise as an artist, and a discriminating sketch of his character, the
+peculiarities of which are happily illustrated by anecdotes. Many
+things of him, unknown even to his admirers, are here given to the
+world, and his biographer, fully appreciating the artist, has yet,
+not like a flatterer, but with true independence, spoken candidly of
+the faults of the man.--_Merchant's Magazine_.
+
+Of this far-famed life of Mozart it is scarcely necessary for us
+to say a word; the foreign reviews have been so unanimous in their
+encomiums, that we suppose few will be found insensible to the strong
+inducement of its perusal, especially as the work may be obtained at
+the trifling cost of half a dollar, and in so beautiful a guise. We
+have looked into the biography but slightly, yet find it redolent with
+interest, and fully sustaining the high estimate placed upon the work
+by the _London Athenaeum_ and _Blackwood_. If the Harpers continue
+to fill their new library with sterling works like the present,
+it will present the most truly valuable series, yet the cheapest,
+ever attempted in any age or country.--_Evening Gazette_.
+
+The only authentic biography of the great composer that is extant
+in the English language, and the events of his career are replete
+with useful admonitions and warning to the sons of genius, and they
+whisper to those whose present claims are not allowed that there
+is a future full of promise. In his life Mozart was neglected and
+impoverished, and he went to his grave with more than the bitterness
+of death crowding on his thoughts, but fame has taken possession of
+his memory, and among those who move as gods in musical art, few are
+equal to him, none are superior. This biography possesses an interest
+for all who feel interested in the great men of the earth. It is not
+only remarkably well written, but has a completeness about it we have
+never found before in any life of Mozart.--_Louisville Journal_.
+
+There is such a charm in this narrative, that the lovers of good
+biography can not hear of it too soon. We can not conceive a more
+fascinating story of genius. To a style which would alone have sufficed
+to the production of an interesting and striking narrative, Mr. Holmes
+unites a depth of knowledge and musical appreciation very rare and
+remarkable. We thank him cordially for a most pleasing addition to
+our standard biographical literature.--_Examiner_.
+
+The book is one of extraordinary interest, not merely to the lovers
+of music and appreciators of the great composer, but to the general
+reader, as a vivid picture of the life of a man of genius, who
+encountered all the difficulties, trials, and sufferings usually the
+lot of genius when it comes before a world incapable of appreciating
+it, and indifferent to its welfare. The domestic portions of the book
+are invaluable; his relations to his father and his wife are very
+beautiful. The work is admirably executed, as well in the scientific
+as anecdotical passages, and is worthy of the widest sale.--_News_.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+III.
+
+_The Philosophy of Mystery._
+
+BY WALTER COOPER DENDY.
+
+12mo, Muslin, extra gilt, 50 cents.
+
+
+This is a learned and elaborate work, in which the writer goes
+into the investigation of all the phenomena of mind in the erratic
+operations and phantasies of ghost seeing and spectral hallucinations,
+and aims to give the true philosophy of all such delusions. He is a
+medical man of considerable eminence, and has spared no pains in his
+researches, giving a great number of facts and cases to illustrate
+his philosophy. The volume will be much sought for, as it is really
+a desideratum in the world of literature. We know of no work on this
+subject which lays the same just claim to public attention, or the
+study of the philosopher.--_Christian Advocate and Journal._
+
+The volume before us is both instructive and amusing, and at this
+particular time, when the extremes of superstition and philosophy have
+shaken hands, it will be likely to effect an inconceivable amount of
+good, if properly studied. It is one of the most remarkable productions
+of the day, and must create an extraordinary degree of interest in
+the public mind.--_Merchant's Magazine._
+
+It belongs to that class of writings which you can take up and put down
+at pleasure, and which may be subjected to repeated readings. The work
+is pleasant, however, in spite of this--pleasant because of its facts,
+its numerous details of mystery, its vast collection of anecdote, its
+developments of _diablerie_, its tidings from the spiritual world,
+and the many cases which it brings together of the curious and the
+wonderful in nature and art, which former ages, and ignorance and
+superstition, have concluded to consider supernatural. Where science
+and modern speculation furnish the solution to the mystery, Mr. Dendy
+couples it with the statements, and the book is thus equally valuable
+and amusing.--_Charleston Transcript_.
+
+Here lies a remarkable work; beautiful in its style, and wondrous
+in its matter. The work is strictly philosophical in its tendency,
+yet more amusing than a novel.--_True American_.
+
+This is a book for the lovers of marvels and of mysteries. It
+contains an immense collection of anecdotes of spectral apparitions,
+of illusions of vision or of hearing, of striking phenomena exhibited
+in dreams, in insanity, in trance, or in magnetism, and furnishes
+many very valuable hints to aid in the solution of these mysteries,
+by which so many have been bewildered or affrighted. It is written
+in a style of great ease and elegance, and can not fail to find a
+very wide circle of welcoming readers.--_Albion_.
+
+This unique and remarkable book has just been placed on our table;
+we know its reputation of old; it is an admirable discourse on the
+subject of supernaturalisms, such as mental illusions, dreams, ghosts,
+mesmeric phenomena, &c. If any one will but read the first half dozen
+pages, we will vouch for it he will not neglect the rest of the volume:
+it is one of the best written books on one of the most curious range
+of topics that could engage the pen of a writer, or the attention of a
+reader. It is, in fact, one of the most curious volumes ever perused,
+upon a series of the most singular subjects, and, in this new and
+neat form, it will command a vast number of readers.--_Sunday Times._
+
+"The Philosophy of Mystery" is an exceedingly able work; far better,
+we think, than the "Natural Magic" of Brewster, a book of identical
+purpose, carried out in a totally different way. The "Natural Magic"
+is the more ratiocinative, Mr. Dendy's essay the more poetical, the
+more imaginative, and to us the more interesting.--_National Press._
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+IV.
+
+_The Life of Mozart:_
+
+INCLUDING HIS CORRESPONDENCE.
+
+BY EDWARD HOLMES,
+
+AUTHOR OF "A RAMBLE AMONG THE MUSICIANS OF GERMANY," &c.
+
+12mo, Muslin, extra gilt, 50 cents.
+
+
+It is written in a beautiful, narrative style, and can not but be
+every where acceptable. To all who appreciate the extraordinary
+genius of Mozart, the delicate structure of his mind, the incidents
+of his life, and his romantic death, this volume will indeed be a
+treasure.--_Boston Gazette._
+
+It contains, in addition to much of his interesting correspondence,
+and other papers, a detailed account of his life, adventures, and
+rise as an artist, and a discriminating sketch of his character, the
+peculiarities of which are happily illustrated by anecdotes. Many
+things of him, unknown even to his admirers, are here given to the
+world, and his biographer, fully appreciating the artist, has yet,
+not like a flatterer, but with true independence, spoken candidly of
+the faults of the man.--_Merchant's Magazine._
+
+Of this far-famed life of Mozart it is scarcely necessary for us
+to say a word; the foreign reviews have been so unanimous in their
+encomiums, that we suppose few will be found insensible to the strong
+inducement of its perusal, especially as the work may be obtained at
+the trifling cost of half a dollar, and in so beautiful a guise. We
+have looked into the biography but slightly, yet find it redolent with
+interest, and fully sustaining the high estimate placed upon the work
+by the _London Athenaeum_ and _Blackwood_. If the Harpers continue
+to fill their new library with sterling works like the present,
+it will present the most truly valuable series, yet the cheapest,
+ever attempted in any age or country.--_Evening Gazette._
+
+The only authentic biography of the great composer that is extant
+in the English language, and the events of his career are replete
+with useful admonitions and warning to the sons of genius, and they
+whisper to those whose present claims are not allowed that there
+is a future full of promise. In his life Mozart was neglected and
+impoverished, and he went to his grave with more than the bitterness
+of death crowding on his thoughts, but fame has taken possession of
+his memory, and among those who move as gods in musical art, few are
+equal to him, none are superior. This biography possesses an interest
+for all who feel interested in the great men of the earth. It is not
+only remarkably well written, but has a completeness about it we have
+never found before in any life of Mozart.--_Louisville Journal._
+
+There is such a charm in this narrative, that the lovers of good
+biography can not hear of it too soon. We can not conceive a more
+fascinating story of genius. To a style which would alone have sufficed
+to the production of an interesting and striking narrative, Mr. Holmes
+unites a depth of knowledge and musical appreciation very rare and
+remarkable. We thank him cordially for a most pleasing addition to
+our standard biographical literature.--_Examiner._
+
+The book is one of extraordinary interest, not merely to the lovers
+of music and appreciation of the great composer, but to the general
+reader, as a vivid picture of the life of a man of genius, who
+encountered all the difficulties, trials, and sufferings usually the
+lot of genius when it comes before a world incapable of appreciating
+it, and indifferent to its welfare. The domestic portions of the book
+are invaluable; his relations to his father and his wife are very
+beautiful. The work is admirably executed, as well in the scientific
+as anecdotical passages, and is worthy of the widest sale.--_News_
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+V.
+
+_The Practical Astronomer:_
+
+COMPRISING ILLUSTRATIONS OF LIGHT AND COLORS; PRACTICAL DESCRIPTIONS
+OF ALL KINDS OF TELESCOPES, &C., WITH DESCRIPTIVE ACCOUNTS OF THE EARL
+OF ROSSE'S LARGE TELESCOPES, AND OTHER TOPICS CONNECTED WITH ASTRONOMY.
+
+BY THOMAS DICK, LL.D.,
+
+AUTHOR OF THE "CHRISTIAN PHILOSOPHER," "CELESTIAL SCENERY," "THE
+SIDEREAL HEAVENS," &c.
+
+100 Engravings. 12mo, Muslin, extra gilt, 50 cents.
+
+
+The _name_ of the distinguished author of this work is a sufficient
+passport to public favor and a sure guarantee to its sterling
+value, and those who have read Dr. Dick's former works will need
+no recommendation of this book by us. He is not only an original
+and profound observer of nature, but truly a most excellent
+_Christian_ philosopher, whose powers of intellect and expanded
+views of the character of the great Architect of the universe are so
+eminently calculated to direct the mind not alone to the grandeur,
+the magnificence, and sublimity of the laws and principles of the
+material world, but to look through nature up to "Nature's God." It
+is truly a valuable work.--_Farmer and Mechanic._
+
+The merits of this work are of the highest order; Dick is one of the
+profoundest and purest of modern philosophers.--_Western Continent._
+
+Here is the ninth volume presented by this gifted author to the public;
+the aim of all of which has been to simplify sciences which before
+have been too often considered as every way _above_, and therefore
+unworthy of the attention of ordinary readers. It is specially
+addressed to private students and the higher schools, and comprises
+a large amount of new and valuable matter connected with astronomy,
+and pointing out ways in which the more humble student can in the
+best way improve the advantages placed in his way.--_Auburn Journal._
+
+Let not the inquisitive fear that the intricacies of science or
+the technicalities of language will obstruct the pleasure they
+will derive from the study of this book; for the clearness of the
+author's style, and the elucidation of the one hundred engravings,
+render it within the scope and comprehension of every intelligent
+student.--_Industrial Record._
+
+The copious use of engravings and of pictorial illustrations,
+together with the plain, popular explanations, render this book a
+truly _practical_ work. Dr. Dick is not only thoroughly scientific,
+but he knows well how to render his acquisitions available to the
+great body of common readers, by his accurate method and clear
+descriptions.--_Watchman._
+
+We have always been an admirer of the writings of this gentleman, and
+popularity keeps on his side wherever he is known. He is a profound
+thinker and a devout Christian. His works all tend to illustrate
+the simple as well as the sublimest principles of philosophy, and
+while they instruct, can not fail to enlighten. The present volume
+comprises illustrations of light and colors, practical descriptions of
+all kinds of telescopes, the use of the equatorial-transit, circular,
+and other astronomical instruments, and other topics connected with
+astronomy. It is illustrated by 100 engravings, and will be found
+a most valuable book for all classes, but particularly as a work of
+instruction for youth.--_Illustrated Magazine._
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+VI., VII.
+
+_The Life of Paul Jones._
+
+BY ALEXANDER SLIDELL MACKENZIE, U. S. N.
+
+2 vols. 12mo, Portrait, Muslin, extra gilt, $1 00.
+
+
+The history of the naval adventures and victories of Paul Jones forms
+one of the most romantic chapters in the record of great deeds, and
+can not fail to attract general and ardent attention, since it relates
+to the very beginning of the American navy.--_Commercial Advertiser._
+
+The various biographies of Paul Jones now extant have been carefully
+searched by Mr. Mackenzie; as also the log books of Jones's various
+cruizes and papers in possession of his heirs, with a view to procure
+a full and authentic collection of facts and incidents for the present
+work. Thus industriously compiled and stored, and that by an able
+hand, this edition must necessarily, as it does, possess considerable
+merit.--_Philadelphia Chronicle._
+
+Paul Jones will always be regarded as one of the most daring
+and gallant heroes who ever made the ocean the theater of their
+exploits. Such a name can never be forgotten by Americans, nor can
+the services which he rendered to the cause of American liberty,
+in its infant struggles, ever pass into oblivion. No better
+biographer for such a character could have been found than Captain
+Mackenzie. Familiar with all the details of seamanship, possessing the
+same bold patriotism which made the career of his hero so illustrious,
+and being an accomplished and vigorous writer, he has given us a most
+admirable biography.--_Courier and Enquirer._
+
+This is a capital American biography, of an American naval hero,
+scarcely less renowned and no less gallant and gifted with an heroic
+spirit than Nelson, the great British admiral. There is scarcely a more
+stirring life in the whole compass of literature than that of Jones;
+and the important part he played in giving force and almost life itself
+to the American navy, then in its earliest infancy, renders his history
+peculiarly interesting and attractive. No man certainly ever performed
+more gallant exploits, and few have rendered more important service to
+the cause of freedom than he. Many of his actions for bravery, skill,
+and the performance of almost incredible deeds, by apparently the most
+inadequate means, are scarcely rivalled by any thing in the records
+of naval history. His life should be familiar to American readers;
+and in the elegant, forcible, and graphic style of Commander Mackenzie
+it can not fail to be universally read.--_True Sun._
+
+We are glad to see the life of this celebrated man by one competent to
+write it. His adventures border so much on the marvelous that one is
+glad to be sure of reading only what is authentic, and that written in
+a style and language becoming the subject. There is a good moral lesson
+conveyed in this life of Paul Jones.--_Christian Advocate and Journal._
+
+The name and achievements of Paul Jones are indissolubly connected with
+American history; and his renowned deeds, which made him the terror
+of the coast of Britain, are among the most romantic in the annals of
+naval warfare, and impart to this work the highest interest. This is
+the most complete and authentic biography of Commodore Jones ever
+published, as all accessible materials have been collected, and
+are used by Commander Mackenzie with the ability and tact which he
+possesses as an accomplished scholar and an officer, accomplishments
+which peculiarly qualify him to write naval biography. A fine portrait
+of this true naval hero will be found in the first volume.--_Baltimore
+American._
+
+We have read it with some care, and compared it with other biographies,
+and think it greatly superior to any yet published. It contains a
+full narrative of all the important events in Jones's eventful career,
+and yet is less voluminous than previous works.--_Highland Courier._
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+VIII.
+
+The Ascent of Mount Ararat,
+
+(ACHIEVED FOR THE FIRST TIME).
+
+BY DR. FRIEDRICH PARROT.
+
+TRANSLATED BY W. D. COOLEY.
+
+12mo, Map and Wood-cuts, Muslin, extra gilt, 50 cents.
+
+
+This is a most interesting book, both in its description of the
+country and inhabitants of Central Asia, and in its connection with
+the remarkable event of our world--_the Flood_. Mount Ararat, which
+was ascended by M. Parrot, must ever possess to the Biblical reader
+most intense interest, as the resting place of the ark after the
+universal deluge.--_Pittsburgh Chronicle._
+
+A work destined, from the intrinsic interest of the subject, and
+the fullness of detail which is spread before the reader, to a
+very wide circulation. The idea of ascending Mount Ararat seems to
+have risen with the traveler to a passion; previous travelers had
+never accomplished it; the natives of the region looked upon it as
+impossible; their superstition regarded the inaccessible summit as
+the mysterious resting place of the ark to this day. How Dr. Parrot
+approached the region, what adventures he met with by the way, what
+manners and customs he witnessed, how he twice essayed to reach the
+sacred peak and turned back, and how on a third attempt he accomplished
+the feat through difficulties the recital of which has led scientific
+men still to doubt if the ascent were really performed--may all be
+read in this compact volume, illustrated by maps and engravings,
+with every aid to the reader's comprehension.--_News._
+
+Hardly a subject could have been selected more stirring in its
+character than "A Journey to Ararat." Held in equal veneration by Jew,
+Christian, and Mohammedan, and regarded with superstitious feelings
+even by the pagan, that mountain has always enjoyed a degree of
+celebrity denied to any other. Sinai, and Horeb, and Tabor may have
+excited holier musings; but Ararat "the mysterious"--Ararat, which
+human foot had not trod after the restorer of our race, and which,
+in the popular opinion, no human foot would be permitted to tread till
+the consummation of all things--Ararat the holy, which winged cherubim
+protected against the sacrilegious approach of mortals, and which
+patriarchs only were permitted to revisit, appeared in many respects an
+object of curiosity as unique as it was exciting.--_London Athenaeum._
+
+It is a highly entertaining work, embodying much historical,
+geographical, and scientific information, and conveying a knowledge of
+the character, habits, and manners of the people among whom the author
+traveled. The ascent of Mount Ararat is so very difficult that many
+persons have doubted whether the feat was accomplished by Dr. Parrot,
+but his acknowledged integrity ought to place his claims in this
+respect above suspicion. The lovers of bold adventure will find in
+this volume much to gratify their peculiar taste, and the general
+reader can hardly fail to be pleased with it.--_New York Tribune._
+
+This volume has claims upon the public, as a scientific and truly
+valuable work, which have been possessed by few others. It is, in fact,
+the condensed narrative of an exploring expedition sent out by the
+Russian government into the region about Mount Ararat, a region which
+possesses more interest for scientific men, perhaps, than any other
+in the world which has been so little explored.--_New York Courier._
+
+It reads more like the travels of Von Humboldt than any book we have
+lately read. The writer is a man of science and observation, and the
+book we recommend to the public.--_Lowell Courier._
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+IX.
+
+Remarkable Criminal Trials.
+
+TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN OF FEUERBACH,
+
+BY LADY DUFF GORDON.
+
+12mo, Muslin, extra gilt, 50 cents.
+
+
+A book of thrilling interest; one that can not fail to be read with
+avidity.--_New York Courier._
+
+This work abounds with singular cases of criminal jurisprudence in
+Bavaria, of the most astounding and thrilling interest, the details of
+which are of remarkable character, and differ essentially from those
+hitherto familiar to the public in England or this country. They
+are fully equal, in their absorbing interest, to any thing in the
+famous "Causes Celebres" of France; and, perhaps, for their unique
+and striking features, are unexcelled by any delineations of crime
+elsewhere on record.--_True Sun._
+
+Public attention was first drawn to this work by an able and
+interesting article in the Edinburgh Review. They are all narratives
+of marvelous interest--more strange and wonderful, many of them,
+than any work of fiction, and giving to the reader a clear view
+of the nature and peculiarities of the criminal jurisprudence of
+Germany.--_N. Y. Commercial Advertiser._
+
+Its illustration of the many curious customs of German criminal
+jurisprudence will be sufficiently startling to the English reader;
+but, apart from this, the extraordinary subtle discrimination thrown
+into the narrative of each particular crime gives to the volume, as a
+mere story book, the intellectual interest, the passion, and all the
+rich and various coloring of a philosophical romance. The translation
+is excellent, and a judicious compression of the original has added
+much to the effect.--_London Examiner._
+
+The narratives abound with thrilling interest, setting forth the
+constant recurrence of crime, detection, and punishment, in which
+the attention of the reader is roused by the novelty of the scene,
+and rewarded by the light thrown upon the darkest portion of human
+nature.--_New Bedford Mercury._
+
+This work has been so highly extolled by the Edinburgh Foreign
+Quarterly and other reviews, that not much need be said of its
+character and claims to public notice. It presents some of the
+most remarkable stories of horrible crimes and their exposure
+we have ever met, and gives a very clear and vivid conception of
+the peculiarities of German criminal jurisprudence. It is a book
+which will be universally read, as one of the most thrilling and
+absorbing interest. The translator has given in the preface a very
+good account of the criminal law of Germany, and has selected only
+those portions of the original work which will have the greatest
+value and interest.--_Mirror._
+
+This book is of an entirely different character from works of a similar
+title that have hitherto appeared. It contains an account of fourteen
+trials for murder in Germany, and the object of it is to show the
+peculiar mode of trial instituted by the Bavarian code.--_Evening
+Gazette._
+
+The records of crime are not usually a profitable kind of reading. The
+contagion of the example is generally greater than the warning of
+the fate of the criminal; and many a villain has been made by the
+very means taken to keep him from crime. But as much depends on the
+manner of the narrative, and as it is possible to extract some of the
+gravest lessons of virtue and wisdom from the misdeeds of others, it
+gives us pleasure to state that the present work is unexceptionable in
+this respect, while the cases possess extraordinary interest, and are
+replete with instruction. They afford much insight of human motives,
+and teach impressive lessons of the retributive justice of Providence,
+and the misery and evil of sin.--_Biblical Repository_.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+X., XI.
+
+Journal of Researches
+
+INTO THE NATURAL HISTORY AND GEOLOGY OF THE COUNTRIES VISITED DURING
+THE VOYAGE OF H. M. S. BEAGLE ROUND THE WORLD.
+
+BY CHARLES DARWIN, M.A., F.R.S.
+
+2 vols. 12mo, Muslin, extra gilt, $1 00.
+
+
+This is another most valuable contribution to the cause of _popular
+education_, issued in Harper's New Miscellany; a series that bids fair
+to surpass even their Family Library in the sterling excellence and
+popularity of the works which it renders accessible to all classes
+of the community. The work contains, in a condensed and popularized
+form, the results of the British Exploring Expedition, which Mr. Darwin
+accompanied at the special instance of the lords of the Admiralty. The
+voyage consumed several years, and was performed at a very heavy
+expense on the part of the British government. Yet here we have its
+most important results, divested of all scientific technicalities,
+and presented in a form at once attractive and accurate. The work is
+entitled to secure a very wide circulation. It contains an immense
+amount of information concerning the natural history of the whole
+world, and is superior, in point of interest and value, to any similar
+work ever published.--_New York True Sun._
+
+A work very neatly issued, and has the interest of a leading
+subject well developed, the unfailing secret of producing a book of
+character. In the present state of the world, when new countries are
+opening every day to the great conqueror, Commerce, such publications
+are of unusual importance. Perhaps no information, just now, can be
+of more consequence to us than that which puts us in possession of
+the movements of English discovery.--_News._
+
+This is a most valuable and a most interesting work; one which combines
+true scientific worth with the graces of style suited to render it
+popular, better than almost any similar work which has recently come
+under our notice. The voyage of the Beagle was, in truth, a scientific
+exploring expedition; and Mr. Darwin accompanied it at the special
+request of the lords of the Admiralty. Its results have been published
+in several very elaborate, extensive, and costly volumes in England;
+but as these were entirely beyond the reach of the great mass of the
+reading public, Mr. Darwin prepared these volumes, in which all the
+important results of the expedition are fully, clearly, and distinctly
+presented, interwoven with a most entertaining narrative of personal
+incident and adventure.--_N. Y. Courier._
+
+This is a work of remarkable interest and value. The author,
+in circumnavigating the world, under commission of the British
+government, for scientific and exploring purposes, visited nearly
+every country on the globe, and preserved in this brief, simple, but
+beautiful narrative all the singular facts of a scientific, social,
+or geographical nature which are of general interest. The amount of
+information condensed in these volumes is incredible; and the skill
+with which the useful and interesting is selected from that which
+is unimportant or well known is admirable. We admire the style,
+the straightforward sincerity of the writer, the apparent candor,
+and the erudite research which he uniformly exhibits. Without one
+quarter of the bulk or pretension of our famous exploring expedition,
+the present work is hardly inferior to it in value and interest. This
+series is gaining a fine character, of which we hope the publishers
+will be jealous.--_New York Evangelist._
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+HARPER'S FAMILY LIBRARY.
+
+_Books that you may hold readily in your hand are the most useful,
+after all._--Dr. Johnson.
+
+
+The above-named series, extending to 173 volumes, comprises a rich and
+varied collection of works in the several departments of literature,
+forming a most valuable circle of useful, instructive, and entertaining
+knowledge, adapted for popular use. The utmost care has been taken,
+not only to exclude whatever can have an injurious influence on the
+mind, but to embrace every thing calculated to strengthen the best
+and most salutary impressions.
+
+No family ought to be without this library, as it furnishes the
+readiest resources for that education which ought to accompany
+or succeed that of the boarding-school or the academy, and is
+infinitely more conducive than either to the cultivation of the
+intellect.--_Monthly Review._
+
+
+CONTENTS OF THE SERIES.
+
+
+1, 2, 3.--MILMAN'S HISTORY OF THE JEWS. $1 20.
+
+4, 5.--HISTORY OF NAPOLEON BONAPARTE.   90 cents.
+
+6.--SOUTHEY'S LIFE OF LORD NELSON.   45 cents.
+
+7.--LIFE OF ALEXANDER THE GREAT.   45 cents.
+
+8, 74.--NATURAL HISTORY OF INSECTS.   90 cents.
+
+9.--GALT'S LIFE OF LORD BYRON.   Portrait, 40 cents.
+
+10.--BUSH'S LIFE OF MOHAMMED.   Engravings, 45 cents.
+
+11.--SCOTT'S LETTERS ON DEMONOLOGY.   40 cents.
+
+12, 13.--GLEIG'S HISTORY OF THE BIBLE.   80 cents.
+
+14.--DISCOVERY IN THE POLAR REGIONS.   45 cents.
+
+15.--CROLY'S LIFE OF GEORGE IV.   45 cents.
+
+16.--DISCOVERY AND ADVENTURE IN AFRICA. 45 cts.
+
+17, 18, 19, 66, 67.--CUNNINGHAM'S LIVES OF EMINENT PAINTERS AND
+SCULPTORS.   Portraits, $2 10.
+
+20.--JAMES'S CHIVALRY AND THE CRUSADES.   45 cts.
+
+21, 22.--LIFE OF MARY QUEEN OF SCOTS.   85 cents.
+
+23.--ANCIENT AND MODERN EGYPT.   45 cents.
+
+24.--FLETCHER'S HISTORY OF POLAND. 45 cents.
+
+25.--SMITH'S   FESTIVALS,   GAMES,   AND  AMUSEMENTS, ANCIENT AND
+MODERN.   45 cents.
+
+26.--BREWSTER'S LIFE OF SIR ISAAC NEWTON. 45 cts.
+
+27.--RUSSELL'S   PALESTINE.   45 cents.
+
+28.--MEMES'S  MEMOIRS OF JOSEPHINE.   45 cents.
+
+29.--COURT AND  CAMP OF BONAPARTE.   45 cents.
+
+30.--LIVES AND VOYAGES OF DRAKE, CAVENDISH, AND DAMPIER, Account of
+the Bucaniers, &c.   45 cents.
+
+31.--BARROW'S DESCRIPTION OF PITCAIRN'S ISLAND, &c.   45 cents.
+
+32, 72, 84.--SACRED HISTORY OF THE WORLD.   $1 35.
+
+33, 34.--JAMESON'S FEMALE SOVEREIGNS.   80 cents.
+
+35, 36.--LANDERS' TRAVELS IN AFRICA.   90 cents.
+
+37.--ESSAY ON THE INTELLECTUAL POWERS.   45 cts.
+
+38, 39, 40.--LIVES OF CELEBRATED TRAVELLERS. $1 25.
+
+41, 42.--LIFE OF FREDERIC THE GREAT.   90 cents.
+
+43, 44.--SKETCHES FROM VENETIAN HISTORY.   90 cts.
+
+45, 46.--THATCHER'S INDIAN BIOGRAPHY.   90 cents.
+
+47, 48, 49.--MURRAY'S BRITISH INDIA.   $1 35.
+
+50.--BREWSTER'S NATURAL MAGIC.   45 cents.
+
+51, 52.--TAYLOR'S HISTORY OF IRELAND.   90 cents.
+
+53.--DISCOVERY IN NORTH AMERICA.   45 cents.
+
+54.--HUMBOLDT'S TRAVELS.   45 cents.
+
+55, 56.--EULER'S NATURAL PHILOSOPHY.   90 cents.
+
+57.--POPULAR GUIDE TO THE OBSERVATION OF NATURE.   45 cents.
+
+58.--ABERCROMBIE'S MORAL FEELINGS.   40 cents.
+
+59.--DICK ON IMPROVEMENT OF SOCIETY.   45 cents.
+
+60.--JAMES'S HISTORY OF CHARLEMAGNE.   45 cents.
+
+61.--RUSSELL'S NUBIA AND ABYSSINIA.   45 cents.
+
+62, 63.--RUSSELL'S OLIVER CROMWELL.   90 cents.
+
+64.--MONTGOMERY'S LECTURES ON POETRY.   45 cts.
+
+65.--BARROW'S LIFE OF PETER THE GREAT.   45 cents.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+FOR FAMILY READING.
+
+
+X. RECOLLECTIONS OF A HOUSEKEEPER.
+
+BY MRS. C. GILMAN.--18mo, muslin gilt, 45 cents.
+
+
+XI. THE MAYFLOWER; OR, SKETCHES OF SCENES AND INCIDENTS AMONG THE
+DESCENDANTS OF THE PILGRIMS.
+
+BY MRS. HARRIET B. STOWE.--18mo, muslin gilt, 45 cents.
+
+A series of beautiful and deeply interesting tales, remarkable for
+a rigorous yet disciplined imagination, a lively and pure style,
+and their high moral tone. They are books which will interest mature
+readers as well as children and youth. As an author she will take
+her place among that fine and elevated class to which Miss Sedgwick
+and Mrs. Child belong; authors whose writings unite with the graces
+of composition a deep sympathy with all that is human, and a noble
+philanthropy.--_Biblical Repository._
+
+
+XII. CONQUEST AND SELF-CONQUEST; OR, WHICH MAKES THE HERO?
+
+18mo, muslin gilt, 37 1/2 cents.
+
+An admirable volume; admirable in style, in sentiment, and in
+tendency.--_Courier and Enquirer._
+
+
+XIII.
+
+THE COUSINS. A TALE OF EARLY LIFE.
+
+By the Author of "Conquest and Self-Conquest."--18mo, 37 1/2 cents.
+
+We have read this volume with unmingled satisfaction. It is replete
+with instruction, not only for the young, but for all who are concerned
+to know and judge their motives of life. We thank the author for
+her nice and interesting discriminations between the motives of
+conduct. Indeed, we do not know of any works of this description from
+the American press which are entitled to a more just popularity than
+those which have proceeded from the pen of this writer. They place
+her beside the Edgeworths, and the Barbaulds, and the Opies, who
+have so long delighted and instructed our children and us.--_New-York
+Observer._
+
+
+XIV. PRAISE AND PRINCIPLE; OR, FOR WHAT SHALL I LIVE?
+
+By the Author of "Conquest and Self-Conquest."--18mo, 37 1/2 cents.
+
+A book most worthy to be put into the hands of youth engaged in their
+educational course, and can not but inspire the love of truth and
+goodness for their own sakes.--_Biblical Repository._
+
+This little work is designed to inculcate upon the minds of youth the
+importance of a steadfast adherence to _principle_ in the concerns of
+life; and among "children of a larger growth" its perusal may afford
+both pleasure and improvement.--_Bedford Mercury._
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+107, 108.--PARRY'S THREE VOYAGES.   90 cents.
+
+109, 110.--LIFE OF DR. JOHNSON.   90 cents.
+
+111.--BRYANT'S AMERICAN POETS.   45 cents.
+
+112, 113.--HALLECK'S BRITISH POETS.   90 cents.
+
+114, 115, 116, 117, 118.--KEIGHTLEY'S HISTORY OF ENGLAND. $2 25.
+
+119, 120.--HALE'S UNITED STATES.   90 cents.
+
+121, 122.--IRVING'S LIFE OF GOLDSMITH.   90 cents.
+
+123, 124.--DISTINGUISHED MEN OF MODERN TIMES. Portraits, 90 cents.
+
+125.--LIFE OF DE WITT CLINTON.   45 cents.
+
+126, 127.--LIFE OF COMMODORE OLIVER H. PERRY. Portrait, 90 cents.
+
+128.--LIFE AND TRAVELS OF BRUCE. 45 cents.
+
+129.--LIVES OF JAY AND HAMILTON. 45 cents.
+
+130.--BREWSTER'S LIVES OF GALILEO, TYCHO BRAHE, AND KEPLER.   45 cents.
+
+131.--HISTORY OF ICELAND, GREENLAND, AND THE FAROE ISLANDS.   45 cents.
+
+132.--MANNERS AND  CUSTOMS OF THE JAPANESE IN THE NINETEENTH CENTURY.
+45 cents.
+
+133.--DWIGHT'S HISTORY OF CONNECTICUT. 45 cents.
+
+134, 135.--RUINS OF ANCIENT CITIES.   90 cents.
+
+136, 137.--HISTORY OF DENMARK.   90 cents.
+
+138.--CAMP ON DEMOCRACY.   45 cents.
+
+139.--LANMAN'S MICHIGAN.   45 cents.
+
+140.--FENELON'S ANCIENT PHILOSOPHERS. 45 cents.
+
+141, 142.--COUNT SEGUR'S EXPEDITION TO  RUSSIA. Map, 90 cents.
+
+143, 144.--HISTORY OF PHILOSOPHY.   90 cents.
+
+145.--BUCKE'S BEAUTIES OF NATURE.   45 cents.
+
+146.--LIEBER'S ESSAYS ON PROPERTY.   45 cents.
+
+147.--WHITE'S HISTORY OF SELBORNE.   45 cents.
+
+148.--WRANGELL'S EXPEDITION TO SIBERIA.   45 cts.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+NOTES
+
+[1] Gunong, a mountain, part of a chain.
+
+[2] Pronounced short, for (properly) Bandhara; a treasurer, chief
+steward.
+
+[3] The old name for the town of Sarawak.
+
+[4] Aloes wood, _Lignum aloes_.
+
+[5] The Malay name for the betel, the aromatic leaves of which are
+chewed along with the pinang or areca nut, a little pure lime, and
+various spices.
+
+[6] The banks of the Boyur and Quop are Nepa palm.
+
+[7] fines--J.H.
+
+[8] Western as regards Polynesia.
+
+[9] Also, vol. iv. of the _Bengal Asiatic Researches_.
+
+[10] Canto xv., stanza 55, 56.
+
+[11] The following is an extract from an equally sapient proposition,
+published in the Chinese state-papers on the 14th January, 1840; it is
+headed, Memorial of Toang Wangyen to the emperor, recommending plans
+for the extermination of barbarians: "Your minister's opinion is this:
+that we, being upon shore and they in their ships, it is not at all
+requisite to order our naval forces to proceed out a great distance
+to contend with them in battle. When the commercial intercourse
+of the said barbarians shall have been entirely put an end to, and
+their supplies grow scanty, it will be impossible for them to remain
+a long time anchored in the outer seas, and they will necessarily,
+as formerly, enter the inner waters in order to ramble and spy about
+them. We can then, by means of our naval vessels, tempt them and
+cause them to enter far in; and a previous arrangement having been
+made, we can summon the people who live along the coasts, such as are
+expert and able swimmers, and those who possess bravery and strength,
+to the amount of several hundreds of men: we can then cause them,
+during the night, to divide themselves into companies, and silently
+proceeding through the water, straightway board the foreign ships;
+and overcoming the crews in their unprepared state, make an entire
+massacre of the whole of them."
+
+[12] I need hardly remark on the singular courage and disregard
+of personal safety and life itself evinced by my friend on this
+occasion. At issue with the rajah on points of great temptation to him,
+beset by intrigues, and surrounded by a fierce and lawless people,
+Mr. Brooke did not hesitate to dispatch his vessels and protectors,
+the one on a mission of pure humanity, and the other in calm pursuance
+of the objects he had proposed to himself to accomplish; and with
+"three companions," place himself at the mercy of such circumstances,
+regardless of the danger, and relying on the overruling Providence
+in which he trusted, to bring him safely through all his difficulties
+and perils.--H. K.
+
+[13] Now called Samarang.
+
+[14] This I found on inquiry, to be strictly true--a most amiable
+trait!--B.
+
+[15] I am happy to say that the Lords of the Admiralty have since been
+pleased to promote Lieut. Wilmot Horton and Mr. W. L. Partridge, mate,
+who commanded the pinnace, for their gallantry on this occasion.--H. K.
+
+[16] Piratical habits are so interwoven with the character of these
+Sarebus people, that the capture at sea of a few prahus would have but
+small effect in curing the evil; while a harassing duty is encountered,
+the result is only to drive the pirates from one cruising-ground to
+another; but, on the contrary, a system which joins conciliation with
+severity, aiming at the correction of the native character as well
+as the suppression of piracy, and carrying punishment to the doors
+of the offenders, is the only one which can effectually eradicate an
+evil almost as disgraceful to those who permit it as to the native
+states engaged in it.
+
+[17] It had never been known so quiet as during the days we were up
+their river.
+
+[18] I have lately heard, with much regret, of the death of this
+valuable officer.
+
+[19] Leonard Gibbard made his first trip to sea under my charge in
+1834, when I commanded the Childers in the Mediterranean, and at that
+early age gave promise of what he afterward proved himself to be--a
+gallant officer and thorough seaman. Poor fellow! he was always a
+general favorite wherever he went--H. K.
+
+[20] _Anglice_, run-a-muck.
+
+[21] See Prichard's Researches, 1826, which, meager as they must have
+been from the want of data, tell us in two or three pages nearly all
+we know on the subject. That able investigator states that the Dyaks
+of Borneo resemble the Taraj of Celebes.
+
+[22] With regard to the Arafuras, or Haraforas, it is stated that
+they are termed in some districts Idaan, in others Murut, and in
+others Dayaks. See Raffles' Java. And Leyden assures us that all
+these varieties were originally called Idaan.
+
+[23] A singular contrast to preceding accounts, which represent the
+north and northeastern population not only as pirates, called Tiran
+or Zedong, but even as cannibals. Near them there appear to be the
+piratical nests of Magindano, Sooloo, &c.
+
+[24] There are several rivers, Meri, Bentulu, &c., the inhabitants
+of which, says Mr. Brooke, I class under the general term Millanow,
+as their dialects show a very close connection, and their habits are
+the same. Evidently from language they are civilized tribes of Kayans.
+
+[25] Leyden concluded that the language was allied to the Batta and
+Tagala, and the whole derived from and varieties of the primitive
+tongue of the Philippine Islands.
+
+[26] Probably a Dyak phrase for levying exactions on the oppressed
+people. It is not Malay.
+
+[27] The utter destruction of a village or town is nothing to the
+infliction of cutting down the fruit-trees. The former can be rebuilt,
+with its rude and ready materials, in a few weeks; but the latter,
+from which the principal subsistence of the natives is gathered,
+cannot be suddenly restored, and thus they are reduced to starvation.
+
+[28] The grounds for this opinion are an estimate personally made
+among the tribes, compared with the estimate kept by the local
+officers before the disturbance arose; and the result is, that only
+two out of twenty tribes have not suffered, while some tribes have
+been reduced, from 330 families to 50; about ten tribes have lost
+more than half their number; one tribe of 100 families has lost all
+its women and children made slaves; and one tribe, more wretched,
+has been reduced from 120 families to 2, that is, 16 persons;
+while two tribes have entirely disappeared. The list of the tribes
+and their numbers formerly and now are as follows:--Suntah, 330--50;
+Sanpro, 100--69; Sigo, 80--28; Sabungo, 60--33; Brang, 50--22; Sinnar,
+80--34; Stang, 80--30; Samban, 60--34; Tubbia, 80--30; Goon, 40--25;
+Bang, 40--12; Kuj-juss, 35--0; Lundu, 80--2; Sow, 200--100; Sarambo,
+100--60; Bombak, 35--35; Paninjow, 80--40; Singe, 220--220; Pons,
+20--0; Sibaduh, 25--25. Total, formerly, 1795--now, 849 families;
+and reckoning eight persons to each family, the amount of population
+will be, formerly, 14,360--now, 6792: giving a decrease of population
+in ten years of 846 families, or 7568 persons!
+
+[29] Sir Edward Belcher has since surveyed Labuan in her majesty's
+ship Samarang, and finding an excellent harbor, named it Victoria
+Bay.--H. K.
+
+[30] Vide Mr. Wise's Plan (p. 362,3) for accelerating the communication
+between Great Britain and China, viz. the conveyance of the mails from
+Hong Kong to Suez (_via_ Ceylon) direct. Submitted to her majesty's
+Government, 14th September, 1843; adopted 20th June, 1845.
+
+[31] The Borneo coal-mines would also serve to keep the Hong Kong,
+Singapore, and Pinang stations supplied with fuel for Steam Vessels
+carrying the Mails between Hong Hong and Suez direct.
+
+[32] Receiving at Ceylon the Outward Overland Mail from England,
+and returning therewith to China.
+
+[33] Date of submitting the above proposed route and estimate to her
+majesty's Government for consideration.
+
+[34] The MS. having been under water in the wreck of the Great
+Liverpool steamer, this name and some others are illegible.
+
+[35] A sort of gong.
+
+[36] Tumbawong is a place they have deserted, or been forced to quit.
+
+[37] A head-house.
+
+[38] Gadong is a small Malay village on the Sadong, considerably
+nearer the sea than the Bandar's village.
+
+[39] This occurred during Seriff Sahib's time; the Dyaks were
+frightfully oppressed.
+
+[40] The goods brought down by Mr. Williamson were on a public trial
+confiscated, and the parties concerned fined. These Dyaks from their
+distance and timidity, were afraid to complain, but will in future
+not be imposed upon. It would be a hopeless task trying to prevent
+the Malays playing their tricks on the Dyaks; and the only chance
+of freeing the Dyaks from these exactions is by inspiring them with
+confidence. In Sarawak this has been done, and may easily be extended;
+for the Dyak, though greatly depressed by a course of persecution,
+I have always found ready to state his complaints whenever he has a
+hope of redress. The Orong Kaya Pa Jampat of Mang-garut was freed of
+the debt claimed by the Samarahan Pangara; and the other complaints
+referred to my decision have been either rectified, or steps taken
+to do justice, and to render the Dyak tribes of Sadong happy and
+easy.--_Note by Mr. Brooke._
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Expedition to Borneo of H.M.S. Dido, by
+Henry Keppel and James Brooke
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK EXPEDITION TO BORNEO ***
+
+***** This file should be named 22903.txt or 22903.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/2/2/9/0/22903/
+
+Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This book was
+produced from scanned images of public domain material
+from the Google Print project.)
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.